ENGINE
SECTION
ACC
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
A
ACC
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 3
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM .............. 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Exploded View .......................................................... 3
Removal and Installation .......................................... 3
Inspection ................................................................. 4
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ACC-1
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000007495933
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Revision: 2011 September
ACC-2
2012 QUEST
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495934
ACC
C
D
E
F
G
JPBIA5304GB
H
1.
Accelerator pedal assembly
2.
Accelerator pedal bracket
A.
Locating hole
B.
Locating pin
I
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495935
J
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Disconnect accelerator pedal position sensor harness connector.
Remove accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION:
• Never disengage accelerator pedal assembly and bracket.
• Never disassemble accelerator lever. Never remove accelerator pedal position sensor from
accelerator lever.
• Avoid impact from dropping etc. during handling.
• Be careful to keep accelerator lever away from water.
K
L
M
INSTALLATION
Read the following instructions carefully, and install accelerator pedal assembly in the reverse order of
removal.
• Insert pawl (A) of bracket into locating hole (B) of accelerator pedal
assembly to tighten the mounting bolts.
N
O
P
JSBIA1415ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
ACC-3
2012 QUEST
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495936
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the whole operation range when it is fully depressed and
released.
• Check accelerator pedal securely returns to the fully released position.
• For the electrical inspection of accelerator pedal position sensor, refer to EC-401, "Component Inspection".
- CAUTION:
When harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected, perform “Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning”. Refer to EC-119, "Description".
Revision: 2011 September
ACC-4
2012 QUEST
BODY INTERIOR
SECTION
ADP
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 4
CONSULT Function .................................................21
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 24
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 4
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ................. 24
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 5
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT ...................... 25
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 5
Component Parts Location ........................................ 5
Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit .................... 8
Seat Memory Switch ................................................. 8
Driver Seat Control Unit ............................................ 8
SYSTEM .............................................................. 9
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM ............. 9
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM :
System Description ................................................... 9
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM :
Schematic ............................................................... 11
Reference Value ......................................................25
Fail-safe ...................................................................29
DTC Index ...............................................................30
Reference Value ......................................................31
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM ... 33
Revision: 2011 September
ADP
K
Wiring Diagram ........................................................33
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 35
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL ................... 38
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT) ........................................................21
I
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 33
MEMORY FUNCTION ............................................... 14
MEMORY FUNCTION : System Description .......... 15
INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION .......... 19
INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION :
System Description ................................................. 19
Fail-safe .................................................................. 20
H
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT ........................................................ 31
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 35
ENTRY ASSIST FUNCTION ..................................... 18
ENTRY ASSIST FUNCTION : System Description
.... 18
G
List of ECU Reference .............................................24
MANUAL FUNCTION ................................................ 13
MANUAL FUNCTION : System Description ............ 14
EXIT ASSIST FUNCTION .......................................... 16
EXIT ASSIST FUNCTION : System Description .... 17
F
Work Flow ................................................................35
L
M
Description ...............................................................38
Work Procedure .......................................................38
N
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT ...................... 39
O
Description ...............................................................39
Work Procedure .......................................................39
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION ................................ 40
Description ...............................................................40
Work Procedure .......................................................40
MEMORY STORING ......................................... 41
Description ...............................................................41
Work Procedure .......................................................41
ADP-1
2012 QUEST
P
INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK STORING ... 42
LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) ................................ 58
Description .............................................................. 42
Work Procedure ...................................................... 42
Component Function Check .................................. 58
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 58
Component Inspection ............................................ 59
SYSTEM SETTING ............................................ 43
Description .............................................................. 43
Work Procedure ...................................................... 43
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 44
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 44
Description .............................................................. 44
DTC Logic ............................................................... 44
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 44
Special Repair Requirement ................................... 44
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ......................... 45
DTC Logic ............................................................... 45
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 45
B2112 SLIDING MOTOR ................................... 46
DTC Logic ............................................................... 46
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 46
B2113 RECLINING MOTOR .............................. 47
SEAT MEMORY SWITCH ................................. 60
Component Function Check .................................. 60
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 60
Component Inspection ............................................ 61
DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL
SWITCH ............................................................. 62
MIRROR SWITCH ..................................................... 62
MIRROR SWITCH : Component Function Check ... 62
MIRROR SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 62
MIRROR SWITCH : Component Inspection ........... 63
CHANGEOVER SWITCH .......................................... 63
CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Component Function
Check ...................................................................... 64
CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure ... 64
CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Component Inspection .......................................................................... 65
DTC Logic ............................................................... 47
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 47
POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT ... 66
B2128 UART COMMUNICATION LINE ............ 48
SLIDING SENSOR ............................................ 67
Description .............................................................. 48
DTC Logic ............................................................... 48
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 48
Component Function Check .................................. 67
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 67
B2130 EEPROM ................................................ 49
DTC Logic ............................................................... 49
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 49
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 50
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 66
RECLINING SENSOR ....................................... 69
Component Function Check .................................. 69
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 69
LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) ............................. 71
Component Function Check .................................. 71
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 71
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT .............................. 50
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT :
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 50
LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) ............................... 73
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL
UNIT .......................................................................... 50
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL
UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure .................................. 50
MIRROR SENSOR ............................................ 75
SLIDING SWITCH .............................................. 52
Component Function Check ................................. 52
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 52
Component Inspection ............................................ 53
RECLINING SWITCH ........................................ 54
Component Function Check ................................. 54
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 54
Component Inspection ............................................ 55
LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) .............................. 56
Component Function Check ................................. 56
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 56
Component Inspection ............................................ 57
Revision: 2011 September
Component Function Check .................................. 73
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 73
DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 75
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ........ 75
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 75
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 76
PASSENGER SIDE :
Component Function Check .................................. 76
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 77
SLIDING MOTOR .............................................. 79
Component Function Check .................................. 79
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 79
RECLINING MOTOR ......................................... 81
Component Function Check .................................. 81
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 81
ADP-2
2012 QUEST
LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) ................................83
Component Function Check .................................. 83
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 83
LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) ..................................85
Component Function Check .................................. 85
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 85
DOOR MIRROR MOTOR ...................................87
Component Function Check .................................... 87
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 87
Component Inspection ............................................ 88
SEAT MEMORY INDICATOR ............................90
Component Function Check .................................. 90
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 90
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 92
MANUAL FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE....92
ALL COMPONENT .................................................... 92
ALL COMPONENT : Diagnosis Procedure ............. 92
POWER SEAT ........................................................... 92
POWER SEAT : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 92
SEAT SLIDING .......................................................... 92
SEAT SLIDING : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 92
SEAT RECLINING ..................................................... 93
SEAT RECLINING : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 93
SEAT SLIDING ..........................................................96
SEAT SLIDING : Diagnosis Procedure ...................96
SEAT RECLINING .....................................................97
SEAT RECLINING : Diagnosis Procedure ..............97
A
B
SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) ...........................................97
SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure ....97
SEAT LIFTING (REAR) .............................................97
SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure .......97
C
DOOR MIRROR .........................................................98
DOOR MIRROR : Diagnosis Procedure ..................98
D
ENTRY/EXIT ASSIST FUNCTION DOES NOT
OPERATE ......................................................... 99
E
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................99
INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION
DOES NOT OPERATE .................................... 100
F
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 100
MEMORY INDICATE DOES NOT OPERATE . 101
G
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 101
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............. 102
Description ............................................................. 102
H
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 103
I
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT .................... 103
Removal and Installation ....................................... 103
SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) ........................................... 93
SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure .... 93
SEAT LIFTING (REAR) ............................................. 94
SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure ...... 94
DOOR MIRROR ......................................................... 94
DOOR MIRROR : Diagnosis Procedure ................. 95
MEMORY FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE....96
ADP
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT ...................................................... 104
Removal and Installation ....................................... 104
SEAT MEMORY SWITCH ............................... 105
K
Removal and Installation ....................................... 105
POWER SEAT SWITCH ................................. 106
L
Removal and Installation ....................................... 106
ALL COMPONENT .................................................... 96
ALL COMPONENT : Diagnosis Procedure ............. 96
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-3
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000007492468
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-4
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007492469
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
JMJIA6177GB
A.
View with instrument lower panel RH B.
removed
No.
1.
View with seat cushion pad and seat
back pad removed
Component parts
Backside of seat cushion
Description
Door mirror motor
Mirror sensor
• Mirror sensor is installed to door mirror.
• The resistance of 2 sensors (horizontal and vertical) is changed
when door mirror is operated.
• Automatic drive positioner control unit calculates door mirror position according to the change of the voltage of 2 sensor input
terminals.
Refer to MIR-5, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
ADP-5
M
N
It makes mirror face operate from side to side and up and down
with the electric power that automatic drive positioner control unit
supplies.
Refer to MIR-5, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Door mirror (driver side/
passenger side)
Revision: 2011 September
C.
2012 QUEST
O
P
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.
Component parts
Description
2.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Transmit the vehicle speed signal to driver seat control unit via
CAN communication.
Refer to BRC-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
3.
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Refer to ADP-8, "Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit".
CVT sift selector (Detention switch)
• Detention switch is installed on CVT shift selector. It is turned
OFF when CVT shift selector is in P position.
• Driver seat control unit judges that CVT shift selector is in P position if continuity does not exist in this circuit.
Refer to TM-10, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
TCM
The following signals are transmitted to driver seat control unit via
CAN communication.
• Shift position signal (P range)
• Identification of transmission: CVT
Refer to TM-10, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Combination meter
Transmit the vehicle speed signal to driver seat control unit via
CAN communication.
Refer to MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location"
for detailed installation location.
BCM
Recognizes the following status and transmits it to driver seat control unit via CAN communication.
• Handle position: LHD
• Driver door: OPEN/CLOSE
• Ignition switch position: ACC/ON
• Door lock: UNLOCK (with Intelligent key or driver side door request switch operation)
• Key ID
• Starter: CRANKING/OTHER
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts
Location" for detailed installation location.
IPDM E/R
ON/OFF signal of CVT shift selector (detention switch) is transmitted to driver seat control unit via CAN communication.
Refer to PCS-4, "IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Mirror switch
• Mirror switch is integrated in door mirror remote control switch.
• It operates angle of door mirror face.
• It transmits mirror face adjust operation to automatic drive positioner control unit.
Refer to MIR-5, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Changeover switch
• Changeover switch is integrated in door mirror remote control
switch.
• Changeover switch has three positions (L, N and R).
• It changes operating door mirror motor by transmitting control
signal to automatic drive positioner control unit.
Refer to MIR-5, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Set switch
Refer to ADP-8, "Seat Memory Switch".
Door mirror remote control switch
Seat memory switch
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-6
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.
11.
Component parts
Lifting motor (rear)
• Lifting motor (rear) is installed to seat slide cushion frame.
• Lifting motor (rear) is activated with driver seat control unit.
• Seat lifter (rear) is moved upward/downward by changing the rotation direction of lifting motor (rear).
Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Lifting sensor (rear)
• Lifting sensor (rear) is installed to seat side cushion frame.
• The pulse signal is input to driver seat control unit when lifting
(rear) is operated.
• Driver seat control unit counts the pulse and calculates the lifting
(rear) amount of the seat.
Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Lifting motor (rear)
Reclining motor
12.
Reclining motor
Reclining sensor
13.
Sliding motor
Sliding sensor
15.
• Seat reclining motor is installed to seat back frame.
• Seat reclining motor is activated with driver seat control unit.
• Seatback is reclined frontward/rearward by changing the rotation direction of reclining motor.
Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
• Reclining sensor is integrated in reclining motor.
• The pulse signal is input to driver seat control unit when the reclining is operated.
• Driver seat control unit counts the pulse and calculates the reclining amount of the seat.
Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Refer to ADP-8, "Driver Seat Control Unit".
Driver seat control unit
Sliding motor
14.
Description
• Seat sliding motor is installed to the seat cushion frame.
• Seat sliding motor is activated with driver seat control unit.
• Slides the seat frontward/ rearward by changing the rotation direction of sliding motor.
Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
• Sliding sensor is integrated in sliding motor.
• The pulse signal is input to driver seat control unit when sliding
is performed.
• Driver seat control unit counts the pulse and calculates the sliding amount of the seat.
Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Lifting motor (front)
• Lifting motor (front) is installed to seat side cushion frame.
• Lifting motor is activated with driver seat control unit.
• Seat lifter (front) is moved upward/downward by changing the
rotation direction of lifting motor (front).
Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Lifting sensor (front)
• Lifting sensor (front) is installed in lifting motor (rear).
• When lifting motor (rear) operates, pulse signal is transmitted to
driver seat control unit from lifting sensor. Driver seat control unit
counts the pulse and calculates the lift position (rear) of the seat.
Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Lifting motor (front)
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-7
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.
16.
17.
Component parts
Description
Sliding switch
• Sliding switch is equipped to power seat switch on seat cushion
side surface.
• The operation signal is input to driver seat control unit when sliding switch is operated.
Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Reclining switch
• The operation signal is input to driver seat control unit when reclining switch is operated.
• The operation signal is input to driver seat control unit when reclining switch is operated.
Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Lifting switch (front)
• Lifting switch (front) is equipped to power seat switch on seat
cushion side surface.
• The operation signal is input to driver seat control unit when lifting switch (front) is operated.
Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Lifting switch (rear)
• Lifting switch (rear) is equipped to power seat switch on seat
cushion side surface.
• The operation signal is input to driver seat control unit when lifting switch (rear) is operated.
Refer to SE-8, "POWER SEAT SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Power seat switch
Front door switch (driver side)
Detects door open/close condition and transmits to BCM.
Refer to DLK-18, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit
•
•
•
•
INFOID:0000000007836766
It communicates with driver seat control unit via UART communication.
Perform various controls with the instructions of driver seat control unit.
Perform the controls of door mirror and seat memory switch.
Operates door mirror with the signal from the driver seat control.
Seat Memory Switch
INFOID:0000000007836767
SET SWITCH
It is used for registration and setting change of driving position and Intelligent Key interlock function.
SEAT MEMORY SWITCH
• The maximum 2 driving positions can be registered by memory switch 1 to 2.
• Driving position is set to the registered driving position when memory switch is pressed while operation conditions are satisfied.
SEAT MEMORY INDICATOR
Memory indicator indicates the status of auto driving position system by turning ON or blinking.
Driver Seat Control Unit
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
INFOID:0000000007836768
Main units of automatic drive positioner system.
It is connected to the CAN.
It communicates with automatic drive positioner control unit via UART communication.
It perform memory function after receiving the door unlock signal from BCM.
The address of each part is recorded.
Operates each motor of seat to the registered position.
Requests the operation of door mirror to automatic drive positioner control unit.
Operates the specific seat motor with the signal from power seat switch.
Transmits the ignition switch signal (ACC/ON) via UART communication to automatic driver positioner control unit.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-8
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
A
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007492470
B
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
JMJIA5854GB
DESCRIPTION
The system automatically moves the driver seat and door mirror position by the driver seat control unit and the
automatic drive positioner control unit. The driver seat control unit corresponds with the automatic drive positioner control unit by UART communication.
Function
P
Description
Manual function
The driving position (seat and door mirror position) can be adjusted by using the power seat switch or door mirror remote control switch.
Memory function
The seat and door mirror move to the stored driving position by pressing seat memory
switch (1 or 2).
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-9
O
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Function
Entry/Exit assist function
Description
Exit
On exit, the seat moves backward.
Entry
On entry, the seat returns from exiting position to the previous driving position.
Intelligent Key interlock function
Perform memory operation, exiting operation and entry operation by Intelligent Key
unlock operation or driver side door request switch unlock operation.
Sleep Control
Driver seat control unit equips sleep control for reducing power consumption.
The system switches to sleep control when all of the following conditions are satisfied.
• Ignition switch is OFF.
• All devices of auto driving position system are not operating.
• 45 seconds timer of driver seat control unit is not operating.
• Set switch and memory switch (1 and 2) are OFF.
Wake-up Control
Sleep control releases when detecting status change in either of the following item.
• CAN communication
• Power seat switch
• Set switch and seat memory switch (1 and 2)
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-10
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM : Schematic
INFOID:0000000007492471
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
JMJIA5995GB
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-11
2012 QUEST
P
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
JMJIA5996GB
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-12
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
JMJIA6122GB
P
MANUAL FUNCTION
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-13
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
MANUAL FUNCTION : System Description
INFOID:0000000007492472
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMJIA5855GB
DESCRIPTION
• The driving position (seat and door mirror position) can be adjusted manually with power seat switch and
door mirror remote control switch.
• The power seat can be operated manually regardless of the ignition switch position.
• The door mirrors can be operated manually when ignition switch is in either ACC or ON position.
• When power seat switch is operated, operation signal is transmitted to driver seat control unit. Each motor is
operated according to operation signal.
• When mirror switch and changeover switch are operated, operation signal is transmitted to automatic drive
positioner control unit. Mirror motor is operated according to operation signal.
MEMORY FUNCTION
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-14
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
MEMORY FUNCTION : System Description
INFOID:0000000007492473
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
JMJIA5856GB
DESCRIPTION
• The driver seat control unit can store the optimum driving positions (seat and door mirror position) for 2 people. If the front seat position is changed, one-touch (pressing desired memory switch) operation allows
changing to the other driving position.
• When memory switch 1 and 2 are operated, operation signal is transmitted to driver seat control unit.
• When driver seat control unit detects that memory switch is pressed for 0.5 seconds or more, driver seat
control unit operates each motor of driver seat and detects the driver seat position according to signals
transmitted from each sensor. Driver seat control unit requests the operation of mirror motor to automatic
drive positioner control unit via UART communication.
• Automatic drive positioner control unit operates mirror motor, detects the door mirror position according to
signal transmitted from mirror sensor, and transmits the detected door mirror position to driver seat control
unit via UART communication.
• Driver seat control unit stops the operation of each motor when each part reaches the memorized positions.
• Driver seat control unit turns memory indicator lamp OFF that is blinking while each motor operates.
NOTE:
Further information for the memory storage procedure. Refer to ADP-41, "Work Procedure".
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-15
2012 QUEST
N
O
P
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Operation Condition
Satisfy all of the following items. The memory function is not performed if these items are not satisfied.
Item
Request status
ON*
Ignition position
Switch inputs
• Power seat switch
• Door mirror control switch
• Set switch
• Memory switch
OFF
(Not operated)
CVT shift selector
P position
Memory function
Registered
Vehicle speed
0 km/h (0 MPH)
CONSULT
Not connected
*: When timer function does not operate.
Timer Function
• The memory function can be performed for 45 seconds after opening the driver door even if the ignition
switch position is in OFF position.
• Satisfy all of the following items. The timer function is not performed if these items are not satisfied.
Item
Request status
Ignition position
OFF
Set switch/memory switch
OFF
Memory function
Registered
CVT shift selector
P position
Front door switch (driver side)
OFF
CUNSULT
Not connected
EXIT ASSIST FUNCTION
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-16
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
EXIT ASSIST FUNCTION : System Description
INFOID:0000000007492474
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
JMJIA5857GB
I
DESCRIPTION
• This function slides driver seat toward vehicle rear and facilitates entry/exit of the vehicle.
• Seat slide set amount of exit assist function is adjustable.
ADP
• When driver side door is open while operation conditions are satisfied, driver seat control unit receives front
door switch (driver side) signal (open/close) from BCM via CAN communication. Driver seat control unit
operates sliding motor and moves driver seat toward vehicle rear to the seat slide set amount when driver
K
seat control unit detects that driver side door is open.
• Driver seat control unit receives sliding sensor position signal from sliding sensor. Driver seat control unit
stops the operation of sliding motor when driver seat control unit detects that driver seat is slid to the seat
slide set amount.
L
NOTE:
• This function is set to ON before delivery (initial setting).
• Further information for the system setting procedure. Refer to ADP-43, "Description".
M
Operation Condition
Satisfy all of the following items. The exit assist function is not performed if these items are not satisfied.
Item
Ignition position
OFF
System setting (Entry/exit assist function)
ON
Initialization
O
Done
Switch inputs
• Power seat switch
• Door mirror remote control switch
• Set switch
• Memory switch
P
OFF
(Not operated)
CVT shift selector
P position
Handle position
Revision: 2011 September
N
Request status
LHD
ADP-17
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Item
Request status
Transmission
CVT
CUNSULT
Not connected
ENTRY ASSIST FUNCTION
ENTRY ASSIST FUNCTION : System Description
INFOID:0000000007492475
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMJIA5858GB
DESCRIPTION
• This function allows the driver seat control unit to return the driver seat from the exiting position to the previous driving position, when ignition switch is operated from OFF to ACC.
• Entry assist function stops when starter signal is ON while entry assist function is being operated. Entry
assist function restarts when starter signal is OFF.
• When ignition switch is operated OFF to ACC while operation conditions are satisfied, driver seat control unit
receives ACC signal from BCM via CAN communication. Driver seat control unit operates sliding motor
when driver seat control unit detects that ignition switch is changed to ACC.
• Driver seat control unit receives sliding sensor position signal from sliding sensor. Driver seat control unit
stops the operation of sliding motor when driver seat control unit detects that driver seat is returned to the
previous driving position from the exiting position.
NOTE:
• This function is set to ON before delivery (initial setting).
• Further information for the system setting procedure. Refer to ADP-43, "Description".
Operation Condition
Satisfy all of the following items. The entry assist function is not performed if these items are not satisfied.
Item
Seat
Request status
The vehicle is not moved after performing the exit assist function.
Switch inputs
• Power seat switch
• Door mirror control switch
• Set switch
• Memory switch
Revision: 2011 September
OFF
(Not operated)
ADP-18
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Item
Request status
Vehicle speed
A
0 km/h (0 MPH)
Starter
OFF
Transmission
CVT
CONSULT
B
Not connected
INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION
INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION : System Description
C
INFOID:0000000007492476
D
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
E
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
JMJIA5859GB
DESCRIPTION
L
• By associating Intelligent Key and automatic drive positioner system, the unlock operation of Intelligent Key
or driver side door request switch performs memory function and entry/exit function.
• Registration of Intelligent Key interlock function can register a different key ID to the driver seat control unit,
one by one, for memory switch 1 and 2. A total of 2 key IDs can be registered.
• Driver seat control unit receives door unlock signal and key ID signal from BCM when driver side door is
unlocked using Intelligent Key or driver side door request switch.
• Driver seat control unit automatically adjusts driver seat and door mirror to the driving position according to
key ID. Driver seat performs turnout position and sets to standby status.
• In standby status, when ignition switch is operated from OFF to ACC, return operation sets driver seat to the
registered position.
NOTE:
• When another key ID is newly registered to a key switch to which a key ID is already registered, the previously registered key ID is overwritten and becomes unusable.
• When starter signal turns ON during return operation, the operation is interrupted, starter signal turns from
ON to OFF, and operation restarts.
• Further information for Intelligent Key interlock function. Refer to ADP-42, "Description".
Operation Condition
Satisfy all of the following items. The Intelligent Key interlock function is not performed if these items are not
satisfied.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-19
2012 QUEST
M
N
O
P
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Item
Request status
Ignition position
OFF
Intelligent key interlock function
Registered
Switch inputs
• Power seat switch
• Door mirror control switch
• Set switch
• Memory switch
OFF
(Not operated)
CVT shift selector
P position
Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007492477
The fail-safe mode may be activated if the following symptoms are observed.
Operating in
fail-safe mode
Related
DTC
Diagnosis
CAN communication
U1000
ADP-44, "DTC
Logic"
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
U1010
ADP-45, "DTC
Logic"
EEPROM
B2130
ADP-49, "DTC
Logic"
Only manual functions, except door mirror, operate normally.
UART communication
B2128
ADP-48, "DTC
Logic"
Only manual functions, except seat sliding, operate normally.
Seat sliding output
B2112
ADP-46, "DTC
Logic"
Only manual functions, except seat reclining, operate normally.
Seat reclining output
B2113
ADP-47, "DTC
Logic"
Malfunction Item
Only manual functions operate normally.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-20
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT)
CONSULT Function
A
INFOID:0000000007492478
The automatic drive positioner system can be checked and diagnosed for component operation using CONSULT.
B
APPLICATION ITEMS
C
Diagnostic mode
Description
Ecu Identification
Displays part numbers of driver seat control unit.
Self Diagnostic Result
Performs self-diagnosis for the auto drive positioner system and displays the results.
Data Monitor
Displays input signals transmitted from various switches and sensors to driver seat control unit
in real time.
Active Test
Drives each output unit.
Work support
Changes the setting for each system function.
D
E
F
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Refer to ADP-30, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item
G
Unit
Main
Signals
Selection
From
Menu
Contents
H
STARTER SW
“ON/OFF”
×
×
Ignition key switch ON (START, ON) /OFF (ACC, OFF) status judged from the ignition switch signal.
SET SW
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the setting switch signal.
MEMORY SW 1
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 1 signal.
MEMORY SW 2
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 2 signal.
DETENT SW
“ON/OFF”
×
×
The CVT shift selector position “OFF (P position) / ON (other than P position)” judged from the detention switch signal.
“LOCK/UNLOCK”
×
×
NOTE:
This item is indicated, but not monitored.
SLIDE SW–FR
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (forward) signal.
SLIDE SW–RR
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (backward)
signal.
STEERING STATUS
RECLN SW–FR
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (forward)
signal.
RECLN SW–RR
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (backward)
signal.
LIFT FR SW–UP
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch front (up) signal.
LIFT FR SW–DN
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch front (down)
signal.
LIFT RR SW–UP
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch rear (up) signal.
LIFT RR SW–DN
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch rear (down)
signal.
MIR CON SW–UP
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (up) signal.
MIR CON SW–DN
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (down) signal.
MIR CON SW–RH
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (right) signal.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-21
2012 QUEST
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Unit
Main
Signals
Selection
From
Menu
MIR CON SW–LH
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (left) signal.
MIR CHNG SW–R
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control
switch (switching to right) signal.
MIR CHNG SW–L
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control
switch (switching to left) signal.
VEHICLE SPEED
—
×
×
Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination
meter by numerical value [km/h].
Monitor Item
Contents
P RANG SW CAN
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the P range switch signal.
R RANGE (CAN)
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the R range switch signal.
DOOR SW–FL
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the front door switch (driver
side) signal.
DOOR SW–FR
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the door switch (front passenger side) signal.
IGN ON SW
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the ignition switch signal.
ACC ON SW
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the ACC switch signal.
KEY ON SW
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the key on switch signal.
KEYLESS ID
—
×
×
Key ID status judged from the key ID signal.
KYLS DR UNLK
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the driver side door unlock actuator output switch signal.
VHCL SPEED (ABS)
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from vehicle speed signal.
HANDLE
“RHD/LHD”
×
×
RHD/LHD status judged from handle position signal.
TRANSMISSION
“AT or CVT/
MT”
×
×
AT or CVT/MT status judged from transmission.
SLIDE PULSE
—
–
×
Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it
moves backward, the value increases. If it moves forward,
the value decreases.
RECLN PULSE
—
–
×
Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it
moves backward, the value increases. If it moves forward,
the value decreases.
LIFT FR PULSE
—
–
×
Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it
moves DOWN, the value increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases.
LIFT RR PULSE
—
–
×
Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it
moves DOWN, the value increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases.
MIR/SEN RH U–D
“V”
–
×
Voltage input from door mirror sensor (passenger side) up/
down is displayed.
MIR/SEN RH R–L
“V”
–
×
Voltage input from door mirror sensor (passenger side) left/
right is displayed.
MIR/SEN LH U–D
“V”
–
×
Voltage input from door mirror sensor (driver side) up/down
is displayed.
MIR/SEN LH R–L
“V”
–
×
Voltage input from door mirror sensor (driver side) left/right
is displayed.
ACTIVE TEST
CAUTION:
When driving vehicle, do not perform active test.
Test item
Description
SEAT SLIDE
Activates/deactivates the sliding motor.
SEAT RECLINING
Activates/deactivates the reclining motor.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-22
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test item
Description
SEAT LIFTER FR
Activates/deactivates the lifting motor (front).
SEAT LIFTER RR
Activates/deactivates the lifting motor (rear).
MIRROR MOTOR RH
Activates/deactivates the mirror motor (passenger side).
MIRROR MOTOR LH
Activates/deactivates the mirror motor (driver side).
MEMORY SW INDCTR
Turns ON/OFF the memory indicator.
A
B
C
WORK SUPPORT
Work item
Content
Item
D
40 mm
SEAT SLIDE VOLUME SET
The amount of seat sliding for entry/exit assist can be selected
from 3 items.
80 mm
150 mm
EXIT SEAT SLIDE SETTING
Entry/exit assist (seat) can be selected:
ON (operated) – OFF (not operated)
E
ON
OFF
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-23
2012 QUEST
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
List of ECU Reference
INFOID:0000000007492479
ECU
Reference
BCS-36, "Reference Value"
BCM
BCS-58, "Fail-safe"
BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
BCS-59, "DTC Index"
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-24
2012 QUEST
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
A
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000007492480
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Monitor Item
SET SW
B
Condition
Set switch
MEMORY SW1
Memory switch 1
MEMORY SW2
Memory switch 2
SLIDE SW–FR
Sliding switch (forward)
SLIDE SW–RR
Sliding switch (backward)
RECLN SW–FR
Reclining switch (forward)
RECLN SW–RR
Reclining switch (backward)
LIFT FR SW–UP
Lifting switch front (up)
LIFT FR SW–DN
Lifting switch front (down)
LIFT RR SW–UP
Lifting switch rear (up)
LIFT RR SW–DN
Lifting switch rear (down)
MIR CON SW–UP
Mirror switch
MIR CON SW–DN
Mirror switch
MIR CON SW–RH
Mirror switch
MIR CON SW–LH
Mirror switch
MIR CHNG SW–R
Changeover switch
MIR CHNG SW–L
Changeover switch
DETENT SW
CVT shift selector
STARTER SW
Ignition position
Revision: 2011 September
Value/Status
Push
ON
Release
OFF
Push
ON
Release
OFF
Push
ON
Release
OFF
Operate
ON
Release
OFF
Operate
ON
Release
OFF
Operate
ON
Release
OFF
Operate
ON
Release
OFF
Operate
ON
Release
OFF
Operate
ON
Release
OFF
Operate
ON
Release
OFF
Operate
ON
Release
OFF
Up
ON
Other than the above
OFF
Down
ON
Other than the above
OFF
Right
ON
Other than the above
OFF
Left
ON
Other than the above
OFF
Right
ON
Other than the above
OFF
Left
ON
Other than the above
OFF
P position
OFF
Other than the above
ON
Cranking
ON
Other than the above
OFF
ADP-25
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
2012 QUEST
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
Condition
Value/Status
Forward
SLIDE PULSE
RECLN PULSE
Seat sliding
Seat reclining
The numeral value decreases *
Backward
The numeral value increases*
Other than the above
No change to numeral value*
Forward
The numeral value decreases*
Backward
The numeral value increases *
No change to numeral value*
Other than the above
LIFT FR PULSE
Seat lifter (front)
Up
The numeral value decreases *
Down
The numeral value increases *
No change to numeral value*
Other than the above
LIFT RR PULSE
Seat lifter (rear)
Up
The numeral value decreases *
Down
The numeral value increases *
No change to numeral value*
Other than the above
*
MIR/SEN RH U–D
Door mirror (passenger side)
Change between 3.4 (close to peak)
0.6 (close to valley)
MIR/SEN RH R–L
Door mirror (passenger side)
Change between 3.4 (close to left edge)
0.6 (close to right edge)
MIR/SEN LH U–D
Door mirror (driver side)
Change between 3.4 (close to peak)
0.6 (close to valley)
MIR/SEN LH R–L
Door mirror (driver side)
Change between 0.6 (close to left edge)
3.4 (close to right edge)
STEERING STATUS
Steering lock unit
VEHICLE SPEED
The condition of vehicle speed is displayed
P RANG SW CAN
CVT shift selector
R RANGE (CAN)
CVT shift selector
DOOR SW-FL
Driver door
Unlock
NOTE:
This item is indicated, but not monitored.
km/h
P position
ON
Other than the above
OFF
R position
ON
Other than the above
OFF
Open
ON
Close
OFF
Open
ON
Close
OFF
ON position
ON
Other than the above
OFF
ACC or ON position
ON
Other than the above
OFF
DOOR SW-FR
Passenger door
IGN ON SW
Ignition switch
ACC ON SW
Ignition switch
KEYLESS ID
UNLOCK button of Intelligent Key is pressed
KYLS DR UNLK
Intelligent Key or driver
side door request switch
VHCL SPEED (ABS)
Can signal from ABS
HANDLE
The BCM for handle position is displayed
TRANSMISSION
Transmission type is displayed
1, 2, 3, 4 or 5
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
Received
ON
Not received
OFF
LHD
RHD
AT or CVT
MT
: The value at the position attained when the battery is connected is regarded as 32768.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-26
2012 QUEST
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
TERMINAL LAYOUT
A
B
C
JMJIA3903ZZ
D
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
-
1
(R/Y)
—
E
Description
Signal name
CAN-H
Condition
Input/
output
Voltage (V)
F
—
—
—
G
2
(R)
Ground
UART communication
(TX/RX)
Input
H
Ignition switch ON
JMJIA1391ZZ
I
ADP
4
(R/L)
Ground
Reclining sensor signal
Operate
Input
Seat reclining
K
JMJIA0119ZZ
Other than the
above
6
(R/W)
7
(R/G)
8
(SB)
9
(L)
10
(L/B)
Ground
Memory switch 2 signal
Ground
Memory indicator 2
signal
Ground
Sliding switch backward signal
Ground
Ground
Reclining switch backward signal
Lifting switch (front)
down signal
Revision: 2011 September
Input
Output
Input
Input
Input
Memory switch 2
Memory indicator
2
Sliding switch
Reclining switch
Lifting switch
(front)
ADP-27
0 – 1 or 4 – 6
Press
0 – 1
Other than the
above
4 – 6
Illuminate
0 – 1
Other than the
above
9 – 16
Operate
(backward)
0 – 1
Other than the
above
9 – 16
Operate
(backward)
0 – 1
Other than the
above
9 – 16
Operate
(down)
0 – 1
Other than the
above
9 – 16
L
M
N
O
P
2012 QUEST
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
-
11
(L/W)
Ground
12
(L/R)
Ground
17
(V)
—
18
(B/W)
Ground
Description
Signal name
Lifting switch (rear)
down signal
Sensor power supply
CAN-L
Condition
Input/
output
Input
Lifting switch
(rear)
Voltage (V)
Operate
(down)
0 – 1
Other than the
above
9 – 16
Output
—
9 – 16
—
—
—
Operate
Sliding sensor signal
Input
Seat sliding
JMJIA0119ZZ
Other than the
above
19
(B/R)
Ground
Lifting sensor (front)
signal
0 – 1 or 4 – 6
Operate
Input
Seat lifting (front)
JMJIA0119ZZ
Other than the
above
20
(B/L)
Ground
Lifting sensor (rear)
signal
Input
Seat lifting (rear)
0 – 1 or 4 – 6
Operate
JMJIA0119ZZ
Other than the
above
22
(W/L)
Ground
Memory switch 1 signal
23
(W/R)
Ground
Memory indicator 1
signal
24
(V/W)
25
(Y/B)
Ground
Ground
Sliding switch forward
signal
Reclining switch forward signal
Revision: 2011 September
Input
Memory switch 1
Output
Memory indicator
1
Input
Input
Sliding switch
Reclining switch
ADP-28
0 – 1 or 4 – 6
Press
0 – 1
Other than the
above
4 – 6
Illuminate
0 – 1
Other than the
above
9 – 16
Operate
(forward)
0 – 1
Other than the
above
9 – 16
Operate
(forward)
0 – 1
Other than the
above
9 – 16
2012 QUEST
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
26
(Y/R)
-
Ground
Set switch signal
Input
Ground
Battery power supply
Input
Ground
Sliding motor backward output signal
33
(R)
38
(GR)
39
(Y)
40
(W)
41
(V)
Input
Ground
28
(G)
36
(L)
Lifting switch (front) up
signal
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
Ground
42
(P/B)
Ground
43
(LG)
Ground
Reclining motor forward output signal
Lifting motor (front)
down output signal
Sliding motor forward
output signal
Reclining motor backward output signal
Lifting motor (front) up
output signal
Lifting motor (rear) up
output signal
Lifting motor (rear)
down output signal
Ground
Condition
Input/
output
Input
Ground
35
(G)
Signal name
A
Lifting switch (rear) up
signal
27
(Y/L)
34
(B)
Description
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Lifting switch
(front)
Lifting switch
(rear)
Set switch
Seat reclining
Seat lifting (front)
Seat sliding
Seat reclining
Seat lifting (front)
Seat lifting (rear)
Seat lifting (rear)
—
B
Operate
(up)
0 – 1
Other than the
above
9 – 16
Operate
(up)
0 – 1
Other than the
above
9 – 16
Press
0 – 1
Other than the
above
4 – 6
—
Seat sliding
Voltage (V)
C
D
E
9 – 16
Operate
(backward)
9 – 16
Other than the
above
0 – 1
Operate
(forward)
9 – 16
Other than the
above
0 – 1
Operate
(down)
9 – 16
Other than the
above
0 – 1
Operate
(forward)
9 – 16
Other than the
above
0 – 1
Operate
(backward)
9 – 16
Other than the
above
0 – 1
Operate
(up)
9 – 16
Other than the
above
0 – 1
Operate
(up)
9 – 16
Other than the
above
0 – 1
Operate
(down)
9 – 16
Other than the
above
0 – 1
—
Fail-safe
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
0 – 1
INFOID:0000000007492481
The fail-safe mode may be activated if the following symptoms are observed.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-29
2012 QUEST
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Operating in
fail-safe mode
Related
DTC
Diagnosis
CAN communication
U1000
ADP-44, "DTC
Logic"
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
U1010
ADP-45, "DTC
Logic"
EEPROM
B2130
ADP-49, "DTC
Logic"
Only manual functions, except door mirror, operate normally.
UART communication
B2128
ADP-48, "DTC
Logic"
Only manual functions, except seat sliding, operate normally.
Seat sliding output
B2112
ADP-46, "DTC
Logic"
Only manual functions, except seat reclining, operate normally.
Seat reclining output
B2113
ADP-47, "DTC
Logic"
Malfunction Item
Only manual functions operate normally.
DTC Index
INFOID:0000000007492482
Timing*
CONSULT display
Item
Reference page
Current malfunction
Previous malfunction
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000]
0
1-39
CAN communication
ADP-44, "DTC
Logic"
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
[U1010]
0
1-39
Control unit
ADP-45, "DTC
Logic"
SEAT SLIDE
[B2112]
0
1-39
Seat slide motor output
ADP-46, "DTC
Logic"
SEAT RECLINING
[B2113]
0
1-39
Seat reclining motor output
ADP-47, "DTC
Logic"
UART COMM
[B2128]
0
1-39
UART communication
ADP-48, "DTC
Logic"
EEPROM
[B2130]
0
1-39
EEPROM
ADP-49, "DTC
Logic"
*:
• 0: Current malfunction is present
• 1-39: Displayed if any previous malfunction is present when current condition is normal. The numeral value increases by one at each
IGN ON to OFF cycle from 1 to 39. The counter remains at 39 even if the number of cycles exceeds it. However, the counter is reset
to 1 if any malfunction is detected again, the normal operation is resumed and the ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-30
2012 QUEST
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT
A
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000007492483
TERMINAL LAYOUT
B
C
D
JMJIA3671ZZ
E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal No.
(wire color)
+
-
2
(Y)
Ground
3
(V)
Ground
Description
Signal name
Changeover switch RH
signal
Mirror switch up signal
Condition
Input/
Output
Input
Input
Voltage (V)
G
Changeover
switch position
Mirror switch
RH
0 – 1
Other than the
above
4 – 6
Operated
(up)
0 – 1
Other than the
above
4 – 6
Operated
(left)
0 – 1
Other than the
above
4 – 6
H
I
ADP
4
(LG)
Ground
5
(R)
Ground
Door mirror sensor (passenger side) up/down
signal
Input
Door mirror RH position
Change between 3.4 (close to
peak) 0.6 (close to valley)
6
(V)
Ground
Door mirror sensor (driver side) up/down signal
Input
Door mirror LH position
Change between 3.4 (close to
peak) 0.6 (close to valley)
Mirror switch left signal
Input
Mirror switch
K
L
M
8
(GR)
Ground
UART communication
(TX/RX)
Output
Ignition switch ON
N
JMJIA1391ZZ
10
(BR)
11
(W)
Ground
Ground
Door mirror motor (passenger side) up output
signal
Door mirror motor (passenger side) left output
signal
Revision: 2011 September
Output
Output
Door mirror RH
Door mirror RH
ADP-31
Operate
(up)
9 – 16
Other than the
above
0 – 1
Operate
(left)
9 – 16
Other than the
above
0 – 1
O
P
2012 QUEST
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(wire color)
+
Description
-
Signal name
12
(Y)
Ground
Door mirror motor (driver
side) down/right output
signal
14
(GR)
Ground
15
(O)
Ground
Changeover switch LH
signal
Mirror switch down signal
Condition
Input/
Output
Output
Input
Input
Door mirror (LH)
Changeover
switch position
Mirror switch
Voltage (V)
Operate
(down/right)
9 – 16
Other than the
above
0 – 1
LH
0 – 1
Other than the
above
4 – 6
Operate
(down)
0 – 1
Other than the
above
4 – 6
Operate
(right)
0 – 1
Other than the
above
4 – 6
16
(W)
Ground
17
(BR)
Ground
Door mirror sensor (passenger side) left/right
signal
Input
Door mirror RH position
Change between 3.4 (close to left
edge) 0.6 (close to right edge)
18
(SB)
Ground
Door mirror sensor (driver side) left/right signal
Input
Door mirror LH position
Change between 0.6 (close to left
edge) 3.4 (close to right edge)
20
(P)
Ground
Sensor ground
21
(Y)
Ground
Door mirror motor sensor power supply
Ground
Door mirror motor (passenger side) down/right
output signal
22
(V)
23
(G)
Ground
Mirror switch right signal
Door mirror motor (driver
side) up output signal
24
(W)
Ground
25
(R)
Ground
Battery power supply
30
(B/W)
Ground
Ground
Door mirror motor (driver
side) left output signal
Revision: 2011 September
Input
Mirror switch
—
—
0 – 1
Input
—
4 – 6
Output
Output
Output
Door mirror (RH)
Door mirror (LH)
Door mirror (LH)
Operate
(down/right)
9 – 16
Other than the
above
0 – 1
Operate
(up)
9 – 16
Other than the
above
0 – 1
Operate
(left)
9 – 16
Other than the
above
0 – 1
Input
—
9 – 16
—
—
0 – 1
ADP-32
2012 QUEST
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
A
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007492484
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
B
(option abbreviation; if not
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
JCJWA1525GB
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-33
2012 QUEST
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
JCJWA1526GB
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-34
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000007492485
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
JMJIA1702GB
DETAILED FLOW
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-35
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
Get the detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurred).
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC WITH AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM
Check “Self Diagnostic Result” with CONSULT. Refer to ADP-30, "DTC Index"
Is any symptom described and any DTC is displayed?
Symptom is described, DTC is displayed.>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed.>>GO TO 6.
Symptom is described, DTC is not displayed.>>GO TO 4.
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
>> GO TO 6.
4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
>> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Check normal operating condition. Refer to ADP-102, "Description".
Is the incident normal operation?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 7.
6.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform the confirmation procedure for the detected DTC.
Is the DTC displayed?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
7.PERFORM COMPONENT FUNCTION CHECK
Perform the component function check for the isolated malfunctioning point.
>> GO TO 8.
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Isolate the malfunctioning point by performing the diagnosis procedure relevant to the symptom during the
component diagnosis.
>> GO TO 9.
9.REPARE OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
>> GO TO 10.
10.FINAL CHECK
Perform the DTC confirmation procedure (if DTC is detected) or component function check (if no DTC is
detected) again, and then check that the malfunction can be repaired securely.
Are all malfunctions corrected?
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-36
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
YES >> INSPECTION END
Symptom is detected.>> GO TO 5.
DTC is detected.>> GO TO 6.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-37
2012 QUEST
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
< BASIC INSPECTION >
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
Description
INFOID:0000000007492486
Each function is reset to the following condition when the battery terminal is disconnected.
Function
Memory (Seat, mirror)
Condition
Erased
Procedure
Perform storing
Perform initialization
Entry/exit assist
Intelligent Key interlock
*:
ON
Erased
Set slide amount*
Perform initialization
Perform storing
Default value is 40 mm.
NOTE:
Notice that disconnecting the battery when detected DTC are present will erase the DTC memory.
Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492487
1.SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
Perform system initialization. Refer to ADP-40, "Work Procedure".
>> GO TO 2.
2.MEMORY STORAGE
Perform memory storage. Refer to ADP-41, "Work Procedure".
>> GO TO 3.
3.INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK STORAGE
Perform Intelligent Key interlock storage. Refer to ADP-42, "Work Procedure".
>> GO TO 4.
4.SYSTEM SETTING
Perform system setting. Refer to ADP-43, "Work Procedure".
>> END
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-38
2012 QUEST
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING DRIVER SEAT CONTROL
UNIT
Description
A
INFOID:0000000007492488
B
Each function is reset to the following condition when the driver seat control unit is replaced.
Function
Memory (Seat, mirror)
Condition
Erased
Procedure
C
Perform storing
Perform initialization
Entry/exit assist
Intelligent Key interlock
*:
ON
Erased
D
Set slide amount*
Perform initialization
E
Perform storing
Default value is 40 mm.
NOTE:
Notice that disconnecting the battery when detected DTC are present will erase the DTC memory.
Work Procedure
F
INFOID:0000000007492489
1.SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
G
Perform system initialization. Refer to ADP-40, "Work Procedure".
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.MEMORY STORAGE
I
Perform memory storage. Refer to ADP-41, "Work Procedure".
>> GO TO 3.
ADP
3.INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK STORAGE
Perform Intelligent Key interlock storage. Refer to ADP-42, "Work Procedure".
K
>> GO TO 4.
4.SYSTEM SETTING
L
Perform system setting. Refer to ADP-43, "Work Procedure".
M
>> END
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-39
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
< BASIC INSPECTION >
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
Description
INFOID:0000000007492490
Always perform the initialization when the battery terminal is disconnected or the driver seat control unit is
replaced.
The entry/exit assist function will not operate normally if no initialization is performed.
Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492491
1.STEP 1
There are two initialization methods.
Which method do you use?
With door switch>>GO TO 2.
With vehicle speed>>GO TO 3.
2. STEP 2-A (WITH DOOR SWITCH)
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch from ACC to OFF position.
Front door switch (driver side) is ON (open) → OFF (close) → ON (open).
>> END
3. STEP 2-B (WITH VEHICLE SPEED)
Drive the vehicle at more than 25 km/h (16 MPH).
>> END
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-40
2012 QUEST
MEMORY STORING
< BASIC INSPECTION >
MEMORY STORING
A
Description
INFOID:0000000007492492
Always perform the memory storage when the battery terminal is disconnected or the driver seat control unit is
replaced. The memory function will not operate normally if no memory storage is performed.
Work Procedure
B
INFOID:0000000007492493
C
Two positions for the driver seat and outside mirror can be stored for memory operation by following procedure.
NOTE:
If memory is stored in the same memory switch, the previous memory will be deleted.
D
1.STEP 1
Check the following conditions.
• Ignition switch: ON
• CVT shift selector: P position
E
F
>> GO TO 2.
2.STEP 2
1.
2.
3.
4.
G
Adjust driver seat and outside mirror position manually.
Push set switch.
NOTE:
• Memory indicator for which driver seat position is already retained in memory is illuminated for 5 sec- H
onds.
• Memory indicator for which driver seat position is not retained in memory is illuminated for 0.5 second.
Push the memory switch (1 or 2) for at least 1 second within 5 seconds after pushing the set switch.
I
NOTE:
• To enter driver seat positions into blank memory, memory indicator will be turned on for 5 seconds.
• To modify driver seat positions, memory indicator will be turned OFF for 0.5 second, then turned ON for
ADP
5 seconds.
Confirm the operation of each part with memory operation.
K
>> END
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-41
2012 QUEST
INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK STORING
< BASIC INSPECTION >
INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK STORING
Description
INFOID:0000000007492494
Always perform the Intelligent Key interlock function storage when the battery terminal is disconnected or the
driver seat control unit is replaced. The Intelligent Key interlock function will not operate normally if no memory
storage is performed.
Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492495
Performing the following operation associates the registered driving position with Intelligent Key. When driver
door unlock operation is performed by Intelligent Key or driver door request switch, display of the registered
driving position and turnout operation can be performed.
1.STEP 1
Check the following conditions.
• Ignition switch: OFF
• Initialization: done
• Driving position: registered
>> GO TO 2.
2.STEP 2
1.
2.
3.
Push set switch.
NOTE:
Memory indicator for which driver seat position is already retained in memory is illuminated for 5 seconds.
Push the Intelligent Key unlock button within 5 seconds after pushing memory switch (while the memory
indicator is turned ON).
NOTE:
From the time registration is performed, the applicable memory indicator blinks for 5 seconds.
Confirm the operation of each part with memory operation and Intelligent Key interlock operation.
>> END
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-42
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM SETTING
< BASIC INSPECTION >
SYSTEM SETTING
A
Description
INFOID:0000000007492496
The settings of the automatic driving positioner system can be changed, using CONSULT and the set switch.
Always check the settings before and after disconnecting the battery terminal or replacing driver seat control
unit.
B
C
SETTING CHANGE
×: Applicable
Item
Content
CONSULT
Set
switch
Factory
setting
Amount of seat sliding for
entry/exit assist
The amount of seat sliding for entry/exit assist can be
selected from 3 items.
[40 mm/80 mm/150 mm]
x
—
40 mm
Entry/exit assist
(seat)
Entry/exit assist (seat) can be selected:
ON (operated) – OFF (not operated)
x
x
ON
E
F
Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492497
1.STEP 1
G
There are three way of setting method.
Which method do you choose?
With CONSULT>>GO TO 2.
With set switch>>GO TO 3.
H
2.STEP 2-A (WITH CONSULT)
1.
2.
3.
4.
D
I
Select “Work support”.
Select “EXIT SEAT SLIDE SETTING” then touch display to change between ON and OFF.
EXIT SEAT SLIDE SETTING: Entry/exit assist (seat)
Select “SEAT SLIDE VOLUME SET” and touch either of “40 mm”, “80 mm”, or “150 mm”.
Then touch “OK”.
ADP
K
>> END
3.STEP 2-B (WITH SET SWITCH)
1.
2.
-
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Push set switch and hold for more than 10 seconds, then confirm blinking of the memory switch indicator.
Entry/exit assist are ON: Memory switch indicator blink two times.
Entry/exit assist are OFF: Memory switch indicator blink once.
L
M
>> END
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-43
2012 QUEST
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Description
INFOID:0000000007492498
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern
vehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected
with 2 communication lines (CAN H-line, CAN L-line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less
wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492499
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
U1000
CONSULT display
description
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
DTC detecting condition
• Driver seat control unit cannot communicate to other
control units.
• When driver seat control unit cannot communicate CAN
communication signal continuously for 2 seconds or
more.
Possible cause
CAN communication system
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.STEP 1
Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 3 seconds.
>> GO TO 2.
2.STEP 2
Check “Self diagnostic result” with CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to ADP-44, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492500
Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000007492501
Refer to ADP-40, "Description".
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-44
2012 QUEST
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492502
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
No.
B
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of CAN controller of driver seat control unit.
Possible cause
C
U1010
Driver seat control unit
D
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492503
1.REPLACE DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
E
When DTC [U1010] is detected, replace driver seat control unit.
>> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-45
2012 QUEST
B2112 SLIDING MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B2112 SLIDING MOTOR
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492504
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
B2112
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
The driver seat control unit detects the output of slid• Driver seat control unit
ing motor output terminal for 0.1 second or more
• Slide motor harness is shorted
even if the sliding switch is not input.
SEAT SLIDE
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check “Self diagnostic result” with CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to ADP-46, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492505
1.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR CIRCUIT (POWER SHORT)
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sliding motor connector and driver seat control unit connector.
Check voltage between sliding motor harness connector and ground.
(+)
Sliding motor
Connector
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ground
0
Terminals
34
B561
38
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
2.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Connect driver seat control unit connector.
Check voltage between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
Driver seat control unit
Connector
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
0–1
Terminals
B551
34
38
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-46
2012 QUEST
B2113 RECLINING MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B2113 RECLINING MOTOR
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492506
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
B2113
B
Trouble diagnosis
name
SEAT RECLINING
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
The driver seat control unit detects the output of reclining motor output terminal for 0.1 second or more
even if the reclining switch is not input.
• Driver seat control unit
• Reclining motor harness is shorted
C
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
E
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check “Self diagnostic result” with CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to ADP-47, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
F
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492507
G
1.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR CIRCUIT (POWER SHORT)
1.
2.
3.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect reclining motor connector and driver seat control unit connector.
Check voltage between reclining motor harness connector and ground.
I
(+)
Reclining motor
Connector
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Terminals
35
B554
Ground
39
ADP
0
K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
L
2.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Connect driver seat control unit connector.
Check voltage between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
M
(+)
Driver seat control unit
Connector
(-)
Voltage (V)
N
Ground
0–1
O
Terminals
B551
35
39
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
P
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-47
2012 QUEST
B2128 UART COMMUNICATION LINE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B2128 UART COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
INFOID:0000000007492508
Driver seat control unit performs UART communication with the automatic drive positioner control unit using 1
communication lines. Driver seat control unit receives the operation signals of door mirror remote control
switch and the position signals of door mirror sensor from the automatic drive positioner control unit and transmits the operation request signal.
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492509
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
B2128
Trouble diagnosis name
UART COMM
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
The communication between driver seat control unit
and auto drive positioner control unit is interrupted for
a period of time.
• UART communication line
(UART communication line is
open or shorted)
• Driver seat control unit
• Automatic drive positioner
control unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check “Self diagnostic result” with CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to ADP-48, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492510
1.CHECK UART COMMUNICATION LINE CONTINUITY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and automatic drive positioner control unit connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector.
Driver seat control unit
4.
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
B552
2
M75
8
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
B552
2
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-48
2012 QUEST
B2130 EEPROM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B2130 EEPROM
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492511
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
B2130
B
Trouble diagnosis
name
EEPROM
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Driver seat control unit detected CPU malfunction.
Driver seat control unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
D
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check “Self diagnostic result” with CONSULT.
Is the DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to ADP-49, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
E
F
INFOID:0000000007492512
G
1.REPLACE DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
H
>> INSPECTION END
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-49
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492513
NOTE:
Do not disconnect the battery negative terminal and the driver seat control unit connector until DTC is confirmed with CONSULT.
1.CHECK FUSIBLE LINK
Check that the following fusible link is not fusing.
Signal name
Fusible link No.
Battery power supply
L (40 A)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing affected circuit.
2.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check voltage between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
(+)
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminals
B551
33
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO-1 >> Repair or replace harness between driver seat control unit and fusible link L (40 A).
NO-2 >> Check circuit breaker and replace it if necessary.
3.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between the driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
B551
43
Continuity
Ground
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492514
NOTE:
Do not disconnect the battery negative terminal and the driver seat control unit connector until DTC is confirmed with CONSULT.
1.CHECK FUSIBLE LINK
Check that the following fusible link is not fusing.
Signal name
Fusible link No.
Battery power supply
L (40 A)
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-50
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit.
A
2.CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector.
Check voltage between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground.
B
C
(+)
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
Terminals
M104
25
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO-1 >> Repair or replace harness between driver seat control unit and fusible link L (40 A).
NO-2 >> Check circuit breaker and replace it if necessary.
E
F
3.CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between the automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground.
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
Terminal
M104
30
Ground
D
G
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-51
2012 QUEST
SLIDING SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
SLIDING SWITCH
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492515
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
Select “SLIDE SW-FR”, “SLIDE SW-RR” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT.
Check sliding switch signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item
Condition
SLIDE SW-FR
Sliding switch (forward)
SLIDE SW-RR
Sliding switch (backward)
Status
Operate
ON
Release
OFF
Operate
ON
Release
OFF
Is the indication normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-52, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492516
1.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power seat switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between power seat switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Power seat switch
Connector
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9 – 16
Terminals
8
B559
24
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and power seat switch harness connector.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
8
B552
4.
Power seat switch
8
B559
24
Continuity
Terminal
Existed
24
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
B552
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
8
Not existed
24
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-52
2012 QUEST
SLIDING SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
3.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH
A
Refer to ADP-53, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-106, "Removal and Installation".
B
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007492517
C
1.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power seat switch (sliding switch) connector.
Check continuity between power seat switch (sliding switch) terminals under the following conditions.
D
E
Power seat switch (Sliding switch)
Condition
Terminal
8
Sliding switch (backward)
43
24
Sliding switch (forward)
Continuity
Operate
Existed
Release
Not existed
Operate
Existed
Release
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-106, "Removal and Installation".
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-53
2012 QUEST
RECLINING SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
RECLINING SWITCH
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492518
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
Select “RECLN SW-FR”, “RECLN SW-RR” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT.
Check reclining switch signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item
Condition
RECLINE SW-FR
Reclining switch (forward)
RECLINE SW-RR
Reclining switch (backward)
Status
Operate
ON
Release
OFF
Operate
ON
Release
OFF
Is the indication normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-54, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492519
1.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power seat switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between power seat switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Power seat switch
Connector
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9 – 16
Terminals
9
B559
25
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and power seat switch harness connector.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
9
B552
4.
Power seat switch
9
B559
25
Continuity
Terminal
Existed
25
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
B552
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
9
Not existed
25
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-54
2012 QUEST
RECLINING SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
3.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH
A
Refer to ADP-55, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-106, "Removal and Installation".
B
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007492520
C
1.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power seat switch (reclining switch) connector.
Check continuity between power seat switch (reclining switch) terminals under the following conditions.
D
E
Power seat switch (Reclining switch)
Condition
Terminal
9
Reclining switch (backward)
43
25
Reclining switch (forward)
Continuity
Operate
Existed
Release
Not existed
Operate
Existed
Release
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-106, "Removal and Installation".
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-55
2012 QUEST
LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT)
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492521
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
Select “LIFT FR SW-UP”, “LIFT FR SW-DN” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT.
Check lifting switch (front) signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item
Condition
LIFT FR SW-UP
Lifting switch front (up)
LIFT FR SW-DN
Lifting switch front (down)
Status
Operate
ON
Release
OFF
Operate
ON
Release
OFF
Is the indication normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-56, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492522
1.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power seat switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between power seat switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Power seat switch
Connector
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9 – 16
Terminals
10
B559
26
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT) CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and power seat switch harness connector.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
10
B552
4.
Power seat switch
10
B559
26
Continuity
Terminal
Existed
26
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
B552
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
10
Not existed
26
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-56
2012 QUEST
LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
3.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT)
A
Refer to ADP-57, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-106, "Removal and Installation".
B
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007492523
C
1.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT)
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power seat switch (lifting switch front) connector.
Check continuity between power seat switch (lifting switch front) terminals under the following conditions.
D
E
Power seat switch (lifting switch front)
Condition
Terminal
10
Lifting switch front (down)
43
26
Lifting switch front (up)
Continuity
Operate
Existed
Release
Not existed
Operate
Existed
Release
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-106, "Removal and Installation".
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-57
2012 QUEST
LIFTING SWITCH (REAR)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
LIFTING SWITCH (REAR)
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492524
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
Select “LIFT RR SW-UP”, “LIFT RR SW-DN” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT.
Check lifting switch (rear) signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item
Condition
LIFT RR SW-UP
Lifting switch rear (up)
LIFT RR SW-DN
Lifting switch rear (down)
Status
Operate
ON
Release
OFF
Operate
ON
Release
OFF
Is the indication normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-58, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492525
1.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power seat switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between power seat switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Power seat switch
Connector
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9 – 16
Terminals
11
B559
27
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR) CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and power seat switch harness connector.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
11
B552
4.
Power seat switch
11
B559
27
Continuity
Terminal
Existed
27
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
B552
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
11
Not existed
27
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-58
2012 QUEST
LIFTING SWITCH (REAR)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
3.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR)
A
Refer to ADP-59, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-106, "Removal and Installation".
B
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007492526
C
1.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR)
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power seat switch (lifting switch rear) connector.
Check continuity between power seat switch (lifting switch rear) terminals under the following conditions.
D
E
Power seat switch (lifting switch rear)
Condition
Terminal
11
Lifting switch rear (down)
43
27
Lifting switch rear (up)
Continuity
Operate
Existed
Release
Not existed
Operate
Existed
Release
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace power seat switch. Refer to ADP-106, "Removal and Installation".
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-59
2012 QUEST
SEAT MEMORY SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
SEAT MEMORY SWITCH
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492527
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
Select “MEMORY SW 1”, “MEMORY SW 2”, “SET SW” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT.
Check seat memory switch signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item
Condition
MEMORY SW 1
Memory switch 1
MEMORY SW 2
Memory switch 2
SET SW
Set switch
Status
Push
ON
Release
OFF
Push
ON
Release
OFF
Push
ON
Release
OFF
Is the indication normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-60, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492528
1.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect seat memory switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between seat memory switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Seat memory switch
Connector
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
4–6
Terminals
1
D13
2
3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and seat memory switch harness
connector.
Driver seat control unit
Seat memory switch
Connector
Terminal
B552
22
Connector
6
Continuity
2
D13
28
4.
Terminal
1
Existed
3
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-60
2012 QUEST
SEAT MEMORY SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
6
B552
A
Ground
22
Not existed
B
28
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
C
3.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
D
Check continuity between seat memory switch harness connector and ground.
E
Seat memory switch
Connector
Terminal
D13
4
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
G
4.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH
Refer to ADP-61, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Replace seat memory switch. Refer to ADP-105, "Removal and Installation".
Component Inspection
H
I
INFOID:0000000007492529
1.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
ADP
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect seat memory switch connector.
Check continuity between seat memory switch terminals under the following conditions.
Seat memory switch
Condition
Terminal
3
K
Continuity
L
1
2
F
Memory switch 1
4
Memory switch 2
Set switch
Push
Release
Push
Release
Push
Release
Existed
Not existed
Existed
M
Not existed
Existed
N
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace seat memory switch. Refer to ADP-105, "Removal and Installation".
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-61
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
MIRROR SWITCH
MIRROR SWITCH : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492530
1.CHECK MIRROR SWITCH FUNCTION
Check the operation on “MIR CON SW–UP/DN” and “MIR CON SW–RH/LH” in “DATA MONITOR” mode
with CONSULT.
Monitor item
Condition
MIR CON SW-UP/DN
MIR CON SW-RH/LH
When operating the mirror switch toward the up or down side.
: ON
Other than the above.
: OFF
When operating the mirror switch toward the right or left side.
: ON
Other than the above.
: OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-62, "MIRROR SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".
MIRROR SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492531
1.CHECK MIRROR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror remote control switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between door mirror remote control switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Door mirror remote control switch
Connector
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
4–6
Terminal
4
12
D14
13
15
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK MIRROR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror
remote control switch harness connector.
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
Terminal
Door mirror remote control switch
Connector
3
M75
4
15
Continuity
15
D14
16
4.
Terminal
13
12
Existed
4
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-62
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
3
Ground
4
M75
A
B
Not existed
15
16
C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-104, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
D
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch harness connector and ground.
Door mirror remote control switch
Connector
Terminal
D14
7
Ground
E
Continuity
F
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
G
4.CHECK MIRROR SWITCH
H
Check door mirror remote control switch.
Refer to ADP-63, "MIRROR SWITCH : Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Replace door mirror remote control switch.
I
MIRROR SWITCH : Component Inspection
ADP
INFOID:0000000007492532
1.CHECK MIRROR SWITCH
K
1.
2.
3.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror remote control switch connector.
Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch terminals under the following conditions.
Door mirror remote control switch
Condition
Terminal
Continuity
M
RIGHT
4
Other than the above
DOWN
12
7
Mirror switch
13
Other than the above
LEFT
Other than the above
UP
15
Other than the above
Existed
Not existed
Existed
Not existed
Existed
Existed
Not existed
CHANGEOVER SWITCH
ADP-63
O
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace door mirror remote control switch.
Revision: 2011 September
N
2012 QUEST
P
DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492533
1.CHECK CHANGEOVER SWITCH FUNCTION
Check the operation on “MIR CHNG SW-R” or “MIR CHNG SW-L” in “DATA MONITOR” mode with CONSULT.
Monitor item
Condition
MIR CHNG SW-R/L
When operating the changeover toward the right or left side.
: ON
Other than the above.
: OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-64, "CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".
CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492534
1.CHECK CHANGEOVER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror remote control switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between door mirror remote control switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Door mirror remote control switch
Connector
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
4–6
Terminal
10
D14
11
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK CHANGEOVER SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror
remote control switch harness connector.
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
M75
4.
Door mirror remote control switch
Terminal
Connector
2
Terminal
11
D14
14
10
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground.
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
M75
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
2
Not existed
14
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-104, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-64
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Door mirror remote control switch
Connector
Terminal
D14
7
Ground
Continuity
Existed
B
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
C
4.CHECK CHANGEOVER SWITCH
Check door mirror remote control switch.
Refer to ADP-65, "CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Replace door mirror remote control switch.
CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Component Inspection
D
E
INFOID:0000000007492535
1.CHECK CHANGEOVER SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror remote control switch connector.
Check continuity between door mirror remote control switch terminals under the following conditions.
Door mirror remote control switch
Condition
Terminal
LEFT
10
7
A
Changeover switch
11
Other than the above
RIGHT
Other than the above
Continuity
G
H
Existed
Not existed
I
Existed
Not existed
ADP
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace door mirror remote control switch.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-65
2012 QUEST
POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492536
1.CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power seat switch connector.
Check continuity between power seat switch harness connector and ground.
Power seat switch
Connector
Terminal
B559
43
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-66
2012 QUEST
SLIDING SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
SLIDING SENSOR
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492537
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
B
Select “SLIDE PULSE” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT.
Check sliding sensor signal under the following conditions.
C
Monitor item
Condition
SLIDE PULSE
*
Seat sliding
Value
Operate (forward)
Change (increase)*
Operate (backward)
Change (decrease)*
Release
No change*
E
: The value at the seat position attained when the battery is connected is considered to be 32768.
Is the indication normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-67, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492538
G
1.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR SIGNAL
1.
2.
D
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope.
H
(+)
Driver seat control unit
Connector
(-)
Signal (V)
(Reference value)
Condition
I
Terminals
ADP
Operate
B552
18
Ground
K
Seat sliding
JMJIA0119ZZ
L
Other than the
above
0 – 1 or 4 – 6
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
M
2.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR CIRCUIT
N
1.
2.
3.
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and sliding sensor connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and sliding sensor harness connector.
Driver seat control unit
4.
Sliding motor
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
B552
18
B561
18
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-67
2012 QUEST
P
SLIDING SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
B552
18
Continuity
Ground
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
3.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Connect driver seat control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between sliding motor harness connector and ground.
(+)
Sliding motor
Connector
Terminals
B561
12
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and sliding motor harness connector.
Driver seat control unit
4.
Sliding motor
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
B552
12
B561
12
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
B552
12
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
5.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between sliding motor harness connector and ground.
Sliding motor
Connector
Terminal
B561
43
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace sliding motor.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-68
2012 QUEST
RECLINING SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
RECLINING SENSOR
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492539
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
B
Select “RECLN PULSE” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT.
Check reclining sensor signal under the following conditions.
C
Monitor item
Condition
RECLN PULSE
*
Seat reclining
Value
Operate (forward)
Change (increase)*
Operate (backward)
Change (decrease)*
Release
No change*
E
: The value at the seat position attained when the battery is connected is considered to be 32768.
Is the indication normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-69, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492540
G
1.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR SIGNAL
1.
2.
D
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope.
H
(+)
Driver seat control unit
Connector
(-)
Signal (V)
(Reference value)
Condition
I
Terminals
ADP
Operate
B552
4
Ground
K
Seat reclining
JMJIA0119ZZ
L
Other than the
above
0 – 1 or 4 – 6
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
M
2.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR CIRCUIT
N
1.
2.
3.
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and reclining motor connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and reclining motor harness connector.
Driver seat control unit
4.
Reclining motor
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
B552
4
B554
4
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-69
2012 QUEST
P
RECLINING SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
B552
4
Continuity
Ground
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
3.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Connect driver seat control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between reclining motor harness connector and ground.
(+)
Reclining motor
Connector
Terminals
B554
12
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and reclining motor harness connector.
Driver seat control unit
4.
Reclining motor
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
B552
12
B554
12
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
B552
12
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
5.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between reclining motor harness connector and ground.
Reclining motor
Connector
Terminal
B554
43
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace reclining motor.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-70
2012 QUEST
LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT)
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492541
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
B
Select “LIFT FR PULSE” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT.
Check the lifting sensor (front) signal under the following conditions.
C
Monitor item
Condition
LIFT FR PULSE
*
Seat lifting (front)
Value
Operate (up)
Change (increase)*
Operate (down)
Change (decrease)*
Release
No change*
E
: The value at the seat position attained when the battery is connected is considered to be 32768.
Is the indication normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-71, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492542
G
1.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) SIGNAL
1.
2.
D
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope.
H
(+)
Driver seat control unit
Connector
(-)
Signal (V)
(Reference value)
Condition
I
Terminals
ADP
B552
19
Ground
Operate
Seat Lifting
(front)
K
JMJIA0119ZZ
L
Other than the
above
0 – 1 or 4 – 6
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
M
2.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) CIRCUIT
N
1.
2.
3.
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and lifting motor (front) connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (front) harness connector.
Driver seat control unit
4.
Lifting motor (front)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
B552
19
B555
19
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-71
2012 QUEST
P
LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
B552
19
Continuity
Ground
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
3.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Connect driver seat control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between lifting motor (front) harness connector and ground.
(+)
Lifting motor (front)
Connector
Terminals
B555
12
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (front) harness connector.
Driver seat control unit
4.
Lifting motor (front)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
B552
12
B555
12
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
B552
12
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
5.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT) GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between lifting motor (front) harness connector and ground.
Lifting motor (front)
Connector
Terminal
B555
43
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace lifting motor (front).
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-72
2012 QUEST
LIFTING SENSOR (REAR)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
LIFTING SENSOR (REAR)
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492543
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
B
Select “LIFT RR PULSE” in “Data monitor” mode with CONSULT.
Check lifting sensor (rear) signal under the following conditions.
C
Monitor item
Condition
LIFT RR PULSE
*
Seat lifting (rear)
Value
Operate (up)
Change (increase)*
Operate (down)
Change (decrease)*
Release
No change*
E
: The value at the seat position attained when the battery is connected is considered to be 32768.
Is the indication normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-73, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492544
G
1.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) SIGNAL
1.
2.
D
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope.
H
(+)
Driver seat control unit
Connector
(-)
Signal (V)
(Reference value)
Condition
I
Terminals
ADP
B552
20
Ground
Operate
Seat Lifting
(rear)
K
JMJIA0119ZZ
L
Other than the
above
0 – 1 or 4 – 6
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
M
2.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) CIRCUIT
N
1.
2.
3.
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector and lifting motor (rear) connector.
Check the continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (rear) harness
connector.
Driver seat control unit
4.
Lifting motor (rear)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
B552
20
B556
20
Continuity
Existed
Check the continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-73
2012 QUEST
P
LIFTING SENSOR (REAR)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
B552
20
Continuity
Ground
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
3.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Connect driver seat control unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between lifting motor (rear) harness connector and ground.
(+)
Lifting motor (rear)
Connector
Terminals
B556
12
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check the continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (rear) harness
connector.
Driver seat control unit
4.
Lifting motor (rear)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
B552
12
B556
12
Continuity
Existed
Check the continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
B552
12
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
5.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR) GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check the continuity between lifting motor (rear) harness connector and ground.
Lifting motor (rear)
Connector
Terminal
B556
43
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace lifting motor (rear).
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-74
2012 QUEST
MIRROR SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
MIRROR SENSOR
A
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492545
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
Select “MIR/SEN LH U-D”, “MIR/SEN LH R-L” in “Data monitor” with CONSULT.
Check mirror sensor (driver side) signal under the following condition.
Monitor item
Condition
C
Value
D
Change between
3.4 [V] (close to peak)
0.6 [V] (close to valley)
MIR/SEN LH U-D
Door mirror (driver side)
E
Change between
0.6 [V] (close to left edge)
3.4 [V] (close to right edge)
MIR/SEN LH R-L
Is the indication normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-75, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
F
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492546
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (DRIVER SIDE) SENSOR POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
G
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror (driver side) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between door mirror (driver side) harness connector and ground.
I
(+)
Door mirror (driver side)
Connector
Terminals
D43
23
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
4–6
K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (DRIVER SIDE) SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
ADP
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror
(driver side) harness connector.
M
N
Automatic drive positioner control unit
4.
Door mirror (driver side)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M75
21
D43
23
Continuity
Existed
O
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground.
P
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
Terminal
M75
21
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-104, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-75
2012 QUEST
MIRROR SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (DRIVER SIDE) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror
(driver side) harness connector.
Automatic drive positioner control unit
4.
Door mirror (driver side)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M75
20
D43
24
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground.
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
Terminal
M75
20
Continuity
Ground
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
4.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (DRIVER SIDE) SENSOR CIRCUIT
1.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror
(driver side) harness connector.
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
6
M75
2.
Door mirror (driver side)
21
D43
18
Continuity
Terminal
Existed
22
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground.
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
M75
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
6
Not existed
18
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace door mirror sensor (built in driver side door mirror).
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492547
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
Select “MIR/SEN RH U-D”, “MIR/SEN RH R-L” in “Data monitor” with CONSULT.
Check the mirror sensor (passenger side) signal under the following conditions.
Monitor item
Condition
MIR/SEN RH U-D
Door mirror (passenger side)
MIR/SEN RH R-L
Value
Change between
3.4 [V] (close to peak)
0.6 [V] (close to valley)
Change between
3.4 [V] (close to left edge)
0.6 [V] (close to right edge)
Is the indication normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-76
2012 QUEST
MIRROR SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Refer to ADP-77, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
A
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492548
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR SENSOR (PASSENGER SIDE) POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror (passenger side) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between door mirror (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
C
(+)
Door mirror (passenger side)
Connector
Terminals
D3
23
(-)
Voltage (V)
D
Ground
4–6
E
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
F
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (PASSENGER SIDE) SENSOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror (passenger side) harness connector.
G
H
Automatic drive positioner control unit
4.
Door mirror (passenger side)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M75
21
D3
23
Continuity
Existed
I
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground.
ADP
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
Terminal
M75
21
Continuity
Ground
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-104, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
K
L
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (PASSENGER SIDE) SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror (passenger side) connector.
M
N
Automatic drive positioner control unit
4.
Door mirror (passenger side)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M75
20
D3
24
Continuity
Existed
O
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground.
P
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
Terminal
M75
20
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-77
2012 QUEST
MIRROR SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
4.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (PASSENGER SIDE) SENSOR CIRCUIT
1.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror (passenger side) harness connector.
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
M75
2.
Door mirror (passenger side)
Terminal
Connector
5
Terminal
21
D3
17
22
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground.
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
M75
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
5
Not existed
17
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace door mirror sensor (built in passenger side door mirror).
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-78
2012 QUEST
SLIDING MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
SLIDING MOTOR
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492549
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
B
Select “SEAT SLIDE” in “Active test” mode with CONSULT.
Check the sliding motor operation.
C
Test item
Description
OFF
SEAT SLIDE
Stop
FR
Seat sliding
D
Forward
RR
Backward
Is the operation of relevant parts normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-79, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492550
F
1.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sliding motor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Active test” (“SEAT SLIDE”) with CONSULT.
Check voltage between sliding motor harness connector and ground.
H
(+)
I
Sliding motor
Connector
(-)
Condition
Voltage (V)
Terminals
34
B561
Ground
SEAT SLIDE
38
OFF
0–1
Backward
9 – 16
OFF
0–1
Forward
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace sliding motor (built in seat slide cushion frame).
NO
>> GO TO 2.
ADP
K
L
2.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and sliding motor harness connector.
M
N
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
34
B551
4.
Sliding motor
Terminal
34
B561
38
38
Continuity
O
Existed
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
B551
P
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
34
Not existed
38
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-79
2012 QUEST
SLIDING MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-80
2012 QUEST
RECLINING MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
RECLINING MOTOR
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492551
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
B
Select “SEAT RECLINING” in “Active test” mode with CONSULT.
Check the reclining motor operation.
C
Test item
Description
OFF
SEAT RECLINING
Stop
FR
Seat reclining
D
Forward
RR
Backward
Is the operation of relevant parts normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-81, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492552
F
1.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect reclining motor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Active test” (“SEAT RECLINING”) with CONSULT.
Check voltage between reclining motor harness connector and ground.
H
(+)
I
Reclining motor
Connector
(-)
Condition
Voltage (V)
Terminals
35
B554
Ground
SEAT RECLINING
39
OFF
0–1
Forward
9 – 16
OFF
0–1
Backward
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace reclining motor (built in seat back frame).
NO
>> GO TO 2.
ADP
K
L
2.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and reclining motor harness connector.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
35
B551
4.
Reclining motor
Terminal
35
B554
39
39
Continuity
Connector
B551
Revision: 2011 September
Ground
35
Not existed
39
ADP-81
O
P
Continuity
Terminal
N
Existed
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit
M
2012 QUEST
RECLINING MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-82
2012 QUEST
LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT)
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492553
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
B
Select “SEAT LIFTER FR” in “Active test” mode with CONSULT.
Check the lifting motor (front) operation.
C
Test item
Description
OFF
SEAT LIFTER FR
Stop
UP
Seat lifting (front)
D
Upward
DWN
Downward
Is the operation of relevant parts normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-83, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492554
F
1.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect lifting motor (front) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Active test” (“SEAT LIFTER FR”) with CONSULT.
Check voltage between lifting motor (front) harness connector and ground.
H
(+)
I
Lifting motor (front)
Connector
(-)
Condition
Voltage (V)
Terminals
36
B555
Ground
SEAT LIFTER FR
40
OFF
0–1
Downward
9 – 16
OFF
0–1
Upward
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace lifting motor (front) (built in seat cushion frame).
NO
>> GO TO 2.
ADP
K
L
2.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT) CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (front) harness connector.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
36
B551
4.
Lifting motor (front)
Terminal
36
B555
40
40
Continuity
Connector
B551
Revision: 2011 September
Ground
36
Not existed
40
ADP-83
O
P
Continuity
Terminal
N
Existed
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit
M
2012 QUEST
LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-84
2012 QUEST
LIFTING MOTOR (REAR)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
LIFTING MOTOR (REAR)
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492555
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
B
Select “SEAT LIFTER RR” in “Active test” mode with CONSULT.
Check the lifting motor (rear) operation.
C
Test item
Description
OFF
SEAT LIFTER RR
Stop
UP
Seat lifting (rear)
D
Upward
DWN
Downward
Is the operation of relevant parts normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-85, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492556
F
1.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect lifting motor (rear) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Active test” (“SEAT LIFTER RR”) with CONSULT.
Check voltage between lifting motor (rear) harness connector and ground.
H
(+)
I
Lifting motor (rear)
Connector
(-)
Condition
Voltage (V)
Terminals
41
B556
Ground
SEAT LIFTER RR
42
OFF
0–1
Upward
9 – 16
OFF
0–1
Downward
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace lifting motor (rear) (built in seat cushion frame).
NO
>> GO TO 2.
ADP
K
L
2.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR) CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and lifting motor (rear) harness connector.
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
41
B551
4.
Lifting motor (rear)
Terminal
41
B556
42
42
Continuity
Connector
B551
Revision: 2011 September
Ground
41
Not existed
42
ADP-85
O
P
Continuity
Terminal
N
Existed
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
Driver seat control unit
M
2012 QUEST
LIFTING MOTOR (REAR)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-86
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DOOR MIRROR MOTOR
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492557
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR FUNCTION
B
Check the operation with “MIRROR MOTOR RH” and “MIRROR MOTOR LH” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode with
CONSULT
Refer to ADP-21, "CONSULT Function".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-87, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
C
D
INFOID:0000000007492558
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR INPUT SIGNAL
E
1.
2.
3.
4.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between door mirror harness connector and ground.
[Driver side]
G
(+)
Door mirror
Connector
(-)
Condition
Voltage (V)
Terminals
H
10
D43
11
Ground
Door mirror remote control switch
12
DOWN / RIGHT
9 – 16
Other than the above
0–1
LEFT
9 – 16
Other than the above
0–1
UP
9 – 16
Other than the above
0–1
I
ADP
[Passenger side]
K
(+)
Door mirror
Connector
(-)
Condition
Terminals
10
D3
Voltage (V)
11
Ground
Door mirror remote control switch
12
DOWN / RIGHT
9 – 16
Other than the above
0–1
LEFT
9 – 16
Other than the above
0–1
UP
9 – 16
Other than the above
0–1
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
L
M
N
O
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect automatic drive positioner control unit connector.
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and door mirror harness connector.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-87
2012 QUEST
P
DOOR MIRROR MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
[Driver side]
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
Door mirror
Terminal
Connector
12
M75
Continuity
Terminal
10
23
D43
12
24
Existed
11
[Passenger side]
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
Door mirror
Terminal
Connector
10
M75
12
11
D3
11
22
4.
Continuity
Terminal
Existed
10
Check continuity between automatic drive positioner control unit harness connector and ground.
[Driver side]
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
12
M75
Ground
23
Not existed
24
[Passenger side]
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
10
M75
Ground
11
Not existed
22
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace automatic drive positioner control unit. Refer to ADP-104, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR
Check door mirror motor.
Refer to ADP-88, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident.Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Replace door mirror motor.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007492559
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR 1
Check that door mirror motor does not trap foreign objects and does not have any damage.
Refer to MIR-25, "Exploded View".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace door mirror.
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR 2
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror connector.
Apply 12 V to each power supply terminal of door mirror motor terminals.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-88
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Door mirror
A
Terminal
Operational direction
(+)
(-)
10
11
RIGHT
11
10
LEFT
12
10
UP
10
12
DOWN
B
C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace door mirror motor.
D
E
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-89
2012 QUEST
SEAT MEMORY INDICATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
SEAT MEMORY INDICATOR
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492560
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
Select “MEMORY SW INDCTR” in “Active test” mode with CONSULT.
Check the memory indicator operation.
Test item
Description
OFF
MEMORY SW INDCTR
OFF
ON-1
Memory switch indicator
ON-2
Indicator 1: ON
Indicator 2: ON
Is the operation of relevant parts normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to ADP-90, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492561
1.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH INDICATOR OPERATION
Check seat memory switch indicator operation.
Which is the malfunctioning indicator?
All indicators are NG>>GO TO 2.
An indicator is NG>>GO TO 4.
2.CHECK FUSE
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check that the following fuse is not fusing.
Signal name
Fuse No.
Battery power supply
10 (10 A)
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing affected circuit.
3.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH INDICATOR POWER SUPPLY
Check voltage between seat memory switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Seat memory switch
Connector
Terminals
D13
5
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace seat memory switch. Refer to ADP-105, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness between seat memory switch and 10 A fuse [No.10, located in fuse
block (J/B)].
4.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH INDICATOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver seat control unit and seat memory switch connector.
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and seat memory switch harness
connector.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-90
2012 QUEST
SEAT MEMORY INDICATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Driver seat control unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
7
B552
4.
Seat memory switch
7
D13
23
Continuity
Terminal
Existed
6
A
B
Check continuity between driver seat control unit harness connector and ground.
C
Driver seat control unit
Connector
B552
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
7
Not existed
23
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace driver seat control unit. Refer to ADP-103, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
D
E
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-91
2012 QUEST
MANUAL FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
MANUAL FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
ALL COMPONENT
ALL COMPONENT : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492562
1.CHECK DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check driver seat control unit power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to ADP-50, "DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
2.CHECK AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check automatic drive positioner control unit power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to ADP-50, "AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
POWER SEAT
POWER SEAT : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492563
1.CHECK POWER SEAT SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check power seat switch ground circuit.
Refer to ADP-66, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
SEAT SLIDING
SEAT SLIDING : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492564
1.CHECK SLIDING MECHANISM
Check for the following.
• Mechanism deformation or pinched foreign materials.
• Interference with other parts because of poor installation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
2.CHECK SLIDING SWITCH
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-92
2012 QUEST
MANUAL FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Check sliding switch.
Refer to ADP-52, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
A
B
3.CHECK SLIDING MOTOR
Check sliding motor.
Refer to ADP-79, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
C
D
4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
E
Check the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
F
SEAT RECLINING
SEAT RECLINING : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492565
G
1.CHECK RECLINING MECHANISM
H
Check for the following.
• Mechanism deformation or pinched foreign materials.
• Interference with other parts because of poor installation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
I
2.CHECK RECLINING SWITCH
ADP
Check reclining switch.
Refer to ADP-54, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
K
L
3.CHECK RECLINING MOTOR
Check reclining motor.
Refer to ADP-81, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
M
N
4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Check the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
O
P
SEAT LIFTING (FRONT)
SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492566
1.CHECK LIFTING (FRONT) MECHANISM
Check for the following.
• Mechanism deformation or pinched foreign materials.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-93
2012 QUEST
MANUAL FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
• Interference with other parts because of poor installation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (FRONT)
Check lifting switch (front).
Refer to ADP-56, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
3.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (FRONT)
Check lifting motor (front).
Refer to ADP-83, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Check the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
SEAT LIFTING (REAR)
SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492567
1.CHECK LIFTING (REAR) MECHANISM
Check for the following.
• Mechanism deformation or pinched foreign materials.
• Interference with other parts because of poor installation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
2.CHECK LIFTING SWITCH (REAR)
Check lifting switch (rear).
Refer to ADP-58, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
3.CHECK LIFTING MOTOR (REAR)
Check lifting motor (rear).
Refer to ADP-85, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Check the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
DOOR MIRROR
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-94
2012 QUEST
MANUAL FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
DOOR MIRROR : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492568
A
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MECHANISM
Check for the following.
• Mechanism deformation or pinched foreign materials.
• Interference with other parts because of poor installation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
B
C
2.CHECK DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
D
Check door mirror remote control switch. Refer to following.
• Mirror switch : Refer to ADP-62, "MIRROR SWITCH : Component Function Check".
• Changeover switch : Refer to ADP-64, "CHANGEOVER SWITCH : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
3.CHECK DOOR MIRROR MOTOR
Check door mirror motor.
Refer to ADP-87, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
E
F
G
H
4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Check the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-95
2012 QUEST
MEMORY FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
MEMORY FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
ALL COMPONENT
ALL COMPONENT : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492569
1.CHECK MANUAL OPERATION
Check manual operation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
2.PERFORM INITIALIZATION AND MEMORY STORING PROCEDURE
1.
Perform initialization procedure.
Refer to ADP-40, "Work Procedure".
2. Perform memory storing procedure.
Refer to ADP-41, "Work Procedure".
3. Check memory function.
Refer to ADP-15, "MEMORY FUNCTION : System Description".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Memory function is normal.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH
Check seat memory switch.
Refer to ADP-60, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace seat memory switch.
4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
SEAT SLIDING
SEAT SLIDING : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492570
1.CHECK MANUAL OPERATION
Check manual operation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to ADP-92, "SEAT SLIDING : Diagnosis Procedure"
2.CHECK SLIDING SENSOR
Check sliding sensor.
Refer to ADP-67, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Check the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-96
2012 QUEST
MEMORY FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> GO TO 1.
SEAT RECLINING
A
SEAT RECLINING : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492571
B
1.CHECK MANUAL OPERATION
Check manual operation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to ADP-93, "SEAT RECLINING : Diagnosis Procedure"
C
2.CHECK RECLINING SENSOR
D
Check reclining sensor.
Refer to ADP-69, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
E
F
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Check the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
G
H
SEAT LIFTING (FRONT)
SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492572
I
1.CHECK MANUAL OPERATION
Check manual operation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to ADP-93, "SEAT LIFTING (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure"
ADP
K
2.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (FRONT)
Check lifting sensor (front).
Refer to ADP-71, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
L
M
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Check the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
N
O
SEAT LIFTING (REAR)
SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492573
P
1.CHECK MANUAL OPERATION
Check manual operation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to ADP-94, "SEAT LIFTING (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure"
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-97
2012 QUEST
MEMORY FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
2.CHECK LIFTING SENSOR (REAR)
Check lifting sensor (rear).
Refer to ADP-73, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Check the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
DOOR MIRROR
DOOR MIRROR : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492574
1.CHECK MANUAL OPERATION
Check manual operation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to ADP-95, "DOOR MIRROR : Diagnosis Procedure"
2.CHECK MIRROR SENSOR
Check mirror sensor. Refer to following.
• Driver side : ADP-75, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".
• Passenger side : ADP-76, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Check the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-98
2012 QUEST
ENTRY/EXIT ASSIST FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
ENTRY/EXIT ASSIST FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure
A
INFOID:0000000007492575
1.CHECK SYSTEM SETTING
B
1.
Check system setting.
Refer to ADP-43, "Work Procedure".
2. Check the operation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.
C
D
2.PERFORM SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
1.
Perform system initialization.
Refer to ADP-40, "Work Procedure".
2. Check the operation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 3.
E
F
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE)
G
Check front door switch (driver side).
Refer to DLK-209, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
H
4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
I
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-99
2012 QUEST
INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492576
1.PERFORM INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK STORING PROCEDURE
1.
Perform Intelligent Key interlock storing procedure.
Refer to ADP-42, "Work Procedure".
2. Check the operation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
Check door lock function.
Refer to DLK-133, "Work Flow".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check the intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-100
2012 QUEST
MEMORY INDICATE DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
MEMORY INDICATE DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure
A
INFOID:0000000007492577
1.CHECK SEAT MEMORY SWITCH INDICATOR
B
Check seat memory switch indicator.
Refer to ADP-90, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunction parts.
C
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
D
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
E
F
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-101
2012 QUEST
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Description
INFOID:0000000007492578
The following symptoms are normal operations, and they do not indicate a malfunction.
Symptom
Action to take
Reference page
No initialization has been performed.
Perform initialization.
ADP-40, "Description"
Entry/exit assist function is disabled.
NOTE:
Entry/exit assist function is set to ON before delivery (initial setting).
Change the settings.
ADP-43, "Description"
Entry assist function does not operate.
Manual operation with power seat switch
was performed after exit assist function
execution.
Perform the entry assist function.
ADP-18, "ENTRY ASSIST FUNCTION : System Description"
Lumbar support does not perform memory operation.
The lumbar support system are controlled independently with no link to the
automatic drive positioner system.
—
SE-13, "POWER SEAT
SYSTEM : System Description"
Entry/exit assist function do not
operate.
Cause
Memory function :
ADP-15, "MEMORY
FUNCTION : System
Description"
Memory function, entry/exit assist function, or Intelligent Key interlock function does not
operate.
The operating conditions are not fulfilled.
Fulfill the operation
conditions.
Entry assist function :
ADP-18, "ENTRY ASSIST FUNCTION : System Description"
Exit assist function :
ADP-17, "EXIT ASSIST
FUNCTION : System
Description"
Intelligent Key interlock
function : ADP-19, "INTELLIGENT KEY INTERLOCK FUNCTION :
System Description"
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-102
2012 QUEST
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492579
B
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove driver seat. Refer to SE-84, "Removal and Installation".
Remove screws (A), and then remove driver seat control unit (2)
from seat cushion frame (1)
C
D
E
JMJIA4721ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
After installing the driver seat, perform additional service when replacing control unit. Refer to ADP-39,
"Description".
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-103
2012 QUEST
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492580
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove instrument lower panel RH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal
and Installation".
Remove screw (A), and then remove automatic drive positioner
control unit (2) from bracket (1).
JMJIA6178ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
After installing the driver seat, perform additional service when replacing control unit. Refer to ADP-39,
"Description".
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-104
2012 QUEST
SEAT MEMORY SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SEAT MEMORY SWITCH
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492581
REMOVAL
1.
2.
B
Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "Removal and
Installation".
Press pawls and remove seat memory switch (1) from switch finisher (1) using remover tool (A).
:
C
D
Pawl
E
JMJIA4724ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
ADP
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-105
2012 QUEST
POWER SEAT SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
POWER SEAT SWITCH
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492582
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove seat cushion outer finisher. Refer to SE-90, "SEAT
CUSHION : Disassembly and Assembly".
Remove screws (A), and then remove power seat switch (2)
from seat cushion outer finisher (1).
JMJIA6179ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-106
2012 QUEST
ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL
SECTION
BCS
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM DOOR LOCK) ..........................................................18
F
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER ...................................19
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER) .............................19
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 4
BUZZER .....................................................................19
BUZZER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BUZZER)....19
H
INT LAMP ...................................................................20
INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - INT
LAMP) ......................................................................20
I
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 4
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................ 4
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts
Location ..................................................................... 4
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM ......... 4
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location ........................................ 4
HEADLAMP ...............................................................21
HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - HEADLAMP) ......................................................................21
G
J
K
SYSTEM .............................................................. 6
WIPER ........................................................................24
WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM - WIPER) .......24
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................ 6
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description...... 6
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe ..................... 7
FLASHER ...................................................................25
FLASHER : CONSULT Function (BCM - FLASHER) ..........................................................................25
L
COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM ........... 8
COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM :
System Description ................................................... 8
AIR CONDITIONER ...................................................26
AIR CONDITIONER : CONSULT Function (BCM AIR CONDITIONER) (Auto A/C) .............................26
AIR CONDITIONER : CONSULT Function (BCM AIR CONDITIONER) (Manual A/C) .........................26
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM ...................................... 11
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description.... 12
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM ....... 13
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM :
System Description ................................................. 13
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................16
COMMON ITEM ......................................................... 16
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) ..................................................... 16
DOOR LOCK ............................................................. 17
Revision: 2011 September
BCS
N
INTELLIGENT KEY ....................................................26
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM INTELLIGENT KEY) ................................................26
O
COMB SW ..................................................................30
COMB SW : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMB
SW) ..........................................................................30
P
BCM ...........................................................................30
BCM : CONSULT Function (BCM - BCM) ...............30
IMMU ..........................................................................30
IMMU : CONSULT Function (BCM - IMMU) ............30
BCS-1
2012 QUEST
BATTERY SAVER .................................................... 31
BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM BATTERY SAVER) ................................................. 31
TRANSIT MODE CANCEL OPERATION ......... 70
TRUNK ...................................................................... 32
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) ..... 32
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ........................ 71
THEFT ALM .............................................................. 32
THEFT ALM : CONSULT Function (BCM THEFT) ................................................................... 33
Description .............................................................. 70
Work Procedure ...................................................... 70
U1000 CAN COMM ........................................... 71
Description .............................................................. 71
DTC Logic ............................................................... 71
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 71
RETAIND PWR ......................................................... 33
RETAIND PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM - RETAINED PWR) ........................................................ 34
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ......................... 72
SIGNAL BUFFER ...................................................... 34
SIGNAL BUFFER : CONSULT Function (BCM SIGNAL BUFFER) .................................................. 34
U0415 VEHICLE SPEED ................................... 73
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR ...................................... 34
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR : CONSULT Function
(BCM - AIR PRESSURE MONITOR) ..................... 34
DTC Logic ............................................................... 72
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 72
Description .............................................................. 73
DTC Logic ............................................................... 73
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 73
B2562 LOW VOLTAGE ..................................... 74
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 36
DTC Logic ............................................................... 74
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 74
BCM ................................................................... 36
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 75
Reference Value ..................................................... 36
Fail-safe .................................................................. 58
DTC Inspection Priority Chart .............................. 58
DTC Index .............................................................. 59
COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT ... 76
WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 62
BCM ................................................................... 62
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 62
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 75
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 76
COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT ....... 78
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 78
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 80
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 67
COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ................................................................. 80
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................... 67
Symptom Table ....................................................... 80
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT (BCM) ............................................ 67
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Description .................... 67
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Work Procedure ............ 67
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ................ 81
CONFIGURATION (BCM) ......................................... 67
CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Description ................. 68
CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Work Procedure ......... 68
CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Configuration list ........ 69
COMBINATION SWITCH .................................. 83
Revision: 2011 September
Description .............................................................. 81
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 82
BCM ................................................................... 82
Removal and Installation ......................................... 82
Exploded View ........................................................ 83
Removal and Installation ......................................... 83
BCS-2
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000007493253
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
C
D
E
F
G
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
I
J
K
L
BCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-3
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007493254
JMMIA0856ZZ
1.
BCM
A.
Behind of combination meter
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007493255
JMMIA0857ZZ
1.
2.
Sliding door control unit RH
Refer to DLK-23, "AUTOMATIC
SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM : Component Parts Location".
Revision: 2011 September
3.
Combination meter
Refer to MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location".
BCS-4
BCM
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL
SYSTEM : Component Parts Location".
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
4.
7.
IPDM E/R
Refer to PCS-4, "IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location".
5.
Driver seat control unit
Refer to ADP-5, "Component Parts
Location".
6.
Sliding door control unit LH
Refer to DLK-23, "AUTOMATIC
SLIDING DOOR SYSTEM : Component Parts Location".
Automatic back door control module
Refer to DLK-22, "AUTOMATIC
BACK DOOR SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location".
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
BCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-5
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007493256
OUTLINE
• BCM (Body Control Module) controls the various electrical components. It inputs the information required to
the control from CAN communication and the signal received from each switch and sensor.
• BCM has combination switch reading function for reading the operation status of combination switches (light,
turn signal, wiper and washer) in addition to a function for controlling the operation of various electrical components. It also has the signal transmission function as the passed point of signal and the power saving control function that reduces the power consumption with the ignition switch OFF.
• BCM is equipped with the diagnosis function that performs the diagnosis with CONSULT and various settings.
BCM CONTROL FUNCTION LIST
System
Reference
Combination switch reading system
BCS-8, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM : System
Description"
Signal buffer system
BCS-12, "SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description"
Power consumption control system
BCS-13, "POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description"
Headlamp system
• EXL-11, "HEADLAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (Xenon
type headlamp)
• EXL-111, "HEADLAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (Halogen type headlamp)
Auto light system
• Xenon type headlamp models
- EXL-13, "AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM (EXCEPT FOR CANADA) :
System Description" (Except for Canada)
- EXL-16, "AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM (FOR CANADA) : System
Description" (For Canada)
• Halogen type headlamp models
- EXL-13, "AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM (EXCEPT FOR CANADA) :
System Description" (Except for Canada)
- EXL-116, "AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM (FOR CANADA) : System
Description" (For Canada)
Daytime running light system
• EXL-19, "DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : System Description" (Xenon type headlamp)
• EXL-119, "DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : System Description" (Halogen type headlamp)
Turn signal and hazard warning lamp system
• EXL-21, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP
SYSTEM : System Description" (Xenon type headlamp)
• EXL-121, "TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING LAMP
SYSTEM : System Description" (Halogen type headlamp)
Parking, license plate, side maker and tail lamps system
• EXL-22, "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND
TAIL LAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (Xenon type headlamp)
• EXL-122, "PARKING, LICENSE PLATE, SIDE MARKER AND
TAIL LAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (Halogen type
headlamp)
Front fog lamp system
• EXL-25, "FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : System Description"
(Xenon type headlamp)
• EXL-125, "FRONT FOG LAMP SYSTEM : System Description" (Halogen type headlamp)
Exterior lamp battery saver system
• EXL-27, "EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM :
System Description" (Xenon type headlamp)
• EXL-127, "EXTERIOR LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM :
System Description" (Halogen type headlamp)
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-6
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
System
Reference
Interior room lamp control system
INL-6, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM : System
Description"
Interior room lamp battery saver system
INL-11, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM :
System Description"
Front wiper and washer system
WW-7, "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description"
Rear wiper and washer system
WW-11, "REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description"
Rear window defogger system
DEF-6, "System Description"
Warning chime system
WCS-5, "WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Description"
Air conditioning control system
• HAC-16, "FRONT AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM : System Description" (Automatic air conditioning)
• HAC-153, "FRONT MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM :
System Description" (Manual air cinditionimg)
Power door lock system
DLK-33, "System Description"
Intelligent Key system/engine start system
DLK-36, "INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Description"
Nissan Vehicle Immobilizer System (NVIS) - NATS
SEC-15, "NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM-NATS :
System Description"
Theft warning alarm
Vehicle security system
Panic alarm
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SEC-20, "VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM : System Diagram"
Power window system
PWC-9, "System Description"
Retained accessory power (RAP) system
PWC-9, "System Description"
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
WT-8, "System Description"
H
I
BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007827916
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC
J
BCM performs fail-safe control when any DTC are detected.
Display contents of CONSULT
Fail-safe
Cancellation
K
B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM
Inhibit engine cranking
Erase DTC
B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM
Inhibit engine cranking
Erase DTC
B2195: ANTI-SCANNING
Inhibit engine cranking
Ignition switch ON → OFF
B2196: DONGLE NG
Inhibit engine cranking
Erase DTC
B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP
Inhibit engine cranking
Erase DTC
Inhibit engine cranking
500 ms after the following signal communication status becomes consistent
• Starter motor relay control signal
• Starter relay status signal (CAN)
N
Inhibit engine cranking
When any of the following conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch changes to ACC
• Receives engine status signal (CAN)
O
Inhibit engine cranking
When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON
B26F2: IGN RELAY ON
Inhibit engine cranking
When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF
B26F3: START CONT RLY ON
Inhibit engine cranking
When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF
B2608: STARTER RELAY
B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST
B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-7
L
BCS
2012 QUEST
P
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Display contents of CONSULT
Fail-safe
Cancellation
B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF
Inhibit engine cranking
When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON
B26F7: BCM
Inhibit engine cranking
by Intelligent Key system
When room antenna and luggage room antenna functions normally
REAR WIPER MOTOR PROTECTION
BCM detects the rear wiper stopping position according to the rear wiper stop position signal.
When the rear wiper stop position signal does not change for more than 5 seconds while driving the rear
wiper, BCM stops power supply to protect the rear wiper motor.
Condition of cancellation
1.
2.
3.
More than 1 minute is passed after the rear wiper stop.
Turn rear wiper switch OFF.
Operate the rear wiper switch or rear washer switch.
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL OF COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION CAUSED BY LOW
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
If voltage of battery power supply lower, BCM maintains combination switch reading to the status when input
voltage is less than approximately 9 V.
NOTE:
When voltage of battery power supply is approximately 9 V or more, combination switch reading function
returns to normal operation.
COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM
COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007493257
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMMIA0636GB
NOTE:
*: TAIL LAMP switch links lighting switch 1ST and 2ND positions.
OUTLINE
• BCM reads the status of the combination switch (light, turn signal, wiper and washer) and recognizes the
status of each switch.
• BCM has a combination of 5 output terminals (OUTPUT 1 - 5) and 5 input terminals (INPUT 1 - 5). It reads a
maximum of 20 switch status.
COMBINATION SWITCH MATRIX
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-8
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Combination switch circuit
A
B
C
D
E
JMMIA0637GB
F
NOTE:
*: TAIL LAMP switch links lighting switch 1ST and 2ND positions.
G
Combination switch INPUT-OUTPUT system list
System
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
OUTPUT 1
—
FR WASHER
FR WIPER LOW
TURN LH
TURN RH
OUTPUT 2
FR WIPER HI
—
FR WIPER INT
PASSING
HEADLAMP 1
OUTPUT 3
INT VOLUME 1
RR WASHER
—
HEADLAMP 2
HI BEAM
OUTPUT 4
RR WIPER INT
INT VOLUME 3
AUTO LIGHT
—
TAIL LAMP
OUTPUT 5
INT VOLUME 2
RR WIPER ON
—
FR FOG
—
NOTE:
H
I
J
Headlamp has a dual system switch.
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
K
Description
• BCM reads the status of the combination switch at 10 ms interval normally.
L
BCS
N
O
JPMIA0609GB
NOTE:
BCM reads the status of the combination switch at 60 ms interval when BCM is controlled at low power consumption control mode.
• BCM operates as follows and judges the status of the combination switch.
- It operates the transistor on OUTPUT side in the following order: OUTPUT 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5, and outputs
voltage waveform.
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-9
2012 QUEST
P
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
- The voltage waveform of OUTPUT corresponding to the formed circuit is input into the interface on INPUT
side if any (1 or more) switches are ON.
- It reads this change of the voltage as the status signal of the combination switch.
JMMIA0326GB
Operation Example
In the following operation example, the combination of the status signals of the combination switch is replaced
as follows: INPUT 1 - 5 to “1 - 5” and OUTPUT 1 - 5 to “A - E”.
Example 1: When a switch (TAIL LAMP switch) is turned ON
• The circuit between OUTPUT 4 and INPUT 5 is formed when the TAIL LAMP switch is turned ON.
JPMIA1545GB
• BCM detects the combination switch status signal “5D” when the signal of OUTPUT 4 is input to INPUT 5.
• BCM judges that the TAIL LAMP switch is ON when the signal “5D” is detected.
Example 2: When some switches (TURN RH switch, TAIL LAMP switch) are turned ON
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-10
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• The circuits between OUTPUT 1 and INPUT 5 and between OUTPUT 4 and INPUT 5 are formed when the
TURN RH switch and TAIL LAMP switch are turned ON.
A
B
C
D
E
F
JPMIA1546GB
• BCM detects the combination switch status signal “5AD” when the signals of OUTPUT 1 and OUTPUT 4 are
input to INPUT 5.
• BCM judges that the TURN RH switch and TAIL LAMP switch are ON when the signal “5AD” is detected.
G
WIPER INTERMITTENT DIAL POSITION
BCM judges the wiper intermittent dial 1 - 7 by the status of INT VOLUME 1, 2 and 3 switches.
H
Switch status
Wiper intermittent
dial position
INT VOLUME 1
INT VOLUME 2
INT VOLUME 3
1
ON
ON
ON
2
ON
ON
OFF
3
ON
OFF
OFF
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
5
OFF
OFF
ON
6
OFF
ON
ON
7
OFF
ON
OFF
I
J
K
L
NOTE:
For details of wiper intermittent dial position, refer to WW-7, "FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description".
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM
BCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-11
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007493258
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMMIA0858GB
OUTLINE
BCM has the signal transmission function that outputs/transmits each input/received signal to each unit.
Signal transmission function list
Signal name
Input
Output
Description
Inputs the push-button ignition
switch (push switch) signal and
transmits the ignition switch status judged with BCM via CAN
communication.
• Ignition switch ON signal
• ACC signal
Push-button ignition switch
(Push switch)
• IPDM E/R (CAN)
• Driver seat control unit (CAN)
• Sliding door control unit LH
(CAN)
• Sliding door control unit RH
(CAN)
Door switch signal
Any door switch
• Combination meter (CAN)
• IPDM E/R (CAN)
• Driver seat control unit (CAN)
Inputs the door switch signal
and transmits it via CAN communication.
Oil pressure switch signal
IPDM E/R (CAN)
Combination meter (CAN)
Transmits the received oil pressure switch signal via CAN
communication.
Blower fan ON signal
• A/C auto amp. (Auto A/C)
• A/C amp. (Manual A/C)
ECM (CAN)
Input blower fan ON signal, and
transmits it via CAN communication.
A/C ON signal
• A/C auto amp. (Auto A/C)
• A/C amp. (Manual A/C)
ECM (CAN)
Input A/C ON signal, and transmits it via CAN communication.
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-12
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Signal name
Stop lamp switch signal
Interlock/PNP switch signal
Input
Stop lamp relay
TCM
Output
TCM (CAN)
IPDM E/R (CAN)
Description
Inputs the stop lamp switch 1
signal and stop lamp switch 2
signal, and transmits it via CAN
communication.
Inputs the P/N position signal
and transmits Interlock/PNP
switch signal via CAN communication.
A
B
C
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description
D
INFOID:0000000007493259
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
JMMIA0859GB
OUTLINE
• BCM incorporates a power saving control function that reduces the power consumption according to the BCS
vehicle status.
• BCM switches the status (control mode) by itself with the power saving control function. It performs the sleep
request to each unit (IPDM E/R, combination meter, driver seat control unit, automatic back door control N
module, sliding door control unit LH and sliding door control unit RH) that operates with the ignition switch
OFF.
O
Normal mode (wake-up)
- CAN communication is normally performed with other units
- Each control with BCM is operating properly
P
CAN communication sleep mode (CAN sleep)
- CAN transmission is stopped
- Control with BCM only is operating
Low power consumption mode (BCM sleep)
- Low power consumption control is active
- CAN transmission is stopped
LOW POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL WITH BCM
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-13
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
BCM reduces the power consumption with the following operation in the low power consumption mode.
• The reading interval of the each switches changes from 10 ms interval to 60 ms interval.
Sleep mode activation
• BCM receives the sleep-ready signal (ready) from IPDM E/R, combination meter, automatic back door control module, sliding door control unit LH and sliding door control unit RH via CAN communication.
• BCM transmits the sleep wake up signal (sleep) to each unit when all of the CAN sleep conditions are fulfilled.
• Each unit stops the transmission of CAN communication with the sleep wake up signal. BCM is in CAN communication sleep mode.
• BCM is in the low power consumption mode and perform the low power consumption control when all of the
BCM sleep conditions are fulfilled with CAN sleep condition.
Sleep condition
CAN sleep condition
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Receiving the sleep-ready signal (ready) from all units
Ignition switch: OFF
Vehicle security system: Not operation
Warning chime: Not operation
Intelligent Key system buzzer: Not operation
Stop lamp switch: OFF
Turn signal indicator lamp: Not operation
Exterior lamp: OFF
Door lock status: No change
CONSULT communication status: Not communication
Meter display signal: Non-transmission
Door switch status: No change
Rear window defogger: OFF
BCM sleep condition
•
•
•
•
Interior room lamp battery saver: Time out*
RAP system: OFF
NVIS: Not operation
Remote keyless entry receiver communication status: No communication
• LOCK indicator lamp: Not operation
• ACC indicator lamp: Not operation
• ON indicator lamp: Not operation
NOTE:
*: Refer to INL-11, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM : System Description" for details of the interior room lamp battery saver time.
Wake-up operation
• BCM transmits sleep wake up signal (wake up) to each unit when any condition listed below is established,
and then goes into normal mode from low power consumption mode.
• Each unit starts transmissions with CAN communication by receiving sleep wake up signals. Each unit transmit wake up signals to BCM with CAN communication to convey the start of CAN communication.
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-14
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Wake-up condition
BCM wake-up condition
Back door opener switch: OFF → ON
CAN wake-up condition
A
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Receiving the sleep-ready signal (Not-ready) from any units
Push-button ignition switch (push switch): OFF→ ON
Hazard switch: ON
HI BEAM switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
PASSING switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
HEADLAMP 1 switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
HEADLAMP 2 switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
TAIL LAMP switch: OFF → ON
FR FOG switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
TURN RH: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
TURN LH: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
Driver door switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
Passenger door switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
Rear RH door switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
Rear LH door switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
Back door switch: OFF → ON, ON → OFF
Driver door request switch: OFF → ON
Passenger door request switch: OFF → ON
Back door request switch: OFF → ON
Stop lamp switch: ON
Door lock and unlock switch: NEUTRAL → LOCK, NEUTRAL →
UNLOCK
• Front door lock assembly (driver side) (door key cylinder switch):
NEUTRAL → LOCK, NEUTRAL → UNLOCK
• Remote keyless entry receiver communication: Receiving
• Front door lock assembly (driver side) (unlock sensor): OFF →
ON, ON → OFF
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
BCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-15
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)
INFOID:0000000007493260
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Diagnosis mode
Function Description
Work Support
Changes the setting for each system function.
Self Diagnostic Result
Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.
CAN Diag Support Monitor
Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
Data Monitor
The BCM input/output signals are displayed.
Active Test
The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Ecu Identification
The BCM part number is displayed.
Configuration
• Read and save the vehicle specification.
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.
SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item
System
Sub system selection item
Diagnosis mode
Work Support
Data Monitor
Active Test
×
Door lock
DOOR LOCK
×
×
Rear window defogger
REAR DEFOGGER
×
×
Warning chime
BUZZER
×
×
Interior room lamp control system
INT LAMP
×
×
×
Exterior lamp
HEAD LAMP
×
×
×
Wiper and washer
WIPER
×
×
×
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps
FLASHER
×
×
×
Air conditioning control system
AIR CONDITONER
×
×*
• Intelligent Key system
• Engine start system
INTELLIGENT KEY
×
×
Combination switch
COMB SW
Body control system
BCM
×
NVIS
IMMU
×
×
×
Interior room lamp battery saver
BATTERY SAVER
×
×
×
Back door open
TRUNK
Vehicle security system
THEFT ALM
RAP system
RETAINED PWR
×
Signal buffer system
SIGNAL BUFFER
×
×
TPMS
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
NOTE:
*: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used.
FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)
The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on
CONSULT.
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-16
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
CONSULT screen item
Indication/Unit
Description
Vehicle Speed
km/h
Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Odo/Trip Meter
km
Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Vehicle Condition
SLEEP>LOCK
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)]
SLEEP>OFF
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)]
LOCK>ACC
While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC
ACC>ON
While turning power supply position from ACC to ON
RUN>ACC
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except
emergency stop operation)
CRANK>RUN
While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN
RUN>URGENT
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation)
ACC>OFF
While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF)
OFF>LOCK
OFF>ACC
IGN Counter
A
Power position status of
the moment a particular
DTC is detected*
C
D
E
F
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF
(LOCK)
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC
ON>CRANK
While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK
OFF>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK
Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)
OFF
Power supply position is OFF (OFF)
ACC
Power supply position is ACC
ON
Power supply position is ON
ENGINE RUN
Power supply position is RUN
CRANKING
Power supply position is CRANK
0 - 39
B
G
H
I
J
K
The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected
• The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
• The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition
whenever ignition switch OFF → ON.
• The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
NOTE:
L
BCS
*: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position.
• OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF
• ACC: Ignition switch ACC
N
• IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped
• RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running
• CRANK: At engine cranking
Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P
position, and any of the following conditions are met.
O
• Closing door
P
• Opening door
• Door is locked using door request switch
• Door is locked using Intelligent Key
The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”.
DOOR LOCK
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-17
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)
INFOID:0000000007860704
BCM CONSULT FUNCTION
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
WORK SUPPORT
Monitor item
Description
DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET
Selective unlock function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT
Automatic door lock function mode can be selected from the following in this mode
• VH SPD: All doors are locked when vehicle speed more than 24 km/h (15 MPH)
• P RANGE: All doors are locked when shifting the selector lever from P position to other than
the P position
AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK
SELECT
Automatic door unlock function mode can be selected from the following in this mode
• MODE 1: All doors are unlocked when the power supply position is changed from ON to
OFF
• MODE 2: All doors are unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position other
than the P to P position
• MODE 3: Driver side door is unlocked when the power supply position is changed from ON
to OFF
• MODE 4: Driver side door is unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position other than the P to P position
• MODE 5: This item is displayed, but cannot be used
• MODE 6: This item is displayed, but cannot be used
AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK
SET
Automatic door lock/unlock function mode can be selected from the following in this mode
• Off: Non-operation
• Unlock Only: Door unlock operation only
• Lock Only: Door lock operation only
• Lock/Unlock: Lock and unlock operation
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item
Contents
REQ SW-DR
Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW-AS
Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
REQ SW-BD/TR
Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door request switch
DOOR SW-DR
Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side)
DOOR SW-AS
Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side)
DOOR SW-RR
Indicated [On/Off] condition of sliding door switch RH
DOOR SW-RL
Indicated [On/Off] condition of sliding door switch LH
DOOR SW-BK
Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door switch
CDL LOCK SW
Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door lock unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW
Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door lock unlock switch
KEY CYL LK-SW
Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door key cylinder switch
KEY CYL UN-SW
Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder switch
ACTIVE TEST
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-18
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test item
Description
A
This test is able to check door lock/unlock operation
• The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The all door lock actuators are unlocked when “ALL UNLK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The front door lock actuator (driver side) is unlocked when “DR UNLK” on CONSULT screen is
touched
• The front door lock actuator (passenger side) is unlocked when “AS UNLK” on CONSULT
screen is touched
• The door lock actuator (other) is unlocked when “OTR ULK” on CONSULT screen is touched
DOOR LOCK
B
C
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER)
D
INFOID:0000000007860703
E
Data monitor
Monitor Item
Description
REAR DEF SW
Displays “Press (ON)/other (OFF)” status determined with the rear window defogger switch.
PUSH SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push switch.
F
G
ACTIVE TEST
Test Item
REAR DEFOGGER
Description
H
Rear window defogger operates when ON on CONSULT screen is touched.
BUZZER
I
BUZZER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BUZZER)
INFOID:0000000007860713
CONSULT APPLICATION ITEMS
Test item
BUZZER
J
Diagnosis mode
Description
Data Monitor
Displays BCM input data in real time.
Active Test
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending driving signal to them.
K
DATA MONITOR
L
Display item
[Unit]
Description
BCS
PUSH SW
[On/Off]
Status of push-button ignition switch judged by BCM.
UNLK SEN-DR
[On/Off]
Status of unlock sensor judged by BCM.
VEH SPEED 1
[km/h]
Value of vehicle speed signal received from combination meter with CAN communication line.
TAIL LAMP SW
[On/Off]
Status of lighting switch judged by BCM using the combination switch readout function.
FR FOG SW
[On/Off]
Status of front fog lamp switch judged by BCM using the combination switch readout function.
DOOR SW-DR
[On/Off]
Status of driver side door switch judged by BCM.
CDL LOCK SW
[On/Off]
Status of door lock unlock switch judged by BCM.
N
O
ACTIVE TEST
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-19
2012 QUEST
P
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Display item
[Unit]
Description
SEAT BELT WARN TEST
The seat belt warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off).
ID REGIST WARNING
The ID regist warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off).
LIGHT WARN ALM
The light warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off).
INT LAMP
INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - INT LAMP)
INFOID:0000000007860700
WORK SUPPORT
JPLIA0093GB
Service item
ROOM LAMP TIMER SET
SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON
ROOM LAMP ON TIME SET
ROOM LAMP OFF TIME SET
R LAMP TIMER LOGIC SET
Setting item
Setting
MODE 2
7.5 sec.
MODE 3*
15 sec.
MODE 4
30 sec.
Sets the interior room lamp ON time. (Timer operating time)
On*
With the interior room lamp timer function
Off
Without the interior room lamp timer function
MODE 1
0.5 sec.
MODE 2*
1 sec.
MODE 3
2 sec.
MODE 4
3 sec.
MODE 5
0 sec.
MODE 1
0.5 sec.
Sets the interior room lamp gradual brightening time.
MODE 2*
1 sec.
MODE 3
2 sec.
MODE 4
3 sec.
MODE 5
0 sec.
MODE 1*
Interior room lamp timer activates with synchronizing all doors.
MODE 2
Interior room lamp timer activates with synchronizing the driver door
only.
Sets the interior room lamp gradual dimming time.
*: Factory setting
DATA MONITOR
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-20
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor item
[Unit]
A
Description
REQ SW-DR
[On/Off]
The switch status input from door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW-AS
[On/Off]
The switch status input from door request switch (passenger side)
B
REQ SW-RR
[On/Off]
C
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
REQ SW-RL
[On/Off]
D
PUSH SW
[On/Off]
The switch status input from push-button ignition switch
UNLK SEN -DR
[On/Off]
Driver door unlock status input from unlock sensor
DOOR SW-DR
[On/Off]
The switch status input from front door switch (driver side)
DOOR SW-AS
[On/Off]
The switch status input from front door switch (passenger side)
DOOR SW-RR
[On/Off]
The switch status input from sliding door switch RH
DOOR SW- RL
[On/Off]
The switch status input from sliding door switch LH
DOOR SW- BK
[On/Off]
The switch status input from back door switch
CDL LOCK SW
[On/Off]
Lock switch status input from door lock and unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW
[On/Off]
Unlock switch status input from door lock and unlock switch
TRNK/HAT MNTR
[On/Off]
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored
KEY CYL LK-SW
[On/Off]
Lock switch status received from door key cylinder switch
KEY CYL UN-SW
[On/Off]
Unlock switch status received from door key cylinder switch
RKE-LOCK
[On/Off]
Lock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver
RKE-UNLOCK
[On/Off]
Unlock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
BCS
ACTIVE TEST
Test item
INT LAMP
STEP LAMP TEST
Operation
N
Description
On
Outputs the interior room lamp control signal to turn the interior room lamps ON.
[Map lamp, personal lamp (when applicable lamps switch is in DOOR position.)]
Off
Stops the interior room lamp control signal to turn the interior room lamps.
On
Outputs the step lamp control signal to turn the step lamps ON.
Off
Stops the step lamp control signal to turn the step lamps ON.
P
HEADLAMP
HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - HEADLAMP)
INFOID:0000000007860131
WORK SUPPORT
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-21
O
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Service item
Setting item
MODE 1*3
CUSTOM A/LIGHT SETTING*1
BATTERY SAVER SET
More sensitive setting than normal setting (Turns ON earlier than normal operation)
MODE 3
More sensitive setting than MODE 2 (Turns ON earlier than MODE 2)
MODE 4
Less sensitive setting than normal setting (Turns ON later than normal operation.)
On*
3
MODE 1*3
With the exterior lamp battery saver function
Without the exterior lamp battery saver function
45 sec.
MODE 2
Without the
function
MODE 3
30 sec.
MODE 4
60 sec.
MODE 5
90 sec.
MODE 6
120 sec.
MODE 7
150 sec.
MODE 8
180 sec.
MODE 1*3
AUTO LIGHT LOGIC SET*2
Normal
MODE 2
Off
ILL DELAY SET*1
Setting
Sets delay timer function timer operation time.
(All doors closed)
With twilight ON custom & with wiper INT, LO and HI
MODE 2
With twilight ON custom & with wiper LO and HI
MODE 3
With twilight ON custom & without
MODE 4
Without twilight ON custom & with wiper INT, LO and HI
MODE 5
Without twilight ON custom & with wiper LO and HI
MODE 6
Without twilight ON custom & without
*1: For models without auto light system, this item is displayed but is not operated.
*2: For models without auto light system and all models for Canada, this item is displayed but is not operated.
*3: Factory setting
DATA MONITOR
Monitor item
[Unit]
Description
PUSH SW
[On/Off]
The switch status input from push-button ignition switch
ENGINE STATE
[Stop/Stall/Crank/Run]
The engine status received from ECM with CAN communication
VEH SPEED 1
[km/h]
The value of the vehicle speed received from combination meter via CAN communication
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-22
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor item
[Unit]
Description
A
TURN SIGNAL R
[On/Off]
B
TURN SIGNAL L
[On/Off]
TAIL LAMP SW
[On/Off]
C
HI BEAM SW
[On/Off]
D
HEAD LAMP SW1
[On/Off]
Each switch status that BCM judges from the combination switch reading function
HEAD LAMP SW2
[On/Off]
E
PASSING SW
[On/Off]
AUTO LIGHT SW*1
[On/Off]
F
FR FOG SW*2
[On/Off]
G
DOOR SW-DR
[On/Off]
The switch status input from front door switch (driver side)
DOOR SW-AS
[On/Off]
The switch status input from front door switch (passenger side)
DOOR SW-RR
[On/Off]
The switch status input from sliding door switch RH
DOOR SW- RL
[On/Off]
The switch status input from sliding door switch LH
DOOR SW-BK
[On/Off]
The switch status input from back door switch
OPTICAL SENSOR
[On/Off/NG]
NOTE:
This item is indicated, but can not monitored
H
I
J
K
1
OPTI SEN (DTCT)*
[V]
The value of outside brightness voltage input from the optical sensor
OPTI SEN (FILT)*1
[V]
The value of outside brightness voltage filtered by BCM
L
*1: For models without auto light system, this item is not displayed.
*2: For models without front fog lamp, this item is displayed but is not monitored.
BCS
ACTIVE TEST
N
Test item
TAIL LAMP
HEAD LAMP
FR FOG LAMP*1
Revision: 2011 September
Operation
Description
On
Transmits the position light request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communication to turn the tail lamp ON
Off
Stops the tail lamp request signal transmission
Hi
Transmits the high beam request signal via CAN communication to turn
the headlamp (HI)
Lo
Transmits the low beam request signal via CAN communication to turn
the headlamp (LO)
Off
Stops the high & low beam request signal transmission
On
Transmits the front fog light request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communication to turn the front fog lamp ON
Off
Stops the front light request signal transmission
BCS-23
2012 QUEST
O
P
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test item
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT*2
Operation
Description
On
Transmits the daytime running light request signal via CAN communication to IPDM E/R
Off
Stop the daytime running light request signal transmission
• Transmits the dimmer signal to combination meter via CAN communi-
ILL DIM SIGNAL
On
cation and dims combination meter*3
• Transmits the dimmer signal to AV control unit and dims display
Off
Stops the dimmer signal transmission
*1: For models without front fog lamp, this item is displayed but is not tested.
*2: For models without daytime running light system, this item is not displayed.
*3: Except for CANADA
WIPER
WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM - WIPER)
INFOID:0000000007860702
WORK SUPPORT
Service item
Setting item
Description
On
With vehicle speed
(Front wiper intermittent time linked with the vehicle speed and wiper intermittent dial position)
Off*
Without vehicle speed
(Front wiper intermittent time linked with the wiper intermittent dial
position)
WIPER SPEED
SETTING
The setting of front wiper INT operation can be
changed
*: Factory setting
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item
[Unit]
Description
PUSH SW
[Off/On]
The switch status input from push-button ignition switch.
VEH SPEED 1
[km/h]
Displays the value of the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter via CAN communication.
FR WIPER HI
[Off/On]
FR WIPER LOW
[Off/On]
FR WASHER SW
[Off/On]
Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch reading function
FR WIPER INT
[Off/On]
FR WIPER STOP
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the front wiper stop position signal received from IPDM E/R via CAN
communication.
INT VOLUME
[1 − 7]
Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch reading function
RR WIPER ON
[Off/On]
RR WIPER INT
[Off/On]
Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch reading function
RR WASHER SW
[Off/On]
RR WIPER STOP
[Off/On]
Revision: 2011 September
Rear wiper motor (stop position) status input from the rear wiper motor
BCS-24
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
ACTIVE TEST
A
Test item
Operation
Description
Hi
Transmits the front wiper request signal (HI) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication to operate the front wiper HI operation.
Lo
Transmits the front wiper request signal (LO) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication to
operate the front wiper LO operation.
INT
Transmits the front wiper request signal (INT) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication to
operate the front wiper INT operation.
Off
Stops transmitting the front wiper request signal to stop the front wiper operation.
On
Output the voltage to operate the rear wiper motor.
Off
Stops the voltage to stop the rear wiper motor.
FR WIPER
RR WIPER
B
C
D
FLASHER
E
FLASHER : CONSULT Function (BCM - FLASHER)
INFOID:0000000007860132
F
WORK SUPPORT
Service item
HAZARD ANSWER
BACK
Setting item
Setting
Lock Only
With locking only
Unlk Only
With unlocking only
Lock&Unlk*
Off
With locking/unlocking
G
Sets the hazard warning lamp answer back function
when the door is lock/unlock with the request switch or
the key fob.
H
Without the function
*: Factory setting
I
DATA MONITOR
Monitor item
[Unit]
REQ SW-DR
[On/Off]
The switch status input from the request switch (driver side)
REQ SW-AS
[On/Off]
The switch status input from the request switch (passenger side)
PUSH SW
[On/Off]
The switch status input from the push-button ignition switch
TURN SIGNAL R
[On/Off]
TURN SIGNAL L
[On/Off]
J
Description
K
L
Each switch status that BCM detects from the combination switch reading function
HAZARD SW
[On/Off]
The switch status input from the hazard switch
RKE-LOCK
[On/Off]
Lock signal status received from the remote keyless entry receiver
RKE-UNLOCK
[On/Off]
Unlock signal status received from the remote keyless entry receiver
RKE-PANIC
[On/Off]
Panic alarm signal status received from the remote keyless entry receiver
N
O
ACTIVE TEST
Revision: 2011 September
BCS
BCS-25
2012 QUEST
P
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test item
FLASHER
Operation
Description
RH
Outputs the voltage to blink the right side turn signal lamps.
LH
Outputs the voltage to blink the left side turn signal lamps.
Off
Stops the voltage to turn the turn signal lamps OFF.
AIR CONDITIONER
AIR CONDITIONER : CONSULT Function (BCM - AIR CONDITIONER) (Auto A/C)
INFOID:0000000007862802
DATA MONITOR
Display Item List
Monitor Item [Unit]
Contents
FAN ON SIG
[On/Off]
Displays the status of blower fan ON signal received from A/C auto amp.
AIR COND SW
[On/Off]
Displays the status of A/C ON signal received from A/C auto amp.
AIR CONDITIONER : CONSULT Function (BCM - AIR CONDITIONER) (Manual A/C)
INFOID:0000000007862803
DATA MONITOR
Display Item List
Monitor Item [Unit]
Contents
FAN ON SIG
[On/Off]
Displays the status of blower fan ON signal received from A/C amp.
AIR COND SW
[On/Off]
Displays the status of A/C ON signal received from A/C amp.
INTELLIGENT KEY
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)
INFOID:0000000007860705
WORK SUPPORT
Monitor item
Description
INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS
This function allows inside key antenna self-diagnosis
LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY
Door lock/unlock function by door request switch mode can be changed to operation in this
mode
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
ENGINE START BY I-KEY
Engine start function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
TRUNK/GLASS HATCH OPEN
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
PANIC ALARM SET
Panic alarm button pressing time on Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following
with this mode
• MODE 1: 0.5 sec
• MODE 2: Non-operation
• MODE 3: 1.5 sec
TRUNK OPEN DELAY
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN
Intelligent Key low battery warning mode can be changed to operation with this mode
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-26
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor item
Description
A
ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI
Key reminder function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
HAZARD ANSWER BACK
Hazard reminder function mode by door request switch and Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following with this mode
• Lock Only: Door lock operation only
• Unlock Only: Door unlock operation only
• Lock/Unlock: Lock and unlock operation
• Off: Non-operation
ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK
Buzzer reminder function (lock operation) mode by door request switch can be selected from
the following with this mode
• Horn Chirp: Sound horn
• Buzzer: Sound Intelligent Key warning buzzer
• Off: Non-operation
ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK
Buzzer reminder function (unlock operation) mode by door request switch can be changed to
operation with this mode
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
SHORT CRANKING OUTPUT
Starter motor can operate during the times below
• 70 msec
• 100 msec
• 200 msec
CONFIRM KEY FOB ID
It can be checked whether Intelligent Key ID code is registered or not in this mode
AUTO LOCK SET
Auto door lock operation time can be changed in this mode
• MODE 1: OFF
• MODE 2: 30 sec
• MODE 3: 1 minute
• MODE 4: 2 minutes
• MODE 5: 3 minutes
• MODE 6: 4 minutes
• MODE 7: 5 minutes
HORN WITH KEYLESS LOCK
Horn reminder function mode by Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following with
this mode
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
PW DOWN SET
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Unlock button pressing time on Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following with
this mode
• MODE 1: 3 sec
• MODE 2: Non-operation
• MODE 3: 5 sec
SELF-DIAG RESULT
K
L
BCS
Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
N
Monitor Item
Condition
REQ SW -DR
Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW -AS
Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
REQ SW -BD/TR
Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door request switch
PUSH SW
Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
CLUTCH SW
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
BRAKE SW 1
Indicates [On/Off]* condition of stop lamp switch power supply
BRAKE SW 2
Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop lamp switch
DETE/CANCL SW
Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position
SFT PN/N SW
Indicates [On/Off] condition of P or N position
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-27
O
P
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item
Condition
S/L -LOCK
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
S/L -UNLOCK
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
S/L RELAY -F/B
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
UNLK SEN -DR
Indicates [On/Off] condition of driver door UNLOCK status
PUSH SW -IPDM
Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
IGN RLY1 -F/B
Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition relay 1
DETE SW -IPDM
Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position
SFT PN -IPDM
Indicates [On/Off] condition of P or N position
SFT P -MET
Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position
SFT N -MET
Indicates [On/Off] condition of N position
ENGINE STATE
Indicates [Stop/Stall/Crank/Run] condition of engine states
S/L LOCK-IPDM
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
S/L UNLK-IPDM
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
S/L RELAY-REQ
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
VEH SPEED 1
Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value [km/h]
VEH SPEED 2
Display the vehicle speed signal received from ABS or VDC or TCM by numerical value [km/h]
DOOR STAT-DR
Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of unlock sensor
DOOR STAT-AS
Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of passenger side door status
ID OK FLAG
Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of key ID
PRMT ENG STRT
Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of engine start possibility
PRMT RKE STRT
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
TRNK/HAT MNTR
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
RKE-LOCK
Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key
RKE-UNLOCK
Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key
RKE-TR/BD
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
RKE-PANIC
Indicates [On/Off] condition of PANIC button of Intelligent Key
RKE-MODE CHG
Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from Intelligent Key
RKE OPE COUN1
When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intelligent Key, the numerical value start changing
RKE OPE COUN2
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
*: OFF is displayed when brake pedal is depressed while brake switch power supply is OFF.
ACTIVE TEST
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-28
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test item
Description
A
BATTERY SAVER
This test is able to check interior room lamp operation
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
OUTSIDE BUZZER
This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
INSIDE BUZZER
This test is able to check warning chime in combination meter operation
• Take Out: Take away warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched
• Key: Key warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched
• Knob: OFF position warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched
• Off: Non-operation
B
C
D
INDICATOR
This test is able to check warning lamp operation
• KEY ON: “KEY” Warning lamp illuminates when CONSULT screen is touched
• KEY IND: “KEY” Warning lamp blinks when CONSULT screen is touched
• Off: Non-operation
E
INT LAMP
This test is able to check interior room lamp operation
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
F
LCD
This test is able to check meter display information
• Engine start information displays when “BP N” on CONSULT screen is touched
• Engine start information displays when “BP I” on CONSULT screen is touched
• Key ID warning displays when “ID NG” on CONSULT screen is touched
• ROTAT: This item is displayed, but cannot be used.
• P position warning displays when “SFT P” on CONSULT screen is touched
• INSRT: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
• BATT: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
• Take away through window warning displays when “NO KY” on CONSULT screen is
touched
• Take away warning display when “OUTKEY” on CONSULT screen is touched
• OFF position warning display when “LK WN” on CONSULT screen is touched
G
H
I
J
FLASHER
This test is able to check hazard warning lamp operation
• LH: LH side hazard warning lamps operate
• RH: RH side hazard warning lamps operate
• Off: Non-operation
P RANGE
This test is able to check CVT shift selector power supply
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
ENGINE SW ILLUMI
This test is able to check push-button ignition switch illumination operation
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
LOCK INDICATOR
This test is able to check LOCK indicator (push-button ignition switch) operation
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check ACC indicator (push-button ignition switch) operation
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
N
ACC INDICATOR
IGNITION ON IND
This test is able to check ON indicator (push-button ignition switch) operation
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
O
HORN
This test is able to check horn operation
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
POWER SLIDE DOOR
This test is able to check automatic siding door operation
• RR PSD ON: Auto open/close operate
• RL PSD ON: Auto open/close operate
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-29
K
L
BCS
P
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
COMB SW
COMB SW : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMB SW)
INFOID:0000000007493271
DATA MONITOR
Monitor item [UNIT]
Description
FR WIPER HI
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the FR WIPER HI switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
switch reading function.
FR WIPER LOW
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the FR WIPER LOW switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
switch reading function.
FR WASHER SW
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the FR WASHER switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
switch reading function.
FR WIPER INT
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the FR WIPER INT switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
switch reading function.
INT VOLUME
[1 - 7]
Displays the status of wiper intermittent dial position judged by BCM with the combination switch reading
function.
RR WIPER ON
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the RR WIPER ON switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
switch reading function.
RR WIPER INT
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the RR WIPER INT switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
switch reading function.
RR WASHER SW
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the RR WASHER switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
switch reading function.
TURN SIGNAL R
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the TURN RH switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch
reading function.
TURN SIGNAL L
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the TURN LH switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch
reading function.
TAIL LAMP SW
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the TAIL LAMP switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
switch reading function.
HI BEAM SW
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the HI BEAM switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch
reading function.
HEAD LAMP SW 1
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the HEADLAMP 1 switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
switch reading function.
HEAD LAMP SW 2
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the HEADLAMP 2 switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
switch reading function.
PASSING SW
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the PASSING switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch
reading function.
AUTO LIGHT SW
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the AUTO LIGHT switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination
switch reading function.
FR FOG SW
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the FR FOG switch in combination switch judged by BCM with the combination switch
reading function.
BCM
BCM : CONSULT Function (BCM - BCM)
INFOID:0000000007493272
WORK SUPPORT
Item
RESET SETTING VALUE
Description
Return a value set with Work Support of each system to a default value in factory shipment.
IMMU
IMMU : CONSULT Function (BCM - IMMU)
INFOID:0000000007860708
WORK SUPPORT
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-30
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Service item
CONFIRM DONGLE ID
Description
A
It is possible to check that dongle unit is applied to the vehicle.
DATA MONITOR
B
Monitor item
Content
CONFRM ID ALL
CONFIRM ID4
CONFIRM ID3
CONFIRM ID2
C
Indicates [YET] at all time.
Switches to [DONE] when a registered Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch.
D
CONFIRM ID1
NOT REGISTERED
Indicates [ID OK] when key ID that is registered is received or is not yet received.
Indicates [ID NG] when key ID that is not registered is received.
E
Indicates the number of IDs that are registered.
F
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push-button ignition switch.
G
TP 4
TP 3
TP 2
TP 1
PUSH SW
ACTIVE TEST
H
Test item
Description
This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation.
Security indicator lamp is turned on when “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched.
THEFT IND
I
BATTERY SAVER
BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BATTERY SAVER)
INFOID:0000000007860701
J
WORK SUPPORT
K
Service item
ROOM LAMP TIMER SET
BATTERY SAVER SET
Setting item
Setting
MODE 1
30 min.
MODE 2
60 min.
MODE 3*
15 min.
On*
With the exterior lamp battery saver function
Off
Without the exterior lamp battery saver function
Sets the interior room lamp battery saver timer operating
time.
L
BCS
*:Factory setting
N
DATA MONITOR
Monitor item
[Unit]
REQ SW-DR
[On/Off]
The switch status input from door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW-AS
[On/Off]
The switch status input from door request switch (passenger side)
REQ SW-RR
[On/Off]
REQ SW-RL
[On/Off]
Revision: 2011 September
O
Description
P
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
BCS-31
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor item
[Unit]
Description
PUSH SW
[On/Off]
The switch status input from push-button ignition switch
UNLK SEN -DR
[On/Off]
Driver door unlock status input from unlock sensor
DOOR SW-DR
[On/Off]
The switch status input from front door switch (driver side)
DOOR SW-AS
[On/Off]
The switch status input from front door switch (passenger side)
DOOR SW-RR
[On/Off]
The switch status input from sliding door switch RH
DOOR SW- RL
[On/Off]
The switch status input from sliding door switch LH
DOOR SW- BK
[On/Off]
The switch status input from back door switch
CDL LOCK SW
[On/Off]
Lock switch status input from door lock and unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW
[On/Off]
Unlock switch status input from door lock and unlock switch
TRNK/HAT MNTR
[On/Off]
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored
KEY CYL LK-SW
[On/Off]
Lock switch status received from door key cylinder switch
KEY CYL UN-SW
[On/Off]
Unlock switch status received from door key cylinder switch
RKE-LOCK
[On/Off]
Lock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver
RKE-UNLOCK
[On/Off]
Unlock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver
ACTIVE TEST
Test item
Operation
BATTERY SAVER
Description
Off
Cuts the interior room lamp power supply to turn interior room lamps OFF.
On
Outputs the interior room lamp power supply to turn interior room lamps ON.*
*: Each lamp switch is in ON position.
TRUNK
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK)
INFOID:0000000007860706
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item
Contents
PUSH SW
Indicates [On/Off] condition of push switch
UNLK SEN -DR
Indicates [On/Off] condition of unlock sensor
VEH SPEED 1
Indicates [km/h] condition of vehicle speed signal from combination meter
TR/BD OPEN SW
Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door opener switch
TRNK/HAT MNTR
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
RKE-TR/BD
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
THEFT ALM
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-32
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
THEFT ALM : CONSULT Function (BCM - THEFT)
INFOID:0000000007860707
A
WORK SUPPORT
Service Item
B
Description
SECURITY ALARM SET
This mode is able to confirm and change security alarm ON-OFF setting.
THEFT ALM TRG
The switch which triggered vehicle security alarm is recorded.
This mode is able to confirm and erase the record of vehicle security alarm.
The trigger data can be erased by touching “CLEAR” on CONSULT screen.
C
DATA MONITOR
D
Monitored Item
Description
REQ SW -DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door request switch (driver side).
REQ SW -AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of door request switch (passenger side).
REQ SW -RR
NOTE:
This is displayed even when it is not equipped.
REQ SW -RL
NOTE:
This is displayed even when it is not equipped.
REQ SW -BD/TR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door request switch.
PUSH SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push-button ignition switch
UNLK SEN -DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of driver door UNLOCK status.
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (driver side).
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of front door switch (passenger side).
DOOR SW-RR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch RH.
DOOR SW-RL
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of rear door switch LH.
DOOR SW-BK
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door switch.
CDL LOCK SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door lock/unlock switch.
CDL UNLOCK SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door lock/unlock switch.
KEY CYL LK-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of lock signal from door key cylinder.
KEY CYL UN-SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder.
TR/BD OPEN SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door opener switch.
TRNK/HAT MNTR
NOTE:
This is displayed even when it is not equipped.
RKE-LOCK
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key.
RKE-UNLOCK
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key.
RKE-TR/BD
NOTE:
This is displayed even when it is not equipped.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
BCS
N
ACTIVE TEST
Test Item
Description
O
THEFT IND
This test is able to check security indicator lamp operation.
Security indicator lamp is turned on when “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched.
VEHICLE SECURITY HORN
This test is able to check horns operation.
Horns are activated for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched.
HEADLAMP(HI)
This test is able to check headlamp operation.
Headlamps are activated for 0.5 seconds after “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched.
FLASHER
This test is able to check hazard warning lamp operation.
Hazard warning lamps are activated after “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched.
P
RETAIND PWR
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-33
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
RETAIND PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM - RETAINED PWR)
INFOID:0000000007860709
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item
Description
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of driver side door switch.
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of passenger side door switch.
SIGNAL BUFFER
SIGNAL BUFFER : CONSULT Function (BCM - SIGNAL BUFFER)
INFOID:0000000007493278
DATA MONITOR
Monitor item [UNIT]
Description
PUSH SW
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the push-button ignition switch (push switch) judged by BCM.
ACTIVE TEST
Operation
Test item
OIL PRESSURE SW
Description
Off
OFF
On
BCM transmits the oil pressure switch signal to the combination meter via CAN communication, which illuminates the oil pressure warning lamp in the combination meter.
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR : CONSULT Function (BCM - AIR PRESSURE MONITOR)
INFOID:0000000007860712
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Diagnosis mode
Function Description
Self Diagnostic Result
Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items.
Data Monitor
Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time.
Active Test
Send the drive signal from CONSULT to the actuator. The operation check can be performed.
Work Support
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitor item (Unit)
Remarks
AIR PRESS FL
(kPa kg/cm2 or Psi)
AIR PRESS FR
(kPa, kg/cm2 or Psi)
AIR PRESS RR
(kPa, kg/cm2 or Psi)
Tire pressure
AIR PRESS RL
(kPa, kg/cm2 or Psi)
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-34
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor item (Unit)
Remarks
A
ID REGST FL1
(Yet, Done)
ID REGST FR1
(Yet, Done)
B
Registration ID
ID REGST RR1
(Yet, Done)
C
ID REGST RL1
(Yet, Done)
WARNING LAMP
(On/Off)
Low tire pressure warning lamp
BUZZER
(On/Off)
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be use this item.
D
E
ACTIVE TEST MODE
NOTE:
After completing the work below, perform an active test.
1. Check ID registration state and perform self-diagnosis.
2. Erase the self-diagnosis result history.
F
Item
G
Description
WARNING LAMP
Low tire pressure warning lamp can be turned ON arbitrarily.
ID REGIST WARNING
NOTE:
Displayed but not used in TPMS.
RUN FLAT TIRE W/L
NOTE:
Displayed but not used in TPMS.
RUN FLAT/T WARN BUZZER
NOTE:
Displayed but not used in TPMS.
FLASHER
Turn signal lamps can be turned ON arbitrarily.
HORN
This test is able to check to check that the horn sounds.
H
I
J
WORK SUPPORT
K
Item
Description
ID READ
Registered tire pressure sensor ID can be displayed.
ID REGIST
Tire pressure sensor ID can be registered.
L
BCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-35
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
BCM
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000007493280
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
CONSULT MONITOR ITEM
Monitor Item
FR WIPER HI
FR WIPER LOW
FR WASHER SW
FR WIPER INT
FR WIPER STOP
INT VOLUME
RR WIPER ON
RR WIPER INT
RR WASHER SW
RR WIPER STOP
TURN SIGNAL R
TURN SIGNAL L
TAIL LAMP SW
HI BEAM SW
HEAD LAMP SW 1
HEAD LAMP SW 2
PASSING SW
AUTO LIGHT SW
FR FOG SW
Revision: 2011 September
Condition
Value/Status
Other than front wiper switch HI
Off
Front wiper switch HI
On
Other than front wiper switch LO
Off
Front wiper switch LO
On
Front washer switch OFF
Off
Front washer switch ON
On
Other than front wiper switch INT
Off
Front wiper switch INT
On
Front wiper is not in STOP position
Off
Front wiper is in STOP position
On
Wiper intermittent dial is in a dial position 1 - 7
Wiper intermittent dial
position
Other than rear wiper switch ON
Off
Rear wiper switch ON
On
Other than rear wiper switch INT
Off
Rear wiper switch INT
On
Rear washer switch OFF
Off
Rear washer switch ON
On
Rear wiper is in STOP position
Off
Rear wiper is not in STOP position
On
Other than turn signal switch RH
Off
Turn signal switch RH
On
Other than turn signal switch LH
Off
Turn signal switch LH
On
Other than lighting switch 1ST and 2ND
Off
Lighting switch 1ST or 2ND
On
Other than lighting switch HI
Off
Lighting switch HI
On
Other than lighting switch 2ND
Off
Lighting switch 2ND
On
Other than lighting switch 2ND
Off
Lighting switch 2ND
On
Other than lighting switch PASS
Off
Lighting switch PASS
On
Other than lighting switch AUTO
Off
Lighting switch AUTO
On
Front fog lamp switch OFF
Off
Front fog lamp switch ON
On
BCS-36
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
DOOR SW-DR
DOOR SW-AS
DOOR SW-RR
DOOR SW-RL
DOOR SW-BK
CDL LOCK SW
CDL UNLOCK SW
KEY CYL LK-SW
KEY CYL UN-SW
HAZARD SW
REAR DEF SW
TR/BD OPEN SW
TRNK/HAT MNTR
FAN ON SIG
AIR COND SW
RKE-LOCK
RKE-UNLOCK
RKE-TR/BD
RKE-PANIC
RKE-MODE CHG
Condition
Driver door closed
Off
Driver door opened
On
Passenger door closed
Off
Passenger door opened
On
Sliding door RH closed
Off
Sliding door RH opened
On
Sliding door LH closed
Off
Sliding door LH opened
On
Back door closed
Off
Back door opened
On
Other than power door lock switch LOCK
Off
Power door lock switch LOCK
On
Other than power door lock switch UNLOCK
Off
Power door lock switch UNLOCK
On
Other than driver door key cylinder LOCK position
Off
Driver door key cylinder LOCK position
On
Other than driver door key cylinder UNLOCK position
Off
Driver door key cylinder UNLOCK position
On
Hazard switch is OFF
Off
Hazard switch is ON
On
Rear window defogger switch OFF
Off
Rear window defogger switch ON
On
Back door opener switch OFF
Off
While the back door opener switch is turned ON
On
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Off
Blower fan OFF
Off
Blower fan ON
On
• Air conditioner OFF (A/C switch indicator OFF) (Automatic A/C)
• A/C switch OFF (Manual A/C)
Off
• Air conditioner ON (A/C switch indicator ON) (Automatic A/C)
• A/C switch ON (Manual A/C)
On
LOCK button of the key is not pressed
Off
LOCK button of the key is pressed
On
UNLOCK button of the key is not pressed
Off
UNLOCK button of the key is pressed
On
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Off
PANIC button of the key is not pressed
Off
PANIC button of the key is pressed
On
LOCK/UNLOCK button of the key is not pressed and held simultaneously
Off
LOCK/UNLOCK button of the key is pressed and held simultaneously
On
Air bag signal (NORMAL) is detected.
SHOCK SENSOR
Revision: 2011 September
Value/Status
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
BCS
NOMAL
Air bag signal (AIR BAG OPEN) is detected.
On
Air bag signal is not detected.
Off
BCS-37
A
2012 QUEST
N
O
P
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
OPTI SEN (DTCT)
OPTI SEN (FILT)
Condition
Value/Status
Bright outside of the vehicle
Close to 5 V
Dark outside of the vehicle
Close to 0 V
Bright outside of the vehicle (Lighting switch AUTO)
Close to 5 V
Dark outside of the vehicle (Lighting switch AUTO)
Close to 1.50 V
OPTICAL SENSOR
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Off
RAIN SENSOR
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Off
Driver door request switch is not pressed
Off
Driver door request switch is pressed
On
Passenger door request switch is not pressed
Off
Passenger door request switch is pressed
On
REQ SW -RR
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Off
REQ SW -RL
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Off
Back door request switch is not pressed
Off
Back door request switch is pressed
On
REQ SW -DR
REQ SW -AS
REQ SW -BD/TR
Push-button ignition switch (push switch) is not pressed
Off
Push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pressed
On
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Off
The brake pedal is not depressed
Off
The brake pedal is depressed
On
The brake pedal is depressed when No. 7 fuse is blown
Off
The brake pedal is not depressed when No. 7 fuse is blown, or No. 7 fuse
is normal
On
Selector lever in P position
Off
Selector lever in any position other than P
On
Selector lever in any position other than P and N
Off
Selector lever in P or N position
On
S/L -LOCK
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Off
S/L -UNLOCK
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Off
S/L RELAY-F/B
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Off
Driver door is locked
Off
Driver door is unlocked
On
Push-button ignition switch (push-switch) is not pressed
Off
Push-button ignition switch (push-switch) is pressed
On
Ignition switch in OFF or ACC position
Off
Ignition switch in ON position
On
Selector lever in any position other than P
Off
Selector lever in P position
On
Selector lever in any position other than P and N
Off
Selector lever in P or N position
On
PUSH SW
CLUCH SW
BRAKE SW 1
BRAKE SW 2
DETE/CANCL SW
SFT PN/N SW
UNLK SEN -DR
PUSH SW -IPDM
IGN RLY1 -F/B
DETE SW -IPDM
SFT PN -IPDM
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-38
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
SFT P -MET
SFT N -MET
ENGINE STATE
Condition
Value/Status
Selector lever in any position other than P
Off
Selector lever in P position
On
Selector lever in any position other than N
Off
Selector lever in N position
Stop
While the engine stalls
Stall
Run
S/L LOCK-IPDM
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Off
S/L UNLK-IPDM
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Off
S/L RELAY-REQ
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Off
VEH SPEED 1
While driving
VEH SPEED 2
While driving
Equivalent to speedometer reading
Driver door is locked
Wait with selective UNLOCK operation (60 seconds)
Wait with selective UNLOCK operation (60 seconds)
Passenger door is unlocked
Driver side door is open after ignition switch is turned OFF
(Shift position is in the P position)
Ignition switch ON
PRMT RKE STRT
READY
READY
Reset
The engine start is prohibited
Reset
The engine start is permitted
Set
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Reset
—
The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by any key ID registered to BCM.
Yet
The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by any key ID registered to BCM.
L
BCS
N
Done
The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the fourth key ID
registered to BCM.
Yet
The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the fourth key ID registered to BCM.
Done
The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the third key ID
registered to BCM.
Yet
The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the third key ID registered to BCM.
Done
BCS-39
K
Operation frequency
of the key
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Revision: 2011 September
J
Set
RKE OPE COUN2
CONFIRM ID3
I
UNLOCK
During the operation of the key
CONFIRM ID4
H
LOCK
RKE OPE COUN1
CONFRM ID ALL
G
UNLOCK
Passenger door is locked
PRMT ENG STRT
E
LOCK
Driver door is unlocked
ID OK FLAG
D
F
Equivalent to speedometer reading
DOOR STAT-AS
C
Crank
Engine running
DOOR STAT-DR
B
On
Engine stopped
At engine cranking
A
O
P
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
CONFIRM ID2
CONFIRM ID1
NOT REGISTERED
TP 4
TP 3
TP 2
TP 1
Condition
Value/Status
The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the second key
ID registered to BCM.
Yet
The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the second key ID
registered to BCM.
Done
The key ID that the key slot receives is not recognized by the first key ID
registered to BCM.
Yet
The key ID that the key slot receives is recognized by the first key ID registered to BCM.
Done
BCM detects registered key ID, or BCM does not detect key ID.
ID OK
BCM detects non-registration key ID.
ID NG
The ID of fourth key is not registered to BCM
The ID of fourth key is registered to BCM
The ID of third key is not registered to BCM
The ID of third key is registered to BCM
The ID of second key is not registered to BCM
Yet
Done
Yet
Done
Yet
The ID of second key is registered to BCM
Done
The ID of first key is not registered to BCM
Yet
The ID of first key is registered to BCM
Done
AIR PRESS FL
Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received)
Air pressure of front
LH tire
AIR PRESS FR
Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received)
Air pressure of front
RH tire
AIR PRESS RR
Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received)
Air pressure of rear
RH tire
AIR PRESS RL
Ignition switch ON (Only when the signal from the transmitter is received)
Air pressure of rear
LH tire
ID REGST FL1
ID REGST FR1
ID REGST RR1
ID REGST RL1
WARNING LAMP
BUZZER
Revision: 2011 September
ID of front LH tire transmitter is registered
ID of front LH tire transmitter is not registered
ID of front RH tire transmitter is registered
ID of front RH tire transmitter is not registered
ID of rear RH tire transmitter is registered
ID of rear RH tire transmitter is not registered
ID of rear LH tire transmitter is registered
ID of rear LH tire transmitter is not registered
Done
Yet
Done
Yet
Done
Yet
Done
Yet
Tire pressure indicator OFF
Off
Tire pressure indicator ON
On
Tire pressure warning alarm is not sounding
Off
Tire pressure warning alarm is sounding
On
BCS-40
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
TERMINAL LAYOUT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
JMMIA0323ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
−
1
(W)
Ground
BCS
Description
Signal name
Input/
Output
Rear window defogger relay control
Input
Condition
Rear window
defogger
Value
(Approx.)
OFF
9 – 16 V
ON
0 – 0.6 V
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-41
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
−
Description
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
All switches OFF
Value
(Approx.)
0V
Turn signal switch RH
Lighting switch HI
Lighting switch 1ST
2
(LG)
Ground
Combination switch
INPUT 5
Input
Combination
switch
(Wiper volume
dial 4)
PKIB4958J
1.0 V
Lighting switch 2ND
JPMIA0342JP
2.0 V
All switches OFF
0V
Turn signal switch LH
Lighting switch PASS
Lighting switch 2ND
3
(Y)
Ground
Combination switch
INPUT 4
Input
Combination
switch
(Wiper volume
dial 4)
PKIB4958J
1.0 V
Front fog lamp switch ON
PKIB4956J
0.8 V
All switches OFF
0V
Front wiper switch LO
4
(O)
Ground
Combination switch
INPUT 3
Input
Combination
switch
(Wiper volume
dial 4)
Front wiper switch MIST
Front wiper switch INT
Lighting switch AUTO
PKIB4958J
1.0 V
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-42
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
−
Description
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
All switches OFF
(Wiper volume dial 4)
Value
(Approx.)
A
0V
B
Front washer switch ON
(Wiper volume dial 4)
C
Rear washer switch ON
(Wiper volume dial 4)
5
(G)
Ground
Combination switch
INPUT 2
Input
Combination
switch
Any of the condition below
with all switches OFF
• Wiper volume dial 1
• Wiper volume dial 5
• Wiper volume dial 6
D
PKIB4958J
1.0 V
E
F
Rear wiper switch ON
(Wiper volume dial 4)
G
PKIB4956J
0.8 V
All switches OFF
(Wiper volume dial 4)
H
0V
Front wiper switch HI
(Wiper volume dial 4)
I
Rear wiper switch INT
(Wiper volume dial 4)
J
Wiper volume dial 3
(All switches OFF)
PKIB4958J
1.0 V
K
6
(L)
Ground
Combination switch
INPUT 1
Input
Combination
switch
Any of the condition below
with all switches OFF
• Wiper volume dial 1
• Wiper volume dial 2
L
BCS
PKIB4952J
1.9 V
N
Any of the condition below
with all switches OFF
• Wiper volume dial 6
• Wiper volume dial 7
O
PKIB4956J
0.8 V
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-43
2012 QUEST
P
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
−
7*1
(W)
Ground
Description
Signal name
Door key cylinder
switch UNLOCK
Condition
Input/
Output
Input
Door key cylinder switch
Value
(Approx.)
NEUTRAL position
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
UNLOCK position
Power window
switch communication (with automatic
sliding door system)
Input/
Output
0V
Ignition switch ON
PKIA7023E
9.0 - 10 V
8
(GR)*2
Ground
(Y)*1
Door key cylinder
switch LOCK (without automatic sliding
door system)
Input
Door key cylinder switch
NEUTRAL position
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
9
(V)
Ground
12*1
(GR)
Ground
Stop lamp switch 1
Door lock and unlock
switch LOCK
Input
Input
Stop lamp
switch
Door lock and
unlock switch
LOCK position
0V
OFF (Brake pedal is not
depressed)
0V
ON (Brake pedal is depressed)
9 – 16 V
NEUTRAL position
JPMIA0012GB
1.0 - 1.5 V
LOCK position
13*1
(BR)
Ground
Door lock and unlock
switch UNLOCK
Input
Door lock and
unlock switch
0V
NEUTRAL position
JPMIA0012GB
1.0 - 1.5 V
UNLOCK position
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-44
0V
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
−
+
14
(L)
Ground
Description
Signal name
Optical sensor
Input
Value
(Approx.)
A
When bright outside of the
vehicle
Close to 5 V
B
When dark outside of the
vehicle
Close to 0 V
Condition
Input/
Output
Ignition switch
ON
C
D
15
(W)
Ground
Rear window defogger switch
Input
Rear window
defogger switch
Not pressed
JPMIA0012GB
E
1.0 - 1.5 V
Pressed
3
16*
(Y)
Ground
Dimmer signal
Output
Ignition switch
ON
Either of the following
conditions
• Lighting switch OFF
• The area around the vehicle is bright (Shine a
light on the optical sensor)
The area around the vehicle is dark (Block the light
from the optical sensor)
17
(O)
Ground
Sensor power supply
Output
18
(R)
Ground
Receiver and sensor
ground
Input
21
(R)
Ground
NATS antenna amp.
Input/
Output
Ignition switch
OFF, ACC
ON
Ignition switch ON
Intelligent Key:
Intelligent Key
battery is removed
0V
F
0V
G
H
7.5 – 16 V
I
0V
4.65 – 5.5 V
0V
J
Brake pedal: Depressed
NOTE:
Waveform varies each
time when brake pedal is
depressed
K
L
JMKIA6232JP
Brake pedal: Not depressed
9 – 16 V
ON
0 – 0.5 V
BCS
N
23
(V)
Ground
Security indicator
lamp
Output
Security indicator lamp
Blinking (Ignition switch
OFF)
O
JPMIA0590GB
12.0 V
OFF
24*4
(B)
Ground
Dongle link
Revision: 2011 September
Input/
Output
Ignition switch OFF
BCS-45
9 – 16 V
5V
2012 QUEST
P
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
25
(W)
−
Ground
Description
Signal name
NATS antenna amp.
Condition
Input/
Output
Input/
Output
During waiting
Value
(Approx.)
Brake pedal: Depressed
NOTE:
Waveform varies each
time when brake pedal is
depressed
JMKIA6233JP
Brake pedal: Not depressed
A/C ON (Automatic
air conditioner)
27
(O)
28
(BR)
9 – 16 V
OFF (A/C switch indicator:
OFF)
A/C
Input
Ground
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
Ground
A/C ON (Manual c
air conditioner)
Ignition switch
ON and blower
fan switch other
than OFF
Blower fan ON (Automatic air conditioner)
Fan switch
Blower fan ON
(Manual air conditioner)
ON (A/C switch indicator:
ON)
0V
A/C switch OFF
12 V
A/C switch ON
0V
OFF
12 V
ON
0V
Input
Fan switch
OFF
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
Other than OFF
29
(P)
Ground
Hazard switch
Input
Hazard switch
9 – 16 V
ON
0 – 1.5 V
Pressed
30
(L)
Ground
Back door opener
switch
Input
Back door
opener switch
0V
OFF
0V
Not pressed
JPMIA0012GB
1.0 - 1.5 V
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-46
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
−
Description
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
Value
(Approx.)
A
B
31
(O)
Ground
Front door lock assembly driver side
(Unlock sensor)
Input
Driver door
LOCK status (Unlock sensor switch OFF)
C
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
UNLOCK status (Unlock
sensor switch ON)
D
0V
E
F
All switches OFF
(Wiper volume dial 4)
PKIB4960J
G
7.0 - 8.0 V
32
(Y)
Ground
Combination switch
OUTPUT 5
Output
Combination
switch
Front fog lamp switch ON
(Wiper volume dial 4)
H
Rear wiper switch ON
(Wiper volume dial 4)
Any of the condition below
with all switches OFF
• Wiper volume dial 1
• Wiper volume dial 2
• Wiper volume dial 6
• Wiper volume dial 7
I
PKIB4956J
J
1.0 V
K
All switches OFF
(Wiper volume dial 4)
L
PKIB4960J
BCS
7.0 - 8.0 V
33
(W)
Ground
Combination switch
OUTPUT 4
Output
Combination
switch
Lighting switch 1ST
(Wiper volume dial 4)
N
Lighting switch AUTO
(Wiper volume dial 4)
Rear wiper switch INT
(Wiper volume dial 4)
Any of the condition below
with all switches OFF
• Wiper volume dial 1
• Wiper volume dial 5
• Wiper volume dial 6
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-47
O
PKIB4958J
1.2 V
2012 QUEST
P
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
−
Description
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
Value
(Approx.)
All switches OFF
(Wiper volume dial 4)
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
34
(GR)
Ground
Combination switch
OUTPUT 3
Output
Combination
switch
Lighting switch 2ND
(Wiper volume dial 4)
Lighting switch HI
(Wiper volume dial 4)
Rear washer switch ON
(Wiper volume dial 4)
Any of the condition below
with all switches OFF
• Wiper volume dial 1
• Wiper volume dial 2
• Wiper volume dial 3
PKIB4958J
1.2 V
All switches OFF
35
(SB)
Ground
Combination switch
OUTPUT 2
Output
Combination
switch
(Wiper volume
dial 4)
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
Lighting switch 2ND
Lighting switch PASS
Front wiper switch INT
Front wiper switch HI
PKIB4958J
1.2 V
All switches OFF
36
(R)
Ground
Combination switch
OUTPUT 1
Output
Combination
switch
(Wiper volume
dial 4)
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
Turn signal switch RH
Turn signal switch LH
Front wiper switch LO
Front wiper switch MIST
Front washer switch ON
PKIB4958J
1.2 V
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-48
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
−
Description
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
P position (Release selector button)
37
(G)
Ground
Detention switch
Input
Selector lever
P position (Push selector
button)
Value
(Approx.)
A
0 – 1.5 V
B
6 – 16 V
C
Any position other than P
Waiting
12 V
D
Ignition switch
OFF (Remote
keyless entry
communication)
When operating either
button on Intelligent Key
E
JMMIA0572GB
38
(SB)
Ground
Receiver communication
Input/
Output
F
G
Waiting
H
Ignition switch
ON (TPMS
communication)
JMMIA0573GB
I
When receiving signal
from tire pressure sensor
J
JMMIA0574GB
39
(L)
Ground
CAN-H
Input/
Output
—
—
40
(P)
Ground
CAN-L
Input/
Output
—
—
K
L
BCS
43
(P)
Ground
Back door switch
Input
Back door
switch
OFF
(When back door closed)
N
JPMIA0593GB
9.0 - 10.0 V
44
(Y)
Ground
Rear wiper stop position
Revision: 2011 September
Input
Ignition switch
ON
ON
(When back door opened)
0V
Rear wiper stop position
12 V
Any position other than
rear wiper stop position
0V
BCS-49
2012 QUEST
O
P
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
45
(SB)
−
Ground
Description
Signal name
Passenger door
switch
Condition
Input/
Output
Input
Passenger door
switch
Value
(Approx.)
OFF (When passenger
door closed)
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
ON (When passenger
door opened)
46
(R)
Ground
Sliding door RH
switch
Input
Sliding door RH
switch
0V
OFF (When sliding door
RH closed)
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
ON (When sliding door
RH opened)
47
(G)
Ground
Driver door switch
Input
Driver door
switch
0V
OFF (When driver door
closed)
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
ON (When driver door
opened)
48
(O)
Ground
Sliding door LH
switch
Input
Sliding door LH
switch
0V
OFF (When sliding door
LH closed)
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
ON (When sliding door LH
opened)
49
(B)
Ground
50*2
(V)
Ground
51
(LG)
Ground
Luggage room lamp
Output
Selective unlock relay control (Sliding
door LH UNLOCK
control)
Input
Back door request
switch
Input
Revision: 2011 September
Luggage room
lamp
Sliding door LH
Back door request switch
0V
OFF
9 – 16 V
ON
0 – 1.0 V
UNLOCK (Actuator is activated)
0 – 0.6 V
Other then UNLOCK (Actuator is not activated)
9 – 16 V
ON (Pressed)
0 – 1.5 V
OFF (Not pressed)
9 – 16 V
BCS-50
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
53*5
(BR)
54
(R)
55
(G)
56
(P)
57
(GR)
−
Description
Signal name
Ground
Back door open request
Output
Back door
opener switch
Ground
Rear wiper
Output
Rear wiper
Sliding door RH UNLOCK (with automatic sliding door
system)
Ground
Ground
Interior room lamp
power supply
Battery power supply
Input
9 – 16 V
B
ON (Actuator is activated)
0 – 1.5 V
(Approx. 500m seconds)
ON (Activated)
9 – 16 V
UNLOCK (Actuator is activated)
9 – 16 V
Other then UNLOCK (Actuator is not activated)
0V
UNLOCK (Actuator is activated)
9 – 16 V
Other then UNLOCK (Actuator is not activated)
0V
Interior room lamp battery saver is activated.
(Cuts the interior room lamp power supply)
0V
Sliding door
Output
OFF (Actuator is not activated)
0V
Sliding door RH
Sliding door UNLOCK (without automatic sliding door
system)
A
OFF (Stopped)
Output
Ground
Value
(Approx.)
Condition
Input/
Output
58
(O)
D
E
F
G
Interior room lamp battery saver is not activated.
(Outputs the interior room lamp power supply)
9 – 16 V
Ignition switch OFF
9 – 16 V
OFF
C
H
I
5V
J
Ground
Air bag signal
Input
Ignition switch
ON
K
JPMIA1034GB
2.5 V
59
(SB)
Ground
Passenger door UNLOCK
Output
Passenger door
UNLOCK (Actuator is activated)
9 – 16 V
Other then UNLOCK (Actuator is not activated)
0V
Turn signal switch OFF
0V
L
BCS
N
60
(V)
Ground
Turn signal LH
Output
Ignition switch
ON
O
Turn signal switch LH
PKIC6370E
6.5 V
(Turn signal lamp turn on: 9 - 16
V)
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-51
2012 QUEST
P
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
−
Description
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
Turn signal switch OFF
61
(G)
Ground
Turn signal RH
Output
Ignition switch
ON
Value
(Approx.)
0V
Turn signal switch RH
PKIC6370E
6.5 V
(Turn signal lamp turn on: 9 - 16
V)
62
(W)
Ground
Step lamp
Output
Step lamp
63
(R)
Ground
Interior room lamp
control
Output
Interior room
lamp
64
(LG)
65
(V)
Ground
Ground
66
(G)
Ground
67
(B)
68
(L)
Cranking request
All doors LOCK
input
Output
Driver door UNLOCK
Output
Ground
Ground
Output
Ground
P/W power supply
(IGN)
Output
69
(P)
Ground
P/W power supply
(BAT)
70
(L)
Ground
Battery power supply
73
(Y)
Ground
75
(SB)
Ground
76
(V)
Ground
ON indicator lamp
Driver door request
switch
Push-button ignition
switch (push switch)
Revision: 2011 September
Ignition switch
ON
All doors
Driver door, fuel
lid
ON
0 – 1.0 V
OFF
9 – 16 V
OFF
9 – 16 V
ON
0 – 1.0 V
Engine stopped (Selector
lever is in P position)
0 – 1.0 V
Engine stopped (Selector
lever is not in P position)
9 – 16 V
Engine running
9 – 16 V
LOCK (Actuator is activated)
9 – 16 V
Other then LOCK (Actuator is not activated)
0V
UNLOCK (Actuator is activated)
9 – 16 V
Other then UNLOCK (Actuator is not activated)
0V
Ignition switch ON
0V
Ignition switch OFF
0V
Ignition switch ON
9 – 16 V
Output
Ignition switch OFF
9 – 16 V
Input
Ignition switch OFF
9 – 16 V
Output
Ignition switch
OFF (LOCK indicator is
not illuminated)
9 – 16 V
ON
0 – 1.5 V
0 – 1.5 V
Input
Driver door request switch
ON (Pressed)
OFF (Not pressed)
9 – 16 V
Pressed
0 – 1.5 V
Input
Push-button ignition switch
(push switch)
Not pressed
9 – 16 V
BCS-52
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
−
Description
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
Value
(Approx.)
A
B
When Intelligent Key is
not in the antenna detection area
(The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna:
Approx. 2 m)
78
(P)
Ground
Driver door antenna
(+)
Output
When the driver
door request
switch is operated with ignition
switch ON
C
JMKIA5954GB
When Intelligent Key is in
the antenna detection
area
(The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna:
80 cm or less)
D
E
F
JMKIA5955GB
G
When Intelligent Key is
not in the antenna detection area
(The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna:
Approx. 2 m)
79
(V)
Ground
Driver door antenna
(-)
Output
When the driver
door request
switch is operated with ignition
switch ON
H
JMKIA5954GB
I
J
When Intelligent Key is in
the antenna detection
area
(The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna:
80 cm or less)
K
JMKIA5955GB
L
80
(R)
Ground
Passenger door antenna (+)
Output
When the passenger door request switch is
operated with
ignition switch
ON
When Intelligent Key is
not in the antenna detection area
(The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna:
Approx. 2 m)
BCS
N
JMKIA5954GB
O
When Intelligent Key is in
the antenna detection
area
(The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna:
80 cm or less)
P
JMKIA5955GB
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-53
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
81
(L)
−
Ground
Description
Signal name
Passenger door antenna (-)
Condition
Input/
Output
Output
When the passenger door request switch is
operated with
ignition switch
ON
Value
(Approx.)
When Intelligent Key is
not in the antenna detection area
(The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna:
Approx. 2 m)
JMKIA5954GB
When Intelligent Key is in
the antenna detection
area
(The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna:
80 cm or less)
JMKIA5955GB
When Intelligent Key is
not in the antenna detection area
(The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna:
Approx. 2 m)
82
(G)
Ground
Rear bumper antenna (+)
Output
When the back
door request
switch is operated with ignition
switch ON
JMKIA5954GB
When Intelligent Key is in
the antenna detection
area
(The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna:
80 cm or less)
JMKIA5955GB
When Intelligent Key is
not in the antenna detection area
(The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna:
Approx. 2 m)
83
(R)
Ground
Rear bumper antenna (-)
Output
When the back
door request
switch is operated with ignition
switch ON
JMKIA5954GB
When Intelligent Key is in
the antenna detection
area
(The distance between Intelligent Key and antenna:
80 cm or less)
JMKIA5955GB
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-54
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
−
Description
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
Value
(Approx.)
A
B
When Intelligent Key is
not in the antenna detection area
C
JMKIA5951GB
84
(Y)
Ground
Room antenna 1 (+)
(Instrument center)
Output
Ignition switch
ON
D
E
When Intelligent Key is in
the antenna detection
area
F
JMKIA3839GB
G
H
When Intelligent Key is
not in the antenna detection area
JMKIA5951GB
85
(BR)
Ground
Room antenna 1 (-)
(Instrument center)
Output
I
Ignition switch
ON
J
When Intelligent Key is in
the antenna detection
area
K
JMKIA3839GB
L
BCS
When Intelligent Key is
not in the antenna detection area
N
JMKIA5951GB
86
(LG)
Ground
Room antenna 2 (+)
(Console)
Output
Ignition switch
ON
O
When Intelligent Key is in
the antenna detection
area
P
JMKIA3839GB
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-55
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
−
Description
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
Value
(Approx.)
When Intelligent Key is
not in the antenna detection area
JMKIA5951GB
87
(V)
Ground
Room antenna 2 (−)
(Console)
Output
Ignition switch
ON
When Intelligent Key is in
the antenna detection
area
JMKIA3839GB
When Intelligent Key is
not in the antenna detection area
JMKIA5951GB
88
(W)
Ground
Luggage room antenna (+)
Output
Ignition switch
ON
When Intelligent Key is in
the antenna detection
area
JMKIA3839GB
When Intelligent Key is
not in the antenna detection area
JMKIA5951GB
89
(B)
Ground
Luggage room antenna (-)
Output
Ignition switch
ON
When Intelligent Key is in
the antenna detection
area
JMKIA3839GB
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-56
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Description
Signal name
Input/
Output
Condition
Value
(Approx.)
+
−
90
(P)
Push-button ignition
switch illumination
9 – 16 V
Output
Push-button ignition switch illumination
ON
Ground
OFF
0 – 1.5 V
91
(SB)
Ground
LOCK indicator lamp
Output
LOCK indicator
lamp
OFF (Ignition switch OFF)
9 – 16 V
ON
0 – 1.5 V
OFF
0V
A
B
C
NOTE:
When the illumination brightening/dimming level is in the neutral
position
92
(G)
Ground
Push-button ignition
switch illumination
ground
D
E
Output
Tail lamp
ON
F
JPMIA1554GB
6.0 - 7.0 V
93
(R)
Ground
Intelligent Key warning buzzer
Output
Intelligent Key
warning buzzer
96
(BR)
Ground
ACC relay control
Output
Ignition switch
97
(W)
Ground
Starter relay control
Output
Ignition switch
ON
98
(LG)
Ground
Ignition relay (IPDM
E/R) control
Output
Ignition switch
99
(GR)
Ground
Ignition relay control
Output
Ignition switch
100
(GR)
Ground
Passenger door request switch
Input
Passenger door
request switch
Sounding
0 – 1.5 V
Not sounding
9 – 16 V
OFF
0 – 0.5 V
ACC or ON
9 – 16 V
Other than engine cranking
9 – 16 V
Engine cranking
0 – 0.5 V
OFF or ACC
9 – 16 V
ON
0 – 0.5 V
OFF or ACC
0 – 0.5 V
ON
9 – 16 V
ON (Pressed)
0 – 1.5 V
OFF (Not pressed)
9 – 16 V
OFF or ACC
Ground
Ignition power supply No. 2
102
(Y)
Ground
P/N position
104
(L)
Ground
CVT shift selector
(detention switch)
power supply
Output
Ignition switch ON
9 – 16 V
105
(GR)
Ground
Stop lamp switch 2
Input
Ignition switch OFF
9 – 16 V
106
(O)
109
(GR)
Ground
Ground
Blower fan motor relay control
ACC indicator lamp
Ignition switch
Input
Selector lever
Output
Output
Ignition switch
Ignition switch
ON
9 – 16 V
P or N position
9 – 16 V
Except P and N positions
0 – 1.5 V
OFF or ACC
0 – 0.5 V
ON
9 – 16 V
OFF (LOCK indicator is
not illuminated)
9 – 16 V
ACC
0 – 1.5 V
• *1: Without automatic sliding door system
• *2: With automatic sliding door system
• *3: With rear entertainment
• *4: For Canada
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-57
H
I
J
K
L
0V
101
(BR)
Output
G
2012 QUEST
BCS
N
O
P
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
• *5: Without automatic back door system
Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007493281
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC
BCM performs fail-safe control when any DTC are detected.
Display contents of CONSULT
Fail-safe
Cancellation
B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM
Inhibit engine cranking
Erase DTC
B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM
Inhibit engine cranking
Erase DTC
B2195: ANTI-SCANNING
Inhibit engine cranking
Ignition switch ON → OFF
B2196: DONGLE NG
Inhibit engine cranking
Erase DTC
B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP
Inhibit engine cranking
Erase DTC
B2608: STARTER RELAY
Inhibit engine cranking
500 ms after the following signal communication status becomes consistent
• Starter motor relay control signal
• Starter relay status signal (CAN)
B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST
Inhibit engine cranking
When any of the following conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch changes to ACC
• Receives engine status signal (CAN)
B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF
Inhibit engine cranking
When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON
B26F2: IGN RELAY ON
Inhibit engine cranking
When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF
B26F3: START CONT RLY ON
Inhibit engine cranking
When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF
B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF
Inhibit engine cranking
When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON
B26F7: BCM
Inhibit engine cranking
by Intelligent Key system
When room antenna and luggage room antenna functions normally
REAR WIPER MOTOR PROTECTION
BCM detects the rear wiper stopping position according to the rear wiper stop position signal.
When the rear wiper stop position signal does not change for more than 5 seconds while driving the rear
wiper, BCM stops power supply to protect the rear wiper motor.
Condition of cancellation
1.
2.
3.
More than 1 minute is passed after the rear wiper stop.
Turn rear wiper switch OFF.
Operate the rear wiper switch or rear washer switch.
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL OF COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION CAUSED BY LOW
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
If voltage of battery power supply lower, BCM maintains combination switch reading to the status when input
voltage is less than approximately 9 V.
NOTE:
When voltage of battery power supply is approximately 9 V or more, combination switch reading function
returns to normal operation.
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
INFOID:0000000007493282
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-58
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Priority
DTC
1
B2562: LOW VOLTAGE
2
• U1000: CAN COMM
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
3
•
•
•
•
•
B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM
B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM
B2195: ANTI-SCANNING
B2196: DONGLE NG
B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP
4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
B2555: STOP LAMP
B2556: PUSH-BTN IGN SW
B2557: VEHICLE SPEED
B2601: SHIFT POSITION
B2602: SHIFT POSITION
B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS
B2604: PNP/CLUTCH SW
B2605: PNP/CLUTCH SW
B2608: STARTER RELAY
B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST
B2614: BCM
B2615: BCM
B2616: BCM
B2618: BCM
B261A: PUSH-BTN IGN SW
B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF
B26F2: IGN RELAY ON
B26F3: START CONT RLY ON
B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF
B26F6: BCM
B26F7: BCM
B26F8: BCM
B26F9: CRANK REQ CIR SHORT
B26FA: CRANK REQ CIR OPEN
B26FC: KEY REGISTRATION
C1729: VHCL SPEED SIG ERR
U0415: VEHICLE SPEED
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
C1704: LOW PRESSURE FL
C1705: LOW PRESSURE FR
C1706: LOW PRESSURE RR
C1707: LOW PRESSURE RL
C1708: [NO DATA] FL
C1709: [NO DATA] FR
C1710: [NO DATA] RR
C1711: [NO DATA] RL
C1716: [PRESSDATA ERR] FL
C1717: [PRESSDATA ERR] FR
C1718: [PRESSDATA ERR] RR
C1719: [PRESSDATA ERR] RL
5
5
• B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA
• B2622: INSIDE ANTENNA
• B2623: INSIDE ANTENNA
6
• B2626: OUTSIDE ANTENNA
• B2627: OUTSIDE ANTENNA
• B2628: OUTSIDE ANTENNA
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
BCS
N
O
P
DTC Index
INFOID:0000000007493283
NOTE:
The details of time display are as follows.
• CRNT: A malfunction is detected now.
• PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past.
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-59
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
IGN counter is displayed on Freeze Frame Data. For details of Freeze Frame Data, refer to BCS-16, "COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)".
CONSULT display
Fail-safe
Freeze Frame
Data
•Vehicle Speed
•Odo/Trip Meter
•Vehicle Condition
Intelligent Key
warning lamp ON
Tire pressure
monitor warning
lamp ON
Reference
page
No DTC is detected.
further testing
may be required.
—
—
—
—
—
U1000: CAN COMM
—
—
—
—
BCS-71
U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
—
—
—
—
BCS-72
U0415: VEHICLE SPEED
—
—
×
—
BCS-73
B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM
×
—
—
—
SEC-50
B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM
×
—
—
—
SEC-51
B2195: ANTI-SCANNING
×
—
—
—
SEC-52
B2196: DONGLE NG
×
—
—
—
SEC-53
B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP
×
—
—
—
SEC-55
B2555: STOP LAMP
—
×
×
—
SEC-58
B2556: PUSH-BTN IGN SW
—
×
×
—
SEC-61
B2557: VEHICLE SPEED
—
×
×
—
SEC-63
B2562: LOW VOLTAGE
—
×
—
—
BCS-74
B2601: SHIFT POSITION
—
×
×
—
SEC-64
B2602: SHIFT POSITION
—
×
×
—
SEC-66
B2603: SHIFT POSI STATUS
—
×
×
—
SEC-69
B2604: PNP/CLUTCH SW
—
×
×
—
SEC-73
B2605: PNP/CLUTCH SW
—
×
×
—
SEC-75
B2608: STARTER RELAY
×
×
×
—
SEC-77
B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST
×
×
×
—
SEC-79
B2614: BCM
—
×
×
—
PCS-50
B2615: BCM
—
×
×
—
PCS-52
B2616: BCM
—
×
×
—
PCS-54
B2618: BCM
—
×
×
—
PCS-56
B261A: PUSH-BTN IGN SW
—
×
×
—
PCS-58
B2621: INSIDE ANTENNA
—
×
—
—
DLK-194
B2622: INSIDE ANTENNA
—
×
—
—
DLK-196
B2623: INSIDE ANTENNA
—
×
—
—
DLK-198
B2626: OUTSIDE ANTENNA
—
×
—
—
DLK-202
B2627: OUTSIDE ANTENNA
—
×
—
—
DLK-200
B2628: OUTSIDE ANTENNA
—
×
—
—
DLK-204
B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF
×
×
×
—
PCS-60
B26F2: IGN RELAY ON
×
×
×
—
PCS-61
B26F3: START CONT RLY ON
×
×
×
—
SEC-82
B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF
×
×
×
—
SEC-83
B26F6: BCM
—
×
×
—
PCS-63
B26F7: BCM
×
×
×
—
SEC-84
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-60
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
CONSULT display
Fail-safe
Freeze Frame
Data
•Vehicle Speed
•Odo/Trip Meter
•Vehicle Condition
Intelligent Key
warning lamp ON
Tire pressure
monitor warning
lamp ON
A
Reference
page
B
B26F8: BCM
—
×
×
—
SEC-85
B26F9: CRANK REQ CIR SHORT
—
×
×
—
SEC-86
B26FA: CRANK REQ CIR OPEN
—
×
×
—
SEC-88
B26FC: KEY REGISTRATION
—
×
×
—
SEC-90
C1704: LOW PRESSURE FL
—
—
—
×
C1705: LOW PRESSURE FR
—
—
—
×
C1706: LOW PRESSURE RR
—
—
—
×
C1707: LOW PRESSURE RL
—
—
—
×
C1708: [NO DATA] FL
—
—
—
×
C1709: [NO DATA] FR
—
—
—
×
C1710: [NO DATA] RR
—
—
—
×
C1711: [NO DATA] RL
—
—
—
×
C1716: [PRESSDATA ERR] FL
—
—
—
×
C1717: [PRESSDATA ERR] FR
—
—
—
×
C1718: [PRESSDATA ERR] RR
—
—
—
×
C1719: [PRESSDATA ERR] RL
—
—
—
×
C1729: VHCL SPEED SIG ERR
—
—
—
×
C
D
WT-22
E
WT-24
F
G
WT-26
H
WT-28
I
J
K
L
BCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-61
2012 QUEST
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
BCM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007493284
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
(option abbreviation; if not
JRMWC4349GB
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-62
2012 QUEST
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
BCS
N
O
JRMWC4350GB
P
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-63
2012 QUEST
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
JRMWC4351GB
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-64
2012 QUEST
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
BCS
N
O
JRMWC4352GB
P
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-65
2012 QUEST
BCM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
JRMWC4353GB
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-66
2012 QUEST
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
A
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM)
B
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Description
INFOID:0000000007493285
C
BEFORE REPLACEMENT
When replacing BCM, save or print current vehicle specification with CONSULT configuration before replacement.
NOTE:
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” after
replacing BCM.
D
E
AFTER REPLACEMENT
CAUTION:
When replacing BCM, always perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with CONSULT. Or not doing so,
BCM control function does not operate normally.
• Complete the procedure of “WRITE CONFIGURATION” in order.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
• If you set incorrect “WRITE CONFIGURATION”, incidents might occur.
NOTE:
When replacing BCM, perform the system initialization (NATS) (if equipped).
F
G
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Work Procedure
H
1.SAVING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
I
INFOID:0000000007493286
CONSULT Configuration
Perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle specification. Refer to BCS-68, "CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Description".
NOTE:
If “READ CONFIGURATION” can not be used, use the “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” after
replacing BCM.
J
K
>> GO TO 2.
L
2.REPLACE BCM
Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
BCS
>> GO TO 3.
3.WRITING VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
N
CONSULT Configuration
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file” or “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection” to write
vehicle specification. Refer to BCS-68, "CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Work Procedure".
O
>> GO TO 4.
4.INITIALIZE BCM (NATS) (IF EQUIPPED)
P
Perform BCM initialization. (NATS)
>> WORK END
CONFIGURATION (BCM)
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-67
2012 QUEST
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Description
INFOID:0000000007493287
Vehicle specification needs to be written with CONSULT because it is not written after replacing BCM.
Configuration has three functions as follows.
Function
Description
READ CONFIGURATION
• Reads the vehicle configuration of current BCM.
• Saves the read vehicle configuration.
WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection
Writes the vehicle configuration with manual selection.
WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file
Writes the vehicle configuration with saved data.
NOTE:
Manual setting item: Items which need selection by vehicle specifications
Automatic setting item: Items which are written in automatically (Setting can not be changed)
For some models and specifications, the automatic setting item may not be displayed.
CAUTION:
When replacing BCM, always perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” with CONSULT. Or not doing so,
BCM control function does not operate normally.
• Complete the procedure of “WRITE CONFIGURATION” in order.
• Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
• Never perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” except for new BCM.
• If you set incorrect “WRITE CONFIGURATION”, incidents might occur.
CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000007493288
1.WRITING MODE SELECTION
CONSULT Configuration
Select “CONFIGURATION” of BCM.
When writing saved data>>GO TO 2.
When writing manually>>GO TO 3.
2.PERFORM “WRITE CONFIGURATION - CONFIG FILE”
CONSULT Configuration
Perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION - Config file”.
>> WORK END
3.PERFORM “WRITE CONFIGURATION - MANUAL SELECTION”
CONSULT Configuration
Select "WRITE CONFIGURATION - Manual selection".
Identify the correct model and configuration list. Refer to BCS-69, "CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Configuration list".
3. Confirm and/or change setting value for each item.
CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally
if the setting is not correct.
NOTE:
If items are not displayed, touch “SETTING”. Refer to BCS-69, "CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Configuration
list" for written items and setting value.
4. Select "SETTING".
CAUTION:
Make sure to select “SETTING” even if the indicated configuration of brand new BCM is same as
the desirable configuration. If not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle
model can not be memorized.
5. When "COMMAND FINISHED", select "END".
1.
2.
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-68
2012 QUEST
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
>> GO TO 4.
4.OPERATION CHECK
A
Confirm that each function controlled by BCM operates normally.
B
>> WORK END
CONFIGURATION (BCM) : Configuration list
INFOID:0000000007493289
C
CAUTION:
Thoroughly read and understand the vehicle specification. ECU control may not operate normally if
the setting is not correct.
SETTING ITEM
Items
D
NOTE
Setting value
E
CAN CONNECTION UNIT
WITHOUT ⇔ MODE13 ⇔ MODE15
• WITHOUT: Without automatic sliding door system and automatic back door system
• MODE13: With automatic sliding door system and automatic back door system
• MODE15: With automatic sliding door system, and without
automatic back door system
H/L BULB
DEFAULT
—
AUTO LIGHT
WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
—
HANDLE
LHD
—
DTRL
WITH ⇔ WITHOUT
• WITH: With daytime running light system
• WITHOUT: Without daytime running light system
⇔: Items which confirm vehicle specifications
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
BCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-69
2012 QUEST
TRANSIT MODE CANCEL OPERATION
< BASIC INSPECTION >
TRANSIT MODE CANCEL OPERATION
Description
INFOID:0000000007827913
• BCM is in transit mode if turn signal indicator on combination meter turns ON for 1 minute when ignition
switch is turned from OFF to ON.
• In this case, cancel operation must be performed.
NOTE:
Do not cancel transit mode during storage of the vehicle. Always cancel transit mode before delivery of the
vehicle to customer.
Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000007827914
1.TRANSIT MODE CANCEL OPERATION
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Turn and hold front wiper switch to HI, and then operate turn signal switch to RH or LH.
>> GO TO 2.
2.TRANSIT MODE CANCEL CHECK
1.
2.
3.
Turn front wiper switch and turn signal switch OFF.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check that turn signal indicator on combination meter does not turn ON.
>> WORK END
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-70
2012 QUEST
U1000 CAN COMM
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
A
U1000 CAN COMM
Description
INFOID:0000000007493290
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern
vehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected
with 2 communication lines (CAN H-line, CAN L-line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less
wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart".
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007493291
B
C
D
E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
F
DTC
U1000
CONSULT display description
CAN COMM
DTC Detection Condition
When BCM cannot communicate CAN communication signal continuously for 2 seconds
or more.
Diagnosis Procedure
Possible cause
G
CAN communication system
INFOID:0000000007493292
H
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC
I
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of BCM.
Is DTC “U1000” displayed?
YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
J
K
L
BCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-71
2012 QUEST
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007493293
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
CONSULT display description
DTC Detection Condition
U1010
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
BCM detected internal CAN communication circuit malfunction.
Diagnosis Procedure
Possible cause
BCM
INFOID:0000000007493294
1.REPLACE BCM
When DTC “U1010” is detected, replace BCM.
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-72
2012 QUEST
U0415 VEHICLE SPEED
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U0415 VEHICLE SPEED
A
Description
INFOID:0000000007493295
U0415 is displayed if any unusual condition is present in the reception status of the vehicle speed signal from
the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
DTC Logic
B
INFOID:0000000007493296
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U0415
CONSULT display description
VEHICLE SPEED
D
DTC Detection Condition
Probable cause
When the vehicle speed signal received from
the ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) remains abnormal for 2 seconds or more.
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
• BCM
E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.DTC CONFIRMATION
F
1.
2.
3.
G
Erase the DTC.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Perform the “Self Diagnostic Result” of BCM with CONSULT, when passed 2 seconds or more after the
ignition switch is turned ON.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to BCS-73, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007493297
H
I
1.ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Perform “Self-Diagnostic Result” of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with CONSULT. Refer to BRC37, "DTC Index".
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
J
K
L
BCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-73
2012 QUEST
B2562 LOW VOLTAGE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B2562 LOW VOLTAGE
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007493298
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B2562
CONSULT display description
LOW VOLTAGE
DTC Detection Condition
When the power supply voltage to BCM remains less
than 8.8 V for 120 seconds or more
Possible cause
Harness or connector (power supply
circuit)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.DTC CONFIRMATION
1.
2.
3.
Erase DTC.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Perform the “Self Diagnostic Result” of BCM with CONSULT, when passed 120 seconds or more after the
ignition switch is turned ON.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to BCS-74, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007493299
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check BCM power supply circuit. Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the circuit normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair the malfunctioning part.
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-74
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007493300
1.CHECK FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK
B
Check that the following fuse and fusible link are not blown.
Signal name
C
Fuse and fusible link No.
L
Battery power supply
10
D
Is the fuse fusing?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is
blown.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
E
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connectors.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
G
Terminals
(+)
(−)
BCM
Connector
Terminal
70
M123
Voltage
(Approx.)
H
Ground
I
Battery voltage
57
Is the measurement value normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
J
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
K
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
L
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M123
67
Ground
Continuity
Existed
BCS
Does continuity exist?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-75
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007493301
1.CHECK OUTPUT 1 - 5 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and combination switch harness connector.
System
BCM
Connector
Combination switch
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
OUTPUT 1
36
11
OUTPUT 2
35
9
OUTPUT 3
M121
34
M103
7
OUTPUT 4
33
10
OUTPUT 5
32
13
Continuity
Existed
Does continuity exist?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair harnesses or connectors.
2.CHECK OUTPUT 1 - 5 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
Check for continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
System
BCM
Connector
OUTPUT 1
36
OUTPUT 2
35
OUTPUT 3
Continuity
Terminal
M121
Ground
34
OUTPUT 4
33
OUTPUT 5
32
Not existed
Does continuity exist?
YES >> Repair harnesses or connectors.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
Connect BCM connector.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals
(+)
System
(−)
BCM
Connector
Terminal
OUTPUT 1
36
OUTPUT 2
35
OUTPUT 3
34
OUTPUT 4
M121
OUTPUT 5
Voltage
(Approx.)
Ground
33
32
PKIB4960J
7.0 - 8.0 V
Is the measurement value normal?
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-76
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> Replace combination switch.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
BCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-77
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007493302
1.CHECK INPUT 1 - 5 CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM and combination switch connectors.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and combination switch harness connector.
System
BCM
Connector
Combination switch
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
INPUT 1
6
12
INPUT 2
5
14
INPUT 3
M121
4
M103
5
INPUT 4
3
2
INPUT 5
2
8
Continuity
Existed
Does continuity exist?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair harnesses or connectors.
2.CHECK INPUT 1 - 5 CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
Check for continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
System
BCM
Connector
INPUT 1
6
INPUT 2
5
INPUT 3
Continuity
Terminal
M121
Ground
4
INPUT 4
3
INPUT 5
2
Not existed
Does continuity exist?
YES >> Repair harnesses or connectors.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Connect BCM and combination switch connectors.
Turn ON any switch in the system that is malfunction.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
Terminals
(+)
System
BCM
Connector
INPUT 1
Voltage
(Approx.)
Terminal
6
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
(−)
5
M121
4
INPUT 4
3
INPUT 5
2
Ground
Refer to BCS36, "Reference Value".
Is the measurement value normal?
Yes
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-78
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
No
>> Replace combination switch.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
BCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-79
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
COMBINATION SWITCH SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table
1.
2.
INFOID:0000000007493303
Perform “Data Monitor” of CONSULT to check for any malfunctioning item.
Check the malfunction combinations.
Malfunction item: ×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
FR FOG SW
PASSING SW
AUTO LIGHT SW
B
×
C
×
×
D
×
E
×
F
×
G
×
×
×
×
3.
×
×
×
×
×
×
Malfunction combination
A
×
×
HEAD LAMP SW 2
HEAD LAMP SW 1
×
HI BEAM SW
TURN SIGNAL L
×
TAIL LAMP SW
TURN SIGNAL R
INT VOLUME
RR WASHER SW
RR WIPER INT
×
RR WIPER ON
FR WASHER SW
×
FR WIPER INT
FR WIPER LOW
FR WIPER HI
Data monitor item
×
×
×
×
H
×
×
I
J
All Items
K
If only one item is detected or the item is not applicable to the combinations A to K
L
Identify the malfunctioning part from the agreed combination and repair or replace the part.
Malfunction
combination
Malfunctioning part
A
Combination switch OUTPUT 1 circuit
B
Combination switch OUTPUT 2 circuit
C
Combination switch OUTPUT 3 circuit
Repair or replace
Inspect the combination switch output circuit applicable to the malfunctioning part. Refer to BCS-76, "Diagnosis Procedure".
D
Combination switch OUTPUT 4 circuit
E
Combination switch OUTPUT 5 circuit
F
Combination switch INPUT 1 circuit
G
Combination switch INPUT 2 circuit
H
Combination switch INPUT 3 circuit
I
Combination switch INPUT 4 circuit
J
Combination switch INPUT 5 circuit
K
BCM
Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
L
Combination switch
Replace combination switch.
Revision: 2011 September
Inspect the combination switch input circuit applicable to the malfunctioning
part. Refer to BCS-78, "Diagnosis Procedure".
BCS-80
2012 QUEST
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Description
A
INFOID:0000000007827915
TRANSIT MODE
B
• Transit mode inhibits battery power consumption during transportation or storage of the vehicle.
• BCM is set to transit mode before delivery.
• In transit mode, remote keyless entry function, headlamp ON/OFF function, theft warning alarm function,
and other BCM control functions do not operate normally.
• Therefore, cancel operation must be performed so that the vehicle is used in normal status.
• For transit mode cancel operation, refer to BCS-70, "Description".
NOTE:
Do not cancel transit mode during storage of the vehicle. Always cancel transit mode before delivery of the
vehicle to customer.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
BCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-81
2012 QUEST
BCM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
BCM
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007493304
NOTE:
Before replacing BCM, perform “READ CONFIGURATION” to save or print current vehicle specification. Refer
to BCS-67, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Description".
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
Remove bolts.
Remove BCM and disconnect the connectors.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform “WRITE CONFIGURATION” when replacing BCM. Or not doing so, BCM control
function does not operate normally.
NOTE:
Be sure to perform the system initialization (NATS) when replacing BCM. Refer to BCS-67, "ADDITIONAL
SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT (BCM) : Work Procedure".
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-82
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
COMBINATION SWITCH
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007493305
B
C
D
E
F
JMMIA0383ZZ
1.
Combination switch
2.
G
Combination switch connector
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007493306
H
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove steering column cover. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove screws.
Disconnect the connector.
Pull up the combination switch to remove it.
I
J
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
K
L
BCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BCS-83
2012 QUEST
BRAKES
SECTION
BR
BRAKE SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3
DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment .............14
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
REAR DISC BRAKE ......................................... 16
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 3
Precaution for Brake System .................................... 3
BRAKE PAD ..............................................................16
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment ...............16
G
DISC ROTOR .............................................................16
DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment .............16
H
PREPARATION ............................................ 5
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 18
PREPARATION ................................................... 5
BRAKE PEDAL ................................................. 18
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 5
Exploded View .........................................................18
Removal and Installation .........................................18
Inspection and Adjustment ......................................19
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 6
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 6
BRAKE PIPING ................................................. 20
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 6
FRONT .......................................................................20
FRONT : Exploded View .........................................20
FRONT : Hydraulic Piping .......................................21
FRONT : Removal and Installation ..........................21
FRONT : Inspection .................................................22
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 7
BRAKE PEDAL ................................................... 7
Inspection and Adjustment ........................................ 7
BRAKE FLUID ....................................................10
Inspection ................................................................ 10
Draining ................................................................... 10
Refilling ................................................................... 10
Bleeding Brake System ........................................... 11
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ............................12
REAR .........................................................................23
REAR : Exploded View ............................................23
REAR : Hydraulic Piping ..........................................24
REAR : Removal and Installation ............................24
REAR : Inspection ...................................................25
Exploded View .........................................................27
Removal and Installation .........................................27
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................29
Inspection ................................................................30
BRAKE BOOSTER ............................................13
Inspection ................................................................ 13
BRAKE BOOSTER ........................................... 31
BRAKE PAD .............................................................. 14
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment .............. 14
Exploded View .........................................................31
Removal and installation .........................................31
Inspection and Adjustment ......................................32
DISC ROTOR ............................................................. 14
VACUUM LINES ............................................... 33
Revision: 2011 September
I
J
K
L
M
N
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER .......................... 27
Inspection ................................................................ 12
FRONT DISC BRAKE ........................................14
BR
BR-1
2012 QUEST
O
P
Exploded View ........................................................ 33
Removal and Installation ........................................ 33
Inspection ............................................................... 33
FRONT DISC BRAKE ........................................ 35
BRAKE PAD ............................................................. 35
BRAKE PAD : Exploded View ................................ 35
BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation ................. 35
BRAKE PAD : Inspection ........................................ 37
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY ................................ 37
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View ... 37
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ................................................................. 39
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and
Assembly ................................................................ 40
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection ........... 42
REAR DISC BRAKE .......................................... 43
BRAKE PAD ............................................................. 43
BRAKE PAD : Exploded View ................................ 43
Revision: 2011 September
BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation ................. 43
BRAKE PAD : Inspection ........................................ 45
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY ................................ 45
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View ... 45
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .................................................................. 47
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and
Assembly ................................................................ 48
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection ............ 50
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) .......................................................... 51
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 51
General Specifications ............................................ 51
Brake Pedal ............................................................ 51
Brake Booster ......................................................... 51
Front Disc Brake ..................................................... 51
Rear Disc Brake ...................................................... 51
BR-2
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000007732195
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
D
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
E
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
BR
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
G
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover
I
J
K
INFOID:0000000007732196
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.
L
M
N
PIIB3706J
Precaution for Brake System
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front and rear brakes has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed
with a dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
• Brake fluid use refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off
immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never wash
them with water.
Revision: 2011 September
O
INFOID:0000000007491372
BR-3
2012 QUEST
P
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Always confirm the specified tightening torque when installing the brake pipes.
• After pressing the brake pedal more deeply or harder than normal driving, such as air bleeding, check each
item of brake pedal. Adjust brake pedal if it is outside the standard value.
• Always clean with new brake fluid when cleaning the master cylinder, brake caliper and other components.
• Never use mineral oils such as gasoline or light oil to clean. They may damage rubber parts and cause
improper operation.
• Always loosen the brake tube flare nut with a flare nut wrench.
• Tighten the brake tube flare nut to the specified torque with a crowfoot (A) and torque wrench (B).
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit) harness connector or the battery negative
terminal before performing the work.
• Check that no brake fluid leakage is present after replacing the
parts.
• Burnish the brake contact surfaces after refinishing or replacing
rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low
mileage.
- Front brake pad: Refer to BR-14, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and
JPFIA0001ZZ
Adjustment".
- Front disc rotor: Refer to BR-14, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
- Rear brake pad: Refer to BR-16, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
- Rear disc rotor: Refer to BR-16, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
Revision: 2011 September
BR-4
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
A
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000007491373
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
B
C
D
E
PBIC0190E
BR
Pin punch
a: 4 mm (0.16 in)
Removing and installing reservoir tank
G
NT410
H
• Air tight
• Inspection of check valve
Handy vacuum pump
I
J
ZZC1313D
K
Brake caliper wrench
Return the piston
L
NNFIA0040ZZ
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BR-5
2012 QUEST
Symptom
BRAKE
Revision: 2011 September
BR-14, BR-16
BR-14, BR-16
BR-14, BR-16
BR-14, BR-16
BR-14, BR-16
BR-14, BR-16
BR-14, BR-16
Rotor imbalance
Rotor damage
Rotor runout
Rotor deformation
Rotor deflection
Rotor rust
Rotor thickness variation
×
×
Shake
×
Shimmy, Judder
×
BR-6
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
NVH in ST section
×
STEERING
×
NVH in FAX section
×
DRIVE SHAFT
×
×
NVH in WT section
ROAD WHEEL
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
×
×
NVH in WT section
TIRE
×
NVH in FAX, RAX and FSU, RSU section
×
AXLE AND SUSPENSION
NVH in PB section
BR-37, BR-45
Shims damaged
×
Drum out of round
BR-14, BR-16
Noise
Pads uneven wear
Possible cause and
SUSPECTED PARTS
BR-14, BR-16
Reference page
Pads damaged
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
INFOID:0000000007491374
Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×
×: Applicable
2012 QUEST
BRAKE PEDAL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
A
BRAKE PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007491375
B
INSPECTION
C
Brake Pedal Height
Check the height (H1) between the dash lower panel (1) and the
brake pedal upper surface.
D
H1
: Refer to BR-51, "Brake Pedal".
CAUTION:
Remove the floor trim.
E
BR
JPFIA0065ZZ
Stop Lamp Switch and Brake Switch
Check the clearance (C) among the stopper rubber (1) and the stop
lamp switch and brake switch (2) threaded end.
C
G
H
: Refer to BR-51, "Brake Pedal".
CAUTION:
The stop lamp must turn off when the brake pedal is released.
NOTE:
Pull the brake pedal pad to make the clearance between the stop
lamp switch and brake switch threaded end and the stopper rubber.
I
J
JPFIA0122ZZ
Brake Pedal Play
Press the brake pedal. Check the brake pedal play (A) (stroke until
fluid pressure occurs).
A
K
: Refer to BR-51, "Brake Pedal".
L
M
JPFIA0277ZZ
Depressed Brake Pedal Height
Check the height between the dash lower panel (1) and the brake
pedal upper surface (H2) when depressing the brake pedal at 490 N
(50 kg, 110 lb) while turning engine ON.
H2
O
: Refer to BR-51, "Brake Pedal".
P
CAUTION:
Remove the floor trim.
JPFIA0068ZZ
ADJUSTMENT
Revision: 2011 September
N
BR-7
2012 QUEST
BRAKE PEDAL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
Brake Pedal Height
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the stop lamp switch and brake switch harness connector.
Loosen the stop lamp switch and brake switch 45° counterclockwise.
Loosen the lock nut of input rod (1).
Rotate the input rod (2), adjust the brake pedal to the specified
height (H1).
CAUTION:
The threaded end of the input rod must project to the inner
side of the clevis (3).
JPFIA0662ZZ
H1
6.
: Refer to BR-51, "Brake Pedal".
Tighten the lock nut. Refer to BR-31, "Exploded View".
JPFIA0279ZZ
Stop Lamp Switch and Brake Switch
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the stop lamp switch and brake switch harness connector.
Loosen the stop lamp switch and brake switch 45° counterclockwise.
Press-fit the stop lamp switch and brake switch (2) until the stop
lamp switch and brake switch hits the stopper rubber (1) 45°
clockwise while pulling the brake pedal pad slightly.
CAUTION:
• The clearance (C) between the stopper rubber and stop
lamp switch and brake switch threaded and must be the
specified value.
C
: Refer to BR-51, "Brake Pedal".
• The stop lamp must be turned off when the brake pedal is
released.
JPFIA0122ZZ
Brake Pedal Play
1.
2.
3.
Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the stop lamp switch and brake switch harness connector.
Loosen the stop lamp switch and brake switch 45° counterclockwise.
Revision: 2011 September
BR-8
2012 QUEST
BRAKE PEDAL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
4. Press-fit the stop lamp switch and brake switch (2) until the stop
lamp switch and brake switch hits the stopper rubber (1) 45°
clockwise while pulling the brake pedal pad slightly.
CAUTION:
• The clearance (C) between the stopper rubber and stop
lamp switch and brake switch threaded and must be the
specified value.
C
A
B
C
: Refer to BR-51, "Brake Pedal".
• The stop lamp must be turned off when the brake pedal is
released.
JPFIA0122ZZ
D
Depressed Brake Pedal Height
1.
2.
Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System".
Check the height between the dash lower panel (1) and the
brake pedal upper surface (H2) when depressing the brake
pedal at 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) while turning engine ON.
H2
3.
E
BR
: Refer to BR-51, "Brake Pedal".
CAUTION:
Remove the floor trim.
Adjust brake pedal height and brake pedal play.
G
JPFIA0068ZZ
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BR-9
2012 QUEST
BRAKE FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
BRAKE FLUID
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007491376
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
•
•
•
•
Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified range (MAX – MIN lines).
Visually check for any brake fluid leakage around the reservoir tank and sub tank.
Check the brake system for any leakage if the fluid level is extremely low (lower than MIN).
Check the brake system for fluid leakage if the warning lamp remains illuminated even after the parking
brake is released.
• Check the reservoir tank and sub tank for the mixing of foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake
fluid.
BRAKE LINE
1.
2.
Check brake line (tubes and hoses) for cracks, deterioration or other damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Depress the brake pedal with a force of 785 N (80 kg, 176 lb)
and hold down the pedal for approximately 5 seconds with the
engine running. Check for any fluid leakage.
CAUTION:
Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque
and repair any abnormal (damaged, worn or deformed) part
if any brake fluid leakage is present.
SBR389C
Draining
INFOID:0000000007491377
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector or the battery negative terminal before performing work.
• If the brake fluid adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleed valve.
2. Depress the brake pedal and loosen the bleeder valve to gradually discharge brake fluid.
BRA0007D
Refilling
INFOID:0000000007491378
CAUTION:
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector or the battery negative terminal before performing work.
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
1. Check that there is no foreign material in the reservoir tank and sub tank, and refill with new brake fluid.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Revision: 2011 September
BR-10
2012 QUEST
BRAKE FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
• Never allow oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
2. Loosen the bleeder valve, slowly depress the brake pedal to the full stroke, and then release the pedal.
Repeat this operation at intervals of 2 or 3 seconds until new brake fluid is discharged. Then close the
bleeder valve with the brake pedal depressed. Repeat the same work on each wheel.
3. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System".
Bleeding Brake System
A
B
INFOID:0000000007491379
C
CAUTION:
• Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) harness connector or the battery negative terminal before performing the work.
• Monitor the fluid level in the reservoir tank while performing the air bleeding
D
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
E
• If the brake fluid adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Check that there is no foreign material in the reservoir tank and sub tank, and refill with new brake fluid.
CAUTION:
BR
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
• Never allow oils other than brake fluid to enter the reservoir tank.
2. Connect a vinyl tube to the bleeder valve of the rear right brake.
G
3. Fully depress the brake pedal 4 to 5 times.
4. Loosen the bleeder valve and bleed air with the brake pedal depressed, and then quickly tighten the
bleeder valve.
H
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all of the air is out of the brake line.
6. Tighten the bleeder valve to the specified torque.
• Front disc brake: refer to BR-37, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
I
• Rear disc brake: refer to BR-45, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View".
7. Perform steps 2 to 6. Occasionally fill with the brake fluid in order to keep it in the reservoir tank at least
half of MAX line. Bleed air in the following order: rear right brake → front left brake → rear left brake →
and front right brake in order.
J
8. Check that the fluid level in the reservoir tank is within the specified range after air bleeding. Refer to BR10, "Inspection".
9. Check each item of brake pedal. Adjust it if the measurement value is not the standard. Refer to BR-7, K
"Inspection and Adjustment".
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BR-11
2012 QUEST
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007491380
FLUID LEAK
Check for brake fluid leakage from the master cylinder mounting face, reservoir tank mounting face, sub tank
mounting face and brake tube connections.
Revision: 2011 September
BR-12
2012 QUEST
BRAKE BOOSTER
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
BRAKE BOOSTER
A
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007491381
OPERATION
B
Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals with the engine stopped. Start the engine with the
brake pedal fully depressed. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel decreases.
C
AIR TIGHT
1.
2.
3.
Run the engine at idle for 1 minute to apply vacuum to the brake booster, and stop the engine.
Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals until the accumulated vacuum is released to
atmospheric pressure. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel gradually
increases each time the brake pedal is depressed when performing this operation.
Depress the brake pedal with the engine running. Then stop the engine while holding down the brake
pedal. Check that the brake pedal stroke does not change after holding down the brake pedal for 30 seconds or more.
D
E
BR
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BR-13
2012 QUEST
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
FRONT DISC BRAKE
BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007491382
INSPECTION
Check brake pad wear thickness from an inspection hole on cylinder
body. Check using a scale if necessary.
Wear thickness
: Refer to BR-51, "Front Disc Brake".
MAA0439D
ADJUSTMENT
Burnish contact surfaces between disc rotor and brake pads according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
CAUTION:
• Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake does not operate firmly/securely until pads and disc
rotor are securely fitted.
• Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road.
2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops.
3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted.
DISC ROTOR
DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007491383
INSPECTION
Appearance
Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. Replace it if necessary. Refer to
FAX-8, "Removal and Installation".
Runout
1.
2.
3.
Fix the disc rotor to the wheel hub and bearing assembly with
wheel nuts (2 points at least).
Check the wheel bearing axial end play before the inspection.
Refer to FAX-6, "Inspection".
Inspect the runout with a dial indicator to measure at 10 mm
(0.39 in) inside the disc edge.
Runout (with it attached
to the vehicle)
: Refer to BR-51, "Front Disc
Brake".
4.
SBR019B
Find the installation position that has a minimum runout by shifting the disc rotor-to-wheel hub and bearing assembly installation
position by one hole at a time if the runout exceeds the limit value.
• Refinish the disc rotor if the runout is outside the limit even after performing the above operation. [When
refinishing, use the Pro-Cut PEM On-Car brake Lathe (Tool No. 38-PFM90.5) or equivalent.]
CAUTION:
• Check in advance that the thickness of the disc rotor is wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in) or more.
Revision: 2011 September
BR-14
2012 QUEST
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
• If the thickness is less than wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in), replace the disc rotor. Refer to FAX8, "Removal and Installation".
Wear thickness
: Refer to BR-51, "Front Disc Brake".
B
Thickness
Check the thickness of the disc rotor using a micrometer. Replace
the disc rotor if the thickness is below the wear limit. Refer to FAX-8,
"Removal and Installation".
Wear thickness
A
C
: Refer to BR-51, "Front Disc
Brake".
D
E
SBR020B
ADJUSTMENT
Burnish contact surfaces between disc rotors and brake pads according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
CAUTION:
• Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake does not operate firmly/securely until pad and disc
rotor are securely fitted.
• Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road.
2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops.
3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted.
BR
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BR-15
2012 QUEST
REAR DISC BRAKE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
REAR DISC BRAKE
BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007491384
INSPECTION
Check brake pad wear thickness from an inspection hole on cylinder
body. Check using a scale if necessary.
Wear thickness
: Refer to BR-51, "Rear Disc Brake".
BRA0010D
ADJUSTMENT
Burnish contact surfaces between disc rotor and brake pads according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
CAUTION:
• Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake does not operate firmly/securely until pads and disc
rotor are securely fitted.
• Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road.
2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops.
3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted.
DISC ROTOR
DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007491385
INSPECTION
Appearance
Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. Replace it if necessary. Refer to
RAX-6, "Removal and Installation".
Runout
1.
2.
3.
Fix the disc rotor to the wheel hub and bearing assembly with
wheel nuts (2 points at least).
Check the wheel bearing axial end play before the inspection.
Refer to RAX-4, "Inspection".
Inspect the runout with a dial indicator to measure at 10 mm
(0.39 in) inside the disc edge.
Runout (with it attached
to the vehicle)
: Refer to BR-51, "Rear Disc
Brake".
4.
SBR019B
Find the installation position that has a minimum runout by shifting the disc rotor-to-wheel hub and bearing assembly installation
position by one hole at a time if the runout exceeds the limit value.
• Refinish the disc rotor if the runout is outside the limit even after performing the above operation. [When
refinishing, use the Pro-Cut PEM On-Car brake Lathe (Tool No. 38-PFM90.5) or equivalent.]
CAUTION:
• Check in advance that the thickness of the disc rotor is wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in) or more.
Revision: 2011 September
BR-16
2012 QUEST
REAR DISC BRAKE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
• If the thickness is less than wear thickness + 0.3 mm (0.012 in), replace the disc rotor. Refer to
RAX-6, "Removal and Installation".
Wear thickness
: Refer to BR-51, "Rear Disc Brake".
B
Thickness
Check the thickness of the disc rotor using a micrometer. Replace
the disc rotor if the thickness is below the wear limit. Refer to RAX-6,
"Removal and Installation".
Wear thickness
A
C
: Refer to BR-51, "Rear Disc
Brake".
D
E
SBR020B
ADJUSTMENT
Burnish contact surfaces between disc rotors and brake pads according to the following procedure after refinishing or replacing disc rotor, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
CAUTION:
• Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake does not operate firmly/securely until pad and disc
rotor are securely fitted.
• Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road.
2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3 to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops.
3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the brake.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until pad and disc rotor are securely fitted.
BR
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BR-17
2012 QUEST
BRAKE PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
BRAKE PEDAL
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007491386
JSFIA0957GB
1.
Clevis pin
2.
Brake pedal assembly
3.
Brake pedal pad
4.
Snap pin
5.
Clip
6.
Brake switch
7.
Stop lamp switch
: Apply multi-purpose grease.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491387
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the stop lamp switch and the brake switch harness connectors.
Rotate the stop lamp switch and the brake switch (1) counter
clockwise to remove.
JPFIA0815ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
BR-18
2012 QUEST
BRAKE PEDAL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Remove snap pin (1) and clevis pin (2) from clevis (3) of brake
booster.
5. Remove the brake pedal assembly.
CAUTION:
Hold the brake booster and master cylinder assembly so as
not to drop out or contact them other parts.
6. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-19, "Inspection
and Adjustment".
A
B
C
JPFIA0816ZZ
D
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Apply the multi-purpose grease to the clevis pin and the mating faces. (Not necessary if grease has been
E
already applied)
NOTE:
The clevis pin may be inserted in either direction.
• Perform adjustment after installation. Refer to BR-19, "Inspection and Adjustment".
BR
Inspection and Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007491388
G
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Check for the following items and replace the brake pedal assembly if necessary.
- Check the brake pedal upper rivet (made by aluminum) (A) for
deformation.
- Check the brake pedal for bend, damage, and cracks on the
welded parts.
- Check the lapping length (D) of sub-bracket (B) and slide plate (C).
H
I
D : 6.0 mm (0.236 in) or more
J
JSFIA0459ZZ
K
• Check clevis pin and plastic stopper (A) for damage and deformation. If any is found, replace clevis pin.
L
M
N
PFIA0756J
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Adjust each item of brake pedal after installing the brake pedal assembly to the vehicle. Refer to BR-7,
"Inspection and Adjustment".
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BR-19
2012 QUEST
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
BRAKE PIPING
FRONT
FRONT : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007491389
JSFIA0958GB
1.
Brake tube
2.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
3.
Master cylinder assembly
4.
Brake booster
5.
Connector bracket
6.
Connector
7.
Lock plate
8.
Brake hose
9.
Union bolt
10. Copper washer
A.
To rear brake tube
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.
Revision: 2011 September
BR-20
2012 QUEST
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
FRONT : Hydraulic Piping
INFOID:0000000007491390
A
B
C
D
E
BR
JSFIA0959ZZ
1.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
2.
Front disc brake
3.
Master cylinder assembly
4.
Brake booster
5.
Connector
6.
Rear disc brake
A.
Brake tube
B.
Brake hose
G
H
: Flare nut
: Union bolt
I
FRONT : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491391
J
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose or brake tube. If this is not complied
with, brake fluid may splash.
• If the brake fluid adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Remove tires with power tool.
2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Draining".
3. Loosen the flare nut (1) with a flare nut wrench (A) and separate
the brake tube (2) from the brake hose (3).
CAUTION:
• Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
• Never bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake
hoses and tubes.
• Cover open end of brake tubes and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt.
K
L
M
N
O
P
JPFIA0847ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
BR-21
2012 QUEST
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Remove the union bolt (1) and copper washers (2), and remove
the brake hose (3) from the brake caliper assembly.
5. Remove the lock plate (4) and remove the brake hose.
JPFIA0819ZZ
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose or brake tube. If this is not complied
with, brake fluid may splash.
• If the brake fluid adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Assemble the union bolt (1) and the copper washer (2) to the
brake hose.
CAUTION:
Never reuse the copper washer.
2. Align the brake hose L-pin (A) with the brake caliper assembly
hole (B), and tighten the union bolt (1) to the specified torque.
JSFIA0559ZZ
3.
Install the brake tube (2) to the brake hose (1), temporarily
tighten the flare nut (3) by hand until it does not rotate further,
and fix the brake hose to the bracket (5) with the lock plate (4).
CAUTION:
Check that all brake hoses and brake tubes are not twisted
and bent.
JPFIA0821ZZ
4.
5.
6.
7.
Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a crowfoot (A)
and torque wrench (B).
CAUTION:
Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System".
Install tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Removal and
Installation".
Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-22, "FRONT :
Inspection".
JPFIA0001ZZ
FRONT : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007491392
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Revision: 2011 September
BR-22
2012 QUEST
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Check the brake hoses and tubes for the following: no scratches; no twist and deformation; no interference with other components when steering the steering wheel; no looseness at connections.
2. Depress the brake pedal with a force of 785 N (80 kg, 176 lb) and hold down the pedal for approximately
5 seconds with the engine running. Check for any fluid leakage.
CAUTION:
Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque and repair any abnormal (damaged,
worn or deformed) part if any brake fluid leakage is present.
REAR
A
B
C
REAR : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007491393
D
E
BR
G
H
I
J
K
JSFIA0960GB
1.
Brake tube
2.
Lock plate
4.
Union bolt
5.
Copper washer
A.
To connector
3.
L
Brake hose
M
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
N
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: Indicates that the part is connected at points with same symbol in actual vehicle.
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BR-23
2012 QUEST
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REAR : Hydraulic Piping
INFOID:0000000007491394
JSFIA0959ZZ
1.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
2.
Front disc brake
3.
Master cylinder assembly
4.
Brake booster
5.
Connector
6.
Rear disc brake
A.
Brake tube
B.
Brake hose
: Flare nut
: Union bolt
REAR : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491395
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose or brake tube. If this is not complied
with, brake fluid may splash.
• If the brake fluid adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Remove tires with power tool.
2. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Draining".
3. Loosen the flare nut (1) with a flare nut wrench (A) and separate
the brake tube (2) from the brake hose (3).
CAUTION:
• Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
• Never bend sharply, twist or strongly pull out the brake
hoses and tubes.
• Cover open end of brake tubes and hoses when disconnecting to prevent entrance of dirt.
JSFIA0561ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
BR-24
2012 QUEST
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Remove the union bolt (1) and copper washers (2), and remove
the brake hose (3) from the brake caliper assembly.
5. Remove the lock plate (4), and remove brake hose.
A
B
C
JSFIA0562ZZ
D
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, E
never wash them with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose or brake tube. If this is not complied
with, brake fluid may splash.
BR
• If the brake fluid adheres to the brake caliper assembly and disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Assemble the union bolt (1) and the copper washer (2) to the
brake hose.
G
CAUTION:
Never reuse the copper washer.
2. Align the brake hose L-pin (A) with the brake caliper assembly
H
hole (B), and tighten the union bolt to the specified torque.
I
JSFIA0563ZZ
J
3.
Install the brake tube (2) to the brake hose (1), temporarily
tighten the flare nut (3) by hand until it does not rotate further,
and fix the brake hose with the lock plate (4).
CAUTION:
Check that all brake hose and brake tube are not twisted
and bent.
K
L
M
JSFIA0564ZZ
4.
5.
6.
7.
N
Tighten the flare nut to the specified torque with a crowfoot (A)
and torque wrench (B).
CAUTION:
Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System".
Install tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Removal and
Installation".
Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-25, "REAR :
Inspection".
O
P
JPFIA0001ZZ
REAR : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007491396
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Revision: 2011 September
BR-25
2012 QUEST
BRAKE PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Check the brake hoses and tubes for the following: no scratches; no twist and deformation; no looseness
at connections.
2. Depress the brake pedal with a force of 785 N (80 kg, 176 lb) and hold down the pedal for approximately
5 seconds with the engine running. Check for any fluid leakage.
CAUTION:
Retighten the applicable connection to the specified torque and repair any abnormal (damaged,
worn or deformed) part if any brake fluid leakage is present.
Revision: 2011 September
BR-26
2012 QUEST
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007491397
B
C
D
E
BR
G
H
I
JSFIA0961GB
1.
Reservoir cap
2.
Reservoir tank
3.
Reservoir tank bracket
4.
Clamp
5.
Hose
6.
Bracket
7.
Clamp
10. O-ring
A.
8.
Cylinder body
9.
Pin
11.
Grommet
12.
Sub tank
J
K
Paint mark
: Apply polyglycol ether based lubricant.
L
: Apply brake fluid.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
M
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
N
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491398
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake tube. If this is not complied with, brake fluid
may splash.
1. Perform inspection before removal. Refer to BR-30, "Inspection".
2. Depress the brake pedal several times to release the vacuum pressure from the brake booster.
3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Draining".
4. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch harness connector.
Revision: 2011 September
BR-27
2012 QUEST
O
P
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
5. Remove reservoir tank, bracket and hose.
6. Remove air duct and air cleaner case. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation".
7. Separate the brake tube from master cylinder assembly with a
flare nut wrench (A).
CAUTION:
Never scratch the flare nut and the brake tube.
8. Remove the master cylinder assembly.
CAUTION:
• Never deform or bend the brake tubes.
• Never depress the brake pedal after the master cylinder
assembly is removed.
JPFIA0844ZZ
9.
• The piston (A) of the master cylinder assembly is
exposed. Never damage it when removing the master cylinder.
• The piston may drop off when pulled out strongly. Never
hold the piston. Hold the cylinder body when handling the
master cylinder assembly.
Remove the O-ring.
JSFIA0567ZZ
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it off
immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface. For brake component parts, never wash
them with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake tube. If this is not complied with, brake fluid may
splash.
• Never depress the brake pedal after the master cylinder assembly is removed.
• Apply polyglycol ether based lubricant to the brake booster [see
(A) in the figure] when installing the master cylinder assembly to
the brake booster.
JPFIA0013ZZ
• The piston (A) of the master cylinder assembly is exposed. Never
damage it when handling the master cylinder.
• Check that no dirt and dust are present on the piston before installation. Clean it with new brake fluid if necessary.
• The piston may drop off when pulled strongly. Never hold the piston. Hold the cylinder body when handling the master cylinder
assembly.
• Never reuse the O-ring.
• Never deform or bend the brake tubes.
JSFIA0567ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
BR-28
2012 QUEST
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Temporarily tighten the brake tube flare nut to the master cylinder
assembly by hand. Then tighten it to the specified torque with a
crowfoot and torque wrench (A). Refer to BR-20, "FRONT :
Exploded View".
A
B
C
JPFIA0844ZZ
D
• Align paint mark of hose with sub tank projection (A), and install
hose to sub tank.
E
BR
G
JSFIA0573ZZ
H
• When installing hose, insert it until its tip reaches the back-end of
length (A) or further as show in the figure.
A
I
: 25 mm (0.98 in) or more
• Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System"
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-30, "Inspection".
J
K
PFIA0761J
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000007491399
L
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
• Never disassemble the cylinder body.
• Remove the sub tank only when necessary.
• Never drop the when installing. The parts must not be reused if they are dropped.
1. Fix the master cylinder assembly to a vise.
CAUTION:
• Always set copper plates or cloth between vise grips when fixing the cylinder body to a vise.
• Never overtighten the vise.
2. Remove the sub tank mounting pin with a pin punch (A) [4 mm
(0.16 in)].
3. Remove the sub tank and grommet from the cylinder body.
M
N
O
P
JSFIA0568ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
BR-29
2012 QUEST
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
• Never use mineral oils such as kerosene or gasoline and rubber grease during the cleaning and
assembly process.
• Never allow foreign matter (e.g. dust) and oils other than brake fluid to enter the sub tank.
• Never drop the when installing. The parts must not be reused if they are dropped.
1. Apply new brake fluid to the grommet and install it to the cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Never reuse the grommets.
2. Install the sub tank to the cylinder body.
3. Fix the cylinder body to a vise.
CAUTION:
• Place the sub tank with the chamfered pin hole ( ) facing
up.
• Always set copper plates or cloth between vise grips
when fixing the cylinder body to a vise.
• Never overtighten the vise.
JSFIA0569ZZ
4.
Tilt the sub tank so that a mounting pin can be inserted. Insert a
mounting pin with a pin punch (A) [4 mm (0.16 in)]. Return the
sub tank to the horizontal position. Insert another mounting pin
into the pin hole on the opposite side in the same manner after
the mounting pin passes through the cylinder body pin hole.
CAUTION:
Never reuse the pin.
JSFIA0568ZZ
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007491400
INSPECTION BEFORE REMOVAL
Check the brake fluid level switch. Refer to BRC-86, "Component Inspection".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check the following items and replace if necessary.
• Check the master cylinder for deformation, twist, contact with other parts or looseness of connection.
• Check for fluid leakage from connection. Refer to BR-22, "FRONT : Inspection".
CAUTION:
If the fluid leakage is present, retighten to the specified torque. Replace if necessary.
Revision: 2011 September
BR-30
2012 QUEST
BRAKE BOOSTER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
BRAKE BOOSTER
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007491401
B
C
D
E
BR
G
JSFIA0962GB
1.
Master cylinder assembly
2.
Brake booster
4.
Clevis
5.
Gasket
3.
Lock nut
H
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
I
Removal and installation
INFOID:0000000007491402
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Perform inspection before removal. Refer to BR-32, "Inspection and Adjustment".
Remove brake master cylinder assembly. Refer to BR-27, "Removal and Installation".
Remove intelligent key warning buzzer. Refer to DLK-458, "Removal and Installation".
Remove vacuum hose from brake booster. Refer to BR-33, "Removal and Installation".
Remove snap pin (1) and clevis pin (2). Refer to BR-18,
"Exploded View".
Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal assembly.
CAUTION:
Hold the brake booster so as to avoid dropping out.
Remove brake booster.
CAUTION:
Never deform or bend the brake tubes.
NOTE:
If removing brake booster is difficult, remove clevis from brake
booster.
Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-32, "Inspection
and Adjustment".
J
K
L
M
N
JPFIA0019ZZ
O
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
off immediately and wash with water if it gets on a painted surface.
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted during installation, the
dash panel may damage the threads.
• Never deform or bend the brake tubes when installing the brake booster.
• Always use a gasket between the brake booster and the dash panel.
Revision: 2011 September
BR-31
2012 QUEST
P
BRAKE BOOSTER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Replace the clevis pin if it is damaged. Refer to BR-19, "Inspection and Adjustment".
• Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System".
• Check each item of brake pedal. Adjust it if the measurement value is not the standard. Refer to BR-7,
"Inspection and Adjustment".
Inspection and Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007491403
INSPECTION BEFORE REMOVAL
Air Tight
CAUTION:
Check the air tight condition when the master cylinder and the brake booster is installed.
1. Check the air tight use a handy vacuum pump.
At vacuum of −66.7 kPa (−500 mmHg,
−19.69 inHg)
2.
a.
b.
c.
: Vacuum should decrease within 3.3 kPa (24.8 mmHg,
0.98 inHg) for 15 seconds.
If the air tight condition cannot be maintained, perform the following operation.
Check the no dirt and dust are present on the brake booster and brake master cylinder mating faces.
Clean it if necessary.
Check the O-ring on the master cylinder. If anything is found, replace the O-ring. Refer to BR-27,
"Removal and Installation".
Check the air tight condition again. If the condition still cannot be maintained, replace the brake booster.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Input Rod Length Inspection
1.
Loosen the lock nut (1) and adjust the input rod (2) to the specified length (A).
A
2.
: Refer to BR-51, "Brake Booster".
Tighten the lock nut to the specified torque.
JPFIA0238ZZ
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Operation
Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals with the engine stopped. Start the engine with the
brake pedal fully depressed. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel decreases.
NOTE:
A slight impact with a small click may be felt on the pedal when the brake pedal is fully depressed. This is a
normal phenomenon due to the brake system operation.
Air Tight
1.
2.
3.
Run the engine at idle for 1 minute to apply vacuum to the brake booster, and stop the engine.
Depress the brake pedal several times at 5-second intervals until the accumulated vacuum is released to
atmospheric pressure. Check that the clearance between brake pedal and dash lower panel gradually
increases each time the brake pedal is depressed when performing this operation.
Depress the brake pedal with the engine running. Then stop the engine while holding down the brake
pedal. Check that the brake pedal stroke does not change after holding down the brake pedal for 30 seconds or more.
ADJUSTMENT AFTER INSTALLATION
Perform the brake pedal adjustment after installing the brake pedal assembly. Refer to BR-7, "Inspection and
Adjustment".
Revision: 2011 September
BR-32
2012 QUEST
VACUUM LINES
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
VACUUM LINES
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007491404
B
C
D
E
BR
G
JSFIA0963ZZ
1.
Clamp
2.
Vacuum hose (check valve built-in)
4.
Clip
5.
Vacuum hose
A.
To intake manifold
B.
Paint mark
D.
To brake booster
3.
Vacuum piping
H
C.
Stamp indicating engine direction
I
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491405
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
J
Remove air duct and air cleaner case. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the vacuum hose and vacuum piping.
Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-33, "Inspection".
K
INSTALLATION
Note the following, install to the vacuum hose.
• The check valve built-in the vacuum hose must face the right direction, referring to BR-33, "Exploded View".
If the vacuum hose is installed in the wrong direction, the brake booster may not operate normally.
• When installing vacuum hose, insert it until its tip reaches the
back-end of length (A) or further as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Never use lubricating oil during assembly.
L
M
N
A
: 24 mm (0.95 in) or more
- Face the paint mark of vacuum piping (brake booster side) and
vacuum hose (intake manifold side) to vehicle front to assemble.
- Face the other paint marks upward to assemble.
- For clamp mounting direction (the orientation of pawl), refer to BR33, "Exploded View".
- Install clip to the correct position, refer to BR-33, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Both cooler pipe and vacuum piping must be clipped.
Inspection
O
JPFIA0023ZZ
INFOID:0000000007491406
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Revision: 2011 September
BR-33
2012 QUEST
P
VACUUM LINES
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Appearance
Check for correct assembly, damage and deterioration.
Check Valve Airtightness
• Use a handy vacuum pump (A) to check.
When connected to the booster side (B):
Vacuum should decrease within 1.3 kPa (9.8 mmHg,
0.38 inHg) for 15 seconds under a vacuum of −66.7
kPa (−500 mmHg, −19.70 inHg).
When connected to the engine side (C):
Vacuum should not exist.
• Replace vacuum hose if vacuum hose and check valve are malfunctioning.
Revision: 2011 September
BR-34
JPFIA0024ZZ
2012 QUEST
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
FRONT DISC BRAKE
A
BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007491407
B
C
D
E
BR
G
JSFIA0578GB
1.
Sliding pin bolt
2.
Cylinder body
3.
Inner shim cover
4.
Inner shim
5.
Inner pad (with pad wear sensor)
6.
Pad return spring
7.
Pad retainer
8.
Torque member
9.
Outer pad
11.
Outer shim cover
10. Outer shim
H
I
1: Apply rubber grease.
2: Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease.
J
®
3: Apply MOLYKOTE 7439 or equivalent.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
K
BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491408
L
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front brake has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed with a
dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the disc rotor or the cylinder body, quickly wipe it off.
1. Remove tires with power tool.
2. Remove sliding pin bolt (lower side) from cylinder body.
M
N
O
P
JSFIA0579ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
BR-35
2012 QUEST
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire so that the brake
hose will not stretch.
4. Remove pad return spring.
CAUTION:
Never deform the pad return spring.
5. Remove the brake pads from the torque member.
JSFIA0580ZZ
6.
CAUTION:
• Never deform the pad retainer (2) when removing the pad
retainer from the torque member (1).
• Never damage the piston boot.
• Never drop the brake pads, shims, and the shim covers.
• Remember each position of the removed brake pads.
Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-37, "BRAKE PAD
: Inspection".
JPFIA0118ZZ
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front brake has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed with a
dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads or the cylinder body because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the disc rotor or the cylinder body, quickly wipe it off.
1. Install the pad retainers (1) to the torque member (2) if the pad
retainers has been removed.
CAUTION:
• Securely assemble the pad retainers so that it will not be
lifted up from the torque member.
• Never deform the pad retainers.
PFIA0763J
2.
Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease to the
mating faces (A) between the brake pads and the shims, and
install the shims and shim covers to the brake pads.
CAUTION:
Always replace the shim and shim cover together when
replacing the brake pad.
3.
Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent to the mating faces (B)
between the brake pads and the pad retainers.
Install the brake pads to the torque member.
4.
JSFIA0581ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
BR-36
2012 QUEST
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
5. Install the pad return spring (1) to the brake pad (2).
CAUTION:
• Never deform the pad return spring.
• Correctly insert the pad return spring in to the pad return
spring hole on the brake pad.
6. Install cylinder body to torque member.
CAUTION:
• Never damage the piston boot.
• When replacing brake pad with new one, check a brake
fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid
returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing
piston in.
NOTE:
Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston.
7. Apply rubber grease to sliding pin bolt (lower side), and install
the sliding pin bolt (lower side) and tighten it to the specified
torque.
8. Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel
is present for the front disc brake. Refer to BR-37, "BRAKE PAD
: Inspection".
9. Install tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Removal and
Installation".
A
B
C
JSFIA0582ZZ
D
E
BR
G
JSFIA0579ZZ
BRAKE PAD : Inspection
H
INFOID:0000000007491409
I
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Replace the shims and the shim covers if rust is excessively attached.
• Eliminate rust on the pad retainers and the torque member. Replace them if rust is excessively attached.
J
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below.
1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
4. Securely depress the brake pedal several times.
5. Check a drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and replace if
necessary. Refer to BR-40, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly"
• Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-14, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
K
L
M
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View
N
INFOID:0000000007491410
REMOVAL
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BR-37
2012 QUEST
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
JSFIA0990GB
1.
Brake caliper assembly
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
DISASSEMBLY
JSFIA0584GB
1.
Sliding pin bolt
2.
Bushing
3.
Cap
4.
Bleeder valve
5.
Cylinder body
6.
Piston seal
7.
Piston
8.
Piston boot
9.
Sliding pin boot
10. Torque member
: Apply rubber grease.
: Apply brake fluid.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Revision: 2011 September
BR-38
2012 QUEST
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491411
A
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front brake has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed with a B
dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it C
out immediately and wash with water if it gets on a protect surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose. If this is not complied with, brake
D
fluid may splash.
• Never drop removed parts.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
E
1. Remove tires with power tool.
2. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts.
3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Draining".
BR
4. Separate brake hose from caliper assembly. Refer to BR-21, "FRONT : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove torque member mounting bolts, and remove brake caliper assembly.
G
CAUTION:
Never drop brake pad and caliper assembly.
6. When removing disc rotor. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and InstalH
lation".
I
JSFIA0585ZZ
INSTALLATION
J
WARNING:
Since dust covering the front brake has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed with a
dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
out immediately and wash with water if it gets on a protect surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose. If this is not complied with, brake
fluid may splash.
• Never drop removed parts.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Install disc rotor. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation".
2. Install the brake caliper assembly to the steering knuckle and
tighten the torque member mounting bolts to the specified
torque.
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the brake
caliper assembly mounting face, threads, mounting bolts
and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture.
3. Install brake hose. Refer to BR-21, "FRONT : Removal and
Installation".
4. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake SysJSFIA0585ZZ
tem".
5. Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, refer to
BR-42, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection".
6. Install tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
BR-39
2012 QUEST
K
L
M
N
O
P
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
7. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-42, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000007491412
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Never drop the parts.
NOTE:
Never remove the torque member, brake pad, pad return spring and pad retainers when disassembling and
assembling the cylinder body.
1. Remove the sliding pin bolt, and remove the cylinder body from the torque member. Refer to BR-35,
"BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Fix the brake pad at suitable tape so that the brake pad will not drop.
2. Remove sliding pin boots from torque member.
3. Remove bushing (1) from sliding pin bolt (2).
JSFIA0496ZZ
4.
Place a wooden block as shown in the figure, and blow air from
union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots.
CAUTION:
Never get fingers caught in the pistons.
BRB0032D
5.
6.
7.
Remove piston seal from cylinder body using seal pick tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage a cylinder inner wall.
Remove bleeder valve and cap.
Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to BR-42, "BRAKE
CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection".
SFIA0141E
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Never drop the parts.
1. Install bleeder valve and cap.
Revision: 2011 September
BR-40
2012 QUEST
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Apply rubber grease to piston seals (1), and install them to cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Never reuse piston seals.
A
B
C
JPFIA0032ZZ
D
3.
Apply rubber grease to piston boots (1). Cover the piston (2) end
with piston boot, and then install cylinder side lip on piston boot
securely into a groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Never reuse piston boots.
E
BR
G
JPFIA0033ZZ
4.
Apply new brake fluid to pistons (1). Push piston into cylinder
body by hand and push piston boot (2) piston-side lip into the
piston groove.
CAUTION:
Press the pistons evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.
H
I
J
JPFIA0034ZZ
5.
Apply rubber grease to mating faces (A) between sliding pin bolt
(1) and bushing (2), and install bushing to sliding pin bolt.
K
L
M
N
JSFIA0497ZZ
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BR-41
2012 QUEST
FRONT DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
6. Apply rubber grease to mating faces (A) between sliding pin bolt
(1) and sliding pin boot (2), and install sliding pin boot to torque
member.
7. Install the cylinder body to torque member, and tighten sliding
pin bolts to the specified torque.
JSFIA0498ZZ
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007491413
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Check the following items and replace if necessary.
Cylinder Body
Check the inner wall of the cylinder for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil.
Torque Member
Check the torque member for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
Pistons
Check the surface of the piston for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
A piston sliding surface is plated. Never polish with sandpaper.
Sliding Pin Bolt, Sliding Pin Boot and Bushing
Check the sliding pin bolts, sliding boots and bushing for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check a drag of front disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below.
1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-35, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
4. Securely depress the brake pedal several times.
5. Check a drag of front disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and replace if
necessary. Refer to BR-40, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly".
• Burnish contact surface between disc rotor and brake pads after refinishing or replacing disc rotor or brake
pad, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-14, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
Revision: 2011 September
BR-42
2012 QUEST
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REAR DISC BRAKE
A
BRAKE PAD
BRAKE PAD : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007491414
B
C
D
E
BR
G
JSFIA0586GB
1.
Sliding pin bolt
2.
Cylinder body
3.
Inner shim cover
4.
Inner shim
5.
Inner pad (with pad wear sensor)
6.
Pad retainer
7.
Torque member
8.
Outer pad
9.
Outer shim
H
I
10. Outer shim cover
1 Apply rubber grease.
2: Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease.
J
®
3: Apply MOLYKOTE 7439 or equivalent.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
K
BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491415
L
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Since dust covering the rear brake has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed with a
dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the disc rotor or the cylinder body, quickly wipe it off.
1. Remove tires with power tool.
2. Remove sliding pin bolt (upper side).
M
N
O
P
JSFIA0587ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
BR-43
2012 QUEST
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Suspend the cylinder body with suitable wire so that the brake
hose will not stretch.
4. Remove the brake pads from the torque member.
JSFIA0588ZZ
5.
CAUTION:
• Never deform the pad retainer (2) when removing the pad
retainer from the torque member (1).
• Never damage the piston boot.
• Never drop the brake pads, shims, and the shim covers.
• Remember each position of the removed brake pads.
Perform inspection after removal. Refer to BR-45, "BRAKE PAD
: Inspection".
JPFIA0118ZZ
INSTALLATION
WARNING:
Since dust covering the rear brake has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed with a
dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake pads or the cylinder body because the piston may pop out.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the disc rotor or the cylinder body, quickly wipe it off.
1. Install the pad retainers (1) to the torque member (2) if the pad
retainers has been removed.
CAUTION:
• Securely assemble the pad retainers so that it will not be
lifted up from the torque member.
• Never deform the pad retainers.
PFIA0763J
2.
Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease to the
mating faces (A) between the brake pads and the shims, and
install the shims and shim covers to the brake pads.
CAUTION:
Always replace the shim together with the shim cover when
replacing the brake pad.
3.
Apply MOLYKOTE® 7439 or equivalent to the mating faces (B)
between the brake pads and the pad retainers.
Install the brake pads to the torque member.
4.
JSFIA0589ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
BR-44
2012 QUEST
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
5.
Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease to the
pawls part (A) of cylinder body, and install cylinder body to the
torque member.
CAUTION:
• Never damage the piston boot.
• When replacing brake pad with new one, check a brake
fluid level in the reservoir tank because brake fluid
returns to master cylinder reservoir tank when pressing
piston in.
NOTE:
Use a disc brake piston tool to easily press piston.
A
B
C
JSFIA0591ZZ
D
6.
7.
8.
Apply rubber grease to sliding pin bolt (upper side), and install
the sliding pin bolt (upper side) and tighten it to the specified
torque.
Depress the brake pedal several times to check that no drag feel
is present for the front disc brake. Refer to BR-45, "BRAKE PAD
: Inspection".
Install tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Removal and
Installation".
E
BR
G
JSFIA0587ZZ
BRAKE PAD : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007491416
H
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Replace the shims and the shim covers if rust is excessively attached.
• Eliminate rust on the pad retainers and the torque member. Replace them if rust is excessively attached.
I
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below.
1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
4. Securely depress the brake pedal several times.
5. Check a drag of rear disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and replace if
necessary. Refer to BR-48, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly"
• Burnish contact surfaces brake pads and disc rotor after refinishing or replacing brake pads, or if a soft pedal
occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-16, "BRAKE PAD : Inspection and Adjustment".
J
K
L
M
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007491417
N
REMOVAL
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BR-45
2012 QUEST
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
JPFIA0311GB
1.
Brake caliper assembly
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
DISASSEMBLY
JSFIA0674GB
1.
Sliding pin bolt
2.
Bushing
3.
Cap
4.
Bleeder valve
5.
Cylinder body
6.
Piston seal
7.
Piston
8.
Piston boot
9.
Sliding pin boot
10. Torque member
1: Apply rubber grease.
2: Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease.
3: Apply polyglycol ether based lubricant.
: Apply brake fluid.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Revision: 2011 September
BR-46
2012 QUEST
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491418
A
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Since dust covering the rear brake has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed with a B
dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it C
out immediately and wash with water if it gets on a protect surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose. If this is not complied with, brake
D
fluid may splash.
• Never drop removed parts.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
E
1. Remove tires with power tool.
2. Fix the disc rotor using wheel nuts.
3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to BR-10, "Draining".
BR
4. Separate brake hose from caliper assembly. Refer to BR-24, "REAR : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove torque member mounting bolts, and remove brake caliper assembly.
G
CAUTION:
Never drop brake pad and caliper assembly.
6. When removing disc rotor. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and InstalH
lation".
I
JSFIA0495ZZ
INSTALLATION
J
WARNING:
Since dust covering the rear brake has an affect on human body, the dust must be removed with a
dust collector. Never splatter the dust with an air blow gun.
CAUTION:
• Never spill or splash brake fluid on painted surfaces. Brake fluid may seriously damage paint. Wipe it
out immediately and wash with water if it gets on a protect surface. For brake component parts,
never wash them with water.
• Never depress the brake pedal while removing the brake hose. If this is not complied with, brake
fluid may splash.
• Never drop removed parts.
• If the brake fluid or grease adheres to the disc rotor, quickly wipe it off.
1. Install disc rotor. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation".
2. Install the brake caliper assembly to the axle housing and
tighten the torque member mounting bolts to the specified
torque.
CAUTION:
Never spill or splash any grease and moisture on the brake
caliper assembly mounting face, threads, mounting bolts
and washers. Wipe out any grease and moisture.
3. Install brake hose. Refer to BR-24, "REAR : Removal and Installation".
4. Perform the air bleeding. Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake SysJSFIA0495ZZ
tem".
5. Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, refer to
BR-50, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection".
6. Install tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
BR-47
2012 QUEST
K
L
M
N
O
P
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
7. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to BR-50, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection".
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000007491419
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Never drop the parts.
NOTE:
Never remove the torque member, brake pad and pad retainers when disassembling and assembling the cylinder body.
1. Remove the sliding pin bolt, and remove the cylinder body from the torque member. Refer to BR-43,
"BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Fix the brake pad at suitable tape so that the brake pad will not drop.
2. Remove sliding pin boots from torque member.
3. Remove bushing (1) from sliding pin bolt (2).
JSFIA0496ZZ
4.
Place a wooden block as shown in the figure, and blow air from
union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons and piston boots.
CAUTION:
Never get fingers caught in the pistons.
MAA0272D
5.
6.
7.
Remove piston seal from cylinder body using seal pick tool.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage a cylinder inner wall.
Remove bleeder valve and cap.
Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to BR-50, "BRAKE
CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection".
JPFIA0038ZZ
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Never drop the parts.
1. Install bleeder valve and cap.
Revision: 2011 September
BR-48
2012 QUEST
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Apply polyglycol ether based lubricant to piston seals (1), and
install them to cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Never reuse piston seals.
A
B
C
JPFIA0039ZZ
D
3.
Apply rubber grease to piston boots (1). Cover the piston (2) end
with piston boot, and then install cylinder side lip on piston boot
securely into a groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION:
Never reuse piston boots.
E
BR
G
JPFIA0040ZZ
4.
Apply new brake fluid to pistons (1). Push piston into cylinder
body by hand and push piston boot (2) piston-side lip into the
piston groove.
CAUTION:
Press the pistons evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from being rubbed.
H
I
J
JPFIA0034ZZ
5.
Apply rubber grease to mating faces (A) between sliding pin bolt
(1) and bushing (2), and install bushing to sliding pin.
K
L
M
N
JSFIA0497ZZ
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
BR-49
2012 QUEST
REAR DISC BRAKE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
6. Apply rubber grease to mating faces (A) between sliding pin bolt
(1) and sliding pin boot (2), and install sliding pin and sliding pin
boot to sliding torque member.
JSFIA0498ZZ
7.
8.
Apply MOLYKOTE® AS880N or silicone-based grease to the
pawls part (A) of cylinder body.
Install the cylinder body to tighten sliding pin bolts to the specified torque. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD : Exploded View".
JSFIA0591ZZ
BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007491420
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Check the following items and replace if necessary.
Cylinder Body
Check the inner wall of the cylinder for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
Always clean with new brake fluid. Never clean with mineral oil such as gasoline and light oil.
Torque Member
Check the torque member for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
Pistons
Check the surface of the piston for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
CAUTION:
A piston sliding surface is plated. Never polish with sandpaper.
Sliding Pin Bolt, Sliding Pin Boot and Bushing
Check the sliding pin bolts, sliding boots and bushing for rust, wear, cracks or damage.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check a drag of rear disc brake. If any drag is found, follow the procedure described below.
1. Remove brake pads. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
2. Press the pistons. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
3. Install brake pads. Refer to BR-43, "BRAKE PAD : Removal and Installation".
4. Securely depress the brake pedal several times.
5. Check a drag of rear disc brake again. If any drag is found, disassemble the cylinder body and replace if
necessary. Refer to BR-48, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly".
• Burnish contact surface between disc rotor and brake pads after refinishing or replacing disc rotor or brake
pad, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage. Refer to BR-16, "DISC ROTOR : Inspection and Adjustment".
Revision: 2011 September
BR-50
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
INFOID:0000000007491421
B
Unit: mm (in)
47.62 (1.8748) × 2
Cylinder bore diameter
Front brake
Pad length × width × thickness
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
290 × 28.0 (11.42 × 1.102)
Cylinder bore diameter
Rear brake
83.0 × 33.0 × 8.5 (3.268 × 1.299 × 0.335)
Rotor outer diameter × thickness
Cylinder bore diameter
Control valve
Valve type
Brake booster
Diaphragm diameter
D
42.86 (1.6874)
Pad length × width × thickness
Master cylinder
C
132.0 × 44.5 × 10.0 (5.20 × 1.752 × 0.394)
308 × 16.0 (12.13 × 0.630)
E
25.4 (1.0)
Electric brake force distribution
BR
Primary: 228.5 (9.00)
Secondary: 203 (7.99)
Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".
Recommended brake fluid
Brake Pedal
G
INFOID:0000000007491422
Unit: mm (in)
Item
H
Standard
Brake pedal height
195.6 – 205.6 (7.70 – 8.09)
Depressed brake pedal height
[Depressing 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) while turning the engine ON]
Clearance between stop lamp switch and brake switch threaded end and the stopper rubber
Brake pedal play
I
105.0 (4.13) or more
0.2 – 1.96 (0.008 – 0.0772)
3 – 11 (0.12 – 0.43)
Brake Booster
J
INFOID:0000000007491423
K
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Standard
Input rod length
L
127.0 – 128.0 (5.00 – 5.04)
Front Disc Brake
INFOID:0000000007491424
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Brake pad
Disc rotor
Limit
Wear thickness
2.0 (0.079)
Wear thickness
26.0 (1.024)
Runout (with it attached to the vehicle)
N
0.040 (0.0016)
O
Rear Disc Brake
INFOID:0000000007491425
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Brake pad
Disc rotor
Revision: 2011 September
M
Limit
Wear thickness
2.0 (0.079)
Wear thickness
14.0 (0.551)
Runout (with it attached to the vehicle)
BR-51
0.050 (0.0020)
2012 QUEST
P
CRUISE CONTROL & DRIVER ASSISTANCE
SECTION
CCS
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
ASCD
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 2
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD) ............................................................... 2
F
Information ................................................................ 2
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
CCS
P
Revision: 2011 September
CCS-1
2012 QUEST
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
[ASCD]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)
Information
INFOID:0000000007495955
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD) system is controlled by ECM.
Regarding the information for ASCD system, refer to EC-40, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD) : System Description".
Revision: 2011 September
CCS-2
2012 QUEST
ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL
SECTION
CHG
CHARGING SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 10
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 10
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
Precaution for Power Generation Voltage Variable
Control System .......................................................... 3
Work Flow ................................................................10
PREPARATION ............................................ 4
PREPARATION ................................................... 4
Special Service Tools ................................................ 4
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 5
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 5
CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION ........................................................ 13
F
G
Inspection Procedure ...............................................13
H
POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION ........................................................ 14
I
Inspection Procedure ...............................................14
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 16
J
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT ..................................... 16
Description ...............................................................16
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................16
K
CHARGING SYSTEM .................................................. 5
CHARGING SYSTEM : Component Parts Location ............................................................................ 5
L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) ........................ 17
POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE
CONTROL SYSTEM .................................................... 5
POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE
CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location...... 5
L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) ..................... 19 CHG
SYSTEM .............................................................. 7
S TERMINAL CIRCUIT ..................................... 20
CHARGING SYSTEM .................................................. 7
CHARGING SYSTEM : System Description ............. 7
Description ...............................................................20
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................20
POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE
CONTROL SYSTEM .................................................... 7
POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE
CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description ............... 7
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 21
Description ...............................................................17
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................17
Description ...............................................................19
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................19
Symptom Table .......................................................21
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 22
CHARGING SYSTEM .......................................... 9
ALTERNATOR .................................................. 22
Revision: 2011 September
N
O
CHARGING SYSTEM ....................................... 21
WIRING DIAGRAM ....................................... 9
Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 9
L
Exploded View .........................................................22
Removal and Installation .........................................23
Inspection ................................................................24
CHG-1
2012 QUEST
P
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ........................................................... 25
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 25
Alternator ................................................................ 25
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-2
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000007494993
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
C
D
E
F
G
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Power Generation Voltage Variable Control System
I
J
K
INFOID:0000000007494994
CAUTION:
L
For thailand model, the battery current sensor that is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal measures the charging/discharging current of the battery, and performs various controls. If the
electrical component or the ground wire is connected directly to the battery terminal, the current other
than that being measured with the battery current sensor is charging to or discharging from the bat- CHG
tery. This condition causes the malfunction of the control, and then the battery discharge may occur.
Do not connect the electrical component or the ground wire directly to the battery terminal.
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-3
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007494995
Tool number
Tool name
Description
Tests starting and charging systems.
For operating instructions, refer to
Technical Service Bulletin.
(J-44373 Model MCR620)
Starting/Charging System Tester
SEL403X
Commercial Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007494996
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts, nuts and screws
PIIB1407E
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-4
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A
COMPONENT PARTS
CHARGING SYSTEM
B
CHARGING SYSTEM : Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007494997
C
D
E
F
G
H
JMMIA0854ZZ
No.
1.
2.
Component part
Description
Combination meter (Charge warning lamp)
Alternator
The IC voltage regulator warning function activates to illuminate
the charge warning lamp, if any of the following symptoms occur
while alternator is operating:
• Excessive voltage is produced.
• No voltage is produced.
“B” terminal
Refer to CHG-16, "Description".
“S” terminal
Refer to CHG-20, "Description".
“L” terminal
Refer to CHG-17, "Description".
I
J
K
POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM
L
POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component
CHG
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-5
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007494998
JMMIA0855ZZ
A.
Battery
No.
Component part
Description
IPDM E/R
IPDM E/R converts the received power generation command value into the power generation command signal (PWM signal) and
sends it to the IC voltage regulator.
Refer to PCS-4, "IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location".
ECM
Battery current sensor detects the charging/discharging current of
the battery. ECM judges the battery condition based on this signal.
ECM judges whether to perform the power generation voltage
variable control according to the battery condition.
When performing the power generation voltage variable control,
ECM calculates the target power generation voltage according to
the battery condition and sends the calculated value as the power
generation command value signal to IPDM E/R.
Refer to EC-15, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component
Parts Location".
3.
Alternator (IC voltage regulator)
IC voltage regulator controls the power generation voltage by the
target power generation voltage based on the received power generation command signal.
When there is no power generation command signal, the alternator performs the normal power generation according to the characteristic of the IC voltage regulator.
4.
Battery current sensor
(with battery temperature sensor)
Battery current sensor is installed to the battery cable at the negative terminal, and it detects the charging/discharging current of
the battery and sends the voltage signal to ECM according to the
current value.
1.
2.
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-6
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
A
CHARGING SYSTEM
CHARGING SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007494999
B
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
JPMIA0426GB
J
OUTLINE
The alternator provides DC voltage to operate the vehicle's electrical system and to keep the battery charged.
The voltage output is controlled by the IC voltage regulator.
K
POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM
POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description
L
INFOID:0000000007495000
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
CHG
N
O
P
JMMIA0388GB
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-7
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
OUTLINE
By performing the power generation voltage variable control, the engine load due to the power generation of
the alternator is reduced and fuel consumption is decreased.
NOTE:
When any malfunction is detected in the power generation voltage variable control system, the power generation is performed according to the characteristic of the IC voltage regulator of the alternator.
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-8
2012 QUEST
CHARGING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
A
CHARGING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007495001
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
CHG
N
O
P
JCMWA7679GB
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-9
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000007495002
OVEROALL SEQUENCE
JSMIA0009GB
DETAILED FLOW
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-10
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
NOTE:
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter and alternator test segments must be done
as a set from start to finish.
A
1.PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
B
Perform the preliminary inspection. Refer to CHG-13, "Inspection Procedure".
>> GO TO 2.
C
2.STOP POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM
Stop the operation of the power generation voltage variable control in either of the following procedures.
• After selecting “ENGINE” of “SELECT SYSTEM” using CONSULT, set the DUTY value of “ALTERNATOR
DUTY” to 0 % by selecting “ALTERNATOR DUTY” of “Active Test”. Continue “Active Test” until the end of
inspection. (When the DUTY value is 0 or 100 %, the normal power generation is performed according to the
characteristic of the IC voltage regulator of the alternator.)
• Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the battery current sensor connector. [However, DTC (P1550 P1557) of the engine might remain. After finishing the inspection, connect the battery current sensor connector and erase the self-diagnostic results history of the engine using CONSULT.]
D
E
F
>> GO TO 3.
3.DIAGNOSIS WITH STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEM TESTER
G
Perform the charging system test using Starting/Charging System Tester (SST: J-44373). For details and operating instructions, refer to Technical Service Bulletin.
Test result
CHARGING SYSTEM NOMAL>>Charging system is normal and will also show “DIODE RIPPLE” test result.
NO CHARGING VOLTAGE>>GO TO 4.
LOW CHARGING VOLTAGE>>GO TO 12.
HIGH CHARGING VOLTAGE>>GO TO 14.
DIODE RIPPLE NORMAL>>Diode ripple is OK and will also show “CHARGING VOLTAGE” test result.
EXCESS RIPPLE DETECTED>>Replace the alternator. Perform “DIODE RIPPLE” test again using Starting/
Charging System Tester (SST: J-44373) to confirm repair.
DIODE RIPPLE NOT DETECTED>>GO TO 4.
4.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IGNITION SWITCH IS ON)
H
I
J
K
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Does the charge warning lamp illuminate?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
L
5.“L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN) INSPECTION
CHG
Check “L” terminal circuit (open). Refer to CHG-17, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the “L” terminal circuit normal?
YES >> Replace alternator.
NO
>> Repair as needed.
N
6.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (IDLING)
O
Start the engine and run it at idle.
Does the charge warning lamp turn OFF?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> GO TO 7.
P
7.“L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT) INSPECTION
Check “L” terminal circuit (short). Refer to CHG-19, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the “L” terminal circuit normal?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Repair as needed.
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-11
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
8.“S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check “S” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-20, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the “S” terminal circuit normal?
YES >> GO TO 10.
NO
>> Repair as needed.
9.INSPECTION WITH CHARGE WARNING LAMP (ENGINE AT 3,000 RPM)
Increase and maintain the engine speed at 3,000 rpm.
Does the charge warning lamp remain off?
YES >> GO TO 11.
NO
>> GO TO 10.
10.INSPECTION OF ALTERNATOR PULLEY
Check alternator pulley. Refer to CHG-24, "Inspection".
Is alternator pulley normal?
YES >> Replace alternator.
NO
>> Repair as needed.
11.“B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check “B” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-16, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is “B” terminal circuit normal?
YES >> Replace alternator.
NO
>> Repair as needed.
12.“B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check “B” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-16, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is “B” terminal circuit normal?
YES >> GO TO 13.
NO
>> Repair as needed.
13.INSPECTION OF ALTERNATOR PULLEY
Check alternator pulley. Refer to CHG-24, "Inspection".
Is alternator pulley normal?
YES >> Replace alternator.
NO
>> Repair as needed.
14.“S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check “S” terminal circuit. Refer to CHG-20, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the “S” terminal circuit normal?
YES >> Replace alternator.
NO
>> Repair as needed.
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-12
2012 QUEST
CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION >
CHARGING SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
A
Inspection Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495003
1.CHECK BATTERY TERMINALS CONNECTION
B
Check if battery terminals are clean and tight.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair battery terminals connection.
C
2.CHECK FUSE
D
Check for blown fuse and fusible link.
Unit
Alternator
Combination meter
Power source (Power supply terminals)
Fuse No.
Battery (“S” terminal)
38
Ignition switch ON (“L” terminal)
4
E
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Be sure to eliminate the cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
F
3.CHECK “E” TERMINAL CONNECTION (ALTERNATOR GROUND)
G
Check if “E” terminal (alternator ground) is clean and tight.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair “E” terminal (alternator ground) connection.
H
4.CHECK DRIVE BELT TENSION
I
Check drive belt tension. Refer to EM-14, "Checking".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair as needed.
J
K
L
CHG
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-13
2012 QUEST
POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION
INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION >
POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION
Inspection Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495004
CAUTION:
When performing this inspection, always use a charged battery that has completed the battery inspection. (When the charging rate of the battery is low, the response speed of the voltage change will
become slow. This can cause an incorrect inspection.)
1.CHECK ECM (CONSULT)
Perform ECM self-diagnosis with CONSULT. Refer to EC-66, "CONSULT Function".
Self-diagnostic results content
No malfunction detected>> GO TO 2.
Malfunction detected>> Check applicable parts, and repair or replace corresponding parts.
2.CHECK OPERATION OF POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM
1.
2.
3.
Connect CONSULT and start the engine.
Check that the selector lever is in “P” or “N” position and that all of the electric loads and A/C, etc. are
turned OFF.
Select “ALTERNATOR DUTY” at “Active Test” of “ENGINE”, and then check the value of “BATTERY
VOLT” monitor when DUTY value of “ALTERNATOR DUTY” is set to 40.0 %.
“BATTERY VOLT”
2 seconds after setting the
DUTY value of “ALTERNATOR DUTY” to 40.0 %
4.
: 12 - 13.6 V
Check the value of “BATTERY VOLT” monitor when DUTY value of “ALTERNATOR DUTY” is set to
80.0%.
“BATTERY VOLT”
20 seconds after setting
the DUTY value of “ALTERNATOR DUTY” to 80.0 %
: +0.5 V or more against
the value of “BATTERY
VOLT” monitor when
DUTY value is 40.0 %
Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK IPDM E/R (CONSULT)
Perform IPDM E/R self-diagnosis with CONSULT. Refer to PCS-13, "CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R)".
Self-diagnostic results content
No malfunction detected>> GO TO 4.
Malfunction detected>> Check applicable parts, and repair or replace corresponding parts.
4.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ALTERNATOR AND IPDM E/R
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect alternator connector and IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between alternator harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
Alternator harness connector
4.
IPDM E/R harness connector
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
F60
5
F12
76
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between alternator harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-14
2012 QUEST
POWER GENERATION VOLTAGE VARIABLE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION
INSPECTION
< BASIC INSPECTION >
A
Alternator harness connector
Connector
Terminal
F60
5
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector between IPDM E/R and alternator.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
CHG
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-15
2012 QUEST
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
Description
INFOID:0000000007495005
“B” terminal circuit supplies power to charge the battery and to operate the vehicle’s electrical system.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495006
1.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check if “B” terminal is clean and tight.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair “B” terminal connection.
2.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT
Check voltage between alternator “B” terminal and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Alternator “B” terminal
Terminal
F59
1
(–)
Ground
Voltage (Approx.)
Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check harness for open between alternator and fusible link.
3.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CONNECTION (VOLTAGE DROP TEST)
1.
2.
Start engine, then engine running at idle and warm.
Check voltage between battery positive terminal and alternator “B” terminal.
Terminals
(+)
Battery positive terminal
(–)
Voltage (Approx.)
Alternator “B” terminal
Terminal
F59
1
Less than 0.2 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> “B” terminal circuit is normal. Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow".
NO
>> Check harness between battery and alternator for poor continuity.
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-16
2012 QUEST
L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN)
A
Description
INFOID:0000000007495007
The “L” terminal circuit controls the charge warning lamp. The charge warning lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is set to ON or START. When the alternator is providing sufficient voltage with the engine running,
the charge warning lamp will go off. If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a malfunction is indicated.
Diagnosis Procedure
D
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check if “L” terminal is clean and tight.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair “L” terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Starting/Charging system
test. Refer to Technical Service Bulletine.
2.CHECK “L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN)
Disconnect alternator connector.
Apply ground to alternator harness connector terminal.
Check condition of the charge warning lamp with the ignition switch in the ON position.
Alternator harness connector
Terminal
F60
3
Ignition switch position
Charge warning lamp
ON
Illuminate
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Disconnect the combination meter connector.
Check continuity between alternator harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
Combination meter harness connector
Connector No.
Terminal No.
Connector No.
Terminal No.
F60
3
M34
38
L
Existed
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M34 terminal 25 and 10A fuse [No.4 located
in the fuse block (J/B)].
Does continuity exist?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair the harness.
5.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Connect the battery cable to the negative terminal.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector and ground.
CHG-17
CHG
N
4.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
Revision: 2011 September
K
Continuity
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair the harness or connector.
1.
2.
I
J
3.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
Alternator harness connector
F
H
Condition
Ground
E
G
Does it illuminate?
YES >> “L” terminal circuit is normal. Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow".
NO
>> GO TO 3.
1.
2.
3.
C
INFOID:0000000007495008
1.CHECK “L” TERMINAL CONNECTION
1.
2.
3.
B
2012 QUEST
O
P
L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (OPEN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Terminals
(+)
Combination meter
harness connector
Terminal
M34
25
Condition
Voltage (Approx.)
When the ignition switch is in
ON position
Battery voltage
(–)
Ground
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter.
NO
>> Inspect the power supply circuit. Refer to PG-29, "Wiring Diagram - IGNITION POWER SUPPLY ".
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-18
2012 QUEST
L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
L TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT)
A
Description
INFOID:0000000007495009
The “L” terminal circuit controls the charge warning lamp. The charge warning lamp illuminates when the ignition switch is set to ON or START. When the alternator is providing sufficient voltage with the engine running,
the charge warning lamp will go off. If the charge warning lamp illuminates with the engine running, a malfunction is indicated.
Diagnosis Procedure
C
INFOID:0000000007495010
1.CHECK “L” TERMINAL CIRCUIT (SHORT)
D
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect alternator connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
Does charge warning lamp illuminate?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow".
E
F
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)
1.
2.
3.
4.
B
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground.
G
H
Combination meter harness connector
Connector No.
Terminal No.
M34
38
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter.
NO
>> Repair the harness.
I
J
K
L
CHG
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-19
2012 QUEST
S TERMINAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
S TERMINAL CIRCUIT
Description
INFOID:0000000007495011
The output voltage of the alternator is controlled by the IC voltage regulator at the “S” terminal detecting the
input voltage.
The “S” terminal circuit detects the battery voltage to adjust the alternator output voltage with the IC voltage
regulator.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495012
1.CHECK “S” TERMINAL CONNECTION
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check if “S” terminal is clean and tight.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair “S” terminal connection. Confirm repair by performing complete Starting/Charging system
test. Refer to Technical Service Bulletin.
2.CHECK “S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT
Check voltage between alternator harness connector and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Alternator harness connector
Terminal
F60
4
(–)
Ground
Voltage (Approx.)
Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow".
NO
>> Check harness for open between alternator and fuse.
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-20
2012 QUEST
CHARGING SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
A
CHARGING SYSTEM
Symptom Table
INFOID:0000000007495013
Symptom
Reference
C
Discharged battery
The charge warning lamp does not illuminate when the ignition
switch is set to ON.
The charge warning lamp does not turn OFF after the engine
starts.
B
D
Refer to CHG-10, "Work Flow".
The charging warning lamp turns ON when increasing the engine
speed.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
CHG
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-21
2012 QUEST
ALTERNATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
ALTERNATOR
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495014
REMOVAL
JMMIA0590GB
1.
Alternator mounting bolt (lower)
2.
Alternator bracket
3.
Alternator bracket mounting bolt
4.
Alternator harness connector
5.
Alternator
6.
Alternator mounting nut (lower)
7.
“B” terminal harness nut
8.
Alternator mounting bolt (upper)
: Vehicle front
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
DISASSEMBLY
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-22
2012 QUEST
ALTERNATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Type: A003TJ1791
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
JMMIA0851GB
1.
Rear bearing
2.
Rotor assembly
3.
Retainer
4.
Front bearing
5.
Front bracket assembly
6.
Through bolt
7.
Pulley
8.
Pulley nut
9.
Stator assembly
10. IC voltage regulator assembly
11. Diode assembly
I
12. Rear bracket assembly
J
13. Terminal set
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
K
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495015
L
REMOVAL
CHG
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the parts, disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal first.
N
2. Remove air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
3. Remove reservoir tank. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".
4. Disconnect alternator harness connector.
O
5. Remove “B” terminal harness nut, and then disconnect “B” terminal harness.
6. Remove alternator mounting bolt (upper).
7. Remove engine under cover. Refer to EXT-27, "Exploded View".
P
8. Remove front wheel RH.
9. Remove splash guard RH. Refer to EXT-22, "Removal and Installation".
10. Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation".
11. Remove idler pulley. Refer to EM-13, "Removal and Installation".
12. Remove compressor mounting bolts, and then move compressor to secure work space. Refer to HA-29,
"Exploded View".
1.
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-23
2012 QUEST
ALTERNATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CAUTION:
Never disconnect low-pressure flexible hose and high-pressure flexible hose from compressor.
13. Remove water pipe mounting bolts, and then move water pipe to secure work space. Refer to LU-11,
"Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never disconnect water hose from water pipe.
14. Remove return tube fixing clamps, and then move return tube to secure work space. Refer to ST-34,
"Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Never disconnect return tube from return hose assembly.
15. Remove alternator mounting bolt (lower) and alternator mounting nut (lower).
16. Remove alternator from the right side of the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to contact with and damage surrounding
parts when removing alternator from the vehicle.
: Vehicle front
JMMIA0594ZZ
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Temporarily tighten all of alternator bolts and nut. And then
tighten them in numerical order shown in the figure.
JPMIA0831ZZ
• Install alternator, and check tension of belt. Refer to EM-14, "Checking".
• Be careful to tighten “B” terminal nut carefully.
• For this model, the power generation voltage variable control system that controls the power generation voltage of the alternator has been adopted. Therefore, the power generation voltage variable
control system operation inspection should be performed after replacing the alternator, and then
make sure that the system operates normally. Refer to CHG-14, "Inspection Procedure".
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495016
ALTERNATOR PULLEY INSPECTION
Perform the following.
• Make sure that alternator pulley does not rattle.
• Make sure that alternator pulley nut is tight. Refer to CHG-22, "Exploded View".
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-24
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Alternator
INFOID:0000000007495017
A003TJ1791
Type
Nominal rating
12 -130
Ground polarity
Minimum revolution under no-load (When 13.5 V is applied)
Hot output current (When 13.5 V is applied)
C
MITSUBISHI make
[V - A]
Negative
[rpm]
[A/rpm]
D
Less than 1,300
More than 61/1,500
More than 109/2,500
More than 129/5,000
E
14.1 - 14.7*
Regulated output voltage
[V]
Minimum length of brush
[mm (in)]
More than 5.00 (0.1969)
[N (g, oz)]
4.1 - 5.3 (418 - 541, 14.7 - 19.1)
[mm (in)]
More than 22.1 (0.870)
Brush spring pressure
Slip ring minimum outer diameter
Rotor (Field coil) resistance
B
[Ω]
F
G
1.8 - 2.2
*: Adjustment range of power generation voltage variable control is 11.4 − 15.6 V.
H
I
J
K
L
CHG
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
CHG-25
2012 QUEST
ENGINE
SECTION
CO
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
A
CO
C
D
E
CONTENTS
F
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 2
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 13
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 2
RADIATOR ........................................................ 13
Engine Cooling System ........................................... 2
Engine Cooling System Schematic ......................... 2
Exploded View .........................................................13
Removal and Installation .........................................13
Inspection ................................................................16
G
COOLING FAN .................................................. 17
H
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 3
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS .................. 3
PRECAUTION ............................................... 5
Exploded View .........................................................17
Removal and Installation .........................................17
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................18
Inspection ................................................................18
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 5
WATER PUMP .................................................. 19
Troubleshooting Chart .............................................. 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 5
Liquid Gasket ........................................................... 5
PREPARATION ............................................ 7
Exploded View .........................................................19
Removal and Installation .........................................19
Inspection ................................................................23
WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY .................................................................... 24
Exploded View .........................................................24
Removal and Installation .........................................24
Inspection ................................................................25
PREPARATION ................................................... 7
Special Service Tool ................................................. 7
Commercial Service Tools ....................................... 7
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 8
K
L
M
Exploded View .........................................................26
Removal and Installation .........................................27
Inspection ................................................................27
N
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ............................................................ 28
RADIATOR .........................................................12
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 28
RADIATOR CAP ........................................................ 12
RADIATOR CAP : Inspection .................................. 12
Periodical Maintenance Specification ......................28
Radiator ...................................................................28
Thermostat ..............................................................28
RADIATOR ................................................................ 12
RADIATOR : Inspection .......................................... 12
Revision: 2011 September
J
WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING .......... 26
ENGINE COOLANT ............................................ 8
Inspection .................................................................. 8
Draining ..................................................................... 8
Refilling ..................................................................... 9
Flushing ................................................................... 10
I
CO-1
2012 QUEST
O
P
DESCRIPTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
Engine Cooling System
INFOID:0000000007495956
JPBIA5297GB
Engine Cooling System Schematic
INFOID:0000000007495957
JPBIA5298GB
Revision: 2011 September
CO-2
2012 QUEST
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
A
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
Troubleshooting Chart
INFOID:0000000007495958
Symptom
Check items
Water pump malfunction
Poor heat transfer
—
Dust contamination or paper clogging
Damaged fins
C
Worn or loose drive belt
Thermostat stuck closed
CO
D
—
Physical damage
Clogged radiator cooling
tube
E
Excess foreign material
(rust, dirt, sand, etc.)
Cooling fan does not operate
Reduced air flow
High resistance to fan rotation
F
Fan assembly
—
Damaged fan blades
Cooling system parts
malfunction
G
Damaged radiator shroud
—
—
—
Improper engine coolant
mixture ratio
—
—
—
Poor engine coolant quality
—
Engine coolant density
Cooling hose
Water pump
Radiator cap
Engine coolant leakage
—
Loose clamp
Cracked hose
Radiator
J
Loose
Poor sealing
Overflowing reservoir tank
Exhaust gas leakage into
cooling system
K
Cracked radiator tank
Cracked radiator core
Reservoir tank
I
Poor sealing
O-ring for damage, deterioration or improper fitting
Insufficient engine coolant
H
Cracked reservoir tank
L
Cylinder head deterioration
Cylinder head gasket deterioration
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
CO-3
2012 QUEST
OVERHEATING CAUSE ANALYSIS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptom
Check items
High engine rpm under no
load
Abusive driving
Driving in low gear for extended time
Driving at extremely high
speed
—
Overload on engine
Powertrain system malfunction
Installed improper size
wheels and tires
Except cooling system
parts malfunction
—
Dragging brakes
Improper ignition timing
Blocked bumper
—
Installed car brassiere
Blocked radiator grille
Blocked or restricted air
flow
Blocked radiator
—
—
Blocked condenser
Installed large fog lamp
Revision: 2011 September
Mud contamination or paper
clogging
CO-4
Blocked air flow
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
CO
INFOID:0000000007495959
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
C
D
E
F
G
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Liquid Gasket
J
K
INFOID:0000000007495960
REMOVAL OF LIQUID GASKET SEALING
L
• After removing mounting nuts and bolts, separate the mating surface using the seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J-37228)] (A) and
remove old liquid gasket sealing.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
• Tap (B) the seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J-37228)] to insert it,
and then slide (C) it by tapping on the side as shown in the figure.
• In areas where seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J-37228)] is difficult
to use, use a plastic hammer to lightly tap the parts, to remove it.
CAUTION:
If for some unavoidable reason tool such as a screwdriver is
used, be careful not to damage the mating surfaces.
M
N
O
JPBIA0052ZZ
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
Revision: 2011 September
I
CO-5
P
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
1. Using a scraper (A), remove old liquid gasket adhering to the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface.
• Remove liquid gasket completely from the groove of the liquid
gasket application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt holes.
2. Wipe the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface with white gasoline (lighting and heating use) to remove
adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials.
JPBIA0053ZZ
3.
4.
Attach liquid gasket tube to the tube presser (commercial service tool).
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to
GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
Apply liquid gasket without breaks to the specified location with
the specified dimensions.
• If there is a groove for the liquid gasket application, apply liquid gasket to the groove.
EMA0622D
• As for the bolt holes (B), normally apply liquid gasket inside
the holes. Occasionally, it should be applied outside the holes.
Check to read the text of service manual.
A
: Groove
: Inside
• Within five minutes of liquid gasket application, install the mating component.
• If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
• Never retighten after mounting bolts and nuts the installation.
• After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill
engine oil and engine coolant.
CAUTION:
If there are specific instructions in this manual, observe them.
Revision: 2011 September
CO-6
JPBIA0010ZZ
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000007495961
CO
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
C
Description
Removing water pump cover
KV10111100
(J-37228)
Seal cutter
D
E
NT046
F
Commercial Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007495962
G
Tool name
Description
Tube presser
Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
H
I
S-NT052
Power tool
Loosening nuts and bolts
J
K
L
PBIC0190E
Radiator cap tester
Checking radiator and radiator cap
M
N
PBIC1982E
Radiator cap tester adapter
Adapting radiator cap tester to radiator cap
and radiator pipe (upper) filler neck
a: 28 (1.10) dia.
b: 31.4 (1.236) dia.
c: 41.3 (1.626) dia.
Unit: mm (in)
S-NT564
Revision: 2011 September
CO-7
2012 QUEST
O
P
ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COOLANT
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495963
LEVEL
• Check if the reservoir tank engine coolant level is within the “MIN”
to “MAX” when the engine is cool.
A
: MAX
B
: MIN
• Adjust the engine coolant level if necessary.
CAUTION:
Refill Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent in its quality mixed with water (distilled or demineralized). Refe to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".
JPBIA0102ZZ
LEAKAGE
• To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system with the
radiator cap tester (commercial service tool) (A) and radiator cap
tester adapter (commercial service tool) (B).
Testing pressure
: Refer to CO-28, "Radiator".
WARNING:
Never remove radiator cap when engine is hot. Serious burns
could occur from high-pressure engine coolant escaping from
engine cooling system.
CAUTION:
Higher test pressure than specified may cause radiator damage.
NOTE:
In a case that engine coolant decreases, replenish radiator with engine coolant.
• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts.
Draining
PBIC5121J
INFOID:0000000007495964
WARNING:
• To avoid being scalded, never change engine coolant when the engine is hot.
• Wrap a thick cloth around radiator cap and carefully remove radiator cap. First, turn radiator cap a
quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Then turn radiator cap all the way.
1. Remove engine under cover.
2. Open radiator drain plug (1) at the bottom of radiator, and then
remove radiator cap.
: Vehicle front
JPBIA5339ZZ
3.
When draining all of engine coolant in the system, open water drain plugs on cylinder block. Refer
to EM-63, "Setting".
Remove reservoir tank if necessary, and drain engine coolant and clean reservoir tank before installing.
Revision: 2011 September
CO-8
2012 QUEST
ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
4. Check drained engine coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration.
If contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-10, "Flushing".
Refilling
A
INFOID:0000000007495965
CO
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Do not put additive such as waterleak preventive, since it may cause cooling waterway clogging.
• When refilling use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent in its quality C
mixed with water (distilled or demineralized). Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".
1. Install reservoir tank if removed and radiator drain plug.
CAUTION:
D
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.
Tightening torque
2.
3.
4.
: Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".
If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-105, "Disassembly and Assembly".
Check that each hose clamp has been firmly tightened.
Remove air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded
View".
Remove air bleeder plug (1) of heater pipe.
E
F
G
: Vehicle front
H
I
JPBIA5340ZZ
5.
Fill radiator, and reservoir tank if removed, to specified level.
CAUTION:
Never adhere the engine coolant to electronic equipments.
(alternator etc.)
• Pour engine coolant through engine coolant filler neck
slowly of less than 2 (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 lmp qt) a minute
to allow air in system to escape.
• When coolant comes out from the air bleeder plug of
heater pipe, tighten the bleeder plug.
J
K
L
M
JPBIA0412ZZ
N
Engine coolant capacity
(With reservoir tank at “MAX” level)
: Refer to CO-28, "Periodical Maintenance Specification".
O
Reservoir tank engine coolant capacity
(At “MAX” level)
: Refer to CO-28, "Periodical Maintenance
Specification".
P
Revision: 2011 September
CO-9
2012 QUEST
ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
A
: MAX
B
: MIN
JPBIA0102ZZ
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Install air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded
View".
Install radiator cap.
Start the engine.
Maintain the engine at 1,800 rpm for approximately 10 seconds. After performing this, stop the engine.
Remove radiator cap with the engine cold (approx. 50°C or less), and check the cooling water level. If the
fluid level is low, refill with cooling water to the lip of radiator.
Repeat Steps from 7 to 9 four times.
Cap the radiator, and start the engine.
Warm up engine until opening thermostat. Standard for warming-up time is approximately 10 minutes at
3,000 rpm.
• Check thermostat opening condition by touching radiator hose (lower) to see a flow of warm water.
CAUTION:
Watch water temperature gauge so as not to overheat engine.
Stop the engine and cool down to less than approximately 50°C (122°F).
• Cool down using fan to reduce the time.
• If necessary, refill radiator up to filler neck with engine coolant.
CAUTION:
Never adhere the engine coolant to electronic equipments. (alternator etc.)
Refill reservoir tank to “MAX” level line with engine coolant.
Repeat steps 7 through 10 two or more times with radiator cap installed until engine coolant level no
longer drops.
Check cooling system for leakage with engine running.
Warm up the engine, and check for sound of engine coolant flow while running engine from idle up to
3,000 rpm with heater temperature controller set at several position between “COOL” and “WARM”.
• Sound may be noticeable at heater unit.
Repeat step 13 three times.
If sound is heard, bleed air from cooling system by repeating step 5, and steps from 7 to 14 until engine
coolant level no longer drops.
Flushing
1.
Install reservoir tank if removed and radiator drain plug.
CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.
Tightening torque
2.
3.
4.
INFOID:0000000007495966
: Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".
If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-105, "Disassembly and Assembly".
Remove air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded
View".
Remove air bleeder plug.
Fill with cooling water until it overflows from the bleeder plug.
Revision: 2011 September
CO-10
2012 QUEST
ENGINE COOLANT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
5. Install air bleeder plug.
A
6. Fill radiator and reservoir tank with water and reinstall radiator cap.
CAUTION:
Never adhere the water to electronic equipments. (alternator etc.)
• When water overflows disconnected heater hose, connect heater hose, and continue filling the CO
water.
7. Install air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded
View".
C
8. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
9. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load.
10. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down.
D
11. Drain water from the system. Refer to CO-8, "Draining".
12. Repeat steps 1 through 11 until clear water begins to drain from radiator.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
CO-11
2012 QUEST
RADIATOR
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
RADIATOR
RADIATOR CAP
RADIATOR CAP : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495967
• Check valve seat (A) of radiator cap.
- Check if valve seat is swollen to the extent that the edge of the
plunger (B) cannot be seen when watching it vertically from the
top.
- Check if valve seat has no soil and damage.
- Check that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of radiator
cap negative-pressure valve.
- Check that there are no unusualness in the opening and closing
conditions of negative-pressure valve.
JPBIA1961ZZ
• Check radiator cap relief pressure.
Standard and limit
: Refer to CO-28, "Radiator".
- When connecting radiator cap to the radiator cap tester (commercial service tool) and the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial
service tool) (A), apply engine coolant to the cap seal surface.
JPBIA0109ZZ
• Replace radiator cap if there is an unusualness related to the above three.
CAUTION:
When installing radiator cap, thoroughly wipe out the radiator pipe (upper) filler neck to remove any
waxy residue or foreign material.
RADIATOR
RADIATOR : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495968
Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows:
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to bend or damage radiator fins.
• When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as radiator cooling fan
assembly and horns. Then tape harness and connectors to prevent water from entering.
1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward.
2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute.
3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from radiator.
4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward.
• Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.81
in).
5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out.
Revision: 2011 September
CO-12
2012 QUEST
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
RADIATOR
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495969
CO
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
JPBIA4641GB
1.
Radiator upper clip
2.
Mounting rubber (upper)
3.
Radiator
4.
Mounting rubber (lower)
5.
Clamp
6.
Radiator hose (lower)
7.
Cooling fan assembly
8.
Grommet
9.
Radiator hose (lower)
10. Radiator pipe (lower)
11. Radiator hose (upper)
12. Radiator pipe (upper)
13. Clamp
14. Reservoir tank
15. Reservoir tank cap
16. Reservoir tank hose
17. Radiator cap adapter
18. Radiator cap
19. Radiator hose (upper)
20. O-ring
21. Drain plug
22. Water drain hose
23. Radiator core support
A
B
To transaxle assembly
To water inlet
K
L
M
N
C
To water outlet
: Always replace after every disassembly.
O
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495970
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Never remove radiator cap when engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from high-pressure engine
coolant escaping from radiator. Wrap a thick cloth around the cap. Slowly turn it a quarter of a turn to
release built-up pressure. Carefully remove radiator cap by turning it all the way.
1. Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-8, "Draining".
Revision: 2011 September
CO-13
2012 QUEST
P
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when the engine is cold.
• Never spill engine coolant on drive belt.
2. Remove the following parts:
• Air duct (inlet): Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
• Front grille: Refer to EXT-17, "Exploded View".
• Hood lock: Refer to DLK-426, "HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect reservoir tank hose from radiator pipe (upper).
4. Disconnect CVT fluid cooler hoses from radiator.
• Install blind plug to avoid leakage of CVT fluid.
5. Separate low pressure flexible hose from low pressure pipe and move the separated hose. Refer to HA35, "LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal and Installation".
6. Remove radiator cap adapter and each radiator hoses (upper and lower) and radiator pipe (upper)
assembly.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to allow engine coolant to contact drive belt.
7. Remove condenser. Refer to HA-42, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage condenser core.
8. Remove each radiator upper clips (2) by pulling the tabs (A) outside to release the lock (B) and then remove each mounting rubbers (upper) (1).
C
: Mounting pin
: Vehicle front
CAUTION:
Never pull the tabs outside excessively to prevent it from
damping.
JPBIA1689ZZ
9.
Lift up and remove radiator from front of radiator core support.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage or scratch on radiator core.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-ring.
NOTE:
When installing radiator core support (upper), check that the upper and lower mounts of radiator and air condenser are securely inserted in each mounting hole of radiator core support (upper and lower).
CAUTION:
Always use genuine bolts for cooling fan assembly mounting bolts and observe the tightening torque.
(To prevent damage to radiator)
Radiator Upper Clip
Install each radiator upper clips on radiator core connection as follows:
1. Install each mounting rubbers (upper) (1) on mounting pins (A)
of radiator.
: Vehicle front
2.
3.
Align each radiator upper clips (2) with radiator core connection
(B), then insert each radiator upper clips straight into radiator
core connections until a click is heard.
After connecting each radiator upper clips, use the following
method to check it is fully connected.
JPBIA1690ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
CO-14
2012 QUEST
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Visually confirm that each radiator upper clips are connected to radiator core connections.
• Move each radiator upper clips and the radiator forward and backward to check they are securely connected.
Reservoir tank
NOTE:
Insert reservoir tank straight to the mounting position.
A
CO
Radiator hose
NOTE:
Insert the radiator hose (1) all the way to the stopper (2) or by 33 mm (1.30 in) (hose without a stopper).
C
D
E
F
JPBIA4294GB
G
unit: mm(in)
A.
Radiator side
B.
Engine side
• For the orientation of the hose clamp pawl, refer to the figure.
Radiator hose
Radiator hose (upper)
Radiator hose (lower)
H
Hose end
Paint mark
Position of hose
clamp*
Radiator side
Right side
C
Radiator side (radiator pipe)
—
B
Engine side (radiator pipe)
—
C
Engine side
Upper
D
Radiator side
Upper
A
Radiator side (radiator pipe)
—
A
Engine side (radiator pipe)
—
A
Engine side
Upper
E
I
J
K
L
*:Refer to the illustrations for the specific position each hose clamp tab.
M
N
O
P
JPBIA4777ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
CO-15
2012 QUEST
RADIATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
F.
View F
:Vehicle upper
g.
:45°
:Vehicle back side
• The angle (b) created by the hose clamp pawl and the specifiedline
(A) must be within ±15°as shown in the figure.
JPBIA4295ZZ
• To install hose clamps (1), check that the dimension (A) from the
end of the paint mark (2) on the radiator hose to the hose clamp is
within the reference value.
Dimension "A"
(-1) - (+1) mm
(-0.04) - (+0.04) in
JSBIA0241ZZ
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495971
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) and the
radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-8, "Inspection".
• Start and warm up the engine. Visually check that there is no leakage of engine coolant and CVT fluid.
Revision: 2011 September
CO-16
2012 QUEST
COOLING FAN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
COOLING FAN
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495972
CO
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
JPBIA1687GB
1.
Fan motor (LH)
2.
Fan motor (RH)
3.
Fan shroud
4.
Mounting rubber
5.
Cooling fan (RH)
6.
Cooling fan (LH)
A.
Apply on fan motor shaft
J
: Vehicle front
K
: Apply genuine high strength thread locking sealant or equivalent.
L
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495973
M
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove the following parts.
• Engine under cover
• Air duct (inlet): Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
• Oil level gauge: Refer to EM-93, "Exploded View".
• Battery and battery tray: Refer to PG-126, "Removal and Installation".
Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-8, "Draining".
CAUTION:
• Perform this step engine is cold.
• Never spill engine coolant on drive belt.
Remove radiator cap adapter and each radiator hoses (upper) and radiator pipe (upper) assembly. Refer
to CO-13, "Exploded View".
Disconnect harness connector from crash zone sensor, and move harness to aside. Refer to SR-22,
"Exploded View".
Disconnect harness connector from fan motors (RH and LH), and move harness to aside.
Remove cooling fan assembly.
Revision: 2011 September
CO-17
2012 QUEST
N
O
P
COOLING FAN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage or scratch on radiator core.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Only use genuine parts for cooling fan mounting bolt and observe the specified torque (to prevent
radiator from being damaged).
NOTE:
Cooling fans are controlled by ECM. For details, refer to EC-41, "COOLING FAN CONTROL : System
Description".
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000007495974
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Remove cooling fan mounting nuts, and then remove the cooling fans (RH and LH).
Remove fan motors (RH and LH).
ASSEMBLY
Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION:
RH and LH cooling fans are different. Be careful not to misassemble them.
• Install each fan in the following position.
Right side
Left side
: 11 blades
: 9 blades
• Secure the harness tightly to the fan shroud to prevent the fan rotation area from being loose.
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495975
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Cooling Fan
Inspect cooling fan for crack or unusual bend.
• If anything is found, replace cooling fan.
Revision: 2011 September
CO-18
2012 QUEST
WATER PUMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
WATER PUMP
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495976
CO
C
D
E
F
G
JPBIA2460GB
1.
Timing chain tensioner (primary)
2.
Valve timing control cover gasket
(bank 1)
3.
Valve timing control cover (bank 1)
4.
Water drain plug (front)
5.
Water pump cover
6.
O-ring
7.
O-ring
8.
Water pump
A.
Apply engine coolant
B.
Identify with white mark
H
I
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
J
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: Should be lubricated with oil.
K
: Sealing point
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495977
CAUTION:
• When removing water pump assembly, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belt.
• Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit.
• After installing water pump, connect hose and clamp securely, then check for leakage using the radiator cap tester (commercial service tool) and the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service
tool).
L
M
N
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the following parts.
• Cowl top extension.
• Engine under cover
• Front road wheel and tire
• Splash guard (RH): Refer to EXT-22, "Exploded View".
Drain engine coolant from radiator. Refer to CO-8, "Draining".
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when the engine is cold.
• Never spill engine coolant on drive belt.
Remove drive belt. Refer to EM-25, "Removal and Installation".
Remove idler pulleys and harness bracket. Refer to EM-25, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
CO-19
O
P
2012 QUEST
WATER PUMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
5. Remove torque rod (upper). Refer to EM-56, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove water drain plug (front) on water pump side of cylinder block to drain engine coolant from engine
inside.
7. Remove valve timing control cover (bank 1) and water pump cover from front timing chain case.
• Use the seal cutter [SST: KV10111100 (J-37228)] to cut liquid gasket for removal.
8. Remove timing chain tensioner (primary) (1) as follows:
a. Remove lower mounting bolt (A).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop mounting bolt inside timing chain
case.
b. Loosen upper mounting bolt (B) slowly, and then turn chain
tensioner (primary) on the mounting bolt so that plunger (C) is
fully expanded.
NOTE:
Even if plunger is fully expanded, it is not dropped from the body
JPBIA1537ZZ
of timing chain tensioner (primary).
c.
d.
Remove timing chain tensioner (primary). Refer to EM-67, "Removal and Installation".
Turn crankshaft pulley clockwise so that timing chain on the timing chain tensioner (primary) side is loose.
1
: Crankshaft pulley
JPBIA0446ZZ
9.
Remove water pump as follows:
NOTE:
The use of the following item simplifies the procedure.
• Thin plastic sheet cut as shown in the figure.
a
:60 mm (2.36 in)
b
:140 mm (5.51 in)
JPBIA4771ZZ
a.
Remove three water pump mounting bolts.
b.
Turn the crankshaft pulley counterclockwise to slack the water pump side timing chain for allowance.
• With the timing chain around water pump sprocket held with fingers, turn crank pulley counterclockwise
to the position where the timing chain cannot be pulled in cylinder head direction.
Revision: 2011 September
CO-20
2012 QUEST
WATER PUMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
c. Insert sheet (A) between timing chain and water pump sprocket
(1) of water pump housing.
A
CO
C
JPBIA4675ZZ
D
d.
Screw bolts (B) of size M8 x 1.25 (threads length: approx. 50
mm) into the upper and lower bolt holes used for mounting water
pump and tighten the bolts alternately by half turn all the way to
pull out water pump (1).
A
E
:Sheet
F
• Pull out water pump straight to protect the mounting part from
damage caused by vane.
• Do not allow sprocket to interfere with timing chain.
G
JPBIA4676ZZ
10. Remove M8 bolt and two O-rings from water pump.
H
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings.
1. Install new O-rings to water pump.
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings.
• Clean mounting grooves of O-ring to remove foreign matter.
• Install O-ring with a white identification mark to the engine front side (sprocket side) and O-ring with no
identification mark to the engine rear side (vane side).
CAUTION:
Each O-ring is made of different material. Always install appropriate O-ring to the correct position.
2.
a.
Install water pump.
Insert water pump by widening timing chain (1) with sheet (A) so
as not to allow O-ring to interfere with timing chain and the corner of cylinder block.
• Apply engine oil around the O-ring with a white identification
mark.
• Apply LLC around the O-ring with no identification mark.
• Insert water pump direct to cylinder block.
• Do not allow O-ring to be displaced.
• Press into water pump by tightening the mounting bolts alternately and evenly.
• Check timing chain and water pump sprocket for proper
engagement.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
JPBIA4674ZZ
P
3.
a.
Install timing chain tensioner (primary) as follows:
Completely remove dust and foreign matter from the back of chain tensioner (primary) and the mounting
surface on the rear timing chain case.
Revision: 2011 September
CO-21
2012 QUEST
WATER PUMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
b. Turn crank pulley (1) clockwise (direction shown by arrow) to
loosen timing chain on the chain tensioner (primary) side.
JPBIA0446ZZ
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Lift self-locking pawl (A) to obtain allowance between the pawl
and the ratchet of plunger (D).
Press plunger into tensioner body.
Fix self-locking pawl at the tip of ratchet and maintain plunger in
its maximum compression.
Insert stopper pin (E) into the tensioner body hole (B) to fix lever
(C).
• Plunger becomes fixed at this step because of the interlock
between the lever and self-locking pawl.
NOTE:
JPBIA0118ZZ
The figure shows a work example of using a precision screw
driver of axis diameter φ1.2 mm as a stopper pin.
Install chain tensioner (primary).
• Completely remove dust and foreign matter from the back of chain tensioner (primary) and the mounting
surface before installing chain tensioner.
After the installation, remove stopper pin (A) to release plunger.
Check again that water pump sprocket and timing chain are
engaged.
JPBIA1774ZZ
4.
5.
a.
b.
c.
6.
7.
Install cam sprocket cover (Bank 1). Refer to EM-67, "Removal and Installation".
Install water pump cover as per the following instructions:
Remove old liquid gasket on the back of cover, the front timing chain case mounting surface, mounting
bolt threads, and the bolt hole, by using a scraper.
• Clean the mounting surface with white gasoline.
Apply liquid gasket evenly without any gap and overlap. Refer to
CO-5, "Liquid Gasket"
1
:Water pump cover
a
: φ2.3 - 3.3 mm
Tighten mounting bolts.
Install water drain plug (front).
• Apply liquid gasket to the threads and tighten the screw.
Install the following items in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
JPBIA1722ZZ
When starting the engine or immediately after an engine start
after the removal/installation procedure of chain tensioner (primary), slapping sound may be heard. This is
Revision: 2011 September
CO-22
2012 QUEST
WATER PUMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
not a malfunction. The slapping sound is generated due to decrease in oil pressure of the chain tensioner
(primary) and eliminated as oil pressure increases.
Inspection
A
INFOID:0000000007495978
CO
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Check for badly rusted or corroded water pump body assembly.
• Check for rough operation due to excessive end play.
• If anything is found, replace water pump.
C
D
E
SLC943A
F
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) and the
radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-8, "Inspection".
• Start and warm up the engine. Visually check that there is no leakage of engine coolant.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
CO-23
2012 QUEST
WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495979
JPBIA1688GB
1.
Gasket
4.
Radiator hose (lower)
A.
To radiator
2.
Water inlet and thermostat assembly
3.
Clamp
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495980
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Drain engine coolant from radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator, and from water drain plug at the
front of cylinder block. Refer to CO-8, "Draining" and EM-63, "Setting".
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when the engine is cold.
• Never spill engine coolant on drive belt.
Remove reservoir tank of radiator, and move it aside. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".
Remove camshaft sprocket cover (bank 2). Refer toEM-66, "Exploded View".
Disconnect radiator hose (lower) from water inlet and thermostat assembly.
Remove water inlet and thermostat assembly (1) and gascket.
A
: Never loosen these screw
CAUTION:
Never disassemble water inlet and thermostat assembly.
Replace them as a unit, if necessary.
JPBIA0261ZZ
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Be careful not to spill engine coolant over engine room. Use rag to absorb engine coolant.
Revision: 2011 September
CO-24
2012 QUEST
WATER INLET AND THERMOSTAT ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495981
A
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
1.
2.
Check valve seating condition at ordinary room temperatures. It should seat tightly.
Check valve operation.
Thermostat (Standard)
CO
: Refer to CO-28, "Thermostat".
C
• If the malfunctioning condition, when valve seating at ordinary
room temperature, or measured values are out of the standard,
replace water inlet and thermostat assembly.
D
E
SLC949A
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) and the
radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-8, "Inspection".
• Start and warm up the engine. Visually check that there is no leakage of engine coolant.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
CO-25
2012 QUEST
WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495982
JPBIA4661GB
1.
Gasket
2.
Water connector
3.
4.
Water bypass pipe
5.
Clamp
6.
O-ring
Water hose
7.
Clamp
8.
Water hose
9.
Bracket
10. Clamp
11.
Water hose
13. Clamp
14. Water hose
12. Heater thermostat
15. Heater pipe
16. O-ring
17. Clamp
18. Water hose
19. Clamp
20. Heater hose
21. Clamp
22. Clip
23. Heater hose
24. Clamp
25. Heater hose
26. Air bleeder plug
27. O-ring
28. Heater pipe
29. Heater hose
30. Clamp
31. Clamp
32. Water hose
33. Gasket
34. Engine coolant temperature sensor
35. Gasket
36. Water outlet
37. Bracket
A.
To oil cooler
B.
To radiator
C.
To CVT fluid warmer
D.
To electric throttle control actuator
E.
To heater core
F.
To rear heater
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Revision: 2011 September
CO-26
2012 QUEST
WATER OUTLET AND WATER PIPING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
A
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495983
CO
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Remove air duct (inlet), air cleaner cases (upper and lower) with mass air flow sensor and air duct assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
Remove engine cover. Refer to EM-24, "Exploded View".
Drain engine coolant from radiator drain plug at the bottom of radiator, and from water drain plug at the
front of cylinder block. Refer to CO-8, "Draining" and EM-63, "Setting".
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when the engine is cold.
• Never spill engine coolant on drive belt.
Remove battery and battery tray. Refer to PG-126, "Removal and Installation".
Remove CVT fluid charging pipe and CVT fluid level gauge. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
Remove oil level gauge. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
Move CVT control cable aside. Refer to TM-147, "Exploded View".
Remove vacuum tube (front) mounting bolt from water outlet. Refer to CO-26, "Exploded View".
Remove radiator hose (upper) from water outlet.
Remove water hoses and heater hoses.
Remove harness bracket.
Disconnect harness connectors, and move harness to aside.
Remove engine coolant temperature sensor if necessary.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage engine coolant temperature sensor.
Remove reservoir tank. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".
Remove alternator bracket. Refer to CHG-22, "Exploded View".
Remove water outlet, heater pipe, water bypass pipe and water connector.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
INSTALLATION
K
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings.
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Securely insert each hose, and install clamp at a position where it does not interfere with the pipe bulge.
• When inserting water bypass pipe and heater pipe into water connector, apply neutral detergent to O-ring.
L
Inspection
M
INFOID:0000000007495984
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check for leakage of engine coolant using the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial service tool) and the
radiator cap tester (commercial service tool). Refer to CO-8, "Inspection".
• Start and warm up the engine. Visually check that there is no leakage of engine coolant.
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
CO-27
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Periodical Maintenance Specification
INFOID:0000000007495985
ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Unit:
Engine coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at “MAX” level)
(US qt, lmp qt)
11.3 (12, 10)
Reservoir tank
0.75 (6/8, 5/8)
Radiator
INFOID:0000000007495986
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Cap relief pressure
Standard
122.3 - 151.7 (1.2 - 1.5, 17.7 - 22.0)
Limit
108 (1.1, 15.6)
Leakage test pressure
156 (1.59, 22.6)
Thermostat
INFOID:0000000007495987
Standard
Valve opening temperature
80.5 - 83.5°C (177 - 182°F)
Maximum valve lift
8.6 mm/95°C (0.339 in/203°F)
Valve closing temperature
Revision: 2011 September
77°C (171°F)
CO-28
2012 QUEST
CRUISE CONTROL & DRIVER ASSISTANCE
SECTION
DAS
DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
BSW
CONSULT Function (SIDE RADAR LEFT) .............19
PRECAUTION ............................................... 4
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SIDE RADAR RH) ....... 20
CONSULT Function (SIDE RADAR RIGHT) ...........20
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 4
Precaution for BSW System Service ......................... 4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 5
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 5
Component Parts Location ........................................ 5
BSW Control Module ................................................. 6
Side Radar LH/RH .................................................... 6
BSW Indicator LH/RH ............................................... 7
BSW Switch .............................................................. 7
Combination Meter .................................................... 7
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) ........... 7
BCM .......................................................................... 7
TCM .......................................................................... 7
ECM .......................................................................... 7
SYSTEM .............................................................. 8
System Description ................................................... 8
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 12
Fail-safe (BSW Control Module) ............................. 12
Fail-safe (Side Radar) ............................................. 13
OPERATION .......................................................14
Switch Name and Function ..................................... 14
System Display and Warning .................................. 14
G
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 21
BSW CONTROL MODULE ............................... 21
Reference Value ......................................................21
Fail-safe ...................................................................22
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ..................................22
DTC Index ...............................................................22
H
I
SIDE RADAR LH ............................................... 24
Reference Value ......................................................24
Fail-safe ...................................................................24
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ..................................25
DTC Index ...............................................................25
J
K
SIDE RADAR RH .............................................. 26
Reference Value ......................................................26
Fail-safe ...................................................................26
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ..................................27
DTC Index ...............................................................27
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 28
L
M
BLIND SPOT WARNING .................................. 28
Wiring Diagram ........................................................28
N
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 30
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 30 DAS
Work Flow ................................................................30
HANDLING PRECAUTION ................................16
PRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSIS .............. 32
Precautions for Blind Spot Warning ........................ 16
Inspection Procedure ...............................................32
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BSW CONTROL
MODULE) ...........................................................17
ACTION TEST ................................................... 33
CONSULT Function (BSW) ..................................... 17
Description ...............................................................33
Work Procedure .......................................................33
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SIDE RADAR LH) ........19
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 35
Revision: 2011 September
F
DAS-1
2012 QUEST
P
C1A00 CONTROL UNIT .................................... 35
DTC Logic ............................................................... 35
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 35
C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1, C1A02
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2 ............................ 36
DTC Logic ............................................................... 36
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 36
SIDE RADAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ................ 48
SIDE RADAR RH ...................................................... 48
SIDE RADAR RH : Description ............................... 48
SIDE RADAR RH : DTC Logic ................................ 48
SIDE RADAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ............... 48
DTC Logic ............................................................... 37
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 37
BSW CONTROL MODULE ....................................... 48
BSW CONTROL MODULE : Description ................ 48
BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic ................. 49
BSW CONTROL MODULE : Diagnosis Procedure
... 49
C1B50 SIDE RADAR MALFUNCTION ............. 38
U0104 ADAS CAN 1 .......................................... 50
C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR .................. 37
DTC LOGIC ............................................................ 38
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 38
DTC Logic ............................................................... 50
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 50
C1B51 BSW/BSI INDICATOR SHORT CIRCUIT ................................................................... 39
U0121 VDC CAN 2 ............................................ 51
DTC Logic ............................................................... 39
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 39
DTC Logic ............................................................... 51
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 51
U0401 ECM CAN 1 ............................................ 52
C1B52 BSW/BSI INDICATOR OPEN CIRCUIT ................................................................... 40
DTC Logic ............................................................... 52
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 52
DTC Logic ............................................................... 40
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 40
U0402 TCM CAN 1 ............................................ 53
C1B53 SIDE RADAR RIGHT MALFUNCTION... 42
DTC Logic ............................................................... 42
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 42
C1B54 SIDE RADAR LEFT MALFUNCTION ... 43
DTC Logic ............................................................... 43
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 43
C1B55 RADAR BLOCKAGE ............................. 44
DTC Logic ............................................................... 44
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 44
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 45
SIDE RADAR LH ....................................................... 45
SIDE RADAR LH : Description ............................... 45
SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic ................................ 45
SIDE RADAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ................ 45
SIDE RADAR RH ...................................................... 45
SIDE RADAR RH : Description .............................. 45
SIDE RADAR RH : DTC Logic ............................... 46
SIDE RADAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ............... 46
BSW CONTROL MODULE ....................................... 46
BSW CONTROL MODULE : Description ................ 46
BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic ................. 46
BSW CONTROL MODULE : Diagnosis Procedure
... 46
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ......................... 48
SIDE RADAR LH ....................................................... 48
SIDE RADAR LH : Description ............................... 48
SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic ................................ 48
Revision: 2011 September
DTC Logic ............................................................... 53
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 53
U0405 ADAS CAN 2 .......................................... 54
DTC Logic ............................................................... 54
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 54
U0415 VDC CAN 1 ............................................ 55
DTC Logic ............................................................... 55
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 55
U150B ECM CAN 3 ........................................... 56
DTC Logic ............................................................... 56
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 56
U150C VDC CAN 3 ............................................ 57
DTC Logic ............................................................... 57
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 57
U150D TCM CAN 3 ........................................... 58
DTC Logic ............................................................... 58
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 58
U150E BCM CAN 3 ........................................... 59
DTC Logic ............................................................... 59
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 59
U1503 SIDE RDR L CAN 2 ............................... 60
DTC Logic ............................................................... 60
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 60
U1504 SIDE RDR L CAN 1 ............................... 61
DTC Logic ............................................................... 61
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 61
U1505 SIDE RDR R CAN 2 ............................... 62
DTC Logic ............................................................... 62
DAS-2
2012 QUEST
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 62
BSW SWITCH CIRCUIT .................................... 71
U1506 SIDE RDR R CAN 1 ................................63
Component Function Check ....................................71
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................71
Component Inspection .............................................72
A
BSW ON INDICATOR CIRCUIT ....................... 73
B
DTC Logic ............................................................... 63
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 63
U1507 LOST COMM(SIDE RDR R) ...................64
DTC Logic ............................................................... 64
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 64
U1508 LOST COMM(SIDE RDR L) ....................65
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................73
Component Inspection .............................................73
C
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 75
DTC Logic ............................................................... 65
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 65
BSW SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ............................. 75
U1518 SIDE RDR L CAN 3 ................................66
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ............... 76
DTC Logic ............................................................... 66
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 66
Description ...............................................................76
U1519 SIDE RDR R CAN 3 ................................67
Symptom Table .......................................................75
D
E
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 77
DTC Logic ............................................................... 67
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 67
BSW CONTROL MODULE ............................... 77
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ......68
SIDE RADAR .................................................... 78
F
Removal and Installation .........................................77
Removal and Installation .........................................78
BSW CONTROL MODULE ........................................ 68
BSW CONTROL MODULE : Diagnosis Procedure
.... 68
BSW INDICATOR ............................................. 80
SIDE RADAR LH ....................................................... 68
SIDE RADAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ................ 68
BSW SWITCH ................................................... 81
Exploded View .........................................................80
Removal and Installation .........................................81
G
H
I
SIDE RADAR RH ....................................................... 69
SIDE RADAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ................ 69
J
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-3
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
[BSW]
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000007492632
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for BSW System Service
INFOID:0000000007492633
WARNING:
Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test.
CAUTION:
• Never perform the active test while driving.
• Never change BSW initial state ON ⇒ OFF without the consent of the customer.
TO KEEP THE BSW SYSTEM OPERATING PROPERLY, BE SURE TO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING ITEMS:
System Maintenance
The two side radar for the BSW system are located near the rear bumper.
• Always keep the area near the side radar clean.
• Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the
side radar.
• Do not strike or damage the area around the side radar.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-4
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
[BSW]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007492634
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
JSOIA0502GB
A.
Rear bumper removed condition
(RH)
D.
Instrument lower panel (LH)
No.
B.
Rear bumper removed condition
(LH)
Component
C.
Center of the instrument panel
P
Function
1
Side radar RH
Refer to DAS-6, "Side Radar LH/RH"
2
BCM
Refer to DAS-7, "BCM"
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
3
BSW indicator RH
Refer to DAS-7, "BSW Indicator LH/RH"
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-5
DAS
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
[BSW]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.
Component
Function
4
ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)
Refer to DAS-7, "ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)"
Refer to BRC-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
5
TCM
Refer to DAS-7, "TCM"
Refer to TM-10, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
6
ECM
Refer to DAS-7, "ECM"
Refer to EC-15, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
7
BSW indicator LH
Refer to DAS-7, "BSW Indicator LH/RH"
8
Side radar LH
Refer to DAS-6, "Side Radar LH/RH"
9
BSW control module
Refer to DAS-6, "BSW Control Module"
10
Combination meter
• Description: Refer to DAS-7, "Combination Meter"
• System display and warning: DAS-14, "System Display and Warning"
Refer to MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location
11
BSW switch
• Description: Refer to DAS-7, "BSW Switch"
• System display and warning: DAS-14, "Switch Name and Function"
12
BSW ON indicator
(On the BSW switch)
Refer to DAS-14, "System Display and Warning"
BSW Control Module
INFOID:0000000007492635
JSOIA0503ZZ
• Controls the BSW system, based on received signals.
• Communicates with each control unit via CAN communication.
• Connected with the side radar (LH and RH) via BSW communication, BSW control module receives a vehicle detection signal and transmits a BSW indicator signal and a BSW indicator dimmer signal to the side
radar.
• Receives a BSW switch signal from the BSW switch.
• Transmits a buzzer output signal to the combination meter via CAN communication.
Side Radar LH/RH
INFOID:0000000007492636
JSOIA0504ZZ
• Installed near the rear bumper, the side radar detects vehicles in the adjacent lane.
• Connected with the BSW control module via BSW communication, the side radar transmits a vehicle detection signal.
• Receives a BSW indicator signal and a BSW indicator dimmer signal from the BSW control module and
transmits an indicator operation signal to the BSW indicator LH/RH.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-6
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
[BSW]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
BSW Indicator LH/RH
INFOID:0000000007492637
A
B
C
JSOIA0505ZZ
• Installed on the door mirror surface, the BSW indicator warns the driver by lighting/blinking.
• Receives a BSW indicator operation signal from the side radar LH/RH and blinks or turns ON/OFF the BSW
indicator lamp.
BSW Switch
D
E
INFOID:0000000007492638
• Installed to the instrument lower panel, the BSW switch is used to activate/deactivate the BSW system.
• Transmits a BSW switch signal to the BSW control module.
Combination Meter
INFOID:0000000007492639
• Receives BSW warning lamp signal and buzzer output signal from BSW control module via CAN communication.
• Turns the BSW warning lamp ON/OFF according to the signals from the BSW control module
• Operates the buzzer according to the signal from the BSW control module
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit)
F
G
H
INFOID:0000000007492640
I
Transmits vehicle speed signal to BSW control module via CAN communication.
BCM
INFOID:0000000007492641
J
• Transmits turn indicator signal to BSW control module via CAN communication.
• Transmits dimmer signal to BSW control module via CAN communication.
TCM
INFOID:0000000007492642
K
Transmits shift position signal to BSW control module via CAN communication.
L
ECM
INFOID:0000000007492643
Transmits engine speed signal to BSW control module via CAN communication.
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-7
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[BSW]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
System Description
INFOID:0000000007492644
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSOIA0506GB
BSW CONTROL MODULE INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL ITEM
Input Signal Item
Transmit unit
Signal name
Description
TCM
CAN communication
Shift position signal
Receives a selector lever position
ABS actuator
and electric unit
(control unit)
CAN communication
Vehicle speed signal (ABS)
Receives wheel speeds of four wheels
BCM
CAN communication
Turn indicator signal
Receives an operational state of the turn signal lamp and
the hazard lamp
Dimmer signal
Receives an ON/OFF state of dimmer signal
Side radar LH,
RH
BSW communication
Vehicle detection signal
Receives vehicle detection condition of detection zone
ECM
CAN communication
Engine speed signal
Receives an engine speed
BSW switch
BSW switch signal
Receives an ON/OFF state of the BSW switch
Output Signal Item
Reception unit
Combination
meter
Signal name
CAN communication
Revision: 2011 September
Description
BSW warning lamp signal
Transmits a BSW warning lamp signal to turn ON the
BSW warning lamp
Buzzer output signal
Transmits a buzzer output signal to activate buzzer
DAS-8
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[BSW]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Reception unit
Side radar LH,
RH
BSW ON indicator
Signal name
BSW communication
Description
BSW indicator signal
Transmits a BSW indicator signal to turn ON the BSW
indicator
BSW indicator dimmer signal
Transmits a BSW indicator dimmer signal to dimmer
BSW indicator
Vehicle speed signal
Transmits a vehicle speed calculated by the BSW control module
A
B
C
BSW ON indicator signal
Turns ON the BSW ON indicator
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
•
•
•
•
The BSW system can help alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.
The BSW system uses side radar installed near the rear bumper to detect vehicles in an adjacent lane.
The side radar can detect vehicles on either side of vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated.
This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind
the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.
• The BSW system operates above approximately 32 km/h (20 MPH).
• If the side radar detects vehicles in the detection zone, the BSW indicator illuminates.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
JSOIA0509GB
• If the driver then activates the turn signal, a buzzer will sound twice and the BSW indicator will blink.
NOTE:
A buzzer sounds if the side radar have already detected vehicles when the driver activates the turn signal. If
a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the BSW indicator
blinks and no buzzer sounds.
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
JSOIA0510GB
BSW SYSTEM OPERATION DESCRIPTION
• BSW control module enables BSW system.
• The BSW control module turns on the BSW system when the BSW switch is turned ON.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-9
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[BSW]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• Side radar detects a vehicle in the adjacent lane, and transmits the vehicle detection signal to BSW control
module via BSW communication.
• BSW control module starts the control as follows, based on a vehicle detection signal, turn signal and dimmer signal transmitted from BCM via CAN communication:
- Buzzer output signal transmission to combination meter via CAN communication.
- BSW indicator signal and BSW indicator dimmer signal transmission to side radar via BSW communication.
• Side radar transmits an indicator operation signal to the BSW indicator according to BSW indicator signal
and BSW indicator dimmer signal.
Operation Condition of BSW System
BSW control module performs the control when the following conditions are satisfied.
• When the BSW switch in turned ON.
• When the vehicle drives at approximately 32 km/h (20 MPH) or more to the forward direction.
NOTE:
• After the operating conditions of warning are satisfied, the warning continues until the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 29 km/h (18 MPH)
• The BSW system may not function properly, depending on the situation. Refer to DAS-16, "Precautions for
Blind Spot Warning".
BULB CHECK ACTION AND FAIL-SAFE INDICATION
Vehicle condition/Driver′s operation
Ignition switch:
OFF ⇒ ON
BSW indicator
BSW
ON indicator
Approx. 2 sec. ON
Approx. 5 sec. ON*
Indication on the combination meter
JSOIA0374GB
When DTC is detected
OFF
ON
JSOIA0254GB
When radar blockage is detected
OFF
ON
JSOIA0255GB
*: If BSW initial state is ON, BSW ON indicator continues turned ON.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-10
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[BSW]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Blinking cycle when the side radar blockage condition
A
B
C
D
E
JSOIA0358GB
NOTE:
Time shown in the figure is approximate time.
F
BSW INITIAL STATE CHANGE
CAUTION:
Never change BSW initial state “ON” ⇒ “OFF” without the consent of the customer.
BSW initial state can be changed.
• BSW initial ON* - BSW function is automatically turned ON, when the ignition switch OFF ⇒ ON.
• BSW initial OFF - BSW function is still OFF when the ignition switch OFF ⇒ ON.
*: Factory setting
G
H
How to change BSW initial state
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Switch BSW functions to OFF.
Push and hold BSW switch for more than 4 seconds.
Buzzer sounds and blinking of the BSW ON indicator informs that the BSW initial state changes completed.
I
J
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-11
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[BSW]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000007492645
JSOIA0516GB
Fail-safe (BSW Control Module)
INFOID:0000000007492646
If a malfunction occurs in the system, BSW control module cancels the control. Then the BSW warning lamp in
the combination meter illuminates.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-12
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[BSW]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Fail-safe (Side Radar)
INFOID:0000000007492647
A
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC
If a malfunction occurs in the side radar, BSW control module cancels the control. Then the BSW warning
lamp in the combination meter illuminates.
B
TEMPORARY DISABLED STATUS AT BLOCKAGE
When the side radar is blocked, the operation is temporarily cancelled. Then BSW warning lamp in combination meter blinks. Also, under the following conditions, the operation may be temporarily cancelled.
• The side radar may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
• The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the side radar.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-13
2012 QUEST
OPERATION
[BSW]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
OPERATION
Switch Name and Function
INFOID:0000000007492648
JSOIA0507ZZ
No.
1
Name
Function
BSW switch
Turns BSW system ON/OFF
System Display and Warning
INFOID:0000000007492649
INDICATOR AND WARNING LAMP
JSOIA0508ZZ
No.
Name
Description
1
BSW ON indicator
Turns ON while BSW system is ON
2
BSW warning lamp
(In the combination meter)
• Turns ON when BSW system is malfunctioning
• Blinks when radar blockage is detected
DISPLAY AND WARNING OPERATION
Vehicle condition/ Driver's operation
BSW ON
indicator
Vehicle speed
(Approx.)
[km/h (MPH)]
OFF
—
Revision: 2011 September
Action
Turn signal
condition
Status of vehicle detection within
detection
area
Indication on the
BSW indicator
Buzzer
—
—
OFF
OFF
DAS-14
2012 QUEST
OPERATION
[BSW]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Vehicle condition/ Driver's operation
BSW ON
indicator
ON
Action
A
Vehicle speed
(Approx.)
[km/h (MPH)]
Turn signal
condition
Status of vehicle detection within
detection
area
Less than
approx.
29 (18)
—
—
OFF
OFF
—
Vehicle is
absent
OFF
OFF
OFF
Vehicle is
detected
ON
OFF
Blink
Short continuous beep
Approx.
32 (20)
or more
Indication on the
BSW indicator
Buzzer
B
C
D
Before turn
signal operates
Vehicle is
detected
ON
(Vehicle detected direction)
E
F
JSOIA0251GB
JSOIA0452GB
Blink
Vehicle is
detected after turn signal operates
G
H
OFF
I
JSOIA0251GB
NOTE:
• If vehicle speed exceeds approximately 32 km/h (20MPH), BSW function operates until the vehicle speed
becomes lower than approximately 29km/h (18MPH).
• Time shown in the figure is approximate time.
J
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-15
2012 QUEST
HANDLING PRECAUTION
[BSW]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
HANDLING PRECAUTION
Precautions for Blind Spot Warning
INFOID:0000000007492650
SIDE RADAR HANDLING
•
•
•
•
•
Side radar for BSW system is located inside the rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper near the side radar clean.
Do not attach a sticker (including transparent material), install an accessory or paintwork near the side radar.
Do not strike or damage the areas around the side radar.
Do not strike, damage, and scratch the side radar, especially the vent seal (gray circular) area, under repair.
PRECAUTIONS FOR BLIND SPOT WARNING
• The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedure and are not designed to prevent contact
with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the
direction driver will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system.
• The BSW system may not provide a warning for vehicles that pass through the detection zone quickly.
• Do not use the BSW system when towing a trailer because the system may not function properly.
• Excessive noise (e.g. audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it
may not be heard.
• The side radar may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as:
- Pedestrians, bicycles, animals.
- Several types of vehicles such as motorcycles.
- Oncoming vehicles.
- Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when driver accelerate from a stop.
- A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as vehicle.
- A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.
- A vehicle which vehicle overtakes rapidly.
• Severe weather or road spray conditions may reduce the ability of the side radar to detect other vehicles.
• The side radar detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the
side radar may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the side radar may
detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
• The side radar are designed to ignore most stationary objects, however objects such as guardrails, walls,
foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operating condition.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-16
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BSW CONTROL MODULE)
[BSW]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BSW CONTROL MODULE)
CONSULT Function (BSW)
A
INFOID:0000000007492651
APPLICATION ITEMS
B
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication using BSW control module.
Diagnosis mode
Description
C
Self Diagnostic Result
Displays the name of a malfunctioning system stored in the BSW control module
Data Monitor
Displays BSW control module input/output data in real time
Active Test
Enables an operational check of a load by transmitting a driving signal from the BSW control module
to the load
Ecu Identification
Displays BSW control module part number
CAN Diag Support Monitor
Displays a reception/transmission state of CAN communication and BSW communication
D
E
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to DAS-22, "DTC Index".
F
DATA MONITOR
NOTE:
SIGNAL B, SIGNAL C are displayed, but not used.
SIGNAL A
BSW MAIN SIGNAL
G
Description
VHCL SPEED SE
[km/h] or [mph]
×
×
Indicates vehicle speed calculated from BSW control module through CAN communication [ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit) transmits vehicle speed signal (wheel speed) through
CAN communication]
BUZZER O/P
[On/Off]
×
Monitored item
[Unit]
H
I
Indicates [On/Off] status of BSW warning chime output
K
Shift position
[Off, P, R, N, D]
×
Indicates shift position read from BSW control module through CAN communication (TCM transmits shift position signal through CAN communication)
Turn signal
[OFF/LH/RH/LH&RH]
×
Indicates turn signal operation status read from BSW control module through CAN communication (BCM transmits turn indicator signal through CAN communication)
×
Indicates [On/Off] status of BSW switch
BSW/BSI WARN LMP
[On/Off]
×
Indicates [On/Off] status of BSW warning lamp output
BSW SYSTEM ON
[On/Off]
×
Indicates [On/Off] status of BSW system
WARN SYS SW
[On/Off]
×
N
DAS
CAUTION:
• Never perform “Active Test” while driving the vehicle.
• The “Active Test” cannot be performed when the BSW warning lamp is illuminated.
• Shift the selector lever to “P” position, and then perform the test.
P
Description
ICC BUZZER
Sounds a buzzer used for BSW system by arbitrarily operating ON/OFF
BSW/BSI WARNING LAMP
The BSW warning lamp can be illuminated by ON/OFF operations as necessary
ICC BUZZER
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-17
L
M
ACTIVE TEST
Test item
J
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BSW CONTROL MODULE)
[BSW]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test item
ICC BUZZER
Operation
Description
BSW warning chime operation
sound
MODE1
Transmits the buzzer output signals to the combination
meter via CAN communication
Intermittent beep sound
Test start
Starts the tests of “MODE1”
—
Stops transmitting the buzzer output signal below to end
the test
—
Returns to the “SELECT TEST ITEM” screen
—
Reset
End
BSW/BSI WARNING LAMP
Test item
BSW/BSI WARNING
LAMP
Operation
Description
BSW warning lamp
Off
Stops transmitting the BSW warning lamp signal below to
end the test
—
On
Transmits the BSW warning lamp signal to the combination meter via CAN communication
ON
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-18
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SIDE RADAR LH)
[BSW]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SIDE RADAR LH)
A
CONSULT Function (SIDE RADAR LEFT)
INFOID:0000000007492652
DESCRIPTION
B
CONSULT performs the following functions by communicating with the side radar LH.
Select diag mode
C
Function
Self Diagnostic Result
Displays memorized DTC in the side radar
Data Monitor
Displays real-time data of side radar
Active Test
Enables operation check of electrical loads by sending driving signal to them
Ecu Identification
Displays part number of side radar
D
E
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Self Diagnostic Result
Displays memorized DTC in side radar LH. Refer to DAS-25, "DTC Index".
F
FFD (Freeze Frame Data)
The side radar records the following data when the malfunction is detected.
Freeze Frame Data item
G
Description
VHCL SP from ADAS
The vehicle speed (from BSW control module) at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed
TURN SIG STATUS
Turn signal status at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed
DATA MONITOR
H
I
Monitored item
[Unit]
Description
BEAM DISTANCE
[—]
NOTE:
The item is displayed, but it is not used
BEAM POSITION
[—]
NOTE:
The item is displayed, but it is not used
SIDE RADAR MALF
[On/Off]
Indicates [On/Off] status of side radar malfunction
BLOCKAGE COND
[On/Off]
Indicates [On/Off] status of side radar blockage
ACTIVATE OPE
[—]
NOTE:
The item is displayed, but it is not used
VEHICLE DETECT
[On/Off]
Indicates [On/Off] status of vehicle detection
J
K
L
M
N
ACTIVE TEST
CAUTION:
• Never perform the active test while driving.
• Active test cannot be started while the BSW indicator is illuminated.
Active test item
BSW/BSI INDICATOR
DRIVE
Revision: 2011 September
Operation
DAS
Description
On
Outputs the voltage to illuminate the BSW indicator
Off
Stops the voltage to illuminate the BSW indicator
DAS-19
P
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SIDE RADAR RH)
[BSW]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (SIDE RADAR RH)
CONSULT Function (SIDE RADAR RIGHT)
INFOID:0000000007492653
DESCRIPTION
CONSULT performs the following functions by communicating with the side radar RH.
Select diag mode
Function
Self Diagnostic Result
Displays memorized DTC in the side radar
Data Monitor
Displays real-time data of side radar
Active Test
Enables operation check of electrical loads by sending driving signal to them
Ecu Identification
Displays part number of side radar
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Self Diagnostic Result
Displays memorized DTC in side radar RH. Refer to DAS-27, "DTC Index".
FFD (Freeze Frame Data)
The side radar records the following data when the malfunction is detected.
Freeze Frame Data item
Description
VHCL SP from ADAS
The vehicle speed (from BSW control module) at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed
TURN SIG STATUS
Turn signal status at the moment a malfunction is detected is displayed
DATA MONITOR
Monitored item
[Unit]
Description
BEAM DISTANCE
[—]
NOTE:
The item is displayed, but it is not used
BEAM POSITION
[—]
NOTE:
The item is displayed, but it is not used
SIDE RADAR MALF
[On/Off]
Indicates [On/Off] status of side radar malfunction
BLOCKAGE COND
[On/Off]
Indicates [On/Off] status of side radar blockage
ACTIVATE OPE
[—]
NOTE:
The item is displayed, but it is not used
VEHICLE DETECT
[On/Off]
Indicates [On/Off] status of vehicle detection
ACTIVE TEST
CAUTION:
• Never perform the active test while driving.
• Active test cannot be started while the BSW indicator is illuminated.
Active test item
BSW/BSI INDICATOR
DRIVE
Revision: 2011 September
Operation
Description
On
Outputs the voltage to illuminate the BSW indicator
Off
Stops the voltage to illuminate the BSW indicator
DAS-20
2012 QUEST
BSW CONTROL MODULE
[BSW]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
A
BSW CONTROL MODULE
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000007492654
B
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
C
Monitor item
Condition
VHCL SPEED SE
While driving
BUZZER O/P
Engine running
Shift position
• Engine running
• While driving
Turn signal
Value/Status
Displays the vehicle speed calculated by BSW
control module
When the buzzer of the BSW system operates
On
When the buzzer of the BSW system not operates
Off
Displays the
shift position
Turn signal lamps OFF
Off
Turn signal lamp LH blinking
LH
Turn signal lamp RH blinking
RH
Turn signal lamp LH and RH blinking
WARN SYS SW
Ignition switch ON
BSW/BSI WARN LMP
Ignition switch ON
BSW SYSTEM ON
Ignition switch ON
D
E
F
G
LH&RH
When BSW switch is pressed
On
When BSW switch is not pressed
Off
BSW warning lamp ON
On
BSW warning lamp OFF
Off
When the BSW system is ON
(BSW ON indicator ON)
On
When the BSW system is OFF
(BSW ON indicator OFF)
Off
TERMINAL LAYOUT
H
I
J
K
PHYSICAL VALUES
L
M
JSOIA0213ZZ
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
1
(BR)
4
(Y)
6
(B/W)
−
Description
Signal name
BSW switch signal
6
(B/W)
Ground
BSW ON indicator signal
Ground
Revision: 2011 September
Input
Output
—
Standard value
Reference value
(Approx.)
Pressed
0 - 0.1 V
0V
Released
9.5 -16 V
12 V
Illuminated
0 - 0.1 V
0V
OFF
9.5 - 16 V
12 V
0 - 0.1 V
0V
Condition
Input/
Output
BSW switch
BSW ON indicator
Ignition switch ON
DAS-21
2012 QUEST
N
DAS
P
BSW CONTROL MODULE
[BSW]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Description
Condition
Standard value
Reference value
(Approx.)
Signal name
Input/
Output
7
(L)
BSW communication-H
—
—
—
—
8
(Y)
BSW communication-L
—
—
—
—
CAN -H
—
—
—
—
15
(P)
CAN -L
—
—
—
—
16
(G)
Ignition power supply
Input
Ignition switch ON
9.5 - 16 V
Battery Voltage
−
+
14
(L)
6
(B/W)
Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007492655
If a malfunction occurs in the system, BSW control module cancels the control. Then the BSW warning lamp in
the combination meter illuminates.
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
INFOID:0000000007492656
If multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check them one by one depending on the following DTC inspection priority chart.
Priority
Detected items (DTC)
1
• U1508: LOST COMM (SIDE RDR L)
2
• U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
• U1507: LOST COMM (SIDE RDR R)
3
• C1B53: SIDE RDR R MALF
• C1B54: SIDE RDR L MALF
4
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5
• C1A03: VHCL SPEED SE CIRC
6
• C1A00: CONTROL UNIT
C1A01: POWER SUPPLY CIR
C1A02: POWER SUPPLY CIR 2
U0121: VDC CAN CIR 2
U0401: ECM CAN CIR 1
U0402: TCM CAN CIR 1
U0415: VDC CAN CIR 1
U150B: ECM CAN CIRC 3
U150C: VDC CAN CIRC 3
U150D: TCM CAN CIRC 3
U150E: BCM CAN CIRC 3
U1503: SIDE RDR L CAN CIR 2
U1504: SIDE RDR L CAN CIR 1
U1505: SIDE RDR R CAN CIR 2
U1506: SIDE RDR R CAN CIR 1
U1518: SIDE RDR L CAN CIRC 3
U1519: SIDE RDR R CAN CIRC 3
DTC Index
INFOID:0000000007492657
NOTE:
• The details of time display are as per the following.
- CRNT: A malfunction is detected now
- PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past
• IGN counter is displayed on FFD (Freeze Frame Data).
- 0: The malfunctions that are detected now
CAN communication system (U1000, U1010)
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-22
2012 QUEST
BSW CONTROL MODULE
[BSW]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
- 1 - 39: It increases like 0 → 1 → 2 ··· 38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever the ignition
switch OFF → ON. It returns to 0 when a malfunction is detected again in the process.
- If it is over 39, it is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased.
Other than CAN communication system (Other than U1000, U1010)
- 1 - 49: It increases like 0 → 1 → 2 ··· 38 → 49 after returning to the normal condition whenever the ignition
switch OFF → ON. It returns to 0 when a malfunction is detected again in the process.
- If it is over 49, it is fixed to 49 until the self-diagnosis results are erased.
A
B
×: Applicable
DTC
BSW warning lamp
Fail-safe
Reference
C1A00
CONTROL UNIT
ON
×
DAS-35
C1A01
POWER SUPPLY CIR
ON
×
DAS-36
C1A02
POWER SUPPLY CIR 2
ON
×
DAS-36
C1A03
VHCL SPEED SE CIRC
ON
×
DAS-37
C1B53
SIDE RDR R MALF
ON
×
DAS-42
C1B54
SIDE RDR L MALF
ON
×
DAS-43
NO DTC IS
DETECTED.
FURTHER
TESTING MAY
BE REQUIRED
NO DTC IS DETECTED. FURTHER TESTING
MAY BE REQUIRED
U1000
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
ON
×
DAS-46
U1010
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ON
×
DAS-49
C
D
E
F
—
—
—
G
U0121
VDC CAN CIR 2
ON
×
DAS-51
U0401
ECM CAN CIR 1
ON
×
DAS-52
U0402
TCM CAN CIR 1
ON
×
DAS-53
U0415
VDC CAN CIR 1
ON
×
DAS-55
U150B
ECM CAN CIRC 3
ON
×
DAS-56
U150C
VDC CAN CIRC 3
ON
×
DAS-57
U150D
TCM CAN CIRC 3
ON
×
DAS-58
U150E
BCM CAN CIRC 3
ON
×
DAS-59
U1503
SIDE RDR L CAN CIR 2
ON
×
DAS-60
U1504
SIDE RDR L CAN CIR 1
ON
×
DAS-61
U1505
SIDE RDR R CAN CIR 2
ON
×
DAS-62
U1506
SIDE RDR R CAN CIR 1
ON
×
DAS-63
U1507
LOST COMM (SIDE RDR R)
ON
×
DAS-64
U1508
LOST COMM (SIDE RDR L)
ON
×
DAS-65
U1518
SIDE RDR L CAN CIRC 3
ON
×
DAS-66
U1519
SIDE RDR R CAN CIRC 3
ON
×
DAS-67
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-23
2012 QUEST
SIDE RADAR LH
[BSW]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
SIDE RADAR LH
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000007492658
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
CONSULT MONITOR ITEM
Monitor Item
Condition
Value/Status
BEAM DISTANCE
NOTE:
The item is displayed, but it is not used.
—
BEAM POSITION
NOTE:
The item is displayed, but it is not used.
—
Side radar is normal.
Off
Side radar is malfunctioning.
On
Side radar is not blocked.
Off
Side radar is blocked.
On
NOTE:
The item is displayed, but it is not used.
—
Side radar does not detect a vehicle.
Off
Side radar detects a vehicle.
On
SIDE RADAR MALF
BLOCKAGE COND
ACTIVATE OPE
VEHICLE DETECT
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSOIA0244ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
–
2
(B)
Ground
3
(Y)
4
(L)
5
(V)
6
(W)
2
(B)
Description
Signal name
Input/
Output
Condition
Standard value
Reference value
(Approx.)
Ground
—
—
0 - 0.1 V
0V
BSW communication-L
—
—
—
—
BSW communication-H
—
—
—
—
Ignition switch ON
10 - 16 V
Battery voltage
Approx. 2 sec. after ignition
switch OFF ⇒ ON
(bulb check)
5.5 - 16 V
6V
Ignition power supply
BSW indicator
Input
Output
Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007492659
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC
If a malfunction occurs in the side radar, BSW control module cancels the control. Then the BSW warning
lamp in the combination meter illuminates.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-24
2012 QUEST
SIDE RADAR LH
[BSW]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
TEMPORARY DISABLED STATUS AT BLOCKAGE
When the side radar is blocked, the operation is temporarily cancelled. Then BSW warning lamp in combination meter blinks. Also, under the following conditions, the operation may be temporarily cancelled.
• The side radar may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
• The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the side radar.
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
Detected items (DTC)
1
• U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
2
• U0104: ADAS CAN CIR 1
• U0405: ADAS CAN CIR 2
3
C1B50: SIDE RDR MALFUNCTION
4
• C1B51: BSW/BSI IND SHORT CIR
• C1B52: BSW/BSI IND OPEN CIR
• C1B55: RADAR BLOCKAGE
B
INFOID:0000000007492660
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
Priority
A
C
D
E
F
DTC Index
INFOID:0000000007492661
G
×: Applicable
DTC
BSW warning lamp
Fail-safe
Reference page
C1B50
SIDE RDR MALFUNCTION
ON
×
DAS-38
C1B51
BSW/BSI IND SHORT CIR
ON
×
DAS-39
C1B52
BSW/BSI IND OPEN CIR
ON
×
DAS-40
C1B55
RADAR BLOCKAGE
Blink
×
DAS-44
U1000
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
ON
×
DAS-45
U1010
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ON
×
DAS-48
U0104
ADAS CAN CIR1
ON
×
DAS-50
U0405
ADAS CAN CIR2
ON
×
DAS-54
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-25
2012 QUEST
SIDE RADAR RH
[BSW]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
SIDE RADAR RH
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000007492662
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
CONSULT MONITOR ITEM
Monitor Item
Condition
Value/Status
BEAM DISTANCE
NOTE:
The item is displayed, but it is not used.
—
BEAM POSITION
NOTE:
The item is displayed, but it is not used.
—
Side radar is normal.
Off
Side radar is malfunctioning.
On
Side radar is not blocked.
Off
Side radar is blocked.
On
NOTE:
The item is displayed, but it is not used.
—
Side radar does not detect a vehicle.
Off
Side radar detects a vehicle.
On
SIDE RADAR MALF
BLOCKAGE COND
ACTIVATE OPE
VEHICLE DETECT
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSOIA0244ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
–
2
(B)
Ground
3
(Y)
4
(L)
5
(G)
6
(W)
2
(B)
Description
Signal name
Input/
Output
Condition
Standard value
Reference value
(Approx.)
Ground
—
—
0 - 0.1 V
0V
BSW communication-L
—
—
—
—
BSW communication-H
—
—
—
—
Ignition switch ON
10 - 16 V
Battery voltage
Approx. 2 sec. after ignition
switch OFF ⇒ ON
(bulb check)
5.5 - 16 V
6V
Ignition power supply
BSW indicator
Input
Output
Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007492663
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC
If a malfunction occurs in the side radar, BSW control module cancels the control. Then the BSW warning
lamp in the combination meter illuminates.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-26
2012 QUEST
SIDE RADAR RH
[BSW]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
TEMPORARY DISABLED STATUS AT BLOCKAGE
When the side radar is blocked, the operation is temporarily cancelled. Then BSW warning lamp in combination meter blinks. Also, under the following conditions, the operation may be temporarily cancelled.
• The side radar may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
• The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the side radar.
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
Detected items (DTC)
1
• U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT
• U1010: CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
2
• U0104: ADAS CAN CIR 1
• U0405: ADAS CAN CIR 2
3
C1B50: SIDE RDR MALFUNCTION
4
• C1B51: BSW/BSI IND SHORT CIR
• C1B52: BSW/BSI IND OPEN CIR
• C1B55: RADAR BLOCKAGE
B
INFOID:0000000007492664
If some DTCs are displayed at the same time, perform inspections one by one based on the following priority
chart.
Priority
A
C
D
E
F
DTC Index
INFOID:0000000007492665
G
×: Applicable
DTC
BSW warning lamp
Fail-safe
Reference page
C1B50
SIDE RDR MALFUNCTION
ON
×
DAS-38
C1B51
BSW/BSI IND SHORT CIR
ON
×
DAS-39
C1B52
BSW/BSI IND OPEN CIR
ON
×
DAS-40
C1B55
RADAR BLOCKAGE
Blink
×
DAS-44
U1000
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
ON
×
DAS-46
U1010
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
ON
×
DAS-48
U0104
ADAS CAN CIR1
ON
×
DAS-50
U0405
ADAS CAN CIR2
ON
×
DAS-54
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-27
2012 QUEST
BLIND SPOT WARNING
[BSW]
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
BLIND SPOT WARNING
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007492666
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
scribed in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
(option abbreviation; if notde-
JCOWA0521GB
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-28
2012 QUEST
BLIND SPOT WARNING
[BSW]
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
DAS
JCOWA0522GB
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-29
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
[BSW]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000007492667
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JSOIA0485GB
DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW FOR MALFUNCTION
It is also important to clarify the customer concerns before starting the inspection. Interview the customer
about the concerns carefully and understand the symptoms fully.
NOTE:
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-30
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
[BSW]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
The customers are not professionals. Never assume that “maybe the customer means···” or “maybe the customer mentioned this symptom”.
A
>> GO TO 2.
2.SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT
B
1. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
2. Check if the DTC is detected on the self-diagnosis results of “SIDE RADAR LEFT/RIGHT” and/or “BSW”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.PRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSIS
C
D
Perform pre-inspection for diagnosis. Refer to DAS-32, "Inspection Procedure".
E
>> GO TO 4.
4.ACTION TEST
F
Perform BSW system action test to check the operation status. Refer to DAS-33, "Description".
Check if any other malfunctions occur.
G
>> GO TO 6.
5.TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS BY DTC
1.
2.
Check the DTC in the self-diagnosis results.
Perform trouble diagnosis for the detected DTC. Refer to DAS-25, "DTC Index" (SIDE RADAR LEFT) or
DAS-27, "DTC Index" (SIDE RADAR RIGHT) and/or DAS-22, "DTC Index" (BSW).
NOTE:
If “DTC: U1000” is detected, first diagnose the CAN communication system or BSW communication system.
H
I
J
>> GO TO 7.
6.SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Perform the applicable diagnosis according to the diagnosis chart by symptom. Refer to DAS-75, "Symptom
Table".
K
L
>> GO TO 7.
7.MALFUNCTIONING PART REPAIR
Repair or replace the identified malfunctioning parts.
M
>> GO TO 8.
8.REPAIR CHECK (SELF-DIAGNOSIS WITH CONSULT)
N
1. Erases self-diagnosis results.
2. Perform “All DTC Reading” again after repairing or replacing the specific items.
3. Check if any DTC is detected in self-diagnosis results of “SIDE RADAR LEFT/RIGHT” and “BSW”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 9.
9.REPAIR CHECK (ACTION TEST)
Perform the BSW system action test. Check that the malfunction symptom is solved or no other symptoms
occur.
Is there a malfunction symptom?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-31
2012 QUEST
DAS
P
PRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSIS
[BSW]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
PRE-INSPECTION FOR DIAGNOSIS
Inspection Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492668
1.CHECK REAR BUMPER NEAR THE SIDE RADAR
Are rear bumper near the side radar contaminated with foreign materials?
YES >> Clean the rear bumper.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SIDE RADAR AND THE SIDE RADAR OUTSKIRTS
Are side radar and the side radar outskirts contaminated with foreign materials?
YES >> Clean the side radar or side radar outskirts.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK SIDE RADAR INSTALLATION CONDITION
Check side radar installation condition (installation position, properly tightened, a bent bracket).
Is it properly installed?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Install side radar properly.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-32
2012 QUEST
ACTION TEST
[BSW]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
ACTION TEST
A
Description
INFOID:0000000007492669
Always perform the BSW system action test to check that the system operates normally after replacing the
side radar LH/RH, or repairing any BSW system malfunction.
WARNING:
Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test.
CAUTION:
Fully understand the following items well before the road test;
• Precautions: Refer to DAS-4, "Precaution for BSW System Service".
• System description: Refer to DAS-8, "System Description".
• Normal operating condition: Refer to DAS-76, "Description".
Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492670
WARNING:
Be careful of traffic conditions and safety around the vehicle when performing road test.
CAUTION:
Fully understand the following items well before the road test;
• Precautions: Refer to DAS-4, "Precaution for BSW System Service".
• System description: Refer to DAS-8, "System Description".
• Normal operating condition: Refer to DAS-76, "Description".
B
C
D
E
F
G
1.BSW SYSTEM ACTION TEST
1.
2.
3.
H
Drive the vehicle.
Turn BSW switch ON (BSW ON indicator is ON).
Check BSW operation according to the following table.
I
Vehicle condition/ Driver's operation
Turn signal
condition
Status of vehicle detection within
detection
area
Indication on the
BSW indicator
Buzzer
—
—
—
OFF
OFF
Less than
approx.
29 (18)
—
—
OFF
OFF
—
Vehicle is
absent
OFF
OFF
OFF
Vehicle is
detected
ON
OFF
Blink
Short continuous beep
BSW ON
indicator
Vehicle speed
(Approx.)
[km/h (MPH)]
OFF
ON
Action
Approx.
32 (20)
or more
J
K
L
M
N
Before turn
signal operates
Vehicle is
detected
ON
(Vehicle detected direction)
DAS
JSOIA0251GB
JSOIA0452GB
P
Blink
Vehicle is
detected after turn signal operates
OFF
JSOIA0251GB
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-33
2012 QUEST
ACTION TEST
[BSW]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
NOTE:
• If vehicle speed exceeds approximately 32 km/h (20MPH), BSW function operates until the vehicle
speed becomes lower than approximately 29km/h (18MPH).
• Time shown in the figure is approximate time.
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-34
2012 QUEST
C1A00 CONTROL UNIT
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
A
C1A00 CONTROL UNIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492671
B
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
C
DTC
C1A00
Trouble diagnosis name
CONTROL UNIT
DTC detecting condition
BSW control module internal malfunction
Possible causes
BSW control module
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
3. Check if the “C1A00” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “C1A00” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-35, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
E
Diagnosis Procedure
G
INFOID:0000000007492672
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC other than “C1A00” is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
DAS-22, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
F
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-35
2012 QUEST
C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1, C1A02 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
C1A01 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1, C1A02 POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 2
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492673
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC detecting condition
C1A01
POWER SUPPLY
CIR
The battery voltage sent to BSW control module
remains less than 7.9 V for 5 seconds
C1A02
POWER SUPPLY
CIR 2
The battery voltage sent to BSW control module
remains more than 19.3 V for 5 seconds
Possible causes
• Connector, harness, fuse
• BSW control module
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start the engine.
Turn the BSW system ON.
Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
Check if the “C1A01” or “C1A02” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of
“BSW”.
Is “C1A01” or “C1A02” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-36, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492674
1.CHECK BSW CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check power supply and ground circuit of BSW control module. Refer to DAS-68, "BSW CONTROL MODULE
: Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-36
2012 QUEST
C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
C1A03 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
DTC Logic
A
INFOID:0000000007492675
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
C1A03
B
Trouble diagnosis
name
VHCL SPEED SE
CIRC
DTC detecting condition
Possible causes
C
If the vehicle speed signal (wheel speed) from
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) received by the BSW control module via CAN
communication, are inconsistent
• Wheel speed sensor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
• BSW control module
NOTE:
If DTC “C1A03” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW
CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic"
D
E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
F
1.
2.
3.
G
Start the engine.
Turn the BSW system ON.
Drive the vehicle at 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more.
CAUTION:
Always drive safely.
4. Stop the vehicle.
5. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
6. Check if the “C1A03” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “C1A03” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-37, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492676
H
I
J
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “C1A03” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-37, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-37
2012 QUEST
C1B50 SIDE RADAR MALFUNCTION
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
C1B50 SIDE RADAR MALFUNCTION
DTC LOGIC
INFOID:0000000007492677
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
C1B50
Trouble diagnosis name
SIDE RDR MALFUNCTION
DTC detecting condition
Side radar malfunction
Possible causes
Side radar
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Start the engine.
Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
Check if the “C1B50” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR
RIGHT/LEFT”.
Is the “C1B50” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-38, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492678
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT
Check if any DTC other than “C1B50” is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR LEFT/RIGHT”
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunction part. Refer to DAS27, "DTC Index" (SIDE RADAR RIGHT) or DAS-25, "DTC Index" (SIDE RADAR LEFT).
NO
>> Replace the side radar. Refer to DAS-78, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-38
2012 QUEST
C1B51 BSW/BSI INDICATOR SHORT CIRCUIT
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
C1B51 BSW/BSI INDICATOR SHORT CIRCUIT
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492679
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
C1B51
B
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
BSW/BSI IND SHORT CIR
Short circuit in BSW indicator circuit is detected. (Over current is detected)
Possible cause
• BSW indicator circuit
• BSW indicator
• Side radar
C
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Start the engine.
Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
Check if the “C1B51” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR
RIGHT/LEFT”.
Is the “C1B51” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-39, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
Side radar
B57 (LH)
B317 (RH)
Terminal
G
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect side radar harness connector and BSW indicator harness connector.
Check continuity between side radar harness connector and ground.
Connector
F
INFOID:0000000007492680
1.CHECK BSW INDICATOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
1.
2.
3.
E
I
J
Continuity
Ground
6
Not existed
K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
L
2.REPLACE THE SIDE RADAR
1. Replace the side radar.
2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
3. Check if the “C1B51” is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT/LEFT”
Is the DTC “C1B51” detected?
YES >> Replace the side radar. Refer to DAS-78, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-39
2012 QUEST
C1B52 BSW/BSI INDICATOR OPEN CIRCUIT
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
C1B52 BSW/BSI INDICATOR OPEN CIRCUIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492681
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
Trouble diagnosis name
C1B52
BSW/BSI IND OPEN CIR
DTC detecting condition
Open circuit in BSW indicator circuit is detected.
Possible cause
• BSW indicator circuit
• BSW indicator
• Side radar
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start the engine.
Turn the BSW system ON.
Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
Check if the “C1B52” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR
RIGHT/LEFT”.
Is the “C1B52” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-40, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492682
1.CHECK BSW INDICATOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 1
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect side radar harness connector and door mirror harness connector.
Check continuity between side radar harness connector and door mirror harness connector.
Side radar
Connector
Door mirror
Terminal
B57 (LH)
6
B317 (RH)
Connector
D43 (LH)
D3 (RH)
Continuity
Terminal
1
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
2.CHECK BSW INDICATOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 2
1.
2.
Disconnect BSW indicator harness connector.
Check continuity between door mirror harness connector and BSW indicator harness connector.
Door mirror
Connector
D43 (LH)
D3 (RH)
D43 (LH)
D3 (RH)
BSW indicator
Terminal
1
13
Connector
D201 (LH)
D202 (RH)
D201 (LH)
D202 (RH)
Continuity
Terminal
1
Existed
2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
3.CHECK BSW INDICATOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN 3
Check continuity between door mirror harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-40
2012 QUEST
C1B52 BSW/BSI INDICATOR OPEN CIRCUIT
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
A
Door mirror
Connector
Terminal
D43 (LH)
Continuity
Ground
13
D3 (RH)
B
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
C
4.CHECK SIDE RADAR VOLTAGE OUTPUT
1.
2.
D
Connect side radar harness connector.
Check voltage between door mirror harness connector and ground.
Door mirror
Connector
Ground
D43 (LH)
D3 (RH)
Condition
Terminal
1
Ignition switch
OFF ⇒ ON
(Approx. 2 sec.)
Standard
voltage
E
Reference
voltage
(Approx.)
F
5.5 - 16 V
6V
G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace glass mirror.
NO
>> Replace side radar. Refer to DAS-78, "Removal and Installation".
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-41
2012 QUEST
C1B53 SIDE RADAR RIGHT MALFUNCTION
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
C1B53 SIDE RADAR RIGHT MALFUNCTION
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492683
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
C1B53
Trouble diagnosis name
SIDE RDR R MALF
DTC detecting condition
BSW control module detects that side radar RH
has a malfunction.
Possible cause
Side radar RH
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “C1B53” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “C1B53” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-42, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492684
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “C1B53” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
DAS-27, "DTC Index" (SIDE RADAR RIGHT).
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-42
2012 QUEST
C1B54 SIDE RADAR LEFT MALFUNCTION
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
C1B54 SIDE RADAR LEFT MALFUNCTION
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492685
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
C1B54
B
Trouble diagnosis name
SIDE RDR L MALF
DTC detecting condition
BSW control module detects that side radar LH
has a malfunction.
Possible cause
C
Side radar LH
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
D
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “C1B54” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “C1B54” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-43, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
E
F
G
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492686
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
H
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “C1B54” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
I
2.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
J
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR LEFT”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
DAS-25, "DTC Index" (SIDE RADAR LEFT).
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-43
2012 QUEST
C1B55 RADAR BLOCKAGE
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
C1B55 RADAR BLOCKAGE
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492687
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
C1B55
Trouble diagnosis name
RADAR BLOCKAGE
DTC detecting condition
Side radar is blocked.
Possible cause
Stain or foreign materials is deposited.
NOTE:
DTC “C1B55” may be detected under the following conditions except for possible cause. (Explain to the customer about the difference between the contamination detection function and the indication when the malfunction is detected and tell them “This is not malfunction”.)
• The side radar may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
• The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the side radar.
• Due to the nature of radar technology it is possible to get a blockage warning and not actually be blocked.
This is rare and is known as a false blockage warning. A false blocked condition either self-clears or clears
after an ignition cycle.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492688
1.CHECK THE REAR BUMPER
Check rear bumper near the side radar contaminated with foreign materials.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THE SIDE RADAR
Check side radar and the side radar outskirts contaminated with foreign materials.
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK THE SIDE RADAR INSTALL CONDITION
Check side radar installation condition (installation position, properly tightened, a bent bracket).
>> GO TO 4.
4.INTERVIEW
1. Ask if there is stain or foreign materials.
2. Ask if there is any temporary ambient condition such as splashing water, mist or fog.
3. Ask if there is any object such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the side radar.
Is any of above conditions seen?
YES >> Explain to the customer about the difference between the blockage detection function and the
indication when the malfunction is detected and tell them “This is not malfunction”.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-44
2012 QUEST
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
A
SIDE RADAR LH
SIDE RADAR LH : Description
INFOID:0000000007492689
B
CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern
vehicle is equipped with many electronic control units, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected
with 2 communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads the required data only.
CAN communication signal chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart".
BSW COMMUNICATION
• BSW communication is a multiplex communication system. This enables the system to transmit and receive
large quantities of data at high speed by connecting control units with 2 communication lines.
• BSW communication lines adopt twisted-pair line style (two lines twisted) for noise immunity.
SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic
C
D
E
F
INFOID:0000000007492690
G
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1000
Trouble diagnosis name
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
DTC detecting condition
If side radar LH is not transmitting or receiving
BSW communication signal for 2 seconds or more
SIDE RADAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure
Possible causes
H
BSW communication system
I
INFOID:0000000007492691
1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
J
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start the engine.
Turn the BSW system ON, and then wait for 2 seconds or more.
Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
Check if the “U1000” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR
LEFT”.
Is “U1000” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
SIDE RADAR RH
K
L
M
SIDE RADAR RH : Description
INFOID:0000000007492692
CAN COMMUNICATION
N
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern
vehicle is equipped with many electronic control units, and each control unit shares information and links with DAS
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected
with 2 communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads the required data only.
CAN communication signal chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communica- P
tion Signal Chart".
BSW COMMUNICATION
• BSW communication is a multiplex communication system. This enables the system to transmit and receive
large quantities of data at high speed by connecting control units with 2 communication lines.
• BSW communication lines adopt twisted-pair line style (two lines twisted) for noise immunity.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-45
2012 QUEST
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
SIDE RADAR RH : DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492693
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1000
Trouble diagnosis name
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
DTC detecting condition
If Side radar RH is not transmitting or receiving
BSW communication signal for 2 seconds or more
SIDE RADAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure
Possible causes
BSW communication system
INFOID:0000000007492694
1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start the engine.
Turn the BSW system ON, and then wait for 2 seconds or more.
Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
Check if the “U1000” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR
RIGHT”.
Is “U1000” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
BSW CONTROL MODULE
BSW CONTROL MODULE : Description
INFOID:0000000007492695
CAN COMMUNICATION
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern
vehicle is equipped with many electronic control units, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected
with 2 communication lines (CAN-H, CAN-L) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads the required data only.
CAN communication signal chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart".
BSW COMMUNICATION
• BSW communication is a multiplex communication system. This enables the system to transmit and receive
large quantities of data at high speed by connecting control units with 2 communication lines.
• BSW communication lines adopt twisted-pair line style (two lines twisted) for noise immunity.
BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492696
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1000
Trouble diagnosis name
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
DTC detecting condition
Possible causes
If BSW control module is not transmitting or re• CAN communication system
ceiving CAN communication signal or BSW com• BSW communication system
munication signal for 2 seconds or more
NOTE:
If “U1000” is detected, first diagnose the CAN communication system.
BSW CONTROL MODULE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492697
1.PERFORM THE SELF-DIAGNOSIS
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Turn the BSW system ON, and then wait for 2 seconds or more.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1000” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” detected as the current malfunction?
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-46
2012 QUEST
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
[BSW]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-47
2012 QUEST
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
SIDE RADAR LH
SIDE RADAR LH : Description
INFOID:0000000007492698
CAN controller controls the communication of BSW communication signal and the error detection.
SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492699
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1010
Trouble diagnosis name
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
DTC detecting condition
If side radar LH detects malfunction by CAN controller initial
diagnosis.
SIDE RADAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure
Possible cause
Side radar LH
INFOID:0000000007492700
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT
1.
2.
3.
Turn the BSW system ON.
Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
Check if the “U1010” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR
LEFT”.
Is “U1010” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Replace the side radar LH. Refer to DAS-78, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
SIDE RADAR RH
SIDE RADAR RH : Description
INFOID:0000000007492701
CAN controller controls the communication of BSW communication signal and the error detection.
SIDE RADAR RH : DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492702
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1010
Trouble diagnosis name
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
DTC detecting condition
If Side radar RH detects malfunction by CAN controller initial
diagnosis.
SIDE RADAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure
Possible cause
Side radar RH
INFOID:0000000007492703
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT
1.
2.
3.
Turn the BSW system ON.
Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
Check if the “U1010” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR
RIGHT”.
Is “U1010” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Replace the side radar RH. Refer to DAS-78, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
BSW CONTROL MODULE
BSW CONTROL MODULE : Description
INFOID:0000000007492704
CAN controller controls the communication of CAN communication signal and BSW communication signal,
and the error detection.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-48
2012 QUEST
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492705
A
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
Trouble diagnosis name
DTC detecting condition
U1010
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
If BSW control module detects malfunction by
CAN controller initial diagnosis
BSW CONTROL MODULE : Diagnosis Procedure
Possible causes
B
BSW control module
C
INFOID:0000000007492706
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
D
1. Turn the BSW system ON.
2. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
3. Check if the “U1010” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1010” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-49
2012 QUEST
U0104 ADAS CAN 1
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U0104 ADAS CAN 1
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492707
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U0104
Trouble diagnosis name
ADAS CAN CIR1
DTC detecting condition
Side radar detected an error of BSW communication signal
that was received from BSW control module.
Possible cause
BSW control module
NOTE:
If DTC “U0104” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-45, "SIDE
RADAR LH : DTC Logic" (SIDE RADAR LEFT), DAS-46, "SIDE RADAR RH : DTC Logic" (SIDE RADAR
RIGHT).
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start the engine.
Turn the BSW system ON.
Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT
Check if the U0104 is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR
RIGHT/LEFT”.
Is the DTC “U0104” detected?
YES >> Refer to DAS-50, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492708
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U0104” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT/LEFT”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to DAS-45, "SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic" (SIDE RADAR LEFT), DAS-46, "SIDE RADAR
RH : DTC Logic" (SIDE RADAR RIGHT).
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BSW CONTROL MODULE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
DAS-22, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace side radar LH or RH. Refer to DAS-78, "Removal and Installation"
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-50
2012 QUEST
U0121 VDC CAN 2
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U0121 VDC CAN 2
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492709
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U0121
B
Trouble diagnosis name
VDC CAN CIR2
DTC detecting condition
Possible causes
If BSW control module detects an error signal
that is received from ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) via CAN communication
ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
C
NOTE:
If DTC “U0121” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW
CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
E
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U0121” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U0121” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-51, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
H
INFOID:0000000007492710
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
I
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U0121” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
J
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
K
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-37, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-51
2012 QUEST
U0401 ECM CAN 1
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U0401 ECM CAN 1
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492711
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U0401
Trouble diagnosis name
ECM CAN CIR1
DTC detecting condition
If BSW control module detects an error signal
that is received from ECM via CAN communication
Possible causes
ECM
NOTE:
If DTC “U0401” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW
CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U0401” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U0401” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-52, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492712
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U0401” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
EC-93, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-52
2012 QUEST
U0402 TCM CAN 1
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U0402 TCM CAN 1
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492713
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U0402
B
Trouble diagnosis name
TCM CAN CIRC1
DTC detecting condition
If BSW control module detects an error signal that
is received from TCM via CAN communication
Possible causes
C
TCM
NOTE:
If DTC “U0402” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW
CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
E
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U0402” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U0402” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-53, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
D
INFOID:0000000007492714
F
G
H
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U0402” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
I
J
K
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
TM-48, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-53
2012 QUEST
U0405 ADAS CAN 2
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U0405 ADAS CAN 2
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492715
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U0405
Trouble diagnosis name
ADAS CAN CIR2
DTC detecting condition
Side radar detected an error of BSW communication signal that was received from BSW control module.
Possible cause
BSW control module
NOTE:
If DTC “U0405” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-45, "SIDE
RADAR LH : DTC Logic" (SIDE RADAR LEFT), DAS-45, "SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic" (SIDE RADAR
RIGHT).
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start the engine.
Turn the BSW system ON.
Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
Check if the U0405 is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR
RIGHT/LEFT”.
Is the DTC “U0405” detected?
YES >> Refer to DAS-54, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492716
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U0405” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT/LEFT”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to DAS-45, "SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic" (SIDE RADAR LEFT), DAS-46, "SIDE RADAR
RH : DTC Logic" (SIDE RADAR RIGHT).
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BSW CONTROL MODULE SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
DAS-22, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace side radar LH or RH. Refer to DAS-78, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-54
2012 QUEST
U0415 VDC CAN 1
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U0415 VDC CAN 1
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492717
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U0415
B
Trouble diagnosis name
VDC CAN CIR1
DTC detecting condition
Possible causes
If BSW control module detects an error signal
that is received from ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) via CAN communication
ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
C
NOTE:
If DTC “U0415” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW
CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
E
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U0415” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U0415” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-55, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
H
INFOID:0000000007492718
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
I
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U0415” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
J
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
K
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-37, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-55
2012 QUEST
U150B ECM CAN 3
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U150B ECM CAN 3
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492719
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U150B
Trouble diagnosis name
ECM CAN CIRC 3
DTC detecting condition
BSW control module detects an error signal
that is received from ECM via CAN communication
Possible causes
ECM
NOTE:
If DTC “U150B” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW
CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U150B” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U150B” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-56, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492720
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U150B” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ECM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
EC-93, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-56
2012 QUEST
U150C VDC CAN 3
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U150C VDC CAN 3
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492721
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U150C
B
Trouble diagnosis name
VDC CAN CIRC 3
DTC detecting condition
BSW control module detects an error signal
that is received from ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit) via CAN communication
Possible causes
ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)
C
NOTE:
If DTC “U150C” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW
CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
E
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U150C” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U150C” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-57, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
H
INFOID:0000000007492722
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
I
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U150C” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
J
2.CHECK ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
K
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BRC-37, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-57
2012 QUEST
U150D TCM CAN 3
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U150D TCM CAN 3
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492723
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U150D
Trouble diagnosis name
TCM CAN CIRC 3
DTC detecting condition
BSW control module detects an error signal
that is received from TCM via CAN communication
Possible causes
TCM
NOTE:
If DTC “U150D” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW
CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U150D” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U150D” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-58, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492724
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U150D” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
TM-48, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-58
2012 QUEST
U150E BCM CAN 3
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U150E BCM CAN 3
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492725
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U150E
B
Trouble diagnosis name
BCM CAN CIRC 3
DTC detecting condition
BSW control module detects an error signal
that is received from BCM via CAN communication
Possible causes
C
BCM
NOTE:
If DTC “U150E” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW
CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
E
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U150E” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U150E” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-59, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
H
INFOID:0000000007492726
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
I
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U150E” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
J
2.CHECK BCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
K
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BCM”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
BCS-59, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-59
2012 QUEST
U1503 SIDE RDR L CAN 2
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U1503 SIDE RDR L CAN 2
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492727
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1503
Trouble diagnosis name
SIDE RDR L CAN CIR 2
DTC detecting condition
BSW control module detects an error signal that is
received from side radar LH via BSW communication
Possible causes
Side radar LH
NOTE:
If DTC “U1503” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, or “U1508”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000” or “U1508”.
• Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic" for DTC “U1000”.
• Refer to DAS-65, "DTC Logic" for DTC “U1508”.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1503” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1503” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-60, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492728
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if “U1000” or “U1508” is detected other than “U1503” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” or “U1508” detected?
YES-1 >> U1000 detected: Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
YES-2 >> U1508 detected: Refer to DAS-65, "DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SIDE RADAR LH SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR LEFT”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
DAS-25, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-60
2012 QUEST
U1504 SIDE RDR L CAN 1
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U1504 SIDE RDR L CAN 1
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492729
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1504
B
Trouble diagnosis name
SIDE RDR L CAN CIR 1
DTC detecting condition
BSW control module detects an error signal that is
received from side radar LH via BSW communication
Possible causes
C
Side radar LH
NOTE:
If DTC “U1504” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, or “U1508”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000” or “U1508”.
• Refer to DAS-45, "SIDE RADAR LH : DTC Logic" for DTC “U1000”.
• Refer to DAS-65, "DTC Logic" for DTC “U1508”.
D
E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1504” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1504” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-61, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
H
INFOID:0000000007492730
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
I
Check if “U1000” or “U1508” is detected other than “U1504” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” or “U1508” detected?
YES-1 >> U1000 detected: Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
YES-2 >> U1508 detected: Refer to DAS-65, "DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
J
K
2.CHECK SIDE RADAR LH SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR LEFT”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
DAS-25, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-61
2012 QUEST
U1505 SIDE RDR R CAN 2
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U1505 SIDE RDR R CAN 2
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492731
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1505
Trouble diagnosis name
SIDE RDR R CAN CIR 2
DTC detecting condition
BSW control module detects an error signal that is
received from side radar RH via BSW communication
Possible causes
Side radar RH
NOTE:
If DTC “U1505” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW
CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1505” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1505” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-62, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492732
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U1505” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SIDE RADAR RH SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
DAS-27, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-62
2012 QUEST
U1506 SIDE RDR R CAN 1
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U1506 SIDE RDR R CAN 1
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492733
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1506
B
Trouble diagnosis name
SIDE RDR R CAN CIR 1
DTC detecting condition
BSW control module detects an error signal that is
received from side radar RH via BSW communication
Possible causes
C
Side radar RH
NOTE:
If DTC “U1506” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW
CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
E
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1506” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1506” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-63, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
H
INFOID:0000000007492734
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
I
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U1506” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
J
2.CHECK SIDE RADAR RH SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
K
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
DAS-27, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-63
2012 QUEST
U1507 LOST COMM(SIDE RDR R)
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U1507 LOST COMM(SIDE RDR R)
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492735
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1507
Trouble diagnosis name
LOST COMM(SIDE
RDR R)
DTC detecting condition
BSW control module cannot receive BSW
communication signal from side radar RH for 2
seconds or more
Possible causes
• BSW communication system
• Side radar RH
NOTE:
If DTC “U1507” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW
CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic"
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1507” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1507” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-64, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492736
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U1507” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SIDE RADAR RH SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
DAS-27, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-64
2012 QUEST
U1508 LOST COMM(SIDE RDR L)
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U1508 LOST COMM(SIDE RDR L)
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492737
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1508
B
Trouble diagnosis name
LOST COMM(SIDE
RDR L)
DTC detecting condition
BSW control module cannot receive BSW
communication signal from side radar LH for 2
seconds or more
Possible causes
• Side radar LH harness connector
• BSW communication system
• Side radar LH
NOTE:
DTC “U1508” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1508”.
C
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
E
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1508” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1508” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-65, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492738
F
G
H
1.CHECK SIDE RADAR HARNESS CONNECTOR
1.
2.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check the terminals and connectors of the side radar LH for damage, bend and short (unit side and connector side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO
>> Repair the terminal or connector.
I
J
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-65
2012 QUEST
U1518 SIDE RDR L CAN 3
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U1518 SIDE RDR L CAN 3
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492739
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1518
Trouble diagnosis name
SIDE RDR L CAN CIRC 3
DTC detecting condition
BSW control module detects an error signal that is
received from side radar LH via BSW communication
Possible causes
Side radar LH
NOTE:
If DTC “U1518” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, or “U1508”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000” or “U1508”.
• Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic" for DTC “U1000”.
• Refer to DAS-65, "DTC Logic" for DTC “U1508”.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1518” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1518” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-66, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492740
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if “U1000” or “U1508” is detected other than “U1518” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” or “U1508” detected?
YES-1 >> U1000 detected: Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
YES-2 >> U1508 detected: Refer to DAS-65, "DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SIDE RADAR LH SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR LEFT”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
DAS-25, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-66
2012 QUEST
U1519 SIDE RDR R CAN 3
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U1519 SIDE RDR R CAN 3
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492741
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1519
B
Trouble diagnosis name
SIDE RDR R CAN CIRC 3
DTC detecting condition
BSW control module detects an error signal that is
received from side radar RH via BSW communication
Possible causes
C
Side radar RH
NOTE:
If DTC “U1519” is detected along with DTC “U1000”, first diagnose the DTC “U1000”. Refer to DAS-46, "BSW
CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
E
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the BSW system ON.
3. Perform “All DTC Reading” with CONSULT.
4. Check if the “U1519” is detected as the current malfunction in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1519” detected as the current malfunction?
YES >> Refer to DAS-67, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
H
INFOID:0000000007492742
1.CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
I
Check if “U1000” is detected other than “U1519” in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “BSW”.
Is “U1000” detected?
YES >> Perform the CAN communication system inspection. Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Refer to DAS-46, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : DTC Logic".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
J
2.CHECK SIDE RADAR RH SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
K
Check if any DTC is detected in “Self Diagnostic Result” of “SIDE RADAR RIGHT”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform diagnosis on the detected DTC and repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. Refer to
DAS-27, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-67
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
BSW CONTROL MODULE
BSW CONTROL MODULE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492743
1.CHECK FUSES
Check if any of the following fuses are blown:
Signal name
Fuse No.
Ignition power supply
45
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
2.CHECK BSW CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between BSW control module harness connector and ground.
Terminal
(+)
Condition
(–)
BSW control module
Connector
Ignition
switch
Terminal
Ground
M61
Standard
voltage
OFF
16
ON
Reference
voltage
(Approx.)
0 - 0.1 V
0V
9.5 - 16 V
Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the BSW control module power supply circuit.
3.CHECK BSW CONTROL MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the BSW control module connector.
Check for continuity between BSW control module harness connector and ground.
BSW control module
Connector
Terminal
M61
6
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair the BSW control module ground circuit.
SIDE RADAR LH
SIDE RADAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492744
1.CHECK FUSES
Check if any of the following fuses are blown:
Signal name
Fuse No.
Ignition power supply
45
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-68
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
A
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the side radar LH connector.
Check voltage between side radar LH harness connector and ground.
Terminals
(+)
(−)
Side radar LH
Connector
Condition
Reference
voltage
(Approx.)
OFF
0 - 0.1 V
0V
ON
10 - 16 V
Battery voltage
Ignition switch
Terminal
Ground
B57
Standard
voltage
5
B
C
D
E
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the side radar LH power supply circuit.
F
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between side radar LH harness connectors and ground.
G
Side radar LH
Connector
Terminal
B57
2
Ground
Continuity
H
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair the side radar LH ground circuit.
I
SIDE RADAR RH
J
SIDE RADAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492745
1.CHECK FUSES
K
Check if any of the following fuses are blown:
Signal name
Fuse No.
Ignition power supply
45
L
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
M
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
N
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the side radar RH connector.
Check voltage between side radar RH harness connector and ground.
Terminals
(+)
(−)
Side radar RH
Connector
Standard
voltage
Reference
voltage
(Approx.)
OFF
0 - 0.1 V
0V
ON
10 - 16 V
Battery voltage
Ignition switch
Terminal
Ground
B317
Condition
5
DAS
P
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-69
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the side radar RH power supply circuit.
[BSW]
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between side radar RH harness connectors and ground.
Side radar RH
Connector
Terminal
B317
2
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair the side radar RH ground circuit.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-70
2012 QUEST
BSW SWITCH CIRCUIT
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BSW SWITCH CIRCUIT
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492746
1.CHECK BSW SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
B
1.
2.
3.
C
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Select the DATA MONITOR item “WARN SYS SW” of “BSW” with CONSULT.
With operating the BSW switch, check the monitor status.
Monitor item
Condition
Monitor status
BSW switch is pressed
WARN SYS
SW
D
On
BSW switch is not pressed
OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> BSW switch circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to DAS-71, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492747
F
1.CHECK BSW SWITCH SIGNAL INPUT
1.
2.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
With operating the BSW switch, check voltage between BSW control module harness connector and
ground.
G
H
Terminals
(+)
(−)
BSW control module
Connector
Terminal
M61
1
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
I
Pressed
0V
J
Released
12 V
BSW switch
Ground
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
K
2.CHECK BSW SWITCH
L
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove BSW switch.
3. Check BSW switch. Refer to DAS-81, "Removal and Installation".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace the BSW switch. Refer to DAS-81, "Removal and Installation".
M
N
3.CHECK BSW SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BSW switch harness connector and the ground.
BSW switch
Connector
Terminal
M60
2
Ground
DAS
Continuity
P
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
4.CHECK BSW SWITCH SIGNAL INPUT CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
1.
Disconnect the BSW control module connector.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-71
2012 QUEST
BSW SWITCH CIRCUIT
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2. Check continuity between the BSW control module harness connector and BSW switch harness connector.
BSW control module
BSW switch
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M61
1
M60
1
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
5.CHECK BSW SWITCH SIGNAL INPUT CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
Check continuity between the BSW control module harness connector and ground.
BSW control module
Connector
Terminal
M61
1
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007492748
1.CHECK BSW SWITCH
Check continuity of BSW switch.
Terminal
1
2
Condition
Continuity
When BSW switch is pressed
Existed
When BSW switch is released
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace BSW switch.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-72
2012 QUEST
BSW ON INDICATOR CIRCUIT
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BSW ON INDICATOR CIRCUIT
A
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492749
1.CHECK BSW ON INDICATOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
B
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BSW switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BSW switch harness connector and ground.
C
D
Terminals
(+)
(−)
Voltage
(Approx.)
BSW switch
Connector
Terminal
M60
5
E
Ground
Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the BSW ON indicator power supply circuit.
F
2.CHECK BSW ON INDICATOR SIGNAL FOR OPEN
G
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the BSW control module harness connector.
Check continuity between the BSW control module harness connector and BSW switch harness connector.
H
BSW control module
I
BSW switch
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M61
4
M60
6
Continuity
Existed
J
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
K
3.CHECK BSW ON INDICATOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
Check continuity between the BSW control module harness connector and ground.
BSW control module
Connector
Terminal
M61
4
Ground
L
Continuity
M
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
N
4.CHECK BSW ON INDICATOR
DAS
Check the BSW ON indicator. Refer to DAS-73, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the BSW control module. Refer to DAS-77, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace BSW switch. DAS-81, "Removal and Installation".
Component Inspection
P
INFOID:0000000007492750
1.CHECK BSW ON INDICATOR
Apply battery voltage to BSW switch terminals 5 and 6, and then check if the BSW ON indicator illuminates.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-73
2012 QUEST
BSW ON INDICATOR CIRCUIT
[BSW]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Terminals
(+)
(-)
5
6
Condition
BSW ON indicator
When the battery voltage is applied
On
When the battery voltage is not applied
Off
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace the BSW switch. Refer to DAS-81, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-74
2012 QUEST
BSW SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
[BSW]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
A
BSW SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table
INFOID:0000000007492751
B
CAUTION:
Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT before the symptom diagnosis. Perform the trouble diagnosis if any DTC is detected.
NOTE:
For the operational conditions of BSW, refer to DAS-8, "System Description".
C
D
Symptom
BSW warning lamp (Yellow)
does not illuminate
Possible cause
Inspection item/Reference page
• BSW warning lamp signal
(CAN)
- Combination meter
- BSW control module
• BSW warning lamp (combination meter)
• Power supply and ground circuit of BSW control module
Refer to DAS-68, "BSW CONTROL MODULE : Diagnosis
Procedure"
• BSW control module Active
test “BSW/BSI WARNING
LAMP”
Refer to DAS-17, "CONSULT
Function (BSW)".
• BSW control module Data
monitor “BSW/BSI WARN
LMP”
Refer to DAS-17, "CONSULT
Function (BSW)"
• Combination meter Data monitor “BSW W/L”
Refer to MWI-35, "CONSULT
Function"
Indicator/warning lamps do not illuminate when ignition switch
OFF ⇒ ON.
BSW system is not activated.
(Indicator/warning lamps illuminate when ignition switch OFF ⇒
ON.)
E
F
G
H
I
BSW ON indicator (on the
BSW switch) does not illuminate
• Harness between BSW control module and BSW switch
• BSW switch
• BSW control module
BSW ON indicator circuit
Refer to DAS-73, "Diagnosis Procedure"
J
BSW indicator does not turn
ON
Perform self-diagnosis of side radar
Refer to DAS-19, "CONSULT
Function (SIDE RADAR LEFT)"
or DAS-20, "CONSULT Function
(SIDE RADAR RIGHT)"
K
• Harness between side radar
and BSW indicator
• Side radar LH/RH
• BSW indicator
• Harness between BSW control module and BSW switch
• Harness between BSW
switch and ground
• BSW control module
• BSW switch
BSW ON indicator circuit
Refer to DAS-73, "Diagnosis Procedure"
M
• BSW control module
• Combination meter
Meter buzzer circuit
Refer to WCS-35, "Component
Function Check"
BSW ON indicator is not
turned ON ⇔ OFF when operating BSW switch
Buzzer is not sounding
L
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-75
2012 QUEST
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
[BSW]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Description
INFOID:0000000007492752
PRECAUTIONS FOR BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW)
• The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedure and are not designed to prevent contact
with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the
direction driver will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system.
• The BSW system may not provide a warning for vehicles that pass through the detection zone quickly.
• Do not use the BSW system when towing a trailer because the system may not function properly.
• Excessive noise (e.g. audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it
may not be heard.
• The side radar may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as:
- Pedestrians, bicycles, animals.
- Several types of vehicles such as motorcycles.
- Oncoming vehicles.
- Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when driver accelerate from a stop.
- A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as vehicle.
- A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.
- A vehicle which vehicle overtakes rapidly.
• Severe weather or road spray conditions may reduce the ability of the side radar to detect other vehicles.
• The side radar detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the
side radar may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the side radar may
detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
• The side radar are designed to ignore most stationary objects, however objects such as guardrails, walls,
foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operating condition.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-76
2012 QUEST
BSW CONTROL MODULE
[BSW]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
BSW CONTROL MODULE
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492753
B
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove cluster lid C. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove mounting bolts from BSW control module.
Disconnect BSW control module connector.
Remove BSW control module.
C
D
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-77
2012 QUEST
SIDE RADAR
[BSW]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SIDE RADAR
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492754
EXPLODED VIEW
JSOIA0511GB
1.
Bracket
2.
Side radar LH
3.
Bracket
4.
Bracket
5.
Side radar RH
6.
Bracket
A.
LH side
B.
RH side
Refer to GI-4, "Components" for symbol makes in the figure.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1.
2.
Remove the rear bumper fascia assembly. Refer to EXT-15, "REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation".
Remove the side radar connector.
3.
NOTE:
This illustration is an example.
Remove the mounting nuts to remove the side radar RH/LH from bracket.
JSOIA0280ZZ
Installation
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-78
2012 QUEST
SIDE RADAR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Tighten mounting nuts in the numerical order as shown in the figure.
• Always lock the side radar connector.
CAUTION:
Since right side radar and left side radar are similar in shape,
never confuse right with left.
[BSW]
A
B
C
JSOIA0359ZZ
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-79
2012 QUEST
BSW INDICATOR
[BSW]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
BSW INDICATOR
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007492755
BSW indicator is installed on the door mirror surface. Refer to MIR-29, "GLASS MIRROR : Removal and
Installation".
NOTE:
Always remove BSW indicator together with glass mirror.
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-80
2012 QUEST
BSW SWITCH
[BSW]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
BSW SWITCH
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492756
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
B
Remove the instrument lower panel (LH). Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the bracket for BSW switch and other switches from instrument driver lower panel.
Insert remover tool (B) in pawl (A) of the bracket and widen the
pawl in (C) direction to release the fit.
Remove BSW switch from the bracket in (D) direction.
C
D
E
F
JSOIA0515ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
DAS
P
Revision: 2011 September
DAS-81
2012 QUEST
DRIVER CONTROLS
SECTION
DEF
DEFOGGER
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 14
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH ........... 14
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 4
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 4
Component Parts Location ........................................ 4
Rear window defogger .............................................. 5
Door mirror defogger ................................................. 5
WITH AUTO A/C ........................................................14
WITH AUTO A/C : Component Function Check ......14
WITH AUTO A/C : Diagnosis Procedure .................14
F
G
H
WITH MANUAL A/C ...................................................15
WITH MANUAL A/C : Component Function Check
....15
WITH MANUAL A/C : Diagnosis Procedure ............15
I
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY ............. 17
J
System Description ................................................... 6
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 7
Component Function Check ....................................17
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................17
Component Inspection .............................................18
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................. 8
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER .......................... 19
K
COMMON ITEM ........................................................... 8
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) ....................................................... 8
DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER ........................... 21
SYSTEM .............................................................. 6
Component Function Check ....................................19
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................19
Component Function Check ....................................21
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................21
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER ..................................... 9
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER) ............................ 10
DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER ... 22
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 11
Component Function Check ....................................22
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................22
BCM ....................................................................11
DEF
M
N
List of ECU Reference ............................................ 11
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER ................................................................... 23
Component Function Check ....................................23
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................23
O
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 12
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK
SIGNAL ............................................................. 24
P
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM ............12
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 12
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 13
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........13
Work Flow ............................................................... 13
WITH AUTO A/C ........................................................24
WITH AUTO A/C : Component Function Check ......24
WITH AUTO A/C : Diagnosis Procedure .................24
WITH MANUAL A/C ...................................................25
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-1
2012 QUEST
WITH MANUAL A/C : Component Function Check
... 25
WITH MANUAL A/C : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 25
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 27
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT
OPERATE .......................................................... 27
Description .............................................................. 27
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 27
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER AND DOOR
MIRROR DEFOGGERS DO NOT OPERATE ... 28
Description .............................................................. 28
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 28
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT
OPERATE BUT BOTH DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGERS OPERATE ....................................... 29
Description .............................................................. 29
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 29
DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE ............................................................... 30
BOTH SIDES ............................................................. 30
BOTH SIDES : Description ..................................... 30
BOTH SIDES : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 30
DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 30
DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................... 30
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 30
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 30
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ........................... 30
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 30
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INDICATOR
DOES NOT ILLUMINATE .................................. 32
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 32
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 33
FILAMENT ......................................................... 33
Inspection and Repair ..........................................
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-2
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000007492583
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
C
D
E
F
G
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
I
J
K
DEF
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-3
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007492584
JMLIA2621ZZ
No.
Component
Function
• Detects rear window defogger switch signal then turns rear window defogger relay ON.
• Performs the timer control of rear window defogger and door mirror defogger*3.
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
1.
BCM
2.
Door mirror defogger*3
Refer to DEF-5, "Door mirror defogger".
3.
Rear window defogger relay
(built in fuse block J/B)
Operates the rear window defogger and door mirror defogger*3 with BCM control.
• The rear window defogger switch is installed.
• A/C auto amp.*1
4.
5.
• A/C amp.*2
(Rear window defogger
switch)
• Rear window defogger and door mirror defogger*3 are operated by turning the rear window defogger switch ON.
• The indicator lamp in the rear window defogger switch illuminates when the rear window
defogger is operating.
Refer to HAC-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Rear window defogger connector
(Rear window defogger)
Refer to DEF-5, "Rear window defogger".
*1: With auto A/C
*2: With manual A/C
*3: For models with door mirror defogger
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-4
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Rear window defogger
INFOID:0000000007850481
A
Heats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window
defogger relay to prevent the rear window from fogging up.
B
C
D
JMLIA2595GB
Door mirror defogger
INFOID:0000000007850482
E
Heats the heating wire with the power supply from the rear window
defogger relay to prevent the door mirror from fogging up.
F
G
H
JMLIA2596GB
I
J
K
DEF
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-5
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
System Description
INFOID:0000000007492585
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMLIA2164GB
*1: With auto A/C
*2: With manual A/C
OPERATION DESCRIPTION
• When BCM receives rear window defogger switch signal, BCM transmits rear window defogger ON signal to
rear window defogger relay (integrated in fuse block J/B) for approximately 15 minutes.
• When rear window defogger relay (integrated in fuse block J/B) turns ON, power supply is supplied to rear
window defogger and door mirror defogger (For models with door mirror defogger).
• When rear window defogger and door mirror defogger (For models with door mirror defogger) are operated,
rear window defogger feedback signal is transmitted to A/C auto amp.*1 or A/C amp.*2, and then indicator
lamp of rear window defogger switch is turned ON.
1
* : With auto A/C
*2: With manual A/C
TIMER FUNCTION
• BCM transmits rear window defogger ON signal to rear window defogger relay (integrated in fuse block J/B)
for approximately 15 minutes when rear window defogger switch is turned ON while ignition switch is ON.
• Timer is cancelled when rear window defogger switch is pressed again during timer operation. BCM stops
the output of rear window defogger ON signal. The same reaction also occurs during timer operation when
ignition switch is turned OFF.
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-6
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000007492586
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
DEF
M
N
O
JMLIA2151GB
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-7
2012 QUEST
P
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)
INFOID:0000000007848978
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Diagnosis mode
Function Description
Work Support
Changes the setting for each system function.
Self Diagnostic Result
Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.
CAN Diag Support Monitor
Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
Data Monitor
The BCM input/output signals are displayed.
Active Test
The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Ecu Identification
The BCM part number is displayed.
Configuration
• Read and save the vehicle specification.
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.
SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item
System
Sub system selection item
Diagnosis mode
Work Support
Data Monitor
Active Test
×
Door lock
DOOR LOCK
×
×
Rear window defogger
REAR DEFOGGER
×
×
Warning chime
BUZZER
×
×
Interior room lamp control system
INT LAMP
×
×
×
Exterior lamp
HEAD LAMP
×
×
×
Wiper and washer
WIPER
×
×
×
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps
FLASHER
×
×
×
Air conditioning control system
AIR CONDITONER
×
×*
• Intelligent Key system
• Engine start system
INTELLIGENT KEY
×
×
Combination switch
COMB SW
Body control system
BCM
×
NVIS
IMMU
×
×
×
Interior room lamp battery saver
BATTERY SAVER
×
×
×
Back door open
TRUNK
Vehicle security system
THEFT ALM
RAP system
RETAINED PWR
×
Signal buffer system
SIGNAL BUFFER
×
×
TPMS
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
NOTE:
*: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used.
FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)
The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on
CONSULT.
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-8
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
CONSULT screen item
Indication/Unit
Description
Vehicle Speed
km/h
Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Odo/Trip Meter
km
Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Vehicle Condition
SLEEP>LOCK
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)]
SLEEP>OFF
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)]
LOCK>ACC
While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC
ACC>ON
While turning power supply position from ACC to ON
RUN>ACC
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except
emergency stop operation)
CRANK>RUN
While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN
RUN>URGENT
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation)
ACC>OFF
While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF)
OFF>LOCK
OFF>ACC
IGN Counter
A
Power position status of
the moment a particular
DTC is detected*
C
D
E
F
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF
(LOCK)
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC
ON>CRANK
While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK
OFF>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK
Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)
OFF
Power supply position is OFF (OFF)
ACC
Power supply position is ACC
ON
Power supply position is ON
ENGINE RUN
Power supply position is RUN
CRANKING
Power supply position is CRANK
0 - 39
B
G
H
I
J
K
The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected
• The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
• The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition
whenever ignition switch OFF → ON.
• The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
NOTE:
DEF
M
*: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position.
• OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF
• ACC: Ignition switch ACC
N
• IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped
• RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running
• CRANK: At engine cranking
Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P
position, and any of the following conditions are met.
O
• Closing door
P
• Opening door
• Door is locked using door request switch
• Door is locked using Intelligent Key
The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-9
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER : CONSULT Function (BCM - REAR DEFOGGER)
INFOID:0000000007492588
Data monitor
Monitor Item
Description
REAR DEF SW
Displays “Press (ON)/other (OFF)” status determined with the rear window defogger switch.
PUSH SW
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of push switch.
ACTIVE TEST
Test Item
REAR DEFOGGER
Revision: 2011 September
Description
Rear window defogger operates when ON on CONSULT screen is touched.
DEF-10
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
A
BCM
List of ECU Reference
INFOID:0000000007492591
ECU
Reference
C
BCS-36, "Reference Value"
BCM
B
BCS-58, "Fail-safe"
BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
D
BCS-59, "DTC Index"
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
DEF
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-11
2012 QUEST
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007492592
JCLWA5186GB
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-12
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000007492593
B
DETAILED FLOW
1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM
C
Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings the vehicle in.
D
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FOR DTC
E
Perform self diagnosis with CONSULT
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> BCM: Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index".
NO
>> GO TO 3.
F
3.REPRODUCE THE MALFUNCTION INFORMATION
G
Check the malfunction on the vehicle that the customer describes.
Inspect the relation of the symptoms and the condition when the symptoms occur.
H
>> GO TO 4.
4.IDENTIFY THE MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS”
Use “Symptom diagnosis” from the symptom inspection result in step 3. Then identify where to start performing the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.
I
J
>> GO TO 5.
5.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING PARTS WITH “COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS”
K
Perform the diagnosis with “Component diagnosis” of the applicable system.
>> GO TO 6.
DEF
6.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the specified malfunctioning parts.
M
>> GO TO 7.
7.FINAL CHECK
Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,
referring to the symptom inspection result in step 3.
Are all malfunctions corrected?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 4.
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-13
2012 QUEST
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
WITH AUTO A/C
WITH AUTO A/C : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007849079
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION
1.
2.
Perform (“REAR DEF SW”) in BCM - REAR DEFOGGER “DATA MONITOR” mode by using CONSULT.
Operate rear window defogger switch and check Monitor Status on CONSULT screen.
Monitor Item
Condition
REAR DEF SW
Rear window defogger switch
Monitor Status
Pressed
On
Released
Off
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Rear window defogger switch function is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DEF-14, "WITH AUTO A/C : Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH AUTO A/C : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007849074
1.CHECK AUTO A/C
Check the operating condition of auto A/C
Does auto A/C operate normally?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform auto A/C diagnosis. Refer to HAC-64, "Work Flow".
2.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/C auto amp. connector.
Check voltage between A/C auto amp. harness connector and ground by oscilloscope.
(+)
A/C auto amp.
Voltage
(Approx.)
(-)
Connector
Terminal
M50
27
Ground
JPMIA0012GB
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and A/C auto amp. harness connector.
BCM
3.
A/C auto amp.
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M121
15
M50
27
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-14
2012 QUEST
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M121
15
Ground
Continuity
A
Not existed
B
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
C
4.REPLACE A/C AUTO AMP.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Replace A/C auto amp.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Operate rear window defogger switch and check the operating condition.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
D
E
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
F
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
>> INSPECTION END
G
WITH MANUAL A/C
WITH MANUAL A/C : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007849080
H
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH FUNCTION
1.
2.
Perform (“REAR DEF SW”) in BCM - REAR DEFOGGER “DATA MONITOR” mode by using CONSULT.
Operate rear window defogger switch and check Monitor Status on CONSULT screen.
Monitor Item
REAR DEF SW
Condition
Rear window defogger switch
Monitor Status
Pressed
On
Released
Off
J
K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Rear window defogger switch function is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DEF-15, "WITH MANUAL A/C : Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH MANUAL A/C : Diagnosis Procedure
I
DEF
INFOID:0000000007849081
1.CHECK MANUAL A/C
M
Check the operating condition of manual A/C
Does manual A/C operate normally?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Perform manual A/C diagnosis. Refer to HAC-175, "Work Flow".
N
2.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
O
1.
2.
3.
P
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect A/C amp. connector.
Check voltage between A/C amp. harness connector and ground by oscilloscope.
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-15
2012 QUEST
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
(+)
A/C amp.
Voltage
(Approx.)
(-)
Connector
Terminal
M49
27
Ground
JPMIA0012GB
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and A/C amp. harness connector.
BCM
3.
A/C amp.
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M121
15
M49
27
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M121
15
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.REPLACE A/C AMP.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Replace A/C amp.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Operate rear window defogger switch and check the operating condition.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-16
2012 QUEST
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007849069
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
B
1. Perform BCM Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT.
2. Touch “ON”.
3. Check that the rear window heating wire is getting warmer.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Rear window defogger relay power supply circuit function is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DEF-17, "Diagnosis Procedure".
C
D
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007849070
1.CHECK FUSE
E
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check 10A fuse [No.3, located in fuse block (J/B)].
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
F
G
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CIRCUIT 1
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
H
(+)
BCM
(–)
Connector
Terminal
M121
1
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Rear window defogger switch
Ground
ON
0 − 0.6
OFF
9 − 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
Fixed at 0 V>>GO TO 3.
Fixed at 9 − 16 V >>Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
DEF
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and fuse block (J/B).
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and fuse block (J/B) harness connector.
BCM
Fuse block (J/B)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M121
1
M2
4B
M
Continuity
N
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
O
4.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY 1
P
Check rear window defogger relay.
Refer to DEF-18, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace rear window defogger relay.
5.CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B)
Revision: 2011 September
J
K
3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CIRCUIT 2
1.
2.
3.
I
DEF-17
2012 QUEST
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Install the rear window defogger relay.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector (fuse block side) and ground.
(+)
(–)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ground
Battery voltage
Fuse block (J/B)
Connector
Terminal
M2
4B
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Replace fuse block (J/B).
6.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY 2
Check rear window defogger relay.
Refer to DEF-18, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Replace rear window defogger relay.
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Check intermittent incident.
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007849071
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear window defogger relay.
Check rear window defogger relay.
Rear window
defogger relay
Condition
Continuity
12 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2
Existed
Terminal
3
5
No current supply
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace rear window defogger relay.
Revision: 2011 September
SEF497Y
DEF-18
2012 QUEST
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492607
B
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
1. Perform Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT.
2. Touch “ON”.
3. Check that the rear window heating wire is getting warmer.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Rear window defogger is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DEF-19, "Diagnosis Procedure".
C
D
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492608
E
1.CHECK FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check 20A fuse [No.15, located in fuse block (J/B)].
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
F
G
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
H
Disconnect rear window defogger harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear window defogger connector and ground.
I
(+)
Rear window defogger
Connector
Terminal
D184
1
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Rear window defogger
switch
Ground
ON
Battery voltage
OFF
0
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between rear window defogger harness connector and ground.
Rear window defogger
Connector
Terminal
D185
2
Ground
M
Continuity
O
4.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CIRCUIT
P
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect fuse block (J/B) harness connector.
Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and rear window defogger harness connector.
Revision: 2011 September
N
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector between rear window defogger and ground.
1.
2.
3.
K
DEF
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
J
DEF-19
2012 QUEST
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Fuse block (J/B)
Rear window defogger
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
B6
10G
D184
1
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector between fuse block (J/B) and rear window defogger.
5.CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B)
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector (fuse block side) and ground.
(+)
Fuse block (J/B)
(-)
Connector
Terminal
B6
10G
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Rear window defogger
switch
ON
Battery voltage
OFF
0
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Replace fuse block (J/B).
6.CHECK FILAMENT
Check the filament for damage or blown.
Refer to DEF-33, "Inspection and Repair".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair filament.
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Check intermittent incident.
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-20
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492610
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
B
1. Perform Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT.
2. Touch “ON”.
3. Check that both side door mirror glasses are getting warmer.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door mirror defoggers are OK.
NO
>> Refer to DEF-21, "Diagnosis Procedure".
C
D
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492611
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER CIRCUIT
E
1.
2.
3.
4.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror (both sides) connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between door mirror (driver side) connector and ground.
G
(+)
Door mirror (driver side)
Connector
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Terminal
D43
7
H
Ground
Rear window defogger
switch
ON
Battery voltage
OFF
0
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
I
2.CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B)
J
1.
2.
3.
4.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect fuse block (J/B) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector (fuse block side) and ground.
DEF
(+)
Fuse block (J/B)
Connector
M3
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Terminal
10C
Ground
Rear window defogger
switch
ON
Battery voltage
OFF
0
M
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Repair or replace harness or connector between fuse block (J/B) and door mirror (driver side).
NO
>> Replace fuse block (J/B).
N
3.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
O
Check intermittent incident.
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Is the inspection result normal?
>> INSPECTION END
P
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-21
2012 QUEST
DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492613
1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
1. Perform Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT.
2. Touch “ON”.
3. Check that the driver side door mirror glass is getting warmer.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Driver side door mirror defogger is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DEF-22, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492614
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror (driver side) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between door mirror (driver side) harness connector and ground.
(+)
Door mirror (driver side)
Connector
Terminal
D43
7
(-)
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Rear window defogger
switch
ON
Battery voltage
OFF
0
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector between fuse block (J/B) and door mirror (driver side).
2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between door mirror (driver side) harness connector and ground.
Door mirror (driver side)
Connector
Terminal
D43
19
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace glass mirror (driver side).
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector between door mirror (driver side) and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-22
2012 QUEST
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492617
1.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
B
1. Perform Active Test (“REAR DEFOGGER”) with CONSULT.
2. Touch “ON”.
3. Check that the passenger side door mirror glass is getting warmer.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Passenger side door mirror defogger is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DEF-23, "Diagnosis Procedure".
C
D
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492618
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
E
1.
2.
3.
4.
F
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect door mirror (passenger side) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between door mirror (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
G
(+)
Door mirror (Passenger side)
Connector
(-)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Terminal
D3
H
7
Ground
Rear window defogger
switch
ON
Battery voltage
OFF
0
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector between fuse block (J/B) and door mirror (passenger
side).
I
J
2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between door mirror (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
Door mirror (passenger side)
Connector
Terminal
D3
19
Ground
K
Continuity
DEF
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace glass mirror (passenger side).
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector between door mirror (passenger side) and ground.
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-23
2012 QUEST
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL
WITH AUTO A/C
WITH AUTO A/C : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007848994
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL
Check that the indicator lamp of rear window defogger switch is illuminated when turning the rear window
defogger switch ON.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Rear window defogger feedback signal is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DEF-24, "WITH AUTO A/C : Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH AUTO A/C : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007848995
1.CHECK FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check 10A fuse [No.13, located in fuse block (J/B)]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect A/C auto amp. connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/C auto amp. harness connector and ground.
(+)
A/C auto amp.
(-)
Connector
Terminal
M50
7
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Rear window defogger
switch
ON
Battery voltage
OFF
0
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/C auto amp.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.
Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and A/C auto amp. harness connector.
Fuse block (J/B)
4.
A/C auto amp.
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M3
9C
M50
7
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) and ground.
Fuse block (J/B)
Connector
Terminal
M3
9C
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B)
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-24
2012 QUEST
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector (fuse block side) and ground.
A
(+)
Fuse block (J/B)
(-)
Connector
Terminal
M3
9C
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Rear window defogger
switch
Ground
ON
Battery voltage
OFF
0
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace fuse block (J/B).
B
C
D
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
E
Check intermittent incident.
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
F
>> INSPECTION END
WITH MANUAL A/C
WITH MANUAL A/C : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007849066
G
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL
Check that the indicator lamp of rear window defogger switch is illuminated when turning the rear window
defogger switch ON.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Rear window defogger feedback signal is OK.
NO
>> Refer to DEF-25, "WITH MANUAL A/C : Diagnosis Procedure".
WITH MANUAL A/C : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007849067
H
I
J
1.CHECK FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check 10A fuse [No.13, located in fuse block (J/B)]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
K
DEF
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
M
Disconnect A/C amp. connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between A/C amp. harness connector and ground.
N
(+)
A/C amp.
(-)
Connector
Terminal
M49
7
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Rear window defogger
switch
ON
Battery voltage
OFF
0
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace A/C amp.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect fuse block (J/B) connector.
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-25
2012 QUEST
O
P
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3. Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) harness connector and A/C amp. harness connector.
Fuse block (J/B)
4.
A/C amp.
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M3
9C
M49
7
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between fuse block (J/B) and ground.
Fuse block (J/B)
Connector
Terminal
M3
9C
Continuity
Ground
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK FUSE BLOCK (J/B)
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between fuse block (J/B) connector (fuse block side) and ground.
(+)
Fuse block (J/B)
(-)
Connector
Terminal
M3
9C
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Rear window defogger
switch
ON
Battery voltage
OFF
0
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace fuse block (J/B).
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Check intermittent incident.
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-26
2012 QUEST
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
A
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE
Description
INFOID:0000000007849005
B
INFOID:0000000007492620
C
Check rear window defogger switch.
Refer to DEF-14, "WITH AUTO A/C : Component Function Check" (with auto A/C) or DEF-15, "WITH MANUAL A/C : Component Function Check" (with manual A/C).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
D
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
F
For models without door mirror defogger.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
Check rear window defogger relay.
Refer to DEF-17, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
E
G
H
3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Check rear window defogger.
Refer to DEF-19, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
I
J
4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
K
DEF
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-27
2012 QUEST
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER AND DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGERS DO NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER AND DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGERS DO NOT
OPERATE
Description
INFOID:0000000007849006
For models with door mirror defogger.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492621
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH
Check rear window defogger switch.
Refer to DEF-14, "WITH AUTO A/C : Component Function Check" (with auto A/C) or DEF-15, "WITH MANUAL A/C : Component Function Check" (with manual A/C).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY
Check rear window defogger relay.
Refer to DEF-17, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Check rear window defogger.
Refer to DEF-19, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-28
2012 QUEST
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE BUT BOTH DOOR MIRROR
DEFOGGERS OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE BUT BOTH DOOR
MIRROR DEFOGGERS OPERATE
Description
A
INFOID:0000000007849007
B
For models with door mirror defogger.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492622
C
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
Check rear window defogger.
Refer to DEF-19, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
D
E
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
F
Confirm the operation again
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
G
H
I
J
K
DEF
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-29
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE
BOTH SIDES
BOTH SIDES : Description
INFOID:0000000007492623
Driver side and passenger side door mirror defoggers do not operate.
BOTH SIDES : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492624
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
Check door mirror defogger.
Refer to DEF-21, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Description
INFOID:0000000007492625
Driver side door mirror defogger does not operate.
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492626
1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER
Check driver side door mirror defogger.
Refer to DEF-22, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Description
INFOID:0000000007492627
Passenger side door mirror defogger does not operate.
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492628
1.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER.
Check passenger side door mirror defogger.
Refer to DEF-23, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-30
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR DEFOGGER DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Confirm the operation again.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
DEF
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-31
2012 QUEST
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007849097
1.CHECK REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER FEEDBACK SIGNAL
Check rear window defogger feedback signal.
Refer to DEF-24, "WITH AUTO A/C : Component Function Check" (With auto A/C) or DEF-25, "WITH MANUAL A/C : Component Function Check" (With manual A/C).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-32
2012 QUEST
FILAMENT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
FILAMENT
Inspection and Repair
INFOID:0000000007492630
B
INSPECTION
1.
When measuring voltage, wrap tin foil around the top of the negative probe. Then press the foil against the wire with your finger.
C
D
E
SEL122R
2.
Attach probe circuit tester (in Volt range) to middle portion of
each filament.
F
G
H
I
SEL263
J
3.
4.
If a filament is burned out, circuit tester registers 0 or battery
voltage.
To locate burned out point, move probe to left and right along filament. Test needle will swing abruptly when probe passes the
point.
K
DEF
M
N
O
P
SEL265
REPAIR
REPAIR EQUIPMENT
• Conductive silver composition (Dupont No. 4817 or equivalent)
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-33
2012 QUEST
FILAMENT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Ruler 30 cm (11.8 in) long
• Drawing pen
• Heat gun
• Alcohol
• Cloth
REPAIRING PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Wipe broken heat wire and its surrounding area clean with a
cloth dampened in alcohol.
Apply a small amount of conductive silver composition to tip of
drawing pen.
Shake silver composition container before use.
Place ruler on glass along broken line. Deposit conductive silver
composition on break with drawing pen. Slightly overlap existing
heat wire on both sides [preferably 5 mm (0.20 in)] of the break.
PIIA0215E
4.
After repair has been completed, check repaired wire for continuity. This check should be conducted 10 minutes after silver
composition is deposited.
Do not touch repaired area while test is being conducted.
SEL012D
5.
Apply a constant stream of hot air directly to the repaired area
for approximately 20 minutes with a heat gun. A minimum distance of 3 cm (1.2 in) should be kept between repaired area and
hot air outlet.
If a heat gun is not available, let the repaired area dry for 24
hours.
SEL013D
Revision: 2011 September
DEF-34
2012 QUEST
ENGINE
SECTION
EX
EXHAUST SYSTEM
A
EX
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2
EXHAUST SYSTEM ........................................... 4
F
Inspection ................................................................. 4
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Removal and Installation ........................................... 2
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 5
PREPARATION ............................................ 3
EXHAUST SYSTEM ........................................... 5
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Exploded View .......................................................... 5
Removal and Installation .......................................... 6
Inspection ................................................................. 6
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 4
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
EX-1
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007493650
CAUTION:
• Be sure to use genuine exhaust system parts or equivalents which are specially designed for heat
resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape.
• Perform the operation with the exhaust system fully cooled down because the system will be hot
just after engine stops.
• Be careful not to cut your hand on the heat insulator edge.
Revision: 2011 September
EX-2
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
A
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000007493651
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening nuts and bolts
EX
C
D
E
PBIC0190E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
EX-3
2012 QUEST
EXHAUST SYSTEM
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007493652
Check exhaust pipes, muffler, and mounting for improper attachment, leakage, cracks, damage or deterioration.
• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts.
SMA211A
Revision: 2011 September
EX-4
2012 QUEST
EXHAUST SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
EXHAUST SYSTEM
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007493653
EX
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
JPBIA5303GB
1.
Gasket
2.
Gasket
3.
Mounting rubber
4.
Exhaust front tube
5.
Seal bearing
6.
Mounting rubber
7.
Spring
8.
Center muffler
9.
Mounting rubber
10. Gasket
11. Mounting rubber
13. Rear muffler
14. Mounting rubber
A.
B.
To exhaust manifold (bank2)
O
12. Dynamic damper
P
To exhaust manifold (bank1)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Revision: 2011 September
EX-5
2012 QUEST
EXHAUST SYSTEM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007493654
REMOVAL
Disconnect each joint and mounting using power tool.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Always replace exhaust tube gaskets with new ones when reassembling.
• If heat insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up on the heat
insulator, remove them.
• When installing heat insulator avoid large gaps or interference between heat insulator and each
exhaust pipe.
• Remove deposits from the sealing surface of each connection. Connect them securely to avoid
gases leakage.
• Temporarily tighten mounting nuts and bolts. Check each part for unusual interference, and then
tighten them to the specified torque.
• When installing each mounting rubber, avoid twisting or unusual extension in up/down and right/left
directions.
Exhaust Front Tube to Center Muffler
1.
Securely insert seal bearing (2) into exhaust front tube (1) side
in the direction shown in the figure.
3
2.
3.
: Spring
4
: Bolt
5
: Center muffler
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage seal bearing surface when installing.
With spring, tighten bolt.
CAUTION:
• Ensure springs are seated correctly on the flange and not sitting on (A).
• Be careful that bolt does not interfere with mounting hole of center muffler ( ).
After installing, check that bolt does not interfere with mounting hole of center muffler.
Inspection
JPBIA2174ZZ
INFOID:0000000007493655
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check clearance between tail tube and rear bumper is even.
• With engine running, check exhaust tube joints for gas leakage and unusual noises.
• Check to ensure that mounting brackets and mounting rubbers are installed properly and free from undue
stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise and vibration.
Revision: 2011 September
EX-6
2012 QUEST
TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE
SECTION
FAX
FRONT AXLE
A
B
C
FAX
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT .......................... 11
F
Exploded View .........................................................11
WHEEL SIDE .............................................................12
WHEEL SIDE : Removal and Installation ................12
G
H
PREPARATION ............................................ 3
TRANSAXLE SIDE ....................................................15
TRANSAXLE SIDE : Removal and Installation .......15
Inspection ................................................................15
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ..................................... 16
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Precautions for Drive Shaft ....................................... 2
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 5
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 5
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 5
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 6
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE .............. 6
Inspection .................................................................. 6
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT ........................................ 7
Inspection .................................................................. 7
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 8
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE .............. 8
Exploded View .......................................................... 8
Removal and Installation ........................................... 8
Inspection ................................................................ 10
Revision: 2011 September
Exploded View .........................................................16
I
LEFT SIDE .................................................................17
LEFT SIDE : Removal and Installation ....................17
J
RIGHT SIDE ...............................................................18
RIGHT SIDE : Removal and Installation ..................18
WHEEL SIDE .............................................................20
WHEEL SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly ...........21
TRANSAXLE SIDE ....................................................23
TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly
(Left Side) ................................................................23
TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly
(Right Side) ..............................................................25
Inspection ................................................................29
K
L
M
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ............................................................ 30
N
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 30
O
Wheel Bearing .........................................................30
Drive Shaft ...............................................................30
FAX-1
2012 QUEST
P
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000007495702
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precautions for Drive Shaft
INFOID:0000000007495703
•
-
Observe the following precautions when disassembling and assembling drive shaft.
Never disassemble joint sub-assembly because it is non-overhaul parts.
Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible.
Clean the parts, before disassembling and assembling.
Prevent the entry of foreign objects during disassembly of the service location.
Reassemble disassembled parts carefully in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a clean cover must be
placed over parts.
- Use paper waste. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of lint adhering to parts.
- Clean disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) with kerosene which shall be removed by blowing with
air or wiping with paper waste.
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-2
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000007495704
B
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
C
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
Removing and Installing wheel hub lock nut.
KV40104000
(
—
)
Hub lock nut wrench
a: 85 mm (3.35 in)
b: 65 mm (2.56 in)
FAX
E
F
ZZA0802D
Installing boot band
KV40107300
(
—
)
Boot band crimping tool
G
H
ZZA1229D
Removing drive shaft
KV40107500
(
—
)
Drive shaft attachment
I
J
ZZA1230D
K
Installing drive shaft
KV38107900
(
—
)
Protector
a: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia.
L
M
PDIA1183J
Installing support bearing
ST35271000
(J-26091)
Drift
a: 72 mm (2.83 in) dia.
b: 63 mm (2.48 in) dia.
N
O
ZZA0837D
Removing support bearing
ST17130000
( — )
Drift
a: 32 mm (1.26 in) dia.
b: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
P
ZZA0836D
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-3
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Commercial Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007495705
Tool name
Description
Drive shaft puller
Removing drive shaft joint sub assembly
JPDIG0152ZZ
Sliding hammer
Removing drive shaft
ZZA0023D
Ball joint remover
Removing hub bolt
NT146
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-4
2012 QUEST
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
A
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
INFOID:0000000007495706
B
Symptom
FRONT
AXLE
NVH in ST section
NVH in BR section
BRAKE
STEERING
Refer to DRIVE SHAFT in this chart
NVH in WT section
ROAD WHEEL
NVH in WT section
Refer to FRONT AXLE in this chart
NVH in FAX and FSU sections
FAX-6, "Inspection"
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
H
I
Noise
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shake
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Vibration
×
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Judder
×
×
×
×
×
×
Poor quality ride or handling
×
×
×
×
×
E
G
DRIVE SHAFT
—
FAX-8, "Exploded View"
—
×
TIRE
×
FRONT AXLE
Shake
FAX
F
FRONT AXLE AND FRONT SUSPENSION
×
Parts interference
×
C
Wheel bearing damage
DRIVE
SHAFT
Improper installation, looseness
Joint sliding resistance
Noise
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
Imbalance
Excessive joint angle
Reference
FAX-29, "Inspection"
—
Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
J
K
L
×
×: Applicable
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-5
2012 QUEST
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495707
COMPONENT PART
Check that the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component conditions
(wear, damage) are normal.
WHEEL HUB ASSEMBLY (BEARING-INTEGRATED TYPE)
Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary.
• Move wheel hub assembly in the axial direction by hand. Check there is no looseness of wheel bearing.
Axial end play
: Refer to FAX-30, "Wheel Bearing".
• Rotate wheel hub assembly and check there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there is any
of irregular conditions, replace wheel hub assembly.
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-6
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
A
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495708
Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary.
• Check drive shaft mounting point and joint for looseness and other damage.
CAUTION:
Replace entire drive shaft assembly when noise or vibration occurs from drive shaft.
• Check boot for cracks and other damage.
B
C
FAX
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-7
2012 QUEST
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495709
JPDIF0315GB
1.
Stopper cap
2.
Stopper bolt
3.
Steering knuckle
4.
Splash guard
5.
Hub bolt
6.
Wheel hub assembly (Bearing-integrated type)
7.
Disc rotor
8.
Wheel hub lock nut
9.
Cotter pin
A.
Tightening must be done following the installation procedure. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation".
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495710
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
Remove wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
Remove lock plate from strut assembly. Refer to BR-20, "FRONT : Exploded View".
Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly not to interfere with work. Refer to BR-39, "BRAKE
CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
Remove disc rotor.
CAUTION:
• Put matching marks (A) on the wheel hub assembly and
the disc rotor before removing the disc rotor.
• Never drop disc rotor.
JPDIG0066ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-8
2012 QUEST
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
6.
Remove cotter pin, and then loosen wheel hub lock nut, using a
hub lock nut wrench (A) [SST: KV40104000 ( — )].
A
B
C
JSDIA2708ZZ
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the
wood to disengage wheel hub assembly from drive shaft.
NOTE:
Use suitable puller, if wheel hub assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above procedure.
Remove wheel hub lock nut.
Remove strut assembly from steering knuckle. Refer to FSU-8,
"Removal and Installation".
Remove drive shaft from wheel hub assembly. Hang drive shaft
not to interfere with work.
JPDIG0070ZZ
CAUTION:
• Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be
careful not to overextend slide joint.
• Never allow drive shaft to hang down without support for joint sub-assembly, shaft and the other
parts.
Remove wheel hub assembly and splash guard from steering knuckle.
Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle. Refer to ST-21, "Removal and Installation".
Separate steering knuckle from transverse link.
Remove stopper cap and stopper bolt from steering knuckle.
Remove hub bolts (1) from wheel hub assembly, using the ball
joint remover (A) (commercial service tool).
CAUTION:
• Remove hub bolt only when necessary.
• Never hammer the hub bolt to avoid impact to the wheel
hub assembly.
• Pull out the hub bolt in a direction perpendicular to the
wheel hub assembly.
Perform inspection after removal. Refer to FAX-10, "Inspection".
FAX
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
JPDIF0299ZZ
INSTALLATION
N
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of the removal.
• Place a washer (A) as shown in the figure to install the hub bolts
(1) by using the tightening force of the nut (B).
CAUTION:
• Check that there is no clearance between wheel hub assembly, and hub bolt.
• Never reuse hub bolt.
• Never reuse steering knuckle and transverse link fixing nut.
• Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub
assembly.
CAUTION:
Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface.
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-9
O
P
JPDIF0300ZZ
2012 QUEST
FRONT WHEEL HUB AND KNUCKLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Clean the matching surface of drive shaft, wheel hub assembly.
And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface (A)
of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft.
CAUTION:
Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly
of drive shaft.
Amount paste
: 1.0 – 3.0 g (0.04 – 0.10 oz)
• Use the following torque range for tightening the wheel hub lock
nut.
JPDIG0122ZZ
: 206 – 211 N·m (21.1 – 21.5 kg-m, 152 – 155 ft-lb)
•
•
•
•
CAUTION:
• Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel
hub lock nut.
• Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool.
• Never reuse wheel hub lock nut.
NOTE:
Wheel hub lock nut tightening torque does not over torque for avoiding axle noise, and does not less than
torque for avoiding looseness.
Align the matching marks that have been made during removal when reusing the disc rotor.
When installing a cotter pin, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse cotter pin.
• Bend cotter pin at the root sufficiently to prevent any looseness.
Perform the final tightening of each of parts under unladen conditions, which were removed when removing
suspension component.
Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-10, "Inspection".
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495711
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary.
• Check components for deformation, cracks, and other damage.
• Check ball joint of transverse link and steering outer socket.
- Transverse link: Refer to FSU-12, "Inspection".
- Steering outer socket: Refer to ST-29, "Inspection".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR :
Exploded View".
Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection".
Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure".
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-10
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495712
LEFT SIDE
B
C
FAX
E
F
G
JPDIF0242ZZ
1.
Circular clip
2.
Dust shield
3.
Housing assembly
4.
Boot band
5.
Boot
6.
Damper band
Dynamic damper
8.
Circular clip
9.
Joint sub-assembly
7.
H
I
: Wheel side
: Always replace after every disassembly.
J
1: Fill NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent.
2: Apply paste [service parts (440037S000)].
RIGHT SIDE
K
L
M
N
O
P
JSDIA2706GB
1.
Joint sub-assembly
2.
Circular clip
3.
Boot band
4.
Boot
5.
Housing assembly
6.
Dust shield
7.
Snap ring
8.
Support bearing
9.
Bearing housing
10. Support bearing bracket
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-11
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
: Wheel side
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
1: Fill NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent.
2: Apply paste [service parts (440037S000)].
WHEEL SIDE
WHEEL SIDE : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495713
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
Remove wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
Remove lock plate from strut assembly. Refer to BR-20, "FRONT : Exploded View".
Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly not to interfere with work. Refer to BR-39, "BRAKE
CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
5. Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove cotter pin, and then loosen wheel hub lock nut. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation".
7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the
wood to disengage wheel hub assembly from drive shaft.
NOTE:
Use suitable puller, if wheel hub assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above procedure.
8. Remove wheel hub lock nut. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and
Installation".
9. Remove strut assembly from steering knuckle. Refer to FSU-8,
"Removal and Installation".
10. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub assembly.
JPDIG0070ZZ
CAUTION:
• Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be
careful not to overextend slide joint.
• Never allow drive shaft to hang down without support for joint sub-assembly, shaft and the other
parts.
11. Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from joint sub-assembly.
12. Screw drive shaft puller (A) (commercial service tool) into joint
sub-assembly screw part to a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more.
Support drive shaft with one hand and pull out joint sub-assembly from housing assembly.
CAUTION:
• Align drive shaft puller and drive shaft and remove them
by pulling firmly and uniformly.
• If joint sub-assembly cannot be pulled out, try after
removing drive shaft from vehicle.
JPDIF0258ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-12
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
13. Remove circular clip (1) from shaft of housing assembly.
14. Remove boot from shaft.
A
B
C
JPDIF0007ZZ
FAX
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Clean the old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper waste.
Fill serration slot joint sub-assembly (1) with NISSAN genuine
grease or equivalent until the serration slot and ball groove
become full to the brim.
CAUTION:
After applying grease, use a paper waste to wipe off old
grease that has oozed out.
Install boot and boot bands to shaft of housing assembly.
CAUTION:
• Wrap serration on shaft with tape to protect the boot from
damage.
• Never reuse boot and boot band.
Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft.
Position the circular clip (1) on groove at the shaft edge.
CAUTION:
Never reuse circular clip.
NOTE:
Drive joint inserter is recommended when installing circular clip.
Align both center axles of the shaft edge and joint sub-assembly.
Then assemble shaft with joint sub-assembly holding circular
clip.
E
F
G
JPDIF0008ZZ
H
I
J
K
JPDIF0007ZZ
7.
8.
L
Install joint sub-assembly (1) to shaft using plastic hammer.
CAUTION:
• Check circular clip is properly positioned on groove of the
joint sub-assembly.
• Confirm that joint sub-assembly is correctly engaged
while rotating drive shaft.
Apply the specified amount of grease into the boot inside from
large diameter side of boot.
Grease amount
M
N
: Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft".
O
JPDIF0011ZZ
P
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-13
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
9. Install the boot securely into grooves (indicated by “*” marks)
shown in the figure.
L
: Boot installation length
CAUTION:
If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (indicated
by “*” marks) on the shaft or joint sub-assembly, boot may
be removed. Remove all grease from the boot mounting
surface.
10. To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installation length to the specified value shown below by inserting the
suitable tool into inside of the boot from the large diameter side
of the boot and discharging the inside air.
Boot installation length
JPDIF0222ZZ
: Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft".
CAUTION:
• If the boot installation length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage of the boot.
• Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with a tip of tool.
11. Secure the large and small ends of the boot with boot bands
using the boot band crimping tool (A) [SST: KV40107300 ( —
)].
CAUTION:
• Never reuse boot band.
JPDIF0012ZZ
• Secure boot band so that dimension (A) meets the specification as shown in the figure.
A
: 7.0 mm (0.276 in) or less.
12. Check that displacement does not occur when boot is rotated
with the joint sub-assembly and shaft of housing assembly fixed.
CAUTION:
• Reinstall them using boot bands when boot installation
positions become incorrect.
• Never reuse boot band.
13. Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel
hub assembly.
CAUTION:
Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface.
14. Clean the matching surface of drive shaft, wheel hub assembly.
And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface
(A) of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft.
CAUTION:
Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft.
Amount paste
JPDIF0268ZZ
: 1.0 – 3.0 g (0.04 – 0.10 oz)
15. Insert drive shaft to wheel hub assembly, and then temporarily
tighten wheel hub lock nut.
CAUTION:
Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool.
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-14
JPDIG0122ZZ
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT BOOT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
16. Install strut assembly to steering knuckle. Refer to FSU-8, "Exploded View".
17. Install disc rotor. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation".
18. Install caliper assembly to steering knuckle. Refer to BR-39, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal
and Installation".
19. Install lock plate to strut assembly. Refer to BR-20, "FRONT : Exploded View".
20. Install wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
21. Use the following torque range for tightening the wheel hub lock nut.
A
B
C
: 206 – 211 N·m (21.1 – 21.5 kg-m, 152 – 155 ft-lb)
CAUTION:
FAX
• Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel
hub lock nut.
• Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool.
E
• Never reuse wheel hub lock nut.
NOTE:
Wheel hub lock nut tightening torque does not over torque for avoiding axle noise, and does not less than
torque for avoiding looseness.
F
22. When installing a cotter pin, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse cotter pin.
G
• Bend cotter pin at the root sufficiently to prevent any looseness.
23. Install tires. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
24. Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-15, "Inspection".
H
TRANSAXLE SIDE
TRANSAXLE SIDE : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495714
Remove boot after drive shaft is removed from the vehicle.
• For drive shaft removal and installation, follow the instructions bellow.
- Left side: Refer to FAX-17, "LEFT SIDE : Removal and Installation".
- Right side: Refer to FAX-18, "RIGHT SIDE : Removal and Installation".
• For drive shaft disassembly and assembly, follow the instructions bellow.
- Left side: Refer to FAX-23, "TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side)".
- Right side: Refer to FAX-25, "TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side)".
Inspection
I
J
K
INFOID:0000000007495715
L
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR :
Exploded View".
Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection".
Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure".
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-15
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495716
LEFT SIDE
JPDIF0242ZZ
1.
Circular clip
2.
Dust shield
3.
Housing assembly
4.
Boot band
5.
Boot
6.
Damper band
7.
Dynamic damper
8.
Circular clip
9.
Joint sub-assembly
: Wheel side
: Always replace after every disassembly.
1: Fill NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent.
2: Apply paste [service parts (440037S000)].
RIGHT SIDE
JSDIA2706GB
1.
Joint sub-assembly
2.
Circular clip
3.
Boot band
4.
Boot
5.
Housing assembly
6.
Dust shield
7.
Snap ring
8.
Support bearing
9.
Bearing housing
10. Support bearing bracket
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-16
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
: Wheel side
A
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
B
1: Fill NISSAN Genuine grease or equivalent.
2: Apply paste [service parts (440037S000)].
LEFT SIDE
C
LEFT SIDE : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495717
FAX
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
Remove wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
Remove lock plate from strut assembly. Refer to BR-20, "FRONT : Exploded View".
Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly not to interfere with work. Refer to BR-39, "BRAKE
CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
5. Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove cotter pin, and then loosen wheel hub lock nut. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation".
7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the
wood to disengage wheel hub assembly from drive shaft.
NOTE:
Use suitable puller, if wheel hub assembly and drive shaft cannot be separated even after performing the above procedure.
8. Remove wheel hub lock nut. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and
Installation".
9. Remove strut assembly from steering knuckle. Refer to FSU-8,
"Removal and Installation".
10. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub assembly.
JPDIG0070ZZ
CAUTION:
• Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be
careful not to overextend slide joint.
• Never allow drive shaft to hang down without support for joint sub-assembly, shaft and the other
parts.
11. Use the drive shaft attachment (A) [SST: KV40107500 ( — )]
and a sliding hammer (B) (commercial service tool) while inserting tip of the drive shaft attachment between shaft and transaxle
assembly, and then remove drive shaft from transaxle assembly.
CAUTION:
• Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when
removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to overextend
slide joint.
• Confirm that the circular clip is attached to the drive shaft.
12. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection".
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
JPDIF0004ZZ
INSTALLATION
P
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
Transaxle Side
• Always replace transaxle side oil seal with new one when installing drive shaft. Refer to TM-153, "Removal
and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-17
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Place the protector (A) [SST: KV38107900 ( — )] onto transaxle
assembly to prevent damage to the oil seal while inserting drive
shaft. Slide drive shaft sliding joint and tap with a hammer to install
securely.
CAUTION:
Check that circular clip is completely engaged.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection".
JPDIF0023ZZ
Wheel Hub Side
• Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub assembly.
CAUTION:
Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface.
• Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub assembly.
And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface (A)
of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft.
CAUTION:
Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly
of drive shaft.
Amount paste
: 1.0 – 3.0 g (0.04 – 0.10 oz)
• Use the following torque range for tightening the wheel hub lock
nut.
JPDIG0122ZZ
: 206 – 211 N·m (21.1 – 21.5 kg-m, 152 – 155 ft-lb)
•
•
•
•
CAUTION:
• Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel
hub lock nut.
• Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool.
• Never reuse wheel hub lock nut.
NOTE:
Wheel hub lock nut tightening torque does not over torque for avoiding axle noise, and does not less than
torque for avoiding looseness.
Align the matching marks that have been made during removal when reusing the disc rotor.
When installing a cotter pin, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse cotter pin.
• Bend cotter pin at the root sufficiently to prevent any looseness.
Perform the final tightening of each of parts under unladen conditions, which were removed when removing
suspension component.
Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection".
RIGHT SIDE
RIGHT SIDE : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495718
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
Remove wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
Remove lock plate from strut assembly. Refer to BR-20, "FRONT : Exploded View".
Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly not to interfere with work. Refer to BR-39, "BRAKE
CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
Remove disc rotor. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-18
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
6. Remove cotter pin, and then loosen wheel hub lock nut. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and Installation".
A
7. Patch wheel hub lock nut with a piece of wood. Hammer the
wood to disengage wheel hub assembly from drive shaft.
NOTE:
Use suitable puller, if wheel hub assembly and drive shaft canB
not be separated even after performing the above procedure.
8. Remove wheel hub lock nut. Refer to FAX-8, "Removal and
Installation".
C
9. Remove strut assembly from steering knuckle. Refer to FSU-8,
"Removal and Installation".
10. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub assembly.
FAX
JPDIG0070ZZ
CAUTION:
• Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle. Also be
careful not to overextend slide joint.
• Never allow drive shaft to hang down without support for joint sub-assembly, shaft and the other E
parts.
11. Remove splash guard. Refer to FAX-8, "Exploded View".
F
12. Remove bearing housing mounting bolts.
13. Remove drive shaft assembly from transaxle assembly.
CAUTION:
Never place drive shaft joint at an extreme angle when
G
removing drive shaft. Also be careful not to overextend
slide joint.
14. Remove heat insulator from front suspenstion member.
H
15. Remove front exhaust tube. Refer to EX-6, "Removal and Installation".
16. Remove three way catalyst (bank 1) and heated oxygen sensor
I
JSDIA2709ZZ
harness bracket. Refer to EM-33, "Removal and Installation".
17. Remove support bearing bracket.
18. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection".
J
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
Transaxle Side
• Always replace transaxle side oil seal with new one when installing drive shaft. Refer to TM-153, "Removal
and Installation".
• Place the protector (A) [SST: KV38107900 ( — )] onto transaxle
assembly to prevent damage to the oil seal while inserting drive
shaft. Slide drive shaft sliding joint and tap with a hammer to install
securely.
K
L
M
N
JPDIF0049ZZ
• Install support bearing bracket in following procedure.
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-19
O
P
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
- Temporarily tighten support bearing bracket (1) mounting bolts (A),
then tighten them to specified torque.
JSDIA2710ZZ
- Insert drive shaft into transaxle assembly, temporarily tighten bearing housing (1) mounting bolts (A), then tighten them to specified
torque.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection".
JSDIA2711ZZ
Wheel Hub Side
• Clean the matching surface of wheel hub lock nut and wheel hub assembly.
CAUTION:
Never apply lubricating oil to these matching surface.
• Clean the matching surface of drive shaft and wheel hub assembly.
And then apply paste [service parts (440037S000)] to surface (A)
of joint sub-assembly of drive shaft.
CAUTION:
Apply paste to cover entire flat surface of joint sub-assembly
of drive shaft.
Amount paste
: 1.0 – 3.0 g (0.04 – 0.10 oz)
• Use the following torque range for tightening the wheel hub lock
nut.
JPDIG0122ZZ
: 206 – 211 N·m (21.1 – 21.5 kg-m, 152 – 155 ft-lb)
•
•
•
•
CAUTION:
• Since the drive shaft is assembled by press-fitting, use the tightening torque range for the wheel
hub lock nut.
• Be sure to use torque wrench to tighten the wheel hub lock nut. Never use a power tool.
• Never reuse wheel hub lock nut.
NOTE:
Wheel hub lock nut tightening torque does not over torque for avoiding axle noise, and does not less than
torque for avoiding looseness.
Align the matching marks that have been made during removal when reusing the disc rotor.
When installing a cotter pin, securely bend the basal portion to prevent rattles.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse cotter pin.
• Bend cotter pin at the root sufficiently to prevent any looseness.
Perform the final tightening of each of parts under unladen conditions, which were removed when removing
suspension component.
Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection".
WHEEL SIDE
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-20
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
WHEEL SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000007495719
A
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fix shaft of housing assembly with a vise.
CAUTION:
Protect shaft when fixing with a vise using aluminum or copper plates.
Remove boot bands, and then remove boot from joint sub-assembly.
Screw drive shaft puller (A) (commercial service tool) into joint
sub-assembly screw part to a length of 30 mm (1.18 in) or more.
Support drive shaft with one hand and pull out joint sub-assembly from shaft.
CAUTION:
• Align drive shaft puller and drive shaft and remove them
by pulling firmly and uniformly.
• If joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or
more unsuccessful attempts, replace shaft and joint sub
assembly as a set.
Remove circular clip from shaft.
Remove boot from shaft.
Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection".
B
C
FAX
E
JPDIG0151ZZ
G
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
F
Clean the old grease on joint sub-assembly with paper waste.
Fill serration slot joint sub-assembly (1) with NISSAN genuine
grease or equivalent until the serration slot and ball groove
become full to the brim.
CAUTION:
After applying grease, use a paper waste to wipe off old
grease that has oozed out.
H
I
J
JPDIF0008ZZ
3.
4.
Install boot and boot bands to shaft of housing assembly.
CAUTION:
• Wrap serration on shaft with tape (A) to protect the boot
from damage.
• Never reuse boot and boot band.
Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft.
K
L
M
N
O
JPDIF0009ZZ
P
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-21
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
5. Position the circular clip (1) on groove at the shaft edge.
CAUTION:
Never reuse circular clip.
NOTE:
Drive joint inserter is recommended when installing circular clip.
6. Align both center axles of the shaft edge and joint sub-assembly.
Then assemble shaft with joint sub-assembly holding circular
clip.
JPDIF0305ZZ
7.
8.
Install joint sub-assembly to shaft using plastic hammer.
CAUTION:
• Check circular clip is properly positioned on groove of the
joint sub-assembly.
• Confirm that joint sub-assembly is correctly engaged
while rotating drive shaft.
Apply the specified amount of grease into the boot inside from
large diameter side of boot.
Grease amount
: Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft".
RAC0049D
9.
Install the boot securely into grooves (indicated by “*” marks)
shown in the figure.
L
: Boot installation length
CAUTION:
If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (indicated
by “*” marks) on the shaft or joint sub-assembly, boot may
be removed. Remove all grease from the boot mounting
surface.
10. To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installation length to the specified value shown below by inserting the
suitable tool into inside of the boot from the large diameter side
of the boot and discharging the inside air.
Boot installation length
JPDIF0222ZZ
: Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft".
CAUTION:
• If the boot installation length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage of the boot.
• Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with a tip of tool.
11. Secure the large and small ends of the boot with boot bands
using the boot band crimping tool (A) [SST: KV40107300 ( —
)].
CAUTION:
• Never reuse boot band.
JPDIF0012ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-22
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Secure boot band so that dimension (A) meets the specification as shown in the figure.
A
A
: 7.0 mm (0.276 in) or less.
B
12. Check that displacement does not occur when boot is rotated
with the joint sub-assembly and shaft of housing assembly fixed.
CAUTION:
• Reinstall them using boot bands when boot installation
positions become incorrect.
• Never reuse boot band.
C
JPDIF0268ZZ
FAX
TRANSAXLE SIDE
TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side)
INFOID:0000000007495720
E
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fix housing assembly with a vise.
CAUTION:
Protect housing assembly using aluminum or copper plates when fixing with a vise.
Remove wheel side boot from joint sub-assembly. Refer to FAX-12, "WHEEL SIDE : Removal and Installation".
Remove damper band, then remove dynamic damper from shaft of housing assembly.
Remove boot bands, then remove boot from shaft of housing assembly.
Remove circular clip from housing assembly.
Remove dust shield from housing assembly.
Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection".
F
G
H
I
ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Clean the old grease on housing assembly with paper waste.
Install dust shield to housing assembly.
CAUTION:
Never reuse dust shield.
Install circular clip to housing.
CAUTION:
Never reuse circular clip.
Install boot and boot bands to shaft of housing assembly.
CAUTION:
• Wrap serration on shaft with tape (A) to protect the boot
from damage.
• Never reuse boot and boot band.
Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft.
Apply NISSAN genuine grease (refer to parts catalog) to housing assembly.
Grease amount
J
K
L
M
N
: Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft".
O
JSDIA2232ZZ
P
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-23
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
7. Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by “*” marks) shown
in the figure.
L
8.
: Boot installation length
CAUTION:
If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (with “*”
marks) on shaft or housing, boot may be removed. Remove
all grease from the surface.
To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installation length to the value shown below by inserting the suitable
tool into the inside of boot from the large diameter side of boot
and discharging inside air.
Boot installation length
9.
JPDIF0144ZZ
: Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft".
CAUTION:
• If the boot installation length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage of the boot.
• Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with the tip of tool.
Install boot bands securely.
CAUTION:
Never reuse boot bands.
For one-touch clamp band
• Install boot bands securely as shown in the figure.
PDIA1188J
For low profile type band
1.
2.
Put boot band in the groove on drive shaft boot. Then fit pawls into holes to temporary installation.
NOTE:
For the large diameter side, fit projection (A) and guide slit
(B) at first.
Pinch projection on the band with suitable pliers to tighten
band.
JPDIF0157ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-24
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Insert the tip of band into the lower part of pawl (marked
with dotted circle) as shown in the figure.
10. Check that displacement does not occur when boot is rotated
with the housing assembly fixed.
CAUTION:
• If displacement occurs, reinstall band.
• Never reuse boot band.
A
B
C
JPDIF0158ZZ
FAX
11. Install dynamic damper, follow the procedure described below.
a. Install dynamic damper and damper bands to shaft of housing assembly.
CAUTION:
Never reuse damper band.
b. Install boot to the wheel side. Refer to FAX-21, "WHEEL SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly".
c. Securely dynamic damper with damper bands in the following
specified position (A) when installing.
A
E
F
: Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft".
G
H
JPDIF0178ZZ
I
• Install damper bands securely as shown in the figure.
J
K
L
PDIA1188J
TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side)
INFOID:0000000007495721
M
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fix housing assembly with a vise.
CAUTION:
Protect housing assembly using aluminum or copper plates when fixing with a vise.
Remove wheel side boot from joint sub-assembly. Refer to FAX-21, "WHEEL SIDE : Disassembly and
Assembly".
Remove boot bands, then remove boot from housing assembly.
Remove support bearing, follow the procedure described below.
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-25
2012 QUEST
N
O
P
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
a. Remove dust shield from housing.
YAX002
b.
Remove snap ring (1).
JPDIF0073ZZ
c.
d.
Press out bearing housing and support bearing from housing
assembly.
Remove dust shield from housing assembly.
SFA693
e.
Remove snap ring (1).
JPDIF0177ZZ
f.
5.
Press out support bearing from bearing housing (1), using the
drift (A) [SST: ST17130000 ( — )].
Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to FAX-29, "Inspection".
JPDIF0313ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-26
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
ASSEMBLY
1. Install dust shield to housing assembly.
CAUTION:
Never reuse dust shield.
2. Install support bearing, follow the procedure described below.
a. Press support bearing to bearing housing (1), using the drift (A)
[SST: ST35271000 (J-26091)].
A
B
C
FAX
E
JPDIF0314ZZ
b.
c.
Install snap ring (1).
CAUTION:
Never reuse snap ring.
Press bearing housing and support bearing to housing assembly.
F
G
H
JPDIF0177ZZ
d.
Install snap ring (1).
CAUTION:
Never reuse snap ring.
I
J
K
L
JPDIF0073ZZ
e.
3.
M
Install dust shields.
CAUTION:
Never reuse dust shields.
Clean the old grease on housing assembly with paper waste.
N
O
P
JPDIF0127ZZ
4.
Install boot and boot bands to shaft of housing assembly.
CAUTION:
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-27
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Wrap serration on shaft with tape (A) to protect the boot
from damage.
• Never reuse boot and boot band.
5. Remove the tape wrapped around the serration on shaft.
6. Apply NISSAN genuine grease (refer to parts catalog) to housing assembly.
Grease amount
: Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft".
JSDIA2232ZZ
7.
Install boot securely into grooves (indicated by “*” marks) shown
in the figure.
L
8.
: Boot installation length
CAUTION:
If grease adheres to the boot mounting surface (with “*”
marks) on shaft or housing, boot may be removed. Remove
all grease from the surface.
To prevent the deformation of the boot, adjust the boot installation length to the value shown below (L) by inserting the suitable
tool into the inside of boot from the large diameter side of boot
and discharging inside air.
Boot installation length
9.
a.
b.
JPDIF0144ZZ
: Refer to FAX-30, "Drive Shaft".
CAUTION:
• If the boot installation length exceeds the standard, it may cause breakage of the boot.
• Be careful not to touch the inside of the boot with the tip of tool.
Install boot bands securely.
CAUTION:
Never reuse boot bands.
Put boot band in the groove on drive shaft boot. Then fit pawls into holes to temporary installation.
NOTE:
For the large diameter side, fit projection (A) and guide slit (B) at
first.
Pinch projection on the band with suitable pliers to tighten band.
JPDIF0157ZZ
c.
Insert the tip of band into the lower part of pawl (marked with
dotted circle) as shown in the figure.
10. Check that displacement does not occur when boot is rotated
with the housing assembly fixed.
CAUTION:
• If displacement occurs, reinstall band.
• Never reuse boot band.
11. Install boot to the wheel side. Refer to FAX-21, "WHEEL SIDE :
Disassembly and Assembly".
JPDIF0158ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-28
2012 QUEST
FRONT DRIVE SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495722
A
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary.
• Move joint up/down, left/right, and in the axial directions. Check for motion that is not smooth and for significant looseness.
• Check boot for cracks, damage, and leakage of grease.
• Check the support bearing bracket for cracks, deformation and other damage.
B
C
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary.
FAX
Dynamic Damper (Left Side)
Check damper for cracks or wear.
Joint Sub-Assembly
Check the following:
• Joint sub-assembly for rough rotation and excessive axial looseness.
• The inside of the joint sub-assembly for entry of foreign material.
• Joint sub-assembly for compression scars, cracks, and fractures inside of joint sub-assembly.
Replace joint sub-assembly if there are any non-standard conditions of components.
E
F
Housing assembly
• Replace housing assembly if there is scratching or wear of housing assembly roller contact surface.
• Check shaft for runout, cracks, or other damage.
G
Support Bearing (Right Side)
Check bearing rolls freely and is free from noise, cracks, pitting or wear. Replace support bearing if there are
any non-standard conditions.
H
Bearing Housing (Right Side)
Check for bearing housing, cracks, or damage. Replace support bearing bracket if there are any non-standard
conditions.
I
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
J
Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR :
Exploded View".
Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection".
Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure".
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-29
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Bearing
INFOID:0000000007495723
Item
Standard
Axial end play
0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less
Drive Shaft
INFOID:0000000007495724
Standard
Item
Left side
Grease quantity
Boots installed length*
Dimension of dynamic damper
*
Right side
Wheel side
170 – 190 g (6.00 – 6.70 oz)
Transaxle side
155 – 175 g (5.47 – 6.17 oz)
Wheel side
158.6 mm (6.24 in)
Transaxle side
163.67 mm (6.44 in)
237 – 243 mm (9.33 – 9.57 in)
—
*: For measuring position, refer to FAX-21, "WHEEL SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly" (Wheel side), FAX23, "TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly (Left Side)" [Transaxle side (Left side)], FAX-25, "TRANSAXLE SIDE : Disassembly and Assembly (Right Side)" [Transaxle side (Right side)].
Revision: 2011 September
FAX-30
2012 QUEST
SUSPENSION
SECTION
FSU
FRONT SUSPENSION
A
B
C
D
FSU
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 2
Precautions for Suspension ...................................... 2
PREPARATION ............................................ 3
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Special Service Tools ................................................ 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 4
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 4
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 4
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 5
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ................... 5
Inspection .................................................................. 5
WHEEL ALIGNMENT .......................................... 6
Inspection .................................................................. 6
Adjustment ................................................................ 6
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 8
FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT ................. 8
F
Exploded View .......................................................... 8
Removal and Installation .......................................... 8
Disassembly and Assembly ...................................... 9
Inspection ................................................................10
Disposal ...................................................................11
G
TRANSVERSE LINK ......................................... 12
H
Exploded View .........................................................12
Removal and Installation .........................................12
Inspection ................................................................12
I
FRONT STABILIZER ........................................ 14
Exploded View .........................................................14
Removal and Installation .........................................14
Inspection ................................................................15
J
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER ..................... 16
K
Exploded View .........................................................16
Removal and Installation .........................................16
Inspection ................................................................16
L
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ............................................................ 18
M
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 18
Wheel Alignment .....................................................18
Ball Joint ..................................................................20
Wheelarch Height ....................................................20
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-1
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000007495799
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover
INFOID:0000000007495800
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.
PIIB3706J
Precautions for Suspension
INFOID:0000000007495801
• When installing rubber bushings, the final tightening must be carried out under unladen conditions with tires
on ground. Spilled oil might shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil.
- Unladen conditions mean that fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and
mats are in designated positions.
• After servicing suspension parts, be sure to check wheel alignment.
• Self-lock nuts are not reusable. Always use new ones when installing. Since new self-lock nuts are pre-oiled,
tighten as they are.
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-2
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007495802
B
The actual shapes of Kent-More tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
C
Tool number
(Kent-More No.)
Tool name
Description
Disassembling and assembling strut
ST35652000
( — )
Strut attachment
D
FSU
F
ZZA0807D
Commercial Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007495803
G
Tool name
Description
Spring compressor
Removing and installing coil spring
H
I
S-NT717
Power tool
J
Loosening bolts and nuts
K
L
PBIC0190E
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-3
2012 QUEST
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
INFOID:0000000007495804
NVH in WT section
NVH in WT section
NVH in FAX section
NVH in BR section
NVH in ST section
TIRE
ROAD WHEEL
DRIVE SHAFT
BRAKE
STEERING
NVH in FAX and FSU sections
FRONT AXLE AND FRONT SUSPENSION
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Vibration
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
Judder
×
×
×
Poor quality ride or
handling
×
×
×
Stabilizer bar fatigue
Shake
Incorrect wheel alignment
×
—
×
×
FSU-6
×
×
×
FSU-8, FSU-12, FSU-14, FSU-16
Suspension looseness
×
—
Spring fatigue
×
—
×
Parts interference
×
—
×
Bushing or mounting deterioration
FSU-10
×
Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection
×
×
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
FRONT SUSPENSION
×
Noise
Reference
Symptom
×
Improper installation, looseness
FSU-8, FSU-12, FSU-14, FSU-16
Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×: Applicable
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-4
2012 QUEST
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
A
FRONT SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495805
B
Check the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component conditions (wear,
damage) are normal.
C
COMPONENT PART
Ball Joint Axial End Play
1.
2.
D
Set front wheels in a straight-ahead position.
Move axle side of transverse link in the axial direction by hand.
Check there is no end play.
FSU
Axial end play
: Refer to FSU-20, "Ball Joint".
CAUTION:
• Never depress brake pedal when measuring.
• Never perform with tires on level ground.
• Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. Never damage
the installation position by applying excessive force.
F
G
JSEIA0444ZZ
STRUT ASSEMBLY
H
Check for oil leakage, damage, and replace if necessary.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-5
2012 QUEST
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495806
DESCRIPTION
CAUTION:
• Camber, caster, kingpin inclination angles cannot be adjusted.
• If camber, caster, or kingpin inclination angle is outside the standard, check front suspension parts
for wear and damage. Replace suspect parts if a malfunction is detected.
• Kingpin inclination angle is reference value, no inspection is required.
Measure wheel alignment under unladen conditions.
NOTE:
“Unladen conditions” means that fuel, engine coolant, and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and
mats are in designated positions.
PRELIMINARY CHECK
Check the following:
• Tires for improper air pressure and wear. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure".
• Road wheels for runout.
• Wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to FAX-6, "Inspection".
• Transverse link ball joint axial end play. Refer to FSU-5, "Inspection".
• Strut operation.
• Each mounting part of axle and suspension for looseness and deformation.
• Each of suspension member, strut assembly and transverse link for cracks, deformation and other damage.
• Vehicle height (posture).
GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS
• A four-wheel thrust alignment should be performed.
- This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN/INFINITI vehicle.
- The four-wheel “thrust” process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel is
centered.
- The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN/INFINITI vehicle.
- The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level.
• Check the machine is properly calibrated.
- Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information.
- Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule.
ALIGNMENT PROCESS
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in this Service Manual.
• When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use “indicators”: (Green/red, plus or
minus, Go/No Go). Never use these indicators.
- The alignment specifications programmed into your machine that operate these indicators may not be correct.
- This may result in an ERROR.
• Most camera-type alignment machines are equipped with both “Rolling Compensation” method and optional
“Jacking Compensation” method to “compensate” the alignment targets or head units. “Rolling Compensation” is the preferred method.
- If using the “Rolling Compensation” method, after installing the alignment targets or head units, push or pull
on the rear wheel to move the vehicle. Do not push or pull on the vehicle body.
- If using the “Jacking Compensation” method, after installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the
vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways.
NOTE:
Do not use the “Rolling Compensation” method if you are using sensor-type alignment equipment.
- Follow all instructions for the alignment machine you're using for more information.
Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007495807
TOE-IN
• Loosen the steering outer socket, and then adjust the length using steering inner socket.
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-6
2012 QUEST
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
Toe-in
: Refer to FSU-18, "Wheel Alignment".
A
CAUTION:
• Always evenly adjust both toe-in alternately and adjust the difference between the left and right to
the standard.
• Always fix the steering inner socket when tightening the steering outer socket.
• After toe-in adjustment, adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure".
B
C
D
FSU
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-7
2012 QUEST
FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495808
JPEIA0136GB
1.
Piston rod lock nut
2.
Mounting insulator
3.
Mounting bearing
4.
Coil spring
5.
Bound bumper
6.
Lower rubber seat
7.
Strut
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495809
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
Remove lock plate from strut assembly. Refer to BR-20, "FRONT : Exploded View".
Remove wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
Separate stabilizer connecting rod from strut assembly. Refer to FSU-14, "Removal and Installation".
Remove strut mounting bolts and nuts from steering knuckle.
: Vehicle front
6.
7.
Remove cowl top extension. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and
Installation".
Remove mounting bolt of mounting insulator, and then remove
strut assembly.
JSEIA0392ZZ
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-8
2012 QUEST
FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Install strut assembly with the protrusion (A) of mounting insulator
faced outside of the vehicle.
A
: Vehicle front
B
• Never reuse strut mounting nut.
• Perform final tightening of fixing parts at the vehicle installation
position (rubber bushing), under unladen conditions with tires on
level ground.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FSU-10, "Inspection".
• After replacing the strut, always follow the disposal procedure to
discard the strut. Refer to FSU-11, "Disposal".
Disassembly and Assembly
C
JPEIA0094ZZ
D
INFOID:0000000007495810
DISASSEMBLY
FSU
CAUTION:
Never damage strut assembly piston rod when removing components from strut assembly.
1. Install strut attachment (A) [SST: ST35652000 ( — )] to strut
assembly and secure it in a vise.
CAUTION:
When installing the strut attachment to strut assembly,
wrap a shop cloth around strut to protect from damage.
F
G
H
JPEIA0006ZZ
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Using a spring compressor (A) (commercial service tool), compress coil spring between spring upper seat and lower seat
(strut assembly) until coil spring with a spring compressor is
free.
CAUTION:
Be sure a spring compressor is securely attached to coil
spring. Compress coil spring.
Check coil spring with a spring compressor between spring
upper seat and lower seat (strut assembly) is free. And then
remove piston rod lock nut while securing the piston rod tip so
that piston rod does not turn.
JPEIA0007ZZ
Remove mounting insulator, mounting bearing, and bound
bumper from strut.
After removing coil spring with a spring compressor (commercial service tool), then gradually release a
spring compressor.
CAUTION:
Loosen while making sure coil spring attachment position does not move.
Remove lower rubber seat.
Remove strut attachment [SST: ST35652000 ( — )] from strut.
Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to FSU-10, "Inspection".
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
Never damage strut assembly piston rod when installing components from strut assembly.
1. Install strut attachment [SST: ST35652000 ( — )] to strut and secure it in a vise.
CAUTION:
When installing the strut attachment to strut assembly, wrap a shop cloth around strut to protect
from damage.
2. Install lower rubber seat.
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-9
2012 QUEST
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Apply soapy water to bound bumper.
CAUTION:
Never use machine oil.
4. Insert bound bumper into mounting insulator.
5. Compress coil spring using a spring compressor (commercial service tool), and install it onto strut assembly.
CAUTION:
• Be sure a spring compressor is securely attached to coil spring, before compress coil spring.
• Align the lower end of coil spring (1) with “A” of lower
rubber seat (2) as shown in the figure.
• Set coil spring so that its paint marks are aligned with the
positions of 1.25 turns and 2.25 turns from the bottom end
of the coil spring.
JPEIA0095ZZ
6.
Check the location of protrusion (A) of the mounting insulator
and install it with faced outside of the vehicle to the strut.
: Vehicle front
7.
Secure piston rod tip so that piston rod does not turn, then
tighten piston rod lock nut with specified torque.
CAUTION:
Never reuse piston rod lock nut.
JPEIA0094ZZ
8.
Gradually release a spring compressor (A) (commercial service
tool), and remove coil spring.
CAUTION:
Loosen while making sure coil spring attachment position
does not move.
JPEIA0007ZZ
9.
Remove the strut attachment (A) [SST: ST35652000 (
from strut assembly.
—
)]
JPEIA0006ZZ
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495811
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-10
2012 QUEST
FRONT COIL SPRING AND STRUT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Check the following items, and replace the parts if necessary.
A
Strut
• Strut for deformation, cracks or damage
• Piston rod for damage, uneven wear or distortion
• Oil leakage
B
Strut Mounting Insulator and bound bumper
Check strut mounting insulator and bound bumper for cracks, wear or damage.
C
Coil Spring
Check coil spring for cracks, wear or damage.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
D
Check wheel sensor harness for proper connector. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR :
Exploded View".
FSU
Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection".
Disposal
INFOID:0000000007495812
1.
Set strut assembly horizontally to the ground with the piston rod fully extracted.
2.
Drill 2 – 3 mm (0.08 – 0.12 in) hole at the position ( ) from top
as shown in the figure to release gas gradually.
CAUTION:
• Wear eye protection (safety glasses).
• Wear gloves.
• Be careful with metal chips or oil blown out by the compressed gas.
NOTE:
• Drill vertically in this direction show by arrow.
• Directly to the outer tube avoiding brackets.
• The gas is clear, colorless, odorless, and harmless.
A
3.
F
G
H
I
JPEIA0160ZZ
J
: 20 – 30 mm (0.79 – 1.18 in)
Position the drilled hole downward and drain oil by moving the piston rod several times.
CAUTION:
Dispose of drained oil according to the law and local regulations.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-11
2012 QUEST
TRANSVERSE LINK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
TRANSVERSE LINK
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495813
JPEIA0091GB
1.
Transverse link
2.
Front suspension member
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495814
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
Remove drive shaft from wheel hub assembly.
• Left side: Refer to FAX-17, "LEFT SIDE : Removal and Installation".
• Right side: Refer to FAX-18, "RIGHT SIDE : Removal and Installation".
Separate transverse link from steering knuckle. Refer to FAX-8, "Exploded View".
Remove transverse link from suspension member.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Never reuse transverse link mounting nut.
• Perform final tightening of bolts and nuts at the vehicle installation position (rubber bushing), under unladen
conditions with tires on level ground.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FSU-12, "Inspection".
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495815
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the following items, and replace the parts if necessary.
Transverse Link
• Transverse link and bushing for deformation, cracks or damage.
• Ball joint boot for cracks or other damage, and also for grease leakage.
Swing Torque
1.
2.
Manually move ball stud to confirm it moves smoothly with no binding.
Move ball stud at least ten times by hand to check for smooth movement.
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-12
2012 QUEST
TRANSVERSE LINK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Hook a spring balance (A) at cutout on ball stud (B). Confirm
spring balance measurement value is within specifications when
ball stud begins moving.
Swing torque
Measurement on
spring balance
A
: Refer to FSU-20, "Ball Joint".
: Refer to FSU-20, "Ball Joint"
B
C
• If swing torque exceeds standard range, replace transverse link
assembly.
JPEIA0138ZZ
D
Axial End Play
1.
2.
Move ball stud at least ten times by hand to check for smooth movement.
Move tip of ball stud in axial direction to check for looseness.
Axial end play
FSU
: Refer to FSU-20, "Ball Joint".
F
• If axial end play exceeds the standard value, replace transverse link assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Check wheel sensor harness for proper connector. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR :
Exploded View".
Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection".
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-13
2012 QUEST
FRONT STABILIZER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
FRONT STABILIZER
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495816
JPEIA0164GB
1.
Stabilizer clamp
2.
Stabilizer bushing
4.
Front suspension member
5.
Stabilizer connecting rod
3.
Stabilizer bar
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495817
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-6, "Removal and Installation".
Remove wheel sensor harness from strut assembly. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR :
Removal and Installation".
Separate steering outer socket from steering knuckle. Refer to ST-21, "Removal and Installation".
Remove stabilizer connecting rod.
Remove drive shaft (right side). Refer to FAX-18, "RIGHT SIDE : Removal and Installation".
Remove mounting bolts ( ) of stabilizer clamp, and then
remove stabilizer clamp and stabilizer bushing from front suspension member.
Remove stabilizer bar.
Perform inspection after removal. Refer to FSU-15, "Inspection".
WEIA0182E
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-14
2012 QUEST
FRONT STABILIZER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Install stabilizer clamp and stabilizer bush with notch (A) and slit
(B) faced forward of the vehicle ( ).
A
B
C
JPEIA0058ZZ
D
• To install stabilizer connecting rod (1), tighten the mounting nut
with the hexagonal part (A) on the stabilizer connecting rod side
fixed.
• Perform final tightening of bolts and nuts at the vehicle installation
position (rubber bushing), under unladen conditions with tires on
level ground.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FSU-12, "Inspection".
FSU
F
G
JPEIA0252ZZ
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495818
H
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check stabilizer bar, stabilizer connecting rod, stabilizer bushing and stabilizer clamp for deformation, cracks
or damage. Replace it if necessary.
I
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Check wheel sensor harness for proper connector. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR :
Exploded View".
Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection".
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-15
2012 QUEST
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495819
JPEIA0131GB
1.
Front suspension member
2.
Rebound stopper
3.
Front suspension member stay
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495820
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
Remove the engine and the transaxle assembly from the vehicle together with the front suspension member. Refer to EM-56, "Removal and Installation".
Remove the following parts from front suspension member.
• Engine assembly: Refer to EM-56, "Removal and Installation".
• Transaxle assembly: Refer to TM-163, "Removal and Installation".
• Steering gear assembly: Refer to ST-21, "Removal and Installation".
• Steering hydraulic line: Refer to ST-34, "Exploded View".
• Stabilizer bar: Refer to FSU-14, "Removal and Installation".
• Transverse link: Refer to FSU-12, "Removal and Installation".
Perform inspection after removal. Refer to FSU-12, "Inspection".
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Perform final tightening of bolts and nuts at the vehicle installation position (rubber bushing), under unladen
conditions with tires on level ground.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to FSU-12, "Inspection".
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495821
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-16
2012 QUEST
FRONT SUSPENSION MEMBER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Check front suspension member for cracks, wear or damage. Replace it if necessary.
A
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Check wheel sensor harness for proper connector. Refer to BRC-114, "FRONT WHEEL SENSOR :
Exploded View".
Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection".
B
C
D
FSU
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-17
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Alignment
INFOID:0000000007495822
FOR USA MODELS
Standard
Item
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Left side
Right side
Minimum
–1° 00′ (–1.00°)
–1° 15′ (–1.25°)
Nominal
–0° 15′ (–0.25°)
–0° 30′ (–0.50°)
0° 30′ (0.50°)
0° 15′ (0.25°)
Maximum
Left and right difference*1
Caster
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Minimum
3° 55′ (3.92°)
4° 05′ (4.09°)
Nominal
4° 40′ (4.67°)
4° 50′ (4.83°)
Maximum
5° 25′ (5.41°)
5° 35′ (5.58°)
Left and right difference*1
Kingpin inclination
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Total toe-in
Distance
Toe-in
Toe angle (left wheel or right
wheel)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
–0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°)
–0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°)
Minimum
12° 00′ (12.00°)
Nominal
12° 45′ (12.75°)
Maximum
13° 30′ (13.50°)
Minimum
Out 0.4 mm (0.016 in)
Nominal
In 0.6 mm (0.024 in)
Maximum
In 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
Minimum
In 0° 02′ (0.04°)
In 0° 01′ (0.02°)
Nominal
In 0° 04′ (0.07°)
In 0° 03′ (0.05°)
Maximum
In 0° 06′ (0.10°)
In 0° 05′ (0.08°)
Measure value under unladen*2 conditions.
*1: A difference when assuming the left side a standard.
*2: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
FOR CANADA MODELS
For 3.5S Grade
Standard
Item
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Left side
Right side
Minimum
–1° 00′ (–1.00°)
–1° 15′ (–1.25°)
Nominal
–0° 15′ (–0.25°)
–0° 30′ (–0.50°)
0° 30′ (0.50°)
0° 15′ (0.25°)
Maximum
Left and right difference*1
Caster
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Minimum
3° 50′ (3.84°)
4° 05′ (4.09°)
Nominal
4° 35′ (4.58°)
4° 50′ (4.83°)
Maximum
5° 20′ (5.33°)
5° 35′ (5.58°)
Left and right difference*1
Kingpin inclination
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Revision: 2011 September
–0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°)
–0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°)
Minimum
12° 00′ (12.00°)
Nominal
12° 45′ (12.75°)
Maximum
13° 30′ (13.50°)
FSU-18
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard
Item
Total toe-in
Distance
Left side
Right side
Minimum
Out 0.4 mm (0.016 in)
Nominal
In 0.6 mm (0.024 in)
Maximum
Toe-in
Toe angle (left wheel or right
wheel)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
A
B
In 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
Minimum
In 0° 02′ (0.04°)
In 0° 01′ (0.02°)
Nominal
In 0° 04′ (0.07°)
In 0° 03′ (0.05°)
Maximum
In 0° 06′ (0.10°)
In 0° 05′ (0.08°)
Measure value under unladen*2 conditions.
C
D
*1: A difference when assuming the left side a standard.
*2: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
FSU
For 3.5SV Grade
Standard
Item
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Left side
Right side
Minimum
–1° 00′ (–1.00°)
–1° 15′ (–1.25°)
Nominal
–0° 15′ (–0.25°)
–0° 30′ (–0.50°)
0° 30′ (0.50°)
0° 15′ (0.25°)
Maximum
Left and right difference*1
Caster
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Kingpin inclination
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Total toe-in
Distance
Toe-in
Toe angle (left wheel or right
wheel)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
G
–0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°)
Minimum
3° 50′ (3.84°)
4° 00′ (4.00°)
Nominal
4° 35′ (4.58°)
4° 45′ (4.75°)
Maximum
5° 20′ (5.33°)
5° 30′ (5.50°)
Left and right difference*1
F
H
I
–0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°)
Minimum
12° 00′ (12.00°)
Nominal
12° 45′ (12.75°)
Maximum
13° 30′ (13.50°)
Minimum
Out 0.4 mm (0.016 in)
Nominal
In 0.6 mm (0.024 in)
Maximum
In 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
J
K
Minimum
In 0° 02′ (0.04°)
In 0° 01′ (0.02°)
Nominal
In 0° 04′ (0.07°)
In 0° 03′ (0.05°)
Maximum
In 0° 06′ (0.10°)
In 0° 05′ (0.08°)
L
M
Measure value under unladen*2 conditions.
*1: A difference when assuming the left side a standard.
*2: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
N
For 3.5SL and 3.5LE Grade
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Left side
Right side
Minimum
–1° 00′ (–1.00°)
–1° 15′ (–1.25°)
Nominal
–0° 15′ (–0.25°)
–0° 30′ (–0.50°)
0° 30′ (0.50°)
0° 15′ (0.25°)
Maximum
Left and right difference*1
Revision: 2011 September
O
Standard
Item
FSU-19
–0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°)
2012 QUEST
P
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard
Item
Caster
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Left side
Right side
Minimum
3° 55′ (3.92°)
4° 05′ (4.09°)
Nominal
4° 40′ (4.67°)
4° 50′ (4.83°)
Maximum
5° 25′ (5.41°)
5° 35′ (5.58°)
Left and right difference*1
Kingpin inclination
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Total toe-in
Distance
Toe-in
Toe angle (left wheel or right
wheel)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
–0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°)
Minimum
12° 00′ (12.00°)
Nominal
12° 45′ (12.75°)
Maximum
13° 30′ (13.50°)
Minimum
Out 0.4 mm (0.016 in)
Nominal
In 0.6 mm (0.024 in)
Maximum
In 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
Minimum
In 0° 02′ (0.04°)
In 0° 01′ (0.02°)
Nominal
In 0° 04′ (0.07°)
In 0° 03′ (0.05°)
Maximum
In 0° 06′ (0.10°)
In 0° 05′ (0.08°)
Measure value under unladen*2 conditions.
*1: A difference when assuming the left side a standard.
*2: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
Ball Joint
INFOID:0000000007495823
Item
Standard
Swing torque
0.5 – 4.9 N·m (0.06 – 0.49 kg-m, 5 – 43 in-lb)
Measurement on spring balance
11.1 – 108.9 N (1.2 – 11.1 kg, 3 – 24 lb)
Axial end play
0 mm (0 in)
Wheelarch Height
INFOID:0000000007495824
FOR USA MODELS
Item
Grade
Standard
3.5SL
3.5LE
Front (Hf)
3.5S
760 mm (29.92 in)
3.5SV
769 mm (30.28 in)
770 mm (30.31 in)
Rear (Hr)
751 mm (29.57 in)
760 mm (29.92 in)
759 mm (29.88 in)
WEIA0030E
Measure value under unladen* conditions.
*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
FOR CANADA MODELS
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-20
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Item
Standard
Grade
3.5S
Front (Hf)
Rear (Hr)
3.5SV
760 mm (29.92 in)
752 mm (29.61 in)
A
3.5SL
3.5LE
770 mm (30.31 in)
751 mm (29.57 in)
B
760 mm (29.92 in)
C
D
FSU
WEIA0030E
F
Measure value under unladen* conditions.
*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
FSU-21
2012 QUEST
Edition: September 2011
Publication No. SM2E-1E52U0
QUICK REFERENCE INDEX
A GENERAL INFORMATION
B ENGINE
C ELECTRIC POWER TRAIN
D TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE
E SUSPENSION
F BRAKES
G STEERING
H RESTRAINTS
I
VENTILATION, HEATER & AIR
CONDITIONER
J BODY INTERIOR
K BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS,
ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY
L DRIVER CONTROLS
M ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL
All rights reserved. No part
of this Service Manual may
be reproduced or stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, recording or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of NISSAN MOTOR
CO., LTD.
N DRIVER INFORMATION &
MULTIMEDIA
O CRUISE CONTROL &
DRIVER ASSISTANCE
P MAINTENANCE
GI
EM
LU
CO
EC
FL
EX
STR
ACC
HBC
HBB
HBR
EVC
TMS
EVB
VC
HCO
CL
TM
DLN
FAX
RAX
FSU
RSU
SCS
WT
BR
PB
BRC
ST
STC
SB
SBC
SR
SRC
VTL
HA
HAC
INT
IP
SE
ADP
DLK
SEC
GW
PWC
RF
HD
EXT
BRM
MIR
EXL
INL
WW
DEF
HRN
VSP
PWO
BCS
LAN
PCS
CHG
PG
MWI
WCS
SN
AV
CCS
DAS
DMS
MA
General Information
Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication System
Engine Cooling System
Engine Control System
Fuel System
Exhaust System
Starting System
Accelerator Control System
Hybrid Control System
Hybrid Battery System
Hybrid Brake System
EV Control System
Traction Motor System
EV Battery System
Vehicle Charging System
High Voltage Cooling System
Clutch
Transaxle & Transmission
Driveline
Front Axle
Rear Axle
Front Suspension
Rear Suspension
Suspension Control System
Road Wheels & Tires
Brake System
Parking Brake System
Brake Control System
Steering System
Steering Control System
Seat Belt
Seat Belt Control System
SRS Airbag
SRS Airbag Control System
Ventilation System
Heater & Air Conditioning System
Heater & Air Conditioning Control System
Interior
Instrument Panel
Seat
Automatic Drive Positioner
Door & Lock
Security Control System
Glass & Window System
Power Window Control System
Roof
Hood
Exterior
Body Repair
Mirrors
Exterior Lighting System
Interior Lighting System
Wiper & Washer
Defogger
Horn
Approaching Vehicle Sound for Pedestrians (VSP)
Power Outlet
Body Control System
LAN System
Power Control System
Charging System
Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements
Meter, Warning Lamp & Indicator
Warning Chime System
Sonar System
Audio, Visual & Navigation System
Cruise Control System
Driver Assistance System
Drive Mode System
Maintenance
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
FOREWORD
This manual contains maintenance and repair procedure for the 2012
NISSAN QUEST.
In order to assure your safety and the efficient functioning of the vehicle,
this manual should be read thoroughly. It is especially important that the
PRECAUTIONS in the GI section be completely understood before starting
any repair task.
All information in this manual is based on the latest product information
at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes in specifications and methods at any time without notice.
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
The proper performance of service is essential for both the safety of
the technician and the efficient functioning of the vehicle.
The service methods in this Service Manual are described in such a
manner that the service may be performed safely and accurately.
Service varies with the procedures used, the skills of the technician
and the tools and parts available. Accordingly, anyone using service
procedures, tools or parts which are not specifically recommended
by NISSAN must first be completely satisfied that neither personal
safety nor the vehicle’s safety will be jeopardized by the service
method selected.
PLEASE HELP MAKE THIS SERVICE MANUAL BETTER!
Your comments are important to NISSAN and will help us to improve our Service Manuals.
Use this form to report any issues or comments you may have regarding our Service Manuals.
Please print this form and type or write your comments below. Mail or fax to:
Nissan North America, Inc.
Technical Service Information
39001 Sunrise Drive, P.O. Box 9200
Farmington Hills, MI USA 48331
FAX: (248) 488-3880
SERVICE MANUAL: Model:
Year:
PUBLICATION NO. (Refer to Quick Reference Index ):
Please describe any Service Manual issues or problems in detail:
Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments.
Page number(s)
Are the trouble diagnosis procedures logical and easy to use? (circle your answer)
YES
NO
Note: Please include a copy of each page, marked with your comments.
If no, what page number(s)?
Please describe the issue or problem in detail:
Is the organization of the manual clear and easy to follow? (circle your answer)
YES
NO
Please comment:
What information should be included in NISSAN Service Manuals to better support you in servicing or
repairing customer vehicles?
DATE:
DEALER:
CITY:
YOUR NAME:
DEALER NO.:
STATE/PROV./COUNTRY:
POSITION:
ADDRESS:
ZIP/POSTAL CODE:
QUICK REFERENCE CHART QUEST
QUICK REFERENCE CHART QUEST
ENGINE TUNE-UP DATA (VQ35DE)
Engine model
PFP:00000
ELS0003W
VQ35DE
Firing order
1-2-3-4-5-6
Idle speed
CVT (In “P” or “N” position)
rpm
650 ± 50
Ignition timing (BTDC at idle speed)
CVT (In “P” or “N” position)
12° ± 2°
Tensions of drive belt
Auto adjustment by auto tensioner
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Radiator cap relief pressure
Standard
122.3 - 151.7 (1.2 - 1.5, 17.7 - 22.0)
Limit
108 (1.1, 15.6)
2
Cooling system leakage testing pressure
kPa (kg/cm , psi)
Compression pressure
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)/rpm
Spark plug
2012
156 (1.59, 22.6)
Standard
1,275 (13.0, 185)/300
Minimum
981 (10.0, 142)/300
Make
DENSO
Standard type
Gap
FXE22HR11
Standard
1.1 mm (0.043 in)
Limit
1.4 mm (0.055 in)
FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
ELS0003X
FOR USA MODELS
Standard
Item
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Left side
Right side
Minimum
–1° 00′ (–1.00°)
–1° 15′ (–1.25°)
Nominal
–0° 15′ (–0.25°)
–0° 30′ (–0.50°)
0° 30′ (0.50°)
0° 15′ (0.25°)
Maximum
Left and right difference*
Caster
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
1
Minimum
3° 55′ (3.92°)
4° 05′ (4.09°)
Nominal
4° 40′ (4.67°)
4° 50′ (4.83°)
Maximum
5° 25′ (5.41°)
5° 35′ (5.58°)
Left and right difference*1
Kingpin inclination
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Total toe-in
Distance
Toe-in
Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
–0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°)
–0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°)
Minimum
12° 00′ (12.00°)
Nominal
12° 45′ (12.75°)
Maximum
13° 30′ (13.50°)
Minimum
Out 0.4 mm (0.016 in)
Nominal
In 0.6 mm (0.024 in)
Maximum
In 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
Minimum
In 0° 02′ (0.04°)
In 0° 01′ (0.02°)
Nominal
In 0° 04′ (0.07°)
In 0° 03′ (0.05°)
Maximum
In 0° 06′ (0.10°)
In 0° 05′ (0.08°)
Measure value under unladen*2 conditions.
*1: A difference when assuming the left side a standard.
*2: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
QUICK REFERENCE CHART QUEST
2012
FOR CANADA MODELS
For 3.5S Grade
Standard
Item
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Left side
Right side
Minimum
–1° 00′ (–1.00°)
–1° 15′ (–1.25°)
Nominal
–0° 15′ (–0.25°)
–0° 30′ (–0.50°)
0° 30′ (0.50°)
0° 15′ (0.25°)
Maximum
Left and right difference*1
Caster
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Minimum
3° 50′ (3.84°)
4° 05′ (4.09°)
Nominal
4° 35′ (4.58°)
4° 50′ (4.83°)
5° 20′ (5.33°)
5° 35′ (5.58°)
Maximum
Left and right difference*
Kingpin inclination
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Total toe-in
Distance
–0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°)
1
–0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°)
Minimum
12° 00′ (12.00°)
Nominal
12° 45′ (12.75°)
Maximum
13° 30′ (13.50°)
Minimum
Out 0.4 mm (0.016 in)
Nominal
In 0.6 mm (0.024 in)
Maximum
Toe-in
Minimum
Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
In 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
In 0° 02′ (0.04°)
In 0° 01′ (0.02°)
Nominal
In 0° 04′ (0.07°)
In 0° 03′ (0.05°)
Maximum
In 0° 06′ (0.10°)
In 0° 05′ (0.08°)
Measure value under unladen*2 conditions.
*1: A difference when assuming the left side a standard.
*2: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
For 3.5SV Grade
Standard
Item
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Left side
Right side
Minimum
–1° 00′ (–1.00°)
–1° 15′ (–1.25°)
Nominal
–0° 15′ (–0.25°)
–0° 30′ (–0.50°)
0° 30′ (0.50°)
0° 15′ (0.25°)
Maximum
Left and right difference*1
Caster
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Minimum
3° 50′ (3.84°)
4° 00′ (4.00°)
Nominal
4° 35′ (4.58°)
4° 45′ (4.75°)
Maximum
5° 20′ (5.33°)
5° 30′ (5.50°)
Left and right difference*1
Kingpin inclination
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Total toe-in
Distance
Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
–0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°)
Minimum
12° 00′ (12.00°)
Nominal
12° 45′ (12.75°)
Maximum
13° 30′ (13.50°)
Minimum
Out 0.4 mm (0.016 in)
Nominal
In 0.6 mm (0.024 in)
Maximum
Toe-in
–0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°)
In 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
Minimum
In 0° 02′ (0.04°)
In 0° 01′ (0.02°)
Nominal
In 0° 04′ (0.07°)
In 0° 03′ (0.05°)
Maximum
In 0° 06′ (0.10°)
In 0° 05′ (0.08°)
2
Measure value under unladen* conditions.
*1: A difference when assuming the left side a standard.
*2: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
QUICK REFERENCE CHART QUEST
2012
For 3.5SL and 3.5LE Grade
Standard
Item
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Left side
Right side
Minimum
–1° 00′ (–1.00°)
–1° 15′ (–1.25°)
Nominal
–0° 15′ (–0.25°)
–0° 30′ (–0.50°)
0° 30′ (0.50°)
0° 15′ (0.25°)
Maximum
1
Left and right difference*
Caster
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Minimum
3° 55′ (3.92°)
4° 05′ (4.09°)
Nominal
4° 40′ (4.67°)
4° 50′ (4.83°)
5° 25′ (5.41°)
5° 35′ (5.58°)
Maximum
1
Left and right difference*
Kingpin inclination
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Total toe-in
Distance
Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
–0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°)
Minimum
12° 00′ (12.00°)
Nominal
12° 45′ (12.75°)
Maximum
13° 30′ (13.50°)
Minimum
Out 0.4 mm (0.016 in)
Nominal
In 0.6 mm (0.024 in)
Maximum
Toe-in
–0° 18′ (–0.30°) - 0° 48′ (0.80°)
In 1.6 mm (0.063 in)
Minimum
In 0° 02′ (0.04°)
In 0° 01′ (0.02°)
Nominal
In 0° 04′ (0.07°)
In 0° 03′ (0.05°)
Maximum
In 0° 06′ (0.10°)
In 0° 05′ (0.08°)
Measure value under unladen*2 conditions.
*1: A difference when assuming the left side a standard.
*2: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT
ELS0003Y
FOR USA MODELS
Item
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Total toe-in
Distance
Toe-in
Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Standard
Minimum
–1° 06′ (–1.10°)
Nominal
–0° 36′ (–0.60°)
Maximum
–0° 06′ (–0.10°)
Minimum
In 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
Nominal
In 2.8 mm (0.110 in)
Maximum
In 4.4 mm (0.173 in)
Minimum
In 0° 03′ (0.05°)
Nominal
In 0° 07′ (0.12°)
Maximum
In 0° 11′ (0.18°)
Measure value under unladen* conditions.
*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
QUICK REFERENCE CHART QUEST
2012
FOR CANADA MODELS
Item
Standard
Wheel size
16 inch
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Total toe-in
Distance
Toe-in
Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
18 inch
Minimum
–1° 05′ (–1.08°)
Nominal
–0° 35′ (–0.58°)
Maximum
–0° 05′ (–0.09°)
Minimum
In 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
In 0.9 mm (0.035 in)
Nominal
In 2.4 mm (0.094 in)
In 2.5 mm (0.098 in)
Maximum
In 4.0 mm (0.157 in)
In 4.1 mm (0.161 in)
Minimum
In 0° 02′ (0.04°)
Nominal
In 0° 06′ (0.10°)
Maximum
In 0° 10′ (0.16°)
Measure value under unladen* conditions.
*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
BRAKE PEDAL
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Brake pedal height
Standard
195.6 – 205.6 (7.70 – 8.09)
Depressed brake pedal height
[Depressing 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) while turning the engine ON]
Clearance between stop lamp switch and brake switch threaded end
and the stopper rubber
Brake pedal play
105.0 (4.13) or more
0.2 – 1.96 (0.008 – 0.0772)
3 – 11 (0.12 – 0.43)
BRAKE BOOSTER
Vacuum type
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Input rod length
Standard
127.0 – 128.0 (5.00 – 5.04)
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Brake pad
Disc rotor
Limit
Wear thickness
2.0 (0.079)
Wear thickness
26.0 (1.024)
Runout (with it attached to the vehicle)
0.040 (0.0016)
REAR DISC BRAKE
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Brake pad
Disc rotor
Limit
Wear thickness
2.0 (0.079)
Wear thickness
14.0 (0.551)
Runout (with it attached to the vehicle)
0.050 (0.0020)
QUICK REFERENCE CHART QUEST
2012
FREFILL CAPACITIES
UNIT
Liter
US measure
Fuel tank
75.6
20 gal
Engine coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at “MAX” level)
11.3
12 qt
With oil filter change
4.6
4-7/8 qt
Without oil filter change
4.3
4-1/2 qt
Dry engine (Overhaul)
5.3
5-5/8 qt
CVT
10.2
10-6/8 qt
1.0
1-1/8 qt
0.25
7.1 fl oz
0.9 kg
1.98 lb
Drain and refill
Engine oil capacity
Transmission
Power steering system
Air conditioning system
Compressor oil
Refrigerant
GENERAL INFORMATION
SECTION
GI
GENERAL INFORMATION
GI
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
F
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ...................... 3
PRECAUTION .............................................. 28
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ............................ 3
PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 28
Description ................................................................ 3
Terms ........................................................................ 3
Units .......................................................................... 3
Contents .................................................................... 3
Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions ...... 4
Components .............................................................. 4
Description ...............................................................28
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" .................................................................28
Precautions For Xenon Headlamp Service .............28
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover....29
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal and AV
Control Unit (Models with AV Control Unit) .............29
General Precautions ................................................29
Three Way Catalyst .................................................31
Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control
System .....................................................................31
Hoses ......................................................................31
Engine Oils ..............................................................32
Air Conditioning .......................................................32
Fuel ..........................................................................33
G
LIFTING POINT ................................................. 34
L
Commercial Service Tools .......................................34
Garage Jack and Safety Stand and 2-Pole Lift .......34
Board-On Lift ...........................................................35
M
HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ..... 6
Description ................................................................ 6
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis...... 6
Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures ..................................................................... 7
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS ................ 9
Connector Symbols ................................................... 9
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example- ......................... 10
Connector Information ............................................. 12
ABBREVIATIONS ..............................................14
Abbreviation List ...................................................... 14
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD
BOLTS ................................................................19
Description .............................................................. 19
Tightening Torque Table (New Standard Included) ........................................................................... 19
RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS
AND SEALANTS ................................................22
Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants.... 22
Tow Truck Towing ...................................................36
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a Stuck Vehicle) ...........36
J
K
N
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 38
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL
INCIDENT .......................................................... 38
Work Flow ................................................................38
Control Units and Electrical Parts ............................38
How to Check Terminal ...........................................39
Intermittent Incident .................................................42
Circuit Inspection .....................................................45
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION .....................23
Revision: 2011 September
I
TOW TRUCK TOWING ..................................... 36
VEHICLE INFORMATION ............................ 23
Model Variation ....................................................... 23
Information About Identification or Model Code ...... 23
Dimensions ............................................................. 26
Wheels & Tires ........................................................ 27
H
CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM ............. 50
GI-1
Description ...............................................................50
CONSULT Function and System Application*1 .......50
2012 QUEST
O
P
CONSULT/GST Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit .......................................................................... 51
Wiring Diagram - CONSULT/GST CHECKING
SYSTEM - ............................................................... 52
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ................... 53
Revision: 2011 September
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL .................................. 53
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Required
Procedure After Battery Disconnection ................... 53
GI-2
2012 QUEST
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
GI
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Description
INFOID:0000000007492144
This volume explains “Removal, Disassembly, Installation, Inspection and Adjustment” and “Trouble Diagnoses”.
Terms
B
C
INFOID:0000000007492145
• The captions WARNING and CAUTION warn you of steps that must be followed to prevent personal injury
and/or damage to some part of the vehicle.
WARNING indicates the possibility of personal injury if instructions are not followed.
CAUTION indicates the possibility of component damage if instructions are not followed.
BOLD TYPED STATEMENTS except WARNING and CAUTION give you helpful information.
Standard value: Tolerance at inspection and adjustment.
Limit value: The maximum or minimum limit value that should not be exceeded at inspection and adjustment.
Units
D
E
F
INFOID:0000000007492146
• The UNITS given in this manual are primarily expressed as the SI UNIT (International System of Unit), and
alternatively expressed in the metric system and in the yard/pound system.
Also with regard to tightening torque of bolts and nuts, there are descriptions both about range and about the
standard tightening torque.
G
H
“Example”
Range
I
Outer Socket Lock Nut
: 59 - 78 N·m (6.0 - 8.0 kg-m, 43 - 58 ft-lb)
J
Standard
Drive Shaft Installation Bolt
: 44.3 N·m (4.5 kg-m, 33 ft-lb)
K
Contents
INFOID:0000000007492147
• A QUICK REFERENCE INDEX, a black tab (e.g.
) is provided on the first page. You can quickly find the
first page of each section by matching it to the section's black tab.
• THE CONTENTS are listed on the first page of each section.
• THE TITLE is indicated on the upper portion of each page and shows the part or system.
• THE PAGE NUMBER of each section consists of two or three letters which designate the particular section
and a number (e.g. “BR-5”).
• THE SMALL ILLUSTRATIONS show the important steps such as inspection, use of special tools, knacks of
work and hidden or tricky steps which are not shown in the previous large illustrations.
Assembly, inspection and adjustment procedures for the complicated units such as the automatic transaxle
or transmission, etc. are presented in a step-by-step format where necessary.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GI-3
2012 QUEST
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
Relation between Illustrations and Descriptions
INFOID:0000000007492148
The following sample explains the relationship between the part description in an illustration, the part name in
the text and the service procedures.
SAIA0519E
Components
INFOID:0000000007492149
• THE LARGE ILLUSTRATIONS are exploded views (see the following) and contain tightening torques, lubrication points, section number of the PARTS CATALOG (e.g. SEC. 440) and other information necessary to
perform repairs.
The illustrations should be used in reference to service matters only. When ordering parts, refer to the appropriate PARTS CATALOG.
Components shown in an illustration may be identified by a circled number. When this style of illustration is
used, the text description of the components will follow the illustration.
Revision: 2011 September
GI-4
2012 QUEST
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
GI
B
C
D
E
JPFIA0511GB
1.
Cap
2.
Bleeder valve
3.
4.
Piston seal
5.
Piston
6.
Piston boot
7.
Sliding pin
8.
Sliding pin boot
9.
Bushing
F
Cylinder body
G
10. Torque member
: Apply rubber grease.
H
: Apply brake fluid.
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
I
: Always replace after every disassembly
SYMBOLS
J
K
L
M
N
SAIA0749E
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GI-5
2012 QUEST
HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Description
INFOID:0000000007492150
NOTICE:
Trouble diagnoses indicate work procedures required to diagnose problems effectively. Observe the following
instructions before diagnosing.
• Before performing trouble diagnoses, read the “Work Flow” in each section.
• After repairs, re-check that the problem has been completely eliminated.
• Refer to Component Parts and Harness Connector Location for the Systems described in each section for
identification/location of components and harness connectors.
• When checking circuit continuity, ignition switch should be OFF.
• Refer to the Circuit Diagram for quick pinpoint check.
If you need to check circuit continuity between harness connectors in more detail, such as when a sub-harness is used, refer to Wiring Diagram in each individual section and Harness Layout in PG section for identification of harness connectors.
• Before checking voltage at connectors, check battery voltage.
• After accomplishing the Diagnosis Procedures and Electrical Components Inspection, check that all harness
connectors are reconnected as they were.
How to Follow Test Groups in Trouble Diagnosis
INFOID:0000000007492151
JPAIA0021GB
1.
2.
3.
4.
Test group number and test group title
• Test group number and test group title are shown in the upper portion of each test group.
Work and diagnosis procedure
• Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
Questions and results
• Questions and required results are indicated in test group.
Action
• Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question.
Revision: 2011 September
GI-6
2012 QUEST
HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
Key to Symbols Signifying Measurements or Procedures
INFOID:0000000007492152
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
JPAIA0982GB
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GI-7
2012 QUEST
HOW TO FOLLOW TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
JSAIA1461GB
Revision: 2011 September
GI-8
2012 QUEST
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector Symbols
GI
INFOID:0000000007807310
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
• Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by
a single line and followed by the direction mark.
• Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by
a double line and followed by the direction mark.
• Certain systems and components, especially those related to
OBD, may use a new style slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to PG section,
“Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SAIA0257E
I
• Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and
female terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
J
K
L
M
N
O
SGI363
Revision: 2011 September
GI-9
2012 QUEST
P
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
INFOID:0000000007807311
Each section includes wiring diagrams.
JCAWA0150GB
Description
Number
Item
Description
1
Power supply
• This means the power supply of fusible link or fuse.
2
Fuse
• “/” means the fuse.
3
Current rating of fusible
link/fuse
• This means the current rating of the fusible link or fuse.
4
Number of fusible link/
fuse
• This means the number of fusible link or fuse location.
5
Fusible link
• “X” means the fusible link.
6
Connector number
• Alphabetic characters show to which harness the connector is placed.
• Numeric characters show the identification number of connectors.
7
Switch
• This shows that continuity exists between terminals 1 and 2 when the switch is in the A position. Continuity exists between terminals 1 and 3 when the switch is in the B position.
8
Circuit (Wiring)
• This means the wiring.
Revision: 2011 September
GI-10
2012 QUEST
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
Number
Item
Description
GI
9
Shielded line
• The line enclosed by broken line circle shows shield wire.
10
Connectors
• This means that a transmission line bypasses two connectors or more.
11
Option abbreviation
• This means the vehicle specifications which layouts the circuit between “ ”.
12
Relay
• This shows an internal representation of the relay.
13
Optional splice
• The open circle shows that the splice is optional depending on vehicle application.
14
Splice
• The shaded circle “
15
System branch
• This shows that the circuit is branched to other systems.
16
Page crossing
• This circuit continues to an adjacent page.
17
Component name
• This shows the name of a component.
18
Terminal number
• This means the terminal number of a connector.
19
Ground (GND)
• This shows the ground connection.
20
Explation of option description
• This shows a description of the option abbreviation used on the page.
B
C
” means the splice.
D
E
F
SWITCH POSITIONS
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the “normal” condition.
A vehicle is in the “normal” condition when:
• ignition switch is “OFF”
• doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed
• pedals are not depressed
• parking brake is released
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
SGI860
N
MULTIPLE SWITCH
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below.
• The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GI-11
2012 QUEST
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
• The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
JSAIA0017GB
Connector Information
INFOID:0000000007807312
CONNECTOR LIST
Connector information and harness layout are described in “POWER SUPPLY, GROUND & CIRCUIT ELEMENTS” Section.
Connector No.
Harness
Connector Information
Harness Layout
B
Body harness
PG-56, "B Body Harness"
PG-46, "Body Harness"
C
Chassis harness
PG-74, "C Chassis Harness"
PG-48, "Chassis Harness"
D
Door harness
PG-75, "D Door Harness"
PG-49, "Door Harness"
E
Engine room harness
PG-85, "E Engine Room Harness"
PG-42, "Engine Room Harness"
F
Engine control harness
PG-93, "F Engine Control Harness"
PG-44, "Engine Control Harness"
M
Main harness
PG-99, "M Main Harness"
PG-45, "Main Harness"
R
Room lamp harness
PG-116, "R Room Lamp Harness"
PG-54, "Room Lamp Harness"
Revision: 2011 September
GI-12
2012 QUEST
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
HOW TO USE CONNECTOR INFORMATION
GI
B
C
D
E
JCAWA0152GB
Description
Number
Item
F
Description
1
Connector number
• Alphabetic characters show to which harness the connector is placed.
• Numeric characters show the identification number of connectors.
2
Connector type
• This means the connector number. Refer to PG-55, "How to Read Connector Type".
3
Terminal number
• This means the terminal number of a connector.
• This shows a code for the color of the wire.
4
Wire color
H
BR = Brown
OR or O = Orange
P = Pink
PU or V (Violet) = Purple
GY or GR = Gray
SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown
DG = Dark Green
B = Black
W = White
R = Red
G = Green
L = Blue
Y = Yellow
LG = Light Green
BG = Beige
I
J
• When the wire color is striped, the base color is given first, followed by the stripe color as
shown below:
Example: L/W = Blue with White Stripe
5
Connector
G
K
• This means the connector information.
• This unit-side is described by the connector symbols.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GI-13
2012 QUEST
ABBREVIATIONS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
INFOID:0000000007492156
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
A
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
A/C
Air conditioner
A/C
Air conditioning
A/F sensor
Air fuel ratio sensor
A/T
Automatic transaxle/transmission
ABS
Anti-lock braking system
ACCS
ACL
AP
Advance climate control system
Air cleaner
Accelerator pedal
APP
Accelerator pedal position
ATF
Automatic transmission fluid
AV
Audio visual
AWD
All wheel drive
B
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
BARO
Barometric pressure
BCM
Body control module
BLSD
Brake limited slip differential
BPP
Brake pedal position
BSW
Blind spot warning
C
ABBREVIATION
CKP
CL
DESCRIPTION
Crankshaft position
Closed loop
CMP
Camshaft position
CPP
Clutch pedal position
CTP
Closed throttle position
CVT
Continuously variable transaxle/transmission
D
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
D1
Drive range first gear
D2
Drive range second gear
D3
Drive range third gear
D4
Drive range fourth gear
DCA
Distance control assist
DDS
Downhill drive support
DFI
Direct fuel injection system
DLC
Data link connector
DTC
Diagnostic trouble code
Revision: 2011 September
GI-14
2012 QUEST
ABBREVIATIONS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
E
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
E/T
Exhaust temperature
EBD
Electric brake force distribution
EC
Engine control
ECL
Engine coolant level
ECM
Engine control module
ECT
Engine coolant temperature
ECV
Electrical control valve
EEPROM
B
C
Engine fuel temperature
EGR
Exhaust gas recirculation
EGRT
Exhaust gas recirculation temperature
EGT
Exhaust gas temperature
EOP
Engine oil pressure
E
F
Exhaust pressure
EPR
Exhaust pressure regulator
EPS
Electronically controlled power steering
ESP
Electronic stability program system
EVAP canister
EVSE
EXC
D
Electrically erasable programmable read only memory
EFT
EP
GI
G
H
Evaporative emission canister
Electric vehicle supply equipment
Exhaust control
I
F
ABBREVIATION
FC
FCW
DESCRIPTION
Fan control
J
Forward collision warning
FIC
Fuel injector control
FP
Fuel pump
FR
Front
FRP
Fuel rail pressure
FRT
Fuel rail temperature
FTP
Fuel tank pressure
FTT
Fuel tank temperature
K
L
M
G
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
GND
Ground
GPS
Global positioning system
GST
Generic scan tool
N
O
H
ABBREVIATION
HBMC
DESCRIPTION
HDD
Hard disk drive
HO2S
Heated oxygen sensor
HOC
Heated oxidation catalyst
HPCM
P
Hydraulic body-motion control system
Hybrid power train control module
Revision: 2011 September
GI-15
2012 QUEST
ABBREVIATIONS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
I
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
I/M
Inspection and maintenance
IA
Intake air
IAC
Idle air control
IAT
Intake air temperature
IBA
Intelligent brake assist
IC
Ignition control
ICC
Intelligent cruise control
ICM
Ignition control module
IPDM E/R
Intelligent power distribution module engine room
ISC
Idle speed control
ISS
Input shaft speed
K
ABBREVIATION
KS
DESCRIPTION
Knock sensor
L
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
LBC
Li-ion battery controller
LCD
Liquid crystal display
LCU
Local control unit
LDP
Lane departure prevention
LDW
Lane departure warning
LED
Light emitting diode
LH
Left-hand
LIN
Local interconnect network
M
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
M/T
Manual transaxle/transmission
MAF
Mass airflow
MAP
Manifold absolute pressure
MDU
Multi display unit
MI
Malfunction indicator
MIL
Malfunction indicator lamp
N
ABBREVIATION
NOX
DESCRIPTION
Nitrogen oxides
O
ABBREVIATION
O2
DESCRIPTION
Oxygen
O2S
Oxygen sensor
OBD
On board diagnostic
OC
Oxidation catalytic converter
OD
Overdrive
OL
Open loop
OSS
Output shaft speed
Revision: 2011 September
GI-16
2012 QUEST
ABBREVIATIONS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
P
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
P/S
Power steering
PBR
Potentio balance resistor
PCV
Positive crankcase ventilation
PNP
Park/Neutral position
PSP
Power steering pressure
PTC
Positive temperature coefficient
PTO
Power takeoff
PWM
Pulse width modulation
GI
B
C
D
R
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
RAM
Random access memory
RAS
Rear active steer
RH
Right-hand
ROM
Read only memory
RPM
Engine speed
RR
E
F
G
Rear
S
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
SAE
Society of Automotive Engineers, Inc.
SCK
Serial clock
SDS
Service Data and Specifications
SRT
System readiness test
SST
Special Service Tools
H
I
J
T
ABBREVIATION
TC
DESCRIPTION
Transmission control module
TCS
Traction control system
TCU
Telematics communication unit
TP
TPMS
K
Turbocharger
TCM
L
Throttle position
Tire pressure monitoring system
TSS
Turbine shaft speed
TWC
Three way catalytic converter
M
N
U
ABBREVIATION
USS
DESCRIPTION
Uphill start support
O
V
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
VCM
Vehicle control module
VDC
Vehicle dynamics control system
VIN
Vehicle identification number
VSS
Vehicle speed sensor
Revision: 2011 September
P
GI-17
2012 QUEST
ABBREVIATIONS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
W
ABBREVIATION
WOT
DESCRIPTION
Wide open throttle
1
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
11
1st range first gear
12
1st range second gear
1GR
First gear
2
ABBREVIATION
DESCRIPTION
21
2nd range first gear
22
2nd range second gear
2GR
Second gear
2WD
2-wheel drive
3
ABBREVIATION
3GR
DESCRIPTION
Third gear
4
ABBREVIATION
4GR
DESCRIPTION
Fourth gear
4WAS
Four wheel active steer
4WD
Four wheel drive
5
ABBREVIATION
5GR
DESCRIPTION
Fifth gear
6
ABBREVIATION
6GR
DESCRIPTION
Sixth gear
7
ABBREVIATION
7GR
DESCRIPTION
Seventh gear
Revision: 2011 September
GI-18
2012 QUEST
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS
GI
Description
INFOID:0000000007492157
This vehicle has both new standard based on ISO* and previous standard bolts/nuts. There are some differences between these two types of bolts/ nuts; shape of the head, grade of strength, hexagonal width across
flats and the standard tightening torque.
• For guidance in discriminating, refer to GI-19, "Tightening Torque Table (New Standard Included)".
• The new standard machine screws and tapping screws have a head of ISO standard torx recess.
• If the tightening torque is not described in the description or figure, refer to GI-19, "Tightening Torque Table
(New Standard Included)".
*ISO: International Organization for Standardization
Tightening Torque Table (New Standard Included)
PREVIOUS STANDARD
4T
7T
9T
E
F
Tightening torque (Without lubricant)
Hexagonal
width
across flats
mm
Pitch
mm
M6
6.0
10
M8
8.0
12
Hexagon head bolt
Hexagon flange bolt
H
N·m
kg-m
ft-lb
in-lb
N·m
kg-m
ft-lb
in-lb
1.0
5.5
0.56
4
49
7
0.71
5
62
1.25
13.5
1.4
10
—
17
1.7
13
—
1.0
13.5
1.4
10
—
17
1.7
13
—
1.5
28
2.9
21
—
35
3.6
26
—
1.25
28
2.9
21
—
35
3.6
26
—
1.75
45
4.6
33
—
55
5.6
41
—
1.25
45
4.6
33
—
65
6.6
48
—
M10
10.0
14
M12
12.0
17
M14
14.0
19
1.5
80
8.2
59
—
100
10
74
—
M6
6.0
10
1.0
9
0.92
7
80
11
1.1
8
97
1.25
22
2.2
16
—
28
2.9
21
—
1.0
22
2.2
16
—
28
2.9
21
—
1.5
45
4.6
33
—
55
5.6
41
—
1.25
45
4.6
33
—
55
5.6
41
—
1.75
80
8.2
59
—
100
10
74
—
1.25
80
8.2
59
—
100
10
74
—
M8
8.0
12
M10
10.0
14
M12
12.0
17
M14
14.0
19
1.5
130
13
96
—
170
17
125
—
M6
6.0
10
1.0
11
1.1
8
—
13.5
1.4
10
—
1.25
28
2.9
21
—
35
3.6
26
—
1.0
28
2.9
21
—
35
3.6
26
—
1.5
55
5.6
41
—
80
8.2
59
—
1.25
55
5.6
41
—
80
8.2
59
—
1.75
100
10
74
—
130
13
96
—
1.25
100
10
74
—
130
13
96
—
1.5
170
17
125
—
210
21
155
—
M8
8.0
12
M10
10.0
14
M12
12.0
17
M14
14.0
19
CAUTION:
Revision: 2011 September
D
G
Bolt diameter
mm
Bolt
size
C
INFOID:0000000007492158
CAUTION:
• The special parts are excluded.
• The bolts/nuts in these tables have a strength (discrimination) number/symbol assigned to the head
or the like. As to the relation between the strength grade in these tables and the strength (discrimination) number/symbol, refer to “DISCRIMINATION OF BOLTS AND NUTS”.
Grade
(Strength
grade)
B
GI-19
2012 QUEST
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
The parts with aluminum or the cast iron washer surface/thread surface are excluded.
NEW STANDARD BASED ON ISO
Grade
(Strength
grade)
4.8
(Without
lubricant)
4.8
(With lubricant)
8.8
(With lubricant)
10.9
(With lubricant)
Tightening torque
Bolt diameter
mm
Hexagonal
width
across flats
mm
Pitch
mm
M6
6.0
10
M8
8.0
13
M10
10.0
16
Bolt
size
Hexagon head bolt
Hexagon flange bolt
N·m
kg-m
ft-lb
in-lb
N·m
kg-m
ft-lb
in-lb
1.0
5.5
0.56
4
49
7
0.71
5
62
1.25
13.5
1.4
10
—
17
1.7
13
—
1.0
13.5
1.4
10
—
17
1.7
13
—
1.5
28
2.9
21
—
35
3.6
26
—
1.25
28
2.9
21
—
35
3.6
26
—
1.75
45
4.6
33
—
55
5.6
41
—
1.25
45
4.6
33
—
65
6.6
48
—
M12
12.0
18
M14
14.0
21
1.5
80
8.2
59
—
100
10
74
—
M6
6.0
10
1.0
4
0.41
3
35
5.5
0.56
4
49
M8
8.0
13
1.25
11
1.1
8
—
13.5
1.4
10
—
1.0
11
1.1
8
—
13.5
1.4
10
—
M10
10.0
16
1.5
22
2.2
16
—
28
2.9
21
—
1.25
22
2.2
16
—
28
2.9
21
—
1.75
35
3.6
26
—
45
4.6
33
—
1.25
35
3.6
26
—
45
4.6
33
—
M12
12.0
18
M14
14.0
21
1.5
65
6.6
48
—
80
8.2
59
—
M6
6.0
10
1.0
8
0.82
6
71
10
1.0
7
89
M8
8.0
13
1.25
21
2.1
15
—
25
2.6
18
—
1.0
21
2.1
15
—
25
2.6
18
—
M10
10.0
16
M12
12.0
18
M14
14.0
M6
1.5
40
4.1
30
—
50
5.1
37
—
1.25
40
4.1
30
—
50
5.1
37
—
1.75
70
7.1
52
—
85
8.7
63
—
1.25
70
7.1
52
—
85
8.7
63
—
21
1.5
120
12
89
—
140
14
103
—
6.0
10
1.0
10
1.0
7
89
12
1.2
9
106
M8
8.0
13
1.25
27
2.8
20
—
32
3.3
24
—
1.0
27
2.8
20
—
32
3.3
24
—
M10
10.0
16
M12
12.0
18
M14
14.0
21
1.5
55
5.6
41
—
65
6.6
48
—
1.25
55
5.6
41
—
65
6.6
48
—
1.75
95
9.7
70
—
110
11
81
—
1.25
95
9.7
70
—
110
11
81
—
1.5
160
16
118
—
180
18
133
—
CAUTION:
1. Use tightening torque with lubricant for the new standard bolts/nuts in principle. Friction coefficient stabilizer is applied to the new standard bolts/nuts.
2. However, use tightening torque without lubricant for the following cases. Friction coefficient stabilizer is not applied to the following bolts/nuts.
Grade 4.8, M6 size bolt, Conical spring washer installed
Paint removing nut (Size M6 and M8) for fixing with weld bolt
Revision: 2011 September
GI-20
2012 QUEST
TIGHTENING TORQUE OF STANDARD BOLTS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
DISCRIMINATION OF BOLTS AND NUTS
GI
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
SAIA0453E
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GI-21
2012 QUEST
RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS
< HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL >
RECOMMENDED CHEMICAL PRODUCTS AND SEALANTS
Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants
INFOID:0000000007492159
Refer to the following chart for help in selecting the appropriate chemical product or sealant.
1
2
3
6
Aftermarket Crossreference Part Nos.
Rear View Mirror Adhesive
Used to permanently remount rear view mirrors to
windows.
999MP-AM000P
99998-50505
Permatex 81844
Anaerobic Liquid Gasket
For metal-to-metal flange
sealing.
Can fill a 0.38 mm (0.015
inch) gap and provide instant sealing for most
powertrain applications.
999MP-AM001P
99998-50503
Permatex 51813 and
51817
High Performance
Thread Sealant
Provides instant sealing on
any threaded straight or
parallel threaded fitting.
(Thread sealant only, no
locking ability.)
• Do not use on plastic.
999MP-AM002P
999MP-AM002P
Permatex 56521
99998-50506
(Ultra Grey)
Permatex Ultra Grey
82194;
Three Bond
1207,1215, 1216,
1217F, 1217G and
1217H
Nissan RTV Part No.
999MP-A7007
999MP-AM003P
(Ultra Grey)
Silicone RTV
Gasket Maker for Maxima/
Quest 5-speed automatic
transmission
(RE5F22A)
5
Nissan Canada Part
No. (Canada)
Purpose
Gasket Maker
4
Nissan North America
Part No. (USA)
Product Description
High Temperature,
High Strength Thread
Locking Sealant (Red)
Medium Strength
Thread Locking Sealant (Blue)
Revision: 2011 September
Threadlocker
Threadlocker (service tool
removable)
–
999MP-AM004P
999MP-AM005P
GI-22
–
Three Bond 1281B
or exact equivalent in
its quality
999MP-AM004P
Permatex 27200;
Three Bond 1360,
1360N, 1305 N&P,
1307N, 1335,
1335B, 1363B,
1377C, 1386B, D&E
and 1388
Loctite 648
999MP-AM005P
Permatex 24200,
24206, 24240,
24283 and 09178;
Three Bond 1322,
1322N, 1324 D&N,
1333D, 1361C,
1364D, 1370C and
1374
2012 QUEST
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
< VEHICLE INFORMATION >
VEHICLE INFORMATION
GI
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
Model Variation
Destination
Body
INFOID:0000000007492160
Engine
Axle
Handle
Transmission
USA
4-door wagon
VQ35DE
2WD
LHD
Canada
CVT
Grade
Model
3.5S
VLJALLZ-EU7
3.5SV
VLJALRZ-EU7
3.5SL
VLJALPZ-EU7
3.5LE
VLJALGZ-EU7
3.5S
VLJALLZ-EN7
3.5SV
VLJALRZ-EN7
3.5SL
VLJALPZ-EN7
3.5LE
VLJALGZ-EN7
B
C
D
E
F
Model variation code (Prefix and suffix designations)
G
H
I
J
K
JSAIA1903GB
Information About Identification or Model Code
L
INFOID:0000000007492161
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GI-23
2012 QUEST
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
< VEHICLE INFORMATION >
JSAIA1703ZZ
1.
Vehicle identification number plate
2.
Emission control information label
3.
Air conditioner specification label
4.
FMVSS certification label /
CMVSS certification label
5.
Tire and loading information label
6.
Vehicle identification numbe
(Chassis number)
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ARRANGEMENT
JSAIA1901GB
CERTIFICATION LABEL
FMVSS Certification Label
Revision: 2011 September
GI-24
2012 QUEST
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
< VEHICLE INFORMATION >
GI
B
C
D
E
JSAIA1700ZZ
1.
MFR Month/Year
2.
Gross vehicle weight rating
3.
Gross axle weight ratihng (Front)
4.
Tire size
5.
Wheel size
6.
Tire inflation pressure
7.
Gross axle weight rating (Rear)
8.
Vehicle identification number
9.
Verification model code
10. Body color number
11. Trim color number
12. Transmission type
13. Axle type
14. Engine type
15. Engine displacement
F
G
H
16. Vin bar code
CMVSS Certification Label
I
J
K
L
M
N
JSAIA1701ZZ
1.
MFR Month/Year
2.
Gross vehicle weight rating
3.
Gross axle weight ratihng (Front)
4.
Tire size
5.
Wheel size
6.
Tire inflation pressure
7.
Gross axle weight rating (Rear)
8.
Vehicle identification number
9.
Verification model code
10. Body color number
11. Trim color number
12. Transmission type
13. Axle type
14. Engine type
15. Engine displacement
P
16. Vin bar code
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
Revision: 2011 September
GI-25
O
2012 QUEST
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
< VEHICLE INFORMATION >
: Vehicle front
JPAIA0388ZZ
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION SERIAL NUMBER
: Vehicle front
JPAIA0389ZZ
Dimensions
INFOID:0000000007492162
Unit: mm (in)
5,100 (200.8)*1
Overall length
5,110 (201.2)*2
Overall width
1,970 (77.6)
1,815 (71.5)*3
Overall height
1,855 (73.0)*4
1,730 (68.1)*5
Front tread
1,720 (67.7)*6
1,730 (68.1)*5
Rear tread
1,720 (67.7)*6
Wheelbase
3,000 (118.1)
*1: Without front licence plate bracket
*2: With front licence plate bracket
*3: Without roof rail
*4: With roof rail
*5: 16-inch tire equipped models
*6: 18-inch tire equipped models
Revision: 2011 September
GI-26
2012 QUEST
IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
< VEHICLE INFORMATION >
Wheels & Tires
INFOID:0000000007492163
GI
Tire
16 inch
Conventional
P225/65R16 99T
Road wheel
(Steel)
Size
Road wheel
(Aluminum)
Size
Offset
Offset
Tire
18 inch
Road wheel
(Aluminum)
16 inch
Road wheel
(Steel)
B
50 mm (1.97 in)
16 × 7J
50 mm (1.97 in)
C
P235/55R18 99T
Size
Offset
18 × 7J
D
55 mm (2.17 in)
T135/80D16 101M
T135/90D16 102M
Tire
Spare
16 × 6-1/2JJ
Size
Offset
E
16 × 4T
30 mm (1.18 in)
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GI-27
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Description
INFOID:0000000007492164
Observe the following precautions to ensure safe and proper servicing. These precautions are not
described in each individual section.
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000007492165
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precautions For Xenon Headlamp Service
INFOID:0000000007492166
WARNING:
Comply with the following warnings to prevent any serious accident.
• Disconnect the battery cable (negative terminal) or the power supply fuse before installing, removing, or touching the xenon headlamp (bulb included). The xenon headlamp contains high-voltage
generated parts.
• Never work with wet hands.
• Check the xenon headlamp ON-OFF status after assembling it to the vehicle. Never turn the xenon
headlamp ON in other conditions. Connect the power supply to the vehicle-side connector.
(Turning it ON outside the lamp case may cause fire or visual impairments.)
• Never touch the bulb glass immediately after turning it OFF. It is extremely hot.
CAUTION:
Comply with the following cautions to prevent any error and malfunction.
• Install the xenon bulb securely. (Insufficient bulb socket installation may melt the bulb, the connector, the housing, etc. by high-voltage leakage or corona discharge.)
• Never perform HID circuit inspection with a tester.
• Never touch the xenon bulb glass with hands. Never put oil and grease on it.
• Dispose of the used xenon bulb after packing it in thick vinyl without breaking it.
• Never wipe out dirt and contamination with organic solvent (thinner, gasoline, etc.).
Revision: 2011 September
GI-28
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover
INFOID:0000000007492167
GI
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.
B
C
D
PIIB3706J
Cautions in Removing Battery Terminal and AV Control Unit (Models with AV Control
Unit)
E
INFOID:0000000007492168
CAUTION:
Remove battery terminal and AV control unit after a lapse of 30 seconds or more after turning the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:
After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the AV control unit continues operating for approximately 30 seconds.
Therefore, data corruption may occur if battery voltage is cut off within 30 seconds.
General Precautions
F
G
INFOID:0000000007492169
H
• Do not operate the engine for an extended period of time without
proper exhaust ventilation.
Keep the work area well ventilated and free of any inflammable
materials. Special care should be taken when handling any inflammable or poisonous materials, such as gasoline, refrigerant gas,
etc. When working in a pit or other enclosed area, be sure to properly ventilate the area before working with hazardous materials.
Do not smoke while working on the vehicle.
I
J
K
SGI285
L
• Before jacking up the vehicle, apply wheel chocks or other tire
blocks to the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. After jacking up the vehicle, support the vehicle weight with safety stands at
the points designated for proper lifting before working on the vehicle.
These operations should be done on a level surface.
• When removing a heavy component such as the engine or
transaxle/transmission, be careful not to lose your balance and
drop them. Also, do not allow them to strike adjacent parts, especially the brake tubes and master cylinder.
M
N
SGI231
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GI-29
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Before starting repairs which do not require battery power:
Turn off ignition switch.
Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
• If the battery terminals are disconnected, recorded memory of
radio and each control unit is erased.
SEF289H
• To prevent serious burns:
Avoid contact with hot metal parts.
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.
• Dispose of drained oil or the solvent used for cleaning parts in an
appropriate manner.
• Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle
shuts off automatically.
Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray
and possibly a fire.
• Clean all disassembled parts in the designated liquid or solvent
prior to inspection or assembly.
• Replace oil seals, gaskets, packings, O-rings, locking washers,
cotter pins, self-locking nuts, etc. with new ones.
• Replace inner and outer races of tapered roller bearings and needle bearings as a set.
• Arrange the disassembled parts in accordance with their assembled locations and sequence.
• Do not touch the terminals of electrical components which use microcomputers (such as ECM).
Static electricity may damage internal electronic components.
• After disconnecting vacuum or air hoses, attach a tag to indicate the proper connection.
• Use only the fluids and lubricants specified in this manual.
• Use approved bonding agent, sealants or their equivalents when required.
• Use hand tools, power tools (disassembly only) and recommended
special tools where specified for safe and efficient service repairs.
• When repairing the fuel, oil, water, vacuum or exhaust systems,
check all affected lines for leakage.
SGI233
JPAIA0335ZZ
• Before servicing the vehicle:
Protect fenders, upholstery and carpeting with appropriate covers.
Take caution that keys, buckles or buttons do not scratch paint.
SGI234
WARNING:
To prevent ECM from storing the diagnostic trouble codes, never carelessly disconnect the harness
connectors which are related to the engine control system and TCM (transmission control module)
Revision: 2011 September
GI-30
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
system. The connectors should be disconnected only when working according to the WORK FLOW of
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES in EC and TM sections.
GI
Three Way Catalyst
INFOID:0000000007492170
If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be excessively high. To
prevent this, follow the instructions.
• Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst.
• When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only when necessary.
• Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing damage to the
catalyst.
Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material off the exhaust pipe and the three
way catalyst.
Multiport Fuel Injection System or Engine Control System
INFOID:0000000007492171
• Before connecting or disconnecting any harness connector for the
multiport fuel injection system or ECM:
Turn ignition switch to “OFF” position.
Disconnect negative battery terminal.
Otherwise, there may be damage to ECM.
• Before disconnecting pressurized fuel line from fuel pump to injectors, be sure to release fuel pressure.
• Be careful not to jar components such as ECM and mass air flow
sensor.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
SGI787
Hoses
INFOID:0000000007492172
I
HOSE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
• To prevent damage to rubber hose, do not pry off rubber hose with
tapered tool or screwdriver.
J
K
L
SMA019D
• To reinstall the rubber hose securely, check that hose insertion
length and orientation is correct. (If tube is equipped with hose
stopper, insert rubber hose into tube until it butts up against hose
stopper.)
M
N
O
P
SMA020D
HOSE CLAMPING
Revision: 2011 September
GI-31
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• If old rubber hose is re-used, install hose clamp in its original position (at the indentation where the old clamp was). If there is a trace
of tube bulging left on the old rubber hose, align rubber hose at
that position.
• Discard old clamps; replace with new ones.
SMA021D
• After installing plate clamps, apply force to them in the direction of
the arrow, tightening rubber hose equally all around.
SMA022D
Engine Oils
INFOID:0000000007492173
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin contact
with used oil.
If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils.
Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable.
Do not put oily rags in pockets.
Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil.
Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be cleaned regularly.
First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the skin.
Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help). Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.
Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.
If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay.
Where practical, degrease components prior to handling.
Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical goggles or face
shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for advice on disposal
facilities.
It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources.
The regulations concerning pollution vary between regions.
Air Conditioning
INFOID:0000000007492174
Use an approved refrigerant recovery unit any time the air conditioning system must be discharged. Refer to
HA section “REFRIGERANT” for specific instructions.
Revision: 2011 September
GI-32
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
Fuel
INFOID:0000000007492175
GI
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research
octane number 91).
B
CAUTION:
• Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may
also affect warranty coverage.
• Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way
catalyst.
• Do not use E-85 fuel in the vehicle. The vehicle is not designed to run on E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel
can damage the fuel system components and is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GI-33
2012 QUEST
LIFTING POINT
< PRECAUTION >
LIFTING POINT
Commercial Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007492176
Tool name
Description
Board on attachment
S-NT001
Safety stand attachment
S-NT002
CAUTION:
• Every time the vehicle is lifted up, maintain the complete vehicle curb condition.
• Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the front side (engine,
transmission, suspension etc.), support a jack up point on the rear side garage jack with a mission
jack or equivalent.
• Since the vehicle's center of gravity changes when removing main parts on the rear side (rear axle,
suspension, etc.), support a jack up point on the front side garage jack with a mission jack or equivalent.
• Be careful not to smash or never do anything that would affect piping parts.
Garage Jack and Safety Stand and 2-Pole Lift
INFOID:0000000007492177
WARNING:
• Park the vehicle on a level surface when using the jack. Check to avoid damaging pipes, tubes, etc.
under the vehicle.
• Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands when
you have to get under the vehicle.
• Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
• When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of
the vehicle are well balanced.
• When setting the lift arm, never allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, fuel lines and
sill spoiler.
Revision: 2011 September
GI-34
2012 QUEST
LIFTING POINT
< PRECAUTION >
GI
B
C
D
E
F
JMAIA0349ZZ
1.
Safety stand point and lift up point (front) 2.
4.
Garage jack point (rear)
Safety stand point and lift up point
(rear)
3.
Garage jack point (front)
G
CAUTION:
There is canister just behind Garage jack point rear. Jack up carefully.
Board-On Lift
H
INFOID:0000000007492178
CAUTION:
Check vehicle is empty when lifting.
• The board-on lift attachment (A) set at front end of vehicle should be set on the front of the sill under
the front door opening.
• Position attachments at front and rear ends of board-on lift.
I
J
: Vehicle front
K
Size of attachment
L: 200 mm (7.87 in), W: 90 mm
(3.54 in), H: 110 mm (4.33 in)
L
M
JMAIA0295ZZ
• When using lift attachment (B), set lift attachment so that its
width center contacts to side sill as shown in the figure.
N
: Vehicle front
O
Size of attachment
L: 1400 mm (55.12 in), W: 120 mm
(4.72 in), H: 100 mm (3.94 in)
P
JMAIA0005ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
GI-35
2012 QUEST
TOW TRUCK TOWING
< PRECAUTION >
TOW TRUCK TOWING
Tow Truck Towing
INFOID:0000000007492179
CAUTION:
• All applicable state or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation
must be obeyed.
• It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage to the vehicle during towing operation. Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer.
• Always attach safety chains before towing.
• When towing, check that the transmission, steering system and powertrain are in good order. If any
unit is damaged, dollies must be used.
• Never tow a CVT model from the rear (that is backward) with four wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission.
2WD MODELS
JMAIA0233ZZ
NISSAN recommends that vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or that a dolly be
used as illustrated.
CAUTION:
• Never tow CVT models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or
backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission.
If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, always use towing dollies under the
front wheels.
• When towing CVT models with the front wheels on towing dollies:
- Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by turning the ignition switch to
the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism.
- Move the selector lever to the N (Neutral) position.
• When the battery of vehicle equipped with the Intelligent Key system is discharged, your vehicle
should be towed with the front wheels on towing dollies or place the vehicle on a flat bed truck.
• When towing two wheel drive CVT model with the rear wheels on the ground (if you do not use towing dollies): Always release the parking brake.
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a Stuck Vehicle)
INFOID:0000000007492180
FRONT
Securely install the vehicle recovery hook stored with jacking tools.
Check that the hook is properly secured in the stored place after use.
WARNING:
• Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
Revision: 2011 September
GI-36
2012 QUEST
TOW TRUCK TOWING
< PRECAUTION >
• Never spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury.
Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.
GI
CAUTION:
• Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the vehicle recovery hooks or main structural members of the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle body will be damaged.
B
• Never use the vehicle tie downs to free a vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc. Never tow the vehicle using the vehicle tie downs or recovery hooks.
• Always pull the cable straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull on the hook at an angle.
• Pulling devices should be routed so they never touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake or C
cooling systems.
• Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use in vehicle towing or recovery.
D
E
F
JMAIA0348ZZ
G
REAR
WARNING:
• Rear hook is not available.
H
I
J
JMAIA0286ZZ
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GI-37
2012 QUEST
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000007492181
WORK FLOW
SGI838
STEP
DESCRIPTION
Get detailed information about the conditions and the environment when the incident occurred.
The following are key pieces of information required to make a good analysis:
STEP 1
WHAT
Vehicle Model, Engine, Transmission/Transaxle and the System (i.e. Radio).
WHEN
Date, Time of Day, Weather Conditions, Frequency.
WHERE
Road Conditions, Altitude and Traffic Situation.
HOW
System Symptoms, Operating Conditions (Other Components Interaction).
Service History and if any After Market Accessories have been installed.
STEP 2
Operate the system, road test if necessary.
Verify the parameter of the incident.
If the problem cannot be duplicated, refer to “Incident Simulation Tests”.
STEP 3
Get the proper diagnosis materials together including:
• Power Supply Routing
• System Operation Descriptions
• Applicable Service Manual Sections
• Check for any Service Bulletins
Identify where to begin diagnosis based upon your knowledge of the system operation and the customer comments.
STEP 4
Inspect the system for mechanical binding, loose connectors or wiring damage.
Determine which circuits and components are involved and diagnose using the Power Supply Routing and Harness Layouts.
STEP 5
Repair or replace the incident circuit or component.
STEP 6
Operate the system in all modes. Verify the system works properly under all conditions. Check you have not inadvertently created a new incident during your diagnosis or repair steps.
Control Units and Electrical Parts
INFOID:0000000007492182
PRECAUTIONS
•
•
•
•
Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component parts.
Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
Revision: 2011 September
GI-38
2012 QUEST
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
• Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
• Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid
temperature changes and do not let water or rain get on it. If water
is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the vehicle.
• Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
• Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
• Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper
and lower covers.
GI
B
C
SAIA0255E
D
• When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to
each other to prevent the power transistor in the control unit from
damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
• When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the
specified check adapter.
E
F
G
H
I
J
SEF348N
How to Check Terminal
K
INFOID:0000000007492183
L
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
• Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
• The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI connectors
and terminals. For detailed connector and terminal pin replacement procedures, refer to the latest NISSAN/
INFINITI CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN SERVICE MANUAL.
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GI-39
2012 QUEST
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
(J38751-95NI)
Connector and terminal
pin kit (NISSAN)
(J38751-95INF)
Connector and terminal
pin kit (INFINITI)
(J42992-98KIT)
OBD and terminal repair
kit
(J42992-2000UPD)
OBD-II Connector Kit Update
Description
WAIA0004E
WAIA0005E
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
• Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the connector during circuit checks.
• The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly probe the
connector, follow the procedures below using a “T” pin. For the best contact grasp the “T” pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed
from harness side with “T” pin.
• If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector,
remove the rear cover before probing the terminal.
• Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to
the seal between wire and connector may result.
SGI841
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
• There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each
terminal with the “T” pin through the notch.
Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal
into female terminal.
SEL265V
Revision: 2011 September
GI-40
2012 QUEST
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
• Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To
probe each terminal, remove the connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
GI
B
C
SEL266V
D
MALE TERMINAL
• Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a “T”
pin.
CAUTION:
Never bend terminal.
E
F
G
SEL267V
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
• An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
• If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
NOTE:
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal
side up.
H
I
J
K
L
SEL270V
3.
While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male
terminal into the female terminal.
CAUTION:
Never force the male terminal into the female terminal with
your hands.
M
N
O
SEL271V
Revision: 2011 September
GI-41
2012 QUEST
P
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal
can be easily inserted or not.
SEL272V
• If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
SEL273V
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
• Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal
between the male and female connectors. If the seal is missing,
the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
• The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected.
Whenever connectors are reconnected, check the rubber seal is
properly installed on either side of male or female connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
• The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a
waterproof connector. Be sure that the seal is installed properly.
SEL275V
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector.
An unlocked terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
SEL330V
Intermittent Incident
INFOID:0000000007492184
DESCRIPTION
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible, re-create the
conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble Found Diagnosis. The fol-
Revision: 2011 September
GI-42
2012 QUEST
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
lowing section illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the owner experiences an
electrical incident.
GI
The section is broken into the six following topics:
• Vehicle vibration
• Heat sensitive
• Freezing
• Water intrusion
• Electrical load
• Cold or hot start up
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the conditions of the
problem.
VEHICLE VIBRATION
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating (idle with
A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to the following illustration.
Connector & Harness
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are inspecting. Gently
shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident you are trying to duplicate.
This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
Hint
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to disconnect, inspect and clean the
terminals on related connectors in the system.
Sensor & Relay
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting.
This test may indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
SGI839
Engine Compartment
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some of the
things to check for are:
• Connectors not fully seated.
• Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
• Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
• Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
• Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections. (Refer to Ground
Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded. Then check for loose connection
by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the
wiring for continuity.
Behind the Instrument Panel
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a screw.
Under Seating Areas
Revision: 2011 September
GI-43
2012 QUEST
M
N
O
P
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide guides)
during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for possible damage or
pinching.
HEAT SENSITIVE
• The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car
has sat for a short time. In such cases you will want to check for a
heat sensitive condition.
• To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the
component with a heat gun or equivalent.
CAUTION:
Never heat components above 60°C (140°F).
• If incident occurs while heating the unit, either replace or properly
insulate the component.
JPAIA0733GB
FREEZING
• The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car
warms up (winter time). The cause could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
• There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for
the owner to leave his car overnight. Check it will get cold enough
to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those
electrical components which could be affected.
• The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer
long enough for any water to freeze. Reinstall the part into the car
and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs, repair or
replace the component.
SGI843
WATER INTRUSION
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy
weather. In such cases the incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking the car
or running it through a car wash.
CAUTION:
Never spray water directly on any electrical components.
SGI844
ELECTRICAL LOAD
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with
all accessories (including A/C, rear window defogger, radio, fog
lamps) turned on.
SGI845
COLD OR HOT START UP
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may occur when
the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to keep the car overnight to
make a proper diagnosis.
Revision: 2011 September
GI-44
2012 QUEST
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Circuit Inspection
INFOID:0000000007492185
GI
DESCRIPTION
• In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also, get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate equipment and follow
the correct test procedure.
• You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the wiring
harness or electrical component to do this.
OPEN
A circuit is open when there is no continuity through a section of the circuit.
B
C
D
There are two types of shorts.
SHORT
• SHORT CIRCUIT
When a circuit contacts another circuit and causes the normal resistance to
change.
• SHORT TO GROUND
When a circuit contacts a ground source and grounds the circuit.
NOTE:
Refer to GI-39, "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
E
F
TESTING FOR “OPENS” IN THE CIRCUIT
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the system. This
will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
G
H
I
J
SGI846-A
Continuity Check Method
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the resistance
function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol). Check to always start with
the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
• Disconnect the battery negative cable.
• Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this example)
• Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
• Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
• Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the circuit
has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
• Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of the
circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Voltage Check Method
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the presence of voltage.
This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
• Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
• Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
• With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage.
voltage: open is further down the circuit than SW1.
Revision: 2011 September
GI-45
2012 QUEST
K
L
M
N
O
P
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
no voltage: open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
• Close SW1 and probe at relay.
voltage: open is further down the circuit than the relay.
no voltage: open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
• Close the relay and probe at the solenoid.
voltage: open is further down the circuit than the solenoid.
no voltage: open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
TESTING FOR “SHORTS” IN THE CIRCUIT
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
SGI847-A
Resistance Check Method
• Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
• Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse.
• Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a known
good ground.
• With SW1 open, check for continuity.
continuity: short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point A).
no continuity: short is further down the circuit than SW1.
• Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known good ground.
Then, check for continuity.
continuity: short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity: short is further down the circuit than the relay.
• Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a
known good ground. Then, check for continuity.
continuity: short is between relay and solenoid (point C).
no continuity: check solenoid, retrace steps.
Voltage Check Method
• Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through the fuse.
• Turn the ignition switch to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of the fuse
terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a known good ground).
• With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
voltage: short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
no voltage: short is further down the circuit than SW1.
• With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for
voltage.
voltage: short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no voltage: short is further down the circuit than the relay.
• With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage.
voltage: short is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C).
no voltage: retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
GROUND INSPECTION
• Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits. Ground
connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The corrosion (rust) can
become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the way a circuit works.
• Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground can
drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect the circuit.
Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the surface.
Revision: 2011 September
GI-46
2012 QUEST
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
• When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
GI
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
B
- Inspect for “add-on” accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Check all of the wires
are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are cased in one eyelet
check no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
C
• For detailed ground distribution information, refer to “Ground Distribution” in PG section.
D
E
F
G
H
SGI853
I
VOLTAGE DROP TESTS
• Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance. A voltage
drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
• Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand of wire
will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates, this single strand
of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high resistance to the current. This will
be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
• Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
• If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
Measuring Voltage Drop — Accumulated Method
• Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead of the
DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
• Operate the circuit.
• The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to “push” current through that part of the circuit.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GI-47
2012 QUEST
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
SGI974
Measuring Voltage Drop — Step-by-Step
• The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such as those
in “Computer Controlled Systems”).
• Circuits in the “Computer Controlled System” operate on very low amperage.
• The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in resistance in the
system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper installation, improper wire
gauge or corrosion.
• The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
SAIA0258E
CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT TEST
System Description
• When the switch is ON, the control unit lights up the lamp.
CASE 1
MGI034A
Revision: 2011 September
GI-48
2012 QUEST
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Terminal No.
+
1
2
−
Description
Signal name
Body
ground
Switch
Body
ground
Lamp
Value (Approx.)
In case of high resistance such as single
strand (V) *
Switch ON
Battery voltage
Lower than battery voltage Approx. 8 (Example)
Switch OFF
0V
Switch ON
Battery voltage
Switch OFF
0V
Condition
Input/
Output
Input
Output
GI
B
Approx. 0
Approx. 0 (Inoperative lamp)
C
Approx. 0
• The voltage value is based on the body ground.
• *: If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 1 does not detect battery voltage. Control unit
does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not supply power to light up the
lamp.
D
E
CASE 2
F
G
H
MGI035A
INPUT-OUTPUT VOLTAGE CHART
Terminal No.
+
−
Description
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
1
Body
ground
Lamp
Output
2
Body
ground
Switch
Input
Value (Approx.)
In case of high resistance such as single
strand (V) *
I
Battery voltage (Inoperative lamp)
J
Switch ON
0V
Switch OFF
Battery voltage
Switch ON
0V
Higher than 0 Approx. 4 (Example)
Switch OFF
5V
Approx. 5
Battery voltage
K
• The voltage value is based on the body ground.
• *: If high resistance exists in the switch side circuit (caused by a single strand), terminal 2 does not detect approx. 0 V. Control unit
does not detect the switch is ON even if the switch does not turn ON. Therefore, the control unit does not control ground to light up the
lamp.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GI-49
2012 QUEST
CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM
< BASIC INSPECTION >
CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
INFOID:0000000007492186
• When CONSULT/GST is connected with a data link connector (A)
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control
unit equipped in the vehicle and then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
1
: Instrument lower panel LH
• Refer to “CONSULT Software Operation Manual” for more information.
JSAIA1705ZZ
CONSULT Function and System Application*1
INFOID:0000000007492187
FUNCTION
Mode
Function
All DTC Reading
Display all DTCs or diagnostic items that all ECUs are recording and judging.
Work Support
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately.
Self Diagnostic Results
Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items.
Data Monitor
Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time.
CAN Diagnosis
This mode displays a network diagnosis result about CAN by diagram.
CAN Diagnosis Support Monitor
It monitors the status of CAN communication.
Active Test
Send the drive signal from CONSULT to the actuator. The operation check can be performed.
DTC & SRT confirmation
The status of system monitoring tests and the self-diagnosis status/result can be confirmed.
ECU Identification
Display the ECU identification number (part number etc.) of the selected system.
Function Test
This mode can show results of self-diagnosis of ECU with either “OK” or “NG”. For engines, more
practical tests regarding sensors/switches and/or actuators are available.
Configuration
Function to READ/WRITE vehicle configuration.
Special Function
Other results or histories, etc. that are recorded in ECU are displayed.
All DTC Reading
Work Support
Self Diagnostic Results
Data Monitor
CAN Diagnosis
CAN Diagnosis Support Monitor
Active Test
DTC & SRT confirmation
ECU Identification
Function Test
Configuration
Special Function
SYSTEM APPLICATION*1
ENGINE
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
-
-
TRANSMISSION
x
x
x
x
x
x
-
-
x
x
-
x
ABS
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
-
x
x
-
-
AIR BAG
x
-
x
-
x
-
-
-
-
x
-
x
IPDM E/R
x
-
x
x
x
x
x
-
x
-
-
-
BCM
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
-
x
-
x
-
System
Revision: 2011 September
GI-50
2012 QUEST
CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM
Work Support
Self Diagnostic Results
Data Monitor
CAN Diagnosis Support Monitor
Active Test
DTC & SRT confirmation
ECU Identification
Function Test
MULTI AV
x
x
x
x
x
x
-
-
x
-
x
x
METER / M&A
x
-
x
x
x
x
-
-
-
-
-
x
AUTO BACK DOOR
x
-
x
x
x
x
-
-
x
-
-
-
AUTO SLIDE DOOR
x
-
x
x
x
x
x
-
x
-
-
-
AUTO SLIDE DOOR RIGHT
x
-
x
x
x
x
x
-
x
-
-
-
AUTO DRIVE POS.
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
-
x
-
-
-
EPS
x
-
x
x
x
x
-
-
x
-
-
-
BSW
x
-
x
x
x
x
x
-
x
-
-
-
SIDE RADAR LEFT
x
-
x
x
x
x
x
-
x
-
-
-
SIDE RADAR RIGHT
x
-
x
x
x
x
x
-
x
-
-
-
OCCUPANT DETECTION
-
x
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Special Function
GI
Configuration
System
CAN Diagnosis
All DTC Reading
< BASIC INSPECTION >
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
x: Applicable
*1: If GST application is equipped, functions in accordance with SAE J1979 and ISO 15031-5 can be used.
CONSULT/GST Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
INFOID:0000000007492188
INSPECTION PROCEDURE
I
J
If the CONSULT/GST cannot diagnose the system properly, check the following items.
Symptom
Check item
CONSULT/GST cannot access
any system.
• CONSULT/GST DLC power supply circuit (Terminal 8 and 16) and ground circuit (Terminal 4 and 5)
CONSULT cannot access individual system. (Other systems
can be accessed.)
• Power supply and ground circuit for the control unit of the system (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring
diagram for each system.)
• Open or short circuit between the system and CONSULT DLC (For detailed circuit, refer to wiring
diagram for each system.)
• Open or short circuit CAN communication line. Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
K
NOTE:
The DDL1 and DDL2 circuits from DLC pins 12, 13, 14 and 15 may be connected to more than one system. A
short in a DDL circuit connected to a control unit in one system may affect CONSULT access to other systems.
If the GST cannot operate properly, check the circuit based on the information of SAE J1962 and ISO 150313.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GI-51
2012 QUEST
CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Wiring Diagram - CONSULT/GST CHECKING SYSTEM -
INFOID:0000000007492189
JRAWC0061GB
Revision: 2011 September
GI-52
2012 QUEST
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Required Procedure After Battery Disconnection
GI
B
INFOID:0000000007492190
SYSTEM
ITEM
Temperature setting trimmer (Front)
HAC-73, "Temperature Setting
Trimmer (Front)"
Temperature setting trimmer (Rear)
HAC-74, "Temperature Setting
Trimmer (Rear)"
Foot position setting trimmer
HAC-75, "Foot Position Setting
Trimmer"
Inlet port memory function (FRE)*1
—
Inlet port memory function (REC)*1
—
Exhaust gas / outside odor detecting gas sensor sensitivity adjustment
function*2
Auto intake switch interlocking movement change*2
Clean switch interlocking movement change*1
D
E
F
HAC-76, "Exhaust Gas/Outside
Odor Detecting Sensor Sensitivity
Adjustment Function"
G
HAC-76, "AUTO Intake Switch Interlocking Movement Change
Function"
H
—
I
Automatic drive positioner
Automatic drive positioner system
ADP-38, "Description"
Power window control
Power window control system
PWC-25, "Description"
Sunroof system*1
Sunroof system
—
Sunshade system*1
Sunshade system
—
Rear view monitor
Rear view monitor predictive course line center position adjustment
—
Around view monitor*1
Predictive course line center position adjustment
—
Automatic sliding door sys-
C
HAC-75, "Inlet Port Memory Function"
Inlet port memory function
Automatic air conditioning
system
REFERENCE
tem*1
Automatic sliding door system
Automatic back door system*1
Automatic back door system
Engine oil level read*1
Engine oil level read
J
K
DLK-136, "AUTOMATIC BACK
DOOR SYSTEM : Description"
L
DLK-137, "Description"
M
—
*1: Not equipped.
*2: With ACCS (Advanced climate control system)
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GI-53
2012 QUEST
BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY
SECTION
GW
GLASS & WINDOW SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2
Inspection ................................................................17
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
SIDE WINDOW GLASS .................................... 18
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 2
Handling for Adhesive and Primer ............................ 2
Exploded View .........................................................18
Removal and Installation .........................................19
Inspection ................................................................20
PREPARATION ............................................ 3
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Special Service Tools .............................................. 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 4
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ................................................................ 4
F
G
BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS ...................... 21
H
Exploded View .........................................................21
Removal and Installation .........................................22
Inspection ................................................................25
I
FRONT DOOR GLASS ..................................... 26
Exploded View .........................................................26
Removal and Installation .........................................26
Inspection and Adjustment ......................................27
J
FRONT REGULATOR ....................................... 28 GW
Work Flow ................................................................. 4
Inspection Procedure ................................................ 6
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................... 8
Exploded View .........................................................28
Removal and Installation .........................................28
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................29
Inspection and Adjustment ......................................29
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 10
SLIDE DOOR GLASS ....................................... 31
WINDSHIELD GLASS ........................................10
Exploded View .........................................................31
Removal and Installation .........................................31
Inspection and Adjustment ......................................32
M
SLIDE DOOR REGULATOR ............................. 33
N
Exploded View ........................................................ 10
Removal and Installation ......................................... 11
Inspection ................................................................ 14
OPERA WINDOW ..............................................15
Exploded View ........................................................ 15
Removal and Installation ......................................... 16
Exploded View .........................................................33
Removal and Installation .........................................33
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................34
Inspection and Adjustment ......................................34
L
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GW-1
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000007495991
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover
INFOID:0000000007495992
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.
PIIB3706J
Handling for Adhesive and Primer
INFOID:0000000007495993
• Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable date. Shelf life of this product is limited to six months after
the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date printed on the box.
• Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
• Open the seal of the primer and adhesive just before application. Discard the remainder.
• Before application, be sure to shake the primer container to stir the contents. If any floating material is found,
do not use it.
• If any primer or adhesive contacts the skin, wipe it off with gasoline or equivalent and wash the skin with
soap.
• When using primer and adhesive, always observe the precautions in the instruction manual.
Revision: 2011 September
GW-2
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007495994
B
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
C
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
D
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
E
Locates the noise
F
SIIA0993E
G
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit
Repairs the cause of noise
H
SIIA0994E
Commercial Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007495995
Tool name
Description
I
J
GW
Engine ear
Locates the noise
L
SIIA0995E
M
Remover tool
Removes clips, pawls and metal clips
N
JMKIA3050ZZ
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GW-3
2012 QUEST
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000007495996
SBT842
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any
customer comments. Refer to GW-8, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, perform a diagnosis and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by performing a test drive with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so that the customer, service adviser, and technician use the same language when describing
the noise.
• Squeak – (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact / fast movement / brought on by road conditions / hard surfaces = high-pitched noise / softer surfaces = low-pitched noises / edge to surface = chirping
• Creak – (Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact / slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement / pitch
dependent on materials / often brought on by activity.
• Rattle – (Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include fast repeated contact / vibration or similar movement / loose parts/missing clip
or fastener / incorrect clearance.
• Knock – (Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounds / sometimes repeating / often brought on by driver action.
• Tick – (Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials / loose components / can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock / dull sounds often brought on by activity.
• Buzz – (Like a bumblebee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle / firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level varies depending upon the person. A noise that a technician may
judge as acceptable may be very irritating to a customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
Revision: 2011 September
GW-4
2012 QUEST
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when the repair is reconfirmed.
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following items:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T models, drive position on A/T models).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to the concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis ear: J-39570, engine ear, and mechanics stethoscope).
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• Removing the component(s) in the area that is / are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• Tapping or pushing/pulling the component(s) that is / are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component(s) with excessive force, otherwise the noise is eliminated only temporarily.
• Feeling for a vibration by hand by touching the component(s) that is / are suspected to be the cause of the
noise.
• Placing a piece of paper between components that are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
• Looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to GW-6, "Inspection Procedure".
A
B
C
D
E
F
1.
H
I
J
GW
REPAIR THE CAUSE
•
•
-
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the components, if possible.
Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape, or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through the authorized NISSAN Parts
Department.
CAUTION:
Never use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
• 76268-9E005: 100 × 135 mm (3.937 × 5.315 in)
• 76884-71L01: 60 × 85 mm (2.362 × 3.346 in)
• 76884-71L02: 15 × 25 mm (0.591 × 0.984 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
• 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.772 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.969 × 1.969 in)
• 73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.394 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.969 × 1.969 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.181 in) thick, 30 × 50 mm (1.181 × 1.969in)
FELT CLOTHTAPE
Revision: 2011 September
G
GW-5
2012 QUEST
L
M
N
O
P
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
• 68370-4B000: 15 × 25 mm (0.591 × 0.984 in) pad
• 68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.197 in) wide tape roll
The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that is visible or does not fit. Only lasts a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Used when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Used to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
After repair is complete, test drive the vehicle to confirm that the cause of noise is repaired by test driving the
vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the
notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Inspection Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495997
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by
applying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate
wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Never use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If the area is saturated with silicone, the
recheck of repair becomes impossible.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to check include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Check the following items:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon connection to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping, moving the components, or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. The areas can usually be insulated with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the customer.
In addition check for the following items:
Revision: 2011 September
GW-6
2012 QUEST
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. Trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing, or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof / headlining area can often be traced to one of the following items:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage, or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
A
B
C
D
E
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat
when the noise occurs. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Causes of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
F
G
H
I
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
J
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
GW
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
L
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move, or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
M
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GW-7
2012 QUEST
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Diagnostic Worksheet
INFOID:0000000007495998
PIIB8740E
Revision: 2011 September
GW-8
2012 QUEST
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
GW
L
M
N
O
PIIB8742E
P
Revision: 2011 September
GW-9
2012 QUEST
WINDSHIELD GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
WINDSHIELD GLASS
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495999
JMKIA8221GB
Revision: 2011 September
GW-10
2012 QUEST
WINDSHIELD GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1.
Windshield glass molding
2.
Dam sealant rubber (upper)
3.
Upper clip
4.
Windshield glass
5.
Dam sealant rubber (lower)
6.
Lower clip
7.
Insulator
8.
Mirror base
9.
Adhesive
10. Primer
11.
Roof
12.
Headlining assembly
13. Cowl top cover
14.
Roof side molding
15.
Body side outer panel
G
: 12 (0.472)
H
: 8 (0.315)
K
: 20 (0.787)
A
B
16. Front pillar garnish
E
: Black print mark
F
: 7 (0.276)
C
I
: 20 (0.787)
J
: 15 (0.591)
L
: 8 (0.315)
M
: 17 (0.669)
D
Unit: mm (in)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
E
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007496000
REMOVAL
F
1.
Remove front pillar garnish (LH and RH). Refer to INT-20, "FRONT PILLAR GARNISH : Removal and
Installation".
G
2. Remove partially headlining (front edge). Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove front wiper arm (LH and RH). Refer to WW-43, "WIPER ARM : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove front fender cover. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation".
H
5. Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove the roof side molding (LH and RH). Refer to EXT-28, "Removal and Installation".
7. Apply protective tape around windshield to prevent painted surface from being damaged.
I
8. Guiding a cutter knife along glass, cut the windshield molding.
9. Using a pair of pliers, pull molding remaining at the body flange out of bonded area of glass.
10. Paint matching marks on the body and glass if the windshield is
J
reused.
NOTE:
• Positioning during installation can be easily performed.
GW
• When installing a new windshield glass mount the glass on the
body and put the matching marks after clearing the body side.
L
PIIB3503J
11. Cut the adhesive.
Depending on the tool in use, follow the procedures below:
CAUTION:
Never use a windshield cutter if the windshield is reused. (It may scratch the glass surface)
a. With piano wire (when reusing glass).
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GW-11
2012 QUEST
WINDSHIELD GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
i. Pass the piano wire (B) from the passenger room to the bonded
area of glass using a wire pierce (A).
CAUTION:
• Never press the piano wire excessively against the edge
of the glass.
• Always use a Standish cover (C) to keep the piano wire
clear of plastic parts such as the instrument panel.
• For the corner area, never insert the piano wire into the
mating surfaces of glass.
• Never damage the harness around the glass.
JMKIA0721ZZ
ii.
Tie both ends of the piano wire (B) to the wire grip (A), etc.
JMKIA0722ZZ
iii. With 2 persons, one holding the piano wire (B) inside the vehicle
along with the glass and the other holding it outside the vehicle
along with the gap between the body and glass, pull it to cut off
the adhesive.
CAUTION:
Always use a Standish cover (C) to keep the piano wire
clear of plastic parts such as the instrument panel.
JMKIA1139ZZ
b.
i.
ii.
With a windshield cutter (A) (when replacing glass)
Apply soapy water around the bonded area on the body for
smooth movement of the windshield cutter.
Insert the windshield cutter into the bonded area. Cut the adhesive by pulling the knife, keeping the tip parallel to the edge of
the glass.
JMKIA0306ZZ
12. Use rubber suction cups or suction lifter (A), etc. to remove
glass from the vehicle.
JMKIA1138ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
GW-12
2012 QUEST
WINDSHIELD GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSTALLATION
1. Using a scraper, remove remaining adhesive (sealant) on the
body side down to approximately a depth that is 2 mm (0.079 in)
thick (a) so that entire contour becomes smooth.
CAUTION:
If the bonded area on the body is scratched, repair it with a
two-liquid type urethane paint. Never use lacquer type
paint.
A
B
C
JMKIA0307ZZ
2.
When reusing the glass (2), use the cutter (A) to remove the
remaining adhesive (1) (sealant) and smooth out the surface.
D
E
F
G
JMKIA0726ZZ
H
3.
4.
Mount the glass onto the vehicle and paint matching marks on the body and glass when installing new
glass. Then remove the glass again.
Use the rubber suction cups or suction lifter (A) to set the glass
(1) on the glass stand (B).
I
J
GW
JMKIA1137ZZ
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Clean the bonded area on the glass and body with white gasoline or degreasing agent.
Install new glass insulator.
Install new clips (lower and upper).
Apply primer for the glass along the entire circumference of the glass.
Use the sealing kit for glass application and the special holder for cartridge or similar tools.
CAUTION:
There are 2 types of primer. Never confuse the application methods.
• Primer for painted surfaces
• Primer for glass
NOTE:
The essential function of primers is to strengthen adhesion between the glass and the painted surface.
Apply primer for the painted surface to the body side bonding surface.
CAUTION:
• If the body side bonding surface is repaired with a two-liquid type urethane paint, always apply
the primer after drying the paint.
• If primer for painted surfaces adheres to a painted surface other than the bonding area, or if it
overflows, quickly remove it with white gasoline or degreasing agent.
• Always use a Standish cover (stainless plate) to prevent primer for painted surfaces from adhering to the instrument panel.
Revision: 2011 September
GW-13
2012 QUEST
L
M
N
O
P
WINDSHIELD GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
10. Affix the dam sealant rubber and apply adhesive along the edge of the glass within the time period indicated in the service manual after applying primer.
• When reusing the glass, affix new dam sealant rubber at the same place where old dam rubber is
affixed.
• When installing new glass, apply the dam sealant rubber from the edge of the glass so as to hide the
black print.
CAUTION:
• Apply the dam sealant rubber (1) from the outline mark of
black print as shown in Exploded View.
• Start to apply the dam sealant rubber at the outline mark
of black print. Apply it so as to only place it without pulling. Stop applying at another outline mark of black print.
NOTE:
Open adhesive by cutting off the nozzle tip and set it in a sealant
gun.
JMKIA0727ZZ
11. Use rubber suction cups or suction lifter (A) that are installed in
advance, align the matching marks between the spacer and roof
panel hole and between the body and glass (1) to install them on
the vehicle.
CAUTION:
2 or more workers are required when installing the glass.
JMKIA0732ZZ
12.
13.
14.
15.
Press the entire surface of the glass lightly to fit it completely.
Correct any adhesive overflow or shortage using a spatula to make the surface smooth.
Remove the protective tape.
Install new windshield glass molding.
NOTE:
Lightly affix the center of molding. Affix the whole length while checking the length on the left and right.
CAUTION:
• Always install the windshield molding before the adhesive hardens.
• After installing glass, keep the front door glass open until the adhesive is completely cured.
Never drive the vehicle.
16. Install the removed parts.
CAUTION:
• Adjust the front wiper arms stop position. Refer to WW-44, "WIPER ARM : Adjustment".
• Check the mating area with surrounding parts. Adjust if necessary.
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007496001
WATER LEAKAGE INSPECTION
CAUTION:
Wait at least 2 hours after installing the glass because the adhesive must be cured before performingthe leakage test.
Revision: 2011 September
GW-14
2012 QUEST
OPERA WINDOW
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
OPERA WINDOW
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007496002
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
GW
L
M
N
O
P
JMKIA8222GB
1.
Opera window
2.
Body side outer
3.
Front pillar garnish
4.
Primer
5.
Adhesive
6.
Front fender
7.
Front pillar inner lower
Revision: 2011 September
GW-15
2012 QUEST
OPERA WINDOW
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
D
: Glass primer application area
E
: Double sided tape
F
: 6 (0.236)
G
: 10 (0.394)
H
: 13 (0.512)
I
: 20 (0.787)
J
: 20 (0.787)
K
: 20 (0.787)
L
: 20 (0.787)
M
: 14 (0.551)
Unit: mm (in)
: Clip
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007496003
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
a.
i.
ii.
b.
i.
Remove front pillar garnish. Refer to INT-20, "FRONT PILLAR GARNISH : Removal and Installation".
Remove front fender assembly. Refer to DLK-397, "FRONT FENDER : Removal and Installation".
Apply protective tape on body panel around opera window glass to protect painted surfaces from damage.
Cut the adhesive.
Use a windshield cutter for straight section. For the area that the windshield cutter cannot be used, use
piano wire or a cutter knife.
With a windshield cutter
Apply soapy water around the bonded area on the body for
smooth movement of the windshield cutter (A).
Insert windshield cutter into the bonded area. Cut adhesive by
pulling the knife, keeping the tip parallel to body flange edge.
With piano wire
Pass both sides of piano wire through each room side from the
area cut by the windshield cutter.
JMKIA0306ZZ
ii. Tie both ends of the piano wire (B) to the wire grip (A), etc.
iii. Lift up the molding using a plastic spatula, pass the piano wire
through the inside of molding, and then cut the adhesive by pulling the wire grips alternately.
CAUTION:
Never contact the piano wire with the coated panel surface.
c. With a cutter knife
i. Working from inside vehicle, insert cutter knife between opera
window glass and body panel. Guide cutter edge along molding
to cut off adhesive.
JMKIA0722ZZ
CAUTION:
Never contact painted surfaces with the cutter knife tip.
5. Use piano wire to cut the opera window glass mounting clip. Use rubber suction cups or suction lifter to
remove the glass from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Revision: 2011 September
GW-16
2012 QUEST
OPERA WINDOW
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Using a scraper, remove remaining adhesive on the body side
down to approximately a depth that is 2 mm thick (a) so that
entire contour becomes smooth.
CAUTION:
If the bonded area on the body is scratched, repair it with a
two-liquid type urethane paint. Never use lacquer type
paint.
A
B
C
JMKIA0307ZZ
D
2.
3.
4.
Clean bonded and surrounding area on glass with white gasoline or degreasing agent.
Apply primer for the glass along the entire circumference of the glass. Refer to GW-15, "Exploded View".
• Use the sealing kit for glass application and the special holder for cartridge or similar tools.
CAUTION:
There are 2 types of primer. Never confuse the application methods.
• Primer for painted surfaces
• Primer for glass
NOTE:
The essential function of primers is to strengthen adhesion between glass and painted surface.
Apply primer for the painted surface to the body side bonding
surface as shown in the figure (A=20mm (0.787in)).
CAUTION:
• If the body side bonding surface is repaired with a two-liquid type urethane paint, always apply the primer after drying the paint.
• If primer for painted surfaces adheres to a painted surface
other than the bonding area, or if it overflows, quickly
remove it with white gasoline or degreasing agent.
E
F
G
H
I
J
JMKIA8223ZZ
5.
Apply adhesive along glass edge within the time period indicated in the service manual after applying
GW
primer with the procedure shown in the exploded view. Refer to GW-15, "Exploded View".
NOTE:
Open adhesive by cutting off the nozzle tip and set it in a sealant gun.
6. After setting rubber suction cups or suction lifter to glass, align matching marks on body and glass. Install L
glass to the body.
7. Press the entire surface of the glass lightly to fit it completely.
8. Correct any adhesive overflow or shortage using a spatula to make the surface smooth.
M
CAUTION:
After installing glass, keep the front door glass open until the adhesive has completely cured.
Avoid driving the vehicle.
N
9. Remove the protective tape.
10. Install the removed parts.
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007496004
O
WATER LEAKAGE INSPECTION
CAUTION:
Wait at least 2 hours after installing the glass because the adhesive must be cured before performingthe leakage test.
Revision: 2011 September
GW-17
2012 QUEST
P
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007496005
JMKIA8224GB
1.
Side window glass
2.
Body side outer
3.
4.
Primer
5.
Adhesive
6.
Rear pillar garnish
7.
Slide door corner cover outer
8.
Luggage side lower finisher
9.
Rear door slide rail cover
Revision: 2011 September
GW-18
Roof side garnish
2012 QUEST
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
10.
Back door window glass
A
: Clip
E
: 12 (0.472)
F
: 7 (0.276)
G
: 17 (0.669)
H
: 20 (0.787)
K
: 17 (0.669)
I
: 25 (0.984)
J
: 25 (0.984)
L
: 20 (0.787)
M
: 17 (0.787)
N
: 20 (0.787)
B
Unit :mm (in)
C
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007496006
D
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
a.
i.
ii.
b.
i.
Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal E
and Installation".
Remove back pillar garnish. Refer to INT-26, "BACK PILLAR GARNISH : Removal and Installation".
Remove rear pillar garnish. Refer to INT-26, "REAR PILLAR GARNISH : Removal and Installation".
F
Remove roof side garnish. Refer to INT-27, "ROOF SIDE GARNISH : Removal and Installation".
Disconnect rear side antenna harness connector.
Remove slide door rail cover. Refer to EXT-42, "Removal and Installation".
G
Apply protective tape on body panel around side window glass to protect painted surfaces from damage.
Cut the adhesive from passenger room side.
Use a windshield cutter for straight section. For the area that the windshield cutter cannot be used, use H
piano wire or a cutter knife.
With a windshield cutter
I
Apply soapy water around the bonded area on the body for
smooth movement of the windshield cutter (A).
Insert windshield cutter into the bonded area. Cut adhesive by
pulling the knife, keeping the tip parallel to body flange edge.
J
With piano wire
Pass both sides of piano wire through each passenger room
GW
side from the area cut by the windshield cutter.
JMKIA0306ZZ
L
ii. Tie both ends of the piano wire (B) to the wire grip (A), etc.
iii. Lift up the molding using a plastic spatula, pass the piano wire
through the inside of molding, and then cut the adhesive by pulling the wire grips alternately.
CAUTION:
Never contact the piano wire with the coated panel surface.
c. With a cutter knife
i. Working from inside vehicle, insert cutter knife between side
window glass and body panel. Guide cutter edge along molding
to cut off adhesive.
JMKIA0722ZZ
CAUTION:
Never contact painted surfaces with the cutter knife tip.
9. Use piano wire to cut the side window glass mounting clip. Use rubber suction cups or suction lifter to
remove the glass from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Revision: 2011 September
GW-19
2012 QUEST
M
N
O
P
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Using a scraper, remove remaining adhesive on the body side
down to approximately a depth that is 2 mm thick (a) so that
entire contour becomes smooth.
CAUTION:
If the bonded area on the body is scratched, repair it with a
two-liquid type urethane paint. Never use lacquer type
paint.
JMKIA0307ZZ
2.
3.
Clean bonded and surrounding area on glass with white gasoline or degreasing agent.
Apply primer for the glass along the entire circumference of the glass.
• Use the sealing kit for glass application and the special holder for cartridge or similar tools.
CAUTION:
There are 2 types of primer. Never confuse the application methods.
• Primer for painted surfaces
• Primer for glass
NOTE:
The essential function of primers is to strengthen adhesion between glass and painted surface.
4. Apply primer for the painted surface to the body side bonding surface.
CAUTION:
• If the body side bonding surface is repaired with a two-liquid type urethane paint, always apply
the primer after drying the paint.
• If primer for painted surfaces adheres to a painted surface other than the bonding area, or if it
overflows, quickly remove it with white gasoline or degreasing agent.
5. Apply adhesive along glass edge within the time period indicated in the service manual after applying
primer with the procedure shown in the Exploded View.
NOTE:
Open adhesive by cutting off the nozzle tip and set it in a sealant gun.
6. After setting rubber suction cups or suction lifter to glass, align matching marks on body and glass. Install
glass to the body.
7. Press the entire surface of the glass lightly to fit it completely.
8. Correct any adhesive overflow or shortage using a spatula to make the surface smooth.
CAUTION:
After installing glass, keep the front door glass open until the adhesive has completely cured.
Avoid driving the vehicle.
9. Remove the protective tape.
10. Install the removed parts.
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007496007
WATER LEAKAGE INSPECTION
CAUTION:
Wait at least 2 hours after installing the glass because the adhesive must be cured before performingthe leakage test.
Revision: 2011 September
GW-20
2012 QUEST
BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007496008
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
GW
L
M
N
O
P
JMKIA8225GB
1.
Back door window glass molding RH 2.
Back door window glass molding LH
3.
Dam sealant rubber (upper)
4.
Fastener
5.
Back door window glass
6.
Clip
7.
Dam sealant rubber (lower)
8.
Back door panel
9.
Adhesive
Revision: 2011 September
GW-21
2012 QUEST
BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
10. Primer
11.
Back door upper molding
12. Rear spoiler
13. Side window glass
14.
Back door inner
15. Back door lower molding
16. Back door outer
17.
Adhesive for clip
E
: 7 (0.276)
F
: 12 (0.472)
G
: 22 (0.866)
H
: 15 (0.591)
I
: 22 (0.866)
J
: 22 (0.866)
K
: 22 (0.866)
L
: 15.7 (0.618)
Unit: mm (in)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007496009
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Remove back door molding upper and lower. Refer to EXT-38, "Removal and Installation".
Remove back door upper finisher. Refer to INT-47, "BACK DOOR LOWER FINISHER : Removal and
Installation".
Remove back door side finisher (LH and RH). Refer to INT-48, "BACK DOOR SIDE FINISHER : Removal
and Installation".
Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to INT-47, "BACK DOOR LOWER FINISHER : Removal and
Installation".
Remove connectors and grounds for rear window defogger and printed antenna.
Remove rear wiper arm. Refer to WW-47, "WIPER ARM : Removal and Installation".
Apply protective tape around back door window glass to prevent painted surface from being damaged.
If back door window glass will be reused, paint matching marks
on the body and glass.
NOTE:
Positioning during installation can be easily performed. Mount
the glass on the body and put the matching marks after clearing
the body side especially when installing new glass.
PIIB3503J
9.
a.
i.
ii.
Cut the adhesive.
Use a windshield cutter for straight section. For the area that the windshield cutter cannot be used, use
piano wire or a cutter knife.
With a windshield cutter
Apply soapy water around the bonded area on the body for
smooth movement of the windshield cutter (A).
Insert windshield knife into the bonded area from the passenger
room side. Cut adhesive by pulling the knife, keeping the tip parallel to the edge of the glass.
JMKIA0306ZZ
b.
i.
ii.
With piano wire
For the area that the windshield cutter cannot be used, use piano wire.
From the area cut by the windshield cutter, pass the piano wire through the passenger room side and tie
both sides to wire grips.
Cut the adhesive by alternately pulling the piano wire along with the glass.
CAUTION:
Revision: 2011 September
GW-22
2012 QUEST
BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Never press the piano wire excessively against the edge of the glass.
• Always use a Standish cover (stainless plate) to keep the piano wire clear of plastic parts.
c. With a cutter knife
i. Working from inside cabin, insert a cutter knife between back door window glass and body side outer
panel. Work the cutter knife along the edge of the back door window glass to cut off the adhesive.
CAUTION:
Never contact painted surfaces with the cutter knife tip.
10. Use rubber suction cups or suction lifter (A), etc. to remove
glass from the vehicle.
A
B
C
D
E
JMKIA1138ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
1.
Using a scraper, remove remaining adhesive (sealant) on the
body side down to approximately a depth that is 2 mm (0.08 in)
thick (a) so that entire contour becomes smooth.
CAUTION:
If the bonded area on the body is scratched, repair it with a
two-liquid type urethane paint. Never use lacquer type
paint.
G
H
I
JMKIA0307ZZ
2.
When reusing the glass (2), use the cutter (A) to remove the
remaining adhesive (1) (sealant) and smooth out the surface.
J
GW
L
M
JMKIA0726ZZ
3.
4.
Mount the glass onto the vehicle and paint matching marks on the body and glass when installing new
glass. Then remove the glass again.
Use the rubber suction cups or suction lifter (A) to set the glass
(1) on the glass stand (B).
N
O
P
JMKIA1137ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
GW-23
2012 QUEST
BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
5. Clean the bonded area on the glass and body with white gasoline or degreasing agent.
6. Install new fastener.
7. Install new clips.
8. Apply primer for the glass along the entire circumference of the glass.
Use the sealing kit for glass application and the special holder for cartridge or similar tools.
CAUTION:
There are 2 types of primer. Never confuse the application methods.
• Primer for painted surfaces
• Primer for glass
NOTE:
The essential function of primers is to strengthen adhesion between glass and painted surface.
9. Apply primer for the painted surface to the body side bonding surface.
CAUTION:
• If the body side bonding surface is repaired with a two-liquid type urethane paint, always apply
the primer after drying the paint.
• If primer for painted surfaces adheres to a painted surface other than the bonding area, or if it
overflows, quickly remove it with white gasoline or degreasing agent.
10. Affix the dam sealant rubber and apply adhesive along the edge of the glass within the time period indicated in the instruction manual after applying primer.
• When reusing the glass, affix new dam sealant rubber at the same place where old dam sealant rubber
was affixed.
• When installing new glass, apply the dam sealant rubber from the edge of the glass so as to hide the
black print.
CAUTION:
Apply the dam sealant rubber (1) to the outer edge of the
outline mark of black print as shown in Exploded View.
Apply it so as to only place it without pulling.
NOTE:
Open adhesive by cutting off the nozzle tip and set it in a sealant
gun.
JMKIA0727ZZ
11. Use rubber suction cups or suction lifter (A) that are installed in
advance, align the matching marks to install.
CAUTION:
2 or more workers are required when installing the glass.
JMKIA1138ZZ
12. Press the entire surface of the glass lightly to fit it completely.
13. Correct any adhesive overflow or shortage using a spatula to make the surface smooth.
CAUTION:
After installing glass, keep the front door glass open until the adhesive is completely cured. Avoid
driving the vehicle.
14. Remove the protective tape.
15. Install both new back door window glass molding.
16. Install the removed parts.
CAUTION:
Revision: 2011 September
GW-24
2012 QUEST
BACK DOOR WINDOW GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Check the mating area with surrounding parts. Adjust if necessary.
A
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007496010
WATER LEAKAGE INSPECTION
CAUTION:
Wait at least 2 hours after installing the glass because the adhesive must be cured before performingthe leakage test.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
GW
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GW-25
2012 QUEST
FRONT DOOR GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
FRONT DOOR GLASS
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007496011
JMKIA8226ZZ
1.
Front door panel
2.
Front door sash
3.
Front door glass run
4.
Front door glass
5.
Front door regulator assembly
6.
Front door module base
7.
Front door hole seal
8.
Power window motor
9.
Front door inside seal
10. Front door module assembly
11. Pull handle bracket
: Vehicle front
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007496012
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fully open front door glass.
Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove front door inside seal.
Remove the front door hole seal.
Reconnect the power window main switch and then operate the power window main switch to raise or
lower the door window until the glass mounting bolts can be seen.
Remove the glass mounting bolts.
Revision: 2011 September
GW-26
2012 QUEST
FRONT DOOR GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
7. Remove front door glass run from front door panel.
8. Hold securely the front door glass and pull it out of the sash to
remove the door glass as shown in the figure.
A
B
C
JMKIA6236ZZ
9. Remove front door lower sash.
10. Remove front door glass run.
D
E
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
F
Inspection and Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007496013
G
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
Initialize the system if any of the following work is complete. Refer to PWC-25, "Work Procedure".
FITTING INSPECTION
• Check that the glass is fit securely into the sash groove.
• Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.394 to 0.787 in)], and check that the clearance to the
sash is parallel. Loosen the regulator mounting bolts, guide rail mounting bolts, and glass and guide rail
mounting bolts to correct the glass position if the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel.
H
I
J
GW
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GW-27
2012 QUEST
FRONT REGULATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
FRONT REGULATOR
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007496014
JMKIA8226ZZ
1.
Front door panel
2.
Front door sash
3.
Front door glass run
4.
Front door glass
5.
Front door regulator assembly
6.
Front door module base
7.
Front door hole seal
8.
Power window motor
9.
Front door inside seal
10. Front door module assembly
11. Pull handle bracket
: Vehicle front
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007496015
REMOVAL
1.
Remove front door glass. Refer to GW-26, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
GW-28
2012 QUEST
FRONT REGULATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Disconnect the power window motor harness connector (C) and
harness fixing clip from front door module assembly (1).
3. Remove front door regulator assembly mounting bolts (A).
4. Remove front door module assembly mounting bolts (B).
A
B
: Clip
C
JMKIA6237ZZ
5.
6.
7.
Remove front door module assembly from front door panel.
Remove pull handle bracket mounting bolts and then remove pull handle bracket from front door module
assembly.
Remove regulator assembly mounting bolts and then remove front door regulator assembly from front
door module base.
INSTALLATION
D
E
F
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000007496016
G
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove front door module assembly. Refer to GW-28, "Removal and Installation".
Remove front door power window motor from front door module base.
Remove front door regulator assembly from front door module base.
H
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
I
Check the front door regulator assembly for the following items. Replace or grease it if a malfunction is
detected.
• Wire wear
• Regulator deformation
J
ASSEMBLY
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
GW
Inspection and Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007496017
L
Inspection after removal
Check the front regulator for the following items. Replace or grease it if a malfunction is detected.
• Wire wear
• Front regulator deformation
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
GW-29
2012 QUEST
FRONT REGULATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Apply 0.1 to 0.2 g of grease to the surface of carrier plate (1) and
on the surface in contact with glass.
A
: 5 mm (0.197in)
JMKIA8227ZZ
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
Initialize the system if any of the following work is complete. Refer to PWC-25, "Work Procedure".
FITTING INSPECTION
• Check that the glass is fit securely into the sash groove.
• Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.394 to 0.787 in)], and check that the clearance to the
sash is parallel. Loosen the regulator mounting bolts, guide rail mounting bolts, and glass and guide rail
mounting bolts to correct the glass position if the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel.
Revision: 2011 September
GW-30
2012 QUEST
SLIDE DOOR GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SLIDE DOOR GLASS
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007496018
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
GW
L
JMKIA6108ZZ
1.
Grommet
2.
Door upper sash (rear)
3.
Door upper sash (front)
4.
Door lower sash (front)
5.
Door glass run
6.
Slide door glass
7.
Regulator assembly
8.
Power winodw motor
9.
Door lower sash (rear)
10. Slide door panel
M
11. Sealing screen
N
: Vehicle front
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007496019
O
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove slide door finisher. Refer to INT-16, "Removal and Installation".
Fully open slide door glass.
Remove slide door lock release actuator. Refer to DLK-441, "LOCK RELEASE ACTUATOR : Removal
and Installation".
Remove remote control assembly. Refer to DLK-440, "REMOTE CONTROL ASSEMBLY : Removal and
Installation".
Remove sliding door control unit.
Revision: 2011 September
GW-31
2012 QUEST
P
SLIDE DOOR GLASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• For RH: Refer to DLK-467, "RH : Removal and Installation".
• For LH: Refer to DLK-467, "LH : Removal and Installation".
6. Remove slide door speaker harness connector.
7. Remove partially the sealing screen.
NOTE:
Cut the butyl-tape so that some parts of the butyl-tape do not remain on the sealing screen, if the sealing
screen is reused.
8. Reconnect the power window switch and then operate the power window switch to raise the door window
until the slide door glass mounting bolts can be seen.
9. Remove slide door glass mounting bolts.
10. Remove slide door outside molding. Refer to EXT-32, "Removal and Installation".
11. Remove slide door sash cover. Refer to EXT-42, "Removal and Installation".
12. Remove slide door corner outer cover. Refer to EXT-35, "Removal and Installation".
13. Remove slide door glass run from partition sash.
14. Remove slide door upper sash (rear). Refer to GW-31, "Exploded View".
15. Remove slide door lower sash (rear). Refer to GW-31, "Exploded View".
16. Pull out slide door glass out off front door panel to remove.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection and Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007496020
FITTING INSPECTION
• Check that the glass is fit securely into the sash groove.
• Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.394 to 0.787 in)], and check that the clearance to the
sash is parallel. Loosen the regulator mounting bolts, guide rail mounting bolts, and glass and guide rail
mounting bolts to correct the glass position if the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel.
Revision: 2011 September
GW-32
2012 QUEST
SLIDE DOOR REGULATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SLIDE DOOR REGULATOR
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007496021
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
GW
L
JMKIA6108ZZ
1.
Grommet
2.
Door upper sash (rear)
3.
Door upper sash (front)
4.
Door lower sash (front)
5.
Door glass run
6.
Slide door glass
7.
Regulator assembly
8.
Power winodw motor
9.
Door lower sash (rear)
10. Slide door panel
M
11. Sealing screen
N
: Vehicle front
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007496022
O
REMOVAL
1.
P
Remove slide door glass. Refer to GW-31, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
GW-33
2012 QUEST
SLIDE DOOR REGULATOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Disconnect the power window motor (1) harness connector (A).
3. Remove the slide door regulator assembly mounting bolts (B)
and then remove slide door regulator assembly from door panel.
JMKIA6361ZZ
4.
5.
Remove slide door upper sash (front). Refer to GW-31, "Exploded View".
Remove slide door lower sash (front). Refer to GW-31, "Exploded View".
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000007496023
DISASSEMBLY
Remove the power window motor from the slide door regulator.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the slide door regulator assembly for the following items. Replace or grease it if a malfunction is
detected.
• Wire wear
• Regulator deformation
ASSEMBLY
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
Inspection and Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007496024
Inspection after removal
Check the slide regulator assembly for the following items. Replace or grease it if a malfunction is detected.
• Wire wear
• Slide door regulator deformation
• Grease condition for each sliding part
: Grease point
JMKIA8228ZZ
FITTING INSPECTION
• Check that the glass is fit securely into the sash groove.
• Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.394 to 0.787 in)], and check that the clearance to the
sash is parallel. Loosen the regulator mounting bolts, guide rail mounting bolts, and glass and guide rail
mounting bolts to correct the glass position if the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel.
Revision: 2011 September
GW-34
2012 QUEST
DRIVER CONTROLS
SECTION
HRN
HORN
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
WIRING DIAGRAM ....................................... 3
HORN ................................................................. 3
F
Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 3
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 4
G
HORN ................................................................. 4
Exploded View .......................................................... 4
Removal and Installation .......................................... 4
H
I
J
K
HRN
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
HRN-1
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000007492140
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Revision: 2011 September
HRN-2
2012 QUEST
HORN
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
A
HORN
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007492141
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
B
(option abbreviation; if not
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
HRN
M
N
O
P
JCLWA5192GB
Revision: 2011 September
HRN-3
2012 QUEST
HORN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
HORN
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007492142
JMLIA2110GB
1.
Horn assembly
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492143
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Disconnect the horn (high and low) connectors.
Remove the horn assembly mounting bolt.
Remove the horn assembly.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
HRN-4
2012 QUEST
DRIVER CONTROLS
SECTION
INL
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) .....................................................19
F
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
INT LAMP ...................................................................20
INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - INT
LAMP) ......................................................................21
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 4
H
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 4
BATTERY SAVER .....................................................22
BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM BATTERY SAVER) ..................................................22
Component Parts Location ........................................ 4
Bulb Specifications .................................................... 5
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 24
I
SYSTEM .............................................................. 6
BCM ................................................................... 24
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM .......... 6
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM :
System Description ................................................... 6
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM :
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 9
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM ............................................................................ 10
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER
SYSTEM : System Description ............................... 11
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER
SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ...................................... 13
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM ....................... 14
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM : System
Description .............................................................. 15
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ...................................................................... 16
AUTO LIGHT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM .................... 16
AUTO LIGHT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM : System
Description .............................................................. 17
AUTO LIGHT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM : Circuit
Diagram ................................................................... 18
List of ECU Reference .............................................24
J
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 25
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
... 25
K
Wiring Diagram ........................................................25
ILLUMINATION ................................................. 28
INL
Wiring Diagram ........................................................28
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 33
M
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 33
Work Flow ................................................................33
N
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 36
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT ............................................................ 36
Component Function Check ....................................36
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................36
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
... 38
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................19
Component Function Check ....................................38
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................38
COMMON ITEM ......................................................... 19
LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP CIRCUIT .................. 40
Revision: 2011 September
G
INL-1
2012 QUEST
O
P
Description .............................................................. 40
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 40
STEP LAMP CIRCUIT ....................................... 42
Component Function Check ................................... 42
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 42
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT .............................................. 44
Component Function Check ................................... 44
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 44
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 46
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS ... 46
Symptom Table ...................................................... 46
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 47
MAP LAMP ........................................................ 47
Exploded View ........................................................ 47
Removal and Installation ........................................ 47
Replacement .......................................................... 47
VANITY MIRROR LAMP ................................... 49
FOOT LAMP ...................................................... 52
DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 52
DRIVER SIDE : Exploded View .............................. 52
DRIVER SIDE : Replacement ................................. 52
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 53
PASSENGER SIDE : Exploded View ..................... 53
PASSENGER SIDE : Replacement ........................ 53
STEP LAMP ....................................................... 55
Exploded View ........................................................ 55
Removal and Installation ......................................... 55
Replacement ........................................................... 55
PERSONAL LAMP ............................................ 57
Exploded View ........................................................ 57
Removal and Installation ......................................... 57
Replacement ........................................................... 58
LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP .................................. 59
Exploded View ........................................................ 59
Removal and Installation ......................................... 59
Replacement ........................................................... 59
Exploded View ........................................................ 49
Replacement .......................................................... 49
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) .......................................................... 61
GLOVE BOX LAMP ........................................... 50
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 61
Exploded View ........................................................ 50
Replacement .......................................................... 50
Revision: 2011 September
Bulb Specifications .................................................. 61
INL-2
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000007496029
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
C
D
E
F
G
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
I
J
K
INL
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-3
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007496030
JMLIA2148ZZ
No.
Part
Description
IPDM E/R
Controls the integrated relay according to the request signal from BCM (via CAN communication). Refer to PCS-4, "IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
2.
BCM
• Activates the interior room lamp timer depending on the vehicle condition to turn the
interior room lamps ON/OFF.
• Operates the interior room lamp battery saver depending on the vehicle condition to
cut the interior room lamp power supply.
• Detects each switch condition by the combination switch reading function.
• Judges the illumination lamp ON/OFF status depending on the vehicle condition.
And then it transmits position light request signal to IPDM E/R and combination
meter (with CAN communication).
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed
installation location.
3.
Optical sensor
Refer to EXL-7, "Component Parts Location".
4.
Step lamp
Refer to INL-5, "Bulb Specifications".
5.
Door switch
Refer to DLK-18, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location".
6.
Front door lock assembly (driver side)
(door key cylinder switch)
Refer to DLK-18, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location".
7.
Door request switch
Refer to DLK-18, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location".
8.
Luggage room lamp
Refer to INL-5, "Bulb Specifications".
9.
Automatic back door close switch
Refer to DLK-22, "AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location".
10.
Back door lock assembly
(back door switch)
Refer to DLK-18, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location".
11.
Third personal lamp
Refer to INL-5, "Bulb Specifications".
12.
Seconnd personal lamp
Refer to INL-5, "Bulb Specifications".
1.
13.
Remote keyless entry receiver
Refer to DLK-18, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location".
14.
Vanity mirror lamp
Refer to INL-5, "Bulb Specifications".
15.
Combination meter
Refer to MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location".
Revision: 2011 September
INL-4
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.
Part
Description
16.
Door lock and unlock switch
Refer to DLK-18, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location".
17.
Push-button ignition switch
Refer to DLK-22, "AUTOMATIC BACK DOOR SYSTEM :
Component Parts Location".
18.
AV control unit
Receives the dimmer signal from BCM via CAN communication.
Refer to AV-14, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
19.
Combination switch
(Lighting & turn signal switch)
Refer to BCS-8, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM : System Description".
20.
Map lamp
Refer to INL-5, "Bulb Specifications".
Bulb Specifications
Item
INFOID:0000000007496031
Type
Wattage (W)
Wedge
8
LED
—
—
1.2
LED
—
Glove box lamp
—
1.4
Foot lamp (driver side)
—
1.4
Foot lamp (passenger side)
—
1.4
Wedge
3.4
Personal lamp
—
8
Luggage room lamp
—
8
Map lamp
Total coordination of illumination
Vanity mirror lamp
Push-button ignition switch illumination
Step lamp
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
INL
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-5
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007496032
SYSTEM DIAGRAM (WITH AUTOMATIC SLIDE DOOR)
JMLIA2120GB
Revision: 2011 September
INL-6
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DIAGRAM (WITHOUT AUTOMATIC SLIDE DOOR)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
JMLIA2208GB
OUTLINE
• Interior room lamps* are controlled by interior room lamp timer control function of BCM.
*: Map lamp and personal lamp (when map lamp switch and personal lamp switch are in DOOR position).
• Step lamp is controlled by step lamp control function of BCM.
• Luggage room lamp and automatic back door close switch illumination are controlled by luggage room lamp
control function of BCM.
• Push-button ignition switch illumination is controlled by the push-button ignition switch illumination control
function of BCM and combination meter.
J
K
INL
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP TIMER CONTROL
Interior Room Lamp Timer Basic Operation
M
N
O
P
JPLIA0093GB
• The interior room lamp turns ON and OFF (gradual brightening and dimming) by the interior room lamp
timer.
• BCM judges the vehicle condition with the following items. It activates the interior room timer.
Revision: 2011 September
INL-7
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
- Ignition switch status
- Door switch signal (except back door)
- Door lock/unlock signal (remote keyless entry receiver, each door request switch, door key cylinder switch,
door lock/unlock switch)
NOTE:
Each function of interior room lamp timer can be set by CONSULT. Refer to INL-21, "INT LAMP : CONSULT
Function (BCM - INT LAMP)".
Interior Room Lamp ON Operation
• BCM always turns the interior room lamp ON when any door opens excepting back door.
• BCM activates the interior room timer in any of the following conditions to turn the interior room lamp ON for
a period of time.
- Any door opens before all doors close excepting back door.
- Ignition switch is turned ON → OFF.
- Any door unlock signal is detected when all doors close excepting back door with ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:
The timer restarts if new condition is input during the timer operating time.
Interior Room Lamp OFF Operation
BCM stops the timer and turns interior room lamp OFF, when any of the following conditions is satisfied.
• The interior room lamp timer operating time is expired with all doors closed excepting back door.
• Ignition switch position is other than OFF with all doors close excepting back door.
• Any door lock signal is detected with all doors close excepting back door.
LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP CONTROL
BCM controls the luggage room lamp and automatic back door close switch illumination (ground-side) to turn
ON with back door switch ON.
• When luggage room lamp switch is in the DOOR position and back door is opened, luggage room lamp
turns ON.
• When back door is opened, automatic back door close switch illumination turn ON.
STEP LAMP CONTROL
BCM controls the step lamp (ground-side) to turn ON with any door switch ON excepting back door.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION CONTROL
Push-button Ignition Switch Illumination Basic Operation
BCM provides the power supply to turn the push-button ignition switch illumination ON.
Push-button Ignition Switch Illumination ON Operation
BCM turns the push-button ignition switch illumination ON in the following conditions.
• Ignition switch ON
• Any of the following conditions with ignition switch OFF/ACC
- Engine start permission is entered
- Driver side door is LOCK → UNLOCK
- Driver side door is open
Push-button Ignition Switch Illumination OFF Operation
BCM turns the push-button ignition switch illumination OFF in any of the following conditions.
• The push-button ignition switch illumination ON conditions do not satisfy.
• Any of the following conditions with ignition switch OFF.
- The push-button ignition switch illumination ON conditions do not change (15 seconds after the ignition
switch OFF)
- Driver side door is UNLOCK → LOCK
Revision: 2011 September
INL-8
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000007496033
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
INL
M
N
O
JMLIA2125GB
Revision: 2011 September
INL-9
2012 QUEST
P
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
JMLIA2126GB
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM
Revision: 2011 September
INL-10
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007496034
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM (WITH AUTOMATIC SLIDE DOOR)
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
JMLIA2121GB
K
INL
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-11
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DIAGRAM (WITHOUT AUTOMATIC SLIDE DOOR)
JMLIA2209GB
OUTLINE
• Interior room lamp battery saver is controlled by BCM.
• BCM turns applicable lamps OFF depending on the vehicle condition. This function prevents the battery
from over-discharging if the driver neglects turning OFF the any lamps.
Applicable lamps
• Map lamp
• Personal lamp
• Luggage room lamp
• Automatic back door close switch illumination
• Step lamp
• Vanity mirror lamp
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER FUNCTION
• When the ignition switch is turned to a position other than ON, BCM operates the timer for a period of time to
cut the interior room lamp power supply.
• BCM restart the timer when any of the following signals changes while operating the timer.
- Ignition switch status
- Door switch signal (ALL)
- Door lock/unlock signal (remote keyless entry receiver, each door request switch, door lock and unlock
switch, door key cylinder switch)
• BCM provides the interior room lamp power supply continuously when the ignition switch position is ON.
NOTE:
Each function of interior room lamp battery saver can be set by CONSULT. Refer to INL-22, "BATTERY
SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BATTERY SAVER)".
Revision: 2011 September
INL-12
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000007496035
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
INL
M
N
O
JMLIA2125GB
Revision: 2011 September
INL-13
2012 QUEST
P
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
JMLIA2128GB
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM
Revision: 2011 September
INL-14
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007496036
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
B
C
D
E
F
JMLIA2210GB
G
OUTLINE
Each illumination lamp is controlled by each function of BCM, IPDM E/R and combination meter.
H
Control by BCM
• Combination switch reading function
• Headlamp control function
I
Control by IPDM E/R
• Relay control function
Control by combination meter
• Meter illumination control function (Refer to MWI-17, "METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : System Description".)
ILLUMINATION CONTROL
• BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function.
• BCM transmits position light request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter according to tail lamp ON
condition.
J
K
INL
Tail lamp ON condition
•
Lighting switch 1ST
Lighting switch 2ND
Lighting switch AUTO, and the auto light function ON judgment
Lighting switch AUTO, with the front fog lamp switch ON and the ignition switch ON
IPDM E/R turns the integrated tail lamp relay ON according to position light request signal. It provides the
power supply to each illumination lamp.
• Combination meter enters in the nighttime mode according to position light request signal. Under the nighttime mode the combination meter controls the illuminance by controlling each illumination lamp (ground
side).
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-15
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000007496037
JMLIA2129GB
AUTO LIGHT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM
Revision: 2011 September
INL-16
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
AUTO LIGHT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007496038
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
B
C
D
E
JMLIA0967GB
F
OUTLINE
Auto light adjustment system is controlled by each function of BCM, combination meter and AV control unit
G
Control by BCM
• Auto light system
• Auto light adjustment system
H
AUTO LIGHT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM
Description
• BCM supplies voltage to the optical sensor when the ignition switch is turned ON or ACC.
• Optical sensor converts outside brightness (lux) to voltage and transmits the optical sensor signal to BCM.
• BCM judges dimming/brightening of combination meter and display according to brightness outside the vehicle, when ignition switch is ON.
• BCM transmits dimmer signal to combination meter via CAN communication, according to auto light adjustment conditions (Except for CANADA). Dimmer signal is also transmitted to AV control unit.
NOTE:
As to dimming/brightening timing, the sensitivity depends on settings. The settings can be changed with CONSULT. Refer to EXL-31, "HEADLAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - HEADLAMP)".
I
J
K
INL
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-17
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
AUTO LIGHT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000007496039
JMLIA2130GB
Revision: 2011 September
INL-18
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
A
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)
INFOID:0000000007807462
B
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
C
Diagnosis mode
Function Description
Work Support
Changes the setting for each system function.
Self Diagnostic Result
Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.
D
CAN Diag Support Monitor
Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
Data Monitor
The BCM input/output signals are displayed.
Active Test
The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Ecu Identification
The BCM part number is displayed.
Configuration
• Read and save the vehicle specification.
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.
E
F
SYSTEM APPLICATION
G
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item
System
Sub system selection item
Diagnosis mode
Work Support
Data Monitor
Active Test
×
×
×
Door lock
DOOR LOCK
Rear window defogger
REAR DEFOGGER
×
×
Warning chime
BUZZER
×
×
Interior room lamp control system
INT LAMP
×
×
×
Exterior lamp
HEAD LAMP
×
×
×
Wiper and washer
WIPER
×
×
×
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps
FLASHER
×
×
×
Air conditioning control system
AIR CONDITONER
×
×*
• Intelligent Key system
• Engine start system
INTELLIGENT KEY
×
×
Combination switch
COMB SW
Body control system
BCM
×
NVIS
IMMU
×
×
×
Interior room lamp battery saver
BATTERY SAVER
×
×
×
Back door open
TRUNK
Vehicle security system
THEFT ALM
RAP system
RETAINED PWR
×
Signal buffer system
SIGNAL BUFFER
×
×
TPMS
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR
×
×
×
×
I
J
K
INL
M
N
×
×
×
×
×
NOTE:
*: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used.
FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)
The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on
CONSULT.
Revision: 2011 September
H
INL-19
2012 QUEST
O
P
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
CONSULT screen item
Indication/Unit
Description
Vehicle Speed
km/h
Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Odo/Trip Meter
km
Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Vehicle Condition
SLEEP>LOCK
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)]
SLEEP>OFF
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)]
LOCK>ACC
While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC
ACC>ON
While turning power supply position from ACC to ON
RUN>ACC
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except
emergency stop operation)
CRANK>RUN
While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN
RUN>URGENT
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation)
ACC>OFF
While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF)
OFF>LOCK
OFF>ACC
IGN Counter
Power position status of
the moment a particular
DTC is detected*
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF
(LOCK)
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC
ON>CRANK
While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK
OFF>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK
Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)
OFF
Power supply position is OFF (OFF)
ACC
Power supply position is ACC
ON
Power supply position is ON
ENGINE RUN
Power supply position is RUN
CRANKING
Power supply position is CRANK
0 - 39
The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected
• The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
• The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition
whenever ignition switch OFF → ON.
• The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
NOTE:
*: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position.
• OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF
• ACC: Ignition switch ACC
• IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped
• RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running
• CRANK: At engine cranking
Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P
position, and any of the following conditions are met.
• Closing door
• Opening door
• Door is locked using door request switch
• Door is locked using Intelligent Key
The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”.
INT LAMP
Revision: 2011 September
INL-20
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
INT LAMP : CONSULT Function (BCM - INT LAMP)
INFOID:0000000007496041
A
WORK SUPPORT
B
C
D
E
JPLIA0093GB
Service item
ROOM LAMP TIMER SET
SET I/L D-UNLCK INTCON
ROOM LAMP ON TIME SET
ROOM LAMP OFF TIME SET
R LAMP TIMER LOGIC SET
Setting item
F
Setting
G
MODE 2
7.5 sec.
MODE 3*
15 sec.
MODE 4
30 sec.
On*
With the interior room lamp timer function
Off
Without the interior room lamp timer function
Sets the interior room lamp ON time. (Timer operating time)
H
MODE 1
0.5 sec.
MODE 2*
1 sec.
MODE 3
2 sec.
MODE 4
3 sec.
MODE 5
0 sec.
MODE 1
0.5 sec.
MODE 2*
1 sec.
MODE 3
2 sec.
MODE 4
3 sec.
MODE 5
0 sec.
MODE 1*
Interior room lamp timer activates with synchronizing all doors.
MODE 2
Interior room lamp timer activates with synchronizing the driver door
only.
I
Sets the interior room lamp gradual brightening time.
J
K
Sets the interior room lamp gradual dimming time.
INL
*: Factory setting
M
N
DATA MONITOR
Monitor item
[Unit]
REQ SW-DR
[On/Off]
The switch status input from door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW-AS
[On/Off]
The switch status input from door request switch (passenger side)
REQ SW-RR
[On/Off]
REQ SW-RL
[On/Off]
Revision: 2011 September
O
Description
P
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
INL-21
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor item
[Unit]
Description
PUSH SW
[On/Off]
The switch status input from push-button ignition switch
UNLK SEN -DR
[On/Off]
Driver door unlock status input from unlock sensor
DOOR SW-DR
[On/Off]
The switch status input from front door switch (driver side)
DOOR SW-AS
[On/Off]
The switch status input from front door switch (passenger side)
DOOR SW-RR
[On/Off]
The switch status input from sliding door switch RH
DOOR SW- RL
[On/Off]
The switch status input from sliding door switch LH
DOOR SW- BK
[On/Off]
The switch status input from back door switch
CDL LOCK SW
[On/Off]
Lock switch status input from door lock and unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW
[On/Off]
Unlock switch status input from door lock and unlock switch
TRNK/HAT MNTR
[On/Off]
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored
KEY CYL LK-SW
[On/Off]
Lock switch status received from door key cylinder switch
KEY CYL UN-SW
[On/Off]
Unlock switch status received from door key cylinder switch
RKE-LOCK
[On/Off]
Lock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver
RKE-UNLOCK
[On/Off]
Unlock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver
ACTIVE TEST
Test item
INT LAMP
STEP LAMP TEST
Operation
Description
On
Outputs the interior room lamp control signal to turn the interior room lamps ON.
[Map lamp, personal lamp (when applicable lamps switch is in DOOR position.)]
Off
Stops the interior room lamp control signal to turn the interior room lamps.
On
Outputs the step lamp control signal to turn the step lamps ON.
Off
Stops the step lamp control signal to turn the step lamps ON.
BATTERY SAVER
BATTERY SAVER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BATTERY SAVER)
INFOID:0000000007496042
WORK SUPPORT
Service item
ROOM LAMP TIMER SET
BATTERY SAVER SET
Setting item
Setting
MODE 1
30 min.
MODE 2
60 min.
MODE 3*
15 min.
On*
With the exterior lamp battery saver function
Off
Without the exterior lamp battery saver function
Sets the interior room lamp battery saver timer operating
time.
*:Factory setting
Revision: 2011 September
INL-22
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DATA MONITOR
A
Monitor item
[Unit]
Description
REQ SW-DR
[On/Off]
The switch status input from door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW-AS
[On/Off]
The switch status input from door request switch (passenger side)
REQ SW-RR
[On/Off]
B
C
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
REQ SW-RL
[On/Off]
PUSH SW
[On/Off]
The switch status input from push-button ignition switch
UNLK SEN -DR
[On/Off]
Driver door unlock status input from unlock sensor
DOOR SW-DR
[On/Off]
The switch status input from front door switch (driver side)
DOOR SW-AS
[On/Off]
The switch status input from front door switch (passenger side)
DOOR SW-RR
[On/Off]
The switch status input from sliding door switch RH
DOOR SW- RL
[On/Off]
The switch status input from sliding door switch LH
DOOR SW- BK
[On/Off]
The switch status input from back door switch
CDL LOCK SW
[On/Off]
Lock switch status input from door lock and unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW
[On/Off]
Unlock switch status input from door lock and unlock switch
TRNK/HAT MNTR
[On/Off]
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored
KEY CYL LK-SW
[On/Off]
Lock switch status received from door key cylinder switch
KEY CYL UN-SW
[On/Off]
Unlock switch status received from door key cylinder switch
RKE-LOCK
[On/Off]
Lock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver
RKE-UNLOCK
[On/Off]
Unlock signal status received from remote keyless entry receiver
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
INL
M
ACTIVE TEST
Test item
N
Operation
BATTERY SAVER
Description
Off
Cuts the interior room lamp power supply to turn interior room lamps OFF.
On
Outputs the interior room lamp power supply to turn interior room lamps ON.*
O
*: Each lamp switch is in ON position.
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-23
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
BCM
List of ECU Reference
INFOID:0000000007496043
ECU
Reference
BCS-36, "Reference Value"
BCM
BCS-58, "Fail-safe"
BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
BCS-59, "DTC Index"
Revision: 2011 September
INL-24
2012 QUEST
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
A
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007496044
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
B
(option abbreviation; if not
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
INL
M
N
O
P
JRLWC1005GB
Revision: 2011 September
INL-25
2012 QUEST
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
JRLWC1006GB
Revision: 2011 September
INL-26
2012 QUEST
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
INL
M
N
O
JRLWC1007GB
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-27
2012 QUEST
ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
ILLUMINATION
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007496045
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
(option abbreviation; if not
JCLWA5164GB
Revision: 2011 September
INL-28
2012 QUEST
ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
INL
M
N
O
JCLWA5165GB
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-29
2012 QUEST
ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
JCLWA5166GB
Revision: 2011 September
INL-30
2012 QUEST
ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
INL
M
N
O
JCLWA5167GB
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-31
2012 QUEST
ILLUMINATION
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
JCLWA5168GB
Revision: 2011 September
INL-32
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000007496046
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
INL
M
N
O
P
JMKIA8652GB
DETAILED FLOW
Revision: 2011 September
INL-33
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
1.
2.
Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurs).
Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.)
Erase DTC.
Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5.
4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to DTC INSPECTION PRIORITY CHART, and determine trouble diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Check according to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step
4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
Is the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CONSULT.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
Revision: 2011 September
INL-34
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Check according to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
A
8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
B
1.
2.
3.
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replacement.
Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it.
C
D
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the
malfunction is repaired securely.
When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the
symptom is not detected.
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 7.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4.
NO
>> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
INL
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-35
2012 QUEST
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007496047
1.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Turn ignition switch ON.
Turn each interior room lamp ON.
Personal lamp
Map lamp
Luggage room lamp
Automatic back door close switch illumination
Step lamp
Vanity mirror lamp
Select “BATTERY SAVER” of BCM (BATTERY SAVER) active test item.
With operating the test items, check that each interior room lamp turns ON/OFF.
Off
On
: Interior room lamp OFF
: Interior room lamp ON
Does the interior room lamp turn ON/OFF?
YES >> Interior room lamp power supply circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to INL-36, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007496048
1.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the following connectors.
Personal lamp(ALL)
Map lamp
Luggage room lamp
Automatic back door close switch
Step lamp (both sides)
Vanity mirror lamp (both sides)
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “BATTERY SAVER” of BCM (BATTERY SAVER) active test item.
With operating the test item, check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
(+)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
M123
56
Ground
Voltage
(Approx.)
Test item
BATTERY SAVER
Off
0V
On
12 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
2.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and each interior room lamp harness connector.
Revision: 2011 September
INL-36
2012 QUEST
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BCM
Connector
M123
Each interior room lamp
Terminal
56
Connector
Terminal
Map lamp
R109
6
Second personal lamp LH
R18
1
Second personal lamp RH
R17
1
Third personal lamp LH
R28
1
Third personal lamp RH
R27
1
Luggage room lamp
B51
1
Automatic back door close switch
D169
3
Step lamp
(driver side)
D51
1
Step lamp
(passenger side)
D17
1
Vanity mirror lamp LH
R24
1
Vanity mirror lamp RH
R10
1
Continuity
A
B
C
Existed
D
E
F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short circuit of each interior room lamp.
NO
>> Repair or replace harnesses.
G
3.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP POWER SUPPLY SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
I
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M123
56
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harnesses.
J
K
INL
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-37
2012 QUEST
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007496049
CAUTION:
Before performing the diagnosis, check that the following are normal.
• Interior room lamp power supply
• Map lamp bulb
• Personal lamp bulb
1.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Switch the map lamp switch and personal lamp switch to DOOR.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “INT LAMP” of BCM (INT LAMP) active test item.
With operating the test items, check that each interior room lamp turns ON/OFF (gradual brightening/dimming).
On
Off
: Interior room lamp gradual brightening
: Interior room lamp gradual dimming
Does the interior room lamp turns ON/OFF (gradual brightening/dimming)?
YES >> Interior room lamp control circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to INL-38, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007496050
1.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL OUTPUT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Switch the map lamp switch and personal lamp switch to DOOR.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove all the bulbs of map lamp and personal lamp.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “INT LAMP” of BCM (INT LAMP) active test item.
With operating the test item, check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M123
63
Test item
Ground
INT LAMP
Continuity
On
Existed
Off
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
Fixed ON>>GO TO 3.
Fixed OFF>>Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector, map lamp connector and personal lamp connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and map lamp harness connector.
BCM
4.
Map lamp
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M123
63
R109
5
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between personal lamp harness connector and map lamp harness connector.
Revision: 2011 September
INL-38
2012 QUEST
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Map lamp
Personal lamp
Connector
Terminal
R109
3
Connector
Terminal
Second LH
R18
Second RH
R17
Third LH
R28
Third RH
R27
Continuity
A
B
2
Existed
C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace map lamp or personal lamp.
NO
>> Repair or replace harnesses.
D
3.CHECK INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector, map lamp connector and personal lamp connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
F
BCM
4.
E
Connector
Terminal
M123
63
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Check continuity between map lamp harness connector and ground.
Map lamp
Connector
Terminal
R109
3
Ground
Continuity
G
H
Not existed
I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harnesses.
J
K
INL
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-39
2012 QUEST
LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP CIRCUIT
Description
INFOID:0000000007496051
Controls the luggage room lamp and automatic back door close switch illumination (ground side) to turn the
luggage room lamp and automatic back door close switch illumination ON and OFF.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007496052
CAUTION:
Before performing the diagnosis, check that the following are normal.
• Interior room lamp power supply
• Luggage room lamp bulb
1.CHECK LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP OUTPUT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove the luggage room bulb.
Disconnect automatic back door close switch connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M122
49
Condition
Ground
Back door
Continuity
Open
Existed
Closed
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
Fixed ON>>GO TO 3.
Fixed OFF>>Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and luggage room lamp harness connector.
BCM
3.
Luggage room lamp
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M122
49
B51
2
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and automatic back door close switch harness connector.
BCM
Automatic back door close switch
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M122
49
D169
4
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace luggage room lamp or automatic back door close switch.
NO
>> Repair or replace harnesses.
3.CHECK LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M122
49
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
INL-40
2012 QUEST
LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace harnesses.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
INL
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-41
2012 QUEST
STEP LAMP CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
STEP LAMP CIRCUIT
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007496053
CAUTION:
Before performing the diagnosis, check that the following is normal.
• Interior room lamp power supply
• Step lamp bulb
1.CHECK STEP LAMP OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “STEP LAMP TEST” of BCM (INT LAMP) active test item.
With operating the test items, check that step lamp turns ON/OFF.
On
Off
: Step lamp ON
: Step lamp OFF
Does the step lamp turn ON/OFF?
YES >> Step lamp circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to INL-42, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007496054
1.CHECK STEP LAMP OUTPUT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove the step lamp bulbs (ALL).
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “STEP LAMP TEST” of BCM (INT LAMP) active test item.
With operating the test item, check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M123
62
Test item
Ground
STEP LAMP TEST
Continuity
On
Existed
Off
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
Fixed ON>>GO TO 3.
Fixed OFF>>Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK STEP LAMP OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector, and step lamp connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and step lamp harness connector.
BCM
Step lamp
Connector
Terminal
M123
62
Connector
Terminal
Driver side
D51
Passenger side
D17
2
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace step lamp.
NO
>> Repair or replace harnesses.
3.CHECK STEP LAMP SHORT CIRCUIT
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Revision: 2011 September
INL-42
2012 QUEST
STEP LAMP CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
A
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M123
62
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Repair or replace harnesses.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
INL
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-43
2012 QUEST
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007496055
1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “ENGINE SW ILLUMI” of BCM (INTELLIGENT KEY) active test item.
With operating the test items, check that the push-button ignition switch illumination turns ON/OFF.
On
Off
: Push-button ignition switch illumination ON
: Push-button ignition switch illumination OFF
Does the push-button ignition switch illumination turn ON/OFF?
YES >> Push-button ignition switch illumination circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to INL-44, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007496056
1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Lighting switch OFF.
Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector.
Check voltage between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Push-button ignition switch
Connector
Terminal
M101
3
(–)
Ground
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
Push-button ignition
switch illumination
ON Condition
12 V
OFF Condition
0V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION POWER SUPPLY OPEN CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and the push-button ignition switch harness connector.
BCM
Push-button ignition switch
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M124
90
M101
3
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harnesses.
3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION POWER SUPPLY SHORT CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M124
90
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
INL-44
2012 QUEST
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace harnesses.
4.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION GROUND CIRCUIT-1
1.
2.
A
Connect push-button ignition switch connector.
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
B
(+)
(–)
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M124
92
Ground
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
Push-button ignition switch
illumination
ON Condition
C
0V
D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
E
5.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ILLUMINATION GROUND CIRCUIT-2
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector, and push-button ignition switch connector.
Check continuity between push-button ignition switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.
Push-button ignition switch
4.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M101
2
M124
92
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground.
Push-button ignition switch
Connector
Terminal
M101
2
Ground
Continuity
F
G
H
I
Not existed
J
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace push-button ignition switch.
NO
>> Repair or replace harnesses.
K
INL
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-45
2012 QUEST
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table
INFOID:0000000007496057
CAUTION:
Perform the self-diagnosis with CONSULT before the symptom diagnosis. Perform the trouble diagnosis if any DTC is detected.
Symptom
Possible cause
All the following lamps do not turn ON.
• Map lamp
• Personal lamp
• Vanity mirror lamp
• Step lamp
• Luggage room lamp
• Automatic back door close switch illumination
• Harness between BCM and each
interior room lamp
• BCM
• Interior room lamp does not turn ON even
though the door is open.
(It turns ON when turning the interior room
lamp ON.)
• Interior room lamp does not turn OFF even
though the door is closed.
• Harness between BCM and each
door switch
• Harness between BCM and each
interior room lamp
• BCM
Interior room lamp timer does not activate.
(It turns ON/ OFF when the door opens/closes.)
—
Luggage room lamp or automatic back door close
switch illumination does not turn ON even though
the back door is open.
• Harness between BCM and back
door switch
• Harness between BCM and luggage room lamp
• Harness between BCM and automatic back door close switch
• BCM
Step lamps (ALL) do not turn ON.
• Harness between BCM and each
step lamp
• BCM
Inspection item
Interior room lamp power supply circuit
Refer to INL-36, "Component Function Check".
Door switch circuit
Refer to DLK-209,
"Component Function Check".
Interior room lamp control circuit
Refer to INL-38, "Component Function Check".
Check the interior room lamp setting.
Refer to INL-21.
Back door switch circuit
Refer to DLK-211,
"Component Function Check".
Luggage room lamp circuit
Refer to INL-40, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Door switch circuit
Refer to DLK-209,
"Component Function Check".
Step lamp circuit
Refer to INL-42.
Push-button ignition switch illumination does not
illuminate.
• Harness between BCM and pushbutton ignition switch
• BCM
Push-button ignition switch illumination circuit
Refer to INL-44, "Component Function Check".
Interior room lamp battery saver does not activate.
BCM
Replace BCM.
Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
INL-46
2012 QUEST
MAP LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
MAP LAMP
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007496058
B
C
D
E
F
G
JMLIA1418ZZ
H
1.
Map lamp assembly
2.
Bulb
3.
Lens
: Pawl
I
: Metal clip
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007496059
J
CAUTION:
Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation
to electric leakage.
K
REMOVAL
1.
Disengage map lamp assembly fixing metal clips with a remover
tool (A).
INL
: Metal clip
2.
M
Disconnect harness connector, and then remove map lamp
assembly.
N
JMLIA1525ZZ
O
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Replacement
INFOID:0000000007496060
CAUTION:
• Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage.
• Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb.
Revision: 2011 September
INL-47
2012 QUEST
P
MAP LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands because the surface is very hot just after
the lamp is turned OFF to prevent a burns.
• Leaving the bulb removed from housing for a long period of time can deteriorate performance of the
lens and reflector (causing dirty or clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when
replacing the bulb.
MAP LAMP BULB
1.
Disengage lens fixing pawls with a remover tool (A).
: Pawl
2.
Remove bulb.
JMLIA1526ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
INL-48
2012 QUEST
VANITY MIRROR LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
VANITY MIRROR LAMP
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007496061
B
C
D
E
F
JMLIA1419ZZ
1.
Lens
2.
G
Bulb
: Pawl
Replacement
INFOID:0000000007496062
CAUTION:
• Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage.
• Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb.
• Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands because the surface is very hot just after
the lamp is turned OFF to prevent a burns.
• Leaving the bulb removed from housing for a long period of time can deteriorate performance of the
lens and reflector (causing dirty or clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when
replacing the bulb.
H
I
J
K
VANITY MIRROR LAMP
1.
INL
Disengage lens fixing pawls with a remover tool (A).
: Pawl
2.
M
CAUTION:
Apply protective tape (B) on the part to protect it from damage.
Remove bulb.
N
O
JMLIA1527ZZ
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-49
2012 QUEST
GLOVE BOX LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
GLOVE BOX LAMP
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007496063
JMLIA2177ZZ
1.
Bulb & socket assembly
2.
Lamp housing
3.
Instrument lower panel RH
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
Replacement
INFOID:0000000007496064
CAUTION:
• Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage.
• Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb.
• Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands because the surface is very hot just after
the lamp is turned OFF to prevent a burns.
• Leaving the bulb removed from housing for a long period of time can deteriorate performance of the
lens and reflector (causing dirty or clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when
replacing the bulb.
GLOVE BOX LAMP BULB
1.
Remove Instrument lower panel RH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
INL-50
2012 QUEST
GLOVE BOX LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Rotate the bulb & socket assembly counterclockwise and unlock
it and then remove bulb & socket assembly.
A
B
C
JMLIA1528ZZ
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
INL
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-51
2012 QUEST
FOOT LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
FOOT LAMP
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007496065
JMLIA2178ZZ
1.
Instrument lower panel LH
2.
Lamp housing
3.
Bulb & socket assembly
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
DRIVER SIDE : Replacement
INFOID:0000000007496066
CAUTION:
• Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage.
• Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb.
• Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands because the surface is very hot just after
the lamp is turned OFF to prevent a burns.
• Leaving the bulb removed from housing for a long period of time can deteriorate performance of the
lens and reflector (causing dirty or clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when
replacing the bulb.
FOOT LAMP BULB (DRIVER SIDE)
1.
Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
INL-52
2012 QUEST
FOOT LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Rotate the bulb & socket assembly counterclockwise and unlock
it and then remove bulb & socket assembly.
A
B
C
JMLIA1528ZZ
PASSENGER SIDE
D
PASSENGER SIDE : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007496067
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
INL
JMLIA2179ZZ
M
1.
Instrument lower panel RH
2.
Lamp housing
3.
Bulb& socket assembly
: Pawl
N
: Vehicle front
PASSENGER SIDE : Replacement
INFOID:0000000007496068
CAUTION:
• Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage.
• Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb.
• Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands because the surface is very hot just after
the lamp is turned OFF to prevent a burns.
• Leaving the bulb removed from housing for a long period of time can deteriorate performance of the
lens and reflector (causing dirty or clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when
replacing the bulb.
FOOT LAMP BULB (PASSENGER SIDE)
Revision: 2011 September
INL-53
2012 QUEST
O
P
FOOT LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Remove instrument lower panel RH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
2. Rotate the bulb & socket assembly counterclockwise and unlock
it and then remove bulb & socket assembly.
JMLIA1528ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
INL-54
2012 QUEST
STEP LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
STEP LAMP
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007496069
B
C
D
E
F
JMLIA1423ZZ
1.
Step lamp assembly
2.
G
Bulb
: Pawl
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007496070
CAUTION:
Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation
to electric leakage.
H
I
REMOVAL
1.
J
Disengage step lamp assembly fixing pawls with a remover tool
(A).
CAUTION:
Apply protective tape (B) on the part to protect it from damage.
K
: Pawl
2.
INL
Disconnect harness connector, and then remove step lamp
assembly.
JMLIA1529ZZ
M
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
N
Replacement
INFOID:0000000007496071
CAUTION:
• Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage.
• Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb.
• Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands because the surface is very hot just after
the lamp is turned OFF to prevent a burns.
• Leaving the bulb removed from housing for a long period of time can deteriorate performance of the
lens and reflector (causing dirty or clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when
replacing the bulb.
STEP LAMP BULB
Revision: 2011 September
INL-55
2012 QUEST
O
P
STEP LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Push bulb with a remover tool (A), and then remove bulb.
JMLIA1530ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
INL-56
2012 QUEST
PERSONAL LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
PERSONAL LAMP
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007496072
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
JMLIA1424ZZ
1.
Headlining
2.
Rear cooler grille
4.
Bulb
5.
Lens
3.
K
Personal lamp case
: Pawl
INL
: Metal clip
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007496073
M
CAUTION:
Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation
to electric leakage.
N
REMOVAL
1.
a.
Remove rear cooler grille.
Disengage rear cooler grille fixing metal clips with a remover tool
(A).
O
P
: Metal clip
b.
Disconnect harness connector, and then remove rear cooler
grille.
JMIIA1185ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
INL-57
2012 QUEST
PERSONAL LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2.
Remove personal lamp case.
Disengage personal lamp case fixing metal clips with a remover
tool (A), and then remove personal lamp case.
: Metal clip
JMLIA1532ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Replacement
INFOID:0000000007496074
CAUTION:
• Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage.
• Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb.
• Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands because the surface is very hot just after
the lamp is turned OFF to prevent a burns.
• Leaving the bulb removed from housing for a long period of time can deteriorate performance of the
lens and reflector (causing dirty or clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when
replacing the bulb.
PERSONAL LAMP BULB
1.
2.
3.
Remove personal lamp case. Refer to INL-57, "Removal and Installation".
Remove lens fixing screw.
Disengage lens fixing pawls with a remover tool (A), and then remove lens.
JMLIA1533ZZ
: Pawl
4.
Remove bulb.
Revision: 2011 September
INL-58
2012 QUEST
LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007496075
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
JMLIA2180ZZ
1.
Luggage room lamp case
4.
Luggage side lower finisher LH
2.
Bulb
3.
Lens
J
: Pawl
K
: Metal clip
: Vehicle front
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007496076
CAUTION:
Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation
to electric leakage.
INL
M
REMOVAL
Disengage luggage room lamp case fixing metal clips with a remover tool (A), and then remove luggage room
lamp case.
INSTALLATION
O
Install in the revers order of removal.
Replacement
INFOID:0000000007496077
CAUTION:
• Disconnect the battery negative terminal or remove power circuit fuse while performing the operation to electric leakage.
• Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to the bulb.
• Never touch the glass surface of the bulb with bare hands because the surface is very hot just after
the lamp is turned OFF to prevent a burns.
Revision: 2011 September
N
INL-59
2012 QUEST
P
LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Leaving the bulb removed from housing for a long period of time can deteriorate performance of the
lens and reflector (causing dirty or clouding). Always prepare a new bulb and have it on hand when
replacing the bulb.
LUGGAGE ROOM LAMP BULB
1.
2.
3.
Remove luggage room lamp case. Refer to INL-59, "Removal and Installation".
Remove lens fixing screw.
Disengage lens fixing pawls with a remover tool (A), and then remove lens.
JMLIA1533ZZ
: Pawl
4.
Remove bulb.
Revision: 2011 September
INL-60
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Bulb Specifications
Item
INFOID:0000000007496078
Type
Wattage (W)
Wedge
8
LED
—
—
1.2
LED
—
Glove box lamp
—
1.4
Foot lamp (driver side)
—
1.4
Map lamp
Total coordination of illumination
Vanity mirror lamp
Push-button ignition switch illumination
Foot lamp (passenger side)
—
1.4
Wedge
3.4
Personal lamp
—
8
Luggage room lamp
—
8
Step lamp
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
INL
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
INL-61
2012 QUEST
ENGINE
SECTION
LU
ENGINE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
A
LU
C
D
E
CONTENTS
F
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 2
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 11
DESCRIPTION .................................................... 2
OIL COOLER .................................................... 11
Engine Lubrication System ...................................... 2
Engine Lubrication System Schematic ...................... 3
Exploded View .........................................................11
Removal and Installation .........................................11
Inspection ................................................................12
G
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY ... 13
H
PRECAUTION ............................................... 4
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4
Precaution for Liquid Gasket ..................................... 4
OIL PUMP ......................................................... 13
Exploded View .........................................................13
Removal and Installation .........................................13
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................13
Inspection ................................................................14
PREPARATION ............................................ 5
PREPARATION ................................................... 5
Special Service Tool ................................................. 5
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 5
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 7
ENGINE OIL ........................................................ 7
Inspection .................................................................. 7
Draining ..................................................................... 8
Refilling ..................................................................... 9
I
J
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ............................................................ 16
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 16
OIL FILTER ........................................................10
Periodical Maintenance Specification ....................16
Engine Oil Pressure ...............................................16
Oil Pump .................................................................16
Regulator Valve ......................................................16
Removal and Installation ......................................... 10
Inspection ................................................................ 10
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
LU-1
2012 QUEST
DESCRIPTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
Engine Lubrication System
INFOID:0000000007493513
JPBIA1773GB
Revision: 2011 September
LU-2
2012 QUEST
DESCRIPTION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Engine Lubrication System Schematic
INFOID:0000000007493514
A
LU
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
JPBIA1775GB
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
LU-3
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Liquid Gasket
INFOID:0000000007493515
LIQUID GASKET APPLICATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
Remove old liquid gasket adhering to the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface.
• Remove liquid gasket completely from the liquid gasket application surface, mounting bolts, and bolt
holes.
Wipe the liquid gasket application surface and the mating surface with white gasoline (lighting and heating
use) to remove adhering moisture, grease and foreign materials.
Apply liquid gasket to the liquid gasket application surface.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
• Within 5 minutes of liquid gasket application, install in the mating component.
• If liquid gasket protrudes, wipe it off immediately.
• Never retighten mounting bolts or nuts after the installation.
• After 30 minutes or more have passed from the installation, fill engine oil and engine coolant.
Revision: 2011 September
LU-4
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000007493516
LU
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
ST25051001
(J-25695-1)
Oil pressure gauge
Description
C
Measuring oil pressure
Maximum measuring range: 2,452 kPa (25
D
kg/cm2, 356 psi)
E
NT050
Adapting oil pressure gauge to oil pan (upper)
ST25052000
(J-25695-2)
Hose
F
G
H
S-NT559
Removing oil filter
a: 64.3 mm (2.531 in)
KV10115801
(J-38956)
Oil filter wrench
I
J
S-NT375
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000007493517
Tool name
Description
Power tools
Loosening nuts and bolts
K
L
M
N
PBIC0190E
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
LU-5
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Tool name
Description
Tube presser
Pressing the tube of liquid gasket
NT052
Deep socket
Removing and installing oil pressure switch
27 mm (1.06 in)
PBIC4066E
Revision: 2011 September
LU-6
2012 QUEST
ENGINE OIL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
A
ENGINE OIL
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007493518
LU
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
NOTE:
Before starting engine, put vehicle horizontally and check the engine oil level. If engine is already started, stop
it and allow 10 minutes before checking.
1. Pull out oil level gauge and wipe it clean.
2. Insert oil level gauge and check the engine oil level is within the
range shown in the figure.
3. If it is out of range, adjust it.
C
D
E
F
G
PBIC4202E
ENGINE OIL APPEARANCE
• Check engine oil for white turbidity or heavy contamination.
• If engine oil becomes turbid and white, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant.
Repair or replace damaged parts.
H
ENGINE OIL LEAKAGE
I
Check for engine oil leakage around the following areas:
• Oil pans (lower and upper)
• Oil pan drain plug
• Oil pressure switch
• Oil temperature sensor
• Oil filter
• Oil cooler
• Camshaft sprocket cover(bank 1 and bank 2)
• Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (bank 1 and bank 2)
• Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover
• Mating surface between front timing chain case and rear timing chain case
• Mating surface between rear timing chain case and cylinder head
• Mating surface between rear timing chain case and cylinder block
• Mating surface between rear timing chain case and oil pan (upper)
• Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head
• Crankshaft oil seals (front and rear)
• Camshaft position sensor (PHASE)
J
K
L
M
N
OIL PRESSURE CHECK
WARNING:
• Be careful not to get burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
• Oil pressure check should be done in “Parking position”.
1. Check the engine oil level.
2. Remove splash guard (RH). Refer to EXT-22, "Exploded View".
Revision: 2011 September
LU-7
O
P
2012 QUEST
ENGINE OIL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
3. Disconnect harness connector at oil pressure switch (2), and
remove oil pressure switch using deep socket (commercial service tool).
1
: Oil filter
: Vehicle front
CAUTION:
Never drop or shock oil pressure switch.
JPBIA1677ZZ
4.
Install the oil pressure gauge [SST: ST25051001 (J-25695-1)]
(A) and hose [SST: ST25052000 (J-25695-2)] (B).
JPBIA0074ZZ
5.
6.
Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
Check the engine oil pressure with engine running under no-load.
NOTE:
When the engine oil temperature is low, the engine oil pressure becomes high.
Engine oil pressure
7.
a.
b.
If difference is extreme, check engine oil passage and oil pump for engine oil leakage.
After the inspections, install oil pressure switch as follows:
Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure switch and the mating surface.
Apply liquid gasket and tighten oil pressure switch to the specification.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
Tightening torque
c.
: Refer to LU-16, "Engine Oil Pressure".
: Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
After warming up engine, check there is no leakage of engine oil with running engine.
Draining
INFOID:0000000007493519
WARNING:
• Be careful not to get burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
• Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin
contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
1. Warm up the engine, and check for engine oil leakage from engine components. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
2. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.
3. Loosen oil filler cap.
Revision: 2011 September
LU-8
2012 QUEST
ENGINE OIL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
4. Remove drain plug (1) and then drain engine oil.
A
: Vehicle front
LU
C
JPBIA1676ZZ
D
Refilling
1.
INFOID:0000000007493520
Install drain plug with new drain plug washer. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse drain plug washer.
• Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new drain plug washer.
E
F
Tightening torque
2.
Refill with new engine oil.
Engine oil specification and viscosity: Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".
Engine oil capacity
3.
4.
5.
: Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
G
: Refer to LU-16, "Periodical Maintenance Specification".
CAUTION:
• When filling engine oil, never pull out oil level gauge.
• The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only.
• Always use oil level gauge to determine the proper amount of engine oil in engine.
Warm up the engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for engine oil leakage.
Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.
Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
LU-9
2012 QUEST
OIL FILTER
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
OIL FILTER
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007493521
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Oil filter is provided with relief valve. Use genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent.
• Be careful not to get burned when engine and engine oil may be hot.
• When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage.
• Never allow engine oil to adhere to drive belt.
• Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to engine and vehicle.
1. Remove splash guard (RH). Refer to EXT-22, "Exploded View".
2. Using oil filter wrench [SST: KV10115801 (J-38956)] (A), remove
oil filter.
: Vehicle front
JPBIA1678ZZ
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Remove foreign materials adhering to oil filter installation surface.
Apply engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of new oil filter.
SMA010
3.
Screw oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface,
then tighten it by 2/3 turn (A). Or tighten to the specification.
Oil filter:
: 17.6 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb)
JPBIA0077ZZ
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007493522
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
Start the engine, and check there is no leakage of engine oil.
Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.
Check the engine oil level, and adjust the level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
Revision: 2011 September
LU-10
2012 QUEST
OIL COOLER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
OIL COOLER
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007493523
LU
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
JPBIA4859GB
1.
Connector bolt
2.
Copper gasket
3.
Water drain plug
4.
Water pipe
5.
Bracket
6.
Clamp
7.
Water hose
8.
Relief valve
9.
O-ring
10.
Oil cooler
11.
Connector bolt
12. Oil filter
15. Water hose
13.
Water hose
14.
Water pipe
A.
To water connector
B.
Refer to LU-10
J
K
L
: Engine front
M
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
N
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: Should be lubricated with oil.
O
: Sealing point
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007493524
P
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Be careful not to get burn yourself, as engine oil and engine coolant may be hot.
NOTE:
When remove oil cooler only, step 2 is unnecessary.
1. Remove front wheel (RH).
2. Remove splash guard (RH). Refer to EXT-22, "Exploded View".
Revision: 2011 September
LU-11
2012 QUEST
OIL COOLER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Drain engine coolant from radiator and cylinder block. Refer to CO-8, "Draining" and EM-63, "Setting".
NOTE:
Perform this step when removing water pipes.
4. Remove oil filter. Refer to LU-10, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Never spill engine oil on drive belt.
5. Disconnect water hoses from oil cooler.
• When removing oil cooler only, pinching water hoses near oil cooler to prevent engine coolant from spilling out.
• Remaining engine coolant in piping will come out. Use a tray to collect it.
CAUTION:
• Perform this step when the engine is cold.
• Never spill engine coolant on drive belt.
6. Remove connector bolt, and remove oil cooler.
CAUTION:
Never spill engine oil to rubber parts such as drive belt.
7. Remove water hoses if necessary.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings.
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Check that no foreign objects are adhering to the installation surfaces of oil cooler and oil pan (upper).
• Align cutout (B) on oil cooler (2) with protrusion (A) on oil pan
(upper) side, and tighten connector bolt (1).
JPBIA1680ZZ
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007493525
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Oil Cooler
Check oil cooler for cracks. Check oil cooler for clogging by blowing through engine coolant inlet. If necessary,
replace oil cooler.
Relief Valve
Inspect relief valve for movement, cracks and breaks by pushing the ball. If replacement is necessary, remove
relief valve by prying it out with a suitable tool. Install a new relief valve in place by tapping it.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the engine oil level and the engine coolant level and add engine oil and engine coolant. Refer to
LU-7, "Inspection" and CO-8, "Inspection".
Start the engine, and check there is no leakage of engine oil or engine coolant.
Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.
Check the engine oil level and the engine coolant level again. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection" and CO-8,
"Inspection".
Revision: 2011 September
LU-12
2012 QUEST
OIL PUMP
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
A
OIL PUMP
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007493526
LU
C
D
E
F
G
JPBIA1681GB
H
1.
Oil pump body
2.
Oil pump outer rotor
3.
Oil pump inner rotor
4.
Oil pump cover
5.
Regulator valve plug
6.
Regulator valve spring
7.
Regulator valve
I
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
J
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: Should be lubricated with oil.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007493527
K
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove oil pan (lower and upper) and oil strainer. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
Remove front timing chain case and timing chain (primary). Refer to EM-66, "Exploded View".
Remove oil pump assembly.
L
M
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• When installing, align crankshaft flat faces with oil pump inner rotor flat faces.
Disassembly and Assembly
N
INFOID:0000000007493528
O
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove oil pump cover.
Remove oil pump inner rotor and oil pump outer rotor from oil pump body.
After removing regulator valve plug, remove regulator valve spring and regulator valve.
P
ASSEMBLY
Note the following, and assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
Revision: 2011 September
LU-13
2012 QUEST
OIL PUMP
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
• Install oil pump inner rotor with the groove (C) faced to oil pump
cover side (B).
A : Oil pump body side
JPBIA0084ZZ
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007493529
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Oil Pump Clearance
• Measure the clearance with feeler gauge (C).
- Clearance between oil pump outer rotor and oil pump body. [Position (B)]
Standard
: Refer to LU-16, "Oil Pump".
- Tip clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump outer
rotor. [Position (A)]
Standard
: Refer to LU-16, "Oil Pump".
JPBIA0078ZZ
• Measure the clearance with feeler gauge and straightedge (A).
- Side clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump body.
[Position (C)]
Standard
: Refer to LU-16, "Oil Pump".
- Side clearance between oil pump outer rotor and oil pump body.
[Position (B)]
Standard
: Refer to LU-16, "Oil Pump".
JPBIA0079ZZ
• Calculate the clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump body as follows:
OIL PUMP BODY INNER DIAMETER
- Measure the inner diameter of oil pump body with inside micrometer. [Position (A)]
OIL PUMP INNER ROTOR OUTER DIAMETER
- Measure the outer diameter of protruded portion of oil pump inner
rotor (1) with micrometer. [Position (B)]
JPBIA0080ZZ
OIL PUMP INNER ROTOR TO OIL PUMP BODY CLEARANCE
- (Clearance) = (Oil pump body inner diameter) – (Oil pump inner rotor outer diameter)
Revision: 2011 September
LU-14
2012 QUEST
OIL PUMP
< UNIT DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY >
Standard
: Refer to LU-16, "Oil Pump".
A
• If measured/calculated values are out of the standard, replace oil pump assembly.
Regulator Valve Clearance
(Clearance) = (Regulator valve hole diameter) – (Regulator valve
outer diameter)
1
: Regulator valve
2
: Oil pump body
Standard
LU
C
D
: Refer to LU-16, "Regulator Valve".
• If the calculated value is out of the standard, replace oil pump
assembly.
CAUTION:
• Coat regulator valve with engine oil.
• Check that it falls smoothly into valve hole by its own weight.
E
JPBIA0081ZZ
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
F
1.
2.
3.
4.
G
Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
Start the engine, and check that there is no leakage of engine oil.
Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.
Check the engine oil level and adjust the level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
LU-15
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Periodical Maintenance Specification
INFOID:0000000007493530
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Unit:
With oil filter change
Drain and refill
Without oil filter change
Dry engine (Overhaul)
(US qt, lmp qt)
4.6 (4-7/8, 4)
4.3 (4-1/2, 3-3/4)
5.3 (5-5/8, 4-5/8)
Engine Oil Pressure
INFOID:0000000007493531
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Engine speed
Approximate discharge pressure*
Idle speed
More than 98 (1.0, 14)
2,000 rpm
More than 294 (3.0, 43)
*: Engine oil temperature at 80°C (176°F)
Oil Pump
INFOID:0000000007493532
Unit: mm (in)
Clearance between oil pump outer rotor and oil pump body
0.114 - 0.260 (0.0045 - 0.0102)
Tip clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump outer rotor
Below 0.180 (0.0071)
Side clearance between oil pump inner rotor and oil pump body
0.030 - 0.070 (0.0012 - 0.0028)
Side clearance between oil pump outer rotor and oil pump body
0.050 - 0.110 (0.0020 - 0.0043)
Oil pump inner rotor to oil pump body clearance
0.045 - 0.091 (0.0018 - 0.0036)
Regulator Valve
INFOID:0000000007493533
Unit: mm (in)
Regulator valve to oil pump body clearance
Revision: 2011 September
0.040 - 0.097 (0.0016 - 0.0038)
LU-16
2012 QUEST
MAINTENANCE
SECTION
MA
MAINTENANCE
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PREPARATION ............................................ 3
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Special Service Tool ................................................. 3
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 3
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 4
GENERAL MAINTENANCE ................................ 4
Explanation of General Maintenance ........................ 4
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ................................ 6
Introduction of Periodic Maintenance ........................ 6
Schedule 1 ................................................................ 6
Schedule 2 ................................................................ 8
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................................................................10
Fluids and Lubricants .............................................. 10
Engine Oil Recommendation .................................. 10
Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio .......................... 10
ENGINE MAINTENANCE ...................................12
DRIVE BELT .............................................................. 12
DRIVE BELT : Exploded View ................................ 12
DRIVE BELT : Checking ......................................... 12
DRIVE BELT : Tension Adjustment ........................ 12
ENGINE COOLANT ................................................... 12
ENGINE COOLANT : Draining ................................ 12
ENGINE COOLANT : Refilling ................................ 13
ENGINE COOLANT : Flushing ............................... 15
RADIATOR CAP ........................................................ 15
RADIATOR CAP : Inspection .................................. 15
RADIATOR ................................................................ 16
RADIATOR : Inspection .......................................... 16
FUEL LINES .............................................................. 16
FUEL LINES : Inspection ........................................ 16
AIR CLEANER FILTER ............................................. 16
Revision: 2011 September
AIR CLEANER FILTER : Removal and Installation
....16
ENGINE OIL ...............................................................17
ENGINE OIL : Draining ............................................17
ENGINE OIL : Refilling ............................................17
F
G
OIL FILTER ................................................................17
OIL FILTER : Removal and Installation ...................18
OIL FILTER : Inspection ..........................................18
H
SPARK PLUG ............................................................18
SPARK PLUG : Removal and Installation ...............19
SPARK PLUG : Inspection ......................................19
I
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM....19
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM : Work Procedure ............................................20
J
K
EVAP VAPOR LINES ................................................20
EVAP VAPOR LINES : Inspection ...........................20
CHASSIS MAINTENANCE ............................... 21
L
EXHAUST SYSTEM ...................................................21
EXHAUST SYSTEM : Inspection ............................21
M
CVT FLUID .................................................................21
CVT FLUID : Inspection ...........................................21
WHEELS ....................................................................22
WHEELS : Wheel Balance Adjustment ...................22
WHEELS : Tire Rotation ..........................................24
N
O
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND LEAKS .........................24
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND LEAKS : Inspection ....25
BRAKE LINES AND CABLES ...................................25
BRAKE LINES AND CABLES : Inspection ..............25
BRAKE FLUID ...........................................................25
BRAKE FLUID : Changing .......................................25
DISC BRAKE .............................................................25
DISC BRAKE : Inspection .......................................25
MA-1
2012 QUEST
MA
DISC BRAKE : Front Disc Brake ............................ 26
DISC BRAKE : Rear Disc Brake ............................. 26
SEAT BELT, BUCKLES, RETRACTORS, ANCHORS AND ADJUSTERS : Inspection ................. 29
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ........................... 26
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE : Inspection ...... 26
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) .......................................................... 30
POWER STEERING FLUID AND LINES .................. 27
POWER STEERING FLUID AND LINES : Inspection .......................................................................... 27
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 30
AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS ........................... 27
AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS : Inspection ..... 27
DRIVE SHAFT ........................................................... 27
DRIVE SHAFT : Inspection .................................... 28
BODY MAINTENANCE ..................................... 29
LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH ..................... 29
LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH : Lubricating ........................................................................... 29
SEAT BELT, BUCKLES, RETRACTORS, ANCHORS AND ADJUSTERS ...................................... 29
Revision: 2011 September
DRIVE BELT .............................................................. 30
DRIVE BELT : Drive Belt ........................................ 30
ENGINE COOLANT .................................................. 30
ENGINE COOLANT : Periodical Maintenance
Specification ............................................................ 30
ENGINE OIL .............................................................. 30
ENGINE OIL :
Periodical Maintenance Specification .................... 30
SPARK PLUG ........................................................... 30
SPARK PLUG : Spark Plug .................................... 30
ROAD WHEEL .......................................................... 30
ROAD WHEEL : Road Wheel ................................. 30
MA-2
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000007494684
B
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
KV10115801
(J-38956)
Oil filter wrench
Description
C
Removing and installing oil filter
a: 64.3 mm (2.531 in)
D
E
S-NT375
F
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000007494685
G
Tool name
(Kent-Moore No.)
Description
Power tool
( — )
Loosening nuts and bolts
H
I
PBIC0190E
Spark plug wrench
( — )
Removing and installing spark plug
a : 14 mm (0.55 in)
J
K
L
JPBIA0399ZZ
M
N
O
MA
Revision: 2011 September
MA-3
2012 QUEST
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Explanation of General Maintenance
INFOID:0000000007494686
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during the normal day-to-day operation
of the vehicle. They are essential if the vehicle is to continue operating properly. The owners can perform
checks and inspections themselves or have their NISSAN dealers do them.
OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.
Item
Tires
Reference page
Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips.
Adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified.
Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
WT-48
Wheel nuts
When checking the tires, make sure no nuts are missing, and check for any loose
nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation
Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
MA-24
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) transmitter
components
Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires
are replaced due to wear or age.
WT-45
If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road,
or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel
alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds,
wheel balancing may be needed. For additional information regarding tires, refer
to "lmportant Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada)
in the NISSAN Warranty Information Booklet.
FSU-6
RSU-6
MA-22
Windshield
Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Repair as necessary.
—
Windshield wiper blades
Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
—
Doors and engine hood
Check that all doors and the engine hood operate smoothly as well as the back
door, trunk lid and glass hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from
opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
MA-29
Make sure that the headlamps, stop lamps, tail lamps, turn signal lamps, and other lamps are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlamp
aim. Clean the headlamps on a regular basis.
—
Wheel alignment and balance
Lamps
—
INSIDE THE VEHICLE
The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing periodic maintenance, cleaning the vehicle,
etc.
Item
Reference page
Warning lamps and
chimes
Make sure that all warning lamps and chimes are operating properly.
—
Windshield wiper and
washer
Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not
streak.
—
Windshield defroster
Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient
quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.
—
Steering wheel
Check that it has the specified play. Check for changes in the steering condition,
such as excessive play, hard steering or strange noises.
Free play: Less than 35 mm (1.38 in)
—
Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to
make sure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restrains move up and down smoothly and that the locks
(if equipped) hold securely in all latched positions. Check that the latches lock securely for folding-down rear seatbacks.
—
Seats
Revision: 2011 September
MA-4
2012 QUEST
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
Item
Seat belts
Reference page
A
Check that all parts of the seat belt system (e.g. buckles, anchors, adjusters and
retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the
belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
MA-29
Accelerator pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or
require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away from the pedal.
—
Brakes
Check that the brake does not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.
—
Brake pedal and booster
Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure it has the proper distance
under it when depressed fully. Check the brake booster function. Be sure to keep
the floor mats away from the pedal.
BR-7
BR-13
Parking brake
Check that the pedal has the proper travel and make sure that the vehicle is held
securely on a fairly steep hill when only the parking brake is applied.
PB-3
CVT P (Park) position
mechanism
On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the selector lever
in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.
—
B
C
D
E
UNDER THE HOOD AND VEHICLE
The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (e.g. each time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Item
Reference page
Windshield washer fluid
Check that there is adequate fluid in the tank.
Engine coolant level
Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.
CO-8
Radiator and hoses
Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may
have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, deterioration or loose connections.
MA-16
Brake fluid level
Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the
reservoir.
MA-25
Battery
Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.
PG-119
Engine drive belt
Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
MA-12
Engine oil level
Check the level on the oil level gauge after parking the vehicle on a level spot and
turning off the engine.
Power steering fluid level
and lines
Check the level on the dipstick with the engine off. Check the lines for improper
attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
MA-27
Exhaust system
Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust
seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately locate the trouble
and correct it.
MA-21
The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used
on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances,
otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust
system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with
plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt can easily accumulate.
—
Underbody
Fluid leaks
Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal.
If you should notice any leaks or gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause
and correct it immediately.
F
—
G
H
I
J
LU-7
K
L
M
N
—
O
MA
Revision: 2011 September
MA-5
2012 QUEST
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
Introduction of Periodic Maintenance
INFOID:0000000007494687
Two different maintenance schedules are provided, and should be used, depending upon the conditions in
which the vehicle is mainly operated. After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, continue the periodic
maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.
Schedule 1
Schedule 2
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 1 if the driving habits frequently include
one or more of the following driving conditions:
• Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).
• Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures
remaining below freezing.
• Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go “rush hour” traffic.
• Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi
or door-to-door delivery use.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
• Driving on rough, muddy, or salt spread roads.
• Towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier.
Follow Periodic Maintenance Schedule 2 if none of driving conditions shown in
Schedule 1 apply to the driving habits.
Emission Control System
Maintenance
Chassis and Body Maintenance
MA-6
Emission Control System
Maintenance
Chassis and Body Maintenance
Schedule 1
MA-8
INFOID:0000000007494688
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Abbreviations: R = Replace.
I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
[ ]: At the mileage intervals only
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
Drive belt
NOTE (1)
Air cleaner filter
NOTE (2)
3.75
(6)
3
7.50
(12)
6
11.25
(18)
9
15
(24)
12
18.75
(30)
15
22.5
(36)
18
26.25
(42)
21
30
(48)
24
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
MA-12
[R]
MA-16
EVAP vapor lines
I*
MA-20
Fuel lines
I*
MA-16
Fuel filter
NOTE (3)
—
Engine coolant*
NOTE (4)
MA-12
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-17
Engine oil filter (Use genuine
NISSAN engine oil filter or
equivalent.)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-18
Spark plugs (Iridium-tipped
type)
Intake & exhaust valve clearance*
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km).
NOTE (5)
EM-18
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
MA-19
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
33.75
(54)
27
37.5
(60)
30
41.25
(66)
33
45
(72)
36
48.75
(78)
39
52.5
(84)
42
56.25
(90)
45
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
Drive belt
NOTE (1)
I*
MA-12
Air cleaner filter
NOTE (2)
[R]
MA-16
EVAP vapor lines
I*
MA-20
Fuel lines
I*
MA-16
Revision: 2011 September
MA-6
2012 QUEST
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
33.75
(54)
27
37.5
(60)
30
41.25
(66)
33
45
(72)
36
48.75
(78)
39
52.5
(84)
42
56.25
(90)
45
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
Fuel filter
NOTE (3)
—
Engine coolant*
NOTE (4)
MA-12
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-17
Engine oil filter (Use genuine
NISSAN engine oil filter or
equivalent.)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-18
B
C
D
Spark plugs (Iridium-tipped
type)
Intake & exhaust valve clearance*
A
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km).
MA-19
NOTE (5)
EM-18
E
NOTE:
(1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found
damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading reaches the maximum limit.
F
(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.
(3) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, refer to FL section.
(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000
km) or 60 months. Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life
expectancy of the factory-fill coolant.
G
H
(5) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform
such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are
required.
I
CHASSIS AND BODY
Abbreviations: R = Replace. I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
3.75
(6)
3
7.50
(12)
6
11.25
(18)
9
Brake lines & cables
I
I
MA-25
I
MA-25
R
R
MA-25
I
I
MA-21
I
MA-26
MA-27
I
Brake fluid
NOTE (1)
Steering gear & linkage, axle
& suspension parts
Tire rotation
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
18.75
(30)
15
22.5
(36)
18
26.25
(42)
21
I
Brake pads & rotors
CVT fluid
30
(48)
24
15
(24)
12
I
I
I
I
MA-4
WT-42
NOTE (2)
Drive shaft boots
I
I
I
I
MA-28
Exhaust system
I
I
I
I
MA-21
R
VTL-18
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
I
MA-25
I
MA-25
R
MA-25
In-cabin microfilter
R
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
33.75
(54)
27
37.5
(60)
30
41.25
(66)
33
Brake lines & cables
Brake pads & rotors
48.75
(78)
39
52.5
(84)
42
I
I
I
Brake fluid
Revision: 2011 September
45
(72)
36
R
MA-7
I
56.25
(90)
45
2012 QUEST
J
K
L
M
N
O
MA
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles,
kilometers or months, whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
CVT fluid
33.75
(54)
27
37.5
(60)
30
45
(72)
36
NOTE (1)
48.75
(78)
39
52.5
(84)
42
56.25
(90)
45
I
Steering gear & linkage, axle
& suspension parts
Tire rotation
41.25
(66)
33
I
I
I
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
I
MA-21
I
MA-26
MA-27
MA-4
WT-42
NOTE (2)
Drive shaft boots
I
I
I
I
MA-28
Exhaust system
I
I
I
I
MA-21
R
VTL-18
In-cabin microfilter
R
NOTE:
(1) Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT fluid (NS-2). If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy
roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration at NISSAN dealers every 100,000 km (60,000 miles), then change CVT fluid NS-2 if necessary.
And if the inspection is not be performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid NS-2 every 100,000 km (60,000 miles). Using transmission
fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the warranty.
(2) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “General maintenance” heading earlier in this section.
Schedule 2
INFOID:0000000007494689
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Abbreviations: R = Replace.
I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
[ ]: At the mileage intervals only
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
I*
MA-12
[R]
[R]
MA-16
EVAP vapor lines
I*
I*
MA-20
Fuel lines
I*
I*
MA-16
Perform at number of miles, kilometers
or months, whichever comes first.
Drive belt
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
7.5
(12)
6
15
(24)
12
22.5
(36)
18
30
(48)
24
37.5
(60)
30
45
(72)
36
52.5
(84)
42
NOTE (1)
Air cleaner filter
Fuel filter
NOTE (2)
—
Engine coolant*
NOTE (3)
MA-12
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-17
Engine oil filter (Use genuine NISSAN
engine oil filter or equivalent.)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
MA-18
Spark plugs (Iridium-tipped type)
Intake & exhaust valve clearance*
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km).
NOTE (4)
MA-19
EM-18
NOTE:
(1) After 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found
damaged or if the auto belt tensioner reading reaches the maximum limit.
(2) Maintenance-free item. For service procedures, refer to FL section.
(3) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000
km) or 60 months. Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life
expectancy of the factory-fill coolant.
(4) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increases, inspect valve clearance.
* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform
such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are
required.
CHASSIS AND BODY
Revision: 2011 September
MA-8
2012 QUEST
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
Abbreviations: R = Replace.
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
Perform at number of miles, kilometers
or months, whichever comes first.
I = Inspect. Correct or replace if necessary.
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
Miles x 1,000
(km x 1,000)
Months
7.5
(12)
6
15
(24)
12
22.5
(36)
18
30
(48)
24
37.5
(60)
30
45
(72)
36
52.5
(84)
42
60
(96)
48
Reference
Section Page or Content Title
Brake lines & cables
I
I
I
I
MA-25
Brake pads & rotors
I
I
I
I
MA-25
R
MA-25
I
MA-21
I
MA-26
MA-27
Brake fluid
CVT fluid
R
NOTE (1)
I
Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts
Tire rotation
Drive shaft boots
I
I
MA-4
WT-42
NOTE (2)
I
Exhaust system
In-cabin microfilter
I
I
I
I
R
R
R
I
MA-28
I
MA-21
R
VTL-18
A
B
C
D
E
F
NOTE:
(1) Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by the NISSAN new
vehicle limited warranty.
G
(2) Refer to “Tire rotation” under the “General maintenance” heading earlier in this section.
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
MA
Revision: 2011 September
MA-9
2012 QUEST
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Fluids and Lubricants
INFOID:0000000007494690
Capacity (Approximate)
Engine oil
Drain and
refill
US measure
Imp measure
Liter
With oil filter change
4-7/8 qt
4 qt
4.6
Without oil filter
change
4-1/2 qt
3-3/4 qt
4.3
5-5/8 qt
4-5/8 qt
5.3
With reservoir tank
12 qt
10 qt
11.3
Reservoir tank
6/8 qt
5/8 qt
Dry engine (Overhaul)
Cooling
system
CVT fluid
9 qt
*6
10-6/8 qt
0.75
*6
10.2*6
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
• Engine oil with API Certification Mark
• Viscosity SAE 5W-30*1,*2
Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/
Coolant (blue) or equivalent
Genuine NISSAN CVT fluid NS-2*3
1-1/8 qt
7/8 qt
1.0
Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent*4
Brake fluid
—
—
—
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*5
or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No.116)
Multi-purpose grease
—
—
—
NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
Windshield washer fluid
—
—
—
Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate
Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent
Fuel recommendation
—
—
—
Refer to GI-33, "Fuel".
Power steering fluid (PSF)
*1: For additional information, see “Engine Oil Recommendation”.
*2: NISSAN recommends Genuine NISSAN Ester oil available an NISSAN dealer.
*3: Using only Genuine NISSAN CVT fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT fluid NS-2 will damage the
CVT, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle warranty.
*4: Use of a power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF will prevent the power steering system from operating properly.
*5: Available in mainland U.S.A. through an NISSAN dealer.
*6: The fluid capacity is the reference value.
Engine Oil Recommendation
INFOID:0000000007494691
NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification and International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils
have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label
should not be used as they could cause engine damage.
JSPIA0006ZZ
1.
API certification mark
2.
API service symbol
Anti-Freeze Coolant Mixture Ratio
INFOID:0000000007494692
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection. The antifreeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.
Revision: 2011 September
MA-10
2012 QUEST
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
WARNING:
• Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and
radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. See precautions in “If your vehicle overheats” found in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
• The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a
genuine NISSAN radiator cap.
CAUTION:
• When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34°F (-37°C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather
where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacture's instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34°F (-37°C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other
than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine
cooling system.
• The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any
other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the
life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to the Nissan Service and Maintenance Guide for
more details.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
MA
Revision: 2011 September
MA-11
2012 QUEST
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
DRIVE BELT
DRIVE BELT : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494693
JPBIA4631ZZ
1.
Idler pulley
2.
Drive belt
3.
Idler pulley
4.
Drive belt auto-tensioner
5.
Crankshaft pulley
6.
Idler pulley
C.
Range when new drive belt is installed
7.
A/C compressor
8.
Alternator
A.
Indicator
B.
Possible use range
D.
View D
: Engine front
DRIVE BELT : Checking
INFOID:0000000007494694
WARNING:
Be sure to perform the this step when engine is stopped.
• Check that the indicator (A) of drive belt auto-tensioner is within the possible use range (B).
NOTE:
• Check the drive belt auto-tensioner indication when the engine is cold.
• When new drive belt is installed, the indicator should be within the range (C) in the figure.
• Visually check entire drive belt for wear, damage or cracks.
• If the indicator is out of the possible use range or belt is damaged, replace drive belt.
DRIVE BELT : Tension Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007494695
Refer to MA-30, "DRIVE BELT : Drive Belt".
ENGINE COOLANT
ENGINE COOLANT : Draining
INFOID:0000000007881968
WARNING:
• To avoid being scalded, never change engine coolant when the engine is hot.
• Wrap a thick cloth around radiator cap and carefully remove radiator cap. First, turn radiator cap a
quarter of a turn to release built-up pressure. Then turn radiator cap all the way.
1. Remove engine under cover.
Revision: 2011 September
MA-12
2012 QUEST
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
2. Open radiator drain plug (1) at the bottom of radiator, and then
remove radiator cap.
A
: Vehicle front
B
C
JPBIA5339ZZ
D
3.
4.
When draining all of engine coolant in the system, open water drain plugs on cylinder block. Refer
to EM-63, "Setting".
Remove reservoir tank if necessary, and drain engine coolant and clean reservoir tank before installing.
Check drained engine coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration.
If contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to CO-10, "Flushing".
ENGINE COOLANT : Refilling
INFOID:0000000007825214
CAUTION:
• Do not reuse O-rings.
• Do not put additive such as waterleak preventive, since it may cause cooling waterway clogging.
• When refilling use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent in its quality
mixed with water (distilled or demineralized). Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".
1. Install reservoir tank if removed and radiator drain plug.
CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.
Tightening torque
2.
3.
4.
E
F
G
H
I
: Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".
If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-105, "Disassembly and Assembly".
Check that each hose clamp has been firmly tightened.
Remove air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded
View".
Remove air bleeder plug (1) of heater pipe.
J
K
L
: Vehicle front
M
N
JPBIA5340ZZ
5.
O
Fill radiator, and reservoir tank if removed, to specified level.
CAUTION:
MA
Revision: 2011 September
MA-13
2012 QUEST
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
Never adhere the engine coolant to electronic equipments.
(alternator etc.)
• Pour engine coolant through engine coolant filler neck
slowly of less than 2 (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 lmp qt) a minute
to allow air in system to escape.
• When coolant comes out from the air bleeder plug of
heater pipe, tighten the bleeder plug.
JPBIA0412ZZ
Engine coolant capacity
(With reservoir tank at “MAX” level)
: Refer to CO-28, "Periodical Maintenance Specification".
Reservoir tank engine coolant capacity
(At “MAX” level)
: Refer to CO-28, "Periodical Maintenance
Specification".
A
: MAX
B
: MIN
JPBIA0102ZZ
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Install air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded
View".
Install radiator cap.
Start the engine.
Maintain the engine at 1,800 rpm for approximately 10 seconds. After performing this, stop the engine.
Remove radiator cap with the engine cold (approx. 50°C or less), and check the cooling water level. If the
fluid level is low, refill with cooling water to the lip of radiator.
Repeat Steps from 7 to 9 four times.
Cap the radiator, and start the engine.
Warm up engine until opening thermostat. Standard for warming-up time is approximately 10 minutes at
3,000 rpm.
• Check thermostat opening condition by touching radiator hose (lower) to see a flow of warm water.
CAUTION:
Watch water temperature gauge so as not to overheat engine.
Stop the engine and cool down to less than approximately 50°C (122°F).
• Cool down using fan to reduce the time.
• If necessary, refill radiator up to filler neck with engine coolant.
CAUTION:
Never adhere the engine coolant to electronic equipments. (alternator etc.)
Refill reservoir tank to “MAX” level line with engine coolant.
Repeat steps 7 through 10 two or more times with radiator cap installed until engine coolant level no
longer drops.
Check cooling system for leakage with engine running.
Warm up the engine, and check for sound of engine coolant flow while running engine from idle up to
3,000 rpm with heater temperature controller set at several position between “COOL” and “WARM”.
Revision: 2011 September
MA-14
2012 QUEST
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
• Sound may be noticeable at heater unit.
19. Repeat step 13 three times.
20. If sound is heard, bleed air from cooling system by repeating step 5, and steps from 7 to 14 until engine
coolant level no longer drops.
B
ENGINE COOLANT : Flushing
1.
INFOID:0000000007829823
Install reservoir tank if removed and radiator drain plug.
CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new O-ring.
Tightening torque
A
C
D
: Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".
If water drain plugs on cylinder block are removed, close and tighten them. Refer to EM-105, "Disassembly and Assembly".
2. Remove air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded
View".
3. Remove air bleeder plug.
4. Fill with cooling water until it overflows from the bleeder plug.
5. Install air bleeder plug.
6. Fill radiator and reservoir tank with water and reinstall radiator cap.
CAUTION:
Never adhere the water to electronic equipments. (alternator etc.)
• When water overflows disconnected heater hose, connect heater hose, and continue filling the
water.
7. Install air duct assembly and air cleaner cases (upper and lower) assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded
View".
8. Run the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature.
9. Rev the engine two or three times under no-load.
10. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down.
11. Drain water from the system. Refer to CO-8, "Draining".
12. Repeat steps 1 through 11 until clear water begins to drain from radiator.
RADIATOR CAP
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
RADIATOR CAP : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007494699
L
• Check valve seat (A) of radiator cap.
- Check if valve seat is swollen to the extent that the edge of the
plunger (B) cannot be seen when watching it vertically from the
top.
- Check if valve seat has no soil and damage.
- Check that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of radiator
cap negative-pressure valve.
- Check that there are no unusualness in the opening and closing
conditions of negative-pressure valve.
M
N
JPBIA1961ZZ
O
MA
Revision: 2011 September
MA-15
2012 QUEST
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
• Check radiator cap relief pressure.
Standard and limit
: Refer to CO-28, "Radiator".
- When connecting radiator cap to the radiator cap tester (commercial service tool) and the radiator cap tester adapter (commercial
service tool) (A), apply engine coolant to the cap seal surface.
JPBIA0109ZZ
• Replace radiator cap if there is an unusualness related to the above three.
CAUTION:
When installing radiator cap, thoroughly wipe out the radiator pipe (upper) filler neck to remove any
waxy residue or foreign material.
RADIATOR
RADIATOR : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007494700
Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows:
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to bend or damage radiator fins.
• When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as radiator cooling fan
assembly and horns. Then tape harness and connectors to prevent water from entering.
1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward.
2. Apply water again to all radiator core surfaces once per minute.
3. Stop washing if any stains no longer flow out from radiator.
4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward.
• Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm (11.81
in).
5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces once per minute until no water sprays out.
FUEL LINES
FUEL LINES : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007494701
• Inspect fuel lines, fuel filler cap and fuel tank for improper attachment, leakage, cracks, damage, loose connections, chafing or
deterioration.
A
: Engine
B
: Fuel line
C
: Fuel tank
• If necessary, repair or replace damaged parts.
JPBIA0129ZZ
AIR CLEANER FILTER
AIR CLEANER FILTER : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494702
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Unhook air cleaner case (lower) side clips and lift up air cleaner case (upper).
Remove air cleaner filter and holder assembly from air cleaner case (lower).
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
MA-16
2012 QUEST
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
• Insert pawls (B) of air cleaner case (upper) (1) into 3 notches (A) of
air cleaner case (lower) (2) and fix with clips.
A
:Vehicle front
B
• Check that the air cleaner case (upper) is securely installed with no
backlash.
C
JPBIA4858ZZ
ENGINE OIL
D
ENGINE OIL : Draining
INFOID:0000000007494703
E
WARNING:
• Be careful not to get burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
• Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct skin
contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as
soon as possible.
1. Warm up the engine, and check for engine oil leakage from engine components. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
2. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.
3. Loosen oil filler cap.
4. Remove drain plug (1) and then drain engine oil.
: Vehicle front
F
G
H
I
J
K
JPBIA1676ZZ
ENGINE OIL : Refilling
INFOID:0000000007494704
L
1.
Install drain plug with new drain plug washer. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new drain plug washer.
Tightening torque
2.
: Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
N
Refill with new engine oil.
Engine oil specification and viscosity: Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".
Engine oil capacity
3.
4.
5.
M
: Refer to LU-16, "Periodical Maintenance Specification".
O
CAUTION:
• When filling engine oil, never pull out oil level gauge.
• The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifica- MA
tions for reference only.
• Always use oil level gauge to determine the proper amount of engine oil in engine.
Warm up the engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for engine oil leakage.
Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.
Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
OIL FILTER
Revision: 2011 September
MA-17
2012 QUEST
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
OIL FILTER : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494705
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Oil filter is provided with relief valve. Use genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent.
• Be careful not to get burned when engine and engine oil may be hot.
• When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage.
• Never allow engine oil to adhere to drive belt.
• Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to engine and vehicle.
1. Remove splash guard (RH). Refer to EXT-22, "Exploded View".
2. Using oil filter wrench [SST: KV10115801 (J-38956)] (A), remove
oil filter.
: Vehicle front
JPBIA1678ZZ
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Remove foreign materials adhering to oil filter installation surface.
Apply engine oil to the oil seal contact surface of new oil filter.
SMA010
3.
Screw oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface,
then tighten it by 2/3 turn (A). Or tighten to the specification.
Oil filter:
: 17.6 N·m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb)
JPBIA0077ZZ
OIL FILTER : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007494706
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the engine oil level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
Start the engine, and check there is no leakage of engine oil.
Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes.
Check the engine oil level, and adjust the level. Refer to LU-7, "Inspection".
SPARK PLUG
Revision: 2011 September
MA-18
2012 QUEST
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
SPARK PLUG : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494707
A
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Do not reuse O-rings.
1. Remove engine cover. Refer to EM-24, "Exploded View".
2. Remove air cleaner cases (upper and lower) and air duct assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Exploded View".
3. Remove intake manifold collector. Refer to EM-28, "Exploded View".
4. Remove ignition coil. Refer to EM-52, "Exploded View".
5. Remove spark plug with a spark plug wrench (commercial service tool).
a
B
C
D
: 14 mm (0.55 in)
E
F
JPBIA0030ZZ
G
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
H
SPARK PLUG : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007494708
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
I
Use the standard type spark plug for normal condition.
Spark plug (Standard type) : Refer to MA-30, "SPARK PLUG : Spark
Plug".
J
CAUTION:
• Never drop or shock spark plug.
• Never use a wire brush for cleaning.
• If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be
used.
K
L
Cleaner air pressure: Less than 588 kPa (6 kg/cm , 85
psi)
Cleaning time:
Less than 20 seconds
2
M
SMA773C
• Spark plug gap adjustment is not required between replacement intervals.
• Measure spark plug gap. When it exceeds the limit, replace
spark plug even if it is within the specified replacement mileage. Refer to MA-30, "SPARK PLUG : Spark Plug".
N
O
MA
JPBIA0031ZZ
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM
Revision: 2011 September
MA-19
2012 QUEST
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION SYSTEM : Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000007494709
1.CHECK PCV VALVE
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A
properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through
it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is
placed over valve inlet.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace PCV valve. Refer to .EM-52, "Exploded View"
PBIB1589E
EVAP VAPOR LINES
EVAP VAPOR LINES : Inspection
1.
2.
INFOID:0000000007494710
Visually inspect EVAP vapor lines for improper attachment and for cracks, damage, loose connections,
chafing and deterioration. Refer to EC-455, "Work Procedure".
Inspect fuel tank filler cap vacuum relief valve for clogging, sticking, etc.
Refer to EC-317, "Component Inspection".
Revision: 2011 September
MA-20
2012 QUEST
CHASSIS MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
CHASSIS MAINTENANCE
A
EXHAUST SYSTEM
EXHAUST SYSTEM : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007494711
B
Check exhaust pipes, muffler, and mounting for improper attachment, leakage, cracks, damage or deterioration.
• If anything is found, repair or replace damaged parts.
C
D
E
SMA211A
CVT FLUID
F
CVT FLUID : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007494712
CHECKING CVT FLUID
G
The fluid level should be checked with the fluid warmed up to 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F). The fluid level check
procedure is as follows:
1. Check for fluid leakage.
2. With the engine warmed up, drive the vehicle in an urban area.
When ambient temperature is 20°C (68°F), it takes about 10
minutes for the CVT fluid to warm up to 50 to 80°C (122 to
176°F).
3. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
4. Apply parking brake firmly.
5. With engine at idle, while depressing brake pedal, move shift
selector throughout the entire shift range.
SMA146B
6.
Pull out the CVT fluid level gauge from the CVT fluid charging
pipe after pressing the tab on the CVT fluid level gauge to
release the lock.
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
SCIA1933E
7.
O
Wipe fluid off the CVT fluid level gauge. Insert the CVT fluid
level gauge rotating 180° from the originally installed position,
then securely push the CVT fluid level gauge until it meets the
top end of the CVT fluid charging pipe.
CAUTION:
When wiping away the CVT fluid level gauge, always use
lint-free paper, not a cloth rag.
MA
SCIA1931E
Revision: 2011 September
MA-21
2012 QUEST
CHASSIS MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
8.
Place the selector lever in “P” or “N” and check that the fluid
level is within the specified range.
CAUTION:
When reinstalling CVT fluid level gauge, insert it into the
CVT fluid charging pipe and rotate it to the original installation position until securely locked.
SCIA1932E
CVT FLUID CONDITION
Check CVT fluid condition.
• If CVT fluid is very dark or smells burned, check operation of CVT.
Flush cooling system after repair of CVT.
• If CVT fluid contains frictional material (clutches, brakes, etc.),
replace radiator and flush cooler line using cleaning solvent and
compressed air after repair of CVT. Refer to TM-142, "Cleaning".
Fluid status
Conceivable cause
Required operation
Varnished (viscous
varnish state)
CVT fluid becomes
degraded due to
high temperatures.
Replace the CVT fluid and check the
CVT main unit and the vehicle for
malfunctions (wire harnesses, cooler pipes, etc.)
Milky white or
cloudy
Water in the fluid
Replace the CVT fluid and check for
places where water is getting in.
Large amount of
metal powder mixed
in
Unusual wear of
sliding parts within
CVT
Replace the CVT fluid and check for
improper operation of the CVT.
ATA0022D
WHEELS
WHEELS : Wheel Balance Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007494713
PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTMENT
Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the road wheel.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch the road wheel during removal.
• After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the road
wheel.
ADJUSTMENT (ALUMINUM WHEEL)
• The details of the adjustment procedure are different for each model of wheel balancer. Therefore, refer to
each instruction manual.
• If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting,
select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for aluminum wheels.
1. Set road wheel on tire balance machine using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine.
2. When inner and outer unbalance values are shown on the tire balance machine indicator, multiply outer
unbalance value by 5/3 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight
with a value closest to the calculated value above and install to the designated outer position of, or at the
designated angle in relation to the road wheel.
CAUTION:
• Never install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight.
• Before installing the balance weight, always clean the mating surface of the road wheel.
Revision: 2011 September
MA-22
2012 QUEST
CHASSIS MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
a. Indicated unbalance value × 5/3 = balance weight to be installed
Calculation example:
23 g (0.81 oz) × 5/3 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) ⇒ 37.5 g (1.32 oz) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value)
NOTE:
Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated
balance weight value.
Example:
36.2 ⇒ 35 g (1.23 oz)
36.3 ⇒ 37.5 g (1.32 oz)
A
B
C
SMA054D
D
b.
Installed balance weight in the position.
• When installing balance weight (1) to road wheels, set it into
the grooved area (A) on the inner wall of the road wheel as
shown in the figure so that the balance weight center (B) is
aligned with the tire balance machine indication position
(angle) (C).
CAUTION:
• Always use genuine NISSAN balance weights.
• Balance weights are non-reusable; always replace with
new ones.
• Never install three or more sheets of balance weight.
E
F
G
H
I
J
JPEIC0040ZZ
c.
If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install
two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown in
the figure.
CAUTION:
Never install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
K
L
M
N
PEIA0033E
3.
4.
5.
O
Start the tire balance machine again.
Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the tire balance machine indication position
(angle).
MA
CAUTION:
Never install three or more balance weight.
Start the tire balance machine. Check that the inner and outer residual unbalance value is within the
allowable unbalance value.
CAUTION:
If either residual unbalance value exceeds limit, repeat installation procedures.
Revision: 2011 September
MA-23
2012 QUEST
CHASSIS MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
Allowable unbalance value
Dynamic (At flange) : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel".
Static (At flange)
: Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel".
ADJUSTMENT (STEEL WHEEL)
Preparation Before Adjustment
Remove balance weight from the road wheel.
Wheel Balance Adjustment
• The details of the adjustment procedure are different for each model of wheel balancer. Therefore, refer to
each instruction manual.
• If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting,
select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for steel wheels.
1. Set road wheel to wheel balancer, and then start wheel balancer.
2. Install balance weight to road wheel according to the unbalance and position (angle) displayed on wheel
balancer.
CAUTION:
• Never install three or more balance weights on one side.
• Always use genuine NISSAN balance weights.
• Balance weights are non-reusable; always replace with new ones.
• Always use a plastic hammer when attaching the weight.
3. Start the tire balance machine. Check that the inner and outer residual unbalance value is within the
allowable unbalance value.
CAUTION:
If either residual unbalance value exceeds limit, repeat installation procedures.
Allowable unbalance value
Dynamic (At flange) : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel".
Static (At flange)
: Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel".
WHEELS : Tire Rotation
INFOID:0000000007494714
• Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals.
Refer to MA-4, "Explanation of General Maintenance".
• When installing the wheel, tighten wheel nuts to the specified
torque. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
• Never include the T-type spare tire when rotating the tires.
• When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing
the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels
from developing any distortion.
• Be careful not to tighten wheel nut at torque exceeding the
criteria.
• Use NISSAN genuine wheel nut.
• Perform the ID registration, after tire rotation. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure".
SMA829C
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND LEAKS
Revision: 2011 September
MA-24
2012 QUEST
CHASSIS MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL AND LEAKS : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007494715
A
• If fluid level is extremely low, check brake system for leaks.
B
C
D
SBR451D
BRAKE LINES AND CABLES
BRAKE LINES AND CABLES : Inspection
E
INFOID:0000000007494716
• Check brake fluid lines and parking brake cables for improper
attachment, leaks, chafing, abrasions, deterioration, etc.
F
G
H
SBR389C
BRAKE FLUID
BRAKE FLUID : Changing
1.
2.
I
INFOID:0000000007494717
J
Drain brake fluid from each bleed valve.
Refill until new brake fluid comes out from each bleed valve.
Use same procedure as in bleeding hydraulic system to refill
brake fluid.
Refer to BR-11, "Bleeding Brake System".
• Refill with recommended Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 (US FMVSS No. 116).
Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".
• Never reuse drained brake fluid.
• Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas.
K
L
M
SBR419C
DISC BRAKE
N
DISC BRAKE : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007494718
O
DISC ROTOR
Check condition, wear, and damage.
CALIPER
MA
• Check for leakage.
Revision: 2011 September
MA-25
2012 QUEST
CHASSIS MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
SMA922A
BRAKE PAD
• Check for wear or damage.
BRA0010D
DISC BRAKE : Front Disc Brake
INFOID:0000000007494719
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Brake pad
Disc rotor
Limit
Wear thickness
2.0 (0.079)
Wear thickness
26.0 (1.024)
Runout (with it attached to the vehicle)
0.040 (0.0016)
DISC BRAKE : Rear Disc Brake
INFOID:0000000007494720
Unit: mm (in)
Item
Brake pad
Disc rotor
Limit
Wear thickness
2.0 (0.079)
Wear thickness
14.0 (0.551)
Runout (with it attached to the vehicle)
0.050 (0.0020)
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007494721
STEERING GEAR
• Check gear housing and boots for looseness, damage and grease
leakage.
• Check connection with steering column for looseness.
SLIA0014E
Revision: 2011 September
MA-26
2012 QUEST
CHASSIS MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
STEERING LINKAGE
Check ball joint, dust cover and other component parts for looseness, wear, damage and grease leakage.
A
POWER STEERING FLUID AND LINES
POWER STEERING FLUID AND LINES : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007494722
Check fluid level in reservoir tank with engine off.
Use “HOT” range at fluid temperatures of 50 to 80°C (122 to 176°F)
or “COLD” range at fluid temperatures of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
CAUTION:
• Do not overfill.
• Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent.
Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".
B
C
D
E
SST850C
F
• Check lines for improper attachment, leaks, cracks, damage,
loose connections, chafing and deterioration.
• Check rack boots for accumulation of power steering fluid.
G
H
I
SST851C
AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS
AXLE AND SUSPENSION PARTS : Inspection
J
INFOID:0000000007494723
Check front and rear axle and suspension parts for excessive play,
cracks, wear or other damage.
• Shake each wheel to check for excessive play.
• Check wheel bearings for smooth operation.
• Check axle and suspension nuts and bolts for looseness.
• Check strut (shock absorber) for oil leakage or other damage.
• Check suspension ball joint for grease leakage and ball joint dust
cover for cracks or other damage.
K
L
M
SMA525A
N
O
MA
JPPIA0011ZZ
DRIVE SHAFT
Revision: 2011 September
MA-27
2012 QUEST
CHASSIS MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
DRIVE SHAFT : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007494724
Check boot and drive shaft for cracks, wear, damage and grease
leakage.
SFA108A
Revision: 2011 September
MA-28
2012 QUEST
BODY MAINTENANCE
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
BODY MAINTENANCE
A
LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH
LOCKS, HINGES AND HOOD LATCH : Lubricating
INFOID:0000000007494725
B
For hood and hood lock illustration.
• Hood: Refer to DLK-391, "Exploded View".
• Hood lock: Refer to DLK-426, "Exploded View".
For door and door lock illustration.
• Front door: Refer to DLK-399, "Exploded View".
• Front door lock: Refer to DLK-430, "Exploded View".
• Slide door: Refer to DLK-404, "Exploded View".
• Slide door lock: Refer to DLK-433, "Exploded View".
For back door and back door lock illustration.
• Back door: Refer to DLK-418, "Exploded View" .
• Back door lock: Refer to DLK-443, "Exploded View".
C
D
E
SEAT BELT, BUCKLES, RETRACTORS, ANCHORS AND ADJUSTERS
SEAT BELT, BUCKLES, RETRACTORS, ANCHORS AND ADJUSTERS : Inspection
F
INFOID:0000000007494726
For front seat belt illustration. Refer to SB-4, "Exploded View".
For second seat belt illustration. Refer to SB-10, "Exploded View".
For third seat belt illustration. Refer to SB-15, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
• After any collision, inspect all seat belt assemblies, including retractors and other attached hardwares (I.e. anchor bolt, guide rail set). Nissan recommends to replace all seat belt assemblies in use
during a collision, unless not damaged and properly operating after minor collision.
Also inspect seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision, and replace if damaged or improperly
operating.
Seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision where the driver and passenger air bags are deployed.
• If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair.
Replace as seat belt assembly.
• If webbing is cut, frayed, or damaged, replace belt assembly.
• Never oil tongue and buckle.
• Use a genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly.
For details, refer to SB-6, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection", SB-11, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR :
Inspection", SB-17, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection"in SB section.
• Check anchors for loose mounting
• Check belts for damage
• Check retractor for smooth operation
• Check function of buckles and tongues when buckled and released
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
MA
Revision: 2011 September
MA-29
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
DRIVE BELT
DRIVE BELT : Drive Belt
INFOID:0000000007494727
DRIVE BELT
Tension of drive belt
Belt tension is not necessary, as it is automatically adjusted by drive belt auto-tensioner.
ENGINE COOLANT
ENGINE COOLANT : Periodical Maintenance Specification
INFOID:0000000007494728
ENGINE COOLANT CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Unit:
Engine coolant capacity (With reservoir tank at “MAX” level)
(US qt, lmp qt)
11.3 (12, 10)
Reservoir tank
0.75 (6/8, 5/8)
ENGINE OIL
ENGINE OIL : Periodical Maintenance Specification
INFOID:0000000007494729
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Unit:
With oil filter change
Drain and refill
(US qt, lmp qt)
4.6 (4-7/8, 4)
Without oil filter change
4.3 (4-1/2, 3-3/4)
Dry engine (Overhaul)
5.3 (5-5/8, 4-5/8)
SPARK PLUG
SPARK PLUG : Spark Plug
INFOID:0000000007494730
SPARK PLUG
Unit: mm (in)
Make
DENSO
Standard type
FXE22HR11
Gap
Standard
1.1 (0.043)
Limit
1.4 (0.055)
ROAD WHEEL
ROAD WHEEL : Road Wheel
INFOID:0000000007494731
ALUMINUM WHEEL
Item
Runout
Allowable unbalance
Limit
Axial runout
Less than 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
Radial runout
Dynamic (At flange)
Less than 5 g (0.17 oz) (one side)
Static (At flange)
Less than 10 g (0.35 oz)
STEEL WHEEL
Revision: 2011 September
MA-30
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Item
Runout
Limit
Axial runout (Average)
Less than 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
Radial runout (Average)
Less than 0.5 mm (0.020 in)
Dynamic (At flange)
Allowable unbalance
A
B
Less than 5 g (0.17 oz) (one side)
Static (At flange)
Less than 10 g (0.35 oz)
STEEL WHEEL (EMERGENCY)
C
Item
Runout
Limit
Axial runout (Average)
Radial runout (Average)
D
Less than 1.5 mm (0.059 in)
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
MA
Revision: 2011 September
MA-31
2012 QUEST
DRIVER CONTROLS
SECTION
MIR
MIRRORS
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
WITH ADP
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 13
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM ................................. 13
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
Wiring Diagram ........................................................13
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR
SYSTEM ............................................................ 15
PREPARATION ............................................ 4
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 16
PREPARATION ................................................... 4
REVERSE INTERLOCK DOOR MIRROR
DOES NOT OPERATE ...................................... 16
Special Service Tools .............................................. 4
Commercial Service Tools ....................................... 4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 5
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 5
Component Parts Location ........................................ 5
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch .......................... 5
Door Mirror ................................................................ 6
Auto Anti-dazzling Inside Mirror ................................ 6
SYSTEM .............................................................. 7
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM ........................................... 7
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM : System Description ...... 7
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM : Schematic .................... 8
AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM .............................................................................. 8
AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM : System Description ......................................... 8
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT) ......................................................... 9
CONSULT Function .................................................. 9
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 12
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT, AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT .........12
Wiring Diagram ........................................................15
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................16
G
H
I
J
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES .............................................................. 17
Work Flow ................................................................17
Inspection Procedure ...............................................19
Diagnostic Worksheet ..............................................21
K
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 23 MIR
INSIDE MIRROR ............................................... 23
Exploded View .........................................................23
Removal and Installation .........................................23
M
DOOR MIRROR ................................................ 25
Exploded View .........................................................25
DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY ....................................26
DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..................................................................26
DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and
Assembly .................................................................28
N
O
P
GLASS MIRROR ........................................................29
GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installation ...........29
DOOR MIRROR COVER ...........................................30
DOOR MIRROR COVER : Removal and Installation ...........................................................................30
List of ECU Reference ............................................ 12
Revision: 2011 September
F
MIR-1
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL
SWITCH ............................................................. 32
Removal and Installation ........................................ 32
WITHOUT ADP
PRECAUTION ............................................. 33
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 37
INSIDE MIRROR ................................................ 37
Exploded View ........................................................ 37
Removal and Installation ......................................... 37
DOOR MIRROR ................................................. 39
PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 33
Exploded View ........................................................ 39
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................. 33
DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY .................................... 40
DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .................................................................. 40
DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and
Assembly ................................................................ 42
PREPARATION ........................................... 34
PREPARATION ................................................. 34
Special Service Tools ........................................... 34
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 34
WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 35
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM ................................. 35
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 35
AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR
SYSTEM ............................................................. 36
GLASS MIRROR ....................................................... 43
GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installation .......... 43
DOOR MIRROR COVER ........................................... 44
DOOR MIRROR COVER : Removal and Installation .......................................................................... 44
DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL
SWITCH ............................................................. 46
Removal and Installation ......................................... 46
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 36
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-2
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
[WITH ADP]
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000007492243
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
C
D
E
F
G
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
I
J
K
MIR
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-3
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
[WITH ADP]
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007492244
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
Locates the noise
SIIA0993E
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit
Repairs the cause of noise
SIIA0994E
Commercial Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007492245
Tool name
Description
Remover tool
Remove the clip and pawl and metal clip
PIIB7923J
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-4
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
[WITH ADP]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007492246
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
JMLIA2141ZZ
No.
1.
2.
3.
Component parts
Function
BCM
The ignition switch signal (ACC/ON) is transmitted to driver seat control unit
via CAN communication.
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location"
for detailed installation location.
Automatic drive positioner control unit
Door mirror is supplied with power after receiving the input of mirror switch
and changeover switch.
Refer to ADP-8, "Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit" for detailed installation location.
TCM
The CVT shift position signal is transmitted to driver seat control unit via CAN
communication.
Refer to TM-10, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for
detailed installation location.
4.
Door mirror remote control switch
Refer to MIR-5, "Door Mirror Remote Control Switch".
5.
Door mirror (driver side)
Refer to MIR-6, "Door Mirror".
6.
Driver seat control unit
The ignition switch signal (ACC/ON) is transmitted to automatic drive positioner control unit via UART communication.
Refer to ADP-8, "Driver Seat Control Unit" for detailed installation location.
7.
Auto anti-dazzling inside mirror
Refer to MIR-6, "Auto Anti-dazzling Inside Mirror".
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch
INFOID:0000000007836763
It transmits mirror face adjust operation to automatic drive positioner control unit.
CHANGEOVER SWITCH
MIR-5
K
MIR
M
N
O
MIRROR SWITCH
Revision: 2011 September
J
2012 QUEST
P
COMPONENT PARTS
[WITH ADP]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
It transmits the LH/RH control of door mirror that supplies power to automatic drive positioner control unit.
Door Mirror
INFOID:0000000007836764
It makes mirror face operate from side to side and up and down via integrated motor.
Auto Anti-dazzling Inside Mirror
INFOID:0000000007836765
It automatically changes the light transmittance according to the brightness of the light from the headlight of
the vehicle behind.
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-6
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[WITH ADP]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
A
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007492247
B
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
JMLIA2115GB
J
MANUAL FUNCTION
Description
K
• Automatic drive positioner control unit controls door mirror.
• Automatic drive positioner control unit inputs changeover switch signal and perform the LH/RH control of
door mirror motor supplying electric power when changeover switch is operated.
• Automatic drive positioner control unit inputs mirror switch signal and supplies electric power to door mirror. MIR
• The ignition switch signal (ACC/ON) is transmitted from BCM to driver seat control unit via CAN communication and from driver seat control unit to automatic drive positioner control unit via UART communication.
M
Operation Conditions
If the following conditions are not satisfied, operation is not performed.
• Ignition switch: ON or ACC
• Changeover switch: Select either left or right
N
REVERSE INTERLOCK DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM
Description
• Select either of the door mirror faces by changeover switch, and then set mirror face downward.
• When ignition switch is ON position and CVT shift selector is in R position, TCM sends the R signal to driver
seat control unit.
• The R signal is transmitted to automatic drive positioner control unit from driver seat control unit via UART
communication.
• When the R signal is detected, automatic drive positioner control unit activated mirror motor.
Operation Conditions
If the following conditions are not satisfied, operation is not performed.
• Ignition switch: ON
• Changeover switch: Select either left or right
• CVT shift selector: R position
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-7
2012 QUEST
O
P
SYSTEM
[WITH ADP]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
NOTE:
During the reverse interlock door mirror system, if all of the above conditions are not satisfied, mirror face
returns to original angle.
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM LINKED OPERATION
Description
Door mirror control is included in automatic drive positioner system. Refer to automatic drive positioner system
for more details.
Refer to ADP-9, "AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER SYSTEM : System Description".
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM : Schematic
INFOID:0000000007492248
JMLIA2117GB
AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM
AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007492249
The sensor built in inside mirror detects the brightness of headlight of the vehicle behind and automatically
changes the light transmission to decrease the brightness.
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-8
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT)
[WITH ADP]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT)
CONSULT Function
A
INFOID:0000000007492250
The automatic drive positioner system can be checked and diagnosed for component operation using CONSULT.
B
APPLICATION ITEMS
C
Diagnostic mode
Description
Ecu Identification
Displays part numbers of driver seat control unit.
Self Diagnostic Result
Performs self-diagnosis for the auto drive positioner system and displays the results.
Data Monitor
Displays input signals transmitted from various switches and sensors to driver seat control unit
in real time.
Active Test
Drives each output unit.
Work support
Changes the setting for each system function.
D
E
F
SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
Refer to ADP-30, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item
G
Unit
Main
Signals
Selection
From
Menu
Contents
H
STARTER SW
“ON/OFF”
×
×
Ignition key switch ON (START, ON) /OFF (ACC, OFF) status judged from the ignition switch signal.
SET SW
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the setting switch signal.
MEMORY SW 1
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 1 signal.
MEMORY SW 2
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the seat memory switch 2 signal.
DETENT SW
“ON/OFF”
×
×
The CVT shift selector position “OFF (P position) / ON (other than P position)” judged from the detention switch signal.
“LOCK/UNLOCK”
×
×
NOTE:
This item is indicated, but not monitored.
SLIDE SW–FR
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (forward) signal.
SLIDE SW–RR
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the sliding switch (backward)
signal.
STEERING STATUS
RECLN SW–FR
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (forward)
signal.
RECLN SW–RR
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the reclining switch (backward)
signal.
LIFT FR SW–UP
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch front (up) signal.
LIFT FR SW–DN
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch front (down)
signal.
LIFT RR SW–UP
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch rear (up) signal.
LIFT RR SW–DN
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the lifting switch rear (down)
signal.
MIR CON SW–UP
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (up) signal.
MIR CON SW–DN
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (down) signal.
MIR CON SW–RH
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (right) signal.
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-9
2012 QUEST
I
J
K
MIR
M
N
O
P
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT)
[WITH ADP]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Unit
Main
Signals
Selection
From
Menu
MIR CON SW–LH
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the mirror switch (left) signal.
MIR CHNG SW–R
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control
switch (switching to right) signal.
MIR CHNG SW–L
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the door mirror remote control
switch (switching to left) signal.
VEHICLE SPEED
—
×
×
Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination
meter by numerical value [km/h].
Monitor Item
Contents
P RANG SW CAN
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the P range switch signal.
R RANGE (CAN)
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the R range switch signal.
DOOR SW–FL
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the front door switch (driver
side) signal.
DOOR SW–FR
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the door switch (front passenger side) signal.
IGN ON SW
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the ignition switch signal.
ACC ON SW
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the ACC switch signal.
KEY ON SW
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the key on switch signal.
KEYLESS ID
—
×
×
Key ID status judged from the key ID signal.
KYLS DR UNLK
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from the driver side door unlock actuator output switch signal.
VHCL SPEED (ABS)
“ON/OFF”
×
×
ON/OFF status judged from vehicle speed signal.
HANDLE
“RHD/LHD”
×
×
RHD/LHD status judged from handle position signal.
TRANSMISSION
“AT or CVT/
MT”
×
×
AT or CVT/MT status judged from transmission.
SLIDE PULSE
—
–
×
Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it
moves backward, the value increases. If it moves forward,
the value decreases.
RECLN PULSE
—
–
×
Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it
moves backward, the value increases. If it moves forward,
the value decreases.
LIFT FR PULSE
—
–
×
Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it
moves DOWN, the value increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases.
LIFT RR PULSE
—
–
×
Value (32768) when battery connections are standard. If it
moves DOWN, the value increases. If it moves UP, the value decreases.
MIR/SEN RH U–D
“V”
–
×
Voltage input from door mirror sensor (passenger side) up/
down is displayed.
MIR/SEN RH R–L
“V”
–
×
Voltage input from door mirror sensor (passenger side) left/
right is displayed.
MIR/SEN LH U–D
“V”
–
×
Voltage input from door mirror sensor (driver side) up/down
is displayed.
MIR/SEN LH R–L
“V”
–
×
Voltage input from door mirror sensor (driver side) left/right
is displayed.
ACTIVE TEST
CAUTION:
When driving vehicle, do not perform active test.
Test item
Description
SEAT SLIDE
Activates/deactivates the sliding motor.
SEAT RECLINING
Activates/deactivates the reclining motor.
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-10
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT)
[WITH ADP]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test item
Description
SEAT LIFTER FR
Activates/deactivates the lifting motor (front).
SEAT LIFTER RR
Activates/deactivates the lifting motor (rear).
MIRROR MOTOR RH
Activates/deactivates the mirror motor (passenger side).
MIRROR MOTOR LH
Activates/deactivates the mirror motor (driver side).
MEMORY SW INDCTR
Turns ON/OFF the memory indicator.
A
B
C
WORK SUPPORT
Work item
Content
Item
D
40 mm
SEAT SLIDE VOLUME SET
The amount of seat sliding for entry/exit assist can be selected
from 3 items.
80 mm
150 mm
EXIT SEAT SLIDE SETTING
Entry/exit assist (seat) can be selected:
ON (operated) – OFF (not operated)
E
ON
OFF
F
G
H
I
J
K
MIR
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-11
2012 QUEST
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT, AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL
UNIT
[WITH ADP]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT, AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT
List of ECU Reference
INFOID:0000000007492251
ECU
Reference
ADP-25, "Reference Value"
DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
ADP-29, "Fail-safe"
ADP-30, "DTC Index"
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT
Revision: 2011 September
ADP-31, "Reference Value"
MIR-12
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM
[WITH ADP]
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
A
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007492252
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
B
(option abbreviation; if not
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
MIR
M
N
O
P
JCLWA5123GB
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-13
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM
[WITH ADP]
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
JCLWA5124GB
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-14
2012 QUEST
AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM
[WITH ADP]
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
A
INFOID:0000000007492253
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
(option abbreviation; if not
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
MIR
M
N
O
P
JCLWA5133GB
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-15
2012 QUEST
REVERSE INTERLOCK DOOR MIRROR DOES NOT OPERATE
[WITH ADP]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
REVERSE INTERLOCK DOOR MIRROR DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492254
1.CHECK DOOR MIRROR (MANUAL FUNCTION)
Check door mirror function with door mirror remote control switch.
Refer to ADP-87, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK DTC
Check DTC for TCM.
Refer to TM-48, "DTC Index".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-16
2012 QUEST
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
[WITH ADP]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
A
INFOID:0000000007492255
B
C
D
E
F
SBT842
G
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any of H
customer's comments; refer to MIR-21, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
I
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, perform a diagnosis and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by performing a cruise test on the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics J
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
• Squeak —(Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
K
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces=higher pitch noise/softer surfaces=lower pitch noises/edge to surface=chirping
• Creak—(Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen- MIR
dent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Rattle—(Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing M
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
• Knock —(Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
N
• Tick—(Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump—(Heavy, muffled knock noise)
O
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
• Buzz—(Like a bumblebee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending up on the person. A noise that you may judge P
as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when you confirm the repair.
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-17
2012 QUEST
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
[WITH ADP]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T models, drive position on A/T models).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis Ear: J-39570, Engine Ear and mechanics stethoscope).
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• removing the components in the area that you suspect the noise is coming from.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be broken
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• tapping or pushing/pulling the component that you suspect is causing the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only temporarily.
• feeling for a vibration with your hand by touching the component(s) that you suspect is (are) causing the
noise.
• placing a piece of paper between components that you suspect are causing the noise.
• looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to MIR-19, "Inspection Procedure".
REPAIR THE CAUSE
•
•
-
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or urethane
tape. A Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through your authorized Nissan Parts Department.
CAUTION:
Do not use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100 × 135 mm (3.94 × 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 × 85 mm (2.36 × 3.35 in)/7688471L02:15 × 25 mm (0.59 × 0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in)/7398250Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 × 50 mm (1.18 × 1.97in)
FELT CLOTHTAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15 × 25 mm (0.59 × 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll
The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-18
2012 QUEST
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that will be visible or not fit. Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Use when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Use to eliminate movement.
[WITH ADP]
A
B
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Inspection Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492256
C
D
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installationinformation.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
E
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by
applying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate
wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Do not use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If you saturatethe area with silicone, you
will not be able to recheck the repair.
F
G
H
I
J
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to thecenter console.
K
MIR
DOORS
Pay attention to the:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on startsand stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. You can usually insulate the areas with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
TRUNK
MIR-19
N
O
P
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put intothe trunk by the owner.
In addition look for:
1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Revision: 2011 September
M
2012 QUEST
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
[WITH ADP]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulatingthe item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knockingnoise
2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicatingthe conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consistof insulating with felt cloth tape.
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seatis in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise is present. These conditionsshould be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspectedcomponents while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
orapplying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or onthe engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-20
2012 QUEST
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
[WITH ADP]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Diagnostic Worksheet
INFOID:0000000007492257
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
MIR
M
N
O
PIIB8741E
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-21
2012 QUEST
P
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
[WITH ADP]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
PIIB8742E
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-22
2012 QUEST
INSIDE MIRROR
[WITH ADP]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
INSIDE MIRROR
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007492258
B
Manual anti-dazzling type
C
D
E
F
G
JMLIA0400ZZ
1.
Windshield glass
2.
Inside mirror base
3.
H
Inside mirror assembly
: Always replace after every disassembly.
I
Auto anti-dazzling type
J
K
MIR
M
N
JMLIA0177GB
O
1.
Windshield glass
2.
Inside mirror base
3.
Harness connector
4.
TORX bolt
5.
Inside mirror assembly
6.
Inside mirror cover
P
N·m (kg·m, in-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492259
REMOVAL
Manual anti-dazzling type
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-23
2012 QUEST
INSIDE MIRROR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver (A) under the inside mirror (1).
2. Slide the inside mirror to the upper side while pushing the pawl
downward.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse the inside mirror disassembled from inside mirror base.
• Never use excessive force to remove the inside mirror
because it is inserted tightly into the mirror base.
• Wrap the flat-bladed screwdriver with a shop cloth to avoid
damage on the windshield glass.
[WITH ADP]
JMLIA0055ZZ
Auto anti-dazzling type
1.
2.
3.
Remove inside mirror cover.
Disconnect harness connector from inside mirror.
Loosen TORX bolt and slide inside mirror upward to remove.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
When inserting the inside mirror into the mirror base, be sure to push the pawl until it get connected to
the mirror base (manual anti-dazzling type only).
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-24
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR
[WITH ADP]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
DOOR MIRROR
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007492260
Models with side turn signal lamp
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
JMLIA2186ZZ
1.
Door mirror cover
2.
Side turn signal lamp
3.
Glass mirror
4.
Door mirror corner cover
5.
Door mirror under cover
6.
Door mirror
J
: Clip
K
: Pawl
: Always replace after every disassembly.
MIR
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-25
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR
[WITH ADP]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Models without side turn signal lamp
JMLIA2187ZZ
1.
Door mirror cover
2.
Glass mirror
4.
Door mirror under cover
5.
Door mirror
3.
Door mirror corner cover
: Clip
: Pawl
: Always replace after every disassembly.
DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY
DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492261
CAUTION:
• When removing, always use a remover tool that is made of plastic.
• Be careful not to scratch or damage door mirror body when removing.
• Always replace door mirror corner cover after every disassembly.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove front door module assembly mounting bolts, pull out the front door module assembly to make
space in order to disengage the harness connector.
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-26
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Remove harness connector (A).
4. Remove front door speaker and then, from the hole of front door
speaker disconnect the harness connectors.
[WITH ADP]
A
B
: Clip
5.
Peel off front door weather-strip (1), and then remove door mirror mounting nuts (B).
C
D
E
F
G
JMLIA2195ZZ
6.
a.
Remove door mirror corner cover.
Disengage the door mirror corner cover fixing pawls with
remover tool (A). (front door side)
H
I
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
J
CAUTION:
Apply protective tape (B) on the part to protect it from damage.
K
JMLIA1582ZZ
b.
Disengage the door mirror corner cover fixing pawls with
remover tool (A). (front fender side)
MIR
: Pawl
M
: Vehicle front
CAUTION:
Apply protective tape (B) on the part to protect it from damage.
N
JMLIA1583ZZ
7.
8.
Remove door mirror mounting bolt.
Remove door mirror assembly from door panel.
P
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Insert door mirror harness connector through the door outer panel hole.
Install door mirror assembly into the door panel and tighten the mounting bolt and nuts.
Install the door mirror harness fixing clips to the door panel from the hole of door speaker.
Install front door finisher.
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-27
O
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR
[WITH ADP]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000007492262
CAUTION:
When removing, always use a remover tool that is made of plastic.
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
a.
Remove door mirror assembly from the door panel. Refer to MIR-26, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY :
Removal and Installation".
Remove glass mirror. Refer to MIR-29, "GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installation".
Remove door mirror cover. Refer to MIR-30, "DOOR MIRROR COVER : Removal and Installation".
Remove door mirror under cover (1). (with side turn signal lamp)
Remove door mirror under cover mounting screw (A).
JMLIA2188ZZ
b.
Remove door mirror under cover mounting screws (A) and disengage the fixing pawl.
: Pawl
JMLIA2190ZZ
c.
Remove door mirror side turn signal lamp mounting screws (A)
and remove side turn signal lamp.
JMLIA2191ZZ
5.
a.
Remove door mirror under cover (1). (without side turn signal lamp)
Remove door mirror under cover mounting screw (A).
JMLIA2189ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-28
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR
[WITH ADP]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
b.
Remove door mirror under cover mounting screws (A) and disengage the fixing pawl.
A
: Pawl
B
C
JMLIA2190ZZ
6.
a.
b.
c.
Remove door mirror actuator (1).
Remove the mounting screws (A).
Disconnect the harness connectors behind the actuator.
Disconnect auto driving positioning harness connector (B).(if
equipped)
D
E
F
G
JMLIA2194ZZ
ASSEMBLY
H
Assemble in the reverse order of disassemble.
GLASS MIRROR
GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installation
I
INFOID:0000000007492263
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
J
Place the glass mirror upward.
As shown in the figure, insert a flat-bladed screwdriver (A) into
the recess between glass mirror (1) and actuator. Push up both
pawls simultaneously to remove glass mirror lower half side.
NOTE:
• Insert the screwdriver between the fixing pawls.
• Insert screwdriver into recesses, and push up while rotating
(twisting) to make work easier.
CAUTION:
Put a strip of protective tape (B) on housing assembly.
Lift up and slide glass mirror as shown by the arrows in the figure to disengage the fixing pawls.
K
MIR
M
N
: Pawl
O
P
JMLIA2193ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-29
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR
[WITH ADP]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Remove BSW indicator harness connector (A). (if equipped)
5. Remove both terminals of mirror heater attachment (B).(if
equipped)
JMLIA2192ZZ
6.
Lightly lift up lower side of glass mirror, and detach both pawls of upper side as if pulling it out. Remove
glass mirror from actuator.
NOTE:
Be certain not to allow grease on sealing agent in center of mirror or back side of glass mirror.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of disassemble.
CAUTION:
After installation, visually check that pawls are securely engaged.
DOOR MIRROR COVER
DOOR MIRROR COVER : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492264
CAUTION:
When removing, always use a remover tool that is made of plastic.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the glass mirror. Refer to MIR-29, "GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installation".
With a remover tool, disengage the fixing pawls (A).
: Pawl
JMLIA1145ZZ
3.
Insert a remover tool between door mirror cover and mirror housing to disengage the fixing pawls, and
then remove the door mirror cover from the door mirror assembly.
JMLIA2196ZZ
A
Without side turn signal lamp
B
With side turn signal lamp
: Pawl
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of disassemble.
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-30
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CAUTION:
After installation, visually check that pawls are securely engaged.
[WITH ADP]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
MIR
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-31
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
[WITH ADP]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492265
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the power window main switch finisher. Refer to INT-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove door mirror remote control switch (1) from power window main switch finisher (2) using remover tool (A).
: Pawl
JMLIA1450ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-32
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
[WITHOUT ADP]
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000007492266
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
C
D
E
F
G
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
I
J
K
MIR
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-33
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
[WITHOUT ADP]
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007492267
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J-39570)
Chassis ear
Locates the noise
SIIA0993E
(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit
Repairs the cause of noise
SIIA0994E
Commercial Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007492268
Tool name
Description
Remover tool
Remove the clip and pawl and metal clip
PIIB7923J
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-34
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM
[WITHOUT ADP]
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
A
DOOR MIRROR SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007492269
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
B
(option abbreviation; if not
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
MIR
M
N
O
P
JCLWA5130GB
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-35
2012 QUEST
AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM
[WITHOUT ADP]
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
AUTO ANTI-DAZZLING INSIDE MIRROR SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007492270
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
(option abbreviation; if not
JCLWA5133GB
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-36
2012 QUEST
INSIDE MIRROR
[WITHOUT ADP]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
INSIDE MIRROR
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007492271
B
Manual anti-dazzling type
C
D
E
F
G
JMLIA0400ZZ
1.
Windshield glass
2.
Inside mirror base
3.
H
Inside mirror assembly
: Always replace after every disassembly.
I
Auto anti-dazzling type
J
K
MIR
M
N
JMLIA0177GB
O
1.
Windshield glass
2.
Inside mirror base
3.
Harness connector
4.
TORX bolt
5.
Inside mirror assembly
6.
Inside mirror cover
P
N·m (kg·m, in-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492272
REMOVAL
Manual anti-dazzling type
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-37
2012 QUEST
INSIDE MIRROR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver (A) under the inside mirror (1).
2. Slide the inside mirror to the upper side while pushing the pawl
downward.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse the inside mirror disassembled from inside mirror base.
• Never use excessive force to remove the inside mirror
because it is inserted tightly into the mirror base.
• Wrap the flat-bladed screwdriver with a shop cloth to avoid
damage on the windshield glass.
[WITHOUT ADP]
JMLIA0055ZZ
Auto anti-dazzling type
1.
2.
3.
Remove inside mirror cover.
Disconnect harness connector from inside mirror.
Loosen TORX bolt and slide inside mirror upward to remove.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
When inserting the inside mirror into the mirror base, be sure to push the pawl until it get connected to
the mirror base (manual anti-dazzling type only).
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-38
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR
[WITHOUT ADP]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
DOOR MIRROR
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007492273
Models with side turn signal lamp
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
JMLIA2186ZZ
1.
Door mirror cover
2.
Side turn signal lamp
3.
Glass mirror
4.
Door mirror corner cover
5.
Door mirror under cover
6.
Door mirror
J
: Clip
K
: Pawl
: Always replace after every disassembly.
MIR
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-39
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR
[WITHOUT ADP]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Models without side turn signal lamp
JMLIA2187ZZ
1.
Door mirror cover
2.
Glass mirror
4.
Door mirror under cover
5.
Door mirror
3.
Door mirror corner cover
: Clip
: Pawl
: Always replace after every disassembly.
DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY
DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492274
CAUTION:
• When removing, always use a remover tool that is made of plastic.
• Be careful not to scratch or damage door mirror body when removing.
• Always replace door mirror corner cover after every disassembly.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove front door module assembly mounting bolts, pull out the front door module assembly to make
space in order to disengage the harness connector.
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-40
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Remove harness connector (A).
4. Remove front door speaker and then, from the hole of front door
speaker disconnect the harness connectors.
[WITHOUT ADP]
A
B
: Clip
5.
Peel off front door weather-strip (1), and then remove door mirror mounting nuts (B).
C
D
E
F
G
JMLIA2195ZZ
6.
a.
Remove door mirror corner cover.
Disengage the door mirror corner cover fixing pawls with
remover tool (A). (front door side)
H
I
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
J
CAUTION:
Apply protective tape (B) on the part to protect it from damage.
K
JMLIA1582ZZ
b.
Disengage the door mirror corner cover fixing pawls with
remover tool (A). (front fender side)
MIR
: Pawl
M
: Vehicle front
CAUTION:
Apply protective tape (B) on the part to protect it from damage.
N
JMLIA1583ZZ
7.
8.
Remove door mirror mounting bolt.
Remove door mirror assembly from door panel.
P
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
Insert door mirror harness connector through the door outer panel hole.
Install door mirror assembly into the door panel and tighten the mounting bolt and nuts.
Install the door mirror harness fixing clips to the door panel from the hole of door speaker.
Install front door finisher.
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-41
O
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR
[WITHOUT ADP]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000007492275
CAUTION:
When removing, always use a remover tool that is made of plastic.
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
a.
Remove door mirror assembly from the door panel. Refer to MIR-40, "DOOR MIRROR ASSEMBLY :
Removal and Installation".
Remove glass mirror. Refer to MIR-43, "GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installation".
Remove door mirror cover. Refer to MIR-44, "DOOR MIRROR COVER : Removal and Installation".
Remove door mirror under cover (1). (with side turn signal lamp)
Remove door mirror under cover mounting screw (A).
JMLIA2188ZZ
b.
Remove door mirror under cover mounting screws (A) and disengage the fixing pawl.
: Pawl
JMLIA2190ZZ
c.
Remove door mirror side turn signal lamp mounting screws (A)
and remove side turn signal lamp.
JMLIA2191ZZ
5.
a.
Remove door mirror under cover (1). (without side turn signal lamp)
Remove door mirror under cover mounting screw (A).
JMLIA2189ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-42
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR
[WITHOUT ADP]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
b.
Remove door mirror under cover mounting screws (A) and disengage the fixing pawl.
A
: Pawl
B
C
JMLIA2190ZZ
6.
a.
b.
Remove door mirror actuator (1).
Remove the mounting screws (A).
Disconnect the harness connectors behind the actuator.
D
E
F
G
JMLIA1507ZZ
ASSEMBLY
H
Assemble in the reverse order of disassemble.
GLASS MIRROR
GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installation
I
INFOID:0000000007492276
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
J
Place the glass mirror upward.
As shown in the figure, insert a flat-bladed screwdriver (A) into
the recess between glass mirror (1) and actuator. Push up both
pawls simultaneously to remove glass mirror lower half side.
NOTE:
• Insert the screwdriver between the fixing pawls.
• Insert screwdriver into recesses, and push up while rotating
(twisting) to make work easier.
CAUTION:
Put a strip of protective tape (B) on housing assembly.
Lift up and slide glass mirror as shown by the arrows in the figure to disengage the fixing pawls.
K
MIR
M
N
: Pawl
O
P
JMLIA2193ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-43
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Remove BSW indicator harness connector (A). (if equipped)
5. Remove both terminals of mirror heater attachment (B).(if
equipped)
[WITHOUT ADP]
JMLIA2192ZZ
6.
Lightly lift up lower side of glass mirror, and detach both pawls of upper side as if pulling it out. Remove
glass mirror from actuator.
NOTE:
Be certain not to allow grease on sealing agent in center of mirror or back side of glass mirror.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of disassemble.
CAUTION:
After installation, visually check that pawls are securely engaged.
DOOR MIRROR COVER
DOOR MIRROR COVER : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492277
CAUTION:
When removing, always use a remover tool that is made of plastic.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the glass mirror. Refer to MIR-43, "GLASS MIRROR : Removal and Installation".
With a remover tool, disengage the fixing pawls (A).
: Pawl
JMLIA1145ZZ
3.
Insert a remover tool between door mirror cover and mirror housing to disengage the fixing pawls, and
then remove the door mirror cover from the door mirror assembly.
JMLIA2196ZZ
A
Without side turn signal lamp
B
With side turn signal lamp
: Pawl
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of disassemble.
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-44
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CAUTION:
After installation, visually check that pawls are securely engaged.
[WITHOUT ADP]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
MIR
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-45
2012 QUEST
DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
[WITHOUT ADP]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
DOOR MIRROR REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492278
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the power window main switch finisher. Refer to INT-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove door mirror remote control switch (1) from power window main switch finisher (2) using remover tool (A).
: Pawl
JMLIA1450ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
MIR-46
2012 QUEST
DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA
SECTION
MWI
METER, WARNING LAMP & INDICATOR
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 4
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 4
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 4
PREPARATION ............................................ 5
PREPARATION ................................................... 5
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 5
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 6
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 6
METER SYSTEM ......................................................... 6
METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location ........ 6
METER SYSTEM : Combination Meter .................... 7
METER SYSTEM : Meter Control Switch and Illumination Control Switch ............................................ 8
METER SYSTEM ................................................. 9
METER SYSTEM ......................................................... 9
METER SYSTEM : System Description .................... 9
METER SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ........................ 13
METER SYSTEM : Fail-Safe .................................. 13
SPEEDOMETER ........................................................ 14
SPEEDOMETER : System Description ................... 15
TACHOMETER .......................................................... 15
TACHOMETER : System Description ..................... 15
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE ........ 15
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE :
System Description ................................................. 15
FUEL GAUGE ............................................................ 16
FUEL GAUGE : System Description ....................... 16
OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP ........................... 16
OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP : System Description ...................................................................16
MASTER WARNING LAMP .......................................16
MASTER WARNING LAMP : System Description....17
G
METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL .........................17
METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : System Description ...................................................................17
H
METER EFFECT FUNCTION ....................................18
METER EFFECT FUNCTION : System Description ...........................................................................19
I
INFORMATION DISPLAY ..........................................21
INFORMATION DISPLAY : System Description ....21
J
COMPASS ......................................................... 32
System Description ..................................................32
K
OPERATION ..................................................... 33
Switch Name and Function ......................................33
L
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION
METER) ............................................................. 34
On Board Diagnosis Function ..................................34
CONSULT Function .................................................35
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 40
M
MWI
COMBINATION METER ................................... 40
Reference Value ......................................................40
Fail-Safe ..................................................................47
DTC Index ...............................................................48
IPDM E/R ........................................................... 49
List of ECU Reference .............................................49
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 50
METER SYSTEM .............................................. 50
Wiring Diagram ........................................................50
COMPASS ......................................................... 52
Revision: 2011 September
F
MWI-1
2012 QUEST
O
P
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 52
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 53
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
(METER SYSTEM) ............................................. 53
Work flow ................................................................ 53
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 70
Component Inspection ............................................ 70
WASHER LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT... 72
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 72
Component Inspection ............................................ 72
ZONE VARIATION SETTING (COMPASS) ...... 56
A/C AUTO AMP. CONNECTION RECOGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................................... 73
Work Procedure ...................................................... 56
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 73
CALIBRATION (COMPASS) ............................. 57
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 74
Work Procedure ...................................................... 57
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 58
THE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR DOES NOT
OPERATE .......................................................... 74
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ............................ 58
Description .............................................................. 74
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 74
Description .............................................................. 58
DTC Logic ............................................................... 58
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 58
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN) ......................... 59
Description .............................................................. 59
DTC Logic ............................................................... 59
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 59
B2205 VEHICLE SPEED ................................... 60
Description .............................................................. 60
DTC Logic ............................................................... 60
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 60
B2267 ENGINE SPEED ..................................... 61
Description .............................................................. 61
DTC Logic ............................................................... 61
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 61
B2268 WATER TEMP ........................................ 62
Description .............................................................. 62
DTC Logic ............................................................... 62
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 62
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 63
COMBINATION METER ........................................... 63
COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure ... 63
METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................................................................... 64
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 64
Component Inspection ............................................ 64
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL
CIRCUIT ............................................................. 66
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 66
Component Inspection ............................................ 66
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT ....... 68
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 68
Component Inspection ............................................ 68
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT ... 70
Component Function Check ................................... 70
Revision: 2011 September
THE METER CONTROL SWITCH IS INOPERATIVE ................................................................. 75
Description .............................................................. 75
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 75
THE ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH IS
INOPERATIVE ................................................... 76
Description .............................................................. 76
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 76
THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
DOES NOT TURN ON ....................................... 77
Description .............................................................. 77
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 77
THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
DOES NOT TURN OFF ..................................... 78
Description .............................................................. 78
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 78
THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING
CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT
DISPLAY ............................................................ 79
Description .............................................................. 79
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 79
THE LOW WASHER FLUID WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, or DOES NOT DISPLAY .................................................................. 80
Description .............................................................. 80
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 80
THE DOOR OPEN WARNING CONTINUES
DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DISPLAY ......... 81
Description .............................................................. 81
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 81
THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE DISPLAY IS
INCORRECT ...................................................... 82
Description .............................................................. 82
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 82
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ................ 83
MWI-2
2012 QUEST
COMPASS ................................................................. 83
COMPASS : Description ......................................... 83
METER CONTROL SWITCH ............................ 86
Exploded View .........................................................86
Removal and Installation .........................................86
INFORMATION DISPLAY ......................................... 83
INFORMATION DISPLAY : Description .................. 83
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH ............... 87
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 84
Exploded View .........................................................87
Removal and Installation .........................................87
COMBINATION METER .....................................84
COMPASS ......................................................... 88
Exploded View ........................................................ 84
Removal and Installation ......................................... 84
Disassembly and Assembly .................................... 84
A
B
C
Exploded View .........................................................88
Removal and Installation .........................................88
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-3
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000007495485
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-4
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
A
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007495486
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening screws
B
C
D
E
PBIC0191E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-5
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
METER SYSTEM
METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007495487
JSNIA4335ZZ
A.
Under the left second seat
No.
Component
Function
1.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
Transmits the vehicle speed signal to the combination meter via CAN communication.
Refer to BRC-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
2.
Oil pressure switch
Transmits the oil pressure switch signal to the IPDM E/R.
Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View" for detailed installation location.
3.
Washer level switch
Transmits the washer level switch signal to the combination meter.
4.
Ambient sensor
Transmits the ambient sensor signal to the IPDM E/R.
5.
TCM
Transmits the shift position signal to the combination meter via CAN communication.
Refer to TM-10, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
ECM
Transmits the following signals to the combination meter via CAN communication.
• Engine speed signal
• Engine coolant temperature signal
• Fuel consumption monitor signal
• Fuel filler cap warning display signal
• Engine status signal
Refer to EC-15, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation
location.
6.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-6
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.
7.
8.
9.
Component
Function
IPDM E/R
• Transmits the oil pressure switch signal to the BCM via CAN communication.
• Transmits the ambient sensor signal to the combination meter.
Refer to PCS-4, "IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
BCM
Transmits the following signals to the combination meter via CAN communication.
• Position light request signal
• Door switch signal
• Door lock/unlock status signal
• Meter display signal
• Low tire pressure warning lamp signal
• Dimmer signal
• Starter relay status signal
• Oil pressure switch signal
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation
location.
A
B
C
D
E
Fuel level sensor unit
Transmits the fuel level sensor signal to the combination meter.
10.
Meter control switch
Transmits the following signals to the combination meter.
• Enter switch signal
• Select switch signal
• Trip reset switch signal
11.
Combination meter
Refer to MWI-7, "METER SYSTEM : Combination Meter".
Illumination control switch
Transmits the following signals to the combination meter.
• Illumination control switch signal (+)
• Illumination control switch signal (−)
G
12.
13.
Parking brake switch
Transmits the parking brake switch signal to the combination meter.
H
14.
A/C auto amp. (with auto
A/C)
Transmits the A/C auto amp. connection recognition signal to the combination meter.
Refer to HAC-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
F
I
METER SYSTEM : Combination Meter
INFOID:0000000007495488
The combination meter controls the following items according to the signals received from each unit via CAN
communication and the signals from switches and sensors.
• Measuring instruments
• Indicator lamps
• Warning lamps
• Meter illumination control
• Meter effect function
• Information display
J
K
L
ARRANGEMENT OF COMBINATION METER
M
MWI
O
P
JSNIA4133ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-7
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
A.
For U.S.A
B.
For Canada
METER SYSTEM : Meter Control Switch and Illumination Control Switch
INFOID:0000000007495489
• The meter control switch is located on the cluster lid A RH.
• The illumination control switch is located on the cluster lid A LH.
JSNIA3342ZZ
Switch name
Illumination control
switch
Meter control switch
•
-
Description
Illumination control switch (+) (1)
An illuminance level of the back light of the combination
meter can be adjusted.
Illumination control switch (−) (2)
Enter switch (3)
• The information display screen can be switched.
• The item indicated on the information display can be confirmed.
Select switch (4)
When plural items are shown on the information display, a
selected item can be changed to the other item.
Trip reset switch (5)
• The trip meter can be switched between A and B.
• Trip meter A/B can be reset by pressing and holding the
trip reset switch.
Transmits the following signals to the combination meter.
Illumination control switch signal (+)
Illumination control switch signal (−)
Enter switch signal
Select switch signal
Trip reset switch signal
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-8
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
METER SYSTEM
A
METER SYSTEM
METER SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007495490
B
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
JSNIA4136GB
J
COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL (CAN COMMUNICATION SIGNAL)
Transmit unit
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
K
Signal name
Vehicle speed signal
Position light request signal
L
Door switch signal
Door lock/unlock status signal
BCM
Oil pressure switch signal
M
Meter display signal
Low tire pressure warning lamp signal
MWI
Dimmer signal
Starter relay status signal
TCM
Shift position signal
O
Engine speed signal
Engine coolant temperature signal
ECM
P
Fuel consumption monitor signal
Fuel filler cap warning display signal
Engine status signal
DESCRIPTION
Combination Meter
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-9
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• The combination meter receives necessary signals from each unit, switch, and sensor to control the following functions.
- Measuring instruments
- Warning lamps
- Indicator lamps
- Meter illumination control
- Meter effect function
- Information display
• The combination meter incorporates a buzzer function that sounds an audible alarm with the integrated
buzzer device. Refer to WCS-4, "Combination Meter" for further details.
• The combination meter includes an on board diagnosis function.
• The combination meter can be diagnosed with CONSULT.
METER CONTROL FUNCTION LIST
System
Description
Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
MWI-15,
"SPEEDOMETER : System Description"
Tachometer
Indicates engine speed.
MWI-15, "TACHOMETER :
System Description"
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature.
MWI-15, "ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE : System
Description"
Fuel gauge
Indicates fuel level.
MWI-16, "FUEL
GAUGE : System
Description"
Oil pressure warning lamp
The warning lamp turns ON or turns OFF,
according to engine hydraulic pressure.
MWI-16, "OIL
PRESSURE
WARNING LAMP
: System Description"
Master warning lamp
Turns ON/OFF in synchronization with a
warning indicated on the information display.
MWI-17, "MASTER WARNING
LAMP : System
Description"
Meter illumination control function
Controls the back light of combination meter.
MWI-17, "METER
ILLUMINATION
CONTROL : System Description"
Engine-start effect function
Controls pointers of combination meter and
meter illumination at engine start to produce
illumination effects.
Driver welcome function
Controls meter illumination to produce illumination effects when getting in the vehicle.
Measuring instruments
Warning lamp/
indicator lamp
Meter illumination control
Meter effect
function
Reference
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-10
MWI-19, "METER
EFFECT FUNCTION : System
Description"
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
System
Description
Odo/trip meter
Displays mileage.
Shift position indicator
Displays shift position.
Trip computer
Current fuel consumption
Displays current fuel consumption.
Average fuel consumption
Displays average fuel consumption.
Distance to empty
Displays distance to empty.
Average vehicle speed
Displays average vehicle speed.
Travel time
Displays travel time.
Travel distance
Displays mileage.
Ambient temperature
Displays ambient temperature.
Warning
Information
display
Interrupt indication
Alert
Door open
warning
Warns when a door is open.
Parking brake
release warning
Warns if traveling when the parking brake is
under operating condition.
Low fuel warning
Warns when being low on fuel.
Low washer fluid warning
Displayed/Hidden, depending on washer
fluid level.
Fuel filler cap
warning
Receives fuel filler cap warning display signal and displays warning.
Low tire pressure warning
Receives low tire pressure warning lamp
signal and displays warning.
NO KEY warning
Receives meter display signal and displays
warning.
Travel time
Causes an interrupt when exceeding randomly set time.
Low ambient
temperature
Causes an interrupt when ambient temperature reaches below 3°C (37°F).
Tire
Causes an interrupt when exceeding randomly set distance.
Oil filter
Causes an interrupt when exceeding randomly set distance.
Engine oil
Causes an interrupt when exceeding randomly set distance.
Other
Causes an interrupt when exceeding randomly set distance.
Maintenance
Meter illumination level
Reference
A
B
C
D
E
F
MWI-21, "INFORMATION DISPLAY : System
Description"
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Indicates the brightness of the meter illumination in stages.
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-11
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
System
Description
Timer
Allows the user to set a display time for
“Travel time”.
ICY
Allows the ON/OFF setting of the low ambient temperature (alert) function.
Tire
Alerts when reaching mileage set in “SETTING”.
Filter
Alerts when reaching mileage set in “SETTING”.
Oil
Alerts when reaching mileage set in “SETTING”.
Other
Alerts when reaching mileage set in “SETTING”.
Language
Allows the user to set language for information display.
Unit
Allows unit settings.
Effects
Allows the ON/OFF setting of the enginestart effect function.
Alert
Information
display
Setting
Maintenance
Options
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-12
Reference
MWI-21, "INFORMATION DISPLAY : System
Description"
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
METER SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000007495491
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
JSNIA4222GB
METER SYSTEM : Fail-Safe
INFOID:0000000007495492
FAIL-SAFE
The combination meter activates the fail-safe control if CAN communication with each unit is malfunctioning.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-13
2012 QUEST
P
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Function
Specifications
Speedometer
Tachometer
Reset to zero by suspending communication.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
When suspending communication, changes to nighttime
mode.
Illumination control
Odo/trip meter
An indicated value is maintained at communications blackout.
Shift position indicator
The display turns OFF by suspending communication.
Door open warning
Interrupt indication
Fuel filler cap warning
The display turns OFF by suspending communication.
Low tire pressure warning
Information display
Current fuel consumption
Trip computer
Average fuel consumption
Distance to empty
Average vehicle speed
• When reception time of an abnormal signal is 2 seconds or
less, the last received datum is used for calculation to indicate the result.
• When reception time of an abnormal signal is more than two
seconds, the last calculation results are indicated.
Travel distance
Buzzer
The buzzer turns OFF by suspending communication.
ABS warning lamp
VDC warning lamp
Brake warning lamp
The lamp turns ON by suspending communication.
EPS warning lamp
Malfunction indicator lamp
Low tire pressure warning lamp
The lamp blinking caused by suspending communication.
High beam indicator lamp
Warning lamp/indicator lamp
Turn signal indicator lamp
VDC OFF indicator lamp
O/D OFF indicator lamp
Tail lamp indicator lamp
The lamp turns OFF by suspending communication.
CRUISE indicator lamp
Oil pressure warning lamp
Key warning lamp
BSW warning lamp
SPEEDOMETER
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-14
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SPEEDOMETER : System Description
INFOID:0000000007495493
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
B
C
D
JSNIA2973GB
DESCRIPTION
• The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) converts the rectangular wave signal provided by the wheel
sensor to a vehicle speed signal and transmits it to the combination meter via CAN communication.
• The combination meter indicates the vehicle speed to the speedometer according to the vehicle speed signal received via CAN communication.
E
F
TACHOMETER
TACHOMETER : System Description
INFOID:0000000007495494
G
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
H
I
J
JSNIA2974GB
K
DESCRIPTION
• ECM converts the pulse signal provided by the crankshaft position sensor to an engine speed signal and
transmits it to the combination meter via CAN communication.
• The combination meter indicates the engine speed to the tachometer according to the engine speed signal
received via CAN communication.
L
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description
M
INFOID:0000000007495495
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
MWI
O
P
JSNIA3015GB
DESCRIPTION
• ECM reads the engine coolant temperature signal from the engine coolant temperature sensor and transmits
the signal to the combination meter via CAN communication.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-15
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• The combination meter indicates the engine coolant temperature to the engine coolant temperature gauge
according to the engine coolant temperature signal received via CAN communication.
FUEL GAUGE
FUEL GAUGE : System Description
INFOID:0000000007495496
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JPNIA0983GB
DESCRIPTION
Control Outline
The combination meter reads the fuel level sensor signal from the fuel level sensor unit and indicates the fuel
level to the fuel gauge.
Refuel Control
The combination meter accelerates the fuel gauge if the all conditions listed below are met, or the ignition
switch is ON from OFF.
• Ignition switch is ON position.
• The vehicle is not moving.
• The fuel level change by 15 (4 US gal, 3-1/4 Imp gal) or more.
OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP : System Description
INFOID:0000000007495497
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSNIA2464GB
DESCRIPTION
• IPDM E/R receives an oil pressure switch signal from the oil pressure switch and transmits the signal to
BCM via CAN communication.
• BCM transmits the oil pressure switch signal received from IPDM E/R to the combination meter via CAN
communication.
• The combination meter turns ON/OFF the oil pressure warning lamp, according to an oil pressure switch signal received from BCM via CAN communication.
MASTER WARNING LAMP
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-16
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
MASTER WARNING LAMP : System Description
INFOID:0000000007495498
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
B
C
D
E
JSNIA4137GB
F
DESCRIPTION
When receiving a signal from each unit, switch, or sensor, the combination meter turns ON/OFF the master
warning lamp in synchronization with the following warnings on the information display.
• Door open warning
• Parking brake release warning
• Low fuel warning
• Low washer fluid warning
• NO KEY warning
• Low tire pressure warning
• Fuel filler cap warning
NOTE:
For details on warnings displayed on the information display, refer to MWI-21, "INFORMATION DISPLAY :
System Description".
G
H
I
J
METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL
METER ILLUMINATION CONTROL : System Description
INFOID:0000000007495499
K
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
L
M
MWI
O
P
JSNIA4138GB
DESCRIPTION
Meter Illumination On/off Control Function
• Combination meter turns ON meter illumination when the following condition is satisfied:
- Ignition switch ON
• Combination meter turns OFF meter illumination when any of the following condition is satisfied:
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-17
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
- During a crank with vehicle speed less than 1 km/h (0.6 MPH)
- Ignition switch OFF or ACC
• The combination meter receives the following signals to control meter illumination.
Signal name
Signal path
Ignition signal
—
Engine status signal
ECM
Vehicle speed signal
ABS actuator and control unit (control unit)
Starter relay status signal
BCM
Combination meter
Combination meter
Combination meter
Meter Illumination Control Function
• Combination meter controls meter illumination, based on the following signal.
- Dimmer signal (for U.S.A)
- Position light request signal (for Canada)
• The combination meter switches mode between Daytime mode and Nighttime mode, according to the following conditions.
Meter illumination
Condition
1ST or 2ND position
Combination switch
(lighting switch)
AUTO POSITION
For U.S.A
For Canada
Outdoor: Bright*
Daytime mode
Nighttime mode
Outdoor: Dark*
Nighttime mode
Nighttime mode
Outdoor: Bright*
Daytime mode
Daytime mode
Outdoor: Dark*
Nighttime mode
Nighttime mode
Daytime mode
Daytime mode
Off
*: For further information, refer to INL-17, "AUTO LIGHT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM : System Description".
• The operation of the illumination control switch allows the brightness adjustment of meter illumination.
Meter illumination
The number of adjustable
steps
Daytime
22 step
Nighttime
22 step
Signal Path
Signal name
Signal source
Ignition signal
—
Dimmer signal (for U.S.A)
BCM
Combination meter
Position light request signal (for Canada)
BCM
Combination meter
METER EFFECT FUNCTION
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-18
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
METER EFFECT FUNCTION : System Description
INFOID:0000000007495500
A
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
B
C
D
E
JSNIA4139GB
F
DESCRIPTION
Engine-start Effect Function
When recognizing an engine start, the combination meter controls the following items for producing the effect.
• Speedometer
• Tachometer
• Engine coolant temperature gauge
• Fuel gauge
• Meter illumination
J
Operation
Speedometer
Sweeps the pointer.
Tachometer
Sweeps the pointer.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Stops the pointer.
Fuel gauge
Stops the pointer.
Pointer
Turns on the illumination at the normal brightness level.
Printed area of the dial
Turns on the illumination at the effect level.
Illumination ring
Increases the brightness to the effect level in stages.
Information display (Dot matrix display and segment
display)
Turns on the illumination at the normal brightness level.
K
L
M
NOTE:
The pointers are stopped and illumination is turned off while cranking the engine.
MWI
Engine Start Judgement
The combination meter judges “engine-start” and activates the engine-start effect only once when the following operational conditions are all satisfied.
ON position
Vehicle speed
Less than 1 km/h (0.6 MPH)
Engine state
Other than the time of cranking the engine
500 rpm or more
Revision: 2011 September
O
P
Operational condition
Ignition switch
H
I
Meter and Illumination Operations During Engine-start Effect
The combination meter controls the following items during the engine-start effect.
Control item
G
MWI-19
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Operational condition
Shift position
“P”
Information display (SETTING)
The setting of “EFFECT” is “ON”
NOTE:
ENGINE-START EFFECT exits when any of the above operational conditions is cancelled during the enginestart effect.
Signal Path
The combination meter judges “engine-start”, according to the following signals and activates the engine-start
effect function.
Signal name
Signal source
Ignition signal
—
Starter relay status signal
BCM
Combination meter
ECM
Combination meter
Engine speed signal
Engine status signal
Vehicle speed signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Shift position signal
TCM
Combination meter
Combination meter
NOTE:
The engine-start effect function ends if any one of the above conditions is lost during the activation of this function.
Driver Welcome Function
BCM transmits a meter ring illumination request signal to the illumination meter when all the following operational conditions are satisfied. When receiving the meter ring illumination request signal from BCM via CAM
communication, the combination meter increases illumination brightness of the combination meter to the set
brightness level in stages. After a certain period of time, the meter illumination gradually dims to be turned
OFF.
Operational condition
Ignition switch
LOCK position
Driver side door
Open → Close*
*: Close the driver side door with the intelligent key left inside the vehicle.
Signal Path
The combination meter receives the following signals to control meter ring illumination.
Signal name
Signal source
Ignition signal
—
Door switch signal
(driver)
BCM
Combination meter
Door lock/unlock status signal
BCM
Combination meter
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-20
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Timing Chart
A
B
C
D
E
JSNIA4336GB
• *1: The driver welcome function is not performed when the driver’s door is opened/closed for the first time
after turning the ignition switch from ON to LOCK.
• *2: The operation of the following switches allows the door to be locked/unlocked.
- Door lock/unlock button of the Intelligent Key
- Door request switch
- Door key cylinder switch
- Door lock and unlock switch
F
G
H
INFORMATION DISPLAY
INFORMATION DISPLAY : System Description
INFOID:0000000007495501
I
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
JSNIA4140GB
DESCRIPTION
• The combination meter receives signals necessary for controlling the operation of the information display
from each unit, sensor and switch.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-21
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• The combination meter incorporates a trip computer that displays the warning/information according to the
information received from each unit, sensor and switch.
• The combination meter shows the following functions on the information display.
- Odo/trip meter
- Shift position indicator
- Trip computer
- Interrupt indication
- Warning check indication
- Setting
• The vehicle information display is comprised of dot matrix information display (1) and segment information display (2). Each display
shows the items listed below.
JSNIA3395ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-22
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Display
A
Display item
Door open warning
Parking brake release warning
B
Low fuel warning
Warning
Low washer warning
C
Fuel filler cap warning
Low tire pressure warning
NO KEY warning
Interrupt indication
D
Travel time
Alert
ICY
Tire
Maintenance
E
Oil filter
Engine oil
F
Other
Meter illumination level
Current fuel consumption
Dot matrix information
display
G
Average fuel consumption
Average vehicle speed
Trip computer
H
Travel time
Travel distance
Distance to empty
I
Ambient temperature
Timer
Alert
J
ICY
Tire
Setting
Maintenance
Oil filter
K
Engine oil
Other
L
Language
Options
Unit
Effect
Segment information
display
M
• Shift position indicator
• Odo/trip meter
MWI
ODO/TRIP METER
The combination meter calculates mileage, based on the following signals and displays the mileage on the
information display.
O
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
Vehicle speed signal
—
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
P
Combination meter
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR
The combination meter receives the shift position signal from TCM via CAN communication, and displays the
shift position to the shift position indicator.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-23
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Signal name
Shift position signal
Signal Path
TCM
Combination meter
TRIP COMPUTER
Current Fuel Consumption
The combination meter calculates current fuel consumption based on the following signals, and the calculated
value is displayed on the information display.
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
—
Fuel consumption monitor signal
ECM
Vehicle speed signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Combination meter
Combination meter
NOTE:
• Current fuel consumption on the information display is updated approximately every 0.1 seconds.
• Current fuel consumption on the information display shows 30 l/100km (0 mpg) when vehicle speed is 0 km/
h (0 MPH).
Average Fuel Consumption
The combination meter calculates average fuel consumption based on the following signals, and the calculated value is displayed on the information display.
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
—
Fuel consumption monitor signal
ECM
Vehicle speed signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Combination meter
Combination meter
NOTE:
• Average fuel consumption on the information display is updated approximately every 30 seconds.
• Soon after a reset or when the ignition switch is turned ON after battery installation, “−−−” is displayed for 30
seconds and approximately 500 m (0.31 mile).
Distance to Empty
The combination meter calculates distance to empty based on the following signals, and the calculated value
is displayed on the information display.
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
—
Fuel level sensor signal
Fuel level sensor unit
Fuel consumption monitor signal
ECM
Vehicle speed signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Combination meter
Combination meter
Combination meter
NOTE:
• Distance to empty on the information display is updated approximately every 30 seconds.
• When the ignition switch is turned ON, “−−−” is displayed for 30 seconds because stored values are deleted
after battery installation.
• The indicated values may not match each other when refueling with the ignition switch ON.
Average Vehicle Speed
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-24
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
The combination meter calculates average vehicle speed based on the following signals, and the calculated
value is displayed on the information display.
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
B
—
Vehicle speed signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Combination meter
NOTE:
• Average vehicle speed on the information display is updated approximately every 30 seconds.
• Soon after a reset or when the ignition switch is turned ON after battery installation, “−−−” is displayed for 30
seconds.
Travel Time
The combination meter measures and displays travel time (ignition switch ON time).
Travel Distance
The combination meter calculates mileage, based on the following signals and displays the mileage on the
information display.
Signal name
C
D
E
F
Signal Path
Ignition signal
—
Vehicle speed signal
A
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
G
Combination meter
Ambient Temperature
The combination meter calculates ambient temperature based on the following signals, and the calculated
value is displayed on the information display.
H
I
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
—
J
Ambient sensor signal
Ambient sensor
A/C auto amp. recognition signal (with auto A/C)
A/C auto amp.
Vehicle speed signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
IPDM E/R
Combination meter
K
Combination meter
Combination meter
L
NOTE:
• The indicated temperature is corrected based on an ignition signal, ambient temperature detected by the
ambient sensor, and vehicle speed signal. The indicated temperature is not raised under vehicle speed less
M
than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
• The ambient sensor input value that is displayed on “Data Monitor” of CONSULT is the value before the correction. It may not match the indicated temperature on the information display.
• Depending on engine heat or heat on the road surfaces, an ambient temperature may be indicated higher MWI
than actual one.
INTERRUPT INDICATION
• The combination meter displays an interrupt regarding a warning, alert, and maintenance on the information
display, based on signals received from each unit and switch.
• When conditions are satisfied, the normal screen switches to a warning screen to display an interrupt.
O
Door Open Warning
• When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a door open warning on the information display by an interrupt.
P
Operating condition
Ignition switch
ON
Door
Any door is open
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-25
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “door open warning”, according to the signals below:
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
—
Door switch signal
Door switch
BCM
Combination meter
Parking Brake Release Warning
• When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a parking brake
release warning on the information display by an interrupt.
Operating condition
Ignition switch
ON
Parking brake
Applied
Vehicle speed
7 km/h (4.3 MPH) or more
• The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “parking brake release warning”, according to the signals
below:
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
—
Parking brake switch signal
Parking brake switch
Vehicle speed signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Combination meter
Combination meter
Low Fuel Warning
• When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a low fuel warning
on the information display by an interrupt.
Operating condition
Ignition switch
ON
Fuel remaining quantity*
Approximately 11.4
(3 US gal, 2 - 1/2 Imp
gal) or less (including fuel remained)
*: With the vehicle in a horizontal position
• The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “low fuel warning”, according to the signals below:
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
—
Fuel level sensor signal
Fuel level sensor
Combination meter
Low washer fluid warning
• When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a low washer fluid
warning on the information display by an interrupt.
Operating condition
Ignition switch
ON
Washer level switch
Decrease in fluid level (washer level switch
ON for 180 seconds or more)
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-26
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
A
B
C
JSNIA0033GB
• The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “low washer fluid warning”, according to the signals below:
Signal name
D
Signal Path
Ignition signal
E
—
Washer level switch signal
Washer level switch
Combination meter
F
Fuel Filler Cap Warning
• The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “fuel filler cap warning”, according to the signals below:
G
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
—
Fuel filler cap warning display signal
ECM
H
Combination meter
• For further information, refer to EC-47, "FUEL FILLER CAP WARNING SYSTEM : System Description".
I
Low Tire Pressure Warning
• The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “low tire pressure warning”, according to the signals below:
J
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
—
K
Low tire pressure warning lamp signal
BCM
Combination meter
• For further information, refer to WT-8, "System Description".
L
NO KEY Warning
• The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “NO KEY warning”, according to the signals below:
M
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
—
MWI
Meter display signal
BCM
Combination meter
• For further information, refer to DLK-47, "WARNING FUNCTION : System Description".
O
Travel Time (Alert)
• When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a travel time on the
information display by an interrupt.
Operating condition
Ignition switch
Switch-ON time
• The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “travel time”, according to the signal below:
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-27
2012 QUEST
P
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
—
Low Ambient Temperature (Alert)
• When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a low ambient temperature on the information display by an interrupt.
Operating condition
Ignition switch
ON
Ambient temperature
3 °C (37 °F) or less
information display
“ON” is selected in “SETTING”
• The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “low ambient temperature”, according to the signals below:
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
—
Ambient sensor signal
Ambient sensor
IPDM E/R
Combination meter
Tire (Maintenance)
• When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a tire warning on
the information display by an interrupt.
Operating condition
Ignition switch
ON
Mileage
More than value set in “SETTING”
• The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “tire warning”, according to the signals below:
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
—
Vehicle speed signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Combination meter
Oil Filter (Maintenance)
• When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a oil filter warning
on the information display by an interrupt.
Operating condition
Ignition switch
ON
Mileage
More than value set in “SETTING”
• The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “oil filter warning”, according to the signals below:
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
Vehicle speed signal
—
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Combination meter
Engine Oil (Maintenance)
• When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a engine oil warning on the information display by an interrupt.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-28
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
A
Operating condition
Ignition switch
ON
Mileage
More than value set in “SETTING”
B
• The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “engine oil warning”, according to the signals below:
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
C
—
Vehicle speed signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Combination meter
D
Other (Maintenance)
• When all the following operating conditions are satisfied, the combination meter displays a other warning on
the information display by an interrupt.
Operating condition
F
Ignition switch
ON
Mileage
More than value set in “SETTING”
• The combination meter judges showing/hiding of “other warning”, according to the signals below:
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
G
H
—
Vehicle speed signal
E
Combination meter
I
Meter Illumination Level Indication
When receiving the following signals, the combination meter causes an interrupt on the information display to
indicate an illumination level.
Signal name
J
Signal Path
Ignition signal
K
—
Illumination control switch signal (+)
Illumination control switch
Illumination control switch signal (−)
Combination meter
L
WARNING CHECK INDICATION
• The combination meter can cause an interrupt on the information display to indicate a warning, based on
signals received from each unit and switch.
• The indicated warning can be checked with “WARNING” during the satisfaction of an interrupt indication
condition for each warning.
M
MWI
SETTING
Warning indication timing and time can be set.
Alert
Setting values for travel time, and low ambient temperature can be adjusted to meet the user's needs.
Setting item
Alert
Setting range
Timer
No setting, 0.5 h - 6 h
ICY
ON/OFF
Setting unit
P
0.5 h
—
Maintenance
Setting values for engine oil, oil filter, tire, and other maintenance items can be adjusted to meet the user's
needs.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-29
O
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Setting item
Setting range
Engine oil
No setting, 500 km - 30,000 km
(No setting, 250 mile - 18,500 mile)
Oil filter
No setting, 500 km - 30,000 km
(No setting, 250 mile - 18,500 mile)
Tire
No setting, 500 km - 30,000 km
(No setting, 250 mile - 18,500 mile)
Other
No setting, 500 km - 30,000 km
(No setting, 250 mile - 18,500 mile)
Maintenance
Options
Setting values for language, unit, and effect items can be adjusted to meet the user's needs.
Setting item
Language
Options
Unit
Effect
ENGLISH
FRANCAISE
miles, MPG, °F
km, l/100 km,°C
ON/OFF
Settings-reject Indication
• Regarding settings-reject indications, “SETTING CAN BE OPERATED WHEN STOPPED” is shown on the
information display when indication conditions are satisfied.
• When reaching 5 km/h (3.1 MPH) after accelerating from a stopping condition, a settings-reject indication is
displayed.
• When reaching less than 2 km/h (1.2 MPH) after decelerating from 5 km/h (3.1 MPH), a settings-reject indication is cancelled to allow settings.
• The combination meter judges a vehicle condition based on the following signals and displays a settingsreject indication on the information display.
Signal name
Signal Path
Ignition signal
Vehicle speed signal
Revision: 2011 September
—
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
MWI-30
Combination meter
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
TIMING CHART
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
JSNIA4356GB
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-31
2012 QUEST
COMPASS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
COMPASS
System Description
INFOID:0000000007495502
DESCRIPTION
• This electronic compass is able to display 8 primary directions: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, NW.
• The inside mirror switch is used to operate the compass.
1
: Compass switch
2
: Compass display
SKIB8868E
Switch Operation
Press
Compass is turned ON/OFF
Press and hold
(for 3- 9 sec.)
Compass display turns to zone variation change
mode
Press and hold (for more
than 9 sec.)
Compass display turns to calibration mode
• All standard compasses determine direction relative to magnetic north, however, this electronic compass is
designed to display direction relative to true north.
• The difference between magnetic north and true north varies from place to place across the surface of the
earth.
• This electronic compass must be “told” approximately where it is on the earth’s surface so that the magnetic
north reading can be properly converted into a true north display.
• To tell the electronic compass where it’s at, the earth is separated into numbered “Zone Variances”. The
zone variance number in which the compass is to function must be entered into this electronic compass.
• Each zone is magnetically about 4.2° wide. Typically, anything under a 22.5° total zone change is not noticed
on the electronic compass display. However, if a change over 22.5° occurs, a reading may be off by one or
more primary directions.
• On long trips, the vehicle may leave its original zone and enter one or more new zones. Generally, you do
not need to reset the compass zone if you travel between 3 or 4 zones, such as business travel or vacation.
The typical driver will not notice any difference on the display within 3 or 4 zones. However, if the vehicle is
“permanently” moved to a new location, it is recommended that the compass zone be reset.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-32
2012 QUEST
OPERATION
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
OPERATION
A
Switch Name and Function
INFOID:0000000007495503
B
C
D
JSNIA3342ZZ
Switch name
Illumination control
switch
Operation
Illumination control switch (+) (1)
F
An illuminance level of the back light of the combination
meter can be adjusted.
Illumination control switch (−) (2)
• The information display screen can be switched.
• The item indicated on the information display can be confirmed.
G
Select switch (4)
When plural items are shown on the information display, a
selected item can be changed to the other item.
H
Trip reset switch (5)
• The trip meter can be switched between A and B.
• Trip meter A/B can be reset by pressing and holding the
trip reset switch.
Enter switch (3)
Press
Meter control switch
Description
E
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-33
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
On Board Diagnosis Function
INFOID:0000000007495504
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS ITEM
The combination meter allows the following diagnosis items with the on-board diagnosis function.
Diagnosis item
Drive circuit check
•
•
•
•
Speedometer
Tachometer
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Fuel gauge
LCD (liquid crystal display) check
Information display (dot matrix information
display and segment information display)
METHOD OF STARTING
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
While pressing the trip reset switch (1), turn ignition switch ON.
JSNIA3524ZZ
3.
4.
5.
6.
If the diagnosis function is activated with “trip A” displayed, the mileage on “trip A” is reset to “0000.0”.
(The same way for “trip B”.)
Make sure that the trip meter displays “0000.0”.
Press the trip reset switch at least 3 times. (Within 7 seconds after the ignition switch is turned ON.)
The combination meter is turned to self-diagnosis mode.
• Speedometer, tachometer, engine coolant temperature gauge, and fuel gauge return to zero, simultaneously.
• The dot matrix dots on the information display (dot matrix
information display) (1) blink alternately.
JPNIA0766ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-34
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• All segments of the information display (segment information
display) (1) are displayed.
A
B
C
JSNIA3443ZZ
D
7.
NOTE:
• Check the following items when the self-diagnosis mode of the combination meter does not start.
Replace combination meter if the following items are normal.
- Combination meter power supply and ground circuit.
- Meter control switch signal circuit (trip reset switch signal circuit) and meter control switch.
• If any of the dots are not displayed, replace combination meter.
Each meter activates by pressing the trip reset switch.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
JSNIA4141ZZ
NOTE:
• If any of the meters or gauges is not activated, replace combination meter.
• The figure is reference.
CONSULT Function
L
INFOID:0000000007495505
M
CONSULT APPLICATION ITEMS
CONSULT can perform the following diagnosis modes via CAN communication and the combination meter.
System
METER/M&A
Diagnosis mode
Description
Self Diagnostic Result
The combination meter checks the conditions and displays memorized errors.
Data Monitor
Displays the combination meter input/output data in real time.
W/L ON History
Lighting history of the warning lamp and indicator lamp can be checked.
O
P
SELF DIAG RESULT
Refer to MWI-48, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
Display Item List
Revision: 2011 September
MWI
MWI-35
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
X: Applicable
MAIN
SIGNALS
Description
SPEED METER
[km/h]
X
Value of vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) via CAN communication.
NOTE:
655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received.
SPEED OUTPUT
[km/h]
X
Vehicle speed signal value transmitted to other units via CAN communication.
NOTE:
655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received.
Display item [Unit]
ODO OUTPUT
[km/h or mph]
Odometer signal value transmitted to other units via CAN communication.
TACHO METER
[rpm]
X
Value of the engine speed signal received from ECM via CAN communication.
NOTE:
8191.875 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received.
FUEL METER
[L]
X
Fuel level indicated on combination meter.
X
Value of engine coolant temperature signal is received from ECM via CAN communication.
NOTE:
215 is displayed when the malfunction signal is input.
W TEMP METER
[°C]
ABS W/L
[On/Off]
Status of ABS warning lamp detected from ABS warning lamp signal is received
from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
VDC/TCS IND
[On/Off]
Status of VDC OFF indicator lamp detected from VDC OFF indicator lamp signal
is received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
SLIP IND
[On/Off]
Status of VDC warning lamp detected from VDC warning lamp signal received
from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
BRAKE W/L
[On/Off]
Status of brake warning lamp detected from brake warning lamp signal is received
from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
NOTE:
Displays “Off” if the brake warning lamp is illuminated when the valve check starts,
the parking brake switch is turned ON or the brake fluid level switch is turned ON.
DOOR W/L
[On/Off]
Status of door open warning detected from door switch signal received from BCM
via CAN communication.
HI-BEAM IND
[On/Off]
Status of high beam indicator lamp detected from high beam request signal is received from BCM via CAN communication.
TURN IND
[On/Off]
Status of turn indicator lamp detected from turn indicator signal is received from
BCM via CAN communication.
LIGHT IND
[On/Off]
• Status of light indicator lamp detected from dimmer signal is received from BCM
via CAN communication. (For U.S.A)
• Status of light indicator lamp detected from position light request signal is received from BCM via CAN communication. (For Canada)
OIL W/L
[On/Off]
Status of oil pressure warning lamp detected from oil pressure switch signal is received from BCM via CAN communication.
MIL
[On/Off]
Status of malfunction indicator lamp detected from malfunctioning indicator lamp
signal is received from ECM via CAN communication.
CRUISE IND
[On/Off]
Status of CRUISE indicator detected from ASCD status signal is received from
ECM via CAN communication.
SET IND
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
CRUISE W/L
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
BA W/L
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-36
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Display item [Unit]
MAIN
SIGNALS
Description
A
O/D OFF IND
[On/Off]
Status of O/D OFF indicator detected from O/D OFF indicator signal is received
from CVT shift selector.
4WD W/L
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
4WD LOCK IND
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
FUEL W/L
[On/Off]
Low fuel warning status detected by the identified fuel level.
WASHER W/L
[On/Off]
Status of low washer fluid warning judged from washer level switch input to combination meter.
AIR PRES W/L
[On/Off]
Status of low tire pressure warning lamp judged from TPMS malfunction warning
lamp signal received from BCM with CAN communication line.
KEY G/Y W/L
[On/Off]
Status of Intelligent Key system malfunction detected from Intelligent Key warning
display signal is received from BCM via CAN communication.
EPS W/L
[On/Off]
Status of EPS warning lamp judged from EPS warning lamp signal received from
EPS control unit with CAN communication line.
AFS OFF IND
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
ECO MODE IND
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
LCD
[B&P N, B&P I, ID NG, ROTAT, SFT
P, INSRT, BATT, NO KY, OUTKY, LK
WN, KY>PSW, Off]
Displays status of Intelligent Key system warning judged from meter display signal
received from BCM with CAN communication line.
ACC TARGET
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
ACC DISTANCE
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
ACC OWN VHL
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
ACC SET SPEED
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
ACC UNIT
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
SHIFT IND
[P, R, N, D, L]
Status of shift position indicator judged from shift position signal received from
TCM with CAN communication line.
BSW IND
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
BSW W/L
[On/Off]
Status of BSW warning lamp judged from BSW warning lamp signal received from
BSW control module with CAN communication line.
FUEL CAP W/L
[On/Off]
Status of fuel filler cap warning detected from fuel filler cap warning display signal
is received from ECM via CAN communication.
O/D OFF SW
[On/Off]
Status of overdrive control switch.
M RANGE SW
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
NM RANGE SW
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
AT SFT UP SW
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
AT SFT DWN SW
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Revision: 2011 September
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
MWI-37
L
M
MWI
O
P
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
MAIN
SIGNALS
Display item [Unit]
Description
COMP F/B SIG
[On/Off]
A/C compressor activation condition that ECM judges according to the water temperature and the acceleration degree.
PKB SW
[On/Off]
Status of parking brake switch.
BUCKLE SW
[On/Off]
Status of seat belt buckle switch (driver side).
BRAKE OIL SW
[On/Off]
Status of brake fluid level switch.
A/C AMP CONN
[On/Off]
Status of A/C auto amp. connection recognition signal.
ENTER SW
[On/Off]
Status of
(ENTER) switch.
SELECT SW
[On/Off]
Status of
(SELECT) switch.
ECO MODE SW
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
DISTANCE
[km]
Value of distance to empty calculated by combination meter.
OUTSIDE TEMP
[°C or °F]
Ambient temperature value converted from ambient sensor signal received from
ambient sensor.
NOTE:
This may not match with the temperature value indicated on the information display. (Because the information display value is a corrected value from the ambient
sensor input value.)
FUEL LOW SIG
[On/Off]
Status of fuel level low warning signal to output to AV control unit via CAN communication.
BUZZER
[On/Off]
X
Buzzer status (in the combination meter) is detected from the buzzer output signal
received from each unit via CAN communication and the warning output condition
of the combination meter.
TPMS PRESS L
[On/Off]
Status of low tire pressure warning judged from low tire pressure warning lamp
signal received from BCM with CAN communication line.
4WD AUTO IND
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
NOTE:
Some items are not available according to vehicle specification.
W/L ON HISTORY
•
•
•
-
Stores histories when warning/indicator lamp is turned on.
“W/L ON HISTORY” indicates the “TIME” when the warning/indicator lamp is turned on.
The “TIME” above is:
0: The condition that the warning/indicator lamp has been turned on 1 or more times after starting the engine
and waiting for 30 seconds.
- 1 - 39: The number of times the engine was restarted after the 0 condition.
- NO W/L ON HISTORY: Stores NO (0) turning on history of warning/indicator lamp.
NOTE:
• W/L ON HISTORY is not stored for approximately 30 seconds after the engine starts.
• Brake warning lamp does not store any history when the parking brake is applied or the brake fluid level gets
low.
Display Item
Display item
Description
ABS W/L
Lighting history of ABS warning lamp.
VDC/TCS IND
Lighting history of VDC OFF indicator lamp.
SLIP IND
Lighting history of VDC warning lamp.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-38
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Display item
Description
BRAKE W/L
Lighting history of brake warning lamp.
DOOR W/L
Lighting history of door open warning.
OIL W/L
Lighting history of oil pressure warning lamp.
C-ENG W/L
Lighting history of malfunction indicator lamp.
CRUISE IND
Lighting history of CRUISE indicator.
O/D OFF IND
Lighting history of O/D OFF indicator lamp.
FUEL W/L
Lighting history of low fuel level warning.
WASHER W/L
Lighting history of low washer fluid warning.
AIR PRES W/L
Lighting history of low tire pressure warning lamp.
KEY G/Y W/L
Lighting history of Intelligent Key system malfunction.
EPS W/L
Lighting history of EPS warning lamp.
BSW W/L
Lighting history of BSW warning lamp.
A
B
C
D
E
NOTE:
In items displayed on the CONSULT screen, only those listed in the above table are used.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-39
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
COMBINATION METER
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000007495506
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Monitor Item
SPEED METER
[km/h]
Condition
Ignition switch
ON
SPEED OUTPUT
[km/h]
Ignition switch
ON
ODO OUTPUT
[km/h or mph]
Ignition switch
ON
TACHO METER
[rpm]
Ignition switch
ON
FUEL METER
[L]
Ignition switch
ON
Value/Status
While driving
Input value of vehicle speed signal
(CAN communication signal)
NOTE:
655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received
While driving
Output value of vehicle speed signal
(CAN communication signal)
NOTE:
655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received
—
Output value of odometer signal (CAN
communication signal)
Input value of engine speed signal
(CAN communication signal)
NOTE:
8191.875 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received
Engine running
—
Input value of fuel level sensor signal
—
Input value of engine coolant temperature signal (CAN communication signal)
NOTE:
215 is displayed when the malfunction
signal is input
W TEMP METER
[°C]
Ignition switch
ON
ABS W/L
Ignition switch
ON
ABS warning lamp ON
On
ABS warning lamp OFF
Off
VDC/TCS IND
Ignition switch
ON
VDC OFF indicator lamp ON
On
VDC OFF indicator lamp OFF
Off
SLIP IND
Ignition switch
ON
VDC warning lamp ON
On
VDC warning lamp OFF
Off
BRAKE W/L
Ignition switch
ON
Brake warning lamp ON
On
Brake warning lamp OFF
Off
DOOR W/L
Ignition switch
ON
Door open warning ON
On
Door open warning OFF
Off
HI-BEAM IND
Ignition switch
ON
High-beam indicator lamp ON
On
High-beam indicator lamp OFF
Off
TURN IND
Ignition switch
ON
Turn signal indicator lamp ON
On
Turn signal indicator lamp OFF
Off
LIGHT IND
Ignition switch
ON
Light indicator lamp ON
On
Light indicator lamp OFF
Off
Ignition switch
ON
Oil pressure warning lamp ON
On
Oil pressure warning lamp OFF
Off
OIL W/L
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-40
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
Condition
Value/Status
A
MIL
Ignition switch
ON
Malfunction indicator lamp ON
On
Malfunction indicator lamp OFF
Off
CRUISE IND
Ignition switch
ON
CRUISE indicator ON
On
CRUISE indicator OFF
Off
Off
C
D
SET IND
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
CRUISE W/L
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
BA W/L
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
O/D OFF IND
Ignition switch
ON
O/D OFF indicator lamp ON
On
O/D OFF indicator lamp OFF
Off
Off
4WD W/L
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
4WD LOCK IND
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
FUEL W/L
Ignition switch
ON
During low fuel warning indication
On
Other than the above
Off
WASHER W/L
Ignition switch
ON
During low washer fluid warning indication
On
Other than the above
Off
AIR PRES W/L
Ignition switch
ON
Low tire pressure warning lamp ON
On
Low tire pressure warning lamp OFF
Off
KEY G/Y W/L
Ignition switch
ON
During Intelligent Key system malfunction
indication
On
Other than the above
Off
EPS warning lamp ON
On
EPS warning lamp OFF
Off
Off
EPS W/L
Ignition switch
ON
AFS OFF IND
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
ECO MODE IND
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
B
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Off
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-41
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
Condition
Value/Status
Ignition switch
ON
During engine start information indication
B&P I
Ignition switch
ACC
During engine start information indication
B&P N
Ignition switch
LOCK
During key ID warning indication
ID NG
Ignition switch
LOCK
During steering lock information indication
ROTAT
Ignition switch
LOCK
During P position warning indication
SFT P
Ignition switch
LOCK
During Intelligent Key insert information indication
INSRT
Ignition switch
LOCK
During Intelligent Key low battery warning
indication
BATT
Ignition switch
ON
During take away warning indication
NO KY
Ignition switch
LOCK
During key warning indication
OUTKY
Ignition switch
ON
During ACC warning indication
LK WN
Ignition switch
LOCK
During Key ID verification information indication
Ignition switch
ON
Other than above
Off
ACC TARGET
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
ACC DISTANCE
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
ACC OWN VHL
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
ACC SET SPEED
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
ACC UNIT
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
During the indication of “P” by shift position
indicator
P
During the indication of “R” by shift position
indicator
R
During the indication of “N” by shift position
indicator
N
During the indication of “D” by shift position
indicator
D
During the indication of “L” by shift position
indicator
L
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
BSW warning lamp ON
On
BSW warning lamp OFF
Off
LCD
SHIFT IND
Ignition switch
ON
BSW IND
Ignition switch
ON
BSW W/L
Ignition switch
ON
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-42
KY>PSW
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
FUEL CAP W/L
Condition
Ignition switch
ON
Value/Status
A
During fuel filler cap warning display indication
On
Other than above
Off
Overdrive control switch ON
On
Overdrive control switch OFF
Off
B
O/D OFF SW
Ignition switch
ON
M RANGE SW
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
NM RANGE SW
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
AT SFT UP SW
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
E
AT SFT DWN SW
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
F
COMP F/B SIG
Ignition switch
ON
A/C compressor activation condition
On
A/C compressor deactivation condition
Off
PKB SW
Ignition switch
ON
Parking brake switch ON
On
Parking brake switch OFF
Off
BUCKLE SW
Ignition switch
ON
Driver seat belt not fastened
On
Driver seat belt fastened
Off
BRAKE OIL SW
Ignition switch
ON
Brake fluid level switch ON
On
Brake fluid level switch OFF
Off
A/C AMP CONN
Ignition switch
ON
Other than the following
On
Receives ambient sensor power signal
Off
Ignition switch
ON
When
On
ENTER SW
SELECT SW
Ignition switch
ON
switch (enter switch) is pressed
D
G
H
I
J
K
Other than above
When
C
Off
switch (select switch) is pressed
On
Other than above
Off
L
ECO MODE SW
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
DISTANCE
[km]
Ignition switch
ON
—
Distance to empty calculated by combination meter
—
Input value of ambient sensor signal
(CAN communication signal)
NOTE:
This may not match the indicated value
on the information display.
OUTSIDE TEMP
[°C or °F]
Ignition switch
ON
FUEL LOW SIG
Ignition switch
ON
During low fuel warning indication
On
Other than above
Off
Ignition switch
ON
Buzzer ON
On
Buzzer OFF
Off
BUZZER
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-43
M
MWI
O
P
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
Condition
TPMS PRESS L
Ignition switch
ON
4WD AUTO IND
Ignition switch
ON
Value/Status
During low tire pressure warning indication
On
Other than above
Off
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
NOTE:
Some items are not available according to vehicle specification.
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPNIA1324ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Description
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
Value
(Approx.)
+
–
1
(O)
Ground
Battery power supply
Input
Ignition
switch
OFF
—
Battery voltage
2
(Y)
Ground
Ignition signal
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
—
Battery voltage
3
(B)
Ground
Ground
—
Ignition
switch
ON
—
0V
4
(B)
Ground
Ground
—
Ignition
switch
ON
—
0V
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-44
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
–
Description
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
A
Value
(Approx.)
B
• Lighting switch 1ST position
• When meter illumination
is maximum
C
JPNIA1687GB
5
(B/P)
Ground
Illumination control signal
Output
Ignition
switch
ON
D
E
• Lighting switch 1ST position
• When meter illumination
is step 11
F
JPNIA1686GB
8
(SB)
10
(P)
10
(P)
Ground
11
(G)
10
(P)
Trip reset switch signal
Meter control switch ground
Enter switch signal
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
• Lighting switch 1ST position
• When meter illumination
is minimum
12 V
When trip reset switch is
pressed
0V
Other than the above
5V
G
H
I
—
Ignition
switch
ON
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
When
switch (enter
switch) is pressed
0V
Other than the above
5V
Ignition
switch
ON
When
switch (select
switch) is pressed
0V
Other than the above
5V
When
switch [illumination control switch (+)] is
pressed
0V
Other than the above
5V
When
switch [illumination control switch (−)] is
pressed
0V
Other than the above
5V
—
0V
J
K
12
(BR)
13
(Y)
14
(V)
15
(BR)
10
(P)
10
(P)
10
(P)
Select switch signal
Illumination control switch
signal (+)
Illumination control switch
signal (−)
Input
Input
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
Ignition
switch
ON
L
M
MWI
O
—
Air bag signal
Input
—
—
—
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-45
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
Description
–
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
Value
(Approx.)
At idle [after warming up,
approx. 20°C (68°F)]
16
(L)
Ground
Engine coolant temperature signal
Output
Ignition
switch
ON
JSNIA3528ZZ
At idle [after warming up,
approx. 80°C (176°F)]
JSNIA3530ZZ
18
(LG)
Ground
Ambient sensor signal
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
—
JSNIA0014GB
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
—
5V
Ambient sensor ground
—
Ignition
switch
ON
—
0V
—
CAN-H
—
—
—
—
22
(P)
—
CAN-L
—
—
—
—
23
(B)
Ground
Ground
—
Ignition
switch
ON
—
0V
24
(B)
Ground
Fuel level sensor ground
—
Ignition
switch
ON
—
0V
25
(BR)
12 V
Alternator signal
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
Charge warning lamp ON
Ground
Charge warning lamp OFF
0V
26
(BR)
0V
Parking brake switch signal
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
Parking brake applied.
Ground
Parking brake released.
12 V
27
(Y)
Brake fluid level switch signal
12 V
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
Brake fluid level is normal
Ground
Brake fluid level is less than
LOW level
0V
28
(V)
0V
Security signal
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
Security indicator lamp ON
Ground
Security indicator lamp
OFF
12 V
19
(R)
Ground
A/C auto amp. connection
recognition signal
20
(Y)
Ground
21
(L)
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-46
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
29
(G)
–
Ground
Description
Signal name
Washer level switch signal
Value
(Approx.)
A
Washer level switch ON
0V
B
Washer level switch OFF
5V
Condition
Input/
Output
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
NOTE:
The maximum voltage varies depending on the specification
(destination unit).
31
(SB)
Ground
Vehicle speed signal
(8-pulse)
Output
Ignition
switch
ON
C
D
Speedometer operated
[When vehicle speed is
approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH)]
E
JSNIA0012GB
32
(P)
Ground
34
(O)
24
(B)
35
(P)
Ground
36
(BR)
—
Overdrive control switch
signal
Fuel level sensor signal
Seat belt buckle switch signal (driver side)
Passenger seat belt warning signal
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
Input
F
When overdrive control
switch is pressed
0V
Other than the above
5V
—
H
When driver seat belt is fastened
5V
When driver seat belt is unfastened
0V
—
—
—
G
MWI-68, "Component Inspection"
I
J
Fail-Safe
INFOID:0000000007495507
FAIL-SAFE
K
The combination meter activates the fail-safe control if CAN communication with each unit is malfunctioning.
Function
Specifications
L
Speedometer
Tachometer
Reset to zero by suspending communication.
M
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Illumination control
When suspending communication, changes to nighttime
mode.
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-47
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Function
Specifications
Odo/trip meter
An indicated value is maintained at communications blackout.
Shift position indicator
The display turns OFF by suspending communication.
Door open warning
Interrupt indication
Fuel filler cap warning
The display turns OFF by suspending communication.
Low tire pressure warning
Information display
Current fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption
Trip computer
Distance to empty
Average vehicle speed
• When reception time of an abnormal signal is 2 seconds or
less, the last received datum is used for calculation to indicate the result.
• When reception time of an abnormal signal is more than two
seconds, the last calculation results are indicated.
Travel distance
Buzzer
The buzzer turns OFF by suspending communication.
ABS warning lamp
VDC warning lamp
Brake warning lamp
The lamp turns ON by suspending communication.
EPS warning lamp
Malfunction indicator lamp
Low tire pressure warning lamp
The lamp blinking caused by suspending communication.
High beam indicator lamp
Warning lamp/indicator lamp
Turn signal indicator lamp
VDC OFF indicator lamp
O/D OFF indicator lamp
Tail lamp indicator lamp
The lamp turns OFF by suspending communication.
CRUISE indicator lamp
Oil pressure warning lamp
Key warning lamp
BSW warning lamp
DTC Index
Display contents of CONSULT
INFOID:0000000007495508
Diagnostic item is detected when...
Refer to
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000]
When combination meter is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal
for 2 seconds or more.
MWI-58,
"Diagnosis
Procedure"
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
[U1010]
When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of the CAN controller of combination meter.
MWI-59,
"Diagnosis
Procedure"
VEHICLE SPEED
[B2205]
The abnormal vehicle speed signal is input from the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) for 2 seconds or more.
MWI-60,
"Diagnosis
Procedure"
ENGINE SPEED
[B2267]
If ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine speed signals for 2 seconds or
more.
MWI-61,
"Diagnosis
Procedure"
WATER TEMP
[B2268]
If ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine coolant temperature signals for 60
seconds or more.
MWI-62,
"Diagnosis
Procedure"
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-48
2012 QUEST
IPDM E/R
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
IPDM E/R
A
List of ECU Reference
INFOID:0000000007495509
B
ECU
Reference
PCS-16, "Reference Value"
IPDM E/R
C
PCS-23, "Fail-safe"
PCS-24, "DTC Index"
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-49
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
METER SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007495510
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
scribed in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
(option abbreviation; if notde-
JCNWA3906GB
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-50
2012 QUEST
METER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
JCNWA3907GB
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-51
2012 QUEST
COMPASS
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
COMPASS
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007495511
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
scribed in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
(option abbreviation; if notde-
JCNWA3915GB
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-52
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW (METER SYSTEM)
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW (METER SYSTEM)
Work flow
INFOID:0000000007495512
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
JSNIA4491GB
•
•
•
•
•
Reference 1···MWI-34, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
Reference 2···MWI-48, "DTC Index".
Reference 3···MWI-64, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Reference 4···MWI-64, "Component Inspection".
Reference 5···MWI-63, "COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure".
O
P
DETAILED FLOW
1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM
Interview the customer to obtain as much information as possible about the conditions and environment under
which the malfunction occurred.
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-53
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW (METER SYSTEM)
< BASIC INSPECTION >
2.CHECK SYMPTOM
• Check the symptom based on the information obtained from the customer.
• Check that any other malfunctions are present.
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS OPERATION
Check that the on board diagnosis function operates. Refer to MWI-34, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
Does the on board diagnosis function operate normally?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 6.
4.CHECK CONSULT SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
1. Connect CONSULT and perform self-diagnosis. Refer to MWI-48, "DTC Index".
2. When DTC is detected, follow the instructions below:
Record DTC and Freeze Frame Data.
Are self-diagnosis results normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 10.
5.NARROW DOWN THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Perform symptom diagnosis and narrow down the malfunctioning parts.
>> GO TO 10.
6.CHECK METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Check meter control switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-64, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is inspection result OK?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> GO TO 10.
7.CHECK METER CONTROL SWITCH
Check meter control switch. Refer to MWI-64, "Component Inspection".
Is inspection result OK?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> GO TO 10.
8.CHECK COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUITS
Check combination meter power supply and ground circuits. Refer to MWI-63, "COMBINATION METER :
Diagnosis Procedure".
Is inspection result OK?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> GO TO 10.
9.REPLACE COMBINATION METER
Replace combination meter.
>> GO TO 11.
10.REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
NOTE:
If DTC is displayed, erase DTC after repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
>> GO TO 11.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-54
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW (METER SYSTEM)
< BASIC INSPECTION >
11.FINAL CHECK
A
Check that the combination meter operates normally.
Do they operate normally?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 1.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-55
2012 QUEST
ZONE VARIATION SETTING (COMPASS)
< BASIC INSPECTION >
ZONE VARIATION SETTING (COMPASS)
Work Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
INFOID:0000000007495513
Press and hold the compass switch for 3 – 9 seconds.
The current zone setting appears on the compass display.
Find the current geographical location number in the zone variation chart.
Select the new zone number. (Press the compass switch until
the new zone number appears on the compass display.)
After select the new zone number, the compass display will
automatically shows a direction within a few seconds.
Perform the following calibration procedure for more accurate
indications.
SEL168Y
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-56
2012 QUEST
CALIBRATION (COMPASS)
< BASIC INSPECTION >
CALIBRATION (COMPASS)
A
Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495514
NOTE:
The compass calibrates itself under normal driving conditions. However, occasional circumstances may cause
the compass to operate inaccurately. Example: Driving from rural (wide open) areas to crowded city areas, or
if an aftermarket (i.e., non original equipment) antenna with a magnetic base is attached to the vehicle. Calibrate the mirror compass if the display shows only one direction or a limited number of directions.
NOTE:
• If “magnetic hats” are used in the dealership for vehicle identification, remove the hat from the vehicle before
performing the following steps. Do not put the hat back on the vehicle after the procedure is completed.
• Drive the vehicle to an open level area; away from large metallic objects, structures, and overhead power
lines.
• Turn off “non-essential” electrical accessories (rear window defrost, heater/air conditioning, wipers) and
close the doors.
1. Verify the correct compass zone setting for the geographical location. Refer to MWI-56, "Work Procedure".
2. Press and hold the compass switch for more than 9 seconds.
3. “C” is displayed on the compass display when calibration starts.
4. Drive slowly [less than 8 km/h (5 MPH)] in a circle until the “C / CAL” is replaced with primary headings (N,
NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW).
NOTE:
This will require driving at least 2 complete 360 degree circles, 3 complete circles may be required.
5. The compass calibration procedure is now complete. The compass should operate normally.
NOTE:
If at any time the compass continually displays the incorrect direction or the reading is erratic or locked,
repeat the calibration procedure.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-57
2012 QUEST
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Description
INFOID:0000000007495515
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication system for real time application. It is an on-vehicle
multiplex communication system with high data communication speed and excellent error detectability. Many
electronic control units are equipped onto vehicles, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected
with two communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with
less wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart".
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007495516
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
Display contents of
CONSULT
U1000
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Diagnostic item is detected when...
When combination meter is not transmitting or
receiving CAN communication signal for 2
seconds or more.
Diagnosis Procedure
Probable malfunction location
CAN communication system
INFOID:0000000007495517
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “METER/M&A”.
Is “CAN COMM CIRCUIT” displayed?
YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-58
2012 QUEST
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U1010 CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
A
Description
INFOID:0000000007495518
Initial diagnosis of combination meter.
B
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007495519
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1010
Display contents of CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
Diagnostic item is detected when...
When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of the CAN controller of combination
meter.
Diagnosis Procedure
Probable malfunction location
D
Combination meter
E
INFOID:0000000007495520
1.REPLACE COMBINATION METER
F
When DTC “U1010” is detected, replace combination meter.
G
>> INSPECTION END
H
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-59
2012 QUEST
B2205 VEHICLE SPEED
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B2205 VEHICLE SPEED
Description
INFOID:0000000007495521
Vehicle speed signal is transmitted from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication
to combination meter.
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007495522
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B2205
Display contents of
CONSULT
VEHICLE SPEED
Diagnostic item is detected when...
An abnormal vehicle speed signal is input
from ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) for 2 seconds or more
Probable malfunction location
• Wheel sensor
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495523
1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ABS”, and repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
>> Refer to BRC-29, "CONSULT Function".
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-60
2012 QUEST
B2267 ENGINE SPEED
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B2267 ENGINE SPEED
A
Description
INFOID:0000000007495524
The engine speed signal is transmitted from ECM to the combination meter via CAN communication.
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007495525
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B2267
Display contents of
CONSULT
ENGINE SPEED
B
Diagnostic item is detected when...
ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine
speed signals for 2 seconds or more
Probable malfunction location
D
• Crankshaft position sensor (POS)
• ECM
E
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495526
1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF ECM
F
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” of “ENGINE”, and repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
>> Refer to EC-93, "DTC Index".
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-61
2012 QUEST
B2268 WATER TEMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B2268 WATER TEMP
Description
INFOID:0000000007495527
The engine coolant temperature signal is transmitted from ECM to the combination meter via CAN communication.
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007495528
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B2268
Display contents of
CONSULT
WATER TEMP
Diagnostic item is detected when...
ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine
coolant temperature signals for 60 seconds or
more
Probable malfunction location
• Engine coolant temperature sensor
• ECM
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495529
1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS OF ECM
Perform “Self Diagnosis Result” of “ENGINE”, and repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
>> Refer to EC-93, "DTC Index".
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-62
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
A
COMBINATION METER
COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495530
B
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.
C
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
11
Ignition switch ON or START
4
D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
E
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
F
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector and ground.
Terminals
G
(+)
(−)
Combination meter
Connector
Terminal
1
M34
Ignition switch position
Voltage
(Approx.)
H
Ground
2
OFF
ON
Battery voltage
I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check harness between combination meter and fuse.
J
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground.
L
Combination meter
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
3
M34
K
Ground
4
M
Existed
23
MWI
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-63
2012 QUEST
METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495531
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Measure voltage between the following terminals of the combination meter.
Combination meter
Connector
Terminals
(+)
(−)
11
M34
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
10
12
8
When enter switch is pressed
0V
Other than the above
5V
When select switch is pressed
0V
Other than the above
5V
When trip reset switch is pressed
0V
Other than the above
5V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter connector and meter control switch connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and meter control switch harness connector.
Terminals
Combination meter
Connector
Meter control switch
Terminal
Connector
8
M34
Terminal
5
10
M54
11
12
4.
Continuity
6
3
Existed
4
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground.
Combination meter
Connector
8
M34
Continuity
Terminal
10
Ground
11
Not existed
12
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495532
1.CHECK METER CONTROL SWITCH
1.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-64
2012 QUEST
METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2. Disconnect meter control switch connector.
3. Check meter control switch.
Terminals
Condition
Meter control switch
5
Continuity
When enter switch is pressed
3
4
A
Existed
Other than the above
6
B
Not existed
When select switch is pressed
C
Existed
Other than the above
Not existed
When trip reset switch is pressed
Other than the above
D
Existed
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace meter control switch. Refer to MWI-86, "Removal and Installation".
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-65
2012 QUEST
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495533
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Measure voltage between the following terminals of the combination meter.
Combination meter
Connector
Terminals
(+)
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
(−)
13
M34
10
14
When illumination control switch (+) is pressed
0V
Other than the above
5V
When illumination control switch (−) is pressed
0V
Other than the above
5V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter connector and illumination control switch connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and illumination control switch harness
connector.
Terminals
Combination meter
Connector
Terminal
Meter control switch
Connector
10
M34
6
13
M55
3
14
4.
Continuity
Terminal
Existed
4
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground.
Combination meter
Connector
10
M34
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
13
Not existed
14
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495534
1.CHECK ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect illumination control switch connector.
Check meter control switch.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-66
2012 QUEST
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
A
Terminals
Condition
Meter control switch
When illumination control switch (+) is pressed
3
6
4
Continuity
Other than the above
Existed
B
Not existed
When illumination control switch (−) is pressed
Other than the above
Existed
C
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace illumination control switch. Refer to MWI-86, "Removal and Installation".
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-67
2012 QUEST
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495535
1.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter connector and fuel level sensor unit connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and fuel level sensor unit harness connector.
Combination meter
4.
Fuel level sensor unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M34
34
B40
2
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground.
Combination meter
Connector
Terminal
M34
34
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
Fuel level sensor unit
2.
Combination meter
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
B40
5
M34
24
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between fuel level sensor unit harness connector and ground.
Fuel level sensor unit
Connector
Terminal
B40
5
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495536
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER OPERATION
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect fuel level sensor unit connector.
Connect variable resistor between harness connector terminals located on the vehicle side of the fuel
level sensor unit.
Fuel level sensor unit
Connector
B40
4.
Terminals
2
5
Set variable resistor according to the resistance value shown in the following table and turn ignition switch
ON.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-68
2012 QUEST
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Fuel gauge indication position
Resistance (Ω)
(Approx.)
1
Less than 94
3/4
140
1/2
186
1/4
232
0
More than 278
A
B
C
Is inspection result OK?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
D
2.REMOVE FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
E
Remove the fuel level sensor unit. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation".
>> GO TO 3.
F
3.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT
Check the resistance between fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump.
Terminals
Fuel level sensor unit
2
5
Condition
Resistance (Ω)
(Approx.)
Height [mm (in)]
*
Full (A)
51
133.0 (5.24)
Empty* (B)
283
15.7 (0.618)
G
H
I
*: When float rod is contact with stopper.
Is inspection result OK?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump. Refer to
FL-5, "Exploded View".
JSNIA3344ZZ
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-69
2012 QUEST
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007495537
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
Select the “Data Monitor” for the “METER/M&A” and check the “OIL W/L” monitor value.
“OIL W/L”
Ignition switch ON
: On
Engine running
: Off
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495538
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector and oil pressure switch connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and oil pressure switch harness connector.
Terminals
4.
(+)
(−)
IPDM E/R
Oil pressure switch
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
F12
75
F63
1
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
Terminals
(+)
(−)
Continuity
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
F12
75
Ground
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495539
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Check continuity between oil pressure switch and ground.
Condition
Continuity
Engine stopped
Existed
Engine running
Not existed
ELF0044D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-70
2012 QUEST
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Replace oil pressure switch. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-71
2012 QUEST
WASHER LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
WASHER LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495540
1.CHECK WASHER LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter connector and washer level switch connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and washer level switch harness connector.
Terminals
Combination meter
Washer level switch
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M34
29
E303
1
4.
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground.
Terminals
Combination meter
Connector
Terminal
M34
29
Continuity
Ground
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK WASHER LEVEL SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between washer level switch connector and ground.
Terminals
Washer level switch
Connector
Terminal
E303
2
Continuity
Ground
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495541
1.CHECK WASHER LEVEL SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect washer level switch connector.
Check washer level switch.
Terminals
Condition
Continuity
Washer level switch ON
Existed
Washer level switch OFF
Not existed
Washer level switch
1
2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace washer level switch. Refer to WW-63, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-72
2012 QUEST
A/C AUTO AMP. CONNECTION RECOGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
A/C AUTO AMP. CONNECTION RECOGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
A
INFOID:0000000007495542
1.CHECK A/C AUTO AMP. CONNECTION RECOGNITION SIGNAL
1.
2.
B
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector and ground.
C
Terminals
(+)
(−)
Combination meter
Connector
Terminal
M34
19
Voltage
(Approx.)
D
5V
E
Ground
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.
F
2.CHECK A/C AUTO AMP. CONNECTION RECOGNITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter connector and A/C auto amp. connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and A/C auto amp. harness connector.
G
H
Combination meter
4.
A/C auto amp.
Connector
Terminal
Connector
terminal
M34
19
M50
20
Continuity
I
Existed
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground.
J
Combination meter
Connector
Terminal
M34
19
Continuity
Ground
Not existed
K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-73
2012 QUEST
THE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
THE FUEL GAUGE INDICATOR DOES NOT OPERATE
Description
INFOID:0000000007495543
Fuel gauge will not indicate from a certain position.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495544
1.CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Check the fuel level sensor signal circuit. Refer to MWI-68, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
2.COMPONENT INSPECTION
Perform components inspection for the fuel level sensor unit and combination meter. Refer to MWI-68, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK FLOAT INTERFERENCE
Check that the float arm interferes with or binds to other components in the fuel tank.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace fuel level sensor unit. Refer to FL-5, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-74
2012 QUEST
THE METER CONTROL SWITCH IS INOPERATIVE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
THE METER CONTROL SWITCH IS INOPERATIVE
Description
A
INFOID:0000000007495545
If any of the following malfunctions is found for the meter control switch operation.
• All switches are inoperative
• The specified switch cannot be operated
Diagnosis Procedure
B
INFOID:0000000007495546
C
1.CHECK METER CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
D
Check the meter control switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-64, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
E
2.CHECK METER CONTROL SWITCH
Perform a unit check for the meter control switch. Refer to MWI-64, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace meter control switch. Refer to MWI-86, "Removal and Installation".
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-75
2012 QUEST
THE ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH IS INOPERATIVE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
THE ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH IS INOPERATIVE
Description
INFOID:0000000007495547
If any of the following malfunctions is found for the illumination control switch operation.
• All switches are inoperative
• The specified switch cannot be operated
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495548
1.CHECK ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Check the illumination control switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-64, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
Perform a unit check for the illumination control switch. Refer to MWI-64, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
NG
>> Replace illumination control switch. Refer to MWI-86, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-76
2012 QUEST
THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON
Description
A
INFOID:0000000007495549
The oil pressure warning lamp stays off when the ignition switch is turned ON.
Diagnosis Procedure
B
INFOID:0000000007495550
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
C
Perform auto active test. Refer to PCS-11, "Diagnosis Description".
Is oil pressure warning lamp blinking?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
D
2.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
E
Check the oil pressure switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-70, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
F
3.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
G
Perform a unit check for the oil pressure switch. Refer to MWI-70, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-33, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace oil pressure switch. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
H
4.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
Connect CONSULT and perform an input signal check for the combination meter. Refer to MWI-70, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-33, "Removal and Installation".
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-77
2012 QUEST
THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
THE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF
Description
INFOID:0000000007495551
The oil pressure warning lamp remains illuminated while the engine is running (normal oil pressure).
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495552
1.CHECK OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
Perform auto active test. Refer to PCS-11, "Diagnosis Description".
Is oil pressure warning lamp blinking?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
2.CHECK IPDM E/R OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between the oil pressure switch harness connector and ground.
Terminals
(+)
(−)
Oil pressure switch
Connector
Terminal
F63
1
Voltage
(Approx.)
Ground
12 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
3.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Perform a unit check for the oil pressure switch. Refer to MWI-70, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-33, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace oil pressure switch. Refer to EM-38, "Exploded View".
4.CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Check the oil pressure switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-70, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
5.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
Connect CONSULT and perform an input signal check for the combination meter. Refer to MWI-70, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-33, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-78
2012 QUEST
THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR
DOES NOT DISPLAY
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING,
OR DOES NOT DISPLAY
Description
A
INFOID:0000000007495553
B
• The parking brake warning is displayed during vehicle travel even though the parking brake is released.
• The parking brake warning is not displayed even though driving the vehicle with the parking brake applied.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495554
1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE WARNING LAMP OPERATION
1.
2.
C
D
Start engine.
Check the operation of the brake warning lamp when operating the parking brake.
E
Condition
Warning lamp status
Parking brake applied
ON
Parking brake released
OFF
F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
G
2.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the parking brake switch signal circuit. Refer to WCS-38, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
H
I
3.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH UNIT
J
Perform a unit check for the parking brake switch. Refer to BRC-99, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace parking brake switch. Refer to PB-6, "Exploded View".
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-79
2012 QUEST
THE LOW WASHER FLUID WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES
NOT DISPLAY
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
THE LOW WASHER FLUID WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR
DOES NOT DISPLAY
Description
INFOID:0000000007495555
• The warning is still displayed even after washer fluid is added.
• The warning is not displayed even though the washer tank is empty.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495556
1.CHECK WASHER LEVEL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Check the washer level switch signal circuit. Refer to MWI-72, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK WASHER LEVEL SWITCH UNIT
Perform a unit check for the washer level switch. Refer to MWI-72, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace washer level switch. Refer to WW-63, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-80
2012 QUEST
THE DOOR OPEN WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT DISPLAY
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
THE DOOR OPEN WARNING CONTINUES DISPLAYING, OR DOES NOT
DISPLAY
Description
A
INFOID:0000000007495557
B
• The door ajar warning is displayed even though all of the doors are closed.
• The door ajar warning is not displayed even though a door is ajar.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495558
1.CHECK BCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL
Connect CONSULT and check the BCM input signals. Refer to DLK-209, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
C
D
E
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
F
Select the “Data Monitor” for the “METER/M&A” and check the “DOOR W/L” monitor value.
“DOOR W/L”
Door open
: On
Door closed
: Off
G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
H
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
I
Check the door switch signal circuit. Refer to DLK-209, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
J
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
K
Perform a unit check for the door switch. Refer to DLK-210, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace applicable door switch. Refer to DLK-453, "Removal and Installation".
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-81
2012 QUEST
THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE DISPLAY IS INCORRECT
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
THE AMBIENT TEMPERATURE DISPLAY IS INCORRECT
Description
INFOID:0000000007495559
• The displayed ambient air temperature is higher than the actual temperature.
• The displayed ambient air temperature is lower than the actual temperature.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495560
NOTE:
Check that the symptom is not applicable to the normal operating condition before starting diagnosis. Refer to
MWI-83, "INFORMATION DISPLAY : Description".
1.CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Check the ambient sensor signal circuit. Refer to HAC-85, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
2.CHECK AMBIENT SENSOR
Perform the part check for the ambient sensor. Refer to HAC-86, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace ambient sensor. Refer to HAC-136, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-82
2012 QUEST
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
A
COMPASS
COMPASS : Description
INFOID:0000000007495561
B
COMPASS
• The electronic compass is highly protected from changes in most magnetic fields. However, some large
changes in magnetic fields can affect it. Some examples are (but not limited to): high tension power lines,
large steel buildings, subways, steel bridges, automatic car washes, large piles of scrap metal, etc. While
this does not happen very often, it is possible.
• During normal operation, the compass mirror will continuously update the compass calibration to adjust for
gradual changes in the vehicle's magnetic “remnant” field. If the vehicle is subjected to high magnetic influences, the compass may appear to indicate false headings, become locked, or appear that it is unable to be
calibrated. If this occurs, perform the calibration procedure.
• If at any time the compass continually displays an incorrect direction or the reading is erratic or locked, verify
the correct zone variance.
C
D
E
Symptom Chart
Symptom
Cause
Solution / Reference
F
The compass display reads “C”.
Compass shows the wrong direction.
Compass does not change direction appears “Locked”.
Compass does not show all the directions,
one or more is missing.
The compass was calibrated but it “loses”
calibration.
G
• Compass is not calibrated.
• Incorrect zone variance setting.
• Large change in magnetic field (Steel
bridges, subways, concentrations of
metal, carwashes, etc.)
• Compass was calibrated incorrectly or in
the presence of a strong magnetic field.
Perform Calibration. Refer to MWI-57,
"Work Procedure".
Perform zone variation setting if correct
reading is desired in that location. Refer
toMWI-56, "Work Procedure".
On long trips the compass shows the
wrong direction.
H
I
J
INFORMATION DISPLAY
INFORMATION DISPLAY : Description
INFOID:0000000007495562
K
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
The displayed ambient temperature on the information display may differ from the actual temperature because
it is a corrected value calculated from the ambient sensor signal by the combination meter. Refer to MWI-21,
"INFORMATION DISPLAY : System Description" for details on the correction process.
DISTANCE TO EMPTY
The calculated distance to empty may differ from the actual distance to empty if the refueling amount is
approximately 15 (4 US gal, 3-1/4 Imp gal) or less. This is because the refuel control (moves the fuel gauge
needle quicker than normal judging that the driver is refueling the vehicle) is not performing.
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-83
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
COMBINATION METER
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495563
REMOVAL
Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
DISASSEMBLY
JSNIA3340ZZ
1.
Unified meter control unit
2.
Front cover
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495564
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the cluster lid A. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove screws and connector, and then remove combination meter.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000007495565
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
Disengage the pawls (4 on the lower part) of the combination meter.
Insert the removal tool into the clearance (in the order of A, B)
between the front cover and the meter control unit. Remove 4
pawls on the lower side of the front cover by turning the tool
while increasing the clearance.
CAUTION:
Wrap the removal tools with protective tape to prevent
scratches.
JSNIA3427ZZ
3.
Pull the front cover straight to remove it from the unified meter control unit.
CAUTION:
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-84
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Never touch the display, pointer, the inside of front cover and the printed area of the dial during
the work.
• Keep away from magnetic sources.
• Never damage the front cover.
A
ASSEMBLY
B
Install the front cover straight to the unified meter control unit and engage all the pawl.
CAUTION:
• Never touch the display, pointer, the inside of front cover and the printed area of the dial during the
work.
• Keep away from magnetic sources.
• Never damage the front cover.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-85
2012 QUEST
METER CONTROL SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
METER CONTROL SWITCH
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495566
REMOVAL
Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495567
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove cluster lid A. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Disengage the tabs and remove meter control switch.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-86
2012 QUEST
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
Exploded View
A
INFOID:0000000007495568
REMOVAL
B
Refer to IP-11, "Exploded View".
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495569
C
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove cluster lid A. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Disengage the tabs and remove illumination control switch.
D
INSTALLATION
E
Install in the reverse order of removal.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
MWI
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-87
2012 QUEST
COMPASS
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
COMPASS
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495570
Refer to MIR-23, "Exploded View" (with ADP), or MIR-37, "Exploded View" (without ADP).
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495571
Refer to MIR-23, "Removal and Installation" (with ADP), or MIR-37, "Removal and Installation" (without ADP).
Revision: 2011 September
MWI-88
2012 QUEST
ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL
SECTION
PCS
POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
IPDM E/R
Fail-safe ...................................................................23
DTC Index ...............................................................24
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 4
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 4
IPDM E/R ..................................................................... 4
IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location ..................... 4
SYSTEM .............................................................. 5
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM ...................................... 5
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description ............................................................................ 5
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe ................... 6
POWER CONTROL SYSTEM ..................................... 8
POWER CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description ............................................................................ 8
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM ........................................ 8
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description...... 8
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM ......... 9
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM :
System Diagram ........................................................ 9
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM :
System Description ................................................... 9
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 26
Wiring Diagram ........................................................26
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 29
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 29
Description ...............................................................29
DTC Logic ................................................................29
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................29
B2098 IGNITION RELAY ON STUCK .............. 30
Description ...............................................................30
DTC Logic ................................................................30
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................30
Description ...............................................................31
DTC Logic ................................................................31
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................31
J
K
L
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................32
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 33
N
IPDM E/R ........................................................... 33
Exploded View .........................................................33
Removal and Installation .........................................33
O
POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 34
Revision: 2011 September
I
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 32 PCS
Diagnosis Description ............................................. 11
CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R) ............................. 13
Reference Value ..................................................... 16
H
B2099 IGNITION RELAY OFF STUCK ............ 31
PRECAUTION .............................................. 34
IPDM E/R ............................................................16
G
IPDM E/R ........................................................... 26
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) .....................11
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 16
F
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" .................................................................34
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 35
PCS-1
2012 QUEST
P
COMPONENT PARTS ....................................... 35
Component Parts Location ..................................... 35
SYSTEM ............................................................. 36
POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ........................... 36
POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM : System Description .................................................................. 36
Fail-safe .................................................................. 37
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................ 38
DTC Logic ............................................................... 54
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 54
Component Inspection ............................................ 55
B2618 BCM ....................................................... 56
DTC Logic ............................................................... 56
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 56
B261A PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ..... 58
DTC Logic ............................................................... 58
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 58
COMMON ITEM ........................................................ 38
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) .................................................... 38
B26F1 IGNITION RELAY .................................. 60
INTELLIGENT KEY ................................................... 39
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM INTELLIGENT KEY) ............................................... 40
B26F2 IGNITION RELAY .................................. 61
DTC Logic ............................................................... 60
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 60
DTC Logic ............................................................... 61
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 61
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 44
B26F6 BCM ....................................................... 63
BCM ................................................................... 44
DTC Logic ............................................................... 63
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 63
List of ECU Reference ............................................ 44
WIRING DIAGRAM ..................................... 45
POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ................... 45
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 45
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH ................. 64
Component Function Check .................................. 64
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 64
Component Inspection ............................................ 65
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 47
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR .............................................. 67
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........ 47
Description .............................................................. 67
Component Function Check .................................. 67
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 67
Work Flow ............................................................... 47
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 50
B2614 ACC RELAY CIRCUIT ........................... 50
DTC Logic ............................................................... 50
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 50
Component Inspection ............................................ 51
B2615 BLOWER RELAY CIRCUIT ................... 52
DTC Logic ............................................................... 52
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 52
Component Inspection ............................................ 53
B2616 IGNITION RELAY CIRCUIT ................... 54
Revision: 2011 September
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 69
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH DOES
NOT OPERATE ................................................. 69
Description .............................................................. 69
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 69
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE ... 70
Description .............................................................. 70
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 70
PCS-2
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
[IPDM E/R]
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000007492076
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
C
D
E
F
G
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
I
J
K
L
PCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-3
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
[IPDM E/R]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
IPDM E/R
IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007492077
JMMIA0844ZZ
1.
IPDM E/R
A.
Engine room (LH)
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-4
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[IPDM E/R]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
A
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007492078
B
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PCS
N
O
JMMIA0834GB
DESCRIPTION
IPDM E/R activates the internal control circuit to perform the relay ON-OFF control according to the input signals from various sensors and the request signals received from control units via CAN communication.
CAUTION:
To prevent damage to the parts, IPDM E/R integrated relays cannot be removed.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-5
2012 QUEST
P
SYSTEM
[IPDM E/R]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Control relay
Input/output
Transmit unit
Control part
Headlamp low relay
Low beam request signal
BCM (CAN)
Headlamp (LO)
Headlamp high relay
High beam request signal
BCM (CAN)
Headlamp (HI)
Front fog lamp relay
Tail lamp relay
• Front wiper relay
• Front wiper high relay
Horn relay
• Starter relay*
• Starter control relay
Front fog light request signal
BCM (CAN)
Position light request signal
BCM (CAN)
Front fog lamp
•
•
•
•
• EXL-22 (Xenon
type)
• EXL-122 (Halogen type)
Parking lamp
license plate lamp
Tail lamp
Side marker lamp
Illumination
INL-15
Front wiper motor
WW-7
Front wiper request signal
BCM (CAN)
Front wiper stop position signal
Front wiper motor
• Theft warning horn request
signal
• Horn reminder signal
BCM (CAN)
Starter control relay signal
BCM (CAN)
Starter relay control signal
TCM
Starter motor relay cut off signal
ECM (CAN)
EC-52
• HAC-19 (Automatic air conditioning)
• HAC-154 (Manual air conditioning)
• Horn (high)
• Horn (low)
Starter motor
ECM (CAN)
A/C compressor
(magnet clutch)
• Cooling fan relay-1
• Cooling fan relay-2
• Cooling fan relay-3
Cooling fan speed request signal
ECM (CAN)
• Cooling fan motor-1
• Cooling fan motor-2
Ignition switch ON signal
BCM (CAN)
Vehicle speed signal
Combination meter
(CAN)
Push-button ignition switch
signal
Push-button ignition
switch
Daytime running light request
signal
BCM (CAN)
SEC-20
SEC-5
A/C compressor request signal
Daytime running light relay
• EXL-11 (Xenon
type)
• EXL-111 (Halogen type)
• EXL-25 (Xenon
type)
• EXL-125 (Halogen type)
A/C relay
Ignition relay
Reference page
Each control unit, sensor,
actuator and relay (ignition power supply)
Headlamp (HI)
EC-41
PCS-30
• EXL-19 (Xenon
type)
• EXL-119 (Halogen type)
*: BCM controls the starter relay.
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM : Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007492079
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN
communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control.
If No CAN Communication Is Available With ECM
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-6
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[IPDM E/R]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Control part
Fail-safe operation
A
• Turns ON the cooling fan relay-2 and the cooling fan relay-3 when the ignition switch is
turned ON (Cooling fan operates at HI)
• Turns OFF the cooling fan relay-1, the cooling fan relay-2 and the cooling fan relay-3
when the ignition switch is turned OFF (Cooling fan does not operate)
Cooling fan
A/C compressor
A/C relay OFF
Alternator
Outputs the power generation command signal (PWM signal) 0%
B
C
If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM
Control part
Headlamp
•
•
•
•
•
D
Fail-safe operation
Parking lamp
License plate lamp
Illumination
Tail lamp
Side marker lamp
• Turns ON the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned ON
• Turns OFF the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF
• Headlamp high relay OFF
E
• Turns ON the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned ON
• Turns OFF the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF
F
• The status just before activation of fail-safe control is maintained until the ignition switch
is turned OFF while the front wiper is operating at LO or HI speed.
• The wiper is operated at LO speed until the ignition switch is turned OFF if the fail-safe
control is activated while the front wiper is set in the AUTO mode and the front wiper motor
is operating.
• Returns automatically wiper to stop position when ignition switch is turned ON if fail-safe
control is activated while front wiper motor is operated and wiper stop in the other than
stop position.
Front wiper motor
H
I
Front fog lamp
Front fog lamp relay OFF
Horn
Horn relay OFF
Ignition relay
The status just before activation of fail-safe is maintained.
Starter motor
Starter control relay OFF
J
IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION
• IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay inside it.
• IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the excitation
coil circuit.
• If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay and daytime running light relay for 10 minutes to alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is
turned OFF.
K
L
PCS
Voltage judgment
Ignition relay contact side
Ignition relay excitation coil side
IPDM E/R judgment
Operation
ON
ON
Ignition relay ON normal
—
OFF
OFF
Ignition relay OFF normal
—
ON
OFF
Ignition relay ON stuck
• Detects DTC “B2098: IGN RELAY ON”
• Turns ON the tail lamp relay for 10 minutes
OFF
ON
Ignition relay OFF stuck
Detects DTC “B2099: IGN RELAY OFF”
N
O
P
FRONT WIPER PROTECTION FUNCTION
IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper stop position signal.
When a front wiper stop position signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power supply to wiper
after repeating a front wiper 10 seconds activation and 20 seconds stop five times.
Revision: 2011 September
G
PCS-7
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[IPDM E/R]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Ignition switch
Front wiper switch
Front wiper stop position signal
OFF
The front wiper stop position signal (stop position) cannot be input for 10 seconds.
ON
The front wiper stop position signal does not change for 10 seconds.
ON
NOTE:
This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R “Data Monitor” that displays “BLOCK” for the item
“WIP PROT” while the wiper is stopped.
STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION
IPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remains
active for 90 seconds.
POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
POWER CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007492080
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMMIA0810GB
DESCRIPTION
Alternator Control
IPDM E/R outputs power generation command signal (PWM signal) to the alternator according to the status of
the power generation command value signal received from ECM via CAN communication. Refer to CHG-7,
"CHARGING SYSTEM : System Description".
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007492081
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMMIA0835GB
DESCRIPTION
• IPDM E/R reads the status of the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to BCM via
CAN communication. Refer to MWI-16, "OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP : System Description".
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-8
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[IPDM E/R]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• IPDM E/R receives the rear window defogger control signal from BCM via CAN communication and transmits it to ECM via CAN communication. Refer to DEF-6, "System Description".
A
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Diagram
INFOID:0000000007492082
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007492083
B
C
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
JMMIA0859GB
K
DESCRIPTION
Outline
• IPDM E/R incorporates a power consumption control function that reduces the power consumption according to the vehicle status.
• IPDM E/R changes its status (control mode) with the sleep wake up signal received from BCM via CAN communication.
L
PCS
Normal mode (wake-up)
- CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
N
Low power consumption mode (sleep)
- Low power consumption control is active.
- CAN transmission is stopped.
O
Sleep Mode Activation
• IPDM E/R judges that the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled when the ignition switch is OFF and none of the
conditions below are present. Then it transmits a sleep-ready signal (ready) to BCM via CAN communication.
- Outputting signals to actuators
- Switches or relays operating
- Output requests are being received from control units via CAN communication.
• IPDM E/R stops CAN communication and enters the low power consumption mode when it receives a sleep
wake up signal (sleep) from BCM and the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled.
Wake-up Operation
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-9
2012 QUEST
P
SYSTEM
[IPDM E/R]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• IPDM E/R changes from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode when it receives a sleep
wake-up signal (wake up) from BCM or any of the following conditions is fulfilled. In addition, it transmits a
sleep-ready signal (not-ready) to BCM via CAN communication to report the CAN communication start.
- Ignition switch ON
- An output request is received from a control unit via CAN communication.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-10
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
[IPDM E/R]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
A
Diagnosis Description
INFOID:0000000007492084
AUTO ACTIVE TEST
B
Description
In auto active test, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to check their operation.
• Oil pressure warning lamp
• Front wiper (LO, HI)
• Parking lamp
• License plate lamp
• Tail lamp
• Side marker lamp
• Front fog lamp
• Headlamp (LO, HI)
• A/C compressor (magnet clutch)
• Cooling fan
Operation Procedure
NOTE:
Never perform auto active test in the following condition.
• Passenger door is open.
• CONSULT is connected.
1. Close the hood and lift the wiper arms from the windshield. (Prevent windshield damage due to wiper
operation)
NOTE:
When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON, and within 20 seconds, press the front door switch (driver side) 10 times.
Then turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test
starts.
NOTE:
Engine starts when ignition switch is turned ON while brake pedal is depressed.
5. The oil pressure warning lamp starts blinking when the auto active test starts.
6. After a series of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE:
• When auto active test has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn the ignition switch OFF.
• When auto active test is not activated, door switch may be the cause. Check door switch. Refer to DLK-209,
"Component Function Check".
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PCS
Inspection in Auto Active Test
When auto active test is actuated, the following 6 steps are repeated 3 times.
N
Operation
sequence
Inspection location
Operation
1
Oil pressure warning lamp
Blinks continuously during operation of auto active test
2
Front wiper motor
LO for 5 seconds → HI for 5 seconds
3
•
•
•
•
•
10 seconds
4
Headlamp
• LO 10 seconds
• HI ON ⇔ OFF 5 times
5
A/C compressor (magnet clutch)
ON ⇔ OFF 5 times
6
Cooling fan
LO for 5 seconds →MID for 3 seconds → HI for 2 seconds
Parking lamp
License plate lamp
Tail lamp
Side marker lamp
Front fog lamp
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-11
O
P
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
[IPDM E/R]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Concept of auto active test
JMMIA0836GB
• IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN communication. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is considered normal if the auto
active test starts successfully.
• The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated.
Diagnosis chart in auto active test
Symptom
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Any of the following components do not
operate
Parking lamp
License plate lamp
Tail lamp
Side marker lamp
Front fog lamp
Headlamp (HI, LO)
Front wiper motor
A/C compressor does not operate
Oil pressure warning lamp does not operate
Revision: 2011 September
Inspection contents
Perform auto active test.
Does the applicable system operate?
Possible cause
YES
BCM signal input circuit
NO
• Lamp or motor
• Lamp or motor ground circuit
• Harness or connector between IPDM E/
R and applicable system
• IPDM E/R
YES
• Combination meter signal input circuit
• CAN communication signal between
Combination meter and ECM
• CAN communication signal between
ECM and IPDM E/R
NO
• Magnet clutch
• Harness or connector between IPDM E/
R and magnet clutch
• IPDM E/R
YES
• Harness or connector between IPDM E/
R and oil pressure switch
• Oil pressure switch
• IPDM E/R
NO
• CAN communication signal between
IPDM E/R and BCM
• CAN communication signal between
BCM and Combination meter
• Combination meter
Perform auto active test.
Does the magnet clutch operate?
Perform auto active test.
Does the oil pressure warning
lamp blink?
PCS-12
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
[IPDM E/R]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Symptom
Inspection contents
Possible cause
YES
• ECM signal input circuit
• CAN communication signal between
ECM and IPDM E/R
NO
• Cooling fan
• Harness or connector between cooling
fan and cooling fan relay
• Harness or connector between IPDM E/
R and cooling fan relay
• Cooling fan relay
• IPDM E/R
Perform auto active test.
Does the cooling fan operate?
Cooling fan does not operate
A
B
C
D
CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R)
INFOID:0000000007492085
APPLICATION ITEM
E
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with IPDM E/R.
Diagnosis mode
Description
F
Ecu Identification
Allows confirmation of IPDM E/R part number.
Self Diagnostic Result
Displays the diagnosis results judged by IPDM E/R.
Data Monitor
Displays the real-time input/output data from IPDM E/R input/output data.
Active Test
IPDM E/R can provide a drive signal to electronic components to check their operations.
CAN Diag Support Monitor
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
G
H
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to PCS-24, "DTC Index".
I
DATA MONITOR
Monitor item
Monitor Item
[Unit]
J
MAIN SIGNALS
Description
×
Displays the value of the cooling fan speed signal received from ECM via CAN communication.
AC COMP REQ
[Off/On]
×
Displays the status of the A/C compressor request signal received from ECM via
CAN communication.
TAIL&CLR REQ
[Off/On]
×
Displays the status of the position light request signal received from BCM via CAN
communication.
HL LO REQ
[Off/On]
×
Displays the status of the low beam request signal received from BCM via CAN communication.
HL HI REQ
[Off/On]
×
Displays the status of the high beam request signal received from BCM via CAN
communication.
FR FOG REQ
[Off/On]
×
Displays the status of the front fog light request signal received from BCM via CAN
communication.
FR WIP REQ
[Stop/1LOW/Low/Hi]
×
Displays the status of the front wiper request signal received from BCM via CAN
communication.
WIP AUTO STOP
[STOP P/ACT P]
×
Displays the status of the front wiper stop position signal judged by IPDM E/R.
WIP PROT
[Off/BLOCK]
×
Displays the status of the front wiper fail-safe operation judged by IPDM E/R.
MOTOR FAN REQ
[1/2/3/4]
IGN RLY1 -REQ
[Off/On]
IGN RLY
[Off/On]
PUSH SW
[Off/On]
Revision: 2011 September
Displays the status of the ignition switch ON signal received from BCM via CAN communication.
×
Displays the status of the ignition relay judged by IPDM E/R.
Displays the status of the push-button ignition switch judged by IPDM E/R.
PCS-13
2012 QUEST
K
L
PCS
N
O
P
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
[IPDM E/R]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item
[Unit]
MAIN SIGNALS
Description
INTER/NP SW
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the shift position judged by IPDM E/R.
ST RLY CONT
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the starter relay status signal received from BCM via CAN
communication.
IHBT RLY -REQ
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the starter control relay signal received from BCM via CAN
communication.
ST/INHI RLY
[Off/ ST /INHI/UNKWN]
Displays the status of the starter relay and starter control relay judged by IPDM E/R.
DETENT SW
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the CVT shift selector (detention switch) judged by IPDM E/R.
S/L RLY -REQ
[Off/On]
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
S/L STATE
[LOCK/UNLK/UNKWN]
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
DTRL REQ
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the daytime running light request signal received from BCM via
CAN communication.
NOTE:
This item is monitored only on the vehicle with daytime running light system.
OIL P SW
[Open/Close]
Displays the status of the oil pressure switch judged by IPDM E/R.
HOOD SW
[Off/On]
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
HL WASHER REQ
[Off/On]
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
THFT HRN REQ
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the theft warning horn request signal received from BCM via
CAN communication.
HORN CHIRP
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the horn reminder signal received from BCM via CAN communication.
CRNRNG LMP REQ
[Off/On]
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
ACTIVE TEST
Test item
Test item
Operation
Description
Off
CORNERING LAMP
LH
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but cannot be tested.
RH
HORN
FRONT WIPER
MOTOR FAN
HEAD LAMP WASHER
On
Operates horn relay for 20 ms.
Off
OFF
Lo
Operates the front wiper relay.
Hi
Operates the front wiper relay and front wiper high relay.
1
OFF
2
Operates the cooling fan relay-1.
3
Operates the cooling fan relay-2.
4
Operates the cooling fan relay-2 and cooling fan relay-3.
On
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but cannot be tested.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-14
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
[IPDM E/R]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test item
EXTERNAL LAMPS
Operation
Description
A
Off
OFF
TAIL
Operates the tail lamp relay and the daytime running light relay.
Lo
Operates the headlamp low relay.
Hi
Operates the headlamp low relay and ON/OFF the headlamp high relay at 1 second intervals.
Fog
Operates the front fog lamp relay.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-15
2012 QUEST
IPDM E/R
[IPDM E/R]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
IPDM E/R
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000007492086
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Monitor Item
Condition
MOTOR FAN REQ
Engine idle speed
AC COMP REQ
Engine running
TAIL&CLR REQ
HL LO REQ
Changes depending on engine coolant
temperature, air conditioner operation
status, vehicle speed, etc.
A/C switch OFF
Off
A/C switch ON
(compressor is operating)
On
Off
Lighting switch 1ST, 2ND or AUTO (light is illuminated)
On
Lighting switch OFF
Off
Lighting switch 2ND or AUTO (light is illuminated)
Lighting switch 2ND or
AUTO (light is illuminated)
FR FOG REQ
Lighting switch 2ND or
AUTO (light is illuminated)
Off
Lighting switch HI or PASS
On
Lighting switch HI or PASS
Front fog lamp switch ON
Ignition switch ON
Ignition switch ON
WIP PROT
Ignition switch ON
IGN RLY
PUSH SW
INTER/NP SW
ST RLY CONT
IHBT RLY -REQ
Revision: 2011 September
Off
On
Front wiper switch OFF
Stop
Front wiper switch INT
1LOW
Front wiper switch LO
Low
Front wiper switch HI
Hi
Front wiper stop position
WIP AUTO STOP
On
Lighting switch other than HI and PASS
Front fog lamp switch OFF
IGN RLY1 -REQ
1/2/3/4
Lighting switch OFF
HL HI REQ
FR WIP REQ
Value/Status
Any position other than front wiper stop
position
Front wiper operates normally
Front wiper stops at fail-safe operation
STOP P
ACT P
Off
BLOCK
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
Off
Ignition switch ON
On
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
Off
Ignition switch ON
On
Release the push-button ignition switch
Off
Press the push-button ignition switch
On
Ignition switch ON
Selector lever in any position other
than P or N
Off
Selector lever in P or N position
On
Ignition switch ON
Off
At engine cranking
On
Ignition switch ON
Off
At engine cranking
On
PCS-16
2012 QUEST
IPDM E/R
[IPDM E/R]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
ST/INHI RLY
DETENT SW
Condition
Value/Status
Ignition switch ON
Off
At engine cranking
INHI → ST
The status of starter relay or starter control relay cannot be recognized by the
battery voltage malfunction, etc. when the starter relay is ON and the starter
control relay is OFF
• Press the selector button with selector lever in P position
• Selector lever in any position other
than P
Ignition switch ON
UNKWN
C
On
S/L RLY -REQ
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Off
S/L STATE
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
UNLK
OIL P SW
Off
Daytime running light system is operated
On
Ignition switch ON (engine running)
Ignition switch ON (engine stopped)
G
Close
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Off
HL WASHER REQ
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Off
Not operation
Off
• Panic alarm is activated
• Theft warning alarm is activated
On
Not operation
Off
Door locking with Intelligent Key (horn chirp mode)
On
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
Off
HORN CHIRP
CRNRNG LMP REQ
F
Open
HOOD SW
THFT HRN REQ
D
E
Daytime running light system is not operated
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
B
Off
Release the selector button with selector lever in P position
DTRL REQ
A
H
I
J
K
L
PCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-17
2012 QUEST
IPDM E/R
[IPDM E/R]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JPMIA0863ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Description
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
Value
(Approx.)
+
−
1
(R)
Ground
Battery power supply
Input
Ignition switch OFF
6 – 16 V
2
(L)
Ground
Battery power supply
Input
Ignition switch OFF
6 – 16 V
4
(LG)
Ground
Front wiper LO
Output
Ignition switch
ON
Front wiper switch OFF
0–1V
Front wiper switch LO
9 – 16 V
5
(Y)
Ground
Front wiper HI
Output
Ignition switch
ON
Front wiper switch OFF
0–1V
Front wiper switch HI
9 – 16 V
6
(G)
Ground
Daytime running light
relay power supply
7
(BR)
Ground
Illuminations
10
(P)
12
(B)
Ground
Ground
ECM relay power
supply
Ground
Revision: 2011 September
Input
Output
Output
—
Ignition switch OFF
6 – 16 V
Lighting switch OFF
0–1V
Lighting switch 1ST
9 – 16 V
Ignition switch OFF
(More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF)
0–1V
• Ignition switch ON
• Ignition switch OFF
(For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF)
6 – 16 V
Ignition switch ON
0–1V
PCS-18
2012 QUEST
IPDM E/R
[IPDM E/R]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
13
(G)
15
(L)
−
Ground
Ground
Description
Signal name
Fuel pump power
supply
Ignition power supply
Output
Output
Ground
Front wiper stop position
18
(P)
Ground
Ignition power supply
No. 2
19
(V)
Ground
Ignition relay power
supply
Output
20
(W)
Ground
Ambient sensor
ground
Output
16
(R)
21
(O)
Ground
Ambient sensor
22
(SB)
Ground
Refrigerant pressure
sensor ground
Input
Input
Input
Output
23
(GR)
Ground
Refrigerant pressure
sensor
Output
24
(G)
Ground
Refrigerant pressure
sensor power supply
Input
25
(GR)
Ground
Ignition relay power
supply
27
(BR)
Ground
Ignition relay monitor
Input
28
(G)
Ground
Push-button ignition
switch
Input
Output
30
(LG)
Ground
34
(O)
Ground
Cooling fan relay-3
control
Input
35
(P)
Ground
Cooling fan relay-1
power supply
Input
36
(G)
Ground
Battery power supply
Input
Ground
Cooling fan relay-2
power supply
38
(GR)
Starter relay control
Revision: 2011 September
Condition
Value
(Approx.)
A
Approximately 1 second or more after turning the ignition switch ON
0–1V
B
• Approximately 1 second after turning the
ignition switch ON
• Engine running
6 – 16 V
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0–1V
Ignition switch ON
6 – 16 V
Input/
Output
Input
Output
Ignition switch
ON
C
Front wiper stop position
0–1V
Any position other than
front wiper stop position
9 – 16 V
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0–1V
Ignition switch ON
6 – 16 V
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0–1V
Ignition switch ON
6 – 16 V
Ignition switch ON
0–1V
Ignition switch ON
0 – 4.8 V
NOTE:
Changes depending to ambient
temperature
Engine running
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
0–1V
Engine running
• Warm-up condition
• Both A/C switch and
blower fan motor
switch ON (Compressor operates)
1–4V
Ignition switch ON
5V
F
G
H
J
K
0–1V
Ignition switch ON
6 – 16 V
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
6 – 16 V
Ignition switch ON
0–1V
Press the push-button ignition switch
0–1V
Release the push-button ignition switch
6 – 16 V
Selector lever in any position other than P or N
6 – 16 V
Selector lever P or N
0–1V
Cooling fan stopped
6 – 16 V
Cooling fan at HI operation
0–1V
Cooling fan stopped
6 – 16 V
Cooling fan at LO operation
4–8V
Ignition switch OFF
6 – 16 V
Cooling fan not operation
0–1V
Cooling fan at LO operation
4–8V
Cooling fan at HI operation
9 – 16 V
PCS-19
E
I
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
Ignition switch
ON
D
2012 QUEST
L
PCS
N
O
P
IPDM E/R
[IPDM E/R]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Description
Signal name
Input/
Output
Condition
Value
(Approx.)
+
−
39
(P)
—
CAN-L
Input/
Output
—
—
40
(L)
—
CAN-H
Input/
Output
—
—
41
(B)
Ground
Ground
—
42
(SB)
Ground
Cooling fan relay-2
control
43
(LG)
Ground
CVT shift selector
(Detention switch)
Input
Input
44
(W)
Ground
Horn relay control
Input
45
(Y)
Ground
Horn switch
Input
46
(O)
Ground
Starter relay control
Input
48
(W)
Ground
A/C relay power
supply
Output
49
(R/B)
Ground
ECM relay power supply
Output
51
(LG)
Ground
Ignition relay power
supply
Output
52
(Y/G)
Ground
Ignition relay power
supply
Output
53
(R/W)
54
(G/W)
Ground
Ground
ECM relay power supply
Throttle control motor
relay power supply
Output
Output
55
(W/L)
Ground
ECM power supply
Output
56
(R/Y)
Ground
Ignition relay power
supply
Output
Revision: 2011 September
Ignition switch ON
0–1V
Cooling fan stopped
9 – 16 V
• Cooling fan at MID operation
• Cooling fan at HI operation
0–1V
Ignition switch
ON
• Press the selector button (selector lever P)
• Selector lever in any
position other than P
9 – 16 V
Release the selector button (selector lever P)
0–1V
The horn is deactivated
9 – 16 V
The horn is activated
0–1V
The horn is deactivated
9 – 16 V
The horn is activated
0–1V
At engine cranking
0–1V
Other than at engine cranking
6 – 16 V
Engine running
A/C switch OFF
0–1V
A/C switch ON
(A/C compressor is operating)
9 – 16 V
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0–1V
Ignition switch ON
6 – 16 V
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0–1V
Ignition switch ON
6 – 16 V
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0–1V
Ignition switch ON
6 – 16 V
Ignition switch OFF
(More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF)
0–1V
• Ignition switch ON
• Ignition switch OFF
(For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF)
6 – 16 V
Ignition switch OFF
(More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF)
0–1V
• Ignition switch ON
• Ignition switch OFF
(For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF)
6 – 16 V
Ignition switch OFF
6 – 16 V
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0–1V
Ignition switch ON
6 – 16 V
PCS-20
2012 QUEST
IPDM E/R
[IPDM E/R]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Description
Signal name
+
−
57
(O)
Ground
Ignition relay power
supply
Output
58
(Y)
Ground
Ignition relay power
supply
Output
69
(W/B)
70
(O)
Ground
Ground
ECM relay control
Throttle control motor
relay control
Condition
Input/
Output
Output
Output
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0–1V
Ignition switch ON
6 – 16 V
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0–1V
Ignition switch ON
6 – 16 V
Ignition switch OFF
(More than a few seconds after turning ignition switch OFF)
6 – 16 V
• Ignition switch ON
• Ignition switch OFF
(For a few seconds after turning ignition
switch OFF)
0–1V
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
6 – 16 V
Ignition switch ON
0–1V
Ignition switch OFF
71
(P)
Ground
Cranking request
Output
Value
(Approx.)
Ignition switch
ON
Selector lever P or N
Selector lever in any position other than P or N
A
B
C
D
E
F
0–1V
G
9 – 16 V
Engine running
72
(R/B)
Ground
75
(LG)
Ground
Starter relay control
Oil pressure switch
Input
Input
Ignition switch
ON
Selector lever in any position other than P or N
6 – 16 V
Selector lever P or N
0–1V
Engine stopped
0–1V
Engine running
9 – 16 V
H
I
J
K
Ignition switch ON
JPMIA0001GB
6.6 V
L
PCS
76
(SB)
Ground
Power generation
command signal
Output
40% is set on “ACTIVE TEST”, “ALTERNATOR DUTY” of “ENGINE”
N
JPMIA0002GB
4.0 V
O
P
80% is set on “ACTIVE TEST”, “ALTERNATOR DUTY” of “ENGINE”
JPMIA0003GB
1.3 V
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-21
2012 QUEST
IPDM E/R
[IPDM E/R]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
77
(B)
−
Ground
Description
Signal name
Fuel pump relay
control
Condition
Value
(Approx.)
• Approximately 1 second after turning the
ignition switch ON
• Engine running
0–1V
Approximately 1 second or more after turning the ignition switch ON
6 – 16 V
Other than at engine cranking
0–1V
At engine cranking
6 – 16 V
Lighting switch OFF
0–1V
Lighting switch 2ND or AUTO (light is illuminated)
9 – 16 V
Lighting switch OFF
0–1V
Lighting switch 2ND or AUTO (light is illuminated)
9 – 16 V
Input/
Output
Output
80
(B)
Ground
Starter motor
Output
83
(R)
Ground
Headlamp LO (RH)
Output
84
(L)
Ground
Headlamp LO (LH)
Output
9 – 16 V
Ground
Front fog lamp (RH)
Output
Lighting switch
2ND or AUTO
(light is illuminated)
Front fog lamp switch ON
86
(SB)
Front fog lamp switch
OFF
0–1V
Lighting switch
2ND or AUTO
(light is illuminated)
Front fog lamp switch ON
9 – 16 V
Front fog lamp switch
OFF
0–1V
87
(Y)
Ground
Front fog lamp (LH)
Output
88
(BR)
Ground
Ignition relay power
supply
Output
89
(V)
Ground
90
(G)
Ground
91
(LG)
Ground
Headlamp HI (RH)
Headlamp HI (LH)
Front combination
lamp RH
Output
Output
Output
92
(P)
Ground
Front combination
lamp LH
Output
93
(W)
Ground
Headlamp aiming motor RH
Output
94
(O)
Ground
Headlamp aiming motor LH
Output
99
(Y)
Ground
Ambient sensor
ground
Output
100
(V)
Ground
Ambient sensor
101
(O)
Ground
Refrigerant pressure
sensor ground
Revision: 2011 September
Input
Output
Ignition switch OFF or ACC
0–1V
Ignition switch ON
6 – 16 V
Lighting switch
2ND or AUTO
(light is illuminated)
Lighting switch HI or
PASS
9 – 16 V
Lighting switch other than
HI and PASS
0–1V
Lighting switch
2ND or AUTO
(light is illuminated)
Lighting switch HI or
PASS
9 – 16 V
Lighting switch other than
HI and PASS
0–1V
Lighting switch OFF
0–1V
Lighting switch 1ST
9 – 16 V
Lighting switch OFF
0–1V
Lighting switch 1ST
9 – 16 V
Lighting switch OFF
0–1V
Lighting switch 1ST
9 – 16 V
Lighting switch OFF
0–1V
Lighting switch 1ST
9 – 16 V
Ignition switch ON
0–1V
Ignition switch ON
0 – 4.8 V
NOTE:
Changes depending to ambient
temperature
Engine running
• Warm-up condition
• Idle speed
PCS-22
0–1V
2012 QUEST
IPDM E/R
[IPDM E/R]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Description
−
+
102
(G)
Condition
Input/
Output
Signal name
Ground
Refrigerant pressure
sensor
103
(BR)
Ground
Refrigerant pressure
sensor power supply
Input
105
(R)
Ground
Daytime running light
relay control
Output
Output
Engine running
• Warm-up condition
• Both A/C switch and
blower fan motor
switch ON (Compressor operates)
Ignition switch ON
Value
(Approx.)
A
B
1–4V
C
5V
Daytime running light deactivated
9 – 16 V
Daytime running light activated
0–1V
Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007492087
D
E
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN
communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control.
F
If No CAN Communication Is Available With ECM
Control part
G
Fail-safe operation
Cooling fan
• Turns ON the cooling fan relay-2 and the cooling fan relay-3 when the ignition switch is
turned ON (Cooling fan operates at HI)
• Turns OFF the cooling fan relay-1, the cooling fan relay-2 and the cooling fan relay-3
when the ignition switch is turned OFF (Cooling fan does not operate)
A/C compressor
A/C relay OFF
Alternator
Outputs the power generation command signal (PWM signal) 0%
H
I
If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM
J
Control part
Fail-safe operation
Headlamp
• Turns ON the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned ON
• Turns OFF the headlamp low relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF
• Headlamp high relay OFF
•
•
•
•
•
• Turns ON the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned ON
• Turns OFF the tail lamp relay when the ignition switch is turned OFF
Parking lamp
License plate lamp
Illumination
Tail lamp
Side marker lamp
K
L
Front wiper motor
• The status just before activation of fail-safe control is maintained until the ignition switch
is turned OFF while the front wiper is operating at LO or HI speed.
• The wiper is operated at LO speed until the ignition switch is turned OFF if the fail-safe
control is activated while the front wiper is set in the AUTO mode and the front wiper motor
is operating.
• Returns automatically wiper to stop position when ignition switch is turned ON if fail-safe
control is activated while front wiper motor is operated and wiper stop in the other than
stop position.
Front fog lamp
Front fog lamp relay OFF
Horn
Horn relay OFF
Ignition relay
The status just before activation of fail-safe is maintained.
Starter motor
Starter control relay OFF
• IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay inside it.
• IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the excitation
coil circuit.
PCS-23
N
O
P
IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION
Revision: 2011 September
PCS
2012 QUEST
IPDM E/R
[IPDM E/R]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
• If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay and daytime running light relay for 10 minutes to alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is
turned OFF.
Voltage judgment
Ignition relay contact side
Ignition relay excitation coil side
IPDM E/R judgment
Operation
ON
ON
Ignition relay ON normal
—
OFF
OFF
Ignition relay OFF normal
—
ON
OFF
Ignition relay ON stuck
• Detects DTC “B2098: IGN RELAY ON”
• Turns ON the tail lamp relay for 10 minutes
OFF
ON
Ignition relay OFF stuck
Detects DTC “B2099: IGN RELAY OFF”
FRONT WIPER PROTECTION FUNCTION
IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper stop position signal.
When a front wiper stop position signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power supply to wiper
after repeating a front wiper 10 seconds activation and 20 seconds stop five times.
Ignition switch
Front wiper switch
Front wiper stop position signal
OFF
The front wiper stop position signal (stop position) cannot be input for 10 seconds.
ON
The front wiper stop position signal does not change for 10 seconds.
ON
NOTE:
This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R “Data Monitor” that displays “BLOCK” for the item
“WIP PROT” while the wiper is stopped.
STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION
IPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remains
active for 90 seconds.
DTC Index
INFOID:0000000007492088
NOTE:
• The details of time display are as follows.
- CRNT: A malfunction is detected now.
- PAST: A malfunction was detected in the past.
• IGN counter is displayed on FFD (Freeze Frame Data).
- The number is 0 when is detected now.
- The number increases like 1 → 2 ··· 38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition whenever IGN OFF →
ON.
- The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
×: Applicable
CONSULT display
Fail-safe
Reference
No DTC is detected.
further testing
may be required.
—
—
U1000: CAN COMM CIRCUIT
×
PCS-29
B2098: IGN RELAY ON
×
PCS-30
B2099: IGN RELAY OFF
—
PCS-31
B209F: STR CUT OFF OPEN
—
SEC-91
B20A0: STR CUT OFF SHORT
—
SEC-93
B210B: START CONT RLY ON
—
SEC-95
B210C: START CONT RLY OFF
—
SEC-97
B210D: STARTER RELAY ON
—
SEC-99
B210E: STARTER RELAY OFF
—
SEC-101
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-24
2012 QUEST
IPDM E/R
[IPDM E/R]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
CONSULT display
Fail-safe
Reference
B210F: INTRLCK/PNP SW ON
—
SEC-104
B2110: INTRLCK/PNP SW OFF
—
SEC-106
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-25
2012 QUEST
IPDM E/R
[IPDM E/R]
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
IPDM E/R
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007492089
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
(option abbreviation; if not
JCMWA7669GB
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-26
2012 QUEST
IPDM E/R
[IPDM E/R]
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PCS
N
O
JCMWA7670GB
P
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-27
2012 QUEST
IPDM E/R
[IPDM E/R]
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
JCMWA7671GB
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-28
2012 QUEST
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[IPDM E/R]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
A
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Description
INFOID:0000000007492090
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time applications. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Modern
vehicle is equipped with many electronic control unit, and each control unit shares information and links with
other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected
with 2 communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less
wiring. Each control unit transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Signal Chart. Refer to LAN-32, "CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM : CAN Communication Signal Chart".
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492091
B
C
D
E
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
F
DTC
U1000
CONSULT display description
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
DTC Detection Condition
When IPDM E/R cannot communicate CAN
communication signal continuously for 2
seconds or more
Diagnosis Procedure
Possible cause
G
CAN communication system
INFOID:0000000007492092
H
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSTIC
I
1. Turn ignition switch ON and wait 2 seconds or more.
2. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT.
Is DTC “U1000” displayed?
YES >> Refer to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
J
K
L
PCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-29
2012 QUEST
B2098 IGNITION RELAY ON STUCK
[IPDM E/R]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B2098 IGNITION RELAY ON STUCK
Description
INFOID:0000000007492093
• IPDM E/R operates the ignition relay when it receives an ignition switch ON signal from BCM via CAN communication.
• Turn the ignition relay OFF by pressing the push-button ignition switch once when the vehicle speed is 4 km/
h (2.5 MPH) or less.
• Turn the ignition relay OFF with the following operation when the vehicle speed is more than 4 km/h (2.5
MPH) or when an abnormal condition occurs in CAN communication from the unified meter and A/C
amp.(Emergency OFF)
- Press and hold the push-button ignition switch for 2 seconds or more.
- Press the push-button ignition switch 3 times within 1.5 seconds.
NOTE:
The ignition relay does not turn ON for 3 seconds after emergency OFF even if the push-button ignition switch
is pressed.
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492094
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B2098
CONSULT display
description
IGN RELAY ON
DTC Detection Condition
Possible causes
The ignition relay ON is detected for 1 second at ignition switch OFF
(CPU monitors the status at the contact and excitation coil circuits of
the ignition relay inside it)
Ignition relay malfunction
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check DTC in “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to PCS-30, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492095
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSIS
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, and wait 1 second or more.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT.
Is DTC “B2098” displayed?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-33, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-30
2012 QUEST
B2099 IGNITION RELAY OFF STUCK
[IPDM E/R]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B2099 IGNITION RELAY OFF STUCK
A
Description
INFOID:0000000007492096
• IPDM E/R operates the ignition relay when it receives an ignition switch ON signal from BCM via CAN communication.
• Turn the ignition relay OFF by pressing the push-button ignition switch once when the vehicle speed is 4 km/
h (2.5 MPH) or less.
• Turn the ignition relay OFF with the following operation when the vehicle speed is more than 4 km/h (2.5
MPH) or when an abnormal condition occurs in CAN communication from the unified meter and A/C
amp.(Emergency OFF)
- Press and hold the push-button ignition switch for 2 seconds or more.
- Press the push-button ignition switch 3 times within 1.5 seconds.
NOTE:
The ignition relay does not turn ON for 3 seconds after emergency OFF even if the push-button ignition switch
is pressed.
DTC Logic
B2099
C
D
E
INFOID:0000000007492097
F
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B
CONSULT display
description
IGN RELAY OFF
DTC Detection Condition
Possible causes
The ignition relay OFF is detected for 1 second at ignition switch ON
(CPU monitors the status at the contact and excitation coil circuits of
the ignition relay inside it)
Ignition relay malfunction
G
H
NOTE:
When IPDM E/R power supply voltage is low (Approx. 7 - 8 V for about 1 second), the “DTC: B2099” may be detected.
I
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check DTC in “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to PCS-31, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END.
Diagnosis Procedure
J
K
INFOID:0000000007492098
1.PERFORM SELF DIAGNOSIS
L
1. Turn ignition switch OFF, and wait 1 second or more.
2. Turn ignition switch ON.
3. Check “Self Diagnostic Result” of “IPDM E/R” using CONSULT.
Is “B2099” displayed?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R. Refer to PCS-33, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
PCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-31
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[IPDM E/R]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492099
1.CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK
Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible links are not blown.
Signal name
Fuses and fusible link No.
E (80 A)
C (60 A)
H (40 A)
Battery power supply
50 (15 A)
51 (15 A)
Is the fuse fusing?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse or fusible link is
blown.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and the ground.
(+)
IPDM E/R
Connector
(−)
Voltage
Ground
6 – 16 V
Terminal
1
E9
2
E10
36
Is the measurement value normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the harness or connector.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connectors and the ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
E10
12
E11
41
Continuity
Ground
Existed
Does continuity exist?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair the harness or connector.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-32
2012 QUEST
IPDM E/R
[IPDM E/R]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
IPDM E/R
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007492100
B
C
D
E
F
G
JPMIA0868ZZ
1.
Relay box cover
2.
IPDM E/R
H
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492101
CAUTION:
IPDM E/R integrated relays are not serviceable parts, and must not be removed from the unit.
I
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal.
Remove the relay box cover.
Disconnect the harness connector form the IPDM E/R (1).
Press the pawl (A) and remove the IPDM E/R from relay box.
J
K
L
PCS
JPMIA0869ZZ
N
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-33
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000007492102
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-34
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007492103
B
C
D
E
F
JMMIA0860ZZ
No.
Component
G
Description
BCM
• BCM controls power distribution system.
• BCM judges ignition switch position by push-button ignition switch (push switch) and vehicle condition.
• BCM checks the ignition switch position internally.
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation
location.
2.
Stop lamp relay
Stop lamp switch detects that brake pedal is depressed, and stop lamp relay transmits the signal to
BCM.
Refer to BRC-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
3.
Push-button ignition
switch
Push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pressed, and transmits the status signal to BCM and
IPDM E/R.
4.
CVT shift selector (detention switch)
CVT shift selector (detention switch) detects shift lever status, transmits detention switch signal to
BCM.
Refer to TM-16, "SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Transmission range
switch
Transmission range switch detects shift position P or N, transmits P/N position signal to BCM.
Refer to TM-10, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
L
5.
PCS
IPDM E/R
• IPDM E/R detects push-button ignition switch (push switch) status, and transmits push-button ignition switch status signal (CAN) to BCM.
• IPDM E/R receives ignition relay (IPDM E/R) control signal and ignition switch ON signal (CAN)
from BCM, and controls ignition relay (built in IPDM E/R)
Refer to PCS-4, "IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Blower relay (built in fuse
block)
• Blower relay is controled by BCM.
• Blower relay supplies the ignition switch ON power supply or the ignition switch ON signal to air
conditiooning system when ignition switch is turned ON.
• BCM compares status of blower relay control signal and ignition switch positon judged by BCM.
Accessory relay (built in
fuse block)
• Accessory relay is controled by BCM.
• Accessory relay supplies the accessory power supply or the ignition switch ACC signal to each
ECU when ignition switch is turned ACC or ON.
• BCM compares status of accessory relay control signal, and ignition switch position judged by
BCM.
Ignition relay (built in fuse
block)
• Ignition relay is controled by BCM.
• Ignition relay supplies the ignition switch ON power supply or the ignition switch ON signal to each
ECU and system when ignition switch is turned ON.
• BCM compares status of ignition relay control signal and ignition switch positon judged by BCM.
• BCM monitors the ignition relay operating status by the ignition relay feedback signal.
1.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-35
2012 QUEST
H
I
J
K
N
O
P
SYSTEM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007492104
SYSTEM DIADRAM
JMMIA0861GB
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• PDS (POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM) is the system that BCM controls with the operation of the pushbutton ignition switch and performs the power distribution to each power circuit. This system is used instead
of the mechanical power supply changing mechanism with the operation of the conventional key cylinder.
• The push-button ignition switch can be operated when Intelligent Key is in the following condition.
- Intelligent Key is in the detection area of the inside key antenna.
- Intelligent Key backside is contacted to push-button ignition switch.
• The push-button ignition switch operation is input to BCM as a signal. BCM changes the ignition switch position according to the status and operates the following relays to supply power to each power circuit.
- Ignition relay (IPDM E/R)
- Ignition relay [fuse block (J/B)]
- Accessory relay
- Blower relay
• The ignition switch position can be confirmed with the lighting of the LOCK/ACC/ON indicator lamp in the
push-button ignition switch.
BATTERY SAVER SYSTEM
When all the following conditions are met for 60 minutes, the battery saver system will cut off the power supply
(ignition switch position ACC → OFF) to prevent battery discharge.
• The ignition switch is in the ACC position
• All doors are closed
• Selector lever is in the P position
Reset Condition of Battery Saver System
If any of the following conditions are met the battery saver system is released.
• Opening any door
• Operating with door request switch on door lock
• Operating with Intelligent Key on door lock
• Change ignition switch position to ACC position from OFF position by pressing push-button ignition switch.
IGNITION SWITCH POSITION CHANGE TABLE BY PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OPERATION
Refer to SEC-9, "INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM/ENGINE START FUNCTION : System Description".
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-36
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007492105
A
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL BY DTC
BCM performs fail-safe control when any DTC are detected.
B
Display contents of CONSULT
Fail-safe
Cancellation
B2192: ID DISCORD BCM-ECM
Inhibit engine cranking
Erase DTC
B2193: CHAIN OF BCM-ECM
Inhibit engine cranking
Erase DTC
B2195: ANTI-SCANNING
Inhibit engine cranking
Ignition switch ON → OFF
B2196: DONGLE NG
Inhibit engine cranking
Erase DTC
B2198: NATS ANTENNA AMP
Inhibit engine cranking
Erase DTC
B2608: STARTER RELAY
Inhibit engine cranking
500 ms after the following signal communication status becomes consistent
• Starter motor relay control signal
• Starter relay status signal (CAN)
B260F: ENG STATE SIG LOST
Inhibit engine cranking
When any of the following conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch changes to ACC
• Receives engine status signal (CAN)
B26F1: IGN RELAY OFF
Inhibit engine cranking
When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON
G
B26F2: IGN RELAY ON
Inhibit engine cranking
When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF
• Ignition switch ON signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF
H
B26F3: START CONT RLY ON
Inhibit engine cranking
When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): OFF
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): OFF
B26F4: START CONT RLY OFF
Inhibit engine cranking
When the following conditions are fulfilled
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from BCM): ON
• Starter control relay signal (CAN: Transmitted from IPDM E/R): ON
B26F7: BCM
Inhibit engine cranking
by Intelligent Key system
When room antenna and luggage room antenna functions normally
C
D
E
F
I
J
K
REAR WIPER MOTOR PROTECTION
BCM detects the rear wiper stopping position according to the rear wiper stop position signal.
When the rear wiper stop position signal does not change for more than 5 seconds while driving the rear
wiper, BCM stops power supply to protect the rear wiper motor.
Condition of cancellation
1.
2.
3.
PCS
More than 1 minute is passed after the rear wiper stop.
Turn rear wiper switch OFF.
Operate the rear wiper switch or rear washer switch.
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL OF COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION CAUSED BY LOW
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE
If voltage of battery power supply lower, BCM maintains combination switch reading to the status when input
voltage is less than approximately 9 V.
NOTE:
When voltage of battery power supply is approximately 9 V or more, combination switch reading function
returns to normal operation.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-37
L
2012 QUEST
N
O
P
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)
INFOID:0000000007628064
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Diagnosis mode
Function Description
Work Support
Changes the setting for each system function.
Self Diagnostic Result
Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.
CAN Diag Support Monitor
Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
Data Monitor
The BCM input/output signals are displayed.
Active Test
The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Ecu Identification
The BCM part number is displayed.
Configuration
• Read and save the vehicle specification.
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.
SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item
System
Sub system selection item
Diagnosis mode
Work Support
Data Monitor
Active Test
×
Door lock
DOOR LOCK
×
×
Rear window defogger
REAR DEFOGGER
×
×
Warning chime
BUZZER
×
×
Interior room lamp control system
INT LAMP
×
×
×
Exterior lamp
HEAD LAMP
×
×
×
Wiper and washer
WIPER
×
×
×
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps
FLASHER
×
×
×
Air conditioning control system
AIR CONDITONER
×
×*
• Intelligent Key system
• Engine start system
INTELLIGENT KEY
×
×
Combination switch
COMB SW
Body control system
BCM
×
NVIS
IMMU
×
×
×
Interior room lamp battery saver
BATTERY SAVER
×
×
×
Back door open
TRUNK
Vehicle security system
THEFT ALM
RAP system
RETAINED PWR
×
Signal buffer system
SIGNAL BUFFER
×
×
TPMS
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
NOTE:
*: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used.
FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)
The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on
CONSULT.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-38
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
CONSULT screen item
Indication/Unit
Description
Vehicle Speed
km/h
Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Odo/Trip Meter
km
Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Vehicle Condition
SLEEP>LOCK
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)]
SLEEP>OFF
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)]
LOCK>ACC
While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC
ACC>ON
While turning power supply position from ACC to ON
RUN>ACC
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except
emergency stop operation)
CRANK>RUN
While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN
RUN>URGENT
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation)
ACC>OFF
While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF)
OFF>LOCK
OFF>ACC
IGN Counter
A
Power position status of
the moment a particular
DTC is detected*
C
D
E
F
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF
(LOCK)
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC
ON>CRANK
While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK
OFF>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK
Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)
OFF
Power supply position is OFF (OFF)
ACC
Power supply position is ACC
ON
Power supply position is ON
ENGINE RUN
Power supply position is RUN
CRANKING
Power supply position is CRANK
0 - 39
B
G
H
I
J
K
The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected
• The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
• The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition
whenever ignition switch OFF → ON.
• The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
NOTE:
L
PCS
*: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position.
• OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF
• ACC: Ignition switch ACC
N
• IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped
• RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running
• CRANK: At engine cranking
Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P
position, and any of the following conditions are met.
O
• Closing door
P
• Opening door
• Door is locked using door request switch
• Door is locked using Intelligent Key
The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”.
INTELLIGENT KEY
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-39
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)
INFOID:0000000007628065
WORK SUPPORT
Monitor item
Description
INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS
This function allows inside key antenna self-diagnosis
LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY
Door lock/unlock function by door request switch mode can be changed to operation in this
mode
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
ENGINE START BY I-KEY
Engine start function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
TRUNK/GLASS HATCH OPEN
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
PANIC ALARM SET
Panic alarm button pressing time on Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following
with this mode
• MODE 1: 0.5 sec
• MODE 2: Non-operation
• MODE 3: 1.5 sec
TRUNK OPEN DELAY
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN
Intelligent Key low battery warning mode can be changed to operation with this mode
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI
Key reminder function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
HAZARD ANSWER BACK
Hazard reminder function mode by door request switch and Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following with this mode
• Lock Only: Door lock operation only
• Unlock Only: Door unlock operation only
• Lock/Unlock: Lock and unlock operation
• Off: Non-operation
ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK
Buzzer reminder function (lock operation) mode by door request switch can be selected from
the following with this mode
• Horn Chirp: Sound horn
• Buzzer: Sound Intelligent Key warning buzzer
• Off: Non-operation
ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK
Buzzer reminder function (unlock operation) mode by door request switch can be changed to
operation with this mode
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
SHORT CRANKING OUTPUT
Starter motor can operate during the times below
• 70 msec
• 100 msec
• 200 msec
CONFIRM KEY FOB ID
It can be checked whether Intelligent Key ID code is registered or not in this mode
AUTO LOCK SET
Auto door lock operation time can be changed in this mode
• MODE 1: OFF
• MODE 2: 30 sec
• MODE 3: 1 minute
• MODE 4: 2 minutes
• MODE 5: 3 minutes
• MODE 6: 4 minutes
• MODE 7: 5 minutes
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-40
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor item
HORN WITH KEYLESS LOCK
PW DOWN SET
Description
Horn reminder function mode by Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following with
this mode
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Unlock button pressing time on Intelligent Key button can be selected from the following with
this mode
• MODE 1: 3 sec
• MODE 2: Non-operation
• MODE 3: 5 sec
SELF-DIAG RESULT
A
B
C
D
Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
E
Monitor Item
Condition
REQ SW -DR
Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW -AS
Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
REQ SW -BD/TR
Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door request switch
PUSH SW
Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
CLUTCH SW
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
BRAKE SW 1
Indicates [On/Off]* condition of stop lamp switch power supply
BRAKE SW 2
Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop lamp switch
DETE/CANCL SW
Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position
SFT PN/N SW
Indicates [On/Off] condition of P or N position
S/L -LOCK
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
S/L -UNLOCK
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
S/L RELAY -F/B
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
UNLK SEN -DR
Indicates [On/Off] condition of driver door UNLOCK status
PUSH SW -IPDM
Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
IGN RLY1 -F/B
Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition relay 1
DETE SW -IPDM
Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position
SFT PN -IPDM
Indicates [On/Off] condition of P or N position
SFT P -MET
Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position
SFT N -MET
Indicates [On/Off] condition of N position
ENGINE STATE
Indicates [Stop/Stall/Crank/Run] condition of engine states
S/L LOCK-IPDM
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
S/L UNLK-IPDM
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
S/L RELAY-REQ
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
VEH SPEED 1
Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value [km/h]
VEH SPEED 2
Display the vehicle speed signal received from ABS or VDC or TCM by numerical value [km/h]
DOOR STAT-DR
Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of unlock sensor
DOOR STAT-AS
Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of passenger side door status
ID OK FLAG
Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of key ID
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-41
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PCS
N
O
P
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item
Condition
PRMT ENG STRT
Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of engine start possibility
PRMT RKE STRT
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
TRNK/HAT MNTR
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
RKE-LOCK
Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key
RKE-UNLOCK
Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key
RKE-TR/BD
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
RKE-PANIC
Indicates [On/Off] condition of PANIC button of Intelligent Key
RKE-MODE CHG
Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from Intelligent Key
RKE OPE COUN1
When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intelligent Key, the numerical value start changing
RKE OPE COUN2
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
*: OFF is displayed when brake pedal is depressed while brake switch power supply is OFF.
ACTIVE TEST
Test item
Description
BATTERY SAVER
This test is able to check interior room lamp operation
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
OUTSIDE BUZZER
This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
INSIDE BUZZER
This test is able to check warning chime in combination meter operation
• Take Out: Take away warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched
• Key: Key warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched
• Knob: OFF position warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched
• Off: Non-operation
INDICATOR
This test is able to check warning lamp operation
• KEY ON: “KEY” Warning lamp illuminates when CONSULT screen is touched
• KEY IND: “KEY” Warning lamp blinks when CONSULT screen is touched
• Off: Non-operation
INT LAMP
This test is able to check interior room lamp operation
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
LCD
This test is able to check meter display information
• Engine start information displays when “BP N” on CONSULT screen is touched
• Engine start information displays when “BP I” on CONSULT screen is touched
• Key ID warning displays when “ID NG” on CONSULT screen is touched
• ROTAT: This item is displayed, but cannot be used.
• P position warning displays when “SFT P” on CONSULT screen is touched
• INSRT: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
• BATT: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
• Take away through window warning displays when “NO KY” on CONSULT screen is
touched
• Take away warning display when “OUTKEY” on CONSULT screen is touched
• OFF position warning display when “LK WN” on CONSULT screen is touched
FLASHER
This test is able to check hazard warning lamp operation
• LH: LH side hazard warning lamps operate
• RH: RH side hazard warning lamps operate
• Off: Non-operation
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-42
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test item
Description
A
P RANGE
This test is able to check CVT shift selector power supply
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
B
ENGINE SW ILLUMI
This test is able to check push-button ignition switch illumination operation
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check LOCK indicator (push-button ignition switch) operation
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
C
LOCK INDICATOR
ACC INDICATOR
This test is able to check ACC indicator (push-button ignition switch) operation
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
D
IGNITION ON IND
This test is able to check ON indicator (push-button ignition switch) operation
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
E
HORN
This test is able to check horn operation
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
F
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be used
POWER SLIDE DOOR
This test is able to check automatic siding door operation
• RR PSD ON: Auto open/close operate
• RL PSD ON: Auto open/close operate
G
H
I
J
K
L
PCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-43
2012 QUEST
BCM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
BCM
List of ECU Reference
INFOID:0000000007492108
ECU
Reference
BCS-36, "Reference Value"
BCM
BCS-58, "Fail-safe"
BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
BCS-59, "DTC Index"
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-44
2012 QUEST
POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
A
POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007492109
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
B
(option abbreviation; if not
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PCS
N
O
P
JCMWA7673GB
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-45
2012 QUEST
POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
JCMWA7674GB
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-46
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000007628059
B
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PCS
N
O
P
JMKIA8652GB
DETAILED FLOW
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-47
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
1.
2.
Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurs).
Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.)
Erase DTC.
Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 5.
4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" and determine trouble
diagnosis order.
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Check according to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step
4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
Is the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CONSULT.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-48
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the system.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Check according to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
A
8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
2.
3.
B
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair and replacement.
Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it.
C
D
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the
malfunction is repaired securely.
When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the
symptom is not detected.
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 7.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4.
NO
>> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC.
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-49
2012 QUEST
B2614 ACC RELAY CIRCUIT
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
B2614 ACC RELAY CIRCUIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492111
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
B2614
Trouble diagnosis
name
BCM
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
The following status are compared, and it does not
agree for 1 second or more.
• State of accessory relay control judgment in BCM
• State of accessory relay control signal
• Harness or connectors (Accessory
relay control signal circuit)
• BCM
• Accessory relay
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch to ACC, and wait for 1 second or more.
2. Check “Self-diagnosis result” of BCM with CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to PCS-50, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492112
1.CHECK ACCESSORY RELAY CONTROL SIGNAL
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
(+)
BCM
(–)
Connector
Terminal
M124
96
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Ignition switch
OFF
0 - 0.5
ACC or ON
9 - 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ACCESSORY RELAY CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and accessory relay.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and accessory relay harness connector.
BCM
4.
Accessory relay
Connector
Terminal
Terminal
M124
96
Coil upstream side
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M124
96
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-50
2012 QUEST
B2614 ACC RELAY CIRCUIT
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
3.CHECK ACCESSORY RELAY
A
Refer to PCS-51, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace accessory relay.
Component Inspection
B
INFOID:0000000007492113
C
1.CHECK ACCESSORY RELAY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove accessory relay.
Check the continuity between accessory relay terminals.
Terminals
3 and 5
Condition
Continuity
12 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2
Existed
No current supply
D
E
Not existed
F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace accessory relay
G
PBIB0098E
H
I
J
K
L
PCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-51
2012 QUEST
B2615 BLOWER RELAY CIRCUIT
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B2615 BLOWER RELAY CIRCUIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492114
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
B2616
Trouble diagnosis
name
BCM
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
The following status are compared, and it does not
agree for 1 second or more.
• State of blower relay control judgment in BCM
• State of blower relay control signal
• Harness or connectors (Blower relay control signal circuit)
• BCM
• Blower relay
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 1 second or more.
2. Check “Self-diagnosis result” with CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to PCS-54, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492115
1.CHECK BLOWER RELAY CONTROL SIGNAL
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
(+)
BCM
(–)
Connector
Terminal
M124
106
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Ignition switch
OFF or ACC
0 - 0.5
ON
9 - 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BLOWER RELAY CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and blower relay.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and blower relay harness connector.
BCM
4.
Blower relay
Connector
Terminal
Terminal
M124
106
Coil upstream side
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M124
106
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK BLOWER RELAY
Refer to PCS-51, "Component Inspection".
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-52
2012 QUEST
B2615 BLOWER RELAY CIRCUIT
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace blower relay.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007492116
A
B
1.CHECK BLOWER RELAY
1.
2.
3.
Turn blower switch OFF.
Remove blower relay.
Check the continuity between blower relay terminals.
Terminals
3 and 5
C
Condition
Continuity
12 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2
Existed
No current supply
D
E
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace blower relay
F
PBIB0098E
G
H
I
J
K
L
PCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-53
2012 QUEST
B2616 IGNITION RELAY CIRCUIT
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B2616 IGNITION RELAY CIRCUIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492117
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC No.
B2616
Trouble diagnosis
name
BCM
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
The following status are compared, and it does not
agree for 1 second or more.
• State of ignition relay (fuse block) control judgment in BCM
• State of ignition relay (fuse block) control signal
• Harness or connectors [Ignition relay (fuse block) control signal circuit]
• BCM
• Ignition relay (fuse block)
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 1 second or more.
2. Check “Self-diagnosis result” with CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to PCS-54, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492118
1.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (FUSE BLOCK) CONTROL SIGNAL
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
(+)
BCM
(–)
Connector
Terminal
M124
99
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Ignition switch
OFF or ACC
0 - 0.5
ON
9 - 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (FUSE BLOCK) CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and ignition relay (fuse block).
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ignition relay (fuse block) harness connector.
BCM
4.
Ignition relay (fuse block)
Connector
Terminal
Terminal
M124
99
Coil upstream side
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M124
99
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (FUSE BLOCK)
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-54
2012 QUEST
B2616 IGNITION RELAY CIRCUIT
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Refer to PCS-51, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace ignition relay (fuse block).
B
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007492119
1.CHECK IGNITION RELAY
1.
2.
3.
C
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Remove ignition relay.
Check the continuity between ignition relay terminals.
Terminals
3 and 5
D
Condition
Continuity
12 V direct current supply between terminals 1 and 2
Existed
No current supply
A
E
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace ignition relay
F
PBIB0098E
G
H
I
J
K
L
PCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-55
2012 QUEST
B2618 BCM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B2618 BCM
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492120
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC No.
B2618
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
The following status are compared, and it does not agree for 1
second or more.
• State of ignition relay (IPDM E/R) control judgment in BCM
• State of ignition relay (IPDM E/R) control signal
BCM
• Harness or connectors
[Ignition relay (IPDM E/R)
control signal circuit]
• BCM
• IPDM E/R
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 1 second or more.
2. Check “Self-diagnosis result” of BCM with CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to PCS-56, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492121
1.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (IPDM E/R) CONTROL SIGNAL
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
(+)
BCM
(–)
Connector
Terminal
M124
98
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Ground
Ignition switch
OFF or ACC
9 - 16
ON
0 - 0.5
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (IPDM E/R) CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector and IPDM E/R.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
BCM
4.
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M124
98
E10
27
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M124
98
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK VOLTAGE OF IGNITION RELAY (IPDM E/R) CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT (IPDM E/R SIDE)
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-56
2012 QUEST
B2618 BCM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Connect IPDM E/R connector.
2. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
A
(+)
IPDM E/R
(–)
Connector
Terminal
E10
27
Ground
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Ignition switch
OFF
B
9 - 16
C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-57
2012 QUEST
B261A PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B261A PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492122
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
PUSH-BTN IGN SW
The following signal status that BCM receives are
compared, and it does not agree for 1 second or
more.
• Push-button Ignition switch (push switch) signal
• Push-button Ignition switch (push switch) status
signal (CAN)
• Harness or connectors
[Push-button Ignition switch (push
switch) circuit]
• BCM
• IPDM E/R
DTC No.
B261A
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.
Press push-button ignition switch (push switch) under the following conditions, and wait for 1 second or
more.
Shift position is in the P position
Do not depress brake pedal
2. Check “Self-diagnosis result” of BCM with CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to PCS-58, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492123
1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (PUSH SWITCH) OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector and IPDM E/R connector.
Check voltage between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
(–)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ground
9 - 16
Push-button Ignition switch
Connector
Terminal
M101
4
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (BCM)
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and push-button ignition switch harness connector.
BCM
3.
Push-button Ignition switch
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M124
76
M101
4
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground.
Push-button Ignition switch
Connector
Terminal
M101
4
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-58
2012 QUEST
B261A PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (PUSH SWITCH) OUTPUT SIGNAL (IPDM E/R)
A
Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
B
(+)
IPDM E/R
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
(–)
Connector
Terminal
E10
28
C
Ground
9 - 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
D
4.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (PUSH SWITCH) CIRCUIT (IPDM E/R)
1.
2.
IPDM E/R
3.
E
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and push-button ignition switch harness connector.
Push-button Ignition switch
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
E10
28
M101
4
F
Continuity
G
Existed
Check continuity between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground.
H
Push-button Ignition switch
Connector
Terminal
M101
4
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
I
J
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
K
>> INSPECTION END
L
PCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-59
2012 QUEST
B26F1 IGNITION RELAY
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B26F1 IGNITION RELAY
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492124
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC No.
B26F1
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
(Ignition relay circuit is open)
• BCM
• IPDM E/R
BCM transmits the ignition relay control signal
(ON: 0 V) or ignition switch ON signal (ON)
(CAN), but does not receives ignition switch
ON signal (ON) (CAN) from IPDM E/R.
IGN RELAY OFF
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check “Self-diagnosis result” with CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to PCS-60, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492125
1.CHECK IPDM E/R SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase the DTC of IPDM E/R.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and check the DTC again.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Refer to PCS-24, "DTC Index".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (IPDM E/R) CONTROL SIGNAL
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
(+)
BCM
(–)
Connector
Terminal
M124
98
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Condition
Ground
Ignition switch
ON
0 - 0.5
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
3.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (IPDM E/R) CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM and IPDM connectors.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
BCM
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M124
98
E10
27
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-60
2012 QUEST
B26F2 IGNITION RELAY
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B26F2 IGNITION RELAY
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492126
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
B
Trouble diagnosis
name
DTC No.
B26F2
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
• Harness or connectors
(Ignition relay circuit is short)
• BCM
• IPDM E/R
BCM transmits the ignition relay control signal
(OFF: 12 V) or ignition switch ON signal (OFF)
(CAN), but does not receives ignition switch
ON signal (OFF) (CAN) from IPDM E/R.
IGN RELAY ON
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
E
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 2 seconds or more.
2. Check “Self-diagnosis result” with CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to PCS-61, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
F
G
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492127
1.CHECK IPDM E/R SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
H
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Erase the DTC of IPDM E/R.
3. Turn ignition switch OFF.
4. Turn ignition switch ON and check the DTC again.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning part. Refer to PCS-24, "DTC Index".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
I
J
2.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (IPDM E/R) CONTROL SIGNAL
1.
2.
K
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
L
(+)
IPDM E/R
(–)
Connector
Terminal
E10
27
Condition
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
PCS
Ground
Ignition switch
OFF or ACC
6 - 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
N
3.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (IPDM E/R) CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT - 1
1.
2.
3.
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM and IPDM E/R connectors.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
P
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
E10
27
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-61
2012 QUEST
B26F2 IGNITION RELAY
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
4.CHECK IGNITION RELAY (IPDM E/R) CONTROL SIGNAL CIRCUIT - 2
1.
2.
Connect IPDM E/R connectors.
Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
(+)
IPDM E/R
(–)
Connector
Terminal
E10
27
Condition
Ground
Ignition switch
OFF or ACC
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
6 - 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-62
2012 QUEST
B26F6 BCM
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B26F6 BCM
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492128
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
B
NOTE:
• If DTC B26F6 is displayed with DTC U1000, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000. Refer to
BCS-71, "DTC Logic".
• If DTC B26F6 is displayed with DTC U1010, first perform the trouble diagnosis for DTC U1010. Refer to
BCS-72, "DTC Logic".
C
DTC No.
B26F6
D
Trouble diagnosis
name
BCM
DTC detecting condition
Ignition switch ON signal (CAN) (ON) is not transmitted
from IPDM E/R, when BCM turns ignition relay ON
[Transmit ignition switch ON signal (CAN) (ON)].
Possible cause
E
BCM
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
F
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Turn ignition switch ON, and wait for 0.5 seconds or more.
2. Check “Self-diagnosis result” of BCM with CONSULT.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Go to PCS-63, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
G
H
INFOID:0000000007492129
1.INSPECTION START
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
J
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “Self-diagnosis result” of BCM with CONSULT.
Touch “ERASE”.
Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure.
See PCS-63, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation"
NO
>> INSPECTION END
K
L
PCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-63
2012 QUEST
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492130
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
Select “PUSH SW” in “Data Monitor” mode with CONSULT.
Check the push-button ignition switch signal under the following conditions.
Test item
Condition
PUSH SW
Status
Push-button ignition switch is pressed
ON
Push-button ignition switch is not pressed
OFF
Is the indication normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END.
NO
>> Go to PCS-64, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492131
1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL 1
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector and IPDM E/R connector.
Check voltage between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
(–)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ground
9 -16
Push-button ignition switch
Connector
Terminal
M101
4
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT 1
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and push-button ignition switch harness connector.
BCM
3.
Push-button ignition switch
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M124
76
M101
4
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M124
76
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL 2
Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-64
2012 QUEST
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
(+)
A
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
E10
28
(–)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ground
9 - 16
B
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
C
4.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT 2
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and push-button ignition switch harness connector.
D
E
IPDM E/R
3.
Push-button ignition switch
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
E10
28
M101
4
Continuity
Existed
F
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
G
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
E10
28
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
I
5.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground.
Push-button ignition switch
Connector
Terminal
M101
1
Ground
H
J
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
K
L
6.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
PCS
Refer to PCS-65, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Replace push-button ignition switch.
N
7.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
O
>> INSPECTION END
P
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007492132
1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector.
Check continuity between push-button ignition switch terminals.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-65
2012 QUEST
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Push-button ignition switch
Terminal
4
1
Condition
Continuity
Pressed
Existed
Not pressed
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace push-button ignition switch.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-66
2012 QUEST
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR
A
Description
INFOID:0000000007492133
Push-button ignition switch changes the power supply position.
BCM maintains the power supply position status.
BCM changes the power supply position with the operation of the push-button ignition switch.
Component Function Check
B
INFOID:0000000007492134
C
Check push-button ignition switch (“LOCK INDICATOR”, “ACC INDICATOR” and “IGNITION ON IND”) in
Active Test of BCM with CONSULT.
D
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Test item
Description
ON
LOCK INDICATOR
ACC INDICATOR
IGNITION ON IND
OFF
E
Illuminates
Position indicator
Does not illuminate
F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END.
NO
>> Refer to PCS-67, "Diagnosis Procedure".
G
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492135
1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
H
1.
2.
3.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector.
Check voltage between push-button ignition switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Push-button ignition switch
Connector
Terminal
M101
8
(–)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Ground
Battery voltage
Is the inspection normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-1 >> Check 10 A fuse [No.10, located in fuse block (J/B)].
NO-2 >> Check harness for open or short between push-button ignition switch and fuse.
J
K
L
2.CHECK BCM INPUT
1.
2.
3.
PCS
Connect push-button ignition switch connector.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check voltage between BCM connector and ground.
N
(+)
BCM
Connector
(–)
Voltage (V)
(Approx.)
Terminal
O
73
M124
91
Ground
Battery voltage
109
Is the inspection normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
Disconnect push-button ignition switch connector.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-67
2012 QUEST
P
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and push-button ignition switch harness connector.
Indicator
BCM
Connector
LOCK
ACC
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
91
M124
Continuity
5
109
ON
3.
Push-button ignition switch
M101
6
73
Existed
7
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
Indicator
BCM
Connector
LOCK
ACC
91
M124
ON
Continuity
Terminal
109
Ground
Not existed
73
Is the inspection normal?
YES >> Replace push-button ignition switch.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-68
2012 QUEST
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
A
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE
Description
INFOID:0000000007492136
Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in “Conditions of vehicle” before starting diagnosis, and check
each symptom.
NOTE:
The engine start function, door lock function, power distribution system, and NATS-IVIS/NVIS in the Intelligent
Key system are closely related to each other regarding control. The vehicle security function can operate only
when the door lock and power distribution system are operating normally.
B
C
D
Conditions of Vehicle (Operating Conditions)
• “ENGINE START BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT” is ON when setting on CONSULT.
• One or more of Intelligent Keys with registered Intelligent Key ID is in the vehicle.
Diagnosis Procedure
E
INFOID:0000000007492137
1.PERFORM WORK SUPPORT
F
Perform “INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS” on Work Support of “INTELLIGENT KEY”.
Refer to DLK-95, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
G
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULT
H
Perform Self-Diagnosis Result of “BCM”.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index".
NO
>> GO TO 3.
I
3.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
J
Check push-button ignition switch.
Refer to PCS-64, "Component Function Check".
Is the operation normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
K
4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
L
Confirm the operation again.
Is the inspection normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
PCS
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-69
2012 QUEST
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
[POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
Description
INFOID:0000000007492138
• Before performing the diagnosis in the following table, check “Work Flow”. Refer to PCS-47, "Work Flow".
• Check that vehicle is under the condition shown in “Conditions of vehicle” before starting diagnosis, and
check each symptom.
Conditions of Vehicle (Operating Conditions)
• “ENGINE START BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT” is ON when setting on CONSULT.
• One or more of Intelligent Keys with registered Intelligent Key ID is in the vehicle.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492139
1.CHECK PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH INDICATOR
Check push-button ignition switch indicator.
Refer to PCS-67, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
PCS-70
2012 QUEST
BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY
SECTION
PWC
POWER WINDOW CONTROL SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH
Reference Value ......................................................20
Fail-safe ...................................................................21
PRECAUTION ............................................... 6
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 6
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 6
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 7
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 7
Component Parts Location ...................................... 7
Power Window Main Switch ...................................... 8
Front Power Window Motor (Driver Side) ................. 8
Sliding Door Power Window Switch .......................... 8
Sliding Door Power Window Motor ........................... 8
SYSTEM .............................................................. 9
System Description ................................................... 9
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 11
Fail-safe .................................................................. 11
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................13
COMMON ITEM ......................................................... 13
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) ..................................................... 13
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 22
Wiring Diagram ........................................................22
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 24
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 24
I
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL ................... 25
J
Description ...............................................................25
Work Procedure .......................................................25
PWC
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
POWER WINDOW SWITCH ............................. 26
Description ...............................................................26
Work Procedure .......................................................26
Description ...............................................................27
Work Procedure .......................................................27
Description ...............................................................28
Work Procedure .......................................................28
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ...................16
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ............................29
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis
Procedure ................................................................29
Revision: 2011 September
M
CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION ..................... 28
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 29
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH .................20
L
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION ................................ 27
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 16
Reference Value ..................................................... 17
Fail-safe .................................................................. 18
H
Work Flow ................................................................24
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 29
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ....................17
G
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM ............................. 22
RETAIND PWR .......................................................... 14
RETAIND PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM - RETAINED PWR) ........................................................ 15
List of ECU Reference ............................................ 16
F
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) .................................................................29
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure ..........................30
PWC-1
2012 QUEST
N
O
P
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH .......... 30
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH :
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 30
DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT
OPERATE .......................................................... 48
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH... 32
FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE ............................ 49
Component Function Check ................................... 32
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 32
Component Inspection ............................................ 33
POWER WINDOW MOTOR ............................... 34
DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 34
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ......... 34
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 34
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 34
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check
... 35
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 35
SLIDING DOOR LH ................................................... 35
SLIDING DOOR LH : Component Function Check... 36
SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 36
SLIDING DOOR RH .................................................. 36
SLIDING DOOR RH : Component Function Check
... 36
SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 37
ENCODER CIRCUIT .......................................... 38
DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 38
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ......... 38
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 38
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 40
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check
... 40
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 40
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH ...................... 43
Component Function Check ................................... 43
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 43
Component Inspection ............................................ 44
POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK ..................... 45
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ........................... 45
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis
Procedure ............................................................... 45
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) ................................................................ 46
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 46
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 47
NONE OF THE POWER WINDOWS CAN BE
OPERATED USING ANY SWITCH ................... 47
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 47
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 48
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
AND FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH ARE
OPERATED ............................................................... 49
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
AND FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH ARE
OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 49
WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED ................................ 49
WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH
(PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED : Diagnosis
Procedure ............................................................... 49
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED .................................................................... 49
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ............................. 49
SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW DOES
NOT OPERATE ................................................. 50
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING
DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE
OPERATED ............................................................... 50
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING
DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE
OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 50
WHEN SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW
SWITCH IS OPERATED ........................................... 50
WHEN SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW
SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ... 50
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED .................................................................... 50
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ............................. 51
SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW DOES
NOT OPERATE ................................................. 52
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING
DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE
OPERATED ............................................................... 52
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING
DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE
OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 52
WHEN SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW
SWITCH IS OPERATED ........................................... 52
WHEN SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW
SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ... 52
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED .................................................................... 52
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-2
2012 QUEST
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ............................. 53
AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
BUT MANUAL OPERATE NORMALLY ............54
DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 54
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 54
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 54
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 54
ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE
NORMALLY (FRONT SIDE) ..............................55
DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 55
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 55
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 55
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 55
POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER
FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE NORMALLY .......................................................................56
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 56
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH DOES NOT
OPERATE POWER WINDOWS .........................57
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 57
KEYLESS POWER WINDOW DOWN DOES
NOT OPERATE ..................................................58
PRECAUTIONS ................................................. 63
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" .................................................................63
A
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 64
B
COMPONENT PARTS ...................................... 64
Component Parts Location ....................................64
Power Window Main Switch ....................................65
Front Power Window Motor (Driver Side) ................65
Sliding Door Power Window Switch ........................65
Sliding Door Power Window Motor ..........................65
System Description ..................................................66
Circuit Diagram ........................................................68
Fail-safe ...................................................................68
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ........................... 70
RETAIND PWR ..........................................................71
RETAIND PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM - RETAINED PWR) .........................................................72
H
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 73
I
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ................. 73
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ................... 74
Reference Value ......................................................74
Fail-safe ...................................................................75
POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION
DOES NOT ILLUMINATE ..................................60
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 76
DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 60
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 60
Wiring Diagram ........................................................76
SLIDING DOOR RH ................................................... 60
SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 60
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 61
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ....................61
Removal and Installation ......................................... 61
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH....62
Removal and Installation ......................................... 62
PRECAUTION .............................................. 63
Revision: 2011 September
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM ............................. 76
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 77
J
PWC
L
M
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 77
Work Flow ................................................................77
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING
BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL ................... 78
Description ...............................................................78
Work Procedure .......................................................78
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ................... 79
Description ...............................................................79
Work Procedure .......................................................79
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION ................................ 80
Description ...............................................................80
Work Procedure .......................................................80
DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH
F
G
POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES
NOT FUNCTION .................................................59
SLIDING DOOR LH ................................................... 60
SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 60
E
COMMON ITEM .........................................................70
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) .....................................................70
List of ECU Reference .............................................73
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 60
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 60
D
SYSTEM ............................................................ 66
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 58
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 59
C
CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION ..................... 81
PWC-3
2012 QUEST
N
O
P
Description .............................................................. 81
Work Procedure ...................................................... 81
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 82
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT ..... 82
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ........................... 82
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis
Procedure ............................................................... 82
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) ................................................................ 82
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 83
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH .......... 83
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH :
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 83
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) .................................................. 85
Component Function Check ................................... 85
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 85
Component Inspection ............................................ 86
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH... 87
Component Function Check ................................... 87
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 87
Component Inspection ............................................ 88
POWER WINDOW MOTOR ............................... 89
DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 89
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ......... 89
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 89
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 89
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check
... 90
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 90
SLIDING DOOR LH ................................................... 90
SLIDING DOOR LH : Component Function Check... 91
SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 91
SLIDING DOOR RH .................................................. 91
SLIDING DOOR RH : Component Function Check
... 91
SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ........... 92
ENCODER CIRCUIT .......................................... 93
Component Function Check ................................... 93
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 93
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 96
NONE OF THE POWER WINDOWS CAN BE
OPERATED USING ANY SWITCH ................... 96
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 96
DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT
OPERATE .......................................................... 97
Revision: 2011 September
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 97
FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE ............................ 98
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
AND FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH ARE
OPERATED ............................................................... 98
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
AND FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH ARE
OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ........................ 98
WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED ................................ 98
WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH
(PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED : Diagnosis
Procedure ............................................................... 98
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED .................................................................... 98
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ............................. 99
SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW DOES
NOT OPERATE ................................................ 100
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING
DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE
OPERATED ............................................................. 100
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING
DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE
OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 100
WHEN SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW
SWITCH IS OPERATED ......................................... 100
WHEN SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW
SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure . 100
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED .................................................................. 100
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 101
SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW DOES
NOT OPERATE ................................................ 102
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING
DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE
OPERATED ............................................................. 102
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING
DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCHES ARE
OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ...................... 102
WHEN SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW
SWITCH IS OPERATED ......................................... 102
WHEN SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW
SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure . 102
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED .................................................................. 102
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 103
PWC-4
2012 QUEST
AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
BUT MANUAL OPERATE NORMALLY
(DRIVER SIDE) ................................................. 104
DRIVER SIDE ........................................................... 108
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ................... 108
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 104
PASSENGER SIDE .................................................. 108
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 108
ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE
NORMALLY (DRIVER SIDE) ........................... 105
SLIDING DOOR LH ................................................. 108
SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 108
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 105
POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
.. 106
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 106
POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES
NOT FUNCTION ............................................... 107
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 107
A
B
SLIDING DOOR RH ................................................. 108
SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 108
C
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 109
D
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH ................. 109
Removal and Installation ....................................... 109
E
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH . 110
Removal and Installation ....................................... 110
POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION
DOES NOT ILLUMINATE ................................ 108
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-5
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000007495572
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-6
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007495573
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
JMKIA8162GB
A.
View with front door finisher removed B.
No.
View with sliding door finisher removed
Component
O
Function
P
1.
BCM
• Supplies power supply to power window switch.
• Controls retained power.
• Receives key ID signal from remote keyless entry receiver.
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location"
for detailed installation location.
2.
Power window main switch
Refer to PWC-8, "Power Window Main Switch".
3.
Front power window motor (driver side)
Refer to PWC-8, "Front Power Window Motor (Driver Side)".
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-7
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.
Component
Function
4.
Front door switch (driver side)
Detects door open/close condition and transmits to BCM. Refer to DLK-28,
"Front Door Switch".
5.
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (key
cylinder switch)
Transmits operation condition of key cylinder switch to power window main
switch. Refer to DLK-28, "Front Door Lock Assembly (Driver Side)".
6.
Sliding door power window switch LH
Refer to PWC-8, "Sliding Door Power Window Switch".
7.
Sliding door power window motor LH
Refer to PWC-8, "Sliding Door Power Window Motor".
8.
Remote keyless entry receiver
Receives key ID signal from the Intelligent Key, and then transmits to BCM.
Refer to DLK-18, "DOOR LOCK SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for
detailed installation location.
Power Window Main Switch
INFOID:0000000007836948
• Directly controls all power window motor of all doors.
• Controls anti-pinch operation of power window.
Front Power Window Motor (Driver Side)
INFOID:0000000007836951
• Integrates the encoder and power window motor.
• Operates with signals from power window main switch.
• Transmits front power window motor (driver side) rotation as a pulse signal to power window main switch.
Sliding Door Power Window Switch
INFOID:0000000007836950
Controls power window motor of sliding door.
Sliding Door Power Window Motor
INFOID:0000000007836952
Operates with signals from power window main switch and sliding door power window switch.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-8
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
A
System Description
INFOID:0000000007495574
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
JMKIA7861GB
PWC
DESCRIPTION
• Power window system is activated by power window switch when ignition switch turns ON, or during the
retained power operation after ignition switch turns OFF.
• Power window main switch opens/closes all door glass.
• Front and sliding door power window switch opens/closes the corresponding door glass.
• AUTO UP/DOWN operation can be performed when power window main switch or front power window
switch (passenger side) turns to AUTO.
• Power window serial link transmits the signals from power window main switch to front power window switch
(passenger side).
• Power window lock switch can lock all power windows other than driver seat.
• If door glass receives resistance that is the specified value or more while power window of front seat is in
AUTO-UP operation, power window of front seat operates in the reverse direction.
• Hold the door key cylinder to the LOCK or UNLOCK direction for 1.5 seconds or more to OPEN or CLOSE
front power windows when ignition switch OFF.
• Front power windows open when pressing Intelligent Key unlock button for 3 seconds.
Power Window AUTO-Operation
• AUTO UP/DOWN operation can be performed when power window main switch or front power window
switch (passenger side) turns to AUTO.
• Encoder continues detecting the movement of power window motor and transmits the encoder pulse signal
to power window switch while power window motor is operating.
• Power window switch reads the changes of encoder signal and stops AUTO operation when door glass is at
the fully opened/closed position.
• Power window motor is operable if encoder is malfunctioning.
Retained Power Operation
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-9
2012 QUEST
L
M
N
O
P
SYSTEM
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Retained power operation is an additional power supply function that enables power window system to operate during the 45 seconds even when ignition switch is turned OFF.
Retained Power Cancel Conditions
• Front door CLOSE (door switch OFF)→OPEN (door switch ON).
• When ignition switch is ON.
• When timer time passes (45 seconds).
Power Window Lock Function
Ground circuit inside power window main switch shuts off when power window lock switch is ON. This inhibits
each power window switch operation except the power window main switch.
Power Window Serial Link
• Power window main switch, front power window switch (passenger side), and BCM transmit and receive the
signal by power window serial link.
• Power window serial link transmits the power window main switch operation signals and retained power signal to power window main switch module and front power window switch (passenger side) module.
Anti-Pinch Operation
• Pinch foreign matter in the door glass during AUTO-UP operation, and it is the anti-pinch function that lowers
the door glass 150 mm (5.9 in) or for 2 seconds when detected.
• Encoder continues detecting the movement of power window motor and transmits to power window switch
as the encoder pulse signal while power window motor is operating.
• Resistance is applied to the power window motor rotation that changes the frequency of encoder pulse signal if foreign material is trapped in the door glass.
• Power window switch controls to lower the door glass for 150 mm (5.9 in) after it detects encoder pulse signal frequency change.
Operation Condition
When front door glass AUTO-UP operation is performed (anti-pinch function does not operate just before the
door glass closes and is fully closed).
NOTE:
Depending on environment and driving conditions, if a similar impact or load is applied to the door glass, it
may lower.
Door Key Cylinder Switch Operation
Hold the door key cylinder to the LOCK or UNLOCK direction for 1.5 seconds or more to OPEN or CLOSE
front power windows when ignition switch is OFF. In addition, it stops when key position is moved to NEUTRAL when operating.
Operation Conditions
• Ignition switch OFF.
• Hold door key cylinder to LOCK position for 1.5 seconds or more to perform CLOSE operation of the door
glass.
• Hold door key cylinder to UNLOCK position for 1.5 seconds or more to perform OPEN operation of the door
glass.
Keyless Power Window Down Operation
Front power windows open when the unlock button on Intelligent Key is activated and kept pressed for more
than 3 seconds with the ignition switch OFF. The windows keep opening if the unlock button is continuously
pressed.
The power window opening stops when the following operations are performed.
• When the unlock button is kept pressed more than 15 seconds.
• When the ignition switch is turned ON while the power window opening is operated.
• When the unlock button is released.
While retained power operation activate, keyless power window down function cannot be operated.
Keyless power window down operation mode can be changed by “PW DOWN SET” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-95, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-10
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000007495575
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
JMKIA7968GB
Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007495576
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL
Switches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal that detects up/down speed and
direction of door glass. Switches to fail-safe control when error beyond regulation value is detected between
the fully closed position and the actual position of the glass.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-11
2012 QUEST
P
SYSTEM
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Error
Error condition
Pulse sensor malfunction
When only one side of pulse signal is being detected for more than the specified value.
Both pulse sensors malfunction
When both pulse signals have not been detected for more than the specified value during glass
open/close operation.
Pulse direction malfunction
When the pulse signal that is detected during glass open/close operation detects the opposite condition of power window motor operating direction.
Glass recognition position
malfunction 1
When it detects the error between glass fully closed position in power window switch memory and
actual fully closed position during glass open/close operation is more than the specified value.
Glass recognition position
malfunction 2
When it detects pulse count more than the value of glass full stroke during glass open/close operation.
It changes to condition before initialization and the following functions do not operate when switched to failsafe control.
• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
Perform initial operation to recover when switched to fail-safe mode. However, it switches back to fail-safe
control when malfunction is found in power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger
side) front power window motor (driver side/passenger side).
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-12
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
A
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)
INFOID:0000000007829619
B
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
C
Diagnosis mode
Function Description
Work Support
Changes the setting for each system function.
Self Diagnostic Result
Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.
D
CAN Diag Support Monitor
Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
Data Monitor
The BCM input/output signals are displayed.
Active Test
The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Ecu Identification
The BCM part number is displayed.
Configuration
• Read and save the vehicle specification.
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.
E
F
SYSTEM APPLICATION
G
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item
System
Sub system selection item
Diagnosis mode
Work Support
Data Monitor
Active Test
×
×
×
Door lock
DOOR LOCK
Rear window defogger
REAR DEFOGGER
×
×
Warning chime
BUZZER
×
×
Interior room lamp control system
INT LAMP
×
×
×
Exterior lamp
HEAD LAMP
×
×
×
Wiper and washer
WIPER
×
×
×
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps
FLASHER
×
×
×
Air conditioning control system
AIR CONDITONER
×
×*
• Intelligent Key system
• Engine start system
INTELLIGENT KEY
×
×
Combination switch
COMB SW
Body control system
BCM
×
NVIS
IMMU
×
×
×
Interior room lamp battery saver
BATTERY SAVER
×
×
×
Back door open
TRUNK
Vehicle security system
THEFT ALM
RAP system
RETAINED PWR
×
Signal buffer system
SIGNAL BUFFER
×
×
TPMS
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR
×
×
×
×
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
×
×
×
×
×
NOTE:
*: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used.
FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)
The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on
CONSULT.
Revision: 2011 September
H
PWC-13
2012 QUEST
O
P
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
CONSULT screen item
Indication/Unit
Description
Vehicle Speed
km/h
Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Odo/Trip Meter
km
Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Vehicle Condition
SLEEP>LOCK
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)]
SLEEP>OFF
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)]
LOCK>ACC
While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC
ACC>ON
While turning power supply position from ACC to ON
RUN>ACC
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except
emergency stop operation)
CRANK>RUN
While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN
RUN>URGENT
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation)
ACC>OFF
While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF)
OFF>LOCK
OFF>ACC
IGN Counter
Power position status of
the moment a particular
DTC is detected*
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF
(LOCK)
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC
ON>CRANK
While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK
OFF>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK
Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)
OFF
Power supply position is OFF (OFF)
ACC
Power supply position is ACC
ON
Power supply position is ON
ENGINE RUN
Power supply position is RUN
CRANKING
Power supply position is CRANK
0 - 39
The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected
• The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
• The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition
whenever ignition switch OFF → ON.
• The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
NOTE:
*: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position.
• OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF
• ACC: Ignition switch ACC
• IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped
• RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running
• CRANK: At engine cranking
Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P
position, and any of the following conditions are met.
• Closing door
• Opening door
• Door is locked using door request switch
• Door is locked using Intelligent Key
The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”.
RETAIND PWR
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-14
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
RETAIND PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM - RETAINED PWR)
INFOID:0000000007495578
A
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item
B
Description
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of driver side door switch.
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of passenger side door switch.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-15
2012 QUEST
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
List of ECU Reference
INFOID:0000000007495579
ECU
Reference
BCS-36, "Reference Value"
BCM
BCS-58, "Fail-safe"
BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
BCS-59, "DTC Index"
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-16
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
A
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000007495580
TERMINAL LAYOUT
B
C
D
JMKIA5358ZZ
E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal No.
(wire color)
Description
+
-
Signal name
Input/
Output
1
(O)
Ground
Sliding door power window motor LH UP signal
Output
2
(W)
Ground
Encoder ground
3
(BR)
Ground
Sliding door power window motor LH DOWN signal
4
(P)
Ground
Door key cylinder switch
LOCK signal
5
(SB)
Ground
Sliding door power window motor RH DOWN signal
6
(GR)
Ground
Door key cylinder switch
UNLOCK signal
Ground
Sliding door power window motor RH UP signal
Ground
Front power window motor
(driver side) UP signal
7
(P)
8
(L)
Condition
Voltage (V)
G
When sliding door LH switch
in power window main
switch is in UP operation.
9 – 16
—
—
0 – 1
Output
When sliding door LH switch
in power window main
switch is in DOWN operation.
Input
Output
Input
Key position
(Neutral → Locked)
When sliding door RH
switch in power window
main switch is in DOWN operation.
Key position
(Neutral → Unlocked)
H
I
9 – 16
J
4 – 6 → 0 – 1.5
PWC
9 – 16
4 – 6 → 0 – 1.5
Output
When sliding door RH
switch in power window
main switch is in UP operation.
9 – 16
Output
When front LH switch in
power window main switch
is
in UP operation.
9 – 16
L
M
N
O
9
(SB)
Ground
Encoder pulse signal 2
Input
When power window motor
operates.
P
JMKIA0070GB
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-17
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(wire color)
+
10
(V)
Description
-
Ground
Signal name
Retained power signal
11
(LG)
Ground
Front power window motor
(driver side) DOWN signal
13
(Y)
Ground
Encoder pulse signal 1
Condition
Input/
Output
Voltage (V)
Ignition switch ON
9 – 16
Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF.
9 – 16
When driver side or passenger side door is opened during retained power
operation.
0 – 1
Output
When front LH switch in
power window main switch
is
in DOWN operation.
9 – 16
Input
When power window motor
operates.
Input
JMKIA0070GB
14
(BR)
Ground
Power window serial link
Input/
Output
Ignition switch ON or power
window timer operating.
JPMIA0013GB
15
(R)
Ground
Encoder power supply
17
(B)
Ground
Ground
19
(LG)
Ground
Battery power supply
Output
When ignition switch ON or
power window timer operates.
9 – 16
—
—
0 – 1
Input
—
9 – 16
Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007495581
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL
Switches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal that detects up/down speed and
direction of door glass. Switches to fail-safe control when error beyond regulation value is detected between
the fully closed position and the actual position of the glass.
Error
Error condition
Pulse sensor malfunction
When only one side of pulse signal is being detected for more than the specified value.
Both pulse sensors malfunction
When both pulse signals have not been detected for more than the specified value during glass
open/close operation.
Pulse direction malfunction
When the pulse signal that is detected during glass open/close operation detects the opposite condition of power window motor operating direction.
Glass recognition position
malfunction 1
When it detects the error between glass fully closed position in power window switch memory and
actual fully closed position during glass open/close operation is more than the specified value.
Glass recognition position
malfunction 2
When it detects pulse count more than the value of glass full stroke during glass open/close operation.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-18
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
It changes to condition before initialization and the following functions do not operate when switched to failsafe control.
• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
A
B
Perform initial operation to recover when switched to fail-safe mode. However, it switches back to fail-safe
control when malfunction is found in power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger
side) front power window motor (driver side/passenger side).
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-19
2012 QUEST
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000007495582
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JMKIA6211ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
(wire color)
Description
Condition
Voltage (V)
—
—
0 – 1
Encoder power supply
Output
When ignition switch ON or
power window timer operates
9 – 16
Ground
Front power window motor
(passenger side) UP signal
Output
When front power window
switch (passenger side) is in
UP operation.
9 – 16
9
(G)
Ground
Front power window motor
(passenger side) DOWN
signal
Output
When front power window
switch (passenger side) is in
DOWN operation.
9 – 16
10
(V)
Ground
Battery power supply
11
(W)
Ground
Ground
12
(O)
Ground
Encoder pulse signal 1
+
–
Signal name
3
(BR)
Ground
Encoder ground
4
(SB)
Ground
8
(Y)
Input/
Output
Input
—
9 – 16
—
—
0 – 1
Input
When power window motor
operates.
JMKIA0070GB
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-20
2012 QUEST
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(wire color)
+
Description
–
Signal name
A
Condition
Input/
Output
Voltage (V)
B
15
(R)
Ground
Encoder pulse signal 2
When power window motor
operates.
Input
C
JMKIA0070GB
D
E
16
(L)
Ground
Power window serial link
Input/
Output
Ignition switch ON or power
window timer operating.
F
JPMIA0013GB
G
Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007495583
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL
H
Switches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal that detects up/down speed and
direction of door glass. Switches to fail-safe control when error beyond regulation value is detected between
the fully closed position and the actual position of the glass.
I
Error
Error condition
Pulse sensor malfunction
When only one side of pulse signal is being detected for more than the specified value.
Both pulse sensors malfunction
When both pulse signals have not been detected for more than the specified value during glass
open/close operation.
Pulse direction malfunction
When the pulse signal that is detected during glass open/close operation detects the opposite condition of power window motor operating direction.
Glass recognition position
malfunction 1
When it detects the error between glass fully closed position in power window switch memory and
actual fully closed position during glass open/close operation is more than the specified value.
Glass recognition position
malfunction 2
When it detects pulse count more than the value of glass full stroke during glass open/close operation.
J
It changes to condition before initialization and the following functions do not operate when switched to failsafe control.
• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
Perform initial operation to recover when switched to fail-safe mode. However, it switches back to fail-safe
control when malfunction is found in power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger
side) front power window motor (driver side/passenger side).
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-21
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007495584
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
(option abbreviation; if not
JCKWA4074GB
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-22
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
JCKWA4075GB
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-23
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000007495585
1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM
Interview the customer to obtain as much malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as possible when the customer brings the vehicle in.
>> GO TO 2.
2.REPRODUCE THE MALFUNCTION INFORMATION
Check the malfunction on the vehicle that the customer describes.
Inspect the relation of the symptoms and the condition when the symptoms occur.
>> GO TO 3.
3.IDENTIFY THE MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS”
Use “Symptom diagnosis” from the symptom inspection result in step 2. Then identify where to start the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.
>> GO TO 4.
4.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING PARTS WITH “DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS”
Perform the diagnosis with “DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS” of the applicable system.
>> GO TO 5.
5.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the specified malfunctioning parts.
>> GO TO 6.
6.FINAL CHECK
Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,
referring to the symptom inspection result in step 2.
Is the malfunctioning part repaired or replaced?
YES >> Trouble diagnosis is completed.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-24
2012 QUEST
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
Description
A
INFOID:0000000007495586
B
When the battery negative terminal is disconnected, the initialization is necessary for normal operation of
power window system.
CAUTION:
The following specified operations can not be performed under the non-initialized condition.
• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
Work Procedure
C
D
INFOID:0000000007495587
1.SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
E
Perform system initialization. Refer to PWC-27, "Work Procedure".
F
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION
Check anti-pinch function. Refer to PWC-28, "Work Procedure".
G
>> END
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-25
2012 QUEST
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING POWER WINDOW SWITCH
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Description
INFOID:0000000007495588
When the power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) replaced, the initialization
in necessary for normal operation of power window system.
CAUTION:
The following specified operations can not be performed under the non-initialized condition.
• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495589
1.SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
Perform system initialization. Refer to PWC-27, "Work Procedure".
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION
Check anti-pinch function. Refer to PWC-28, "Work Procedure".
>> END
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-26
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
A
Description
INFOID:0000000007495590
If any of the following operations are performed, the initialization is necessary for normal operation of power
window system.
• Disconnection and connection of battery cable from negative terminal.
• When power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) replaced.
• Electric power supply to power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) or power
window motor (driver side/passenger side) is interrupted by blown fuse or disconnection and connection of
the negative terminal of battery, etc.
• Disconnection and connection of power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side)
harness connector.
• Removal of power window motor (driver side/passenger side) from regulator assembly.
• Operation of regulator assembly as an independent unit.
• Removal and installation of glass.
• Removal and installation of door glass run.
CAUTION:
The following specified operations can not be performed under the non-initialized condition.
• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495591
B
C
D
E
F
G
1.STEP 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Operate power window switch to fully open the window. (This operation is unnecessary if the window is
already fully open)
Continue pulling the power window switch UP (AUTO-UP operation). Even after glass stops at fully closed
position, keep pulling the switch for 2 seconds or more.
Check that AUTO-UP function operates normally.
H
I
J
>> GO TO 2.
2.STEP 2
PWC
Check anti-pinch function. Refer to PWC-28, "Work Procedure".
>> END
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-27
2012 QUEST
CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION
Description
INFOID:0000000007495592
If any of the following operations are performed, the initialization is necessary for normal operation of antipinch function.
• Disconnection and connection of battery cable from negative terminal.
• When power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) replaced.
• Electric power supply to power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side) or power
window motor (driver side/passenger side) is interrupted by blown fuse or disconnection and connection of
the negative terminal of battery, etc.
• Disconnection and connection of power window main switch or front power window switch (passenger side)
harness connector.
• Removal of power window motor (driver side/passenger side) from regulator assembly.
• Operation of regulator assembly as an independent unit.
• Removal and installation of glass.
• Removal and installation of door glass run.
Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495593
1.CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
-
Fully open the door window.
Place a piece of wood near fully closed position.
Close door glass completely with AUTO-UP.
Check the following conditions.
Check that glass lowers for approximately 150 mm (5.9 in) without pinching piece of wood and stops.
Check that glass does not rise not when operating the power window main switch or front power window
switch (passenger side) while lowering.
CAUTION:
•
Perform initial setting when AUTO-UP operation or anti-pinch function does not operate normally.
•
Check that AUTO-UP operates before inspection when system initialization is performed.
•
Do not check with hands and other body parts because they may be pinched. Do not get
pinched.
>> END
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-28
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
A
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
B
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495594
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY
C
1.
2.
3.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector.
Check voltage between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Power window main switch
Connector
Terminal
D5
10
D6
19
(–)
Condition
Ground
Ignition switch
ON
OFF
Voltage (V)
E
9 – 16
F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
G
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and power window main switch harness connector.
H
I
BCM
Connector
Power window main switch
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
68
D5
10
69
D6
19
M123
4.
Continuity
J
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
L
Ground
68
M123
PWC
Not existed
69
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
M
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
N
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
O
Power window main switch
Connector
Terminal
D6
17
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-29
2012 QUEST
P
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495595
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector.
Check voltage between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
(+)
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Connector
Terminal
D55
10
(–)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector.
Front power window switch
(passenger side)
BCM
3.
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M123
69
D55
10
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M123
69
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Connector
Terminal
D55
11
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495596
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sliding door power window switch connectors.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between sliding door power window switch harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-30
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
(+)
A
Sliding door power window switch
(–)
Connector
Voltage (V)
Terminal
LH
D88
RH
D108
B
1
Ground
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.
C
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
D
1.
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and sliding door power window switch harness connector.
BCM
4.
Sliding door power window switch
Connector
Terminal
M123
68
Connector
Terminal
LH
D88
RH
D108
1
Continuity
Existed
F
G
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
H
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M123
68
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-31
2012 QUEST
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007495597
1. CHECK FUNCTION
Check sliding door power window motor operation with sliding door power window switch.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to PWC-32, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495598
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sliding door power window switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between sliding door power window switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Sliding door power window switch
Connector
(-)
Condition
Terminal
2
LH
Power window main
switch
(sliding door LH side)
D88
3
Ground
2
Power window main
switch
(sliding door RH side)
D108
RH
Voltage (V)
3
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
UP
9 – 16
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
DOWN
9 – 16
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
UP
9 – 16
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
DOWN
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector.
Check continuity between sliding door power window switch harness connector and power window main
switch harness connector.
Sliding door power window switch
Connector
LH
RH
4.
Power window main switch
Terminal
D88
D108
Connector
2
Terminal
Continuity
1
3
D5
2
3
3
7
Existed
5
Check continuity between sliding door power window switch harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-32
2012 QUEST
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Sliding door power window switch
Connector
LH
2
D88
RH
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
3
B
Not existed
2
D108
A
3
C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
D
3.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Check sliding door power window switch.
Refer to PWC-33, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Replace sliding door power window switch. Refer to PWC-62, "Removal and Installation".
Component Inspection
F
INFOID:0000000007495599
G
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sliding door power window switch connector.
Check sliding door power window switch terminals under the following conditions.
Sliding door power window switch
Condition
Terminal
1
5
3
4
2
5
3
4
1
4
2
5
H
I
Continuity
UP
NEUTRAL
J
Existed
PWC
DOWN
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace sliding door power window switch. Refer to PWC-62, "Removal and Installation".
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-33
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007495600
1. CHECK FUNCTION
Check front power window motor (driver side) operation with power window main switch.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to PWC-34, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495601
1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (DRIVER SIDE) INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor (driver side) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window motor (driver side) harness connector and ground.
(+)
Front power window motor (driver side)
Connector
(-)
Condition
Voltage (V)
Terminal
1
D7
Ground
2
Power window main
switch
(driver side)
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
DOWN
9 – 16
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
UP
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front power window motor (driver side). Refer to GW-28, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (DRIVER SIDE) CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector.
Check continuity between front power window motor (driver side) harness connector and power window
main switch harness connector.
Front power window motor (driver side)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
1
D7
4.
Power window main switch
Terminal
11
D5
2
8
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between front power window motor (driver side) harness connector and ground.
Front power window motor (driver side)
Connector
D7
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
1
Not existed
2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
PASSENGER SIDE
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-34
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007495602
A
1. CHECK FUNCTION
Check front power window motor (passenger side) operation with power window main switch or front power
window switch (passenger side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to PWC-35, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor (passenger side) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window motor (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
Front power window motor (passenger side)
(-)
Condition
Voltage (V)
Terminal
G
1
D46
Ground
2
Front power window
switch
(passenger side)
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
DOWN
9 – 16
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
UP
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front power window motor (passenger side). Refer to GW-28, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (PASSENGER SIDE) CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
H
I
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector.
Check continuity between front power window motor (passenger side) harness connector and front power PWC
window switch (passenger side) harness connector.
Front power window motor (passenger side)
Connector
D46
4.
E
F
(+)
Connector
C
INFOID:0000000007495603
1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (PASSENGER SIDE) INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
B
Terminal
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Connector
1
Terminal
9
D55
2
8
Continuity
Existed
L
M
Check continuity between front power window motor (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
N
Front power window motor (passenger side)
Connector
D46
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
1
Not existed
2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
SLIDING DOOR LH
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-35
2012 QUEST
O
P
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
SLIDING DOOR LH : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007495604
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Check sliding door power window motor LH operation with power window main switch or sliding door power
window switch LH.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to PWC-36, "SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure".
SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495605
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sliding door power window motor LH connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between sliding door power window motor LH harness connector and ground.
(+)
Sliding door power window motor LH
Connector
(-)
Condition
Voltage (V)
Terminal
1
D82
Ground
Sliding door power
window switch LH
3
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
UP
9 – 16
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
DOWN
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace sliding door power window motor LH.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sliding door power window switch LH connector.
Check continuity between sliding door power window motor LH harness connector and sliding door power
window switch LH harness connector.
Sliding door power window motor LH
Sliding door power window switch LH
Connector
Connector
D82
4.
Terminal
1
Terminal
5
D88
3
4
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between sliding door power window motor LH harness connector and ground.
Sliding door power window motor LH
Connector
D82
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
1
Not existed
3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace sliding door power window switch LH. Refer to PWC-62, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
SLIDING DOOR RH
SLIDING DOOR RH : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007495606
1. CHECK FUNCTION
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-36
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Check sliding door power window motor RH operation with power window main switch or sliding door power
window switch RH.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to PWC-37, "SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure".
SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure
A
B
INFOID:0000000007495607
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH INPUT SIGNAL
C
1.
2.
3.
4.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sliding door power window motor RH connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between sliding door power window motor RH harness connector and ground.
E
(+)
Sliding door power window motor RH
Connector
(-)
Condition
Voltage (V)
Terminal
1
D102
Ground
Sliding door power
window switch RH
3
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
UP
9 – 16
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
DOWN
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace sliding door power window motor RH.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
F
G
H
2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH CIRCUIT
I
1.
2.
3.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sliding door power window switch RH connector.
Check continuity between sliding door power window motor RH harness connector and sliding door power
window switch RH harness connector.
Sliding door power window motor RH
Connector
D102
4.
Sliding door power window switch RH
Terminal
Connector
1
Terminal
5
D108
3
4
Continuity
Existed
PWC
L
Check continuity between sliding door power window motor RH harness connector and ground.
Sliding door power window motor RH
Connector
D102
Continuity
Terminal
M
Ground
1
Not existed
3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace sliding door power window switch RH. Refer to PWC-62, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-37
2012 QUEST
ENCODER CIRCUIT
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
ENCODER CIRCUIT
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007495608
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Check that front driver side door glass perform AUTO UP/DOWN operation normally when power window
main switch is operated.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to PWC-38, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495609
1.CHECK ENCODER PULSE SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between power window main switch harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope.
(+)
Power window main switch
Connector
(-)
Signal
(Reference value)
Ground
Refer to the following signal
Terminal
9
D5
13
JMKIA5210GB
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector and front power window motor (driver side) connector.
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front power window motor
(driver side) harness connector.
Power window main switch
Connector
Terminal
Connector
9
D5
4.
Front power window motor (driver side)
Terminal
3
D7
13
5
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
Power window main switch
Connector
D5
Revision: 2011 September
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
9
Not existed
13
PWC-38
2012 QUEST
ENCODER CIRCUIT
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
A
3.CHECK ENCODER POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Connect power window main switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window motor (driver side) harness connector and ground.
B
C
(+)
Front power window motor (driver side)
Connector
Terminal
D7
4
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9 – 16
D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
E
4.CHECK ENCODER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
F
1.
2.
3.
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector.
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front power window motor
(driver side) harness connector.
Power window main switch
4.
Front power window motor (driver side)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
D5
15
D7
4
Continuity
Existed
I
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
Power window main switch
Connector
Terminal
D5
15
Continuity
Ground
H
J
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
PWC
5.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 1
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector.
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front power window motor
(driver side) harness connector.
Power window main switch
4.
Front power window motor (driver side)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
D5
2
D7
6
Continuity
Existed
O
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
Power window main switch
Connector
Terminal
D5
2
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
6.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 2
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-39
N
2012 QUEST
P
ENCODER CIRCUIT
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Connect power window main switch connector.
2. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
Power window main switch
Connector
Terminal
D5
2
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front power window motor (driver side). Refer to GW-28, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation".
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007495610
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Check that front passenger side door glass perform AUTO UP/DOWN operation normally when front power
window switch (passenger side) is operated.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to PWC-40, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495611
1.CHECK ENCODER PULSE SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground using
an oscilloscope.
(+)
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Connector
D55
(-)
Signal
(Reference value)
Ground
Refer to the following signal
Terminal
12
15
JMKIA5210GB
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector and front power window motor (passenger side) connector.
Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and front power
window motor (passenger side) harness connector.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-40
2012 QUEST
ENCODER CIRCUIT
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
12
D55
4.
Front power window motor (passenger side)
Terminal
5
D46
15
3
Continuity
Existed
B
Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
C
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
12
D55
Not existed
15
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
D
E
3.CHECK ENCODER POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
A
F
Connect front power window switch (passenger side) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window motor (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
G
(+)
Front power window motor (passenger side)
Connector
Terminal
D46
4
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9 – 16
H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
I
4.CHECK ENCODER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
J
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector.
PWC
Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and front power
window motor (passenger side) harness connector.
Front power window switch (passenger side)
4.
Front power window motor (passenger side)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
D55
4
D46
4
L
Continuity
Existed
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Connector
Terminal
D55
4
Ground
Continuity
5.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 1
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector.
Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and front power
window motor (passenger side) harness connector.
Revision: 2011 September
N
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
1.
2.
3.
M
Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
PWC-41
2012 QUEST
O
P
ENCODER CIRCUIT
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Front power window switch (passenger side)
4.
Front power window motor (passenger side)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
D55
3
D46
6
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Connector
Terminal
D55
3
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
6.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 2
1.
2.
Connect front power window switch (passenger side) connector.
Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Connector
Terminal
D55
3
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front power window motor (passenger side). Refer to GW-28, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-42
2012 QUEST
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007495612
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1.
2.
3.
Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
Select “KEY CYL LK-SW”, “KEY CYL UN-SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.
Monitor item
C
Condition
KEY CYL LK-SW
KEY CYL UN-SW
Lock
: ON
Neutral / Unlock
: OFF
Unlock
: ON
Neutral / Lock
: OFF
D
E
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to PWC-43, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495613
G
1.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch) harness connector and
ground.
(+)
I
J
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch)
Connector
H
(–)
Voltage (V)
Ground
4–6
Terminal
PWC
5
D48
6
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH CIRCUIT
M
1.
2.
3.
N
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector.
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front door lock assembly
(driver side) (key cylinder switch) harness connector.
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder
switch)
Power window main switch
Connector
D5
4.
Terminal
Connector
4
D48
6
O
Continuity
Terminal
6
5
Existed
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-43
2012 QUEST
P
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Power window main switch
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
4
D5
Not existed
6
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch) harness connector
and ground.
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch)
Connector
Terminal
D48
4
Continuity
Ground
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
Check front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch).
Refer to PWC-44, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch).
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495614
COMPONENT INSPECTION
1.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch) connector.
Check front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch) terminals under the following conditions.
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch)
Key position
Terminal
5
4
6
Continuity
Unlock
Existed
Neutral / Lock
Not existed
Lock
Existed
Neutral / Unlock
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side) (key cylinder switch).
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-44
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK
A
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495615
B
1.CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between power window main switch harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope.
C
(+)
Power window main switch
Connector
D
Signal
(Reference value)
(–)
Terminal
E
D5
14
Ground
F
JPMIA0013GB
G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
H
2.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
I
J
(+)
Power window main switch
(–)
Connector
Terminal
D5
14
Voltage (V)
PWC
Ground
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 3.
L
3.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT
M
1.
2.
3.
N
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and power window main switch harness connector.
BCM
4.
Power window main switch
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M121
8
D5
14
Continuity
Existed
P
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M121
8
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-45
O
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495616
1.CHECK POWER WINDOW SWITCH OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground using
an oscilloscope.
(+)
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Connector
Terminal
D55
16
Signal
(Reference value)
(–)
Ground
JPMIA0013GB
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector and front power window switch (passenger side) connector.
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front power window switch
(passenger side) harness connector.
Power window main switch
4.
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
D5
14
D55
16
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
Power window main switch
Connector
Terminal
D5
14
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-46
2012 QUEST
NONE OF THE POWER WINDOWS CAN BE OPERATED USING ANY SWITCH
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
A
NONE OF THE POWER WINDOWS CAN BE OPERATED USING ANY
SWITCH
Diagnosis Procedure
B
INFOID:0000000007495617
1.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
C
Check BCM power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
D
2.CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
E
Check power window main switch power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to PWC-29, "POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
F
G
3.CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT
Check power window main switch serial link circuit.
Refer to PWC-45, "POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
H
I
4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-47
2012 QUEST
DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495618
1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW MOTOR
Check front power window motor (driver side).
Refer to PWC-34, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-48
2012 QUEST
FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND FRONT POWER WINDOW
SWITCH ARE OPERATED
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND FRONT POWER WINDOW
SWITCH ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure
A
B
INFOID:0000000007495619
1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check front power window switch (passenger side) power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to PWC-30, "FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
C
D
E
2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (PASSENGER SIDE)
F
Check front power window motor (passenger side).
Refer to PWC-35, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
G
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
H
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
I
WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED
WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED :
Diagnosis Procedure
J
INFOID:0000000007495620
PWC
1.REPLACE FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
Replace front power window switch (passenger side).
Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation"
L
>> INSPECTION END
M
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495621
N
1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT
Check front power window switch (passenger side) serial link circuit.
Refer to PWC-46, "FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-49
2012 QUEST
O
P
SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES ARE OPERATED
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495622
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH
Check sliding door power window switch LH.
Refer to PWC-32, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH
Check sliding door power window motor LH.
Refer to PWC-36, "SLIDING DOOR LH : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
WHEN SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED
WHEN SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis
Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495623
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check sliding door power window switch LH power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to PWC-30, "SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH
Check sliding door power window switch LH.
Refer to PWC-32, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-50
2012 QUEST
SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495624
A
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH
B
Check sliding door power window switch LH.
Refer to PWC-32, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
C
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
D
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-51
2012 QUEST
SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES ARE OPERATED
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495625
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH
Check sliding door power window switch RH.
Refer to PWC-32, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH
Check sliding door power window motor RH.
Refer to PWC-36, "SLIDING DOOR RH : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
WHEN SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED
WHEN SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis
Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495626
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check sliding door power window switch RH power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to PWC-30, "SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH
Check sliding door power window switch RH.
Refer to PWC-32, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-52
2012 QUEST
SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495627
A
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH
B
Check sliding door power window switch RH.
Refer to PWC-32, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
C
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
D
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-53
2012 QUEST
AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE BUT MANUAL OPERATE NORMALLY
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE BUT MANUAL OPERATE NORMALLY
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495628
1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Initialization procedure is executed and operation is confirmed.
Refer to PWC-27, "Work Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT (DRIVER SIDE)
Check encoder circuit (driver side). Refer to PWC-38, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495629
1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Initialization procedure is executed and operation is confirmed.
Refer to PWC-27, "Work Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT (PASSENGER SIDE)
Check encoder circuit (passenger side). Refer to PWC-40, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function
Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-54
2012 QUEST
ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE NORMALLY (FRONT SIDE)
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE NORMALLY (FRONT SIDE)
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
A
INFOID:0000000007495630
B
1.CHECK POWER WINDOW AUTO OPERATION
Check AUTO operation when anti-pinch function does not operate.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to PWC-54, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
C
D
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
E
F
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495631
G
1.CHECK POWER WINDOW AUTO OPERATION
Check AUTO operation when anti-pinch function does not operate.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to PWC-54, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
H
I
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-55
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE NORMALLY
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
NORMALLY
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495632
1.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH
Check front door switch.
Refer to DLK-209, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-56
2012 QUEST
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE POWER WINDOWS
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE POWER WINDOWS
Diagnosis Procedure
A
INFOID:0000000007495633
B
1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Initialization procedure is executed and operation is confirmed.
Refer to PWC-27, "Work Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.
C
D
2.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY (DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH)
E
Check driver side door lock assembly (door key cylinder switch).
Refer to PWC-43, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
F
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
G
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-57
2012 QUEST
KEYLESS POWER WINDOW DOWN DOES NOT OPERATE
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
KEYLESS POWER WINDOW DOWN DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495634
1.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
Check remote keyless entry function.
Does door lock/unlock with Intelligent key button?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to DLK-44, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : System Description".
2.CHECK POWER WINDOW OPERATION
Check power window operation.
Does power window up/down with power window main switch?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to PWC-47, "Diagnosis Procedure".
3.CHECK “PW DOWN SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
Check “PW DOWN SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-95, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Set “PW DOWN SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
4.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-58
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES NOT FUNCTION
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES NOT FUNCTION
Diagnosis Procedure
A
INFOID:0000000007495635
1.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
B
Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation".
C
>> INSPECTION END
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-59
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495636
1.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
Replace power window main switch.
Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495637
1.REPLACE FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
Replace front power window switch (passenger side).
Refer to PWC-61, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END
SLIDING DOOR LH
SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495638
1.REPLACE SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH
Replace sliding door power window switch LH.
Refer to PWC-62, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END
SLIDING DOOR RH
SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495639
1.REPLACE SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH
Replace sliding door power window switch RH.
Refer to PWC-62, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-60
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495640
B
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the power window main switch finisher. Refer to INT13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove power window main switch (1) from power window
main switch finisher (2) using a remover tool (A).
C
D
: Pawl
E
NOTE:
The same procedure is also performed for front power window
switch (passenger side).
JMKIA8164ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
If power window main switch or front power window (passenger side) is replaced or is removed, it is necessary
to perform the initialization procedure.
Refer to PWC-27, "Work Procedure".
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-61
2012 QUEST
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
[FRONT WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495641
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove sliding door finisher. Refer to INT-16, "Removal and
Installation".
Remove screw (A), disconnect pawls from sliding door finisher
(1), and then remove power window switch finisher (2).
: Pawl
JMKIA8165ZZ
3.
Remove power window switch (1) from power window switch finisher (2) using a remover tool (A).
: Pawl
JMKIA8166ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-62
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000007495642
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
C
D
E
F
G
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-63
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007495643
JMKIA8163ZZ
A.
View with front door finisher removed B.
No.
View with sliding door finisher removed
Component parts
Description
1.
BCM
• Supplies power supply to power window switch.
• Controls retained power.
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location"
for detailed installation location.
2.
Power window main switch
Refer to PWC-65, "Power Window Main Switch".
3.
Front power window motor (driver side)
Refer to PWC-65, "Front Power Window Motor (Driver Side)".
4.
Front door switch (driver side)
Detects door open/close condition and transmits to BCM. Refer to DLK-28,
"Front Door Switch".
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-64
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.
Component parts
Description
5.
Sliding door power window switch LH
Refer to PWC-65, "Sliding Door Power Window Switch".
6.
Sliding door power window motor LH
Refer to PWC-65, "Sliding Door Power Window Motor".
Power Window Main Switch
A
INFOID:0000000007836986
• Directly controls all power window motor of all doors.
• Controls anti-pinch operation of power window.
Front Power Window Motor (Driver Side)
B
C
INFOID:0000000007836987
• Integrates the encoder and power window motor.
• Operates with signals from power window main switch.
• Transmits front power window motor (driver side) rotation as a pulse signal to power window main switch.
D
Sliding Door Power Window Switch
E
INFOID:0000000007836988
Controls power window motor of sliding door.
F
Sliding Door Power Window Motor
INFOID:0000000007836989
Operates with signals from power window main switch and sliding door power window switch.
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-65
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
System Description
INFOID:0000000007495644
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JMKIA7862GB
DESCRIPTION
• Power window system is activated by power window switch when ignition switch turns ON, or during the
retained power operation after ignition switch turns OFF.
• Power window main switch opens/closes all door glass.
• Front and sliding door power window switch opens/closes the corresponding door glass.
• AUTO UP/DOWN operation can be performed when power window main switch turns to AUTO.
• Power window lock switch can lock all power windows other than driver seat.
• If door glass receives resistance that is the specified value or more while power window of driver seat is in
AUTO-UP operation, power window of driver seat operates in the reverse direction.
Power Window AUTO-Operation
• AUTO UP/DOWN operation can be performed when power window main switch turns to AUTO.
• Encoder continues detecting the movement of power window motor and transmits to power window switch
as the encoder pulse signal while power window motor is operating.
• Power window switch reads the changes of encoder signal and stops AUTO operation when door glass is at
fully opened/closed position.
• Power window motor is operable in case encoder is malfunctioning.
Retained Power Operation
Retained power operation is an additional power supply function that enables power window system to operate for 45 seconds even when ignition switch is turned OFF.
Retained Power Cancel Conditions
• Front door CLOSE (door switch OFF) → OPEN (door switch ON).
• When ignition switch is ON again.
• When timer time passes (45 seconds).
Power Window Lock Function
Ground circuit inside power window main switch shuts off when power window lock switch is ON. This inhibits
each power window switch operation except the power window main switch.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-66
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Anti-Pinch System
• Pinch foreign material in the door glass during AUTO-UP operation, and it is the anti-pinch function that lowers the door glass 150 mm (5.9 in) when detected.
• Encoder continues detecting the movement of front power window motor (driver side) and transmits to
power window main switch as the encoder pulse signal while front power window motor (driver side) is operating.
• Resistance is applied to the front power window motor (driver side) rotation that changes the frequency of
encoder pulse signal if foreign material is trapped in the door glass.
• Power window main switch controls to lower the window glass for 150 mm (5.9 in) after it detects encoder
pulse signal frequency change.
Operation Condition
When front door glass (driver side) AUTO-UP operation is performed (anti-pinch function does not operate just
before the door glass closes and is fully closed).
NOTE:
Depending on environment and driving conditions, if a similar impact or load is applied to the door glass, it
may lower.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-67
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000007495645
JMKIA7969GB
Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007495646
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL
Switches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal that detects up/down speed and
direction of door glass. Switches to fail-safe control when error beyond regulation value is detected between
the fully closed position and the actual position of the glass.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-68
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Error
Error condition
A
Pulse sensor malfunction
When only one side of pulse signal is being detected for more than the specified value.
Both pulse sensors malfunction
When both pulse signals have not been detected for more than the specified value during glass
open/close operation.
Pulse direction malfunction
When the pulse signal that is detected during glass open/close operation detects the opposite condition of power window motor operating direction.
Glass recognition position
malfunction 1
When it detects the error between glass fully closed position in power window switch memory and
actual fully closed position during glass open/close operation is more than the specified value.
Glass recognition position
malfunction 2
When it detects pulse count more than the value of glass full stroke during glass open/close operation.
It changes to condition before initialization and the following functions do not operate when switched to failsafe control.
• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
Perform initial operation to recover when switched to fail-safe mode. However, it switches back to fail-safe
control when malfunction is found in power window main switch or front power window motor (driver side).
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-69
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)
INFOID:0000000007829620
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Diagnosis mode
Function Description
Work Support
Changes the setting for each system function.
Self Diagnostic Result
Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.
CAN Diag Support Monitor
Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
Data Monitor
The BCM input/output signals are displayed.
Active Test
The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Ecu Identification
The BCM part number is displayed.
Configuration
• Read and save the vehicle specification.
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.
SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item
System
Sub system selection item
Diagnosis mode
Work Support
Data Monitor
Active Test
×
Door lock
DOOR LOCK
×
×
Rear window defogger
REAR DEFOGGER
×
×
Warning chime
BUZZER
×
×
Interior room lamp control system
INT LAMP
×
×
×
Exterior lamp
HEAD LAMP
×
×
×
Wiper and washer
WIPER
×
×
×
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps
FLASHER
×
×
×
Air conditioning control system
AIR CONDITONER
×
×*
• Intelligent Key system
• Engine start system
INTELLIGENT KEY
×
×
Combination switch
COMB SW
Body control system
BCM
×
NVIS
IMMU
×
×
×
Interior room lamp battery saver
BATTERY SAVER
×
×
×
Back door open
TRUNK
Vehicle security system
THEFT ALM
RAP system
RETAINED PWR
×
Signal buffer system
SIGNAL BUFFER
×
×
TPMS
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
NOTE:
*: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used.
FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)
The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on
CONSULT.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-70
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
CONSULT screen item
Indication/Unit
Description
Vehicle Speed
km/h
Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Odo/Trip Meter
km
Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Vehicle Condition
SLEEP>LOCK
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)]
SLEEP>OFF
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)]
LOCK>ACC
While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC
ACC>ON
While turning power supply position from ACC to ON
RUN>ACC
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except
emergency stop operation)
CRANK>RUN
While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN
RUN>URGENT
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation)
ACC>OFF
While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF)
OFF>LOCK
OFF>ACC
IGN Counter
A
Power position status of
the moment a particular
DTC is detected*
C
D
E
F
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF
(LOCK)
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC
ON>CRANK
While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK
OFF>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK
Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)
OFF
Power supply position is OFF (OFF)
ACC
Power supply position is ACC
ON
Power supply position is ON
ENGINE RUN
Power supply position is RUN
CRANKING
Power supply position is CRANK
0 - 39
B
G
H
I
J
PWC
The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected
• The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
• The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition
whenever ignition switch OFF → ON.
• The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
NOTE:
L
M
*: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position.
• OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF
• ACC: Ignition switch ACC
N
• IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped
• RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running
• CRANK: At engine cranking
Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P
position, and any of the following conditions are met.
O
• Closing door
P
• Opening door
• Door is locked using door request switch
• Door is locked using Intelligent Key
The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”.
RETAIND PWR
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-71
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
RETAIND PWR : CONSULT Function (BCM - RETAINED PWR)
INFOID:0000000007495648
DATA MONITOR
Monitor Item
Description
DOOR SW-DR
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of driver side door switch.
DOOR SW-AS
Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of passenger side door switch.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-72
2012 QUEST
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
A
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
List of ECU Reference
INFOID:0000000007495649
ECU
Reference
C
BCS-36, "Reference Value"
BCM
B
BCS-58, "Fail-safe"
BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
D
BCS-59, "DTC Index"
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-73
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000007495650
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JMKIA5358ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Description
Condition
Voltage (V)
Output
When sliding door LH switch
in power window main
switch is in UP operation.
9 – 16
—
—
0 – 1
Output
When sliding door LH switch
in power window main
switch is in DOWN operation.
9 – 16
Output
When sliding door RH
switch in power window
main switch is in DOWN operation.
9 – 16
Ground
Sliding door power window
motor RH UP signal
Output
When sliding door RH
switch in power window
main switch is in UP operation.
9 – 16
8
(BR)
Ground
Front power window motor
(passenger side) UP signal
Output
When front RH switch in
power window main switch
is in UP operation.
9 – 16
9
(SB)
Ground
Encoder pulse signal 2
Input
When front power window
motor (driver side) operates.
+
-
1
(O)
Ground
Sliding door power window
motor LH UP signal
2
(W)
Ground
Encoder ground
Ground
Sliding door power window
motor LH DOWN signal
Ground
Sliding door power window
motor RH DOWN signal
7
(P)
3
(BR)
5
(SB)
Signal name
Input/
Output
JMKIA0070GB
10
(V)
Ground
Retained power signal
Revision: 2011 September
Input
Ignition switch ON
9 – 16
Within 45 seconds after ignition switch is turned to OFF.
9 – 16
When driver side or passenger side door is opened during retained power
operation.
0 – 1
PWC-74
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
11
(GR)
12
(LG)
Description
-
Signal name
Ground
Front power window motor
(passenger side) DOWN
signal
Ground
Front power window motor
(driver side) DOWN signal
A
Condition
Input/
Output
Voltage (V)
B
Output
When front RH switch in
power window main switch
is in DOWN operation.
9 – 16
Output
When front LH switch in
power window main switch
is in DOWN operation.
9 – 16
C
D
13
(Y)
Ground
Encoder pulse signal 1
Input
When front power window
motor (driver side) operates.
E
JMKIA0070GB
15
(R)
Ground
Encoder power supply
16
(L)
Ground
Front power window motor
(driver side) UP signal
17
(B)
Ground
Ground
19
(LG)
Ground
Battery power supply
Output
When ignition switch ON or
power window timer operating.
9 – 16
Output
When front LH switch in
power window main switch
is in UP operation.
9 – 16
—
—
0 – 1
F
G
H
Input
Ignition switch OFF
Fail-safe
9 – 16
I
INFOID:0000000007495651
J
FAIL-SAFE CONTROL
Switches to fail-safe control when malfunction is detected in encoder signal that detects up/down speed and
direction of door glass. Switches to fail-safe control when error beyond regulation value is detected between PWC
the fully closed position and the actual position of the glass.
Error
Error condition
L
Pulse sensor malfunction
When only one side of pulse signal is being detected for more than the specified value.
Both pulse sensors malfunction
When both pulse signals have not been detected for more than the specified value during glass
open/close operation.
Pulse direction malfunction
When the pulse signal that is detected during glass open/close operation detects the opposite condition of power window motor operating direction.
Glass recognition position
malfunction 1
When it detects the error between glass fully closed position in power window switch memory and
actual fully closed position during glass open/close operation is more than the specified value.
Glass recognition position
malfunction 2
When it detects pulse count more than the value of glass full stroke during glass open/close operation.
It changes to condition before initialization and the following functions do not operate when switched to failsafe control.
• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
Perform initial operation to recover when switched to fail-safe mode. However, it switches back to fail-safe
control when malfunction is found in power window main switch or front power window motor (driver side).
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-75
2012 QUEST
M
N
O
P
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007495652
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
(option abbreviation; if not
JRKWC0868GB
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-76
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000007495653
B
Interview the customer to obtain as much malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as possible when the customer brings the vehicle in.
C
1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM
D
>> GO TO 2.
2.REPRODUCE THE MALFUNCTION INFORMATION
Check the malfunction on the vehicle that the customer describes.
Inspect the relation of the symptoms and the condition when the symptoms occur.
E
>> GO TO 3.
F
3.IDENTIFY THE MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS”
Use “Symptom diagnosis” from the symptom inspection result in step 2. Then identify where to start the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.
>> GO TO 4.
G
H
4.IDENTIFY MALFUNCTIONING PARTS WITH “DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS”
Perform the diagnosis with “DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS” of the applicable system.
I
>> GO TO 5.
5.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
J
Repair or replace the specified malfunctioning parts.
>> GO TO 6.
PWC
6.FINAL CHECK
Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,
referring to the symptom inspection result in step 2.
Is the malfunctioning part repaired or replaced?
YES >> Trouble diagnosis is completed.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-77
2012 QUEST
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL
Description
INFOID:0000000007495654
When the battery negative terminal is disconnected, the initialization is necessary for normal operation of
power window system.
CAUTION:
The following specified operations can not be performed under the non-initialized condition.
• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495655
1.SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
Perform system initialization. Refer to PWC-80, "Work Procedure".
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION
Check anti-pinch function. Refer to PWC-81, "Work Procedure".
>> END
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-78
2012 QUEST
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING POWER WINDOW MAIN
SWITCH
Description
A
INFOID:0000000007495656
B
When the power window main switch replaced, the initialization in necessary for normal operation of power
window system.
CAUTION:
The following specified operations can not be performed under the non-initialized condition.
• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
Work Procedure
C
D
INFOID:0000000007495657
1.SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
E
Perform system initialization. Refer to PWC-80, "Work Procedure".
F
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION
Check anti-pinch function. Refer to PWC-81, "Work Procedure".
G
>> END
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-79
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
SYSTEM INITIALIZATION
Description
INFOID:0000000007495658
If any of the following operations are performed, the initialization is necessary for normal operation of power
window system.
• Disconnection and connection of battery cable from negative terminal.
• When power window main switch replaced.
• Electric power supply to power window main switch or power window motor (driver side) is interrupted by
blown fuse or disconnection and connection of the negative terminal of battery, etc.
• Disconnection and connection of power window main switch harness connector.
• Removal of power window motor (driver side) from regulator assembly.
• Operation of regulator assembly as an independent unit.
• Removal and installation of glass.
• Removal and installation of door glass run.
CAUTION:
The following specified operations can not be performed under the non-initialized condition.
• Auto-up operation
• Anti-pinch function
Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495659
1.STEP 1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Operate power window switch to fully open the window. (This operation is unnecessary if the window is
already fully open)
Continue pulling the power window switch UP (AUTO-UP operation). Even after glass stops at fully closed
position, keep pulling the switch for 2 seconds or more.
Check that AUTO-UP function operates normally.
>> GO TO 2.
2.STEP 2
Check anti-pinch function. Refer to PWC-81, "Work Procedure".
>> END
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-80
2012 QUEST
CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION
A
Description
INFOID:0000000007495660
If any of the following operations are performed, the initialization is necessary for normal operation of antipinch function.
• Disconnection and connection of battery cable from negative terminal.
• When power window main switch replaced.
• Electric power supply to power window main switch or power window motor (driver side) is interrupted by
blown fuse or disconnection and connection of the negative terminal of battery, etc.
• Disconnection and connection of power window main switch harness connector.
• Removal of power window motor (driver side) from regulator assembly.
• Operation of regulator assembly as an independent unit.
• Removal and installation of glass.
• Removal and installation of door glass run.
Work Procedure
B
C
D
E
INFOID:0000000007495661
1.CHECK ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION
F
1. Fully open the door window.
2. Place a piece of wood near fully closed position.
3. Close door glass completely with AUTO-UP.
4. Check the following conditions.
Check that glass lowers for approximately 150 mm (5.9 in) without pinching piece of wood and stops.
Check that glass does not rise not when operating the power window main switch while lowering.
CAUTION:
•
Perform initial setting when AUTO-UP operation or anti-pinch function does not operate normally.
•
Check that AUTO-UP operates before inspection when system initialization is performed.
•
Do not check with hands and other body parts because they may be pinched. Do not get
pinched.
G
H
I
J
>> END
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-81
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495662
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector.
Check voltage between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
(+)
Power window main switch
Connector
Terminal
D5
10
D6
19
(-)
Condition
Ground
Ignition switch
ON
OFF
Voltage (V)
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and power window main switch harness connector.
BCM
Connector
Power window main switch
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
68
D5
10
69
D6
19
M123
4.
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
68
M123
Not existed
69
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
Power window main switch
Connector
Terminal
D6
17
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-82
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495663
A
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
B
C
(+)
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Connector
Terminal
D56
8
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9 – 16
E
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.
F
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector.
BCM
4.
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M123
68
D56
8
G
H
Continuity
Existed
I
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M123
68
Continuity
Ground
J
Not existed
PWC
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
L
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495664
M
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sliding door power window switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between sliding door power window switch harness connector and ground.
N
O
(+)
Sliding door power window switch
Connector
(-)
Voltage (V)
P
Terminal
LH
D88
RH
D108
1
Ground
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-83
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and sliding door power window switch harness connector.
BCM
4.
Sliding door power window switch
Connector
Terminal
M123
68
Connector
Terminal
LH
D88
RH
D108
1
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M123
68
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-84
2012 QUEST
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
Component Function Check
A
INFOID:0000000007495665
1. CHECK FUNCTION
B
Check front power window motor (passenger side) operation with front power window switch (passenger side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to PWC-85, "Diagnosis Procedure".
C
Diagnosis Procedure
D
INFOID:0000000007495666
1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
E
F
(+)
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Connector
(-)
Condition
Voltage (V)
11
D56
Power window main
switch
(passenger side)
Ground
12
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
DOWN
9 – 16
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
UP
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
I
Turn ignition switch OFF.
PWC
Disconnect power window main switch connector.
Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and power window main switch harness connector.
L
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Connector
D56
4.
H
J
2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
G
Terminal
Terminal
Power window main switch
Connector
11
Terminal
11
D5
12
8
Continuity
M
Existed
Check continuity between front power window switch (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Connector
D56
Continuity
Terminal
O
Ground
11
Not existed
12
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
Check front power window switch (passenger side).
Refer to PWC-86, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: 2011 September
N
PWC-85
2012 QUEST
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation".
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495667
1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector.
Check front power window switch (passenger side) terminals under the following conditions.
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Condition
Terminal
8
7
11
6
11
6
12
7
8
6
12
7
Continuity
UP
NEUTRAL
Existed
DOWN
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-86
2012 QUEST
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007495668
1. CHECK FUNCTION
B
Check sliding door power window motor operation with sliding door power window switch.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to PWC-87, "Diagnosis Procedure".
C
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495669
D
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sliding door power window switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between sliding door power window switch harness connector and ground.
E
F
(+)
Sliding door power window switch
Connector
(-)
Condition
Power window main
switch
(sliding door LH side)
D88
3
Ground
2
Power window main
switch
(sliding door RH side)
D108
RH
G
Terminal
2
LH
Voltage (V)
3
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
UP
9 – 16
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
DOWN
9 – 16
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
UP
9 – 16
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
DOWN
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
H
I
J
PWC
2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH CIRCUIT
L
1.
2.
3.
M
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector.
Check continuity between sliding door power window switch harness connector and power window main
switch harness connector.
Sliding door power window switch
Connector
LH
RH
4.
Power window main switch
Terminal
D88
D108
Connector
2
Terminal
Continuity
1
3
D5
2
3
3
7
Existed
O
5
P
Check continuity between sliding door power window switch harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
N
PWC-87
2012 QUEST
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Sliding door power window switch
Connector
LH
2
D88
RH
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
3
Not existed
2
D108
3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Check sliding door power window switch.
Refer to PWC-88, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Replace sliding door power window switch. Refer to PWC-110, "Removal and Installation".
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495670
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sliding door power window switch connector.
Check sliding door power window switch terminals under the following conditions.
Sliding door power window switch
Condition
Terminal
1
5
3
4
2
5
3
4
1
4
2
5
Continuity
UP
NEUTRAL
Existed
DOWN
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace sliding door power window switch. Refer to PWC-110, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-88
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
A
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007495671
B
1. CHECK FUNCTION
Check front power window motor (driver side) operation with power window main switch.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to PWC-89, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
C
D
INFOID:0000000007495672
1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (DRIVER SIDE) INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor (driver side) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window motor (driver side) harness connector and ground.
(+)
G
Front power window motor (driver side)
Connector
(-)
Condition
Voltage (V)
Terminal
1
D7
Ground
2
Power window main
switch
(driver side)
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
DOWN
9 – 16
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
UP
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front power window motor (driver side). Refer to GW-28, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (DRIVER SIDE) CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector.
Check continuity between front power window motor (driver side) harness connector and power window
main switch harness connector.
Front power window motor (driver side)
Connector
4.
Power window main switch
Terminal
Connector
1
D7
F
Terminal
12
D5
2
16
Continuity
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
Existed
N
Check continuity between front power window motor (driver side) harness connector and ground.
Front power window motor (driver side)
Connector
D7
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
1
Not existed
2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
PASSENGER SIDE
Revision: 2011 September
O
PWC-89
2012 QUEST
P
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007495673
1. CHECK FUNCTION
Check front power window motor (passenger side) operation with power window main switch or front power
window switch (passenger side).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to PWC-90, "PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495674
1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (PASSENGER SIDE) INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window motor (passenger side) connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window motor (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
(+)
Front power window motor (passenger side)
Connector
(-)
Condition
Voltage (V)
Terminal
1
D46
Ground
2
Front power window
switch
(passenger side)
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
DOWN
9 – 16
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
UP
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front power window motor (passenger side).
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (PASSENGER SIDE) CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front power window switch (passenger side) connector.
Check continuity between front power window motor (passenger side) harness connector and front power
window switch (passenger side) harness connector.
Front power window motor (passenger side)
Connector
D46
4.
Terminal
Front power window switch (passenger side)
Connector
1
Terminal
6
D56
2
7
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between front power window motor (passenger side) harness connector and ground.
Front power window motor (passenger side)
Connector
D46
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
1
Not existed
2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front power window switch (passenger side). Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
SLIDING DOOR LH
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-90
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
SLIDING DOOR LH : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007495675
A
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Check sliding door power window motor LH operation with power window main switch or sliding door power
window switch LH.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to PWC-91, "SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure".
SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sliding door power window motor LH connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between sliding door power window motor LH harness connector and ground.
E
F
(+)
Sliding door power window motor LH
Connector
(-)
Condition
Voltage (V)
Terminal
G
1
D82
Ground
Sliding door power
window switch LH
3
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
UP
9 – 16
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
DOWN
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace sliding door power window motor LH.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
J
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sliding door power window switch LH connector.
Check continuity between sliding door power window motor LH harness connector and sliding door power PWC
window switch LH harness connector.
Sliding door power window motor LH
Sliding door power window switch LH
Connector
Connector
D82
4.
H
I
2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
C
INFOID:0000000007495676
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
B
Terminal
1
Terminal
5
D88
3
4
Continuity
Existed
L
M
Check continuity between sliding door power window motor LH harness connector and ground.
N
Sliding door power window motor LH
Connector
D82
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
1
Not existed
3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace sliding door power window switch LH. Refer to PWC-110, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
SLIDING DOOR RH
SLIDING DOOR RH : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007495677
1. CHECK FUNCTION
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-91
2012 QUEST
O
P
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Check sliding door power window motor RH operation with power window main switch or sliding door power
window switch RH.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to PWC-92, "SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure".
SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495678
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sliding door power window motor RH connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between sliding door power window motor RH harness connector and ground.
(+)
Sliding door power window motor RH
Connector
(-)
Condition
Voltage (V)
Terminal
1
D102
Ground
Sliding door power
window switch RH
3
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
UP
9 – 16
NEUTRAL
0 – 1
DOWN
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace sliding door power window motor RH.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect sliding door power window switch RH connector.
Check continuity between sliding door power window motor RH harness connector and sliding door power
window switch RH harness connector.
Sliding door power window motor RH
Connector
D102
4.
Sliding door power window switch RH
Terminal
Connector
1
Terminal
5
D108
3
4
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between sliding door power window motor RH harness connector and ground.
Sliding door power window motor RH
Connector
D102
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
1
Not existed
3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace sliding door power window switch RH. Refer to PWC-110, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-92
2012 QUEST
ENCODER CIRCUIT
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
ENCODER CIRCUIT
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007495679
1.CHECK FUNCTION
B
Check that front driver side door glass perform AUTO UP/DOWN operation normally when power window
main switch is operated.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to PWC-93, "Diagnosis Procedure".
C
D
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495680
1.CHECK ENCODER PULSE SIGNAL
1.
2.
E
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between power window main switch harness connector and ground using an oscilloscope.
F
(+)
Power window main switch
Connector
Signal
(Reference value)
(-)
Terminal
G
9
D5
Ground
13
Refer to the following signal
H
I
J
JMKIA5210GB
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
PWC
L
2.CHECK ENCODER SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector and front power window motor (driver side) connector.
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front power window motor
(driver side) harness connector.
M
N
Power window main switch
Connector
Terminal
Connector
9
D5
4.
Front power window motor (driver side)
Terminal
3
D7
13
5
Continuity
O
Existed
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
Power window main switch
Connector
D5
P
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
9
Not existed
13
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-93
2012 QUEST
ENCODER CIRCUIT
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK ENCODER POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
Connect power window main switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front power window motor (driver side) harness connector and ground.
(+)
Front power window motor (driver side)
Connector
Terminal
D7
4
(-)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9 – 16
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK ENCODER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector.
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front power window motor
(driver side) harness connector.
Power window main switch
4.
Front power window motor (driver side)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
D5
15
D7
4
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
Power window main switch
Connector
Terminal
D5
15
Continuity
Ground
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
5.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 1
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power window main switch connector.
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and front power window motor
(driver side) harness connector.
Power window main switch
4.
Front power window motor (driver side)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
D5
2
D7
6
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
Power window main switch
Connector
Terminal
D5
2
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
6.CHECK ENCODER GROUND CIRCUIT 2
1.
Connect power window main switch connector.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-94
2012 QUEST
ENCODER CIRCUIT
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2. Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.
A
Power window main switch
Connector
Terminal
D5
2
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front power window motor (driver side). Refer to GW-28, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation".
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-95
2012 QUEST
NONE OF THE POWER WINDOWS CAN BE OPERATED USING ANY SWITCH
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NONE OF THE POWER WINDOWS CAN BE OPERATED USING ANY
SWITCH
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495681
1.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check BCM power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check power window main switch power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to PWC-82, "POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-96
2012 QUEST
DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
DRIVER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure
A
INFOID:0000000007495682
1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (DRIVER SIDE)
B
Check front power window motor (driver side).
Refer to PWC-89, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
C
2.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
D
Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-97
2012 QUEST
FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND FRONT POWER WINDOW
SWITCH ARE OPERATED
WHEN BOTH POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND FRONT POWER WINDOW
SWITCH ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495683
1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
Check front power window switch (passenger side).
Refer to PWC-85, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR (PASSENGER SIDE)
Check front power window motor (passenger side).
Refer to PWC-90, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED
WHEN FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) IS OPERATED :
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495684
1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check front power window switch (passenger side) power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to PWC-83, "FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE) : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
Check front power window switch (passenger side).
Refer to PWC-85, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-98
2012 QUEST
FRONT PASSENGER SIDE POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495685
A
1.CHECK FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
B
Check front power window switch (passenger side).
Refer to PWC-85, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
C
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
D
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-99
2012 QUEST
SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES ARE OPERATED
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495686
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH
Check sliding door power window switch LH.
Refer to PWC-87, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR LH
Check sliding door power window motor LH.
Refer to PWC-91, "SLIDING DOOR LH : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
WHEN SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED
WHEN SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis
Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495687
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check sliding door power window switch LH power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to PWC-83, "SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH
Check sliding door power window switch LH.
Refer to PWC-87, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-100
2012 QUEST
SLIDING DOOR LH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495688
A
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH
B
Check sliding door power window switch LH.
Refer to PWC-87, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
C
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
D
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-101
2012 QUEST
SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES ARE OPERATED
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN AND SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES ARE OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495689
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH
Check sliding door power window switch RH.
Refer to PWC-87, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW MOTOR RH
Check sliding door power window motor RH.
Refer to PWC-91, "SLIDING DOOR RH : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
WHEN SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED
WHEN SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis
Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495690
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check sliding door power window switch RH power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to PWC-83, "SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH
Check sliding door power window switch RH.
Refer to PWC-87, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-102
2012 QUEST
SLIDING DOOR RH POWER WINDOW DOES NOT OPERATE
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
WHEN POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH IS OPERATED : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495691
A
1.CHECK SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH
B
Check sliding door power window switch RH.
Refer to PWC-87, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
C
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
D
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-103
2012 QUEST
AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE BUT MANUAL OPERATE NORMALLY (DRIVER SIDE)
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE BUT MANUAL OPERATE NORMALLY (DRIVER SIDE)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495692
1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Initialization procedure is executed and operation is confirmed.
Refer to PWC-80, "Work Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK ENCODER CIRCUIT
Check encoder circuit.
Refer to PWC-93, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-104
2012 QUEST
ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE NORMALLY (DRIVER SIDE)
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
ANTI-PINCH SYSTEM DOES NOT OPERATE NORMALLY (DRIVER SIDE)
Diagnosis Procedure
A
INFOID:0000000007495693
1.CHECK POWER WINDOW AUTO OPERATION
B
Check AUTO operation when anti-pinch function does not operate.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to PWC-104, "Diagnosis Procedure".
C
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
D
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-105
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
PROPERLY
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
POWER WINDOW RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495694
1.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH
Check front door switch.
Refer to DLK-209, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-106
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES NOT FUNCTION
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
POWER WINDOW LOCK SWITCH DOES NOT FUNCTION
Diagnosis Procedure
A
INFOID:0000000007495695
1.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
B
Replace power window main switch.
C
>> Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation".
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-107
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
POWER WINDOW SWITCH ILLUMINATION DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495696
1.REPLACE POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
Replace power window main switch.
Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495697
1.REPLACE FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH (PASSENGER SIDE)
Replace front power window switch (passenger side).
Refer to PWC-109, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END
SLIDING DOOR LH
SLIDING DOOR LH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495698
1.REPLACE SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH LH
Replace sliding door power window switch LH.
Refer to PWC-110, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END
SLIDING DOOR RH
SLIDING DOOR RH : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495699
1.REPLACE SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH RH
Replace sliding door power window switch RH.
Refer to PWC-110, "Removal and Installation".
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-108
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495700
B
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove the power window main switch finisher. Refer to INT13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove power window main switch (1) from power window
main switch finisher (2) using a remover tool (A).
C
D
: Pawl
E
NOTE:
The same procedure is also performed for front power window
switch (passenger side).
JMKIA8164ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
If power window main switch is replaced or is removed, it is necessary to perform the initialization procedure.
Refer to PWC-80, "Work Procedure".
G
H
I
J
PWC
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-109
2012 QUEST
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
[DRIVER SIDE WINDOW ANTI-PINCH]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SLIDING DOOR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495701
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove sliding door finisher. Refer to INT-16, "Removal and
Installation".
Remove screw (A), disconnect pawls from sliding door finisher
(1), and then remove power window switch finisher (2).
: Pawl
JMKIA8165ZZ
3.
Remove power window switch (1) from power window switch finisher (2) using a remover tool (A).
: Pawl
JMKIA8166ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
PWC-110
2012 QUEST
ELECTRICAL & POWER CONTROL
SECTION
PWO
POWER OUTLET
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
POWER SOCKET
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 10
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3
COMPONENT PARTS ...................................... 10
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
WIRING DIAGRAM ....................................... 4
POWER SOCKET ............................................... 4
Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 4
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 5
POWER SOCKET ............................................... 5
FRONT POWER SOCKET .......................................... 5
FRONT POWER SOCKET : Exploded View ............. 5
FRONT POWER SOCKET : Removal and Installation .......................................................................... 5
LUGGAGE ROOM POWER SOCKET ........................ 6
LUGGAGE ROOM POWER SOCKET : Exploded
View .......................................................................... 6
LUGGAGE ROOM POWER SOCKET : Removal
and Installation .......................................................... 6
Component Parts Location ......................................10
AC 120 V Outlet Main Switch ..................................10
AC 120 V Outlet .......................................................11
Inverter Unit .............................................................11
F
G
H
SYSTEM ............................................................ 12
System Description ..................................................12
Circuit Diagram ........................................................13
Fail-safe ...................................................................13
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 15
I
J
INVERTER UNIT ............................................... 15
Reference Value ......................................................15
Fail-safe ...................................................................16
K
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 17
AC 120 V POWER OUTLET ............................. 17
L
Wiring Diagram ........................................................17
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 18 PWO
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 18
Work Flow ................................................................18
N
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ............................................................. 8
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 20
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................... 8
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................20
O
AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH POWER
SUPPLY CIRCUIT ............................................. 21
P
Power Socket ............................................................ 8
AC 120 V OUTLET
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................21
PRECAUTION ............................................... 9
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 9
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 9
Revision: 2011 September
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 20
AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INPUT
SIGNAL CIRCUIT .............................................. 22
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................22
Component Inspection .............................................22
PWO-1
2012 QUEST
AC 120 V POWER OUTPUT CIRCUIT .............. 24
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 24
AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR CIRCUIT .................................................... 26
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 26
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 28
NO OUTPUT FROM AC 120 V OUTLET ........... 28
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 28
AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR DOES NOT TURN ON ............................... 29
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 29
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ................ 30
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 31
INVERTER UNIT ................................................ 31
Removal and Installation ......................................... 31
AC 120V OUTLET MAIN SW ............................ 32
Removal and Installation ......................................... 32
AC 120 V OUTLET ............................................ 33
Removal and Installation ......................................... 33
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) .......................................................... 34
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 34
AC 120 V Power Outlet ........................................... 34
Description .............................................................. 30
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-2
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
[POWER SOCKET]
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000007495760
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
C
D
E
F
G
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
I
J
K
L
PWO
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-3
2012 QUEST
POWER SOCKET
[POWER SOCKET]
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
POWER SOCKET
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007495761
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
(option abbreviation; if not
JCMWA7649GB
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-4
2012 QUEST
POWER SOCKET
[POWER SOCKET]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
POWER SOCKET
FRONT POWER SOCKET
B
FRONT POWER SOCKET : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495762
C
1
: Inner socket
2
: Ring
D
E
JSMIA0698ZZ
FRONT POWER SOCKET : Removal and Installation
F
INFOID:0000000007495763
REMOVAL
G
1.
2.
H
Remove instrument lower cover center. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Pull out inner socket (1) by pushing the pawl (B) of the ring (2)
from the inner socket hole (square) (A).
I
J
JSMIA0721ZZ
3.
Press the ring pawl from the back of the instrument lower cover
center to remove the ring.
K
L
: Pawl
PWO
N
JPMIA1610ZZ
INSTALLATION
O
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-5
2012 QUEST
POWER SOCKET
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Align the cut outs of inner socket, ring and instrument lower cover
center.
A
[POWER SOCKET]
: Cut out
JPMIA1614ZZ
LUGGAGE ROOM POWER SOCKET
LUGGAGE ROOM POWER SOCKET : Exploded View
1
: Inner socket
2
: Ring
INFOID:0000000007495764
JSMIA0699ZZ
LUGGAGE ROOM POWER SOCKET : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495765
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove clips on the rear side of the luggage side lower finisher (LH) to obtain space for work. Refer to
INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
Disconnect power socket connector.
Pull out inner socket (1) by pushing the pawl (B) of the ring (2)
from the inner socket hole (square) (A).
JSMIA0721ZZ
4.
Press the ring pawl from the back of the luggage side lower finisher (LH) to remove the ring.
: Pawl
JPMIA1610ZZ
INSTALLATION
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-6
2012 QUEST
POWER SOCKET
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
Align the cut outs of inner socket, ring and luggage side lower finisher (LH).
A
[POWER SOCKET]
A
: Cut out
B
C
JPMIA1614ZZ
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PWO
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-7
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[POWER SOCKET]
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Power Socket
INFOID:0000000007495766
Rated voltage
DC 12 V
Maximum electric capacity
120 W or less (Total)
Maximum current
10 A or less (Total)
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-8
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000007495767
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
C
D
E
F
G
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
I
J
K
L
PWO
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-9
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007495768
JSMIA0710ZZ
A.
Luggage room finisher RH remove
condition
COMPONENT PARTS DESCRIPTION
No.
Component
Function
1.
AC 120 V outlet main switch
PWO-10, "AC 120 V Outlet Main Switch"
2.
AC 120 V outlet
PWO-11, "AC 120 V Outlet"
3.
Inverter unit
PWO-11, "Inverter Unit"
AC 120 V Outlet Main Switch
INFOID:0000000007495769
The operation of the switch enables the inverter unit to activate/inactivate and turn ON/OFF AC 120 V output.
JSMIA0425ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-10
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
AC 120 V Outlet
INFOID:0000000007495770
A
The AC 120 V outlet allows using AC 120 V converted in the inverter
unit as an outlet.
B
C
D
JSMIA0712ZZ
Inverter Unit
INFOID:0000000007495771
E
The inverter unit converts an applied power supply voltage (approximately DC 12 V) to AC 120 V and outputs the converted voltage.
F
G
H
JSMIA0711ZZ
I
J
K
L
PWO
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-11
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
System Description
INFOID:0000000007495772
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSMIA0295GB
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
• When turning ON the AC 120 V outlet main switch with the ignition switch ON, the indicator turns ON and the
inverter unit is activated.
• The inverter unit converts power supply voltage to AC 120 V and outputs the converted voltage to the AC
120 V outlet two seconds after the AC 120 V outlet main switch is turned ON.
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-12
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000007495773
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
JSMIA0713GB
Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007495774
When a malfunction listed below occurs, the inverter unit turns OFF the AC 120 V outlet main switch indicator
and stops the output by operating the fail-safe.
Malfunction item
Fail-safe condition
L
PWO
Fail-safe cancellation condition
Inverter unit is overheated
When the inverter unit is overheated, the output
stops to protect the inverter unit.
After the inverter unit temperature is lowered, the
AC 120 V outlet main switch ON ⇒ OFF ⇒ ON operation allows normal return.
N
Inverter unit power supply voltage is 11.5 V or
less
When inverter unit input voltage is lowered, the output stops to protect the battery from running out.
Automatic normal return when inverter unit power
supply voltage reaches 11.5 V - 16 V.
O
Inverter unit power supply voltage is 16 V - 18 V
When inverter unit input voltage reaches 16 V - 18 V,
the output stops to protect the inverter unit.
Automatic normal return when inverter unit power
supply voltage reaches 11.5 V - 16 V.
Inverter unit power supply voltage is 18 V or
more
When inverter unit input voltage reaches 18 V or
more, the output stops to protect the inverter unit.
After the inverter unit power supply voltage reaches
11.5 V - 16 V, the AC 120V outlet main switch ON
⇒ OFF ⇒ ON operation allows normal return.
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-13
2012 QUEST
P
SYSTEM
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Malfunction item
Fail-safe condition
Fail-safe cancellation condition
Inverter unit output current is 2.8 A or more
When inverter unit output current reaches 2.8 A or
more, the output stops to prevent over current. (e.g.
connecting an electric appliance exceeding rated
output)
Automatic normal return when inverter output current reaches 2.8 A.
Inverter unit output signal
(AC 120 V output signal)
is shorted
When inverter unit output signal is shorted, the output stops.
After recovering from inverter unit output signal
short, the AC 120 V outlet main switch ON ⇒ OFF
⇒ ON operation allows normal return.
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-14
2012 QUEST
INVERTER UNIT
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
A
INVERTER UNIT
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000007495775
B
TERMINAL LAYOUT
C
D
E
JSMIA0395ZZ
F
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
−
G
Description
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
Standard
value
H
When AC 120 V outlet
main switch OFF
—
When AC 120 V outlet
main switch ON
(When using circuit
tester)
1
(B/W)
5
(L)
AC 120 V output
Output
Value
(Approx.)
Ignition
switch
ON
0V
I
AC 120 V
Reference value
When AC 120 V outlet
main switch ON
(When using oscilloscope)
J
108 – 132 V
K
JSMIA0397GB
L
AC 120 V
4
(W)
Grou
nd
Battery power
supply
Input
Ignition switch OFF
When AC 120 V outlet
main switch OFF
11.5 – 16 V
Battery power supply
—
0V
N
When AC 120 V outlet
main switch ON
(When using circuit
tester)
5
(L)
1
(B/W)
AC 120 V output
Output
Ignition
switch
ON
AC 120 V
O
Reference value
When AC 120 V outlet
main switch ON
(When using oscilloscope)
108 – 132 V
P
JSMIA0397GB
AC 120 V
Revision: 2011 September
PWO
PWO-15
2012 QUEST
INVERTER UNIT
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
−
+
Description
Signal name
AC 120 V outlet
main switch
6
(P)
7
(BR)
Grou
nd
8
(B)
AC 120 V outlet
main switch indicator
Ground
Input/
Output
Input
Output
—
Standard
value
Value
(Approx.)
When AC 120 V outlet
main switch OFF
—
0V
When AC 120 V outlet
main switch ON
—
12 V
When AC 120 V outlet
main switch OFF
—
0V
When AC 120 V outlet
main switch ON
—
5.2 V
—
0V
Condition
Ignition
switch
ON
Ignition
switch
ON
Ignition switch ON
CAUTION:
• To measure AC 120 V output signal, always use the circuit tester or oscilloscope AC range.
• Never allow the probes to contact each other.
• Because of modified sine wave output of the AC 120 V output signal, voltage cannot be measured
accurately without using a circuit tester that can measure true RMS (root mean square).
Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007495776
When a malfunction listed below occurs, the inverter unit turns OFF the AC 120 V outlet main switch indicator
and stops the output by operating the fail-safe.
Malfunction item
Fail-safe condition
Fail-safe cancellation condition
Inverter unit is overheated
When the inverter unit is overheated, the output
stops to protect the inverter unit.
After the inverter unit temperature is lowered, the
AC 120 V outlet main switch ON ⇒ OFF ⇒ ON operation allows normal return.
Inverter unit power supply voltage is 11.5 V or
less
When inverter unit input voltage is lowered, the output stops to protect the battery from running out.
Automatic normal return when inverter unit power
supply voltage reaches 11.5 V - 16 V.
Inverter unit power supply voltage is 16 V - 18 V
When inverter unit input voltage reaches 16 V - 18 V,
the output stops to protect the inverter unit.
Automatic normal return when inverter unit power
supply voltage reaches 11.5 V - 16 V.
Inverter unit power supply voltage is 18 V or
more
When inverter unit input voltage reaches 18 V or
more, the output stops to protect the inverter unit.
After the inverter unit power supply voltage reaches
11.5 V - 16 V, the AC 120V outlet main switch ON
⇒ OFF ⇒ ON operation allows normal return.
Inverter unit output current is 2.8 A or more
When inverter unit output current reaches 2.8 A or
more, the output stops to prevent over current. (e.g.
connecting an electric appliance exceeding rated
output)
Automatic normal return when inverter output current reaches 2.8 A.
Inverter unit output signal
(AC 120 V output signal)
is shorted
When inverter unit output signal is shorted, the output stops.
After recovering from inverter unit output signal
short, the AC 120 V outlet main switch ON ⇒ OFF
⇒ ON operation allows normal return.
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-16
2012 QUEST
AC 120 V POWER OUTLET
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
A
AC 120 V POWER OUTLET
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007495777
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
B
(option abbreviation; if not
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PWO
N
O
P
JRMWC4348GB
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-17
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000007495778
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JSMIA0396GB
DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW FOR MALFUNCTION
Interview the symptom to the customer.
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-18
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< BASIC INSPECTION >
>> GO TO 2.
2.SYMPTOM CHECK
A
Check the symptom from the customer's information.
B
>> GO TO 3.
3.FAIL-SAFE ACTIVATION CHECK
C
Check that the symptom is applied to the fail-safe activation.
Does the fail-safe activate?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
D
4.SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
Perform the system diagnosis for the system that the fail-safe activates. Specify the malfunctioning part.
E
>> GO TO 6.
F
5.SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Perform the symptom diagnosis. Specify the malfunctioning part.
G
>> GO TO 6.
6.MALFUNCTIONING PART REPAIR
H
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
>> GO TO 7.
I
7.REPAIR CHECK (OPERATION CHECK)
Check the operation of AC 120 V outlet.
Does it operate normally?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 3.
J
K
L
PWO
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-19
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495779
1.CHECK FUSE
Check that the following fuse is not blown.
Signal name
Fuse No.
Battery power supply
34
Is the fuse fusing?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INVERTER UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between inverter unit harness connector and ground.
Terminal
(+)
(–)
Inverter unit
Connector
Terminal
B226
4
Ground
Condition
Standard value
Voltage
(Approx.)
11.5 – 16 V
Battery voltage
Ignition switch
OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the inverter unit power supply circuit.
3.CHECK INVERTER UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the inverter unit connector.
Check for continuity between inverter unit harness connector and ground.
Inverter unit
Connector
Terminal
B226
8
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair or replace the inverter unit ground circuit.
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-20
2012 QUEST
AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
A
INFOID:0000000007495780
1.CHECK FUSE
B
Check that the following fuse is not blown.
Signal name
Fuse No.
Ignition power supply
3
C
Is the fuse fusing?
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
D
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY FOR AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH
1.
2.
E
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check for voltage between the AC 120 V main switch harness connector and ground.
F
Terminals
(+)
(–)
AC 120 V outlet main switch
Connector
Terminal
M24
2
Condition
Voltage
(Approx.)
G
OFF
0V
H
ON
Battery voltage
Ignition switch
Ground
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair the AC 120 V main switch power supply circuit.
I
J
K
L
PWO
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-21
2012 QUEST
AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495781
1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN INVERTER UNIT AND AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect inverter unit connector and AC 120 V outlet main switch connector.
Check for continuity between the inverter unit harness connector and AC 120 V outlet main switch harness connector.
Inverter unit
4.
AC 120 V outlet main switch
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
B226
6
M24
3
Continuity
Existed
Check for continuity between inverter unit harness connector and ground.
Inverter unit
Connector
Terminal
B226
6
Continuity
Ground
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
2.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect inverter unit connector and AC 120 V outlet main switch connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
AC 120 V outlet main switch ON.
Check for voltage between the inverter unit harness connector and ground.
Terminals
(+)
(–)
Inverter unit
Connector
Terminal
B226
6
Ground
Condition
AC 120 V outlet main
switch
Voltage
(Approx.)
OFF
0V
ON
12 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove AC 120 V outlet main switch.
3. Check AC 120 V outlet main switch. Refer to PWO-22, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace AC 120 V outlet main switch.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495782
1.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH
Check continuity of AC 120 V outlet main switch.
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-22
2012 QUEST
AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Terminal
1
3
Condition
A
Continuity
When AC 120 V outlet main switch is ON
Existed
When AC 120 V outlet main switch is OFF
Not existed
B
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace AC 120 V outlet main switch.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PWO
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-23
2012 QUEST
AC 120 V POWER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
AC 120 V POWER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495783
1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN INVERTER UNIT AND AC 120 V OUTLET
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect inverter unit connector and AC 120 V outlet connector.
Check for continuity between the inverter unit harness connector and AC 120 V outlet harness connector.
Inverter unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
5
B226
4.
AC 120 V outlet
Terminal
1
B271
1
Existed
2
Check for continuity between inverter unit harness connector and ground.
Inverter unit
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
5
B226
5.
Continuity
Not existed
1
Check for continuity between inverter unit harness connector.
Inverter unit
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
B226
5
1
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the harnesses or connectors.
2.CHECK INVERTER UNIT OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect inverter unit connector and AC 120 V outlet connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
AC 120 V outlet main switch ON. (AC 120 V outlet main switch indicator ON)
Check voltage between inverter unit harness connector.
Terminals
Condition
(+)
(-)
Inverter unit
Inverter unit
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
B226
5
B226
1
Standard value
Voltage
(Approx.)
OFF
Approx. 0 V
0V
ON
AC 108 – 132 V
AC 120 V
AC 120 V outlet
main switch
CAUTION:
• To measure AC 120 V output signal, always use the circuit tester AC range.
• Never allow the probes to contact each other.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3
NO
>> Replace inverter unit.
3.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET VOLTAGE
1.
2.
AC 120 V outlet main switch ON. (AC 120 V outlet main switch indicator ON)
Check voltage between AC 120 V outlet.
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-24
2012 QUEST
AC 120 V POWER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
A
Terminals
(+)
(-)
AC 120 V outlet
Standard value
AC 120 V outlet
main switch
Terminal
1
Condition
2
Voltage
(Approx.)
B
OFF
Approx. 0 V
0V
ON
AC 108 – 132 V
AC 120 V
C
CAUTION:
• To measure AC 120 V output signal, always use the circuit tester AC range.
• Never allow the probes to contact each other.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace AC 120 V outlet.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PWO
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-25
2012 QUEST
AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR CIRCUIT
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495784
1.CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN INVERTER UNIT AND AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect inverter unit connector and AC 120 V outlet main switch connector.
Check continuity between inverter unit harness connector and AC 120 V main switch harness connector.
Inverter unit
4.
AC 120 V outlet main switch
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
B226
7
M24
5
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between inverter unit harness connector and ground.
Inverter unit
Connector
Terminal
B226
7
Continuity
Ground
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
2.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between AC 120 V outlet main switch harness connector and ground.
AC 120 V outlet main switch
Connector
Terminal
M24
6
Continuity
Ground
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair the harnesses or connectors.
3.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Connect AC 120 V outlet main switch connector and inverter unit connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
AC 120 V outlet main switch ON. (AC 120 V output is normal)
Check for voltage between the inverter unit harness connector and ground.
Terminals
(+)
(–)
Inverter unit
Connector
Terminal
B226
7
Ground
Condition
AC 120 V outlet main
switch
Voltage
(Approx.)
OFF
0V
ON
5.2 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace inverter unit.
4.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR
1. AC 120 V outlet main switch ON. (AC 120 V output is normal)
2. Check that AC 120 V outlet main switch indicator is illuminated.
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-26
2012 QUEST
AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace AC 120 V outlet main switch.
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PWO
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-27
2012 QUEST
NO OUTPUT FROM AC 120 V OUTLET
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NO OUTPUT FROM AC 120 V OUTLET
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495785
1.CHECK FAIL-SAFE ACTIVATION
Check if the symptom is caused by a fail-safe operation. Refer to PWO-16, "Fail-safe".
Is fail-safe operating?
YES >> Repair the part causing fail-safe operation.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INVERTER UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check inverter unit power supply circuit. Refer to PWO-20, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check AC 120 V outlet main switch power supply circuit. Refer to PWO-21, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Check AC 120 V outlet main switch input signal circuit. Refer to PWO-22, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.CHECK INVERTER UNIT POWER OUTPUT CIRCUIT
Check inverter unit power output circuit. Refer to PWO-24, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-28
2012 QUEST
AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR DOES NOT TURN ON
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR DOES NOT TURN ON
Diagnosis Procedure
A
INFOID:0000000007495786
1.CHECK FAIL-SAFE ACTIVATION
B
Check if the symptom is caused by a fail-safe operation. Refer to PWO-16, "Fail-safe".
Is fail-safe operating?
YES >> Repair the part causing fail-safe operation.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
C
2.CHECK INVERTER UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
D
Check inverter unit power supply circuit. Refer to PWO-20, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
E
3.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check AC 120 V outlet main switch power supply circuit. Refer to PWO-21, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
F
G
4.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Check AC 120 V outlet main switch input signal circuit. Refer to PWO-22, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
H
I
5.CHECK AC 120 V OUTLET MAIN SWITCH INDICATOR CIRCUIT
Check AC 120 V outlet main switch indicator circuit. Refer to PWO-26, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
J
K
L
PWO
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-29
2012 QUEST
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Description
INFOID:0000000007495787
Because of modified sine wave output, the AC 120 V outlet may not operate normally for electric appliance of
which electric power consumption is 150 W or less.
• Electric appliances requiring a large amount of electric power consumption at startup (e.g. CRT-based TV,
power tool)
• Measuring instruments for data requiring accuracy (e.g. medical equipment, measuring instrument)
• Microprocessor-controlled appliances (e.g. microprocessor-controlled blanket)
Noise may be caused in radio or TV, depending on an electric appliance.
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-30
2012 QUEST
INVERTER UNIT
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
INVERTER UNIT
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495788
B
Remove luggage side lower finisher (RH). Refer to INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation".
Disconnect inverter unit connector.
Remove mounting bolt.
Remove inverter unit.
C
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
INSTALLATION
D
E
Install in the reverse order of removal.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
PWO
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-31
2012 QUEST
AC 120V OUTLET MAIN SW
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
AC 120V OUTLET MAIN SW
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495789
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove instrument lower panel center. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Insert remover tool (B) into pawl (A) of instrument lower panel
center and press the pawl toward direction (C) to release the
pawl.
Remove AC 120 V main switch from instrument lower panel
center in direction (D).
JSMIA0457ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-32
2012 QUEST
AC 120 V OUTLET
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
AC 120 V OUTLET
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495790
REMOVAL
1.
2.
B
Remove center console upper finisher. Refer to IP-26, "Removal and Installation".
Press pawl (A) in direction (B) from the back of center console
upper finisher to remove AC 120 V outlet in direction (C).
C
D
E
JSMIA0458ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
J
K
L
PWO
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-33
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
[AC 120 V OUTLET]
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
AC 120 V Power Outlet
INFOID:0000000007495791
Rated voltage
AC 120 V
Maximum electric capacity
150 W or less (Total)
Maximum current
1.25 A or less (Total)
Revision: 2011 September
PWO-34
2012 QUEST
TRANSMISSION & DRIVELINE
SECTION
RAX
REAR AXLE
A
B
C
RAX
E
CONTENTS
F
PREPARATION ............................................ 2
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 5
PREPARATION ................................................... 2
REAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING ................ 5
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 2
G
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 3
Exploded View .......................................................... 5
Removal and Installation .......................................... 6
Inspection ................................................................. 7
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 3
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ............................................................. 8
H
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 4
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) .................................................................. 8
I
REAR WHEEL HUB ............................................ 4
Wheel Bearing .......................................................... 8
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 3
J
Inspection .................................................................. 4
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RAX-1
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007495792
Tool name
Description
Ball joint remover
• Removing ball joint for suspension arm
• Removing hub bolt
NT146
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Revision: 2011 September
RAX-2
2012 QUEST
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
A
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
INFOID:0000000007495793
B
NVH in BR section
BRAKE
NVH in WT section
ROAD WHEEL
NVH in WT section
TIRE
NVH in RAX and RSU sections
REAR AXLE AND REAR SUSPENSION
RAX-4, "Inspection"
Wheel bearing damage
E
Parts interference
REAR AXLE
RAX
I
Noise
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
J
Shake
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Vibration
×
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
×
×
Judder
×
×
×
×
×
Poor quality ride or handling
×
×
×
×
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
Symptom
C
Improper installation, looseness
Reference
—
RAX-5, "Exploded View"
Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
F
G
H
K
L
×: Applicable
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RAX-3
2012 QUEST
REAR WHEEL HUB
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
REAR WHEEL HUB
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495794
COMPONENT PART
Check the mounting conditions (looseness, back lash) of each component and component conditions (wear,
damage) are normal.
WHEEL HUB ASSEMBLY (BEARING-INTEGRATED TYPE)
Check the following items, and replace the part it necessary.
• Move wheel hub assembly in the axial direction by hand. Check there is no looseness of wheel bearing.
Axial end play
: Refer to RAX-8, "Wheel Bearing".
• Rotate wheel hub assembly and check there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there is any
of irregular conditions, replace wheel hub assembly.
Revision: 2011 September
RAX-4
2012 QUEST
REAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
REAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495795
B
Except for 3.5LE Grade
C
RAX
E
F
G
H
JSDIA2758GB
1.
Axle housing
2.
Bushing
3.
Cotter pin
4.
Hub cap
5.
Parking brake shoe assembly
6.
Hub bolt
7.
Wheel hub assembly (Bearing-integrated type)
8.
Disc rotor
9.
Plug
I
J
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
K
For 3.5LE Grade
L
M
N
O
P
JSDIA2759GB
1.
Ball seat
2.
Axle housing
3.
Bushing
4.
Cotter pin
5.
Hub cap
6.
Parking brake shoe assembly
Revision: 2011 September
RAX-5
2012 QUEST
REAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
7.
Hub bolt
8.
Wheel hub assembly (Bearing-integrated type)
9.
Disc rotor
10. Plug
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495796
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
a.
Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
Remove wheel sensor. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and Installation".
Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly in a place where it will not interfere with work. Refer to
BR-47, "BRAKE CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
Remove disc rotor. If disc rotor cannot be removed, remove as follows.
CAUTION:
• Parking brake completely in the released position.
• Put matching marks (A) on the wheel hub assembly and
the disc rotor before removing the disc rotor.
• Never drop disc rotor.
Fix the disc rotor with wheel nuts and remove the adjusting hole
plug.
JSDIA2721ZZ
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Using suitable tool, rotate adjuster (1) in the direction (B) to
retract and loosen brake shoe.
Remove wheel hub assembly.
Remove parking brake and rear cable from back plate.
• Parking brake: Refer to PB-8, "Removal and Installation".
• Rear cable: Refer to PB-6, "Removal and Installation".
Remove radius rod from axle housing. Refer to RSU-13,
"Exploded View".
Remove rear lower link and coil spring. Refer to RSU-8,
"Removal and Installation".
JPFIB0007ZZ
Set suitable jack under axle housing.
CAUTION:
• At this step, the jack must be set only for supporting the removal procedure. For details on jacking up the vehicle, refer to GI-34, "Garage Jack and Safety Stand and 2-Pole Lift".
• Never damage the axle housing with a jack.
• Check the stable condition when using a jack.
Remove front lower link from shock absorber with power tool. Refer to RSU-10, "Exploded View".
Remove front lower link from axle housing. Refer to RSU-15, "Exploded View".
Remove cotter pin, then remove suspension arm mounting nut.
Separate suspension arm from axle housing, using ball joint remover (commercial service tool), and then
remove axle housing.
CAUTION:
• Never damage ball joint boot.
• Temporarily tighten nuts to prevent damage to threads and to prevent the ball joint remover from
coming off.
Revision: 2011 September
RAX-6
2012 QUEST
REAR WHEEL HUB AND HOUSING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
14. Remove axle housing.
15. Remove hub cap.
16. Remove hub bolts (1) from wheel hub assembly, using the ball
joint remover (A) (commercial service tool).
CAUTION:
• Remove hub bolt only when necessary.
• Never hammer the hub bolt to avoid impact to the wheel
hub assembly.
• Pull out the hub bolt in a direction perpendicular to the
wheel hub assembly.
17. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to RAX-7, "Inspection".
A
B
C
RAX
JPDIF0299ZZ
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Place a washer (A) as shown in the figure to install the hub bolts
(1) by using the tightening force of the nut (B).
CAUTION:
• Check that there is no clearance between wheel hub assembly and hub bolt.
• Never reuse hub bolt.
• Align the matching marks that have been made during removal
when reusing the disc rotor.
• Perform the final tightening of each of parts under unladen conditions, which were removed when removing suspension component.
• Never reuse cotter pin and bushing.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to RAX-7, "Inspection".
Inspection
E
F
G
H
JPDIF0300ZZ
I
INFOID:0000000007495797
J
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the wheel hub assembly for wear, cracks, and damage. Replace if necessary.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
K
Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Exploded
View".
Adjust parking brake operation (stroke). Refer to PB-3, "Inspection and Adjustment".
Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection".
Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure".
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RAX-7
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Bearing
INFOID:0000000007495798
Item
Standard
Axial end play
Revision: 2011 September
0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less
RAX-8
2012 QUEST
BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY
SECTION
RF
ROOF
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 15
WorkFlow .................................................................15
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
PREPARATION ............................................ 4
PREPARATION ................................................... 4
Special Service Tool ................................................. 4
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 5
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 5
Component Parts Location ........................................ 5
Rear Sunroof Motor Assembly .................................. 6
Rear Sunroof Switch (Rear) ...................................... 6
Front Sunroof Motor Assembly ................................. 6
Front Sunroof Switch/Rear Sunroof Switch ............... 6
SYSTEM .............................................................. 7
System Description ................................................... 7
Circuit Diagram ....................................................... 10
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 11
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT .................. 16
FRONT SUNROOF ....................................................16
FRONT SUNROOF : Description ............................16
FRONT SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement
....16
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 17
J
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 17
FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY .................17
FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY :
Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................17
RF
REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY ...................17
REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY :
Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................17
L
FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY ........ 19
Component Function Check ..................................19
Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................19
REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY .......... 21
FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY .........12
Component Function Check ..................................21
Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................21
Reference Value ..................................................... 12
Component Function Check ....................................23
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................23
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 14
SUNROOF SWITCH .......................................... 25
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 15
Revision: 2011 September
M
N
O
POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK ..................... 23
Reference Value ..................................................... 13
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 14
H
I
List of ECU Reference ............................................ 11
SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY .......................14
G
REAR SUNROOF ......................................................16
REAR SUNROOF : Description ...............................16
REAR SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement....16
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) ...................11
REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY ...........13
F
FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH .....................................25
FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH :
Component Function Check ..................................25
RF-1
2012 QUEST
P
FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH :
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 25
FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH : Component Inspection .................................................................. 26
REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) ....................... 26
REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) :
Component Function Check ................................. 26
REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) :
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 26
REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Component Inspection ....................................................... 27
REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) ......................... 28
REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) :
Component Function Check ................................. 28
REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) :
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 28
REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) : Component
Inspection ............................................................... 29
GLASS LID ........................................................ 43
FRONT SUNROOF .................................................... 43
FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View ...................... 43
FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ...... 43
FRONT SUNROOF : Adjustment ............................ 44
REAR SUNROOF ...................................................... 45
REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View ........................ 45
REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ......... 45
REAR SUNROOF : Adjustment .............................. 46
SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY ...................... 48
FRONT SUNROOF .................................................... 48
FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View ...................... 48
FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ...... 48
REAR SUNROOF ...................................................... 49
REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View ........................ 50
REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ......... 50
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 30
SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY ........................... 52
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY ....................................................................... 30
FRONT SUNROOF .................................................... 52
FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View ...................... 52
FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ...... 53
FRONT SUNROOF : Disassembly and Assembly... 54
FRONT SUNROOF ................................................... 30
FRONT SUNROOF : Description ........................... 30
FRONT SUNROOF : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 30
REAR SUNROOF ...................................................... 31
REAR SUNROOF : Description .............................. 31
REAR SUNROOF : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 31
AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE ..... 33
FRONT SUNROOF ................................................... 33
FRONT SUNROOF : Description ........................... 33
FRONT SUNROOF : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 33
REAR SUNROOF ...................................................... 33
REAR SUNROOF : Description .............................. 33
REAR SUNROOF : Diagnosis Procedure .............. 33
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE ANTIPINCH FUNCTION ............................................. 35
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 35
RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT
OPERATE PROPERLY ..................................... 36
REAR SUNROOF ...................................................... 54
REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View ........................ 54
REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ......... 56
REAR SUNROOF : Disassembly and Assembly ... 57
SUNSHADE ....................................................... 58
FRONT SUNROOF .................................................... 58
FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View ...................... 58
FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ...... 58
REAR SUNROOF ...................................................... 59
REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View ........................ 60
REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ......... 60
WIND DEFLECTOR ........................................... 62
FRONT SUNROOF .................................................... 62
FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View ...................... 62
FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ...... 62
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 36
REAR SUNROOF ...................................................... 63
REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View ........................ 64
REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation ......... 64
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES ............................................................... 37
SUNROOF SWITCH .......................................... 66
Work Flow ............................................................... 37
Inspection Procedure .............................................. 39
Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................. 41
FRONT ....................................................................... 66
FRONT : Removal and Installation ......................... 66
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 43
REAR ......................................................................... 67
REAR : Removal and Installation ............................ 67
Revision: 2011 September
RF-2
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000007494922
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
C
D
E
F
G
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
I
J
RF
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RF-3
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000007494923
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
(J39570)
Chassis ear
Locates the noise
SIIA0993E
(J43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit
Repairs the cause of noise
SIIA0994E
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000007494924
Tool name
Description
Engine ear
Locates the noise
SIIA0995E
Remover tool
Removes the clips, pawls and metal clips
JMKIA3050ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
RF-4
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007494925
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
RF
L
M
N
JMKIA8172GB
A.
View with headlining removed
B.
View with headlining removed
O
No.
Component
1.
Rear sunroof motor assembly
Refer to RF-6, "Rear Sunroof Motor Assembly".
2.
Rear sunroof switch (rear)
Refer to RF-6, "Rear Sunroof Switch (Rear)".
3.
Front sunroof motor assembly
Refer to RF-6, "Front Sunroof Motor Assembly".
4.
Front sunroof switch/rear sunroof switch (front)
Refer to RF-6, "Front Sunroof Switch/Rear Sunroof Switch".
5.
Combination meter
Transmits vehicle speed signal to front sunroof motor assembly and rear sunroof motor assembly.
Revision: 2011 September
Function
RF-5
P
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.
Component
Function
6.
BCM
Supplies the power supply to front sunroof motor assembly and rear sunroof motor assembly.
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
7.
Power window lock switch
(Power window main switch)
Power window lock switch can lock rear sunroof.
8.
Front door switch (driver side)
Detects door open/close condition and transmits to BCM.
Rear Sunroof Motor Assembly
INFOID:0000000007849158
It is rear sunroof motor and CPU integrated type that enables tilt up/down & slide open/close by rear sunroof
switch (front/rear) operation.
Rear Sunroof Switch (Rear)
INFOID:0000000007849159
Transmits tilt up/down & slides open/close operation signal to rear sunroof motor assembly.
Front Sunroof Motor Assembly
INFOID:0000000007849160
It is front sunroof motor and CPU integrated type that enables tilt up/down & slide open/close by front sunroof
switch operation.
Front Sunroof Switch/Rear Sunroof Switch
INFOID:0000000007849161
Transmits tilt up/down & slides open/close operation signal to front sunroof motor assembly and rear sunroof
motor assembly.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-6
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
A
System Description
INFOID:0000000007494926
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
JMKIA8122GB
DESCRIPTION
J
• Sunroof motor assembly operates with the power supply that is output from BCM while ignition switch is ON.
• Tilt up/down and slide open/close signals sunroof switch enables operate sunroof motor to move arbitrarily.
• Sunroof motor assembly receives a vehicle speed signal from combination meter and controls the sunroof
RF
motor operation.
• Ground circuit inside power window main switch shuts off when power window lock switch is ON. This inhibits rear sunroof operation.
L
Front Sunroof Operation Description
The front sunroof operate to the following condition by the sunroof switch operation.
Sunroof position before operation
Switch operation
Sunroof action
Sunroof position after operation
M
Tilt up
N
Fully-closed
Close
Tilt up
O
JMKIA5870ZZ
Fully-open
P
JMKIA5779ZZ
A: Glass lid
B: Roof panel
Open
Open
JMKIA5947ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
RF-7
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Sunroof position before operation
Switch operation
Sunroof action
Sunroof position after operation
Fully-open
Fully-closed
Close
Close
JMKIA5946ZZ
A: Glass lid
B: Roof panel
JMKIA5948ZZ
Tilt up
Fully-closed
Open
Tilt down
JMKIA5777ZZ
A: Glass lid
B: Roof panel
JMKIA5869ZZ
Rear Sunroof Operation Description
The rear sunroof operate to the following condition by the sunroof switch operation.
Sunroof position before operation
Switch operation
Sunroof action
Sunroof position after operation
Tilt up
Fully-closed
Close
Tilt up
JMKIA5870ZZ
Fully-open
JMKIA5779ZZ
A: Glass lid
B: Roof panel
Open
Open
JMKIA5871ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
RF-8
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Sunroof position before operation
Switch operation
Sunroof action
Sunroof position after operation
A
Fully-open
Fully-closed
B
Close
Close
C
JMKIA5781ZZ
A: Glass lid
B: Roof panel
JMKIA5872ZZ
D
Tilt up
Fully-closed
E
Open
Tilt down
F
JMKIA5777ZZ
A: Glass lid
B: Roof panel
JMKIA5869ZZ
Auto Operation
• Front sunroof AUTO feature makes it possible to slide open or tilt up the sunroof without holding the front
sunroof switch in the slide open or tilt up position.
• Rear sunroof AUTO feature makes it possible to slide open and slide close or tilt up and tilt down the sunroof
without holding the rear sunroof switch (front/rear) in the slide open/tilt down or slide close/tilt up position.
NOTE:
• Auto operation can not be performed under the non-initialized condition.
• Auto operation is not available for tilt down and slide close of front sunroof.
Retained Power Operation
Retained power operation is an additional power supply function that enables sunroof system to operate for 45
seconds period after ignition switch is turned OFF.
G
H
I
J
Retained power function cancel conditions
• Front door CLOSE (door switch OFF) → OPEN (door switch ON)
• Ignition switch is ON again
• Timer passed (45 seconds)
RF
Anti-Pinch Function
The CPU of sunroof motor assembly monitors the sunroof motor operation and the sunroof position (fullyclosed or other) by the signals from sunroof motor.
When sunroof motor detects an interruption during the following slide close and tilt down operation, sunroof
switch controls the motor for open and the sunroof will operate until full up position (when tilt down operate) or
150 mm (5.91 in) or more in an open direction (when slide close operate).
NOTE:
Depending on environment and driving conditions, if a similar impact or load is applied to the sunroof, it may
lower.
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RF-9
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000007494927
JMKIA8123GB
Revision: 2011 September
RF-10
2012 QUEST
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
A
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
List of ECU Reference
INFOID:0000000007494928
ECU
Reference
C
BCS-36, "Reference Value"
BCM
B
BCS-58, "Fail-safe"
BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
D
BCS-59, "DTC Index"
E
F
G
H
I
J
RF
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RF-11
2012 QUEST
FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000007494929
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JMKIA2225ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Description
+
–
1
(B)
Ground
Ground
3
(R)
Ground
Ignition ON signal
Ground
Front sunroof switch
(DOWN/OPEN signal)
5
(LG)
Signal name
Input/
Output
Condition
Voltage
—
—
—
Input
Input
Ignition switch ON
9 – 16 V
Other than the above
0V
Sunroof switch in following position
• TILT DOWN
• SLIDE OPEN
0 – 3V
Other than the above
9 – 16 V
6
(L)
Ground
Sunroof power supply
Input
—
8
(Y)
Ground
Vehicle speed signal
Input
Speedometer operated [When vehicle
speed is approx.40 km/ h (25 MPH)]
9 – 16 V
JSNIA0012GB
10
(W)
Ground
Front sunroof switch
(UP/CLOSE signal)
Revision: 2011 September
Input
Sunroof switch in following position
• TILT UP
• SLIDE CLOSE
0 – 3V
Other than the above
9 – 16 V
RF-12
2012 QUEST
REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
A
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000007494930
TERMINAL LAYOUT
B
C
D
JMKIA2225ZZ
E
PHYSICAL VALUES
F
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
–
1
(B)
Ground
3
(R)
5
(P)
6
(L)
Ground
Ground
Ground
Description
Signal name
Ground
Ignition ON signal
Rear sunroof switch
(DOWN/OPEN signal)
Sunroof power supply
Input/
Output
—
Input
Input
Condition
Voltage
—
—
Ignition switch ON
Other than the above
G
H
9 – 16 V
0V
I
Sunroof switch in following position
• TILT DOWN
• SLIDE OPEN
0 – 3V
Other than the above
9 – 16 V
Input
—
J
9 – 16 V
RF
7
(W)
Ground
Rear sunroof lock signal
Input/
Output
• Ignition switch ON
• Within 45 second after ignition
switch is turned to OFF
L
JPMIA0013GB
M
N
8
(Y)
Ground
Vehicle speed signal
Input
Speedometer operated [When vehicle speed is approx.40 km/ h (25
MPH)]
O
JSNIA0012GB
10
(G)
Ground
Rear sunroof switch
(UP/CLOSE signal)
Revision: 2011 September
Input
Sunroof switch in following position
• TILT UP
• SLIDE CLOSE
0 – 3V
Other than the above
9 – 16 V
RF-13
2012 QUEST
P
SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007494931
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
(option abbreviation; if not
JCKWA4091GB
Revision: 2011 September
RF-14
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
WorkFlow
INFOID:0000000007494932
B
DETAILED FLOW
1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM
C
Interview the customer to obtain the malfunction information (conditions and environment when the malfunction occurred) as much as possible when the customer brings the vehicle in.
D
>> GO TO 2.
2.REPRODUCE THE MALFUNCTION INFORMATION
E
Check the malfunction on the vehicle that the customer describes.
Inspect the relation of the symptoms and the condition when the symptoms occur.
F
>> GO TO 3.
3.IDENTIFY THE MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM WITH “SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS”
Use “Symptom diagnosis” from the symptom inspection result in step 2 and then identify where to start performing the diagnosis based on possible causes and symptoms.
G
H
>> GO TO 4.
4.IDENTIFY THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS WITH “COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS”
I
Perform the diagnosis with “Component diagnosis” of the applicable system.
>> GO TO 5.
J
5.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace the specified malfunctioning parts.
RF
>> GO TO 6.
6.FINAL CHECK
L
Check that malfunctions are not reproduced when obtaining the malfunction information from the customer,
referring to the symptom inspection result in step 2.
Are the malfunctions corrected?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 3.
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RF-15
2012 QUEST
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
FRONT SUNROOF
FRONT SUNROOF : Description
INFOID:0000000007494933
MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE
Initialization of system should be conducted after the following conditions.
• When the front sunroof motor is changed.
• When the front sunroof does not open automatically.
FRONT SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000007494934
INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Press front sunroof switch toward tilt up side and set glass lid to the tilt up position.
Release the front sunroof switch, press the front sunroof switch toward tilt up side again, press and hold
the switch for 10 seconds or more until glass lid starts to move.
Release the front sunroof switch once, press and hold the front sunroof switch toward tilt up side.
The glass lid moves little by little and closes. (Press and hold the switch during this operation)
After the glass lid stops, release the front sunroof switch, and within the first 4 seconds, press and hold
front sunroof switch toward tilt up side.
After 4 seconds, the glass lid automatically operates in sequence of slide open and slide close.
When the glass lid stops, release the front sunroof switch after 0.5 second or more.
Operate front sunroof switch, and if front sunroof is operated normally, the initialization is complete.
REAR SUNROOF
REAR SUNROOF : Description
INFOID:0000000007494935
MEMORY RESET PROCEDURE
Initialization of system should be conducted after the following conditions.
• When the rear sunroof motor is changed.
• When the rear sunroof does not open or close automatically.
REAR SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000007494936
INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press rear sunroof switch (front or rear) toward tilt up side and set glass lid to the tilt up position.
Release the rear sunroof switch, press the rear sunroof switch toward tilt up side again, press and hold
the switch for 10 seconds or more until glass lid starts to move.
The glass lid moves slightly toward tilt up direction then stops. (Press and hold the rear sunroof switch
during this operation).
Release the rear sunroof switch once, press and hold the rear sunroof switch (tilt up side) within the first 4
seconds.
After 4 seconds, the glass lid automatically operates in sequence of tilt down, slide open and slide close.
When the glass lid stops, release the rear sunroof switch after 0.5 seconds or more.
Operate front sunroof switch, and if front sunroof is operated normally, the initialization is complete.
ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION
1. Full open the sunroof.
2. Place a wooden piece (wooden hammer handle, etc.) at near fully closed position.
3. Close the sunroof completely with auto-slide close.
Check that sunroof lowers for approximately 150 mm (5.91in) with out pinching a wooden piece and stops.
CAUTION:
• Never check with hands and other part of body because they may be pinched. Never get pinched.
• Depending on environment and driving conditions, if a similar impact or lord is applied to the sunroof it may lower.
• Check that auto-slide operates before inspection when system initialization is performed.
• Perform initial setting when auto-slide operation or anti-pinch function does not operate normally.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-16
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
A
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
B
FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007494937
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
C
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front sunroof motor assembly and rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground.
(+)
D
E
Front sunroof motor assembly
Connector
Terminal
R31
6
(–)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9.0 – 16.0
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
F
G
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM harness connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front sunroof motor assembly harness connector.
BCM
4.
I
Front sunroof motor assembly
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M123
69
R31
6
Continuity
Existed
J
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
RF
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M123
69
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check BCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
H
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between front sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground.
Front sunroof motor assembly
Connector
Terminal
R31
1
Ground
M
N
Continuity
O
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
P
REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007494938
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY
Revision: 2011 September
L
RF-17
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front sunroof motor assembly and rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground.
(+)
Rear sunroof motor assembly
Connector
Terminal
R32
6
(–)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9.0 – 16.0
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM harness connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector.
BCM
4.
Rear sunroof motor assembly
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M123
69
R32
6
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M123
69
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check BCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground.
Rear sunroof motor assembly
Connector
Terminal
R32
1
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-18
2012 QUEST
FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007494939
1.CHECK FUNCTION-I
B
Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with front sunroof switch.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
C
2.CHECK FUNCTION-II
D
1. Perform initialization procedure. Refer to RF-16, "FRONT SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement".
2. Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with front sunroof switch.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to RF-19, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
3.CHECK FUNCTION-III
F
1.
2.
Start engine.
Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle.
If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
3. Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with front sunroof switch.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to RF-19, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007494940
G
H
I
J
1.CHECK IGNTION ON SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front sunroof motor assembly and rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground.
RF
L
(+)
Front sunroof motor assembly
Connector
Terminal
R31
3
(–)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9.0 – 16.0
N
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
O
2.CHECK IGNTION ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM harness connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front sunroof motor assembly harness connector.
BCM
4.
Front sunroof motor assembly
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M123
68
R31
3
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
M
RF-19
2012 QUEST
P
FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M123
68
Continuity
Ground
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check BCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
Check continuity between front sunroof motor assembly harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
Front sunroof motor assembly
4.
Combination meter
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
R31
8
M34
31
Continuity
Exists
Check continuity between front sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground.
Front sunroof motor assembly
Connector
Terminal
R31
8
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK COMBINATION METER
Check combination meter.
Refer to MWI-60, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-48, "FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and
Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-20
2012 QUEST
REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007494941
1.CHECK FUNCTION-I
B
Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with rear sunroof switch (front/rear).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
C
2.CHECK FUNCTION-II
D
1. Perform initialization procedure. Refer to RF-16, "REAR SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement".
2. Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with rear sunroof switch (front/rear).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Refer to RF-21, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
3.CHECK FUNCTION-III
F
1.
2.
Start engine.
Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH).
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
This procedure may be conducted with the drive wheels lifted in the shop or by driving the vehicle.
If a road test is expected to be easier, it is unnecessary to lift the vehicle.
3. Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with rear sunroof switch (front/rear).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to RF-21, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007494942
G
H
I
J
1.CHECK IGNTION ON SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front sunroof motor assembly and rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground.
RF
L
(+)
Rear sunroof motor assembly
Connector
Terminal
R32
3
(–)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9.0 – 16.0
N
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
O
2.CHECK IGNTION ON SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM harness connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector.
BCM
4.
Rear sunroof motor assembly
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M123
68
R32
3
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
M
RF-21
2012 QUEST
P
REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M123
68
Continuity
Ground
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check BCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter harness connector.
Check continuity between rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector and combination meter harness connector.
Rear sunroof motor assembly
4.
Combination meter
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
R32
8
M34
31
Continuity
Exists
Check continuity between rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground.
Rear sunroof motor assembly
Connector
Terminal
R32
8
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK COMBINATION METER
Check combination meter.
Refer to MWI-60, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-50, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-22
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007494943
1.CHECK FUNCTION
B
Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.
Power window main switch (power window lock switch)
C
Rear sunroof
ON (LOCK)
Operate
OFF (UNLOCK)
Non-operation
D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to RF-23, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007494944
F
1.CHECK REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check signal between rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground.
G
(+)
Rear sunroof motor assembly
Connector
Signal
(Reference value)
(–)
H
Terminal
I
R32
7
Ground
J
JPMIA0013GB
RF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
L
2.CHECK REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT-I
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear sunroof motor assembly and power window main switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector and ground.
M
N
(+)
Rear sunroof motor assembly
Connector
Terminal
R32
7
(–)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9.0 – 16.0
O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
P
3.CHECK REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY SERIAL LINK CIRCUIT-II
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM harness connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-23
2012 QUEST
POWER WINDOW SERIAL LINK
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BCM
4.
Rear sunroof motor assembly
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M121
8
R32
7
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M121
8
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
Check power window main switch.
Refer to PWC-45, "POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-50, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-24
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
SUNROOF SWITCH
A
FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH
FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007494945
B
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with front sunroof switch.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to RF-26, "REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure".
FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure
C
D
INFOID:0000000007494946
1.CHECK FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front sunroof switch harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between sunroof switch harness connector and ground.
F
(+)
G
Front sunroof switch
Connector
(−)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9.0 – 16.0
Terminal
H
1
R6
3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
I
2.CHECK FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front sunroof motor assembly harness connector.
Check continuity between front sunroof switch harness connector and front sunroof motor assembly har- RF
ness connector.
Front sunroof switch
Connector
Front sunroof motor assembly
Terminal
Connector
1
R6
4.
J
Terminal
5
R31
3
10
Continuity
Existed
M
Check continuity between front sunroof switch harness connector and ground.
N
Front sunroof switch
Connector
R6
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
1
Not existed
3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-48, "FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and
Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
L
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between front sunroof switch harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-25
2012 QUEST
O
P
SUNROOF SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Front sunroof switch
Connector
Terminal
R6
2
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
4.CHECK FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH
Check front sunroof switch.
Refer to RF-27, "REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Replace sunroof switch (front). Refer to RF-66, "FRONT : Removal and Installation".
FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH : Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007494947
SUNROOF SWITCH
1.CHECK FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front sunroof switch harness connector.
Check continuity front sunroof switch terminals.
Terminal
Condition
1
2
Front sunroof switch
3
Continuity
Tilt down or slide open
Existed
Other than the above
Not existed
Tilt up or slide close
Existed
Other than the above
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace sunroof switch (front). Refer to RF-66, "FRONT : Removal and Installation".
REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT)
REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007494948
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with rear sunroof switch (front).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to RF-26, "REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure".
REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007494949
1.CHECK REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear sunroof switch (front) and rear sunroof switch (rear) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear sunroof switch (front) harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-26
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
(+)
A
Rear sunroof switch (front)
Connector
(−)
Voltage (V)
Terminal
B
4
R6
Ground
6
9.0 – 16.0
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
C
2.CHECK REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) CIRCUIT
D
1.
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector.
Check continuity between rear sunroof switch (front) harness connector and rear sunroof motor assembly
harness connector.
Rear sunroof switch (front)
Connector
Connector
4
R6
4.
Rear sunroof motor assembly
Terminal
Terminal
5
R32
6
10
Continuity
Existed
G
Check continuity between rear sunroof switch (front) harness connector and ground.
H
Rear sunroof switch (front)
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
4
R6
Not existed
6
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-50, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
F
I
J
RF
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between rear sunroof switch (front) harness connector and ground.
Rear sunroof switch (front)
Connector
Terminal
R6
5
Ground
L
Continuity
M
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
N
4.CHECK REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT)
Check rear sunroof switch (front).
Refer to RF-27, "REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Replace rear sunroof switch (front). Refer to RF-66, "FRONT : Removal and Installation".
REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007494950
SUNROOF SWITCH
1.CHECK REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT)
Revision: 2011 September
RF-27
2012 QUEST
O
P
SUNROOF SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect rear sunroof switch (front) harness connector.
3. Check continuity rear sunroof switch (front) terminals.
Terminal
Condition
4
Rear sunroof switch
(front)
5
6
Continuity
Tilt down or slide open
Existed
Other than the above
Not existed
Tilt up or slide close
Existed
Other than the above
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace sunroof switch (front). Refer to RF-66, "FRONT : Removal and Installation".
REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR)
REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) : Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007494951
1.CHECK FUNCTION
Check tilt up/down and slide open/close operations with rear sunroof switch (rear).
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Refer to RF-28, "REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure".
REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007494952
1.CHECK REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear sunroof switch (front) and rear sunroof switch (rear) harness connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear sunroof switch (rear) harness connector and ground.
(+)
Rear sunroof switch (rear)
Connector
(−)
Voltage (V)
Ground
9.0 – 16.0
Terminal
1
R112
3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear sunroof motor assembly harness connector.
Check continuity between rear sunroof switch (rear) harness connector and rear sunroof motor assembly
harness connector.
Rear sunroof switch (rear)
Connector
R112
4.
Terminal
1
3
Rear sunroof motor assembly
Connector
R32
Terminal
5
10
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between rear sunroof switch (rear) harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-28
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Rear sunroof switch (rear)
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
Ground
1
R112
Not existed
3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-50, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
A
B
C
D
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check continuity between rear sunroof switch (rear) harness connector and ground.
E
Rear sunroof switch (rear)
Connector
Terminal
R112
2
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness or connector.
F
G
4.CHECK REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR)
Check rear sunroof switch (rear).
Refer to RF-27, "REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT) : Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Replace rear sunroof switch (rear). Refer to RF-67, "REAR : Removal and Installation".
REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR) : Component Inspection
H
I
INFOID:0000000007494953
J
SUNROOF SWITCH
1.CHECK REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR)
1.
2.
3.
RF
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear sunroof switch (rear) harness connector.
Check continuity rear sunroof switch (rear) terminals.
Terminal
Condition
1
2
3
Rear sunroof switch
(rear)
L
Continuity
Tilt down or slide open
Existed
Other than the above
Not existed
Tilt up or slide close
Existed
Other than the above
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace rear sunroof switch (rear). Refer to RF-67, "REAR : Removal and Installation".
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RF-29
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
FRONT SUNROOF
FRONT SUNROOF : Description
INFOID:0000000007494954
Sunroof does not operate normally.
• Glass lid does not slide or tilt.
• Judder occurs during sliding operation of glass lid.
• Sliding or tilting operation of glass lid is slow.
FRONT SUNROOF : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007494955
1.CHECK GLASS LID
Check the following items.
• Cracks, damage, or deformation of weather-strip.
• Sticking of weather-strip.
• Loose or missing glass lid mounting blot.
• Misalignment of glass lid.
Refer to RF-43, "FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK SUNROOF FRAME ASSEMBLY
Check the following items.
• Damage, deformation or trapped foreign material of slide rail.
• Insufficient application of grease to sliding section of slide rail.
Refer to RF-52, "FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK SUNSHADE
Check sunshade for damage, deformation, of interference with other parts.
Refer to RF-58, "FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check BCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to the following.
Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check sunroof motor assembly power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to RF-17, "FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6.CHECK SUNROOF SWITCH
Check sunroof switch.
Refer to RF-25, "FRONT SUNROOF SWITCH : Component Function Check".
Revision: 2011 September
RF-30
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
A
7.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
B
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
C
REAR SUNROOF
D
REAR SUNROOF : Description
INFOID:0000000007494956
Sunroof does not operate normally.
• Glass lid does not slide or tilt.
• Judder occurs during sliding operation of glass lid.
• Sliding or tilting operation of glass lid is slow.
REAR SUNROOF : Diagnosis Procedure
E
INFOID:0000000007494957
F
1.CHECK GLASS LID
Check the following items.
• Cracks, damage, or deformation of weather-strip.
• Sticking of weather-strip.
• Loose or missing glass lid mounting blot.
• Misalignment of glass lid.
Refer to RF-45, "REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
G
2.CHECK SUNROOF FRAME ASSEMBLY
J
H
I
Check the following items.
• Damage, deformation or trapped foreign material of slide rail.
• Insufficient application of grease to sliding section of slide rail.
Refer to RF-54, "REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
RF
L
3.CHECK SUNSHADE
M
Check sunshade for damage, deformation, of interference with other parts.
Refer to RF-60, "REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
N
4.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
O
Check BCM power supply and ground circuit. Refer to the following.
Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
P
5.CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check sunroof motor assembly power supply and ground circuit.
Refer to RF-17, "REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
Revision: 2011 September
RF-31
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6.CHECK SUNROOF SWITCH
Check sunroof switch. Refer to the following.
• Rear sunroof switch (front): Refer to RF-26, "REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (FRONT)
Component Function Check".
• Rear sunroof switch (rear): Refer to RF-28, "REAR SUNROOF SWITCH (REAR)
Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
:
:
7.CONFIRM THE OPERATION
Confirm the operation again.
Is the result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-32
2012 QUEST
AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
FRONT SUNROOF
FRONT SUNROOF : Description
INFOID:0000000007494958
B
Auto operation does not operate
• Auto operation of glass lid does not operate.
• Glass lid stops halfway.
• Anti-pinch function operates.
C
FRONT SUNROOF : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007494959
D
1.CHECK GLASS LID
Check the following items.
• Cracks, damage, or deformation of weather-strip.
• Sticking of weather-strip.
• Loose or missing glass lid mounting blot.
• Misalignment of glass lid.
Refer to RF-43, "FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
E
F
G
2.CHECK WIND DEFLECTOR
H
Check wind deflector for deformation and interference.
Refer to RF-62, "FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
I
3.CHECK SUNROOF FRAME ASSEMBLY
J
Check the following items.
• Damage, deformation or trapped foreign material of slide rail.
• Insufficient application of grease to sliding section of slide rail.
Refer to RF-52, "FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
RF
L
4.PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Perform initialization procedure.
Refer to RF-16, "FRONT SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-48, "FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
M
REAR SUNROOF
O
REAR SUNROOF : Description
INFOID:0000000007494960
P
Auto operation does not operate
• Auto operation of glass lid does not operate.
• Glass lid stops halfway.
• Anti-pinch function operates.
REAR SUNROOF : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007494961
1.CHECK GLASS LID
Revision: 2011 September
N
RF-33
2012 QUEST
AUTO OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Check the following items.
• Cracks, damage, or deformation of weather-strip.
• Sticking of weather-strip.
• Loose or missing glass lid mounting blot.
• Misalignment of glass lid.
Refer to RF-45, "REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK WIND DEFLECTOR
Check wind deflector for deformation and interference.
Refer to RF-64, "REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK SUNROOF FRAME ASSEMBLY
Check the following items.
• Damage, deformation or trapped foreign material of slide rail.
• Insufficient application of grease to sliding section of slide rail.
Refer to RF-54, "REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
Perform initialization procedure.
Refer to RF-16, "FRONT SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace sunroof motor assembly. Refer to RF-50, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
RF-34
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE ANTI-PINCH FUNCTION
Diagnosis Procedure
A
INFOID:0000000007494962
1.PERFORM INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE
B
Perform initialization procedure.
Refer to RF-16, "FRONT SUNROOF : Special Repair Requirement".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Inspection end.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
RF
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RF-35
2012 QUEST
RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
RETAINED POWER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007494963
1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-209, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
Check sunroof motor assembly power supply and ground circuit. Refer to the following.
• Front sunroof motor assembly: Refer to RF-17, "FRONT SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY :
Diagnosis Procedure".
• Rear sunroof motor assembly: Refer to RF-17, "REAR SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY :
Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.REPLACE BCM
• Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
• Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
Revision: 2011 September
RF-36
2012 QUEST
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow
A
INFOID:0000000007494964
B
C
D
E
F
SBT842
G
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diagnostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any H
customer comments. Refer to RF-41, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate the
conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
I
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, perform a diagnosis and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by performing a test drive with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics J
are provided so that the customer, service adviser, and technician use the same language when describing
the noise.
• Squeak – (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
RF
Squeak characteristics include the light contact / fast movement / brought on by road conditions / hard surfaces = high-pitched noise / softer surfaces = low-pitched noises / edge to surface = chirping
• Creak – (Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact / slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement / pitch L
dependent on materials / often brought on by activity.
• Rattle – (Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include fast repeated contact / vibration or similar movement / loose parts/missing clip M
or fastener / incorrect clearance.
• Knock – (Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounds / sometimes repeating / often brought on by driver action.
N
• Tick – (Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials / loose components / can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise)
O
Thump characteristics include softer knock / dull sounds often brought on by activity.
• Buzz – (Like a bumblebee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle / firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level varies depending upon the person. A noise that a technician may P
judge as acceptable may be very irritating to a customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when the repair is reconfirmed.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-37
2012 QUEST
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to duplicate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following items:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T models, drive position on A/T models).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to the concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1.
Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis ear: J-39570, engine ear, and mechanics stethoscope).
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• Removing the component(s) in the area that is / are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fasteners can be broken
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• Tapping or pushing/pulling the component(s) that is / are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component(s) with excessive force, otherwise the noise is eliminated only temporarily.
• Feeling for a vibration by hand by touching the component(s) that is / are suspected to be the cause of the
noise.
• Placing a piece of paper between components that are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
• Looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to RF-39, "Inspection Procedure".
REPAIR THE CAUSE
•
•
-
If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the components, if possible.
Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape, or urethane tape. A NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through the authorized NISSAN Parts
Department.
CAUTION:
Never use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
• 76268-9E005: 100 × 135 mm (3.937 × 5.315 in)
• 76884-71L01: 60 × 85 mm (2.362 × 3.346 in)
• 76884-71L02: 15 × 25 mm (0.591 × 0.984 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
• 73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.772 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.969 × 1.969 in)
• 73982-50Y00: 10 mm (0.394 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.969 × 1.969 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.181 in) thick, 30 × 50 mm (1.181 × 1.969in)
FELT CLOTHTAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
• 68370-4B000: 15 × 25 mm (0.591 × 0.984 in) pad
• 68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.197 in) wide tape roll
Revision: 2011 September
RF-38
2012 QUEST
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that is visible or does not fit. Only lasts a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Used when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Used to eliminate movement.
A
B
C
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
After repair is complete, test drive the vehicle to confirm that the cause of noise is repaired by test driving the
vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the
notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Inspection Procedure
INFOID:0000000007494965
D
E
Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by
applying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate
wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Never use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If the area is saturated with silicone, the
recheck of repair becomes impossible.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to check include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
F
G
H
I
J
RF
L
M
DOORS
Check the following items:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon connection to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping, moving the components, or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. The areas can usually be insulated with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the NISSAN Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the customer.
In addition check for the following items:
1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
Revision: 2011 September
RF-39
2012 QUEST
N
O
P
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
3. Trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing, or insulating the item(s) or component(s) causing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof / headlining area can often be traced to one of the following items:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage, or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it is important to note the position the seat is in and the load placed on the seat
when the noise occurs. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the
noise.
Causes of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the conditions under which the noise occurs. Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move, or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-40
2012 QUEST
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Diagnostic Worksheet
INFOID:0000000007494966
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
RF
L
M
N
O
PIIB8740E
Revision: 2011 September
RF-41
2012 QUEST
P
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
PIIB8742E
Revision: 2011 September
RF-42
2012 QUEST
GLASS LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
GLASS LID
FRONT SUNROOF
B
FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494967
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
RF
L
M
N
JMKIA6143ZZ
O
1.
Glass lid
2.
TORX bolt
3.
Front sunroof bracket
4.
Center drain hose
5.
Side trim
6.
Front drain hose
7.
Front drain connector
8.
Sunroof motor assembly
9.
Sunroof unit assembly
P
: Metal clip
FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494968
REMOVAL
1.
Tilt up glass lid and remove side trims (LH and RH).
Revision: 2011 September
RF-43
2012 QUEST
GLASS LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Remove glass lid mounting TORX bolts, and then remove glass lid from vehicle.
3. Fully close glass lid.
INSTALLAITON
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
After installation carry out fitting adjustment. Refer to RF-44, "FRONT SUNROOF : Adjustment".
FRONT SUNROOF : Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007494969
Adjustment
JMKIA6146ZZ
1.
Roof panel
2.
Glass lid
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the proceduresshownbelow.
1.
2.
3.
Tilt up glass lid and remove side trims (LH and RH).
Loosen glass lid mounting TORX bolts.
Adjust the clearance of glass lid and roof panel according to the fitting standard dimension.
Portion
a (Clearance)
b (Surface height difference)
A–A
6.5 – 8.1 mm
(0.256 – 0.319 in)
(−2.3) – (+0.7) mm
[(−0.091) – (+0.028) in]
B–B
6.5 – 8.1 mm
(0.256 – 0.319 in)
(−2.3) – (+0.7) mm
[(−0.091) – (+0.028) in]
C–C
6.5 – 8.1 mm
(0.256 – 0.319 in)
(−2.3) – (+0.7) mm
[(−0.091) – (+0.028) in]
Revision: 2011 September
RF-44
2012 QUEST
GLASS LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. To prevent glass lid from moving after adjustment, first tighten the TORX bolts of front left, and thentightenthe TORX bolts of rear right.
5. Tilt glass lid up and down several times to check that it moves smoothly.
NOTE:
After adjustment the sunroof unit assembly, perform additional service. Refer to RF-16, "FRONT SUNROOF :
Description".
A
B
REAR SUNROOF
C
REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494970
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
RF
L
M
N
O
JMKIA6144ZZ
1.
Glass lid
2.
TORX bolt
3.
Side trim
4.
Rear sunroof bracket
5.
Rear drain hose
6.
Rear drain connector
7.
Rear display bracket
8.
Sunroof motor assembly
9.
Sunroof unit assembly
REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation
P
INFOID:0000000007494971
REMOVAL
Revision: 2011 September
RF-45
2012 QUEST
GLASS LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Tilt up glass lid and remove side trims (LH and RH).
2. Remove glass lid mounting TORX bolts, and then remove glass lid from vehicle.
3. Fully close glass lid.
INSTALLAITON
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
After installation carry out fitting adjustment. Refer to RF-46, "REAR SUNROOF : Adjustment".
REAR SUNROOF : Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007494972
Adjustment
JMKIA6147ZZ
1.
Roof panel
2.
Glass lid
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the proceduresshownbelow.
1.
2.
3.
Tilt up glass lid and remove side trims (LH and RH).
Loosen glass lid mounting TORX bolts.
Adjust the clearance of glass lid and roof panel according to the fitting standard dimension.
Portion
a (Clearance)
b (Surface height difference)
A–A
6.5 – 8.1 mm
(0.256 – 0.319 in)
(−2.3) – (+0.7) mm
[(−0.091) – (+0.028) in]
B–B
6.5 – 8.1 mm
(0.256 – 0.319 in)
(−2.3) – (+0.7) mm
[(−0.091) – (+0.028) in]
C–C
6.5 – 8.1 mm
(0.256 – 0.319 in)
(−2.3) – (+0.7) mm
[(−0.091) – (+0.028) in]
Revision: 2011 September
RF-46
2012 QUEST
GLASS LID
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. To prevent glass lid from moving after adjustment, first tighten the TORX bolts of front left, and thentightenthe TORX bolts of rear right.
5. Tilt glass lid up and down several times to check that it moves smoothly.
NOTE:
After adjustment the sunroof unit assembly, perform additional service. Refer to RF-16, "REAR SUNROOF :
Description".
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
RF
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RF-47
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
FRONT SUNROOF
FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494973
JMKIA6143ZZ
1.
Glass lid
2.
TORX bolt
3.
Front sunroof bracket
4.
Center drain hose
5.
Side trim
6.
Front drain hose
7.
Front drain connector
8.
Sunroof motor assembly
9.
Sunroof unit assembly
: Metal clip
FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494974
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Before removing sunroof motor, check that glass lid is fully closed.
• After removing sunroof motor, never attempt to rotate sunroof motor assembly as a single unit.
1. Fully close glass lid.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-48
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Remove map lamp assembly. Refer to INL-47, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove sunroof motor assembly fixinng screws (A), and then
remove sunroof motor assembly.
A
B
C
JMKIA6151ZZ
4.
D
Disconnect harness connector from sunroof motor.
E
INSTALLAITON
1.
Move the sunroof motor assembly laterally by little so that the gear is completely engaged into the wire on
the sunroof unit assembly and mounting surface becomes parallel. Then secure the sunroof motor
assembly with screws.
2. Install map lamp assembly. Refer to INL-47, "Removal and Installation".
NOTE:
After installation sunroof motor, perform additional service. Refer to RF-16, "FRONT SUNROOF : Description".
F
G
REAR SUNROOF
H
I
J
RF
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RF-49
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494975
JMKIA6144ZZ
1.
Glass lid
2.
TORX bolt
3.
Side trim
4.
Rear sunroof bracket
5.
Rear drain hose
6.
Rear drain connector
7.
Rear display bracket
8.
Sunroof motor assembly
9.
Sunroof unit assembly
REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494976
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Before removing sunroof motor, check that glass lid is fully closed.
• After removing sunroof motor, never attempt to rotate sunroof motor assembly as a single unit.
1. Fully close glass lid.
2. Remove headlining. (without rear display) Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove roof console. Refer to INT-32, "Exploded View".
Revision: 2011 September
RF-50
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF MOTOR ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Disconnect harness connector (A) from sunroof motor assembly.
5. Remove sunroof motor assembly fixing screws (B), and then
remove sunroof motor assembly.
A
B
C
JMKIA6152ZZ
D
INSTALLAITON
1.
Move the sunroof motor assembly laterally by little so that the gear is completely engaged into the wire on
the sunroof unit assembly and mounting surface becomes parallel. Then secure the sunroof motor
assembly with screws.
2. Install headlining. (without rear display) Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation".
3. Install roof console.Refer to INT-32, "Exploded View".
NOTE:
After installation sunroof motor, perform additional service. Refer to RF-16, "REAR SUNROOF : Description".
E
F
G
H
I
J
RF
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RF-51
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY
FRONT SUNROOF
FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494977
REMOVAL
JMKIA6143ZZ
1.
Glass lid
2.
TORX bolt
3.
Front sunroof bracket
4.
Center drain hose
5.
Side trim
6.
Front drain hose
7.
Front drain connector
8.
Sunroof motor assembly
9.
Sunroof unit assembly
: Metal clip
DISASSEMBLY
Revision: 2011 September
RF-52
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
RF
L
JMKIA6148ZZ
1.
Rear drain assembly
2.
Wind deflector
4.
Sunshade
5.
Sunshade stopper
FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation
3.
M
Sunroof frame assembly
INFOID:0000000007494978
N
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Always work with a helper.
• Fully close the glass lid assembly, before removal, then never operate sunroof motor assembly after
removal.
• After removing sunroof motor assembly, never attempt to rotate sunroof motor assembly as a single
unit.
• When remove/install sunroof unit, use cloths to protect the seats and trim from damage.
• After installing the sunroof unit and glass lid, perform the leak test and check that there is no malfunction.
1. Remove headlining. Refer to INT-32, "Exploded View".
2. Remove rear display. (with rear display) Refer to AV-217, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
RF-53
2012 QUEST
O
P
SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Remove rear sunroof unit assembly. Refer to RF-56, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove rear display brackets.
5. Remove front sunroof glass lid. Refer to RF-43, "FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
6. Disconnect front drain hoses.
7. Remove front sunroof brackets mounting bolts, and then remove front sunroof brackets.
8. Remove nuts from the front end and side rail, and then remove front sunroof unit assembly from roof
panel.
9. Remove front sunroof unit assembly from roof panel.
10. Remove sunroof motor assembly.
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Insall front sunroof motor assembly.
Bring front sunroof unit into back door.
Temporarily tighten the mounting nuts to the side rail of front sunroof unit assembly.
Temporarily tighten the mounting nuts to the front end of front sunroof unit assembly.
Temporarily tighten the mounting bolts to the front sunroof brackets (LH and RH).
Tighten the front sunroof assembly mounting nuts diagonally in order.
Tighten front sunroof bracket bolts on the roof panel, and then tighten bolts on the side rail.
CAUTION:
Install front sunroof unit assembly evenly without any distortion on front sunroof unit assembly.
Connect front drain hoses.
Install rear display brackets.
Install rear sunroof unit assembly. Refer to RF-56, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
Install rear display. (with rear display) Refer to AV-217, "Removal and Installation".
Install headlining. Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation".
Install front sunroof glass lid. Refer to RF-43, "FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
FRONT SUNROOF : Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000007494979
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove rear drain assembly from front sunroof unit assembly.
Remove sunshade. Refer to RF-58, "FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
Remove wind deflector. Refer to RF-62, "FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
ASSEMBLY
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
REAR SUNROOF
REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494980
REMOVAL
Revision: 2011 September
RF-54
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
RF
L
JMKIA6144ZZ
1.
Glass lid
2.
TORX bolt
3.
Side trim
4.
Rear sunroof bracket
5.
Rear drain hose
6.
Rear drain connector
7.
Rear display bracket
8.
Sunroof motor assembly
9.
Sunroof unit assembly
M
N
DISASSEMBLY
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RF-55
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
JMKIA6149ZZ
1.
Rear drain assembly
2.
Wind deflector
4.
Sunshade
5.
Sunshade stopper
REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation
3.
Sunroof frame assembly
INFOID:0000000007494981
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Always work with a helper.
• Fully close the glass lid assembly, before removal, then never operate sunroof motor assembly after
removal.
• After removing sunroof motor, never attempt to rotate sunroof motor assembly as a single unit.
• When remove/install sunroof unit, use cloths to protect the seats and trim from damage.
1. Remove headlining. Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove glass lid. Refer to RF-45, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect center drain hoses and rear drain hoses.
4. Remove rear sunroof brackets (LH and RH).
Revision: 2011 September
RF-56
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF UNIT ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
5. Remove nuts from the front end and side rail, and then remove rear sunroof unit assembly from roof
panel.
6. Remove rear sunroof unit assembly through the back door while being careful not to damage the seats
and trim.
7. Remove rear sunroof motor assembly.
A
B
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Insall rear sunroof motor assembly.
Bring rear sunroof unit into back door.
Temporarily tighten the mounting nuts to the side rail of rear sunroof unit assembly.
Temporarily tighten the mounting nuts to the front end of rear sunroof unit assembly.
Temporarily tighten the mounting bolts to the rear sunroof brackets (LH and RH).
Tighten the rear sunroof assembly mounting nuts diagonally in order.
Tighten rear sunroof bracket bolts on the roof panel, and then tighten bolts on the side rail.
CAUTION:
Install rear sunroof unit assembly evenly without any distortion on rear sunroof unit assembly.
8. Connect center drain hoses and rear drain hoses.
9. Insall headlining. Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation".
10. Insall glass lid. Refer to RF-45, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
REAR SUNROOF : Disassembly and Assembly
C
D
E
F
G
INFOID:0000000007494982
DISASSEMBLY
H
1.
2.
3.
I
Remove rear drain assembly from rear sunroof unit assembly.
Remove sunshade. Refer to RF-60, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
Remove wind deflector. Refer to RF-64, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
ASSEMBLY
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
J
RF
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RF-57
2012 QUEST
SUNSHADE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SUNSHADE
FRONT SUNROOF
FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494983
JMKIA6148ZZ
1.
Rear drain assembly
2.
Wind deflector
4.
Sunshade
5.
Sunshade stopper
FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation
3.
Sunroof frame assembly
INFOID:0000000007494984
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove front sunroof unit assembly. Refer to RF-53, "FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
Remove rear drain assembly.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-58
2012 QUEST
SUNSHADE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Remove sunshade stopper (LH and RH) from the sunroof frame
end.
A
B
C
JMKIA6187ZZ
D
4.
Remove sunshade from the rear end of sunroof frame.
INSTALLATION
E
Install in the reverse order of removal.
REAR SUNROOF
F
G
H
I
J
RF
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RF-59
2012 QUEST
SUNSHADE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494985
JMKIA6149ZZ
1.
Rear drain assembly
2.
Wind deflector
4.
Sunshade
5.
Sunshade stopper
REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation
3.
Sunroof frame assembly
INFOID:0000000007494986
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove rear sunroof unit assembly. Refer to RF-56, "REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation".
Remove rear drain assembly.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-60
2012 QUEST
SUNSHADE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Remove sunshade stopper (1) (LH and RH) from the sunroof
frame end.
A
B
C
JMKIA2045ZZ
D
4.
Remove sunshade from the rear end of sunroof frame.
INSTALLATION
E
Install in the reverse order of removal.
F
G
H
I
J
RF
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RF-61
2012 QUEST
WIND DEFLECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
WIND DEFLECTOR
FRONT SUNROOF
FRONT SUNROOF : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494987
JMKIA6148ZZ
1.
Rear drain assembly
2.
Wind deflector
4.
Sunshade
5.
Sunshade stopper
3.
Sunroof frame assembly
FRONT SUNROOF : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494988
REMOAL
1.
Open the glass lid to see the wind deflector installation point on the sun roof slide rail.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-62
2012 QUEST
WIND DEFLECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Remove wind deflector link base.
A
: Pawl
B
C
JMKIA6153ZZ
D
3.
Rotate wind deflector, and then remove the spring from wind
deflector spring base.
E
F
G
JMKIA6154ZZ
INSTALLATION
H
Install in the reverse order of removal.
REAR SUNROOF
I
J
RF
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RF-63
2012 QUEST
WIND DEFLECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494989
JMKIA6149ZZ
1.
Rear drain assembly
2.
Wind deflector
4.
Sunshade
5.
Sunshade stopper
3.
Sunroof frame assembly
REAR SUNROOF : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494990
REMOVAL
1.
Open the glass lid to see the wind deflector installation point on the sun roof slide rail.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-64
2012 QUEST
WIND DEFLECTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Remove mounting pawl of wind deflector link using a removal
tool (A) in numerical order as shown in the figure, and then
remove wind deflector link.
A
: Pawl
B
C
JMKIA6155ZZ
D
3.
Remove hinge fixing screws (A), and then remove wind deflector.
E
F
G
JMKIA6156ZZ
INSTALLATION
H
Install in the reverse order of removal.
I
J
RF
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RF-65
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SUNROOF SWITCH
FRONT
FRONT : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494991
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove lens from map lamp assembly. Refer to INL-47, "Removal and Installation".
Using a flat-bladed screw driver (A), disconnect pawls of map
lamp assembly (2) from roof console assembly (1), and then
remove map lamp assembly (2).
: Pawl
JMKIA6061ZZ
3.
4.
Remove harness connector.
Using a flat-bladed screw driver (A), disconnect pawls of switch
finisher (2) from map lamp assembly (1), and then remove
switch finisher (2).
: Pawl
JMKIA6062ZZ
5.
Disconnect pawls of connector (2) using a flat-bladed screw
driver (A), and then remove connector (2) from map lamp
assembly (1) in the direction indicated by an arrow as shown in
the figure. Remove connector (3) in the same procedures.
: Pawl
JMKIA6063ZZ
6.
Disconnect pawls of sunroof switch (2) using a flat-bladed screw
driver (A), and then remove sunroof switch (2) from map lamp
assembly (1). Remove sunroof switch (3) in the same procedures.
: Pawl
JMKIA6064ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
RF-66
2012 QUEST
SUNROOF SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REAR
A
REAR : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494992
REMOVAL
1.
2.
B
Remove roof console assembly. Refer to INT-34, "Removal and
Installation".
Remove torx bolts (A), and then remove sunroof switch (2) from
roof console assembly (1).
C
D
E
JMKIA6065ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Installation in the reverse order of removal.
G
H
I
J
RF
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RF-67
2012 QUEST
SUSPENSION
SECTION
RSU
REAR SUSPENSION
A
B
C
D
RSU
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2
F
Precautions for Suspension ...................................... 2
Removal and Installation .........................................10
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................11
Inspection ................................................................11
Disposal ...................................................................12
PREPARATION ............................................ 3
RADIUS ROD .................................................... 13
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
H
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
Exploded View .........................................................13
Removal and Installation .........................................13
Inspection ................................................................13
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 4
FRONT LOWER LINK ....................................... 15
I
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 4
Exploded View .........................................................15
Removal and Installation .........................................15
Inspection ................................................................15
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 4
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 5
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ..................... 5
Inspection .................................................................. 5
WHEEL ALIGNMENT .......................................... 6
Inspection .................................................................. 6
Adjustment ................................................................ 6
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 8
Exploded View .........................................................17
Removal and Installation .........................................17
Inspection ................................................................17
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY ................... 19
Exploded View .........................................................19
Removal and Installation .........................................19
Inspection ................................................................20
REAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING ............... 8
Exploded View .......................................................... 8
Removal and Installation ........................................... 8
Inspection .................................................................. 9
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 21
Exploded View ........................................................ 10
J
SUSPENSION ARM .......................................... 17
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ............................................................ 21
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ..............................10
G
Wheel Alignment .....................................................21
Ball Joint ..................................................................21
Wheelarch Height ....................................................21
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-1
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Suspension
INFOID:0000000007495827
• When installing rubber bushings, the final tightening must be carried out under unladen conditions with tires
on ground. Spilled oil might shorten the life of rubber bushings. Be sure to wipe off any spilled oil.
- Unladen conditions mean that fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and
mats are in designated positions.
• After servicing suspension parts, be sure to check wheel alignment.
• Self-lock nuts are not reusable. Always use new ones when installing. Since new self-lock nuts are pre-oiled,
tighten as they are.
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-2
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
A
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007495828
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
B
C
D
RSU
PBIC0190E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-3
2012 QUEST
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
INFOID:0000000007495829
×
×
×
Vibration
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
Judder
×
×
×
Poor quality ride or handling
×
×
×
×
NVH in BR section.
NVH in WT section.
NVH in WT section.
NVH in RAX and RSU sections.
RSU-6
RSU-8, RSU-10, RSU-13, RSU-15, RSU-17, RSU-19
—
BRAKE
×
ROAD WHEEL
Shake
TIRE
×
REAR AXLE AND REAR SUSPENSION
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Incorrect wheel alignment
×
Suspension looseness
Parts interference
×
Spring fatigue
Bushing or mounting deterioration
REAR SUSPENSION
—
Shock absorber deformation, damage or deflection
Noise
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
Symptom
—
Improper installation, looseness
Reference
RSU-9
RSU-8, RSU-10, RSU-13, RSU-15, RSU-17, RSU-19
Use chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
×
×
×
×
×: Applicable
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-4
2012 QUEST
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
A
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495830
B
Check the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component conditions (wear,
damage) are normal.
C
COMPONENT PART
Ball Joint Axial End Play
1.
2.
D
Set front wheels in a straight-ahead position.
Move axle side of suspension arm in the axial direction by hand.
Check there is no end play.
RSU
Axial end play
: Refer to RSU-21, "Ball Joint".
CAUTION:
• Never depress brake pedal when measuring.
• Never perform with tires on level ground.
• Be careful not to damage ball joint boot. Never damage
the installation position by applying excessive force.
F
G
JSEIA0444ZZ
SHOCK ABSORBER
H
Check for oil leakage and damage. Replace it if necessary.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-5
2012 QUEST
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495831
DESCRIPTION
Measure wheel alignment under unladen conditions.
NOTE:
“Unladen conditions” means that fuel, engine coolant, and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and
mats are in designated positions.
PRELIMINARY CHECK
Check the following:
• Tires for improper air pressure and wear. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure".
• Road wheels for runout.
• Wheel bearing axial end play. Refer to RAX-4, "Inspection".
• Ball joint axial end play of suspension arm. Refer to RSU-5, "Inspection".
• Shock absorber operation.
• Each mounting point of axle and suspension for looseness and deformation.
• Each of front lower link, rear lower link, radius rod, rear suspension member, suspension arm, and shock
absorber for cracks, deformation, and other damage.
• Vehicle height (posture).
GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS
• A four-wheel thrust alignment should be performed.
- This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN/INFINITI vehicle.
- The four-wheel “thrust” process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering wheel is
centered.
- The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN/INFINITI vehicle.
- The rack should be checked to ensure that it is level.
• Make sure the machine is properly calibrated.
- Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information.
- Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended Service/Calibration Schedule.
ALIGNMENT PROCESS
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in this Service Manual.
• When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use “indicators”: (Green/red, plus or
minus, Go/No Go). Never use these indicators.
- The alignment specifications programmed into your machine that operate these indicators may not be correct.
- This may result in an ERROR.
• Most camera-type alignment machines are equipped with both “Rolling Compensation” method and optional
“Jacking Compensation” method to “compensate” the alignment targets or head units. “Rolling Compensation” is the preferred method.
- If using the “Rolling Compensation” method, after installing the alignment targets or head units, push or pull
on the rear wheel to move the vehicle. Do not push or pull on the vehicle body.
- If using the “Jacking Compensation” method, after installing the alignment targets or head units, raise the
vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways.
NOTE:
Do not use the “Rolling Compensation” method if you are using sensor-type alignment equipment.
- Follow all instructions for the alignment machine you're using for more information.
Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007495832
CAMBER
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-6
2012 QUEST
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
• If camber is exceeds the standard value, adjust with adjusting bolt
(1) in front lower link (2).
A
Camber: Refer to RSU-21, "Wheel Alignment".
B
CAUTION:
• When tightening the nut firmly and checking the torque, use
a wrench to prevent the turning of the bolt.
• After adjusting camber, be sure to check toe-in.
- If camber is not still within the specification, inspect and replace
any damaged or worn suspension parts.
C
JSEIA0395ZZ
D
TOE-IN
• If toe-in is exceeds the standard value, adjust with adjusting bolt
(1) in rear lower link (2).
RSU
Toe-In: Refer to RSU-21, "Wheel Alignment".
CAUTION:
• Be sure to adjust equally on right and left side with adjusting bolt.
• When tightening the nut firmly and checking the torque, use
a wrench to prevent the turning of the bolt.
- If toe-in is not still within the specification, inspect and replace any
damaged or worn suspension parts.
• After toe-in adjustment, adjust neutral position of steering angle
sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure".
F
G
JSEIA0396ZZ
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-7
2012 QUEST
REAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
REAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495833
JSEIA0397GB
1.
Rear suspension member
2.
Radius rod
3.
Adjusting bolt
4.
Front lower link
5.
Eccentric disk
6.
Rear lower link
7.
Rubber seat
8.
Coil spring
9.
Upper seat
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495834
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
Set suitable jack under rear lower link.
CAUTION:
• At this step, the jack must be set only for supporting the removal procedure. For details on jacking up the vehicle, refer to GI-34, "Garage Jack and Safety Stand and 2-Pole Lift".
• Never damage the rear lower link with a jack.
• Check the stable condition when using a jack.
Loosen rear lower link adjusting bolt and nut from rear suspension member, and then remove rear lower
link mounting bolt and nut from axle housing with power tool.
Slowly lower jack, then remove upper seat, coil spring, and rubber seat from rear lower link.
CAUTION:
Operate while checking that jack supporting status is stable.
Remove rear lower link.
Perform inspection after removal. Refer to RSU-9, "Inspection".
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Install adjusting bolt so that the graduation marks on adjusting bolt are positioned downward.
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-8
2012 QUEST
REAR LOWER LINK & COIL SPRING
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• When installing upper seat (1), align protrusion (B) on upper seat
inside to tabs (A) of vehicle side bracket (2).
A
B
C
JPEIB0266ZZ
D
• Fit rubber seat (1) to step (A) of rear lower link (2).
RSU
F
G
JPEIB0013ZZ
H
• Fit the bottom end of coil spring to the step of rubber seat.
CAUTION:
Be careful with the vertical direction of the coil spring.
I
: Upper side
• Perform final tightening of fixing parts at the vehicle installation
position (rubber bushing), under unladen conditions with tires on
level ground.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to RSU-9, "Inspection".
J
K
JSEIA0403ZZ
L
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495835
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check rear lower link, rubber seat, upper seat, and coil spring for deformation, crack, and damage. Replace it
if necessary.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
M
N
Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection".
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-9
2012 QUEST
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495836
JPEIB0135GB
1.
Shock absorber
4
Bound bumper
2.
Piston rod lock nut
3.
Mounting bracket
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495837
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
Set jack under axle housing.
CAUTION:
• At this step, the jack must be set only for supporting the removal procedure. For details on jacking up the vehicle, refer to GI-34, "Garage Jack and Safety Stand and 2-Pole Lift".
• Never damage the axle housing with a jack.
• Check the stable condition when using a jack.
Separate shock absorber mounting bolt from front lower link.
Slowly lower jack, then remove shock absorber from front lower link.
CAUTION:
Operate while checking that jack supporting status is stable.
Remove mounting bracket mounting nuts (
shock absorber assembly.
), and remove
JPEIB0060ZZ
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-10
2012 QUEST
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Perform final tightening of fixing parts at the vehicle installation position (rubber bushing), under unladen
conditions with tires on level ground.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to RSU-11, "Inspection".
• After replacing the shock absorber, always follow the disposal procedure to discard the shock absorber.
Refer to RSU-12, "Disposal".
Disassembly and Assembly
A
B
INFOID:0000000007495838
DISASSEMBLY
C
CAUTION:
Never damage shock absorber piston rod when removing components from shock absorber.
1. Wrap a shop cloth around lower side of shock absorber and fix it with a vise.
CAUTION:
Never set the cylindrical part of shock absorber with a vise.
2. Secure the piston rod tip (A) so that piston rod does not turn,
and remove piston rod lock nut (1).
3. Remove mounting bracket and bound bumper from shock
absorber.
4. Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to RSU-11, "Inspection".
D
RSU
F
G
JPEIB0241ZZ
H
ASSEMBLY
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Secure the piston rod tip (A) so that piston rod does not turn, then
tighten the piston rod lock nut (1) to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
Never reuse piston rod lock nut.
• Never damage shock absorber piston rod when installing components from shock absorber.
• Perform inspection after assembly. Refer to RSU-11, "Inspection".
I
J
K
JPEIB0241ZZ
Inspection
L
INFOID:0000000007495839
M
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Mounting bracket
Check for cracks and damage. Replace it if necessary.
N
Bound Bumper
Check for cracks and damage. Replace it if necessary.
O
Shock Absorber
Check the following items, and replace the part if necessary.
• Shock absorber for deformation, cracks, and other damage.
• Piston rod for damage, uneven wear, and distortion.
• Oil leakage
P
INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY
Make sure piston rod on shock absorber is not damaged when attaching components to shock absorber.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection".
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-11
2012 QUEST
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Disposal
INFOID:0000000007495840
1.
Set shock absorber horizontally to the ground with the piston rod fully extracted.
2.
Drill 2 – 3 mm (0.08 – 0.12 in) hole at the position ( ) from top
as shown in the figure to release gas gradually.
CAUTION:
• Wear eye protection (safety glasses).
• Wear gloves.
• Be careful with metal chips or oil blown out by the compressed gas.
NOTE:
• Drill vertically in this direction show by arrow.
• Directly to the outer tube avoiding brackets.
• The gas is clear, colorless, odorless, and harmless.
A
3.
JPEIA0161ZZ
: 20 – 30 mm (0.79 – 1.18 in)
Position the drilled hole downward and drain oil by moving the piston rod several times.
CAUTION:
Dispose of drained oil according to the law and local regulations.
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-12
2012 QUEST
RADIUS ROD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
RADIUS ROD
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495841
B
C
D
RSU
F
G
JSEIA0397GB
1.
Rear suspension member
2.
Radius rod
3.
Adjusting bolt
4.
Front lower link
5.
Eccentric disk
6.
Rear lower link
7.
Rubber seat
8.
Coil spring
9.
Upper seat
H
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
I
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495842
J
Remove tire with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
Remove wheel sensor and sensor harness. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and
Installation".
Remove rear lower link and coil spring. Refer to RSU-8, "Removal and Installation".
Separate shock absorber from front lower link. Refer to RSU-10, "Removal and Installation".
Separate front lower link from axle housing. Refer to RSU-15, "Exploded View".
Loosen front lower link mounting bolt and nut from suspension member. Refer to RSU-15, "Removal and
Installation".
Remove radius rod mounting bolts and nuts from axle housing with power tool.
Remove radius rod mounting bolt from rear suspension member with power tool, then remove radius rod.
Perform inspection after removal. Refer to RSU-13, "Inspection".
K
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
INSTALLATION
M
N
O
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Perform final tightening of fixing parts at the vehicle installation position (rubber bushing), under unladen
conditions with tires on level ground.
• Never reuse radius rod mounting nut.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to RSU-13, "Inspection".
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495843
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check radius rod and bushing for any deformation, cracks, or damage. Replace if necessary.
Revision: 2011 September
L
RSU-13
2012 QUEST
P
RADIUS ROD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1. Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR :
Exploded View".
2. Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection".
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-14
2012 QUEST
FRONT LOWER LINK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
FRONT LOWER LINK
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495844
B
C
D
RSU
F
G
JSEIA0397GB
1.
Rear suspension member
2.
Radius rod
3.
Adjusting bolt
4.
Front lower link
5.
Eccentric disk
6.
Rear lower link
7.
Rubber seat
8.
Coil spring
9.
Upper seat
H
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
I
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495845
J
Remove tire with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
Remove wheel sensor and sensor harness. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and
Installation".
Remove rear lower link and coil spring. Refer to RSU-8, "Removal and Installation".
Separate shock absorber from front lower link. Refer to RSU-10, "Exploded View".
Remove eccentric disc, adjusting bolt, mounting bolt, and nut, then remove front lower link.
Perform inspection after removal. Refer to RSU-15, "Inspection".
K
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
L
M
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Install adjusting bolt so that the graduation marks on adjusting bolt are positioned downward.
• Perform final tightening of fixing parts at the vehicle installation position (rubber bushing), under unladen
conditions with tires on level ground.
• Never reuse front lower link mounting nut.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to RSU-15, "Inspection".
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495846
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check front lower link and bushing for any deformation, cracks, or damage. Replace it if necessary.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR :
Exploded View".
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-15
2012 QUEST
N
O
P
FRONT LOWER LINK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection".
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-16
2012 QUEST
SUSPENSION ARM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SUSPENSION ARM
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495847
B
C
D
RSU
F
G
JSEIA0398GB
1.
Rear suspension member
2.
Stopper rubber
3.
Suspension arm
H
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
I
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495848
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
J
Remove tires with power tool. WT-43, "Exploded View".
Remove wheel sensor and sensor harness. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and
Installation".
Separate suspension arm from front lower link. Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation".
Remove mounting bolt, and nut, then remove stopper rubber and suspension arm.
Perform inspection after removal. Refer to RSU-17, "Inspection".
K
L
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Install stopper rubber to rear suspension member together with suspension arm.
• Perform final tightening of fixing parts at the vehicle installation position (rubber bushing), under unladen
conditions with tires on level ground.
• Never reuse suspension arm mounting nut.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to RSU-17, "Inspection".
Inspection
M
N
INFOID:0000000007495849
O
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the following items, and replace the parts if necessary.
P
Suspension Arm
• Suspension arm and bushing for deformation, cracks or damage.
• Ball joint boot for cracks or other damage, and also for grease leakage.
Swing Torque
1.
2.
Manually move ball stud to confirm it moves smoothly with no binding.
Move ball stud at least ten times by hand to check for smooth movement.
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-17
2012 QUEST
SUSPENSION ARM
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Hook spring balance (A) at cotter pin mounting hole. Confirm
spring balance measurement value is within specifications when
ball stud begins moving.
Swing torque
: Refer to RSU-21, "Ball Joint".
• If swing torque exceeds standard range, replace suspension arm
assembly.
JPEIA0005ZZ
Axial End Play
1.
2.
3.
Manually move ball stud to confirm it moves smoothly with no binding.
Move ball stud at least ten times by hand to check for smooth movement.
Move tip of ball stud in axial direction to check for looseness.
Axial end play
: Refer to RSU-21, "Ball Joint".
• If axial end play exceeds the standard value, replace suspension arm assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR :
Exploded View".
Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection".
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-18
2012 QUEST
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495850
B
C
D
RSU
F
G
JSEIA0399GB
1.
Rear suspension member stay
2.
Rear suspension member
3.
Rebound stopper
H
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495851
I
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
Remove caliper assembly. Hang caliper assembly not to interfere with work. Refer to BR-47, "BRAKE
CALIPER ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Never depress brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
3. Remove wheel sensor and sensor harness. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR : Removal and
Installation".
4. Remove center muffler. Refer to EX-6, "Removal and Installation".
5. Separate the parking brake cable from rear suspension member. Refer to PB-6, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove rear lower link and coil spring. Refer to RSU-8, "Removal and Installation".
7. Separate shock absorber from front lower link. Refer to RSU-10, "Removal and Installation".
8. Set jack under rear suspension member.
CAUTION:
• At this step, the jack must be set only for supporting the removal procedure. For details on jacking up the vehicle, refer to GI-34, "Garage Jack and Safety Stand and 2-Pole Lift".
• Never damage the rear suspension member with a jack.
• Check the stable condition when using a jack.
9. Remove rear suspension member stay.
10. Remove rear suspension member mounting nuts and rebound stopper.
11. Slowly lower jack, then remove rear suspension member, front lower link, radius rod, suspension arm, and
axle housing from vehicle as a unit.
CAUTION:
Operate while checking that jack supporting status is stable.
12. Remove the following parts from rear suspension member.
• Axle housing: Refer to RAX-6, "Removal and Installation".
• Suspension arm: Refer to RSU-17, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-19
2012 QUEST
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
REAR SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Radius rod: Refer to RSU-13, "Removal and Installation".
• Front lower link: Refer to RSU-15, "Removal and Installation".
13. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to RSU-20, "Inspection".
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of the removal.
• Perform final tightening of fixing parts at the vehicle installation position (rubber bushing), under unladen
conditions with tires on level ground.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to RSU-20, "Inspection".
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495852
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check rear suspension member for deformation, cracks, or any other damage. Replace it if necessary.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
Check wheel sensor harness for proper connection. Refer to BRC-115, "REAR WHEEL SENSOR :
Exploded View".
Adjust parking brake operation (stroke). Refer to PB-3, "Inspection and Adjustment".
Check wheel alignment. Refer to RSU-6, "Inspection".
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-20
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Alignment
INFOID:0000000007495853
B
FOR USA MODELS
C
Item
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Total toe-in
Distance
Toe-in
Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Standard
Minimum
–1° 06′ (–1.10°)
Nominal
–0° 36′ (–0.60°)
Maximum
–0° 06′ (–0.10°)
Minimum
In 1.2 mm (0.047 in)
Nominal
In 2.8 mm (0.110 in)
Maximum
In 4.4 mm (0.173 in)
Minimum
In 0° 03′ (0.05°)
Nominal
In 0° 07′ (0.12°)
Maximum
In 0° 11′ (0.18°)
D
RSU
F
G
Measure value under unladen* conditions.
*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
FOR CANADA MODELS
H
Item
Standard
Wheel size
16 inch
Camber
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Total toe-in
Distance
Toe-in
Toe angle (left wheel or right wheel)
Degree minute (Decimal degree)
18 inch
Minimum
–1° 05′ (–1.08°)
Nominal
–0° 35′ (–0.58°)
Maximum
–0° 05′ (–0.09°)
J
Minimum
In 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
In 0.9 mm (0.035 in)
Nominal
In 2.4 mm (0.094 in)
In 2.5 mm (0.098 in)
Maximum
In 4.0 mm (0.157 in)
In 4.1 mm (0.161 in)
Minimum
In 0° 02′ (0.04°)
Nominal
In 0° 06′ (0.10°)
Maximum
In 0° 10′ (0.16°)
K
L
Measure value under unladen* conditions.
M
*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
Ball Joint
I
INFOID:0000000007495854
N
Item
Swing torque
Measurement on spring balance
Standard
O
0.5 – 3.4 N·m (0.06 – 0.34 kg-m, 5 – 30 in-lb)
8.1 – 54.8 N (0.83 – 5.6 kg, 1.82 – 12.32 lb)
Axial end play
0 mm (0 in)
P
Wheelarch Height
INFOID:0000000007495855
FOR USA MODELS
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-21
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Item
Standard
Grade
3.5S
3.5SV
3.5SL
3.5LE
Front (Hf)
760 mm (29.92 in)
769 mm (30.28 in)
770 mm (30.31 in)
Rear (Hr)
751 mm (29.57 in)
760 mm (29.92 in)
759 mm (29.88 in)
WEIA0030E
Measure value under unladen* conditions.
*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
FOR CANADA MODELS
Item
Standard
Grade
3.5S
Front (Hf)
Rear (Hr)
3.5SV
3.5SL
760 mm (29.92 in)
752 mm (29.61 in)
3.5LE
770 mm (30.31 in)
751 mm (29.57 in)
760 mm (29.92 in)
WEIA0030E
Measure value under unladen* conditions.
*: Fuel, engine coolant and lubricant are full. Spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in designated positions.
Revision: 2011 September
RSU-22
2012 QUEST
RESTRAINTS
SECTION
SB
SEAT BELT
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Precaution for Seat Belt Service ............................... 2
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 4
FRONT SEAT BELT ............................................ 4
Exploded View .......................................................... 4
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR .......................................... 5
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation .......................................................................... 5
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection .................... 6
SEAT BELT BUCKLE ................................................. 8
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation...... 8
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection ............................ 9
SECOND SEAT BELT ........................................10
Exploded View ........................................................ 10
F
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ........................................10
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation ........................................................................11
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection ..................11
G
SEAT BELT BUCKLE ................................................13
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation....13
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection ..........................13
SB
SEAT BELT HOOK ....................................................13
SEAT BELT HOOK : Removal and Installation .......13
I
THIRD SEAT BELT ........................................... 15
Exploded View .........................................................15
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ........................................16
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation ........................................................................16
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection ..................17
SEAT BELT BUCKLE ................................................19
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation....19
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection ..........................19
SEAT BELT HOOK ....................................................20
SEAT BELT HOOK : Removal and Installation .......20
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SB-1
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000007492759
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Seat Belt Service
INFOID:0000000007492760
CAUTION:
• Before removing the front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect
battery negative terminal and wait at least 3 minutes.
• Do not use electrical test equipment for front seat belt pre-tensioner connector.
• After replacing or reinstalling front seat belt pre-tensioner assembly, or reconnecting front seat belt
pre-tensioner connector, check the system function. Refer to SRC-15, "Description".
• Do not use disassembled buckle or seat belt assembly.
• Replace anchor bolts if they are deformed or worn out.
• Never oil tongue and buckle.
• If any component of seat belt assembly is questionable, do not repair. Replace the entire seat belt
assembly.
• If webbing is cut, frayed or damaged, replace seat belt assembly.
• When replacing seat belt assembly, use a genuine NISSAN seat belt assembly.
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attached hardware after any collision.
NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so
could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat belt pre-tensioners
should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision in which the air bags
are deployed.
Revision: 2011 September
SB-2
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
• The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and
buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
• The seat belt was damaged in an accident (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide).
• The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage
or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
• Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
• The front seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the collision
in which the air bags are deployed.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SB
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SB-3
2012 QUEST
FRONT SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
FRONT SEAT BELT
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007492761
JMHIA2049GB
1.
Adjuster cover
2.
Anchor bolt
3.
Shoulder anchor
4.
Spacer
5.
Retaining washer
6.
Seat belt adjuster
7.
Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor
(Passenger side)
8.
Outer anchor
9.
Outer anchor cover
Revision: 2011 September
SB-4
2012 QUEST
FRONT SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
10. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor
(Driver side)
11. Seat belt buckle
12. Wave washer
A
: Pawl
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
B
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
C
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492762
D
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait 3 minutes or
more.
1. Remove shoulder anchor.
a. Slide front seat to the frontmost position.
b. Pull adjuster cover in direction indicated by arrows as shown in
the figure. Remove adjuster cover.
E
F
G
: Pawl
SB
I
JMHIA1630ZZ
c.
2.
a.
Remove shoulder anchor mounting anchor bolt.
Remove outer anchor.
Pull outer anchor cover in direction indicated by arrows as
shown in the figure. Remove outer anchor cover.
J
K
: Pawl
L
M
JMHIA1722ZZ
b.
3.
a.
b.
c.
Remove outer anchor mounting anchor bolt.
Remove seat belt pre-tensioner retractor.
Remove front kicking plate and rear kicking plate. Refer to INT-21, "KICKING PLATE : Removal and
Installation".
Remove center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-24, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
Disconnect seat belt pre-tensioner harness connector.
CAUTION:
Revision: 2011 September
SB-5
2012 QUEST
N
O
P
FRONT SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connector,
insert thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into notch, lift lock
and remove connector.
• Install connector with lock raised, and push lock into connector.
• After installing the connector, check that the lock is
pushed securely into it.
PHIA0953J
d.
4.
a.
b.
Remove seat belt pre-tensioner retractor mounting anchor bolt and screw.
CAUTION:
Never place pre-tensioner seat belt in an area where the temperature reaches 80°C or more.
Remove seat belt adjuster.
Remove center pillar upper garnish. Refer to INT-25, "CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
Remove seat belt adjuster mounting anchor bolts.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007492763
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attached hardware after any collision.
NISSAN/INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced
unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation was noted. Seat belt
pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during a frontal collision in
which the air bags were deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
• The seat belt is in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
• The seat belt is damaged in an accident (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.).
• The seat belt attaching point is damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or
distortion and repair if necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
• Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
• The seat belt pre-tensioners must be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during the collision in
which the air bags were deployed.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
1.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a.
Check the seat belt warning lamp for proper operation as per the following:
Turn ignition switch ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate.
Fasten driver seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should turn OFF.
If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, perform self-diagnosis with CONSULT and air bag warning lamp.
Refer to SRC-15, "Description".
Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are tightened firmly.
Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Check that guide
swivels freely and that webbing lays flat and does not bind in guide. Check that height adjuster operates
properly and holds securely.
Check retractor operation:
Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage.
Revision: 2011 September
SB-6
2012 QUEST
FRONT SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
b. Allow the seat belt to retract. Check that webbing returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the
seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth. Dirt build-up in the
loops of the upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
c. Fasten the seat belt. Check that seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the webbing
does not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT TAPE
SET” and perform the following steps.
A
B
Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor
1.
2.
3.
6.
Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in) or more.
Fix the seat belt at the center pillar webbing opening with a clip or other device.
Pass a thin wire through the through-anchor webbing opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull it
tightly while moving it up and down several times along the webbing opening surface to remove dirt
stuck there.
4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a clean
cloth.
5. Apply tape at the point where the webbing contacts the through-anchor webbing opening.
NOTE:
Apply the tape so that there is no slack or wrinkling.
6. Remove the clip fixing the seat belt and check that the webbing returns smoothly.
Repeat steps above if necessary to check the other seat belts.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK
C
D
E
F
G
Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
NOTE:
All seat belt retractors are Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the SB
retractor will lock and prevent the webbing from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors
except the driver seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also
called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt
I
is fully extended. When the webbing is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt
in a specific position so the webbing cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat
belt to fully wind back into the retractor.
Check the seat belt retractors with the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating prop- J
erly.
ELR Function Stationary Check
Grasp the shoulder webbing and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from
extending further.
K
ALR Function Stationary Check
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pull out the entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard.
Retract the webbing partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the webbing retracts indicating that the
retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode.
Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The webbing must lock and not extend any further. If it
does not operate normally, replace the retractor assembly.
Allow the entire length of the webbing to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode.
L
M
N
ELR Function Moving Check
WARNING:
Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a
large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. Never perform the following test on
wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious
personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the
retractor does not lock.
1. Fasten driver seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested.
2. Proceed to the designated safe area.
3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop
and the driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the retractor does
not lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop.
Revision: 2011 September
SB-7
2012 QUEST
O
P
FRONT SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
During stopping, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock,
perform the retractor off-vehicle check.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK
1.
2.
Remove the front seat belt retractor. Refer to SB-5, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation".
Slowly pull out webbing while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without
twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the figure.
• The webbing can be pulled out when the angle (A) is 15
degrees or less.
• The webbing cannot be pulled out when the angle (B) is 35
degrees or more.
A and B
: Tilting angles
: Vehicle front
JMHIA1056ZZ
3.
Replace the seat belt assembly if it does not operate normally.
SEAT BELT BUCKLE
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492764
REMOVAL
WARNING:
Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait 3 minutes or
more.
1. Remove front seat from the vehicle.
• Manual seat: Refer to SE-70, "Removal and Installation".
• Power seat: Refer to SE-84, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.
2. Remove seat cushion finisher.
• Manual seat: Refer to SE-76, "SEAT CUSHION : Disassembly and Assembly".
• Power seat: Refer to SE-90, "SEAT CUSHION : Disassembly and Assembly".
3. Remove seat cushion inner finisher.
• Manual seat: Refer to SE-76, "SEAT CUSHION : Disassembly and Assembly".
• Power seat: Refer to SE-90, "SEAT CUSHION : Disassembly and Assembly".
4. Remove seat belt buckle.
a. Disconnect harness connector (A).
JMHIA2052ZZ
b.
Remove seat belt buckle mounting anchor bolt.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
SB-8
2012 QUEST
FRONT SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007492765
A
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attached hardware after any collision.
NISSAN/INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced
unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation was noted. Seat belt
pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during a frontal collision in
which the air bags were deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
• The seat belt is in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
• The seat belt is damaged in an accident (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.).
• The seat belt attaching point is damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or
distortion and repair if necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
• Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
• The seat belt pre-tensioner must be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during the collision in
which the air bags were deployed.
B
C
D
E
F
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
1.
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
G
Check the seat belt warning lamp for proper operation as pen the following:
Turn ignition switch ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate.
SB
Fasten driver seat belt. The seat belt warning lamp should turn OFF.
If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, perform self-diagnosis using CONSULT and air bag warning lamp.
Refer to SRC-15, "Description".
I
Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are tightened firmly.
Repeat steps above if necessary to check the other seat belts.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SB-9
2012 QUEST
SECOND SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SECOND SEAT BELT
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007492766
JMHIA2176GB
1.
Adjuster cover
2.
Anchor bolt
3.
Shoulder anchor
4.
Spacer
5.
Retaining washer
6.
Seat belt adjuster
7.
Second seat belt retractor RH
8.
Seat belt hook
9.
Outer anchor
10. Second seat belt retractor LH
11. Second seat belt buckle
12. Wave washer
13. Anchor bolt cap
: Pawl
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
Revision: 2011 September
SB-10
2012 QUEST
SECOND SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492767
A
REMOVAL
1.
a.
b.
Remove shoulder anchor.
Slide second seat to the frontmost position.
Pull adjuster cover in direction indicated by arrows as shown in
the figure. Remove adjuster cover.
B
C
: Pawl
D
E
JMHIA1630ZZ
F
Remove shoulder anchor mounting anchor bolt.
Remove outer anchor.
Remove rear kicking plate. Refer to INT-21, "KICKING PLATE : Removal and Installation".
G
Remove outer anchor mounting anchor bolt.
Remove second seat belt retractor.
Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal SB
and Installation".
4. Remove second seat belt retractor mounting anchor bolt and screw.
5. Remove seat belt adjuster.
I
a. Remove rear pillar garnish. Refer to INT-26, "REAR PILLAR GARNISH : Removal and Installation".
b. Remove seat belt adjuster mounting anchor bolts.
J
INSTALLATION
c.
2.
a.
b.
3.
a.
Install in the reverse order of removal.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007492768
K
WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attached hardware after any collision.
NISSAN/INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced
unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation was noted. Seat belt
pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during a frontal collision in
which the air bags were deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
• The seat belt is in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
• The seat belt is damaged in an accident (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.).
• The seat belt attaching point is damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or
distortion and repair if necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
• Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
• The seat belt pre-tensioners must be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during the collision in
which the air bags were deployed.
L
AFTER A COLLISION
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
1.
2.
a.
Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are tightened firmly.
Check retractor operation:
Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage.
Revision: 2011 September
SB-11
2012 QUEST
M
N
O
P
SECOND SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
b. Allow the seat belt to retract. Check that webbing returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the
seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth. Dirt build-up in the
loops of that upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
c. Fasten the seat belt. Check that seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the webbing
does not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT TAPE
SET” and perform the following steps.
3. Repeat steps above if necessary to check the other seat belts.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK
Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
NOTE:
All seat belt retractors are Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the
retractor will lock and prevent the webbing from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors
except the driver seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also
called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt
is fully extended. When the webbing is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt
in a specific position so the webbing cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat
belt to fully wind back into the retractor.
Check the seat belt retractors with the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating properly.
ELR Function Stationary Check
Grasp the shoulder webbing and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from
extending further.
ALR Function Stationary Check
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pull out the entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard.
Retract the webbing partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the webbing retracts indicating that the
retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode.
Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The webbing must lock and not extend any further. If it
does not operate normally, replace the retractor assembly.
Allow the entire length of the webbing to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode.
ELR Function Moving Check
WARNING:
Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a
large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. Never perform the following test on
wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious
personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the
retractor does not lock.
1. Fasten driver seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested.
2. Proceed to the designated safe area.
3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop
and the driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the retractor does
not lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop.
During stopping, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock,
perform the retractor off-vehicle check.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK
1.
2.
Remove the second seat belt retractor. Refer to SB-11, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation".
Slowly pull out webbing while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without
twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the figure.
Revision: 2011 September
SB-12
2012 QUEST
SECOND SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• The webbing can be pulled out when the angle (A) is 15
degrees or less.
• The webbing cannot be pulled out when the angle (B) is 35
degrees or more.
A and B
A
B
: Tilting angles
: Vehicle front
C
JMHIA1064ZZ
3.
D
Replace the seat belt assembly if it does not operate normally.
SEAT BELT BUCKLE
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation
E
INFOID:0000000007492769
REMOVAL
1.
2.
F
Remove anchor bolt cap.
Remove seat belt buckle mounting anchor bolt, and then remove seat belt buckle.
G
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007492770
SB
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attached hardware after any collision.
NISSAN/INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced
unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation was noted. Seat belt
pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during a frontal collision in
which the air bags were deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
• The seat belt is in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
• The seat belt is damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.)
• The seat belt attaching point is damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or
distortion and repair if necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
• Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
• The seat belt pre-tensioner must be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during the collision in
which the air bags are deployed.
J
K
L
M
N
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
1.
2.
I
Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are tightened firmly.
Repeat step above if necessary to check the other seat belts.
O
SEAT BELT HOOK
SEAT BELT HOOK : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492771
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Slide second seat to the frontmost position.
Remove third seat from the vehicle. Refer to SE-107, "Removal and Installation".
Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
SB-13
2012 QUEST
P
SECOND SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. From back of luggage side lower finisher, press pawls indicated
by arrows as shown in the figure and remove seat belt hook
from luggage side lower finisher.
JMHIA1638ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
SB-14
2012 QUEST
THIRD SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
THIRD SEAT BELT
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007492772
B
C
D
E
F
G
SB
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
JMHIA2051GB
Shoulder anchor cover
4.
Spacer
5.
Retaining washer
6.
Outer seat belt retractor RH
7.
Locking washer
8.
Seat belt shoulder bracket RH
9.
Seat belt hook
10. Outer anchor
2.
Anchor bolt
11. Seat belt shoulder bracket LH
3.
P
1.
Shoulder anchor
12. Outer seat belt retractor LH
13. Center seat belt retractor finisher
14. Center seat belt retractor
15. Center seat belt buckle
16. Outer seat belt buckle RH
17. Connector buckle
18. Outer seat belt buckle LH
Revision: 2011 September
SB-15
2012 QUEST
THIRD SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
: Pawl
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492773
REMOVAL
OUTER SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
1.
a.
Remove shoulder anchor.
Pull shoulder anchor cover in direction indicated by arrows as
shown in the figure. Remove outer anchor cover.
: Pawl
JMHIA1725ZZ
b.
2.
3.
a.
b.
4.
Remove shoulder anchor mounting anchor bolt.
Remove outer anchor mounting anchor bolt, and then remove outer anchor.
Remove outer seat belt retractor.
Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation".
Remove outer anchor mounting anchor bolt.
Remove seat belt shoulder bracket mounting bolts, and then remove seat belt shoulder bracket.
CENTER SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
1.
Remove center seat belt retractor finisher.
Disengage center seat belt finisher fixing clips, and then remove
center seat belt retractor finisher.
: Clip
JMHIA1726ZZ
2.
a.
Remove center seat belt retractor.
Remove third assist grip (LH and RH), and then remove headlining assembly rear clips.
Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
SB-16
2012 QUEST
THIRD SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
b. Slightly lower the headlining assembly (1) rear and secure work
space.
c. Remove outer seat belt retractor mounting anchor bolts (A), and
then remove outer seat belt retractor (2).
A
B
C
JMHIA1727ZZ
D
INATALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007492774
E
AFTER A COLLISION
F
WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attached hardware after any collision.
NISSAN/INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced
unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Fail- G
ure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation was noted. Seat belt
pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during a frontal collision in
SB
which the air bags were deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
• The seat belt is in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
I
• The seat belt is damaged in an accident (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.).
• The seat belt attaching point is damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or
distortion and repair if necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
J
• Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
• The seat belt pre-tensioners must be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during the collision in
which the air bags were deployed.
K
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.
3.
Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are tightened firmly.
Check retractor operation:
Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage.
Allow the seat belt to retract. Check that webbing returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the
seat belt does not return smoothly, wipe the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth. Dirt build-up in the
loops of that upper anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
Fasten the seat belt. Check that seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the webbing
does not return smoothly, the cause may be an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the “SEAT BELT TAPE
SET” and perform the following steps.
Repeat steps above if necessary to check the other seat belts.
Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
NOTE:
All seat belt retractors are Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an emergency (sudden stop) the
retractor will lock and prevent the webbing from extending any further. All 3-point type seat belt retractors
except the driver seat belt also have an Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also
called child restraint mode) is used when installing child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt
is fully extended. When the webbing is then retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt
in a specific position so the webbing cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat
belt to fully wind back into the retractor.
SB-17
M
N
O
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK
Revision: 2011 September
L
2012 QUEST
P
THIRD SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Check the seat belt retractors with the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is operating properly.
ELR Function Stationary Check
Grasp the shoulder webbing and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt from
extending further.
ALR Function Stationary Check
1.
2.
3.
4.
Pull out the entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard.
Retract the webbing partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the webbing retracts indicating that the
retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) mode.
Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The webbing must lock and not extend any further. If it
does not operate normally, replace the retractor assembly.
Allow the entire length of the webbing to retract to cancel the automatic locking mode.
ELR Function Moving Check
WARNING:
Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions (for example, a
large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. Never perform the following test on
wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an accident and serious
personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the
retractor does not lock.
1. Fasten driver seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested.
2. Proceed to the designated safe area.
3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop
and the driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event that the retractor does
not lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop.
During stopping, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock,
perform the retractor off-vehicle check.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK
1.
2.
a.
Remove the third seat belt retractor. Refer to SB-16, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation".
Slowly pull out webbing while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without
twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the figure.
Outer seat belt retractor
• The webbing can be pulled out when the angle (A) is 15
degrees or less.
• The webbing cannot be pulled out when the angle (B) is 35
degrees or more.
A and B
: Tilting angles
: Vehicle front
JMHIA1064ZZ
b.
Center seat belt retractor
Revision: 2011 September
SB-18
2012 QUEST
THIRD SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• The webbing can be pulled out when the angle (A) is 15
degrees or less.
• The webbing cannot be pulled out when the angle (B) is 35
degrees or more.
A
B
A and B
: Tilting angles
: Vehicle front
C
JMHIA0522ZZ
D
3.
Replace the seat belt assembly if it does not operate normally.
SEAT BELT BUCKLE
E
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492775
REMOVAL
F
OURTER SETA BELT BUCKLE RH & CENTER SETA BELT BUCKLE
1.
2.
3.
a.
4.
Remove luggage floor rear board. Refer to INT-39, "LUGGAGE FLOOR REAR BOARD : Removal and
G
Installation".
Remove cable cover. Refer to INT-40, "CABLE COVER : Removal and Installation".
Remove outer seat belt buckle RH.
SB
Remove outer seat belt buckle RH mounting anchor bolt.
Pull up seat belt buckle from the seat back and remove it.
I
CONNECTOR BUCKLE
1.
2.
Remove third seat (RH) from the vehicle. Refer to SE-107, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.
Remove connector buckle mounting anchor bolt, and then remove connector buckle.
J
OURTER SETA BELT BUCKLE LH
1.
2.
Remove third seat (LH) from the vehicle. Refer to SE-107, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.
Remove outer seat belt buckle LH mounting anchor bolt, and then remove outer seat belt buckle LH.
K
L
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
M
SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Inspection
INFOID:0000000007492776
N
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING:
Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attached hardware after any collision.
NISSAN/INFINITI recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced
unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation was noted. Seat belt
pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during a frontal collision in
which the air bags were deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
• The seat belt is in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts, retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
• The seat belt is damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide, etc.)
• The seat belt attaching point is damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for damage or
distortion and repair if necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
Revision: 2011 September
SB-19
2012 QUEST
O
P
THIRD SEAT BELT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
• The seat belt pre-tensioner must be replaced even if the seat belts were not in use during the collision in
which the air bags are deployed.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
1.
2.
Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are tightened firmly.
Repeat step above if necessary to check the other seat belts.
SEAT BELT HOOK
SEAT BELT HOOK : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492777
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
Slide second seat to the frontmost position.
Remove third seat from the vehicle. Refer to SE-107, "Removal and Installation".
Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation".
From back of luggage side lower finisher, press pawls indicated
by arrows as shown in the figure and remove seat belt hook
from luggage side lower finisher.
JMHIA1638ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
SB-20
2012 QUEST
RESTRAINTS
SECTION
SR
SRS AIRBAG
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2
SPIRAL CABLE ................................................ 14
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Exploded View .........................................................14
Removal and Installation .........................................14
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Service ...................................................................... 2
PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE ................... 17
Exploded View .........................................................17
Removal and Installation .........................................17
PREPARATION ............................................ 3
CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE .......................... 20
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Exploded View .........................................................20
Removal and Installation .........................................20
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
Exploded View .........................................................22
Removal and Installation .........................................22
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS .................................... 4
FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION .................. 6
FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION : When
SRS is activated in a collision ................................... 6
FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION : When
SRS is not activated in a collision ............................. 7
G
SR
I
CRASH ZONE SENSOR ................................... 22
BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 4
FOR FRONTAL COLLISION ....................................... 4
FOR FRONTAL COLLISION : When SRS is activated in a collision ..................................................... 4
FOR FRONTAL COLLISION : When SRS is not
activated in a collision ............................................... 5
F
J
SATELLITE SENSOR ....................................... 24
Exploded View .........................................................24
Removal and Installation .........................................25
K
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................. 28
Exploded View .........................................................28
Removal and Installation .........................................28
SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER ........................ 30
Exploded View .........................................................30
Removal and Installation .........................................30
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 11
OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT ........................................................ 31
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ..............................11
Exploded View .........................................................31
Removal and Installation .........................................31
Exploded View ........................................................ 11
Removal and Installation ......................................... 11
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SR-1
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000007494897
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Service
INFOID:0000000007494898
• Never use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
• Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait at least 3
minutes.
For approximately 3 minutes after the battery negative terminal are removed, it is still possible for the air bag
and seat belt pre-tensioner to deploy. Therefore, never work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3
minutes have elapsed.
• Diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with their arrow marks “⇐” pointing towards the front of the
vehicle for proper operation. Also check diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before installation and replace as required.
• The spiral cable must be aligned in the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Never turn steering
wheel and column after removal of steering gear.
• Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and front passenger air bag modules with the pad side
facing upward and seat mounted front side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side facing down.
• Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper functioning after replacing any components.
• After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged.
• Always replace instrument panel pad following front passenger air bag deployment.
Revision: 2011 September
SR-2
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
A
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007494899
Tool name
Description
Tamper resistant TORX bit
B
C
Removes of driver air bag module
D
E
S-NT757
F
Remover tool
Removes clips, pawls and metal clips
G
JMKIA3050ZZ
SR
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SR-3
2012 QUEST
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
FOR FRONTAL COLLISION
FOR FRONTAL COLLISION : When SRS is activated in a collision
INFOID:0000000007494900
CAUTION:
Due to varying models and option levels, not all parts listed in the chart below apply to all vehicles.
WORK PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Before performing any of the following steps, ensure that all vehicle body and structural repairs have been
completed.
Replace the diagnosis sensor unit.
Remove the front air bag modules, crash zone sensor, bracket and seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies.
Check the SRS components using the table below:
Replace any SRS components showing visible signs of damage. (dents, cracks and deformation, etc.)
Install new front air bag modules, crash zone sensor assembly, bracket and seat belt pre-tensioner
assemblies.
Perform self-diagnosis using CONSULT or air bag warning lamp. Refer to SRC-19, "CONSULT Function"
or SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly.
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRC-15, "Description".
SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)
Part
Inspection
Driver air bag module
If the driver air bag has deployed:
REPLACE
Install with new fasteners.
Passenger air bag module (if
equipped)
If the passenger air bag has deployed:
REPLACE
Install with new fasteners.
Crash zone sensor
If any of the front air bags or seat belt pre-tensioners* have been activated:
REPLACE the crash zone sensor and bracket with new fasteners.
*: Confirm seat belt pre-tensioner activation using CONSULT only.
Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies
(All applicable locations: buckle,
retractor, lap outer)
If either the driver or passenger seat belt pre-tensioner* has been activated:
REPLACE all seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies with new fasteners.
*: Confirm seat belt pre-tensioner activation using CONSULT only.
Diagnosis sensor unit
If any of the SRS components have been activated:
REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit.
Install with new fasteners.
1.
2.
Steering wheel
3.
4.
5.
6.
Visually check steering wheel for deformities.
Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel.
Check steering wheel for excessive free play.
If no damage is found, reinstall.
If damaged − REPLACE.
Spiral cable
If the driver front air bag has deployed:
REPLACE the spiral cable.
Occupant classification system
(Passenger seat)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Revision: 2011 September
Remove passenger seat assembly.
Check control unit case for dents, cracks of deformities.
Check connectors and pressure sensor tube for damage, and terminals for deformities.
Check seat frame and cushion pan for dents or deformities.
If no damage is found, reinstall seat with new fasteners.
If damaged − REPLACE seat cushion assembly with new fasteners.
SR-4
2012 QUEST
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Part
Harness and connectors
Instrument panel assembly
Inspection
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check connectors for poor connection, damage, and terminals for deformities.
Check harness for binding, chafing, cuts, or deformities.
If no damage is found, reinstall the harness and connectors.
If damaged − REPLACE the damaged harness. Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify any
SRS harness.
If the passenger air bag has deployed:
REPLACE the instrument panel assembly. (integrated type)
FOR FRONTAL COLLISION : When SRS is not activated in a collision
A
B
C
INFOID:0000000007494901
CAUTION:
Due to varying models and option levels, not all parts listed in the chart below apply to all vehicles.
D
WORK PROCEDURE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Before performing any of the following steps, ensure that all vehicle body and structural repairs have been
completed.
Check the SRS components using the table below:
Replace any SRS components showing visible signs of damage. (dents, cracks and deformation, etc.)
Perform self-diagnosis using CONSULT or air bag warning lamp. Refer to SRC-19, "CONSULT Function"
or SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" for details. Ensure entire SRS operates properly.
After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRC-15, "Description".
SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)
Part
Driver air bag module
E
F
G
SR
Inspection
If the driver air bag has NOT been deployed:
1.
Remove driver air bag module. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for
deformities, and harness for binding.
2.
Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel.
3.
If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
4.
If damaged − REPLACE. Install driver air bag module with new fasteners.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.
Passenger air bag module (if
equipped)
If the passenger air bag has NOT been deployed:
1.
Remove passenger air bag module. Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
2.
Install passenger air bag module into the instrument panel to check fit with the instrument panel.
3.
If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
4.
If damaged − REPLACE. Install passenger air bag modules with new fasteners.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.
Crash zone sensor
If the front air bags or seat belt pre-tensioners have NOT been activated:
1.
Remove the crash zone sensor. Check harness connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
2.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation, etc.) of the crash zone sensor
and bracket.
3.
Install the crash zone sensor to check fit.
4.
If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
5.
If damaged − REPLACE the crash zone sensor and bracket with new fasteners.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SR-5
2012 QUEST
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Part
Inspection
Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies
(All applicable locations: buckle,
retractor, lap outer)
If the pre-tensioners have NOT been activated:
1.
Remove seat belt pre-tensioners.
Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for
binding.
2.
Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting.
3.
Check retractor for smooth operation.
4.
Check seat belt adjuster for damage.
5.
Check for deformities of the center pillar inner.
6.
If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
7.
If no damage is found, reinstall seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
8.
If damaged − REPLACE. Install the seat belt pre-tensioners with new fasteners.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.
Diagnosis sensor unit
If none of the SRS components have been activated:
1.
Check case for dents, cracks or deformities.
2.
Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3.
If no damage is found, reinstall with new fasteners.
4.
If damaged − REPLACE. Install diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.
1.
2.
Steering wheel
3.
4.
5.
6.
Visually check steering wheel for deformities.
Check harness (built into steering wheel) and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
Install driver air bag module into the steering wheel to check fit and alignment with the wheel.
Check steering wheel for excessive free play.
If no damage is found, reinstall.
If damaged − REPLACE.
Spiral cable
If the driver front air bag has not deployed:
1.
Visually check spiral cable and combination switch for damage.
2.
Check connectors and protective tape for damage.
3.
Check steering wheel for noise, binding or heavy operation.
4.
If no damage is found, reinstall.
5.
If damaged − REPLACE.
Occupant classification system
(Passenger seat)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove passenger seat assembly.
Check control unit case for dents, cracks of deformities.
Check connectors and pressure sensor tube for damage, and terminals for deformities.
Check seat frame and cushion pan for dents or deformities.
If no damage is found, reinstall seat with new fasteners.
If damaged − REPLACE seat cushion assembly with new fasteners.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check connectors for poor connection, damage, and terminals for deformities.
Check harness for binding, chafing, cuts, or deformities.
If no damage is found, reinstall the harness and connectors.
If damaged − REPLACE the damaged harness. Do not attempt to repair, splice or modify any
SRS harness.
Harness and connectors
Instrument panel assembly
If the passenger air bag has NOT deployed:
1.
Visually check instrument panel assembly for damage.
2.
If no damage is found, reinstall the instrument panel assembly.
3.
If damaged − REPLACE the instrument panel assembly.
FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION
FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION : When SRS is activated in a collision
INFOID:0000000007494902
CAUTION:
Due to varying models and option levels, not all parts listed in the chart below apply to all vehicles.
WORK PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Before performing any of the following steps, ensure that all vehicle body and structural repairs have been
completed.
Replace the following components:
• Front seat back assembly (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
• Door finisher (on the side on which door-mounted curtain air bag is activated)
• Pop-up roll bar assemblies and pop-up roll bar covers
Revision: 2011 September
SR-6
2012 QUEST
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< BASIC INSPECTION >
• Satellite sensor LH/RH (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
• Diagnosis sensor unit
• Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies
3. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table.
Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage. (dents, cracks,
deformation, etc.)
4. Perform self-diagnosis using CONSULT and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRC-19, "CONSULT
Function" or SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" for details. Make sure entire SRS operates properly.
5. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRC-15, "Description".
SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION)
Part
A
B
C
D
Inspection
If the curtain air bag LH has deployed:
REPLACE the curtain air bag module LH.
Install with new fasteners.
E
Curtain air bag module LH
Curtain air bag module RH
If the curtain air bag RH has deployed:
REPLACE the curtain air bag module RH.
Install with new fasteners.
F
Side air bag module LH
If the side air bag LH has deployed:
REPLACE front seatback assembly LH.
Side air bag module RH
If the side air bag RH has deployed:
REPLACE front seatback assembly RH.
Satellite sensor (LH or RH)
If any of the SRS components have deployed:
REPLACE the satellite sensor on the collision side with new fasteners.
Diagnosis sensor unit
If any of the SRS components have deployed:
REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.
Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies
(All applicable locations: buckle,
retractor, lap outer)
If either the driver or passenger seat belt pre-tensioner* has been activated:
REPLACE all seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies with new fasteners.
*: Confirm seat belt pre-tensioner activation using CONSULT only.
Center inner pillar
1.
2.
Check the center inner pillar on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation, etc.).
If damaged − REPAIR the center inner pillar.
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation, etc.) of the interior trim on the
collision side.
If damaged − REPLACE the damaged trim parts.
Trim/headlining
2.
Door-mounted curtain air bag
module LH
If the door-mounted curtain air bag module LH has deployed:
REPLACE the door finisher LH and door-mounted curtain air bag module.
Install with new fasteners.
Door-mounted curtain air bag
module RH
If the door-mounted curtain air bag module RH has deployed:
REPLACE the door finisher RH and door-mounted curtain air bag module.
Install with new fasteners.
Pop-up roll bar assemblies
If the pop-up roll bar has deployed:
REPLACE pop-up roll bar assemblies and pop-up roll bar covers.
Install with new fasteners.
G
SR
I
J
K
L
M
N
FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION : When SRS is not activated in a collision
O
INFOID:0000000007494903
CAUTION:
Due to varying models and option levels, not all parts listed in the chart below apply to all vehicles.
WORK PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Before performing any of the following steps, ensure that all vehicle body and structural repairs have been
completed.
Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table.
• If the front seat back assembly is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced.
Revision: 2011 September
SR-7
2012 QUEST
P
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< BASIC INSPECTION >
• If the door finisher assembly is damaged, the door finisher assembly and door-mounted curtain air bag
module must be replaced.
3. Perform self-diagnosis using CONSULT and “AIR BAG” warning lamp. Refer to SRC-19, "CONSULT
Function" or SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" for details. Make sure entire SRS operates properly.
4. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
SRC-15, "Description".
SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION)
Part
Inspection
Curtain air bag module LH
If the curtain air bag LH has NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation, etc.) of the center pillar on the collision side.
2.
If damaged − Remove the curtain air bag module LH.
3.
Check for visible signs of damage (tears etc.) of the curtain air bag module LH.
4.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
5.
If no damage is found, reinstall the curtain air bag module LH with new fasteners.
6.
If damaged − REPLACE the curtain air bag module LH with new fasteners.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.
Curtain air bag module RH
If the curtain air bag RH has NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation, etc.) of the center pillar on the collision side.
2.
If damaged − Remove the curtain air bag module RH.
3.
Check for visible signs of damage (tears etc.) of the curtain air bag module RH.
4.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
5.
If no damage is found, reinstall the curtain air bag module RH with new fasteners.
6.
If damaged − REPLACE the curtain air bag module RH with new fasteners.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.
Side air bag module LH
If the side air bag LH has NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation, etc.) of the seat back on the collision side.
2.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3.
If damaged − REPLACE the front seatback assembly LH.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.
Side air bag module RH
If the side air bag RH has NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation, etc.) of the seat back on the collision side.
2.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3.
If damaged − REPLACE the front seatback assembly RH.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.
Satellite sensor (LH or RH)
If none of the SRS components have been activated:
1.
Remove the satellite sensor (LH or RH) on the collision side. Check harness connectors for
damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for binding.
2.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation, etc.) of the satellite sensor (LH
or RH).
3.
Install the satellite sensor (LH or RH) to check fit.
4.
If no damage is found, reinstall the side sir bag (satellite) sensor (LH or RH) with new fasteners.
5.
If damaged − REPLACE the satellite sensor (LH or RH) with new fasteners.
Diagnosis sensor unit
If none of the SRS components have been activated:
1.
Check case and bracket for dents, cracks or deformities.
2.
Check connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
3.
If no damage is found, reinstall the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.
4.
If damaged − REPLACE the diagnosis sensor unit with new fasteners.
Revision: 2011 September
SR-8
2012 QUEST
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Part
Seat belt pre-tensioner assemblies
(All applicable locations: buckle,
retractor, lap outer)
Seat (with side air bag)
Center inner pillar
Inspection
If the pre-tensioners have NOT been activated:
1.
Remove seat belt pre-tensioners.
Check harness cover and connectors for damage, terminals for deformities, and harness for
binding.
2.
Check belts for damage and anchors for loose mounting.
3.
Check retractor for smooth operation.
4.
Check seat belt adjuster for damage.
5.
Check for deformities of the center pillar inner.
6.
If the center pillar inner has no damage, REPLACE the seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
7.
If no damage is found, reinstall seat belt pre-tensioner assembly.
8.
If damaged − REPLACE. Install the seat belt pre-tensioners with new fasteners.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.
If the front LH or front RH side air bag modules have NOT deployed:
1.
Visually check the seat on the collision side.
2.
Remove the seat on the collision side and check the following for damage and deformities.
Harness, connectors and terminals
Frame and recliner (for front and rear seat), and also adjuster and slides (for front seat)
3.
If no damage is found, reinstall the seat.
4.
If damaged − REPLACE the damaged seat parts using new fasteners. If the front seat back is
damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced.
1.
2.
Check the center inner pillar on the collision side for damage (dents, cracks, deformation, etc.).
If damaged − REPAIR the center inner pillar.
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation, etc.) of the interior trim on the
collision side.
If damaged − REPLACE the damaged trim parts.
Trim/headlining
2.
Door-mounted curtain air bag
module LH
If the door-mounted curtain air bag LH has NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation, etc.) of the door finisher on the
collision side.
2.
If damaged − REPLACE the door finisher LH with new fasteners.
3.
Check for visible signs of damaged (tears etc.) of the door-mounted curtain air bag module LH.
4.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
5.
If no damage is found, reinstall door finisher.
CAUTION:
When removing door-mounted curtain air bag module from door finisher, never reuse
door finisher.
6.
If damaged − REPLACE the door finisher LH and door-mounted curtain air bag module LH with
new fasteners.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SR
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SR-9
2012 QUEST
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Part
Inspection
Door-mounted curtain air bag
module RH
If the door-mounted curtain air bag RH has NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation, etc.) of the door finisher on the
collision side.
2.
If damaged − REPLACE the door finisher RH with new fasteners.
3.
Check for visible signs of damage (tears etc.) of the door-mounted curtain air bag module RH.
4.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
5.
If no damage is found, reinstall door finisher.
CAUTION:
When removing door-mounted curtain air bag module from door finisher, never reuse
door finisher.
6.
If damaged − REPLACE the door finisher RH and door-mounted curtain air bag module RH with
new fasteners.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.
Pop-up roll bar
If the pop-up roll bar has NOT deployed:
1.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, tears, deformation, etc.) of the pop-up roll bar.
2.
If damaged − REPLACE the pop-up roll bar with new fasteners.
3.
Check harness and connectors for damage, and terminals for deformities.
4.
If no damage is found, reinstall the pop-up roll bar with new fasteners.
5.
Check for visible signs of damage (dents, cracks, deformation, etc.) of the seatback support
brace assembly.
6.
If damaged − REPAIR the seatback support brace assembly.
CAUTION:
Before disposing of such systems, deploy the systems.
Revision: 2011 September
SR-10
2012 QUEST
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494904
B
C
D
E
F
G
SR
I
J
JMHIA2034GB
1.
Steering column upper cover
2.
Combination switch
3.
Steering angle sensor
4.
Spiral cable
5.
Side lid LH
6.
TORX bolt
7.
Driver air bag module
8.
Steering wheel
9.
Side lid RH
10. Steering column lower cover
K
L
11. Steering column assembly
M
: Pawl
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
N
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494905
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait for 3 minutes or more.
• Always work from the side of air bag module. Never work in front of it.
• Never use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
REMOVAL
1.
Remove side lid (LH and RH).
Revision: 2011 September
SR-11
2012 QUEST
O
P
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Insert flat-bladed screwdriver between side lid and steering
wheel to disengage pawls as shown in the figure.
: Pawl
JMHIA1692ZZ
2.
3.
4.
Remove TORX bolts (LH and RH) from the steering wheel lower side using TORX bit.
Pull out driver air bag module (A).
Disconnect driver air bag harness connectors (B).
JMHIA2039ZZ
CAUTION:
• For installing/removing the driver air bag module harness
connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into
notch, lift lock and remove the connector.
• Install the connector with lock raised, and push lock into
the connector.
• After installing the connector, check that the lock is
pushed securely into it.
PHIA0953J
5. Remove driver air bag module.
CAUTION:
• To prevent accidental explosion, always place the driver air
bag module with pad side facing upward.
: Upward
JMHIA0504ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
SR-12
2012 QUEST
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the driver air
bag module.
• Replace the driver air bag module if it is dropped or sustains
an impact.
A
B
C
JMHIA0009ZZ
D
• To prevent accidental explosion, never insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into the driver
air bag module.
• To prevent accidental explosion, never disassemble the driver air bag module.
• To prevent accidental explosion, never expose the driver air bag module to temperatures of more
than 90 °C (194 °F).
• To prevent accidental explosion, never allow oil, grease, detergent, or water to come in contact with
the driver air bag module.
E
F
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse mounting TORX bolts after removal, replace with new TORX bolts.
• Fix the driver air bag module harnesses (A) to the harness fixing hook (B).
G
SR
I
J
JMHIA2035ZZ
• Never damage the harness while installing.
• Tighten the TORX bolts after completely adjusting the centers of fixing holes on the driver air bag
module side and the steering wheel side. If the holes are misaligned, the bolt threads are damaged
and the module is not installed securely.
• If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfunctioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function".
• After the work is complete, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SR-13
2012 QUEST
SPIRAL CABLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SPIRAL CABLE
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494906
JMHIA2034GB
1.
Steering column upper cover
2.
Combination switch
3.
Steering angle sensor
4.
Spiral cable
5.
Side lid LH
6.
TORX bolt
7.
Driver air bag module
8.
Steering wheel
9.
Side lid RH
10. Steering column lower cover
11. Steering column assembly
: Pawl
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494907
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait for 3 minutes or more.
• Never use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation".
Remove steering wheel. Refer to ST-11, "Removal and Installation".
Remove steering column upper cover and steering column lower cover. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and
Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
SR-14
2012 QUEST
SPIRAL CABLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Disconnect the spiral cable body side harness connectors (A),
(B) and steering angle sensor harness connector (C).
NOTE:
Disconnect the spiral cable body side harness connector (B)
after removing the spiral cable body side harness connector (A).
A
B
C
JMHIA2036ZZ
D
5.
6.
Remove the spiral cable fixing screws.
Remove the spiral cable fixing pawls with remover tool (A), then remove the spiral cable.
E
F
G
JMHIA2037ZZ
SR
: Pawl
CAUTION:
Remove pawls slowly so that they are not damaged.
7. Remove the steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-121, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
• To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the spiral cable.
• Replace the spiral cable if it is dropped or sustains an impact.
I
J
K
L
M
JMHIA0009ZZ
• To prevent damage to the parts, never disassemble the spiral cable.
• To prevent damage to the parts, never apply lubricant to the spiral cable.
• To prevent damage to the parts, never allow oil, grease, detergent, or water to come in contact with
the spiral cable.
N
O
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
P
Revision: 2011 September
SR-15
2012 QUEST
SPIRAL CABLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• The spiral cable may snap during steering operation if the
cable is installed in an improper position.
The neutral position is set as per the following.
• Carefully turn the spiral cable clockwise to the end position.
Then turn it counterclockwise (about 2 and a half turns) and
stop turning at the mark (B) when the stopper insertion holes
are in the same position.
• The service part is installed in the neutral position by the
stopper and can be set without adjusting after the stopper is
removed.
• Never over turn the spiral cable or go beyond the number of
turns required. (This causes the cable to snap)
• Adjust the spiral cable locating pin (A) to the steering wheel
locating pin hole (C).
JMHIA2038ZZ
• Fix the driver air bag module harnesses (A) to the harness fixing hook (B).
JMHIA2035ZZ
• If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfunctioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function".
• After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
Revision: 2011 September
SR-16
2012 QUEST
PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494908
B
C
D
E
F
G
SR
I
J
K
L
JMHIA2043GB
1.
Instrument panel assembly
2.
Passenger air bag module
3.
Steering member assembly
M
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
N
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494909
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait for 3 minutes or more.
• Always work from the side of air bag module. Never work in front of it.
• Never use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
REMOVAL
1.
Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
SR-17
2012 QUEST
O
P
PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Remove passenger air bag module fixing screws (A).
JMHIA2040ZZ
3.
4.
Pull up air bag grid portion of instrument panel, and then disengage the passenger air bag module.
Remove passenger air bag module from instrument panel.
JMHIA2041ZZ
CAUTION:
• To prevent accidental explosion, always place the passenger
air bag module with pad side facing upward.
: Upward
JMHIA2042ZZ
• To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the passenger
air bag module.
• Replace the passenger air bag module if it is dropped or sustains an impact.
JMHIA0009ZZ
• To prevent accidental explosion, never insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into the passenger air bag module.
• To prevent accidental explosion, never disassemble the passenger air bag module.
• To prevent accidental explosion, never expose the passenger air bag module to temperatures of
more than 90 °C (194 °F).
• To prevent damage to the parts, never allow oil, grease, detergent, or water to come in contact with
the passenger air bag module.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
SR-18
2012 QUEST
PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CAUTION:
• Never reuse mounting bolts after removal, replace with new bolts.
• Never damage the harness while installing.
• If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfunctioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function".
• After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SR
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SR-19
2012 QUEST
CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494910
JMHIA1700GB
1.
Curtain air bag module
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494911
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait for 3 minutes or more.
• Always work from the side of curtain air bag module. Never work in front of it.
• Never use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove headlining assembly. Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect the curtain air bag harness connector (front and rear).
CAUTION:
• For installing/removing the curtain air bag harness connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in tape into
notch, lift lock and remove the connector.
• Install the connector with lock raised, and push lock into
the connector.
• After installing the connector, check that the lock is
pushed securely into it.
PHIA0953J
Revision: 2011 September
SR-20
2012 QUEST
CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Remove mounting bolts, and then remove the curtain air bag module.
CAUTION:
• To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the curtain air
bag module.
• Replace the curtain air bag module if it is dropped or sustains
an impact.
A
B
C
D
JMHIA0009ZZ
• To prevent accidental explosion, never insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into the curtain
air bag module.
• To prevent accidental explosion, never disassemble the curtain air bag module.
• To prevent accidental explosion, never expose the curtain air bag module to temperatures of more
than 90 °C (194 °F).
• To prevent damage to the parts, never allow oil, grease, detergent, or water to come in contact with
the curtain air bag module.
INSTALLATION
E
F
G
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
SR
• Check perforation of curtain air bag module to check that curtain air bag module is not twisted.
• Never damage the harness while installing.
• If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfuncI
tioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function".
• After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SR-21
2012 QUEST
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494912
JMHIA1701GB
1.
Crash zone sensor
2.
Cooling fan assembly
: Vehicle front
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494913
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait for 3 minutes or more.
• Never use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
REMOVAL
1.
Remove air duct (inlet). Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
SR-22
2012 QUEST
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Remove mounting nut (A), and then pull out the crash zone sensor.
3. Disconnect the harness connector (B), and then remove the
crash zone sensor.
A
B
: Vehicle front
C
JMHIA1702ZZ
D
CAUTION:
• To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the crash zone
sensor.
• Replace the crash zone sensor if it is dropped or sustains an
impact.
E
F
G
JMHIA0009ZZ
SR
• Replace the crash zone sensor of deployed driver air bag, deployed passenger air bag, seat belt pretensioner and deployed lap pre-tensioner.
I
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse mounting nut after removal, replace with new nut.
• Never damage the harness while installing.
• Always install normally aligning to the cutout hole, because performance of the crash zone sensor
excessively fluctuates according to the installation position.
• If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfunctioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function".
• After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SR-23
2012 QUEST
SATELLITE SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SATELLITE SENSOR
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494914
JMHIA2045GB
1.
4.
Center pillar outer panel
2.
Front satellite sensor
3.
Front door inner panel
Front door satellite sensor
5.
Rear wheel house inner panel
6.
Rear satellite sensor
: Vehicle front
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Revision: 2011 September
SR-24
2012 QUEST
SATELLITE SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494915
A
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait for 3 minutes or more.
• Never use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
B
FRONT DOOR SATELLITE SENSOR
C
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove the front door finisher. Refer to INT-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove mounting bolt (A), and then pull out the front door satellite sensor.
Disconnect the harness connector (B), and then remove the
front satellite sensor.
D
E
: Vehicle front
F
G
JMHIA2046ZZ
CAUTION:
• To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the front door
satellite sensor.
• Replace the front door satellite sensor if it is dropped or sustains an impact.
SR
I
J
K
JMHIA0009ZZ
• Replace the front door satellite sensor of deployed side air bag module and deployed curtain air bag
module.
Installation
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse mounting bolts after removal, replace with new bolts.
• Never damage the harness while installing.
• Always install normally aligning to the cutout hole, because performance of the front door satellite
sensor excessively fluctuates according to the installation position.
• If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfunctioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function".
• After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR
Remove center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-24, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
M
N
O
P
Removal
1.
L
SR-25
2012 QUEST
SATELLITE SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Remove mounting nut (A), and then pull out the front satellite
sensor.
3. Disconnect the harness connector (B), and then remove the
front satellite sensor.
: Vehicle front
JMHIA1704ZZ
CAUTION:
• To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the front satellite sensor.
• Replace the front satellite sensor if it is dropped or sustains
an impact.
JMHIA0009ZZ
• Replace the front satellite sensor of deployed side air bag module and deployed curtain air bag module.
Installation
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse mounting nut after removal, replace with new nut.
• Never damage the harness while installing.
• Always install normally aligning to the cutout hole, because performance of the front satellite sensor
excessively fluctuates according to the installation position.
• If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfunctioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function".
• After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
REAR SATELLITE SENSOR
Removal
1.
2.
3.
Remove luggage side lower finisher. Refer to INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER : Removal
and Installation".
Remove mounting nut (A), and then pull out the rear satellite
sensor.
Disconnect the harness connector (B), and then remove rear
satellite sensor.
: Vehicle front
JMHIA1705ZZ
CAUTION:
Revision: 2011 September
SR-26
2012 QUEST
SATELLITE SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the rear satellite
sensor.
• Replace the rear satellite sensor if it is dropped or sustains an
impact.
A
B
C
JMHIA0009ZZ
D
• Replace the rear satellite sensor of deployed side air bag module and deployed curtain air bag module.
E
Installation
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse mounting nut after removal, replace with new nut.
F
• Never damage the harness while installing.
• Always install normally aligning to the cutout hole, because performance of the rear satellite sensor
excessively fluctuates according to the installation position.
G
• If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfunctioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function".
• After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp. SR
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SR-27
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494916
JMHIA2047GB
1.
Diagnosis sensor unit
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494917
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait for 3 minutes or more.
• Before disconnecting the air bag sensor unit harness connector, be sure to disconnect each harness connector of the air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt to prevent air bag deployment by
static electricity and pre-tensioner seat belt operation.
• Never use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
• When replacing the air bag diagnosis sensor unit, always check with the parts department for the latest parts information. Installing an incorrect air bag diagnosis sensor unit may or may not cause the
air bag warning lamp to illuminate and may cause incorrect deployment of the supplemental air bags
and seat belt pre-tensioners in a collision resulting in serious personal injury or death.
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Always check the air bag diagnosis sensor unit ECU discriminated number (identification number) using
CONSULT.
Disconnect each connector of all air bag modules and pre-tensioner seat belts.
Remove instrument lower cover (LH and RH) and the instrument lower center cover. Refer to IP-13,
"Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
SR-28
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Remove disc eject switch (model with navigation system). Refer to AV-522, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove AV control unit (model with navigation system). Refer to AV-509, "Removal and Installation".
6. Disconnect the diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors (A).
7. Remove the diagnosis sensor unit mounting bolts (B), and then
remove the diagnosis sensor unit.
A
B
: Vehicle front
C
D
JMHIA2048ZZ
E
CAUTION:
• To prevent damage to the parts, never impact the diagnosis sensor unit.
• Replace the diagnosis sensor unit if it is dropped or sustains
an impact.
F
G
SR
JMHIA0009ZZ
I
• Replace the diagnosis sensor unit of deployed SRS air bag and deployed SRS front seat belt pretensioner.
J
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse mounting bolts after removal, replace with new bolts.
• Never damage the harness while installing.
• If malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, after repair or replacement of the malfunctioning parts, reset the memory using self-diagnosis or CONSULT. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" or SRC-19, "CONSULT Function".
• After the work is completed, check that no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
• After replacing the air bag diagnosis sensor unit, confirm using CONSULT that the ECU discriminated number (identification number) of the new replacement air bag sensor unit matches the ECU
discriminated number (identification number) of the replaced (old) air bag diagnosis sensor unit.
NOTE:
If the ECU discriminated number of the new replacement air bag diagnosis sensor unit differs from the ECU
discriminated number of the replaced air bag diagnosis sensor unit, reconfirm the parts information and verify
that the correct air bag diagnosis sensor unit was installed.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SR-29
2012 QUEST
SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494918
Refer to SB-4, "Exploded View".
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494919
For removal and installation procedures, refer to SB-5, "SEAT BELT RETRACTOR : Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
SR-30
2012 QUEST
OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
Exploded View
A
INFOID:0000000007494920
The occupant detection system control unit and seat sensor are an integral part of the front passenger seat
frame & adjuster assembly.
• Manual seat: Refer to SE-67, "Exploded View".
• Power seat: Refer to SE-81, "Exploded View".
Removal and Installation
B
C
INFOID:0000000007494921
The occupant detection system control unit and seat sensor are an integral part of the front passenger seat
frame & adjuster assembly and are replaced as an assembly.
• Manual seat: SE-70, "Removal and Installation".
• Power seat: SE-84, "Removal and Installation".
D
E
F
G
SR
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SR-31
2012 QUEST
RESTRAINTS
SECTION
SRC
SRS AIRBAG CONTROL SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 6
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 6
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 6
Service ...................................................................... 6
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 8
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 8
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT ........................................................33
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT : Description .................................33
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement ......33
ZERO POINT RESET .................................................33
ZERO POINT RESET : Description .........................33
ZERO POINT RESET : Special Repair Requirement .........................................................................33
Component Parts Location ........................................ 8
SYSTEM .............................................................11
B1001, B1002, B1003, B1004, B1005 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ...................................... 35
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG) .....................15
DTC Logic ................................................................35
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................35
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM) ..................................................21
CONSULT Function ................................................ 21
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 22
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ..............................22
DTC Index .............................................................. 22
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 27
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM .....................................27
Wiring Diagram ....................................................... 27
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 30
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........30
Work Flow ............................................................... 30
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT ....................33
Revision: 2011 September
G
SRC
I
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 35
System Description ................................................. 11
Schematic ............................................................... 14
Description .............................................................. 15
On Board Diagnosis Function ................................. 15
CONSULT Function ................................................ 19
F
B1006, B1007, B1008, B1009, B1010 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ...................................... 36
DTC Logic ................................................................36
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................36
B1011, B1012, B1013, B1014, B1015 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ...................................... 37
DTC Logic ................................................................37
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................37
J
K
L
M
N
B1017, B1020, B1021 OCCUPANT SENS C/U
... 38
DTC Logic ................................................................38
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................38
B1018 OCCUPANT SENS ................................ 40
DTC Logic ................................................................40
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................40
B1022 OCCUPANT SENS C/U ......................... 42
DTC Logic ................................................................42
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................42
SRC-1
2012 QUEST
O
P
B1023 PASS A/B INDCTR CKT ........................ 44
DTC Logic ............................................................... 44
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 44
B1025, B1032, B1048 OCS SENSOR ............... 46
DTC Logic ............................................................... 46
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 46
B1026, B1027, B1028, B1029, B1030, B1031
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT .............................. 48
B1066, B1071 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE .................................................................... 68
DTC Logic ............................................................... 68
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 68
B1067, B1072 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE .................................................................... 70
DTC Logic ............................................................... 70
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 70
DTC Logic ............................................................... 48
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 48
B1068, B1073 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE .................................................................... 72
B1033, B1034 CRASH ZONE SENSOR ........... 49
DTC Logic ............................................................... 72
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 72
DTC Logic ............................................................... 49
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 49
B1035 CRASH ZONE SENSOR ........................ 51
DTC Logic ............................................................... 51
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 51
B1036 CRASH ZONE SENSOR ........................ 53
DTC Logic ............................................................... 53
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 53
B1037, B1039, B1041 CRASH ZONE SENSOR .................................................................... 54
DTC Logic ............................................................... 54
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 54
B1042, B1043, B1044, B1045, B1046, B1047
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT .............................. 56
DTC Logic ............................................................... 56
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 56
B1049, B1054 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ..... 57
DTC Logic ............................................................... 57
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 57
B1050, B1055 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ..... 59
DTC Logic ............................................................... 59
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 59
B1051, B1056 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ..... 61
DTC Logic ............................................................... 61
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 61
B1052, B1057 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ..... 63
DTC Logic ............................................................... 63
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 63
B1074, B1075, B1076, B1077, B1078, B1079
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................. 74
DTC Logic ............................................................... 74
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 74
B1080, B1096 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE ..... 75
DTC Logic ............................................................... 75
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 75
B1081 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH ....... 77
DTC Logic ............................................................... 77
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 77
B1082 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH ....... 79
DTC Logic ............................................................... 79
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 79
B1083 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH ....... 81
DTC Logic ............................................................... 81
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 81
B1084 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH ....... 83
DTC Logic ............................................................... 83
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 83
B1086 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH ....... 85
DTC Logic ............................................................... 85
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 85
B1087 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH ....... 87
DTC Logic ............................................................... 87
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 87
B1088 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH ....... 89
DTC Logic ............................................................... 89
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 89
B1058, B1059, B1060, B1061, B1062, B1063
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT .............................. 65
B1089 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH ....... 91
DTC Logic ............................................................... 65
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 65
DTC Logic ............................................................... 91
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 91
B1065, B1070 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE .................................................................... 66
B1090, B1091, B1092, B1093, B1094, B1095
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................. 93
DTC Logic ............................................................... 66
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 66
DTC Logic ............................................................... 93
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 93
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-2
2012 QUEST
B1106, B1107, B1108, B1109, B1110, B1111
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ..............................94
DTC Logic ............................................................... 94
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 94
B1137 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH .............. 120
DTC Logic .............................................................. 120
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 120
B1113, B1114 SATELLITE SENSOR RH ..........95
B1138, B1139, B1140, B1141, B1142, B1143
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ........................... 122
DTC Logic ............................................................... 95
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 95
DTC Logic .............................................................. 122
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 122
B1115 SATELLITE SENSOR RH ......................97
B1144 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............... 123
DTC Logic ............................................................... 97
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 97
DTC Logic .............................................................. 123
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 123
B1116 SATELLITE SENSOR RH ......................99
B1145 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH ...... 124
DTC Logic ............................................................... 99
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 99
DTC Logic .............................................................. 124
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 124
B1118, B1119 SATELLITE SENSOR LH ........ 100
B1146 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH ...... 126
DTC Logic ............................................................. 100
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 100
DTC Logic .............................................................. 126
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 126
B1120 SATELLITE SENSOR LH ..................... 102
B1147 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH ...... 128
DTC Logic ............................................................. 102
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 102
DTC Logic .............................................................. 128
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 128
B1121 SATELLITE SENSOR LH ..................... 104
B1148 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH ...... 130
DTC Logic ............................................................. 104
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 104
DTC Logic .............................................................. 130
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 130
B1122, B1123, B1124, B1125, B1126, B1127
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................ 105
B1150 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH ...... 132
A
B
C
DTC Logic ............................................................. 105
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 105
B1129 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH ............... 106
DTC Logic ............................................................. 106
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 106
B1130 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH ............... 108
DTC Logic ............................................................. 108
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 108
B1131 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH ............... 110
DTC Logic ............................................................. 110
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 110
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
DTC Logic .............................................................. 132
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 132
B1151 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH ...... 134
J
DTC Logic .............................................................. 134
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 134
B1152 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH ...... 136
DTC Logic .............................................................. 136
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 136
K
L
B1153 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH ...... 138
DTC Logic .............................................................. 138
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 138
M
B1132 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH ............... 112
B1154, B1155, B1156, B1157, B1158, B1159
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ........................... 140
DTC Logic ............................................................. 112
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 112
DTC Logic .............................................................. 140
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 140
N
B1134 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH ............... 114
B1170, B1171, B1172, B1173, B1174, B1175
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ........................... 141
O
DTC Logic ............................................................. 114
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 114
B1135 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH ............... 116
DTC Logic .............................................................. 141
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 141
DTC Logic ............................................................. 116
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 116
B1186, B1187, B1188, B1189, B1190, B1191
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ........................... 142
B1136 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH ............... 118
DTC Logic .............................................................. 142
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 142
DTC Logic ............................................................. 118
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 118
B1193 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH ...... 143
DTC Logic .............................................................. 143
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-3
2012 QUEST
P
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................143
B1194 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH ....... 145
DTC Logic ............................................................. 167
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 167
DTC Logic ..............................................................145
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................145
B1250, B1251, B1252, B1253, B1254, B1255
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................ 168
B1195 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH ....... 147
DTC Logic ............................................................. 168
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 168
DTC Logic ..............................................................147
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................147
B1196 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH ....... 149
DTC Logic ..............................................................149
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................149
B1198 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH ....... 151
DTC Logic ..............................................................151
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................151
B1199 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH ....... 153
DTC Logic ..............................................................153
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................153
B1200 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH ....... 155
DTC Logic ..............................................................155
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................155
B1201 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH ....... 157
DTC Logic ..............................................................157
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................157
B1202, B1203, B1204, B1205, B1206, B1207
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................ 159
DTC Logic ..............................................................159
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................159
B1209 FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION . 160
Description .............................................................160
DTC Logic ..............................................................160
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................160
B1210 SIDE COLLISION DETECTION ........... 161
Description .............................................................161
DTC Logic ..............................................................161
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................161
B1212, B1213, B1214 SATELLITE SENSOR
RH .................................................................... 162
DTC Logic ..............................................................162
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................162
B1215, B1216, B1217 SATELLITE SENSOR
LH ..................................................................... 164
DTC Logic ..............................................................164
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................164
B1266, B1267, B1268, B1269 DIAGNOSIS
SENSOR UNIT .................................................. 169
DTC Logic ............................................................. 169
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 169
B1282, B1283, B1284, B1285 DIAGNOSIS
SENSOR UNIT .................................................. 170
DTC Logic ............................................................. 170
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 170
B1304 SATELLITE SEN RH ............................ 171
DTC Logic ............................................................. 171
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 171
B1306, B1308, B1309, B1310 SATELLITE
SEN RH ............................................................. 173
DTC Logic ............................................................. 173
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 173
B1307 SATELLITE SEN RH ............................ 175
DTC Logic ............................................................. 175
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 175
B1311 SATELLITE SEN LH ............................. 176
DTC Logic ............................................................. 176
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 176
B1313, B1315, B1316, B1317 SATELLITE
SEN LH ............................................................. 178
DTC Logic ............................................................. 178
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 178
B1314 SATELLITE SEN LH ............................. 180
DTC Logic ............................................................. 180
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 180
B1336, B1337 SATELLITE SENSOR RH ........ 181
DTC Logic ............................................................. 181
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 181
B1338, B1340, B1341, B1342 SATELLITE
SENSOR RH ..................................................... 183
DTC Logic ............................................................. 183
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 183
B1339 SATELLITE SENSOR RH ..................... 185
B1218, B1219, B1220, B1221, B1222, B1223
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................ 166
DTC Logic ............................................................. 185
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 185
DTC Logic ..............................................................166
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................166
B1343, B1344 SATELLITE SENSOR LH ........ 186
B1234, B1235, B1236, B1237, B1238, B1239
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT ............................ 167
Revision: 2011 September
DTC Logic ............................................................. 186
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 186
SRC-4
2012 QUEST
B1345, B1347, B1348, B1349 SATELLITE
SENSOR LH ..................................................... 188
DTC Logic .............................................................. 192
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 192
DTC Logic ............................................................. 188
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 188
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 193
B1346 SATELLITE SENSOR LH ..................... 190
SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT
TURN OFF ....................................................... 193
DTC Logic ............................................................. 190
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 190
B1350, B1351 SATELLITE SENSOR .............. 191
DTC Logic ............................................................. 191
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 191
B1378, B1379, B1380, B1381 DIAGNOSIS
SENSOR UNIT ................................................. 192
A
B
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 193
SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT
TURN ON ........................................................ 194
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 194
C
D
SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP BLINKS ..... 195
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 195
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-5
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000007492778
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Service
INFOID:0000000007492779
• Never use electrical test equipment to check SRS circuits unless instructed to in this Service Manual.
• Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait 3 minutes
or more.
For approximately 3 minutes after the cables are removed, it is still possible for the air bag and seat belt pretensioner to deploy. Therefore, never work on any SRS connectors or wires until at least 3 minutes have
passed.
• Diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with their arrow marks “⇐” pointing towards the front of the
vehicle for proper operation. Also check diagnosis sensor unit for cracks, deformities or rust before installation and replace as required.
• The spiral cable must be aligned with the neutral position since its rotations are limited. Never turn steering
wheel and column after removal of steering gear.
• Handle air bag module carefully. Always place driver and front passenger air bag modules with the pad side
facing upward and seat mounted front side air bag module standing with the stud bolt side facing down.
• Conduct self-diagnosis to check entire SRS for proper function after replacing any components.
• After air bag inflates, the front instrument panel assembly should be replaced if damaged.
• Always replace instrument panel pad following front passenger air bag deployment.
• Never solder the harness when making repairs. Check that harness is not pinched and that there is no contact with other components.
• Never allow harness to come in contact with oil, grease, waste oil, or water.
• Never insert foreign materials, such as a screwdriver, into the harness connector. (This is to prevent accidental activation caused by static electricity.)
• Always use CONSULT or SRS air bag warning lamp to perform the circuit diagnosis. (Never use an electric
tester such as a circuit tester.)
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-6
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
• Never enter in the deployment area of the pop-up roll bar. Never put an object in the deployment area of the
pop-up roll bar. (This is to prevent injury in case of an unintentional deployment.)
• When handling a pop-up roll bar, always grip the frame and handle carefully.
• Never reuse a pop-up roll bar that has previously deployed.
• Modification of the pop-up roll bar may cause unintentional deployment or a malfunction. Never disassemble
or modify the pop-up roll bar.
• Never allow the pop-up roll bar to be impacted (by dropping or otherwise). Always replace the pop-up roll bar
if impacted.
• When repairing the surrounding area of the pop-up roll bar, be careful not to apply excessive heat when
welding or otherwise. Remove the pop-up roll bar in advance, if necessary. Be careful when modifying the
mounting area or installing other parts because an incorrect procedure may cause damage or a malfunction.
• Never disassemble the pop-up roll bar.
• Never expose the pop-up roll bar to temperatures exceeding 90 °C (194 °F).
• Never allow oil, grease, detergent, or water to come in contact with the pop-up roll bar.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-7
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007492780
JMHIA2044ZZ
A.
Backside of radiator
B.
View with instrument lower cover
center removed
D.
Behind center pillar lower garnish
E.
View with luggage side finisher lower F.
removed
G.
View with headlining assembly removed
H.
Backside of passenger seat cushion
frame
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-8
C.
View with front door finisher removed
Front seat LH
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.
Component
Function
A
1.
Driver air bag module
• Receives signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit and deploys air bag.
• In case of frontal collision where acceleration is more than the specified level,
the ignition materials are ignited by electric ignition system. The system burns
the gas generating materials resulting in a chemical reaction. This generates
hot gases that flow into the air bag through a filter and expand the bag.
2.
Combination switch (spiral cable)
Supplies power supply to driver air bag module on steering wheel.
3.
Combination meter (air bag warning
lamp)
Indicates air bag malfunctioning and deployment by blinking and illuminating air
bag warning lamp.
4.
Passenger air bag OFF indicator
Indicates whether or not passenger air bag is in the activation mode based on
the judgement of occupant detection system.
D
5.
Passenger air bag module
• Receives signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit and deploys air bag.
• In case of frontal collision where acceleration is more than the specified level,
the ignition materials are ignited by electric ignition system. The system burns
the gas generating materials resulting in a chemical reaction. This generates
hot gases that flow into the air bag through a filter and expand the bag.
E
6.
BCM
Receive the collision detection signal when air bag diagnosis sensor unit detects
collision.
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for
detailed installation location.
Crash zone sensor
• Transmits signal to air bag diagnosis sensor unit when a frontal collision occurs.
• Crash zone sensor is a G sensor that outputs voltage signal during deceleration at the time of a vehicle frontal collision that is more than the specified limit
is detected.
7.
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit
• Detects a collision and supplies power supply for deployment to air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt.
• It contains the “G” sensors for both frontal and side collisions and spare battery
function in case of main battery damage in collision.
Front door satellite sensor LH
• Transmits signal to air bag diagnosis sensor unit when a side collision occurs.
• When air bag diagnosis sensor unit defines both signal voltage of the “G” sensor, pressure sensor and the safing algorithm to be that of collision which is
more than the specified level, the driving circuit switches on and feeds the
electric ignitor of both the side air bag, curtain air bag and pre-tensioner.
Seat belt pre-tensioner LH
• Receives signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit and deploys seat belt pretensioner.
• In the case of a frontal collision or side collision or roll over that exceeds specified impact level, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit detects the deceleration
caused by collision. It restrains the passenger with seat belt easing the stress
on passengers chest with load limiter.
Front satellite sensor LH
• Transmits signal to air bag diagnosis sensor unit when a side collision occurs.
• When air bag diagnosis sensor unit defines both signal voltage of the “G” sensor, and the safing algorithm to be that of collision which is more than the specified level, the driving circuit switches on and feeds the electric ignitor of both
the side air bag and curtain air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner.
12.
Rear satellite sensor LH
• Transmits signal to air bag diagnosis sensor unit when a side collision occurs.
• When air bag diagnosis sensor unit defines both signal voltage of the “G” sensor, and the safing algorithm to be that of collision which is more than the specified level, the driving circuit switches on and feeds the electric ignitor of both
the side air bag and curtain air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner.
13.
Seat belt buckle switch LH
Controls deployment timing depending on the seat belt condition that is fastened
or unfastened.
Side air bag module LH
• Receives signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit and deploys air bag.
• In case of side collision where acceleration is more than the specified level, the
ignition materials are ignited by electric ignition system. The system burns the
gas generating materials resulting in a chemical reaction. This generates hot
gases that flow into the air bag through a filter and expand the bag.
8.
9.
10.
11.
14.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-9
2012 QUEST
B
C
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.
Component
Function
Rear curtain air bag module
• Deploys according to collision judgment of G sensor, and safing sensor.
• Receives collision signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit, ignites, and burns
ignition material by electric ignition system, when side collision exceeds setting limit of the vehicle. Gas is generated by chemical reaction of ignition material, passes filter, and deploys air bag.
• Air bag module mainly consists of air bag and inflator that deploys air bag.
16.
Front curtain air bag module
• Deploys according to collision judgment of G sensor, and safing sensor.
• Receives collision signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit, ignites, and burns
ignition material by electric ignition system, when side collision exceeds setting limit of the vehicle. Gas is generated by chemical reaction of ignition material, passes filter, and deploys air bag.
• Air bag module mainly consists of air bag and inflator that deploys air bag.
17.
Occupant detection system control unit
Transmits the passenger seat status (occupied or empty) to air bag diagnosis
sensor unit.
18.
Occupant detection system sensor
Transmits the passenger seat status (occupied or empty) to occupant detection
system control unit.Itis installed in the passenger seat cushion frame.
15.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-10
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
A
System Description
INFOID:0000000007492781
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
JMHIA2032GB
DESCRIPTION
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) activates air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner when it detects a
frontal collision or a side collision that is more than the specified limit.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-11
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Together with other safety devices, it reduces the impact that occupant receives when vehicle collision occurs.
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit supplies power supply to air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt when deceleration that is more than the specified limit is detected by G sensor in air bag diagnosis sensor unit, crash
zone sensor, satellite sensor, or front door satellite sensor.
Air bag module is composed of electric igniter (squib), filter, pyrotechnic material, and gas generating material.
When air bag module receives a signal from air bag diagnosis sensor unit, air bag module ignites pyrotechnic
material using electric igniter (squib) so that gas generating material generates high temperature nitrogen gas.
The gas through filter activates air bag. At the same time, pre-tensioner seat belt receives power supply from
air bag diagnosis sensor unit, gas generator is activated, and then gas is generated.
Balls in pipe are moved according to generated gas pressure and strike pinion gear on ELR shaft.
ELR shaft rotates and retracts seat belt.
AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT FUNCTIONS
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit has the following functions.
• Detects a collision and supplies the energy for deploying air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner.
• Detects and records electrical malfunction in air bag system and seat belt pre-tensioner system, and blinking
air bag warning lamp.
• Detects and records the deployment of air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner, and turns ON air bag warning
lamp.
• Indicates malfunctioning portion via the number of blinks from the air bag warning lamp in the diagnosis
mode.
• Indicates the malfunction record via CONSULT.
• Suppresses the deployment of passenger air bag when passenger seat is empty or occupied by child or
child-seat.
• When passenger seat is occupied by child or child seat, turns ON passenger air bag OFF indicator.
• When judges that passenger seat is occupied by a adult or a child and passenger seat belt is not fasten,
turns ON seat belt warning lamp. Further information for the seat belt warning system.
• When collision is detected, collision signal is transmitted to BCM (collision detection function).
COLLISION MODES
The operation of SRS is different depending on the collision modes applications.
SRS configurations that are activated for the following collision modes.
×: Apply —: Not apply
SRS configuration
Frontal collision
Left side collision
Right side collision
Driver air bag module
×
—
—
Passenger air bag module
×
—
—
Seat belt pre-tensioner LH
×
×
—
Seat belt pre-tensioner RH
×
—
×
Side air bag module LH
—
×
—
Side air bag module RH
—
—
×
Front curtain air bag module LH
—
×
—
Front curtain air bag module RH
—
—
×
Rear curtain air bag module LH
—
×
—
Rear curtain air bag module RH
—
—
×
OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM
This Occupant Detection System has the following functions.
1. Suppress the deployment of front passenger air bag when front passenger seat is empty, or when occupied by child and child-seat. Turns ON front passenger air bag OFF indicator when front passenger seat is
occupied by child-seat and child.
2. Indicates malfunction portion with blinking times of air bag warning lamp in diagnosis mode.
3. Indicates the malfunctioning record by CONSULT.
4. When “zero point reset” for occupant detection system is incomplete, CONSULT indicates that “zero point
reset” is incomplete.
This function is applied to NISSAN genuine parts only.
NOTE:
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-12
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• Operation of air bag diagnosis sensor unit when air bag diagnosis sensor unit receives information from
Occupant Detection System.
• Even if zero point reset is “complete”, always perform zero point reset after the removal and installation of
seat or the removal of control unit harness connector.
Status (front passenger
seat)
Passenger air bag
Front passenger air
bag OFF indicator
Air bag warning lamp
Seat belt warning lamp
(when front passenger
seat is unbuckled)
Empty
Suppress
OFF
OFF
OFF
An object
Suppress
ON
OFF
OFF
Child/ child-seat
Suppress
ON
OFF
ON
Adult
Enable to deploy
OFF
OFF
ON
Malfunction
Suppress
ON
Blinking
OFF
Zero point reset
Not yet performed (NISSAN genuine parts
only)
A
B
C
D
E
Suppress
ON
Blinking
OFF
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-13
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Schematic
INFOID:0000000007492782
JMHIA2033GB
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-14
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG)
A
Description
INFOID:0000000007492783
CAUTION:
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
• Never repair, splice or modify the SRS wiring harness. If the harness is damaged, replace it with a
new one.
• Keep ground portion clean.
B
C
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
D
• The SRS self-diagnostic results can be read with air bag warning lamp and/or CONSULT.
• The user mode is exclusively prepared for the customer (driver). This mode warns the driver of a system
malfunction through the operation of the air bag warning lamp.
• The diagnosis mode allows the technician to locate and inspect the malfunctioning part.
• The mode applications for the air bag warning lamp and CONSULT are as per the following items.
E
×: Application, —: Not application
Diagnosis tool
User mode
Diagnosis mode
Air bag warning lamp
×
×
CONSULT
–
×
On Board Diagnosis Function
F
G
INFOID:0000000007492784
SRC
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS
There are two self diagnosis functions with air bag warning lamp per the following items.
• USER MODE
• DIAGNOSIS MODE
I
METHOD OF STARTING
• Diagnosis mode changes from user mode to diagnosis mode when changing operation is performed.
• In user mode, when SRS air bag warning lamp is not blinking, changing to diagnosis mode by ignition switch
operation is not possible.
• In diagnosis mode, when repair is complete and system is normal, the mode changes to user mode when
ignition switch is turned from OFF to ON.
Procedure to Change Diagnosis Mode
1. Turn ignition switch from OFF to ON.
2. SRS air bag lamp turns ON for 7 second and turns OFF, then turn ignition switch OFF within 1second after
the lamp turns OFF.
3. After turning ignition switch OFF, wait for 3 seconds or more.
4. Repeat operation 1 to 3 for 2 times so that operation 1 to 3 is repeated for 3times in total.
5. Turn ignition switch from OFF to ON. Diagnosis mode changes.
J
K
L
M
USER MODE
In USER MODE, air bag warning lamp on combination meter blinks when a malfunction is detected and warns
the customer (driver).
How to Read Air Bag Warning Lamp
1.
2.
O
Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON, and check that the air bag warning lamp blinks.
Compare the air bag warning lamp blinking pattern with the examples.
Air Bag Warning Lamp Examples
Revision: 2011 September
N
P
SRC-15
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Air bag warning lamp operation (user mode)
SRS condition
• No malfunction is detected
• No further action is necessary
Reference item
—
SHIA0011E
• The system is malfunctioning
• Self diagnostic result is not erased after repair
Erase “Self Diagnostic Result”
Refer to SRC-19, "CONSULT Function", How to Erase Self-diagnostic
Result
Battery voltage is low (less than 9 V) or
high battery voltage (more than 16V)
Check “CAUSE OF WARNING” in
“Special Function” with CONSULT
Refer to SRC-19, "CONSULT Function"
Occupant detection function is disabled
Refer to SRC-195, "Diagnosis Procedure"
Zero point reset is incomplete
Refer to SRC-33, "ZERO POINT
RESET : Special Repair Requirement"
Intermittent malfunction is detected in
the past
Go to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident"
• Air bag is deployed
• Seat belt pre-tensioner is deployed
Go to SRC-160, "Diagnosis Procedure" or SRC-161, "Diagnosis Procedure"
• Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
• Air bag power supply circuit is malfunctioning
• Air bag warning lamp circuit is malfunctioning
Go to SRC-193, "Diagnosis Procedure"
• Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
• Air bag warning lamp circuit is malfunctioning
Go to SRC-194, "Diagnosis Procedure"
SHIA0012E
SHIA0013E
SHIA0014E
DIAGNOSIS MODE
The diagnosis mode can only be switched when a malfunction is detected in the user mode. Malfunctioning
system is indicated according to blinking pattern of air bag warning lamp.
How to Read Air Bag Warning Lamp
1.
Follow the procedures of “PROCEDURE TO CHANGE DIAGNOSIS MODE”, and switch to the diagnosis
mode.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-16
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
2. Turn ignition switch ON. Check the blinking pattern of air bag warning lamp.
There are 2 blinking patterns for the air bag warning lamp as per the following items.
• Front air bag system: 3 second blink followed by a 0.5 second blink repeated.
• Side air bag system: Two 1.5 second blinks followed by a 0.5 second blink repeated.
A
Front air bag system
B
Number of 0.5 second blinks
Malfunctioning items
0
• Self-diagnostic result is not erased after repair
• Intermittent malfunction is detected in the past
1
Seat belt pre-tensioner RH
2
Driver air bag module
3
Seat belt pre-tensioner LH
5
Occupant detction system control unit
6
Crash zone sensor
7
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit
8
Passenger air bag module
11
Passenger air bag OFF indicator
17
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit
C
D
E
F
Side air bag system
Number of 0.5-second blinks
G
Malfunctioning items
1
Side air bag module RH
2
Side air bag module LH
3
Front satellite sensor RH
4
Front satellite sensor LH
5
Rear curtain air bag module RH
6
Rear curtain air bag module LH
7
Front curtain air bag module RH
8
Front curtain air bag module LH
9
Front door satellite sensor RH
10
Front door satellite sensor LH
11
Rear satellite sensor RH
12
Rear satellite sensor LH
20
Front door satellite sensor LH/RH
SRC
I
J
K
L
How to Erase Self-diagnostic Result
After a malfunction is repaired, turn the ignition switch OFF for one second or more, then turn ignition switch
ON. The diagnosis mode returns to the user mode. At that time the self-diagnostic result is cleared.
M
EXAMPLE OF AIR BAG WARNING LAMP OPERATION IN THE DIAGNOSIS MODE
N
System Normal
When system is normal.
O
P
JMHIA0945GB
Single System Malfunction
• Front air bag system
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-17
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
When air bag diagnosis sensor unit system (Item display 1) is malfunctioning.
JMHIA1822GB
• Side air bag system
When rear curtain air bag module LH system (Item display 1) is malfunctioning.
JMHIA1823GB
Multiple Systems Malfunction
• Front air bag system
When driver air bag module (Item display 1) and air bag diagnosis sensor unit system (Item display 2) are
malfunctioning.
JMHIA1824GB
• Side air bag system
When front satellite sensor LH (Item display1) and rear curtain air bag module LH system (Item display 2)
are malfunctioning.
JMHIA1825GB
• Front air bag system and side air bag system
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-18
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
When driver air bag module (Item display 1) and front satellite sensor RH (Item display2) are malfunctioning.
A
B
C
JMHIA0950GB
D
CONSULT Function
INFOID:0000000007492785
APPLICATION ITEM
E
CONSULT performs the following functions.
Diagnosis mode
Description
Ecu Identification
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit ECU discriminated number (identification number) is displayed. Air bag diagnosis sensor unit has individual ECU discriminated number (identification number) based on model and equipment.
Self Diagnostic Result
The current self diagnosis results (also indicated with the number of air bag
warning lamp blinks in the diagnosis mode) are displayed on CONSULT screen
in real time. This refers to a malfunctioning part requiring repairs.
Refer to SRC-22, "DTC Index".
Function Test
CAR COMPUTER DIAG.
Test result is indicated using “OK” or “NG” so that the customer recognizes easily.
SELF-DIAG [PAST]
Diagnosis results previously stored in the memory are displayed on CONSULT
screen. The stored results are not erased until memory erasing is executed.
TROUBLE DIAG RECORD
With TROUBLE DIAG RECORD, diagnosis results previously erased by a reset operation can be displayed on CONSULT screen.
SELF-DIAG RESULT [CAN]
This item is displayed, but cannot be supported.
CAUSE OF WARNING
It displays the cause of warning lamp illumination that is not recorded in memory.
Special function
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
HOW TO ERASE SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
• “Self Diagnostic Result”
A current self-diagnostic result is displayed on CONSULT screen in real time.
After the malfunction is repaired completely, no malfunction is detected on “Self Diagnostic Result”.
• “SELF-DIAG [PAST]”
Return to “Self Diagnostic Result” CONSULT screen by touching the “BACK” key of CONSULT and select
“Self Diagnostic Result” in SELECT DIAG MODE. Touch “Erase” in “Self Diagnostic Result” mode.
NOTE:
If the memory of the malfunction in “SELF-DIAG [PAST]” is not erased, the user mode shows the system
malfunction by the illumination of the warning lamp even if the malfunction is repaired completely.
• “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD”
The memory of “TROUBLE DIAG RECORD” cannot be erased.
• “SELF-DIAG RESULT [CAN]”
Self-diagnosis result other than “SELF-DIAG RESULT [CAN]” is erased when touching “Erase”.
L
M
N
O
SPECIAL FUNCTION
CAUSE OF WARNING (AIR BAG)
The SRS air bag warning lamp blinks when the ignition voltage is a voltage value (9V or less, or 16 V or more)
at which the SRS air bag cannot operate normally.After blinking, if the ignition voltage returns to normal, SRS
air bag warning lamp turns OFF.DTC memory is not performed while the abnormal ignition voltage is
detected.The mode cannot be switched to trouble diagnosis mode when the ignition switch is operated.“No
DTC” is displayed when checking “Self-diagnosis result” using CONSULT.
NOTE:
• SRS air bag warning may blink when the condition is out of detection area* of the satellite sensor in door.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-19
2012 QUEST
P
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (AIR BAG)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
The system is normal if SRS air bag warning lamp turns OFF after the condition returns within detection area
of the satellite sensor in door.
• SRS air bag warning lamp blinks when the zero point reset is incomplete after replacing the occupant detection system control unit.(SRS air bag warning lamp turns OFF after the zero point reset is complete.)
• *: Pressure inside of door is excessively low and air bag system cannot be operated normally (example: altitude is approximately 4,000 m or more).
Display item
IGN VOLT COND
Display content
Actions by worker
The ignition voltage recognized by air bag system (air bag
control unit) is displayed or a message stating that condition is out of detection range of satellite sensor in door is
displayed.
• OK: Normal
• LOW: The ignition voltage is low, high, or out of detection range of satellite sensor in door
IGN VOLT TIME
Total number of times is displayed, summing up the number of times ignition voltage error is detected and the number of times that out of detection range of satellite sensor
in door is detected.
(Detection record is erased and counter returns to “0” by
“ERASE MEMORY” in “Self-diagnosis results” using CONSULT.)
LOW V RECORED
Number of times ignition switch ON is displayed after ignition voltage error or out of detection range of satellite sensor in door is detected.
(Detection record is erased and counter returns to “0” by
“ERASE MEMORY” in “Self-diagnosis results” using CONSULT.)
Perform the check at an altitude of 4,000 m or
less.
• Check battery voltage if the ignition voltage
status is displayed as “LOW”.
• Check battery voltage if the ignition voltage
status is“OK” and the number of times detected is 1 or more. This is because an ignition
voltage error may be detected in the past.
NOTE:
If battery voltage is normal, the cause may be
that out of detection range of satellite sensor
in door is detected.
CAUSE OF WARNING (OCCUPANT DETSCTION SYSTEM)
Detection status and detection record is displayed when air bag warning lamp blinks due to occupant detection function stop. Change to trouble diagnosis mode by ignition switch is not possible while warning lamp is
blinking due to occupant detection function stop. “NO DTC” is displayed even if the malfunctioning parts are
checked by CONSULT.
Display item
Display content
FUNCTION STATUS
• “ON” or “STOP” is displayed according to occupant detection status that is recognized
by occupant detection system control unit.
• “STOP” is displayed when occupant detection function is stopped, if not, “ON” is displayed.
STOP DETECTION
Displays number of times occupant detection function stop which is detected by occupant
detection system control unit is displayed.
DETECTION RECORD
Displays number of times of IGN ON since first detection of occupant detection function
stop is displayed.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-20
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM)
CONSULT Function
A
INFOID:0000000007492786
ZERO POINT RESET DESCRIPTION
B
This vehicle adopts occupant detection system with a weight detecting method. When replacing, or removing
and installing passenger seat, always perform “zero point rest” so that the vehicle recognizes zero point.
If zero point reset is incomplete, occupant detection seat sensor does not operate normally.
C
WORK SUPPORT
D
Monitor item
Description
Zero point reset function
Perform zero point reset. Refer to SRC-33, "ZERO POINT RESET : Special Repair Requirement".
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-21
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Index
DTC
—
INFOID:0000000007492787
Diagnostic item
NO DTC IS DETECTED.
When malfunction is
indicated by the “AIR
BAG” warning lamp in
the user mode
Explanation
Reference page
Low battery voltage (Less than 9 V) or
High battery voltage (more than 16 V)
SRC-19, "CONSULT Function".
Occupant detection function is disabled
SRC-19, "CONSULT Function".
Zero point reset is incomplete
SRC-21, "CONSULT Function"
Self-diagnostic result is not erased after repair
SRC-15, "On
Board Diagnosis
Function", SRC19, "CONSULT
Function".
Intermittent malfunction is detected in
the past
GI-42, "Intermittent Incident"
No malfunction is detected
—
B1001-B1005
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-35, "DTC
Logic".
B1006-B1010
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-36, "DTC
Logic".
B1011-B1015
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-37, "DTC
Logic".
B1017
B1020
B1021
OCCUPANT SENS C/U
[UNIT FAIL]
Malfunction occurs in occupant detection system control unit
SRC-38, "DTC
Logic"
B1018
OCCUPANT SENS
[UNIT FAIL]
Malfunction occurs in occupant detection system sensor
SRC-40, "DTC
Logic"
B1022
OCCUPANT SENS C/U
[COMM FAIL]
Malfunction occurs in occupant detection system control unit,
circuit of occupant detection system control unit, or air bag diagnosis sensor unit
SRC-42, "DTC
Logic"
B1023
PASS A/B INDCTR CKT
[UNIT FAIL]
Passenger air bag OFF indicator circuit is open or shorted to
ground or the circuits are shorted each other
SRC-44, "DTC
Logic"
B1025
B1032
B1048
OCS SENSOR
Malfunction occurs in occupant detection system control unit,
circuit of occupant detection system control unit, or air bag diagnosis sensor unit
SRC-46, "DTC
Logic"
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-48, "DTC
Logic".
B1033
B1034
CRASH ZONE SEN
[UNIT FAIL]
Crash zone sensor is malfunctioning
SRC-49, "DTC
Logic".
B1035
CRASH ZONE SEN
[COMM FAIL]
Crash zone sensor is malfunctioning
SRC-51, "DTC
Logic".
B1036
CRASH ZONE SEN
[UNMATCH]
Crash zone sensor is out of the specified specification
SRC-53, "DTC
Logic".
B1037
B1039
B1041
CRASH ZONE SENS1
Crash zone sensor is malfunctioning
SRC-54, "DTC
Logic".
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-56, "DTC
Logic".
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[OPEN]
Driver air bag module circuit is open (including the spiral cable)
SRC-57, "DTC
Logic".
B1026-B1031
B1042-B1047
B1049
B1054
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-22
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
DTC
Diagnostic item
Explanation
Reference page
B1050
B1055
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to power supply circuit
(including the spiral cable)
SRC-59, "DTC
Logic".
B1051
B1056
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground (including the
spiral cable)
SRC-61, "DTC
Logic".
B1052
B1057
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[SHORT]
Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other (including spiral cable)
SRC-63, "DTC
Logic".
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-65, "DTC
Logic".
B1065
B1070
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[OPEN]
Passenger air bag module circuit is open
SRC-66, "DTC
Logic".
B1066
B1071
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
Passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to power supply
circuit
SRC-68, "DTC
Logic".
B1067
B1072
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
Passenger air bag module circuit is shorted to ground
SRC-70, "DTC
Logic".
B1068
B1073
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[SHORT]
Passenger air bag module circuits are shorted to each other
SRC-72, "DTC
Logic".
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-74, "DTC
Logic".
B1080
B1096
DRIVER AIRBAG MODULE
[SHORT]
Driver air bag module circuits are shorted to each other (including spiral cable)
SRC-75, "DTC
Logic".
B1081
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[OPEN]
Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is open
SRC-77, "DTC
Logic".
B1082
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[VB-SHORT]
Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is shorted to power supply
circuit
SRC-79, "DTC
Logic".
B1083
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[GND-SHORT]
Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is shorted to ground
SRC-81, "DTC
Logic".
B1084
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[SHORT]
Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuits are shorted to each other
SRC-83, "DTC
Logic".
B1086
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[OPEN]
Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is open
SRC-85, "DTC
Logic".
B1087
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[VB-SHORT]
Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is shorted to power supply
circuit
SRC-87, "DTC
Logic".
B1088
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[GND-SHORT]
Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is shorted to ground
SRC-89, "DTC
Logic".
B1089
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[SHORT]
Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuits are shorted to each other
SRC-91, "DTC
Logic".
B1090-B1095
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-93, "DTC
Logic".
B1106-B1111
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-94, "DTC
Logic".
B1113
B1114
SATELLITE SENS RH
[UNIT FAIL]
Front satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning
SRC-95, "DTC
Logic".
B1115
SATELLITE SENS RH
[COMM FAIL]
Front satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning
SRC-97, "DTC
Logic".
B1116
SATELLITE SENS RH
[UNMATCH]
Front satellite sensor RH is out of the specified specification
SRC-99, "DTC
Logic".
B1118
B1119
SATELLITE SENS LH
[UNIT FAIL]
Front satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning
SRC-100, "DTC
Logic".
B1120
SATELLITE SENS LH
[COMM FAIL]
Front satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning
SRC-102, "DTC
Logic".
B1121
SATELLITE SENS LH
[UNMATCH]
Front satellite sensor LH is out of the specified specification
SRC-104, "DTC
Logic".
B1058-B1063
B1074-B1079
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-23
2012 QUEST
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
DTC
Diagnostic item
Explanation
Reference page
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-105, "DTC
Logic".
B1129
SIDE MODULE RH
[OPEN]
Side air bag module RH circuit is open
SRC-106, "DTC
Logic".
B1130
SIDE MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
Side air bag module RH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit
SRC-108, "DTC
Logic".
B1131
SIDE MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
Side air bag module RH circuit is shorted to ground
SRC-110, "DTC
Logic".
B1132
SIDE MODULE RH
[SHORT]
Side air bag module RH circuits are shorted to each other
SRC-112, "DTC
Logic".
B1134
SIDE MODULE LH
[OPEN]
Side air bag module LH circuit is open
SRC-114, "DTC
Logic".
B1135
SIDE MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
Side air bag module LH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit
SRC-116, "DTC
Logic".
B1136
SIDE MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
Side air bag module LH circuit is shorted to ground
SRC-118, "DTC
Logic".
B1137
SIDE MODULE LH
[SHORT]
Side air bag module LH circuits are shorted to each other
SRC-120, "DTC
Logic".
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-122, "DTC
Logic"
B1144
CONTROL UNIT
[MISS INSTALLATION]
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning or out of the
specified specification
SRC-123, "DTC
Logic".
B1145
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[OPEN]
Rear curtain air bag module RH circuit is open
SRC-124, "DTC
Logic".
B1146
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
Rear curtain air bag module RH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit
SRC-126, "DTC
Logic".
B1147
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
Rear curtain air bag module RH circuit is shorted to ground
SRC-128, "DTC
Logic".
B1148
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[SHORT]
Rear curtain air bag module RH circuits are shorted to each
other
SRC-130, "DTC
Logic".
B1150
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[OPEN]
Rear curtain air bag module LH circuit is open
SRC-132, "DTC
Logic".
B1151
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
Rear curtain air bag module LH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit
SRC-134, "DTC
Logic".
B1152
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
Rear curtain air bag module LH circuit is shorted to ground
SRC-136, "DTC
Logic".
B1153
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[SHORT]
Rear curtain air bag module LH circuits are shorted to each
other
SRC-138, "DTC
Logic".
B1154-B1159
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-140, "DTC
Logic".
B1170-B1175
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-141, "DTC
Logic".
B1186-B1191
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-142, "DTC
Logic".
B1193
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[OPEN]
Front curtain air bag module RH circuit is open
SRC-143, "DTC
Logic"
B1194
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
Front curtain air bag module RH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit
SRC-145, "DTC
Logic"
B1195
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
Front curtain air bag module RH circuit is shorted to ground
SRC-147, "DTC
Logic"
B1196
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[SHORT]
Front curtain air bag module RH circuits are shorted to each
other
SRC-149, "DTC
Logic"
B1122-B1127
B1138-B1143
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-24
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
DTC
Diagnostic item
Explanation
Reference page
B1198
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[OPEN]
Front curtain air bag module LH circuit is open
SRC-151, "DTC
Logic"
B1199
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
Front curtain air bag module LH circuit is shorted to power supply circuit
SRC-153, "DTC
Logic"
B1200
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
Front curtain air bag module LH circuit is shorted to ground
SRC-155, "DTC
Logic"
B1201
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[SHORT]
Front curtain air bag module LH circuits are shorted to each
other
SRC-157, "DTC
Logic"
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-159, "DTC
Logic".
B1209
FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION
Seat belt pre-tensioner, driver air bag and passenger air bag
are deployed
SRC-160, "Description".
B1210
SIDE COLLISION DETECTION
Side air bag, curtain air bag and seat belt pre-tensioner are deployed
SRC-161, "DTC
Logic".
B1212-B1214
RH1 SAT-SENS
Front satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning
SRC-162, "DTC
Logic".
B1215-B1217
LH1 SAT-SENS
Front satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning
SRC-164, "DTC
Logic".
B1218-B1223
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-166, "DTC
Logic".
B1234-B1239
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-167, "DTC
Logic"
B1202-B1207
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
B1250-B1255
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-168, "DTC
Logic"
B1266-B1269
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-169, "DTC
Logic"
B1282-B1285
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-170, "DTC
Logic"
B1304
SATELLITE SENS RH
[UNIT MALF]
Rear satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning
SRC-171, "DTC
Logic"
B1306
B1308
B1309
B1310
SATELLITE SENS RH
[COMM MALF]
Rear satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning
SRC-173, "DTC
Logic"
B1307
SATELLITE SENS RH
[UNMATCH]
Rear satellite sensor RH is out of the specified specification
SRC-175, "DTC
Logic"
B1311
SATELLITE SENS LH
[UNIT MALF]
Rear satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning
SRC-176, "DTC
Logic"
M
B1313
B1315
B1316
B1317
SATELLITE SENS LH
[COMM MALF]
Rear satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning
SRC-178, "DTC
Logic"
N
B1314
SATELLITE SENS LH
[UNMATCH]
Rear satellite sensor LH is out of the specified specification
SRC-180, "DTC
Logic"
B1336
B1337
FR-RH DOOR SATEL SENS
[SENSOR MALFUNCTION]
Front door satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning
SRC-181, "DTC
Logic"
B1338
B1340
B1341
B1342
FR-RH DOOR SATEL SENS
[COMM MALFUNCTION]
Front door satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning
SRC-183, "DTC
Logic"
B1339
FR-RH DOOR SATEL SENS
[MIS-INSTALLATION]
Front door satellite sensor RH is out of the specified specification
SRC-185, "DTC
Logic"
B1343
B1344
FR-LH DOOR SATEL SENS
[SENSOR MALFUNCTION]
Front door satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning
SRC-186, "DTC
Logic"
I
J
K
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-25
2012 QUEST
L
O
P
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
DTC
Diagnostic item
Explanation
Reference page
B1345
B1347
B1348
B1349
FR-LH DOOR SATEL SENS
[COMM MALFUNCTION]
Front door satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning
SRC-188, "DTC
Logic"
B1346
FR-LH DOOR SATEL SENS
[MIS-INSTALLATION]
Front door satellite sensor LH is out of the specified specification
SRC-190, "DTC
Logic"
B1350
B1351
FR DOOR SATEL SENS
Front door satellite sensor is malfunctioning
SRC-191, "DTC
Logic"
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
SRC-192, "DTC
Logic"
B1378-B1381
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-26
2012 QUEST
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
A
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007492788
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
B
(option abbreviation; if not
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
JCHWA0606GB
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-27
2012 QUEST
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
JCHWA0607GB
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-28
2012 QUEST
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
JCHWA0608GB
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-29
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000007492789
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JMHIA1324GB
DETAILED FLOW
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-30
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
1.INTERVIEW THE CUSTOMER FOR THE SYMPTOM
A
Interview the customer for the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction
occurs).
B
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SYMPTOM
C
Check the symptom from the customer information.
>> GO TO 3.
D
3.CHECK WARNING LAMP OPERATION
Check air bag warning lamp operation in the user mode. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
Are any malfunction detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
E
4.CHECK LOW VOLTAGE
F
Check low voltage with CONSULT (Special function). Refer to SRC-19, "CONSULT Function".
Are any malfunction detected?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
G
5.CHECK SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
SRC
Check self diagnostic result with CONSULT or diagnosis mode.
If it is impossible to switch to diagnosis mode, follow the same procedure that DTC is not detected.
NOTE:
Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
• Record DTC (Print them out with CONSULT.)
• Erase self diagnostic result.
• Study the relationship between the malfunction that DTC or air bag warning lamp indicates and the symptom
that the customer describes.
• Check related service bulletins for information.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 7.
6.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
I
J
K
L
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the DTC.
M
>> GO TO 8.
7.PERFORM DIAGNOSIS ACCORDING TO WARNING LAMP OPERATION
1.
2.
N
Check air bag warning lamp operation in the user mode. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
Perform Diagnosis Procedure for the air bag warning lamp operation. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function" (USER MODE).
>> GO TO 9.
P
8.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
Inspect according to Diagnostic Procedure of the DTC.
>> GO TO 9.
9.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTION PART
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-31
O
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
>> GO TO 10.
10.FINAL CHECK
Check self diagnostic result and air bag warning lamp operation in the user mode.
Is the malfunction repaired?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-32
2012 QUEST
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
A
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Description
INFOID:0000000007492790
When replacing or removing and installing passenger seat, always perform zero point reset so that Occupant
Detection System is activated normally.
B
C
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000007492791
D
WORK PROCEDURE WHEN REPLACING CONTROL UNIT
1.PERFORM ZERO POINT RESET
E
Perform zero point reset. Refer to SRC-33, "ZERO POINT RESET : Special Repair Requirement".
>> END
F
ZERO POINT RESET
ZERO POINT RESET : Description
INFOID:0000000007492792
G
Zero point reset is an initializing procedure for occupant detection sensor that must be performed when replacing or removing and installing passenger seat.
If zero point reset is not performed, the initialization is incomplete and Occupant Detection System does not SRC
operate normally.
NOTE:
• When replacing passenger seat with a NISSAN genuine part, air bag warning lamp blinks if zero point reset
I
is incomplete.
• When zero point reset is performed once after removal and installation of passenger seat, CONSULT displays “complete” and air bag warning does not blink.
• When reinstalling passenger seat after removal, the initial value for occupant detection sensor changes, and J
Occupant Detection System does not operate normally.
• Always perform zero point reset after performing the work as per the following.
- Reinstallation of passenger seat
K
- Replacement of passenger seat with a seat that is zero point reset complete.
ZERO POINT RESET : Special Repair Requirement
INFOID:0000000007492793
L
1.PERFORM ZERO POINT RESET
1.
2.
3.
Perform zero point reset.
NOTE:
When performing zero point reset, be careful of the items described as per the following.
• Perform zero point reset after installing passenger seat to the vehicle
• Do not put any objects on passenger seat
• Do not apply excessive vibration to the vehicle
• Do not touch the vehicle
• Do not tilt the vehicle
Select start on “Zero point reset function” screen from, WORK SUPPORT of CONSULT “OCCUPANT
DETECTION”.
“Zero point reset” starts.
M
N
O
P
>> GO TO 2.
2.CONFIRMATION OF SETTING
1.
Proceed to “Zero point reset function” screen from work support of CONSULT “OCCUPANT DETECTION”.
2. Check that “Complete” or “Incomplete” is displayed on “Zero point reset status”.
CAUTION:
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-33
2012 QUEST
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
< BASIC INSPECTION >
• “Complete” is displayed on “zero point reset current status” if the seat is reinstalled by seat removal
and installation, or “zero point reset” is already performed.
• “Zero point reset current status” displays “Incomplete” if a new seat is installed. When turning key
switch ON without performing zero point reset, air bag warning lamp blinks. When zero point reset is
performed, air bag warning lamp turns OFF.
• Air bag warning lamp blinks in user mode only.
• Air bag sensor unit does not record whether or not zero point reset is performed.
Is condition “ALREADY PERFORMED”?
YES >> Print out “ZERO POINT RESET CURRENT STATUS” screen, and inspection end.
NO
>> Check condition as per the following, and perform zero point reset again.
• Passenger seat is occupied by an object.
• Excessive vibration is applied while performing zero point reset.
• Occupant detection system is malfunctioning.
NOTE:
If “Incomplete” is displayed on “zero point reset current status”, zero point reset is not completed
normally. Check the condition as per the following and perform zero point reset again.
• Passenger seat is occupied by an object.
• Excessive vibration is applied while performing zero point reset.
• Occupant detection system is malfunctioning.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-34
2012 QUEST
B1001, B1002, B1003, B1004, B1005 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
A
B1001, B1002, B1003, B1004, B1005 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492794
B
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
C
DTC
B1001
B1002
B1003
B1004
B1005
Display contents of
CONSULT
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
D
CONTROL UNIT
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
F
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-35, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
G
SRC
I
INFOID:0000000007492795
J
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
K
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
L
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
M
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
N
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
O
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
P
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-35, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-35
2012 QUEST
B1006, B1007, B1008, B1009, B1010 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1006, B1007, B1008, B1009, B1010 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492796
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1006
B1007
B1008
B1009
B1010
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
DTC detecting condition
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Possible cause
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-36, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492797
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-36, "DTC Logic"
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-36
2012 QUEST
B1011, B1012, B1013, B1014, B1015 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1011, B1012, B1013, B1014, B1015 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
A
INFOID:0000000007492798
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1011
B1012
B1013
B1014
B1015
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
E
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-37, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
F
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
G
SRC
I
INFOID:0000000007492799
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
J
K
L
M
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
O
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-37, "DTC Logic"
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
D
SRC-37
P
2012 QUEST
B1017, B1020, B1021 OCCUPANT SENS C/U
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1017, B1020, B1021 OCCUPANT SENS C/U
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492800
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1017
B1020
B1021
Display contents of
CONSULT
OCCUPANT SENS C/U
[UNIT FAIL]
DTC detecting condition
Trouble occurs in Occupant Detection
System control unit
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness
• Malfunction in Occupant Detection
System control unit
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-38, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492801
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait at least 3
minutes. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the connection of harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT AND SENSOR
1.
Replace seat cushion frame.
Refer to SE-67, "Exploded View" (Manual seat), SE-81, "Exploded View" (Power seat).
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-38, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-38
2012 QUEST
B1017, B1020, B1021 OCCUPANT SENS C/U
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-38, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-39
2012 QUEST
B1018 OCCUPANT SENS
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1018 OCCUPANT SENS
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492802
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1018
Display contents of
CONSULT
OCCUPANT SENS
[UNIT FAIL]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Malfunction occurs in Occupant Detection System sensor
• Disconnection of wiring harness
• Malfunction in Occupant Detection
System sensor
• Malfunction in Occupant Detection
System control unit
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-40, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492803
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait at least 3
minutes. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the connection of harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT AND SENSOR
1.
Replace seat cushion frame.
Refer to SE-67, "Exploded View" (Manual seat), SE-81, "Exploded View" (Power seat).
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-38, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-40
2012 QUEST
B1018 OCCUPANT SENS
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
A
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-40, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-41
2012 QUEST
B1022 OCCUPANT SENS C/U
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1022 OCCUPANT SENS C/U
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492804
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1022
Display contents of
CONSULT
OCCUPANT SENS C/U
[COMM FAIL]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Malfunction occurs in Occupant Detection System control unit, circuit of Occupant Detection System control unit-Air
bag diagnosis sensor unit or Air bag diagnosis sensor unit
• Disconnection of wiring harness
• Malfunction in Occupant Detection
System control unit
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-42, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492805
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait at least 3
minutes. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the connection of harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT AND SENSOR
1.
Replace seat cushion frame.
Refer to SE-67, "Exploded View" (Manual seat), SE-81, "Exploded View" (Power seat).
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-38, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-42
2012 QUEST
B1022 OCCUPANT SENS C/U
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-42, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-43
2012 QUEST
B1023 PASS A/B INDCTR CKT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1023 PASS A/B INDCTR CKT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492806
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1023
Display contents of
CONSULT
PASS A/B INDCTR CKT
[UNIT FAIL]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Passenger air bag OFF indicator circuit
is open or shorted to ground or the circuits are shorted each other
• Disconnection of wiring harness
• Malfunction in front passenger air
bag OFF indicator
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-44, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492807
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait at least 3
minutes. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the connection of harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.CHECK PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF INDICATOR
1. Replace passenger air bag OFF indicator.
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-44, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1.
Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-44
2012 QUEST
B1023 PASS A/B INDCTR CKT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-44, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-45
2012 QUEST
B1025, B1032, B1048 OCS SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1025, B1032, B1048 OCS SENSOR
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492808
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1025
B1032
B1048
Display contents of
CONSULT
OCS SENSOR
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Malfunction occurs in Occupant Detection System control unit, circuit of Occupant Detection System control unit-Air
bag diagnosis sensor unit or Air bag diagnosis sensor unit
• Disconnection of wiring harness
• Internal breakdown in Occupant Detection System control unit
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-46, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492809
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait at least 3
minutes. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the connection of harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT AND SENSOR
1.
Replace seat cushion frame.
Refer to SE-67, "Exploded View" (Manual seat), SE-81, "Exploded View" (Power seat).
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-38, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-46
2012 QUEST
B1025, B1032, B1048 OCS SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer toSR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-46, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-47
2012 QUEST
B1026, B1027, B1028, B1029, B1030, B1031 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1026, B1027, B1028, B1029, B1030, B1031 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492810
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1026
B1027
B1028
B1029
B1030
B1031
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-48, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492811
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-48, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-48
2012 QUEST
B1033, B1034 CRASH ZONE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1033, B1034 CRASH ZONE SENSOR
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492812
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1033
B1034
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CRASH ZONE SEN
[UNIT FAIL]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Crash zone sensor is malfunctioning
• Disconnection of wiring harness
• Malfunction in crash zone sensor
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-49, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492813
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE CRASH ZONE SENSOR
1. Replace crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-22, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-49, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
O
P
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-49, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-49
2012 QUEST
B1033, B1034 CRASH ZONE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-50
2012 QUEST
B1035 CRASH ZONE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1035 CRASH ZONE SENSOR
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492814
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1035
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CRASH ZONE SEN
[COMM FAIL]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Crash zone sensor is malfunctioning or out of
the specified specification
• Disconnection of wiring harness
• Malfunction in crash zone sensor
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-51, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492815
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE CRASH ZONE SENSOR
1. Replace crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-22, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-51, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
O
P
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-51, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-51
2012 QUEST
B1035 CRASH ZONE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-52
2012 QUEST
B1036 CRASH ZONE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1036 CRASH ZONE SENSOR
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492816
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1036
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CRASH ZONE SEN
[UNMATCH]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Crash zone sensor is out of the specified specification
Diagnosis sensor unit or crash zone sensor is
different from the part specified
C
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-53, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
E
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492817
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
I
J
1.REPLACE CRASH ZONE SENSOR
1. Replace crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-22, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-53, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
K
L
2.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
M
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-53, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-53
2012 QUEST
B1037, B1039, B1041 CRASH ZONE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1037, B1039, B1041 CRASH ZONE SENSOR
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492818
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1037
B1039
B1041
Display contents of
CONSULT
CRASH ZONE SENS1
DTC detecting condition
Crash zone sensor is malfunctioning
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness
• Malfunction in crash zone sensor
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-54, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492819
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE CRASH ZONE SENSOR
1. Replace crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-22, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-54, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-54, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-54
2012 QUEST
B1037, B1039, B1041 CRASH ZONE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-55
2012 QUEST
B1042, B1043, B1044, B1045, B1046, B1047 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1042, B1043, B1044, B1045, B1046, B1047 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492820
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1042
B1043
B1044
B1045
B1046
B1047
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
DTC detecting condition
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Possible cause
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-56, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492821
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-56, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-56
2012 QUEST
B1049, B1054 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1049, B1054 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492822
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1049
B1054
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[OPEN]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Driver air bag module circuit is open
(including the spiral cable)
• Harness or connectors
(The module circuit is open.)
• Malfunction in driver air bag module
• Malfunction in spiral cable
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
E
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-57, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
F
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
G
SRC
I
INFOID:0000000007492823
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
N
3.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE CIRCUIT
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector.
Check continuity between driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable)
harness connector.
Revision: 2011 September
K
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.
J
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
1.
2.
D
SRC-57
2012 QUEST
P
B1049, B1054 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Driver air bag module
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
10
M301
Continuity
28
11
30
M32
12
M300
4.
Combination switch (spiral cable)
29
9
Existed
30
Check continuity between driver air bag module harness connector and ground.
Driver side air bag module
Connector
M301
M300
Continuity
Terminal
10
Ground
11
Not existed
12
9
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-14, "Removal and Installation".
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-57, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
5.REPLACE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-57, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-58
2012 QUEST
B1050, B1055 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1050, B1055 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492824
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1050
B1055
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to
power supply circuit
(including the spiral cable)
• Harness or connectors
(The module circuit is shorted.)
• Malfunction in driver air bag module
• Malfunction in spiral cable
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
E
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-59, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
F
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
G
SRC
I
INFOID:0000000007492825
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
K
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE SPIRAL CABLE
O
1. Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-14, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-59, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-59, "DTC Logic".
Revision: 2011 September
J
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
1.
2.
D
SRC-59
2012 QUEST
B1050, B1055 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
5.REPLACE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-59, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-60
2012 QUEST
B1051, B1056 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1051, B1056 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492826
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1051
B1056
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Driver air bag module circuit is shorted to ground
(including the spiral cable)
• Harness or connectors
(The module circuit is shorted.)
• Malfunction in driver air bag module
• Malfunction in spiral cable
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
C
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
E
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-61, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
F
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
G
SRC
I
INFOID:0000000007492827
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
N
3.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE CIRCUIT
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector.
Check continuity between driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable)
harness connector.
Revision: 2011 September
K
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.
J
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
1.
2.
D
SRC-61
2012 QUEST
P
B1051, B1056 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Driver air bag module
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
10
M301
Continuity
28
11
30
M32
12
M300
4.
Combination switch (spiral cable)
29
9
Existed
30
Check continuity between driver air bag module harness connector and ground.
Driver side air bag module
Connector
M301
M300
Continuity
Terminal
10
Ground
11
Not existed
12
9
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-14, "Removal and Installation".
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-61, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
5.REPLACE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-61, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-62
2012 QUEST
B1052, B1057 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1052, B1057 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492828
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1052
B1057
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Driver air bag module circuit are shorted to each
other
(including the spiral cable)
• Harness or connectors
(The module circuit is shorted.)
• Malfunction in driver air bag module
• Malfunction in spiral cable
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
C
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
E
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-63, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
F
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
G
SRC
I
INFOID:0000000007492829
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
N
3.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE CIRCUIT-I
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector.
Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals.
Revision: 2011 September
K
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.
J
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
1.
2.
D
SRC-63
2012 QUEST
P
B1052, B1057 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Combination switch (spiral cable)
Connector
M301
Terminal
10
Connector
Terminal
M301
11
9
M300
Continuity
Not existed
12
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-14, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE CIRCUIT-II
Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals.
Combination switch (spiral cable)
Connector
Terminal
M32
28
Terminal
29
30
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-14, "Removal and Installation".
5.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-63, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
6.REPLACE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-63, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-64
2012 QUEST
B1058, B1059, B1060, B1061, B1062, B1063 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1058, B1059, B1060, B1061, B1062, B1063 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1058
B1059
B1060
B1061
B1062
B1063
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
A
INFOID:0000000007492830
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
F
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-65, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
G
SRC
I
INFOID:0000000007492831
J
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait 3 minutes
or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
K
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
L
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
M
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
O
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-65, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-65
P
2012 QUEST
B1065, B1070 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1065, B1070 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492832
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1065
B1070
Display contents of
CONSULT
DTC detecting condition
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[OPEN]
Passenger air bag module circuit is open
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and open
• Malfunction in passenger air bag module
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-66, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492833
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-66, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace passenger air bag module. Refer to SR-17, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-66, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-66
2012 QUEST
B1065, B1070 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-67
2012 QUEST
B1066, B1071 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1066, B1071 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492834
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1066
B1071
Display contents of CONSULT
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[VB-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Passenger air bag module circuit is
shorted to power supply circuit
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in passenger air bag module
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-68, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492835
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-68, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace passenger air bag module. Refer to SR-17, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-68, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-68
2012 QUEST
B1066, B1071 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-69
2012 QUEST
B1067, B1072 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1067, B1072 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492836
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1067
B1072
Display contents of
CONSULT
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[GND-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Passenger air bag module circuit is
shorted to ground
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in passenger air bag module
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-70, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492837
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-70, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace passenger air bag module. Refer to SR-17, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-70, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-70
2012 QUEST
B1067, B1072 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-71
2012 QUEST
B1068, B1073 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1068, B1073 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492838
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1068
B1073
Display contents of
CONSULT
ASSIST A/B MODULE
[SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Passenger air bag module circuits are
shorted to each other
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in passenger air bag module
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-72, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492839
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-72, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace passenger air bag module. Refer to SR-17, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-72, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-72
2012 QUEST
B1068, B1073 PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-73
2012 QUEST
B1074, B1075, B1076, B1077, B1078, B1079 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1074, B1075, B1076, B1077, B1078, B1079 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492840
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1074
B1075
B1076
B1077
B1078
B1079
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-74, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492841
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-74, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-74
2012 QUEST
B1080, B1096 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1080, B1096 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492842
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1080
B1096
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
DRIVER AIRBAG
MODULE
[SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Driver air bag module circuit are shorted to each
other
(including the spiral cable)
• Harness or connectors
(The module circuit is shorted.)
• Malfunction in driver air bag module
• Malfunction in spiral cable
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
C
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
E
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-75, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
F
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
G
SRC
I
INFOID:0000000007492843
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
N
3.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE CIRCUIT-I
O
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect driver air bag module harness connector and combination switch (spiral cable) harness connector.
Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals.
Revision: 2011 September
K
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.
J
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
1.
2.
D
SRC-75
2012 QUEST
P
B1080, B1096 DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Combination switch (spiral cable)
Connector
M301
Terminal
10
Connector
Terminal
M301
11
9
M300
Continuity
Not existed
12
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-14, "Removal and Installation".
4.CHECK SPIRAL CABLE CIRCUIT-II
Check continuity between combination switch (spiral cable) terminals.
Combination switch (spiral cable)
Connector
Terminal
M32
28
Terminal
29
30
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace combination switch (spiral cable). Refer to SR-14, "Removal and Installation".
5.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-75, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
6.REPLACE DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-75, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-76
2012 QUEST
B1081 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1081 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492844
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1081
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[OPEN]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is open
• Disconnection of wiring harness and open
• Malfunction in seat belt pre-tensioner RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-77, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492845
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
O
1. Replace seat belt pre-tensioner RH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-77, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-77, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-77
2012 QUEST
B1081 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-78
2012 QUEST
B1082 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1082 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492846
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1082
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[VB-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is
shorted to power supply circuit
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in seat belt pre-tensioner RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-79, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492847
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
O
1. Replace seat belt pre-tensioner RH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-79, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-79, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-79
2012 QUEST
B1082 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-80
2012 QUEST
B1083 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1083 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492848
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1083
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[GND-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuit is
shorted to ground
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in seat belt pre-tensioner RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-81, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492849
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
O
1. Replace seat belt pre-tensioner RH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-81, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-81, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-81
2012 QUEST
B1083 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-82
2012 QUEST
B1084 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1084 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492850
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1084
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
PRE-TEN FRONT RH
[SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Seat belt pre-tensioner RH circuits are
shorted to each other
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in seat belt pre-tensioner RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-83, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492851
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
O
1. Replace seat belt pre-tensioner RH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-83, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-83, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-83
2012 QUEST
B1084 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-84
2012 QUEST
B1086 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1086 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492852
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1086
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[OPEN]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is open
• Disconnection of wiring harness and open
• Malfunction in seat belt pre-tensioner LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-85, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492853
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
O
1. Replace seat belt pre-tensioner LH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-85, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-85, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-85
2012 QUEST
B1086 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-86
2012 QUEST
B1087 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1087 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492854
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1087
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[VB-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is
shorted to power supply circuit
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in seat belt pre-tensioner LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-87, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492855
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
O
1. Replace seat belt pre-tensioner LH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-87, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-87, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-87
2012 QUEST
B1087 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-88
2012 QUEST
B1088 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1088 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492856
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1088
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[GND-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuit is
shorted to ground
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in seat belt pre-tensioner LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-89, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492857
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
O
1. Replace seat belt pre-tensioner LH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-89, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-89, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-89
2012 QUEST
B1088 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-90
2012 QUEST
B1089 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1089 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492858
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1089
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
PRE-TEN FRONT LH
[SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Seat belt pre-tensioner LH circuits are
shorted to each other
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in seat belt pre-tensioner LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-91, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492859
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
O
1. Replace seat belt pre-tensioner LH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-91, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-91, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-91
2012 QUEST
B1089 SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-92
2012 QUEST
B1090, B1091, B1092, B1093, B1094, B1095 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1090, B1091, B1092, B1093, B1094, B1095 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1090
B1091
B1092
B1093
B0194
B1095
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
A
INFOID:0000000007492860
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
F
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-93, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
G
SRC
I
INFOID:0000000007492861
J
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
K
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
L
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
M
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
O
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-93, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-93
P
2012 QUEST
B1106, B1107, B1108, B1109, B1110, B1111 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1106, B1107, B1108, B1109, B1110, B1111 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492862
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1106
B1107
B1108
B1109
B1110
B1111
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-94, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492863
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-94, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-94
2012 QUEST
B1113, B1114 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1113, B1114 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492864
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1113
B1114
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
SATELLITE SENS RH
[UNIT FAIL]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Front satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning
• Disconnection of wiring harness
• Malfunction in front satellite sensor RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
C
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-95, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492865
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR
1. Replace front satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-30, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-95, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
O
P
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-95, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-95
2012 QUEST
B1113, B1114 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-96
2012 QUEST
B1115 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1115 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492866
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1115
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
SATELLITE SENS RH
[COMM FAIL]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Front satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning
or out of the specified specification
• Disconnection of wiring harness
• Malfunction in front satellite sensor RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-97, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492867
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR
O
1. Replace front satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-97, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-97, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-97
2012 QUEST
B1115 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-98
2012 QUEST
B1116 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1116 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492868
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1116
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
SATELLITE SENS RH
[UNMATCH]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Front satellite sensor RH is out of the specified specification
Diagnosis sensor unit or front satellite sensor RH
is different from the part specified
C
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-99, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492869
I
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
J
1.REPLACE FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR
1. Replace front satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-99, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
K
L
2.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
M
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-99, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-99
2012 QUEST
B1118, B1119 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1118, B1119 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492870
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1118
B1119
Display contents of
CONSULT
SATELLITE SENS LH
[UNIT FAIL]
DTC detecting condition
Front satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness
• Malfunction in front satellite sensor LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-100, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492871
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR
1. Replace front satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-100, "DTC Logic"
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-100, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-100
2012 QUEST
B1118, B1119 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-101
2012 QUEST
B1120 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1120 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492872
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1120
Display contents of
CONSULT
SATELLITE SENS LH
[COMM FAIL]
DTC detecting condition
Front satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning
or out of the specified specification
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness
• Malfunction in front satellite sensor LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-102, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492873
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR
1. Replace front satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-102, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-102, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-102
2012 QUEST
B1120 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-103
2012 QUEST
B1121 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1121 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492874
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1121
Display contents of
CONSULT
SATELLITE SENS LH
[UNMATCH]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Front satellite sensor LH is out of the spec- Diagnosis front sensor unit or satellite sensor RH
ified specification
is different from the part specified
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-104, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492875
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.REPLACE FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR
1. Replace front satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-104, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
2.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-104, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-104
2012 QUEST
B1122, B1123, B1124, B1125, B1126, B1127 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1122, B1123, B1124, B1125, B1126, B1127 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1122
B1123
B1124
B1125
B1126
B1127
A
INFOID:0000000007492876
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
F
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-105, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
G
SRC
I
INFOID:0000000007492877
J
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
K
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
L
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
M
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
O
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-105, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-105
P
2012 QUEST
B1129 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1129 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492878
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1129
Display contents of
CONSULT
SIDE MODULE RH
[OPEN]
DTC detecting condition
Side air bag module RH circuit is open
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and open
• Malfunction in side air bag module RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status.SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function"
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-106, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492879
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-106, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
1.
Replace side air bag module RH. Refer to SE-72, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Manual
seat), SE-86, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Power seat).
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-106, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-106
2012 QUEST
B1129 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-107
2012 QUEST
B1130 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1130 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492880
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1130
Display contents of
CONSULT
SIDE MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Side air bag module RH circuit is shorted
to power supply circuit
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in side air bag module RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-108, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492881
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-108, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
1.
Replace side air bag module RH. Refer to SE-72, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Manual
seat), SE-86, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Power seat).
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-108, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-108
2012 QUEST
B1130 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-109
2012 QUEST
B1131 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1131 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492882
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1131
Display contents of
CONSULT
SIDE MODULE RH
[GND-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Side air bag module RH circuit is shorted
to ground
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in side air bag module RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-110, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492883
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-110, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
1.
Replace side air bag module RH. Refer to SE-72, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Manual
seat), SE-86, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Power seat).
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-110, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-110
2012 QUEST
B1131 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-111
2012 QUEST
B1132 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1132 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492884
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1132
Display contents of
CONSULT
SIDE MODULE RH
[SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Side air bag module RH circuits are shorted to each other
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in side air bag module RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-112, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492885
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-112, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
1.
Replace side air bag module RH. Refer to SE-72, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Manual
seat), SE-86, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Power seat).
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-112, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-112
2012 QUEST
B1132 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-113
2012 QUEST
B1134 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1134 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492886
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1134
Display contents of CONSULT
SIDE MODULE LH
[OPEN]
DTC detecting condition
Side air bag module LH circuit is open
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and open
• Malfunction in side air bag module LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-114, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492887
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-114, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
1.
Replace side air bag module LH. Refer to SE-72, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Manual
seat), SE-86, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Power seat).
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-114, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-114
2012 QUEST
B1134 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-115
2012 QUEST
B1135 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1135 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492888
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1135
Display contents of
CONSULT
SIDE MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Side air bag module LH circuit is shorted to
power supply circuit
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in side air bag module LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-116, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492889
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-116, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
1.
Replace side air bag module LH. Refer to SE-72, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Manual
seat), SE-86, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Power seat).
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-116, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-116
2012 QUEST
B1135 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-117
2012 QUEST
B1136 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1136 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492890
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1136
Display contents of
CONSULT
SIDE MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Side air bag module LH circuit is shorted to
ground
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in side air bag module LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-118, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492891
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-118, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
1.
Replace side air bag module LH. Refer to SE-72, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Manual
seat), SE-86, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Power seat).
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-118, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-118
2012 QUEST
B1136 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-119
2012 QUEST
B1137 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1137 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492892
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1137
Display contents of
CONSULT
SIDE MODULE LH
[SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Side air bag module LH circuits are shorted
to each other
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in side air bag module LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-120, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492893
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-120, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
1.
Replace side air bag module LH. Refer to SE-72, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Manual
seat), SE-86, "SEATBACK : Disassembly and Assembly" (Power seat).
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-120, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-120
2012 QUEST
B1137 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-121
2012 QUEST
B1138, B1139, B1140, B1141, B1142, B1143 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1138, B1139, B1140, B1141, B1142, B1143 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492894
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1138
B1139
B1140
B1141
B1142
B1143
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
DTC detecting condition
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Possible cause
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-122, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492895
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-122, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-122
2012 QUEST
B1144 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1144 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492896
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1144
B
Display contents of CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
[MISS INSTALLATION]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
or out of the specification
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
• Configuration in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
does not match the vehicles specification
C
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-123, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492897
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-123, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-123
O
P
2012 QUEST
B1145 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1145 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492898
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
Display contents of
CONSULT
B1145
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[OPEN]
DTC detecting condition
Rear curtain air bag module RH circuit is
open
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and open
• Malfunction in rear curtain air bag module RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-124, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492899
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-124, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE REAR CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace rear curtain air bag module RH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-124, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-124
2012 QUEST
B1145 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-125
2012 QUEST
B1146 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1146 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492900
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1146
Display contents of
CONSULT
DTC detecting condition
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
Rear curtain air bag module RH circuit is
shorted to power supply circuit
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in rear curtain air bag module RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-126, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492901
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-126, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE REAR CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace rear curtain air bag module RH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-126, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-126
2012 QUEST
B1146 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-127
2012 QUEST
B1147 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1147 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492902
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1147
Display contents of
CONSULT
CURTAIN MODULE
RH
[GND-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Rear curtain air bag module RH circuit is
shorted to ground
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in rear curtain air bag module RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-128, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492903
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-128, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE REAR CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace rear curtain air bag module RH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-128, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-128
2012 QUEST
B1147 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-129
2012 QUEST
B1148 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1148 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492904
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1148
Display contents of
CONSULT
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Rear curtain air bag module RH circuits are
shorted to each other
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in rear curtain air bag module RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-130, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492905
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-130, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE REAR CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace rear curtain air bag module RH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-130, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-130
2012 QUEST
B1148 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-131
2012 QUEST
B1150 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1150 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492906
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
Display contents of
CONSULT
B1150
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[OPEN]
DTC detecting condition
Rear curtain air bag module LH circuit is
open
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and open
• Malfunction in rear curtain air bag module LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-132, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492907
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-132, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE REAR CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace rear curtain air bag module LH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-132, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-132
2012 QUEST
B1150 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-133
2012 QUEST
B1151 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1151 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492908
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1151
Display contents of
CONSULT
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Rear curtain air bag module LH circuit is
shorted to power supply circuit
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in rear curtain air bag module LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-134, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492909
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-134, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE REAR CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace rear curtain air bag module LH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-134, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-134
2012 QUEST
B1151 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-135
2012 QUEST
B1152 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1152 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492910
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1152
Display contents of
CONSULT
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Rear curtain air bag module LH circuit is
shorted to ground
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in rear curtain air bag module LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-136, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492911
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-136, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE REAR CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace rear curtain air bag module LH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-136, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-136
2012 QUEST
B1152 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-137
2012 QUEST
B1153 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1153 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492912
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1153
Display contents of
CONSULT
CURTAIN MODULE
LH
[SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Rear curtain air bag module LH circuits are
shorted to each other
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in rear curtain air bag module LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-138, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492913
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-138, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE REAR CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace rear curtain air bag module LH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-138, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-138
2012 QUEST
B1153 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-139
2012 QUEST
B1154, B1155, B1156, B1157, B1158, B1159 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1154, B1155, B1156, B1157, B1158, B1159 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492914
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1154
B1155
B1156
B1157
B1158
B1159
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-140, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492915
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-140, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-140
2012 QUEST
B1170, B1171, B1172, B1173, B1174, B1175 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1170, B1171, B1172, B1173, B1174, B1175 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1170
B1171
B1172
B1173
B1174
B1175
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
A
INFOID:0000000007492916
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
F
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-141, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
G
SRC
I
INFOID:0000000007492917
J
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
K
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
L
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
M
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
O
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-141, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-141
P
2012 QUEST
B1186, B1187, B1188, B1189, B1190, B1191 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1186, B1187, B1188, B1189, B1190, B1191 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492918
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1186
B1187
B1188
B1189
B1190
B1191
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-142, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492919
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-142, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-142
2012 QUEST
B1193 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1193 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492920
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1193
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[OPEN]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Front curtain air bag module RH circuit is
open
• Disconnection of wiring harness and open
• Malfunction in front curtain air bag module RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-143, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492921
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
O
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-143, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE FRONT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace front curtain air bag module RH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-143, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-143
2012 QUEST
B1193 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-144
2012 QUEST
B1194 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1194 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492922
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1194
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[VB-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Frount curtain air bag module RH circuit
is shorted to power supply circuit
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in frount curtain air bag module RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-145, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492923
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
O
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-145, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE FRONT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace front curtain air bag module RH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-145, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-145
2012 QUEST
B1194 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-146
2012 QUEST
B1195 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1195 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492924
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1195
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CURTAIN MODULE
RH
[GND-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Front curtain air bag module RH circuit is
shorted to ground
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in front curtain air bag module RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-147, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492925
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-147, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
O
P
4.REPLACE FRONT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace front curtain air bag module RH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-147, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-147
2012 QUEST
B1195 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-148
2012 QUEST
B1196 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1196 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492926
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1196
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CURTAIN MODULE RH
[SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Front curtain air bag module RH circuits are
shorted to each other
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in front curtain air bag module RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-149, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492927
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-149, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
O
P
4.REPLACE FRONT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace front curtain air bag module RH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-149, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-149
2012 QUEST
B1196 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-150
2012 QUEST
B1198 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1198 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492928
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1198
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[OPEN]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Front curtain air bag module LH circuit is
open
• Disconnection of wiring harness and open
• Malfunction in front curtain air bag module LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-151, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492929
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
O
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-151, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE FRONT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace front curtain air bag module LH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-151, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-151
2012 QUEST
B1198 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-152
2012 QUEST
B1199 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1199 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492930
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1199
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[VB-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Front curtain air bag module LH circuit is
shorted to power supply circuit
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in front curtain air bag module LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-153, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492931
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-153, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
O
P
4.REPLACE FRONT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace front curtain air bag module LH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-153, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-153
2012 QUEST
B1199 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-154
2012 QUEST
B1200 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1200 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492932
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1200
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CURTAIN MODULE LH
[GND-SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Front curtain air bag module LH circuit is
shorted to ground
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in front curtain air bag module LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-155, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492933
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
O
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-155, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE FRONT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace front curtain air bag module LH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-155, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-155
2012 QUEST
B1200 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-156
2012 QUEST
B1201 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1201 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492934
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1201
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CURTAIN MODULE
LH
[SHORT]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Front curtain air bag module LH circuits are
shorted to each other
• Disconnection of wiring harness and short
• Malfunction in front curtain air bag module LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-157, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492935
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
O
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-157, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE FRONT CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
1. Replace front curtain air bag module LH. Refer to SR-20, "Removal and Installation"
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-157, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-157
2012 QUEST
B1201 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-158
2012 QUEST
B1202, B1203, B1204, B1205, B1206, B1207 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1202, B1203, B1204, B1205, B1206, B1207 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1202
B1203
B1204
B1205
B1206
B1207
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
A
INFOID:0000000007492936
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
F
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-159, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
G
SRC
I
INFOID:0000000007492937
J
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
K
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
L
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
M
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
O
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-159, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-159
P
2012 QUEST
B1209 FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1209 FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION
Description
INFOID:0000000007492938
The air bags and seat belt pre-tensioners for driver and passenger are activated by the air bag diagnosis sensor unit signal transmitted at the time of the frontal collision.
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492939
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1209
Display contents of
CONSULT
FRONTAL COLLISION DETECTION
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Seat belt pre-tensioner, driver side air bag and passenger air bag are deployed
—
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-160, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492940
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.PERFORM COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
Perform collision diagnosis.Refer to SR-4, "FOR FRONTAL COLLISION : When SRS is activated in a collision" or SR-5, "FOR FRONTAL COLLISION : When SRS is not activated in a collision".
Is collision diagnosis complete?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
2.FINAL INSPECTION
Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Perform diagnosis of applicable DTC.Refer to SRC-22, "DTC Index".
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-160
2012 QUEST
B1210 SIDE COLLISION DETECTION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1210 SIDE COLLISION DETECTION
A
Description
INFOID:0000000007492941
The side air bag and curtain air bag are activated by the air bag diagnosis sensor unit signal transmitted at the
time of side collision.
DTC Logic
B
INFOID:0000000007492942
C
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1210
Display contents of
CONSULT
SIDE COLLISION
DETECTION
DTC detecting condition
Side air bag and curtain air bag are deployed
Possible cause
—
D
E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
F
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-161, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
G
SRC
I
INFOID:0000000007492943
J
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
K
1.PERFORM COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
L
Perform collision diagnosis.Refer to SR-6, "FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION : When SRS is activated
in a collision" or SR-7, "FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION : When SRS is not activated in a collision".
Iscollision diagnosis complete?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
M
2.FINAL INSPECTION
N
Perform “AIR BAG” Self Diagnostic Result.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Peform diagnosis of applicable DTC.Refer to SRC-22, "DTC Index".
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-161
2012 QUEST
B1212, B1213, B1214 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1212, B1213, B1214 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492944
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1212
B1213
B1214
Display contents of
CONSULT
RH1 SAT-SENS
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness
Front satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning • Malfunction in front satellite sensor RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-162, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492945
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR
1. Replace front satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-162, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-162, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-162
2012 QUEST
B1212, B1213, B1214 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-163
2012 QUEST
B1215, B1216, B1217 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1215, B1216, B1217 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492946
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1215
B1216
B1217
Display contents of
CONSULT
LH1 SAT-SENS
DTC detecting condition
Front satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness
• Malfunction in front satellite sensor LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-164, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492947
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE FRONT SATELLITE SENSOR
1. Replace front satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-164, "DTC Logic"
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-164, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-164
2012 QUEST
B1215, B1216, B1217 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-165
2012 QUEST
B1218, B1219, B1220, B1221, B1222, B1223 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1218, B1219, B1220, B1221, B1222, B1223 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492948
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1218
B1219
B1220
B1221
B1222
B1223
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-166, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492949
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-166, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-166
2012 QUEST
B1234, B1235, B1236, B1237, B1238, B1239 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1234, B1235, B1236, B1237, B1238, B1239 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1234
B1235
B1236
B1237
B1238
B1239
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
A
INFOID:0000000007492950
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
F
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-167, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
G
SRC
I
INFOID:0000000007492951
J
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
K
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
L
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
M
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
O
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-167, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-167
P
2012 QUEST
B1250, B1251, B1252, B1253, B1254, B1255 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1250, B1251, B1252, B1253, B1254, B1255 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492952
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1250
B1251
B1252
B1253
B1254
B1255
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-168, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492953
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-168, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-168
2012 QUEST
B1266, B1267, B1268, B1269 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1266, B1267, B1268, B1269 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492954
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1266
B1267
B1268
B1269
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-192, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
F
G
SRC
I
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492955
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
J
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
O
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-192, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-169
P
2012 QUEST
B1282, B1283, B1284, B1285 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1282, B1283, B1284, B1285 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492956
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1282
B1283
B1284
B1285
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-192, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492957
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-192, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-170
2012 QUEST
B1304 SATELLITE SEN RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1304 SATELLITE SEN RH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492958
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1304
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
SATELLITE SENS RH
[UNIT FAIL]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Rear satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning
• Disconnection of wiring harness
• Malfunction in rear satellite sensor RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-171, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492959
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
I
J
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE REAR SATELLITE SENSOR
1. Replace rear satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-171, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
O
P
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-171, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-171
2012 QUEST
B1304 SATELLITE SEN RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-172
2012 QUEST
B1306, B1308, B1309, B1310 SATELLITE SEN RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1306, B1308, B1309, B1310 SATELLITE SEN RH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492960
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1306
B1308
B1309
B1310
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
SATELLITE SENS RH
[COMM FAIL]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Rear satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning
or out of the specified specification
• Disconnection of wiring harness
• Malfunction in rear satellite sensor RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-173, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
F
G
SRC
I
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492961
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
J
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE REAR SATELLITE SENSOR
O
1. Replace rear satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-173, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-173, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-173
2012 QUEST
B1306, B1308, B1309, B1310 SATELLITE SEN RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-174
2012 QUEST
B1307 SATELLITE SEN RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1307 SATELLITE SEN RH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492962
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1307
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
SATELLITE SENS RH
[UNMATCH]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Rear satellite sensor RH is out of the speci- Diagnosis sensor unit or rear satellite sensor RH
fied specification
is different from the part specified
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-175, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492963
I
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
J
1.REPLACE REAR SATELLITE SENSOR
1. Replace rear satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-175, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
K
L
2.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
M
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-175, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-175
2012 QUEST
B1311 SATELLITE SEN LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1311 SATELLITE SEN LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492964
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1311
Display contents of
CONSULT
SATELLITE SENS LH
[UNIT FAIL]
DTC detecting condition
Rear satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness
• Malfunction in rear satellite sensor LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-176, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492965
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE REAR SATELLITE SENSOR
1. Replace rear satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-176, "DTC Logic"
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-176, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-176
2012 QUEST
B1311 SATELLITE SEN LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-177
2012 QUEST
B1313, B1315, B1316, B1317 SATELLITE SEN LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1313, B1315, B1316, B1317 SATELLITE SEN LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492966
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1313
B1315
B1316
B1317
Display contents of
CONSULT
SATELLITE SENS LH
[COMM FAIL]
DTC detecting condition
Rear satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning
or out of the specified specification
Possible cause
• Disconnection of wiring harness
• Malfunction in rear satellite sensor LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-178, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492967
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE REAR SATELLITE SENSOR
1. Replace rear satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-178, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-178, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-178
2012 QUEST
B1313, B1315, B1316, B1317 SATELLITE SEN LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-179
2012 QUEST
B1314 SATELLITE SEN LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1314 SATELLITE SEN LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492968
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1314
Display contents of
CONSULT
SATELLITE SENS LH
[UNMATCH]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Rear satellite sensor LH is out of the specified specification
Diagnosis sensor unit or rear satellite sensor LH
is different from the part specified
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-180, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492969
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.REPLACE REAR SATELLITE SENSOR
1. Replace rear satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-180, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
2.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-180, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-180
2012 QUEST
B1336, B1337 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1336, B1337 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492970
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1336
B1337
B
Display contents of CONSULT
FR-RH DOOR SATEL
SENS
[SENSOR MALFUNCTION]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Front door satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning
• Harness or connectors
• Malfunction in front door satellite sensor RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-181, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
F
G
SRC
I
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492971
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
J
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE FRONT DOOR SATELLITE SENSOR
O
1. Replace front door satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-181, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-181, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-181
2012 QUEST
B1336, B1337 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-182
2012 QUEST
B1338, B1340, B1341, B1342 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1338, B1340, B1341, B1342 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492972
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1338
B1340
B1341
B1342
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
FR-RH DOOR SATEL
SENS
[COMM MALFUNCTION]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Front door satellite sensor RH is malfunctioning
• Harness or connectors
• Malfunction in front door satellite sensor RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-183, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
F
G
SRC
I
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492973
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
J
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
K
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
L
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
M
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
N
3.REPLACE FRONT DOOR SATELLITE SENSOR
O
1. Replace front door satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-183, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
P
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-183, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-183
2012 QUEST
B1338, B1340, B1341, B1342 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-184
2012 QUEST
B1339 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1339 SATELLITE SENSOR RH
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492974
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1339
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
FR-RH DOOR SATEL
SENS
[MIS-INSTALLATION]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
C
Front door satellite sensor RH is out of the
specified specification
Diagnosis sensor unit or front door satellite sensor RH is different from the part specified
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
E
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-185, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492975
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.REPLACE FRONT DOOR SATELLITE SENSOR
I
J
K
1. Replace front door satellite sensor RH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-185, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
L
2.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
M
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-185, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-185
2012 QUEST
B1343, B1344 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1343, B1344 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492976
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1343
B1344
Display contents of
CONSULT
FR-LH DOOR SATEL
SENS
[SENSOR MALFUNCTION]
DTC detecting condition
Front door satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
• Malfunction in front door satellite sensor LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-186, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492977
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE FRONT DOOR SATELLITE SENSOR
1. Replace front door satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-186, "DTC Logic"
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-186, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-186
2012 QUEST
B1343, B1344 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-187
2012 QUEST
B1345, B1347, B1348, B1349 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1345, B1347, B1348, B1349 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492978
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1345
B1347
B1348
B1349
Display contents of
CONSULT
FR-LH DOOR SATEL
SENS
[COMM MALFUNCTION]
DTC detecting condition
Front door satellite sensor LH is malfunctioning
Possible cause
• Harness or connectors
• Malfunction in front door satellite sensor LH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-191, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492979
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connector.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE SATELLITE SENSOR
1. Replace front door satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-191, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-191, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-188
2012 QUEST
B1345, B1347, B1348, B1349 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
SRC
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-189
2012 QUEST
B1346 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1346 SATELLITE SENSOR LH
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492980
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1346
Display contents of
CONSULT
FR-LH DOOR SATEL
SENS
[MIS-INSTALLATION]
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Front door satellite sensor LH is out of the
specified specification
Diagnosis sensor unit or front door satellite sensor LH is different from the part specified
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-190, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492981
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.REPLACE FRONT DOOR SATELLITE SENSOR
1. Replace front door satellite sensor LH. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-190, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
2.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-190, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-190
2012 QUEST
B1350, B1351 SATELLITE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1350, B1351 SATELLITE SENSOR
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492982
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1350
B1351
B
Display contents of
CONSULT
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
FR DOOR SATEL SENS
Front door satellite sensor is malfunctioning or out of the specified specification
• Malfunction in front door satellite sensor LH/RH
• Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
C
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-191, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
E
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
F
G
SRC
INFOID:0000000007492983
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
I
J
1.REPLACE BOTH OF FRONT DOOR SATELLITE SENSORS
1. Replace both of front door satellite sensors. Refer to SR-25, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-191, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
K
L
2.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
M
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-191, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-191
2012 QUEST
B1378, B1379, B1380, B1381 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
B1378, B1379, B1380, B1381 DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492984
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B1378
B1379
B1380
B1381
Display contents of
CONSULT
CONTROL UNIT
DTC detecting condition
Possible cause
Air bag diagnosis sensor unit is malfunctioning
Malfunction in air bag diagnosis sensor unit
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.CHECK SELF-DIAG RESULT
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Perform “Self Diagnostic Result” mode of “AIR BAG” using CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check the air bag warning lamp status. Refer to SRC-15, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
NOTE:
SRS does not enter the diagnosis mode if no malfunction is detected in the user mode.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> Refer to SRC-192, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492985
WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal, and wait at least 3
minutes or more. (To discharge backup capacitor.)
• Never use unspecified tester or other measuring device.
1.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
2.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
3.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedure. Refer to SRC-192, "DTC Logic".
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 1.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-192
2012 QUEST
SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
A
SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492986
B
1.CHECK AIR BAG MODULE AND SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER
Check the deployment of air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner.
Is air bag module deployed?
YES >> Replace the malfunctioning parts.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
C
D
2.CHECK AIR BAG FUSE
Check 10 A fuse [No.2, located in fuse block (J/B)].
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace the fuse.
E
F
3.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
G
SRC
4.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
I
5.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
J
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Check air bag warning lamp operation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 6.
K
L
6.REPLACE COMBINATION METER
1. Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
2. Check air bag warning lamp operation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 1.
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-193
2012 QUEST
SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK
INFOID:0000000007492987
COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check conbination meter unit power supply and ground circuit. Refer toMWI-63, "COMBINATION METER :
Diagnosis Procedure" .
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR
Check the harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace harness connectors.
3.CHECK WIRING HARNESS
Check the wiring harness externals.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Replace wiring harness.
4.CHECK AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Disconnect air bag diagnosis sensor unit connector and turn ignition switch ON.
Does air bag warning lamp turn ON?
YES >> Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-194
2012 QUEST
SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP BLINKS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SRS AIR BAG WARNING LAMP BLINKS
Diagnosis Procedure
A
INFOID:0000000007492988
1.RERFORM ZERO POINT RESET
B
Perorm zero point reset. Refer to SRC-33, "ZERO POINT RESET : Special Repair Requirement".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
C
2.CHECK BATTERY
D
Check battery. Refer to PG-119, "How to Handle Battery".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
E
3.REPLACE OCCUPANT DETECTION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT AND SENSOR
F
1.
Replace seat cushion frame.
Refer to SE-67, "Exploded View" (Manual seat), SE-81, "Exploded View" (Power seat).
2. Check air bag warning lamp operation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 4.
G
SRC
4.REPLACE AIR BAG DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
1. Replace air bag diagnosis sensor unit. Refer to SR-28, "Removal and Installation".
2. Check air bag warning lamp operation.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 1.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
SRC-195
2012 QUEST
STEERING
SECTION
ST
STEERING SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2
STEERING COLUMN ........................................ 12
F
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
Exploded View .........................................................12
Removal and Installation .........................................12
Inspection ................................................................13
ST
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Service Notice or Precautions for Steering System
...... 2
PREPARATION ............................................ 3
STEERING SHAFT ........................................... 15
Exploded View .........................................................15
Removal and Installation .........................................15
Inspection ................................................................17
H
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ................... 19
I
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
Exploded View .........................................................19
Removal and Installation .........................................21
Disassembly and Assembly .....................................23
Inspection ................................................................29
Special Service Tools ................................................ 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 4
BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 5
STEERING WHEEL ............................................. 5
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ....................... 31
Exploded View .........................................................31
Removal and Installation .........................................32
Inspection ................................................................33
K
HYDRAULIC LINE ............................................ 34
L
Inspection .................................................................. 5
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................... 7
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................. 7
NVH Troubleshooting Chart ...................................... 7
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE .......................... 8
POWER STEERING FLUID ................................ 8
Inspection .................................................................. 8
Exploded View .........................................................34
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ............................................................ 35
M
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 35
N
STEERING WHEEL ............................................10
Inspection ................................................................ 10
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 11
STEERING WHEEL ............................................11
Exploded View ........................................................ 11
Removal and Installation ......................................... 11
Revision: 2011 September
J
ST-1
General Specifications .............................................35
Steering Wheel ........................................................35
Steering Angle .........................................................35
Steering Column ......................................................35
Intermediate Shaft ...................................................35
Steering Gear and Linkage ......................................35
Oil Pump ..................................................................36
2012 QUEST
O
P
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000007495856
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Service Notice or Precautions for Steering System
INFOID:0000000007495857
• In case of removing steering gear assembly, make the final tightening with grounded and unloaded vehicle
condition, and then check wheel alignment.
• Observe the following precautions when disassembling.
- Before disassembly, thoroughly clean the outside of the unit.
- Disassembly should be done in a clean work area. It is important to prevent the internal parts from becoming
contaminated by dirt or other foreign matter.
- For easier and proper assembly, place disassembled parts in order on a parts rack.
- Use nylon cloth or paper towels to clean the parts; common shop rags can leave lint that might interfere with
their operation.
- Never reuse non-reusable parts.
- Before assembling, apply the specified grease to the directed parts.
Revision: 2011 September
ST-2
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007495858
B
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
C
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
Description
•
•
•
•
ST3127S000
(J-25765-A)
Preload gauge
Measuring steering wheel turning torque
Measuring steering column rotating torque
Measuring ball joint rotating torque
Measuring pinion rotating torque
D
E
F
ZZA0806D
Removing steering wheel
ST27180001
(J-25726-A)
Steering wheel puller
ST
H
ZZA0819D
Removing and installing rear cover
KV48105400
(
—
)
Rear cover wrench
a: 19 mm (0.75 in)
b: 34.9 mm (1.374 in)
I
J
SGIA0516E
Measuring pinion rotating torque
KV48103400
(
—
)
Preload adapter
K
L
M
ZZA0824D
Measuring oil pump relief pressure
KV48103500
(J-26357)
Oil pressure gauge
N
O
S-NT547
Measuring oil pump relief pressure
KV481059S0
(
—
)
Adapter set
1. KV48105910 Adapter (female side)
2. KV48105920 Adapter (male side)
JPGIA0171ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
ST-3
2012 QUEST
P
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
Commercial Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007495859
Tool name
Description
Ball joint remover
Removing steering outer socket
S-NT146
Open head
Tightening end cover assembly
ZZA0822D
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
PBIC0190E
Revision: 2011 September
ST-4
2012 QUEST
STEERING WHEEL
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
A
STEERING WHEEL
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495860
B
Check that steering gear assembly, steering column assembly and steering wheel are installed in the correct position.
Check wheel alignment within specification. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection".
Set the vehicle to the straight-ahead position and confirm steering wheel is in the neutral position.
• Loosen outer socket lock nut and turn inner socket to left and right equally to make fine adjustments if
steering wheel is not in the neutral position.
CAUTION:
If the adjustment is performed by using the inner socket, check wheel alignment after the adjustment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection".
C
NEUTRAL POSITION STEERING WHEEL
1.
2.
3.
STEERING WHEEL TURNING TORQUE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E
F
Park the vehicle on a level and dry surface, set parking brake.
Tires need to be inflated to the specified pressure. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure".
Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation".
Start the engine.
Check that the reading is within the following specified range
using the preload gauge (A) [SST: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)].
Steering wheel turning
torque
D
ST
H
: Refer to ST-35, "Steering
Wheel".
NOTE:
To check, oil temperature must be room temperature [recommended oil temperature: approximately 20°C (68°F)].
If steering wheel turning torque is out of the specification, check
rack sliding force and relief hydraulic pressure of oil pump.
Regarding relief hydraulic pressure of oil pump, refer to ST-33,
"Inspection".
I
J
JSGIA0431ZZ
K
RACK SLIDING FORCE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Disconnect lower joint from steering gear assembly. Refer to ST-15, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect steering outer socket from steering knuckle. Refer to ST-21, "Removal and Installation".
Run the engine at idle and adjust the reservoir tank oil temperature to room temperature [recommended
oil temperature: approximately 20°C (68°F)].
While pulling outer socket slowly in ±11.5 mm (±0.453 in) range
from neutral position, make sure rack sliding force is within
specification.
Rack sliding force
: Refer to ST-35, "Steering Gear
and Linkage".
L
M
N
O
• If rack sliding force is not within specification, overhaul steering gear assembly.
P
SST090B
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
1.
Perform toe-in inspection. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection".
CAUTION:
Perform front wheel turning angle inspection, after toe-in inspection.
Revision: 2011 September
ST-5
2012 QUEST
STEERING WHEEL
< BASIC INSPECTION >
2. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges and rear wheels on
stands, so that vehicle can be level.
3. Check the maximum inner and outer wheel turning angles for LH
and RH road wheels.
FAA0016D
• With the engine at idle, turn steering wheel from full left stop to
full right stop and measure the turning angles (maximum inner
wheel steering angle and maximum outer wheel steering
angle).
A
: Inner wheel angle
B
: Outer wheel angle
Steering angle
: Refer to ST-35, "Steering Angle".
SGIA0055E
• Check the following items when turning angle is out of the standard.
- Check the neutral position of the rack stroke (L).
Rack stroke neutral position (L) : Refer to ST-35,
"Steering Gear and
Linkage".
- Disassemble steering gear assembly to check the cause that
rack stroke is outside of the standard.
• Steering angles are not adjustable. Check steering gear
assembly, steering column assembly and front suspension
components for wear or damage if any of the turning angles
are different from the specified value. Replace any of them, if
any non-standard condition exists.
Revision: 2011 September
ST-6
SGIA0629J
2012 QUEST
Symptom
Steering
Revision: 2011 September
Outer/inner socket ball joint end play
Steering fluid leakage
Steering wheel play
Steering gear rack sliding force
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Judder
ST-7
×
Shake
×
×
×
Vibration
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
—
—
×
×
TIRE
ROAD WHEEL
DRIVE SHAFT
BRAKE
×
AXLE and SUSPENSION
NVH in BR section.
NVH in FAX section.
NVH in WT section.
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
NVH in WT section.
NVH in FAX, RAX, FSU, RSU section.
ST-19, "Exploded View"
ST-12, "Exploded View"
Improper installation or looseness of steering column
×
Steering linkage looseness
ST-13, "Inspection"
ST-19, "Exploded View"
ST-5, "Inspection"
ST-5, "Inspection"
ST-8, "Inspection"
ST-29, "Inspection"
ST-29, "Inspection"
ST-29, "Inspection"
ST-8, "Inspection"
Steering column deformation or damage
Mounting looseness
Improper installation or looseness of tilt lock lever
Improper steering wheel
Outer/inner socket ball joint rotating torque
Noise
Outer/inner socket ball joint swinging torque
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
Air in hydraulic system
ST-8, "Inspection"
Reference
Fluid level
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
A
INFOID:0000000007495861
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×: Applicable
2012 QUEST
B
Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
C
D
E
F
ST
H
I
J
K
L
×
M
N
O
P
POWER STEERING FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
POWER STEERING FLUID
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495862
FLUID LEVEL
With the engine stopped, check that the fluid level is between MIN
and MAX of the reservoir cap level gauge when the fluid temperature
is in COLD state.
COLD
: Fluid temperature 0 – 30°C (32 – 86°F)
Recommended fluid
Fluid capacity
: Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and
Lubricants".
: Refer to ST-35, "General
Specifications".
JPGIA0164ZZ
CAUTION:
• The fluid level should not exceed the MAX line. Excessive fluid causes fluid leakage from the cap.
• Never reuse drained power steering fluid.
• Always use the specified fluid. Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".
FLUID LEAKAGE
Check hydraulic connections for fluid leakage, cracks, damage,
looseness, or wear.
1. Run the engine at idle and adjust the reservoir tank oil temperature to room temperature [recommended oil temperature:
approximately 20°C (68°F)].
2. Turn steering wheel several times from full left stop to full right
stop.
3. Hold steering wheel at each lock position for five seconds and
carefully check for fluid leakage.
CAUTION:
Never hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more
than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that power steering oil pump assembly may be damaged.)
4. If fluid leaks from the joint, loosen the joint part and retighten it, being careful not to damage it.
CAUTION:
For tightening torque and non reusable parts, refer to ST-34, "Exploded View".
5. If fluid leakage from oil pump is noticed, check oil pump. Refer to ST-33, "Inspection".
6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of fluid leaked from steering gear.
SGIA0506E
BLEEDING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
If air bleeding is not complete, the following symptoms can be observed.
• Bubbles are created in reservoir tank.
• Clicking noise can be heard from oil pump.
• Excessive buzzing in the oil pump.
NOTE:
Fluid noise may occur in the steering gear or oil pump. This does not affect performance or durability of the
system.
1. Turn steering wheel several times from full left stop to full right stop with engine stopped.
CAUTION:
Fill reservoir tank with a sufficient amount of fluid so that fluid level is not below the MIN line while
turning steering wheel.
2. Start the engine and hold steering wheel at each lock position for 3 seconds at idle to check for fluid leakage.
3. Repeat step 2 above several times at approximately 3 seconds intervals.
Revision: 2011 September
ST-8
2012 QUEST
POWER STEERING FLUID
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
CAUTION:
Never hold the steering wheel in a locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the possibility that oil pump may be damaged.)
4. Check fluid for bubbles and white contamination.
• Stop the engine if bubbles and white contamination do not drain out. Perform step 2 and 3 above after
waiting until bubbles and white contamination drain out.
5. Stop the engine, and then check fluid level.
A
B
C
D
E
F
ST
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ST-9
2012 QUEST
STEERING WHEEL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
STEERING WHEEL
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495863
STEERING WHEEL AXIAL END PLAY
1.
2.
Check installation conditions of steering gear assembly, front suspension assembly, axle and steering column assembly.
Check if movement exists when steering wheel is moved up and down, to the left and right and to the axial
direction.
Steering wheel axial end play
3.
: Refer to ST-35, "Steering Wheel".
Check the following items when steering wheel axial end play is out of the standard.
• Check the steering column assembly mounting condition. Refer to ST-12, "Exploded View".
• Check steering gear assembly mounting condition for looseness. Refer to ST-19, "Exploded View".
STEERING WHEEL PLAY
1.
2.
3.
Turn steering wheel so that front wheels come to the straight-ahead position.
Start the engine and lightly turn steering wheel to the left and right until front wheels start to move.
Measure steering wheel movement on the outer circumference.
Steering wheel play
4.
: Refer to ST-35, "Steering Wheel".
Check the following items when steering wheel play is out of the standard.
• Check backlash for each joint of steering column assembly.
• Check installation condition of steering gear assembly.
Revision: 2011 September
ST-10
2012 QUEST
STEERING WHEEL
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
STEERING WHEEL
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495864
B
C
D
E
JSGIA0704GB
1.
F
Steering wheel
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
ST
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495865
H
REMOVAL
NOTE:
When reconnecting spiral cable, fix cable with a tape so that fixing case and rotating part keep aligned. This
will omit neutral position alignment procedure during spiral cable installation.
1. Set vehicle to the straight-ahead position.
2. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove steering wheel lock nut after steering is locked.
4. Remove steering wheel with the steering wheel puller (A) [SST:
ST27180001 (J-25726-A)].
NOTE:
When removing, place a matching mark on both steering wheel
and shaft of steering column assembly before removing.
I
J
K
L
M
JSGIA0654ZZ
INSTALLATION
N
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• Check the spiral cable neutral position after replacing or rotating spiral cable. Refer to SR-14, "Removal and
Installation".
CAUTION:
Never twist spiral cable excessively after it becomes tight. (Twisting may cause the cable to be torn
off.)
• Never reuse steering wheel lock nut.
Revision: 2011 September
ST-11
2012 QUEST
O
P
STEERING COLUMN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
STEERING COLUMN
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495866
JSGIA0920GB
1.
Slide plate (outer)
2.
Slide plate (inner)
3.
Cover
4.
Upper joint
5.
Spring
6.
Steering column assembly
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495867
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Never impact on the axis when removing steering column assembly.
• Be careful when removing steering column assembly from the vehicle because it is heavy.
• While removing the steering column assembly, never move the steering gear.
• When removing the steering column assembly, be careful not to allow the intermediate shaft to turn.
• To prevent a malfunction and deformation from occurring in the tilt mechanism, never apply excessive force to the tilt lever.
1. Set the vehicle to the straight-ahead position.
2. Place the tilt to the highest level.
CAUTION:
Securely lock the tilt lever.
3. Remove driver air bag module. Refer to SR-11, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove steering wheel. Refer to ST-11, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove instrument lower panel LH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
6. Remove the steering column cover. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
7. Remove spiral cable. Refer to SR-14, "Removal and Installation".
8. Remove combination switch. Refer to BCS-83, "Removal and Installation".
9. Remove knee protector.
10. Disconnect each switch harness connectors installed to steering column assembly.
11. Remove upper joint mounting bolt, and separate upper joint from steering column.
CAUTION:
• When removing, place a matching mark on both upper joint and steering column assembly
before removing.
Revision: 2011 September
ST-12
2012 QUEST
STEERING COLUMN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• When removing upper joint, never insert a tool, such as a screwdriver, into the yoke groove to
pull out the upper joint. In case of the violation of the above, replace upper joint with a new one.
12. Remove steering column assembly.
NOTE:
The intermediate shaft slides in axial direction.
13. Remove slide plate (outer, inner), cover, and spring from steering column.
14. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to ST-13, "Inspection".
A
B
C
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
D
• Never impact on the axis when removing steering column assembly.
• While removing the steering column assembly, never move the steering gear.
• When connecting upper joint and steering column assembly, make sure the bolt is securely seated in groove
of column shaft before final tightening.
E
• When installing the steering column assembly, temporarily tighten
the bolt and nuts before tightening to the specified torque in the
order shown in the figure.
F
CAUTION:
• Never reuse slide plate (outer, inner) (1).
• The slide plate must be securely pressed in before tightening the nut of slide plate (outer, inner).
ST
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to ST-13, "Inspection".
H
JPGIA0149ZZ
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495868
I
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
• Check each part of steering column assembly for damage or other malfunctions. Replace if necessary.
• Measure steering column rotating torque using a preload gauge
(A) [SST: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)]. Replace steering column
assembly if the rotating torque is outside the standard.
Rotating torque
J
K
: Refer to ST-35, "Steering Column".
L
JPGIA0085ZZ
• Check the following item, if vehicle has been involved in a minor collision. Replace steering column assembly if outside the standard.
- Check the length “L” shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
Set the telescopic mechanism to its maximum length to measure the length of steering column.
Steering column length (L)
: Refer to ST-35, "Steering Column".
ST-13
N
O
P
JPGIA0151ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
M
2012 QUEST
STEERING COLUMN
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
- Check the dimension “A” shown in the figure.
Impact displacement absorption
part dimension (A)
: Refer to ST-35,
"Steering Column".
JPGIA0152ZZ
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check each part of steering column assembly for damage or other malfunctions. Replace if necessary.
• Check that there is no malfunction, such as unusual steering feel or interference when operating tilt and telescopic.
• Check tilt and telescopic mechanism operating range “L”, “T” as
shown in the figure.
Tilt operating range (T)
: Refer to ST-35,
"Steering Column".
Telescopic operating range (L) : Refer to ST-35,
"Steering Column".
• Check the steering wheel play, neutral position steering wheel,
steering wheel turning torque, and front wheel turning angle.
- Steering wheel play: Refer to ST-10, "Inspection".
- neutral position steering wheel, steering wheel turning torque, and
front wheel turning angle: Refer to ST-5, "Inspection".
• Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure".
Revision: 2011 September
ST-14
JPGIA0153ZZ
2012 QUEST
STEERING SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
STEERING SHAFT
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495869
B
C
D
E
F
ST
JPGIA0150GB
1.
Upper joint
4.
Hole cover
2.
Intermediate shaft
3.
Hole cover seal
H
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
I
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495870
J
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Spiral cable may be cut if steering wheel turns while separating steering column assembly and steering gear assembly. Be sure to secure steering wheel using string to avoid turning.
1. Set vehicle to the straight-ahead position.
2. Fix the steering wheel.
3. Remove upper joint mounting bolt (intermediate shaft side), and separate intermediate shaft from upper
joint.
NOTE:
The intermediate shaft slides in axial direction.
CAUTION:
• Place a matching mark on both intermediate shaft and upper joint before removing intermediate
shaft.
• When removing upper joint, never insert a tool, such as a screwdriver, into the yoke groove to
pull out the upper joint. In case of the violation of the above, replace upper joint with a new one.
4. Remove intermediate shaft mounting bolt (steering gear side), and separate intermediate shaft from steering gear assembly.
CAUTION:
• Place a matching mark on both intermediate shaft and steering gear assembly before removing
intermediate shaft.
• When removing intermediate shaft, never insert a tool, such as a screwdriver, into the yoke
groove to pull out the intermediate shaft. In case of the violation of the above, replace intermediate shaft with a new one.
5. Remove upper joint mounting bolt (steering column side), and remove upper joint from steering column
assembly. Refer to ST-12, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
Revision: 2011 September
ST-15
2012 QUEST
K
L
M
N
O
P
STEERING SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Place a matching mark on both upper joint and steering column assembly before removing
upper joint.
• When removing upper joint, never insert a tool, such as a screwdriver, into the yoke groove to
pull out the upper joint. In case of the violation of the above, replace upper joint with a new one.
6. Separate hole cover seal with the following procedure.
a. Turn tub (A) of hole cover (1).
JSGIA0934ZZ
b.
Separate hole cover seal (1) from hole cover, using a suitable
lever with leverage.
Lever insert range (A) : 15 mm (0.59 in)
7.
8.
9.
CAUTION:
If the lever is inserted into an area other than the lever
insertion range, the protrusion on the hole cover may be
damaged.
Remove hole cover mounting nuts.
Remove the intermediate shaft and hole cover.
Perform inspection after removal. Refer to ST-17, "Inspection".
JSGIA0935ZZ
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Spiral cable may be cut if steering wheel turns while separating steering column assembly and steering gear assembly. Be sure to secure steering wheel using string to avoid turning.
• Never damage seal lip when inserting hole cover seal to intermediate shaft.
• When installing hole cover seal (1) to hole cover (2), Insert hole
cover seal flange (A) with the groove (B) of hole cover.
• For intermediate shaft and upper joint mounting bolt direction, refer
to ST-15, "Exploded View". (Do not insert it from the other side.)
JPGIA0156ZZ
• When installing intermediate shaft to steering gear assembly, follow the procedure listed below.
Revision: 2011 September
ST-16
2012 QUEST
STEERING SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
- Align slit of intermediate shaft (1) with rear cover cap projection
(A), insert intermediate shaft end face (B) until contacts steering
gear assembly end face (C).
- When tightening the mounting bolt of the intermediate shaft (steering gear assembly side), manually tighten the bolt and check that
there is no hook and scratch. Check that the bolt is properly placed
in the groove of the steering gear assembly before tightening the
bolt to the specified torque.
A
B
C
JPGIA0155ZZ
D
• When installing intermediate shaft to upper joint, follow the procedure listed below.
- To tighten upper joint mounting bolt (intermediate shaft side), manually tighten the bolt to check for scoring
or galling before tightening the bold to the specified torque.
- After installation, check that there is no clearance (A) between
intermediate shaft (1) and upper joint yoke and between intermediate shaft and mounting bolt (3).
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to ST-17, "Inspection".
E
F
ST
H
JPGIA0157ZZ
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495871
I
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the following items and replace, if necessary.
• Check hole cover and hole cover seal for damage or other malfunctions.
• Check intermediate shaft and upper joint for damage or other malfunctions.
• Check the length (L) of the intermediate shaft.
CAUTION:
Check the length extended position of the intermediate shaft.
Shaft length (L)
J
K
: Refer to ST-35, "Intermediate Shaft".
L
M
JPGIA0160ZZ
N
• Check the sliding range (A) of the intermediate shaft.
CAUTION:
Check the sliding range (between the extended position and
the contracted position) of the intermediate shaft.
Shaft sliding range (A)
O
: Refer to ST-35, "Intermediate Shaft".
P
JPGIA0159ZZ
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check the following items and replace, if necessary.
Revision: 2011 September
ST-17
2012 QUEST
STEERING SHAFT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Check hole cover and hole cover seal for damage or other malfunctions.
• Check intermediate shaft and upper joint for damage or other malfunctions.
• Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the end of the left and right.
• Check the steering wheel play, neutral position steering wheel, steering wheel turning torque, and front
wheel turning angle.
- Steering wheel play: Refer to ST-10, "Inspection".
- neutral position steering wheel, steering wheel turning torque, and front wheel turning angle: Refer to ST-5,
"Inspection".
• Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure".
Revision: 2011 September
ST-18
2012 QUEST
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495872
REMOVAL
B
For 3.5LE Grade
C
D
E
F
ST
H
I
J
JSGIA0993GB
1.
Steering gear assembly
4.
Front suspension member
2.
Cotter pin
3.
Heat insulator
K
: Vehicle front
L
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
M
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Except for 3.5LE Grade
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ST-19
2012 QUEST
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
JSGIA0925GB
1.
Steering gear assembly
4.
Front suspension member
2.
Cotter pin
3.
Heat insulator
: Vehicle front
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
DISASSEMBLY
Revision: 2011 September
ST-20
2012 QUEST
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
ST
H
JSGIA0936GB
1.
Outer socket
2.
Boot clamp
3.
Boot
4.
Inner socket
5.
Boot clamp (stainless wire)
6.
Spacer
7.
End cover assembly
8.
Rack spacer
9.
Rack oil seal
I
10. Rack assembly
11. O-ring
12. Gear housing assembly
13. Low pressure piping
14. Cylinder tubes
15. Gear-sub assembly
16. O-ring
17. Rear cover
18. Rear cover cap
J
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
K
: Always replace after every disassembly.
: Apply power steering fluid. Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".
: Apply Genuine High Strength Thread Locking Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
L
: Apply multi-purpose grease.
M
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495873
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
N
Set the vehicle to the straight-ahead position.
Remove tires with power tool. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
Remove engine under cover. Refer to EXT-27, "Exploded View".
Remove exhaust front tube. Refer to EX-6, "Removal and Installation".
Remove heat insulator from front suspension member.
Remove cotter pin, and then loosen the nut.
Revision: 2011 September
ST-21
O
P
2012 QUEST
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
7. Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle so as not to
damage ball joint boot using a ball joint remover (A) (commercial
service tool).
CAUTION:
Temporarily tighten the nut to prevent damage to threads
and to prevent the ball joint remover from suddenly coming
off.
8. Remove high pressure piping and return hose of hydraulic piping, and then drain power steering fluid.
9. Remove intermediate shaft mounting bolt (steering gear side),
JSGIA0938ZZ
and separate intermediate shaft from steering gear assembly.
CAUTION:
• Place a matching mark on both intermediate shaft and steering gear assembly before removing
intermediate shaft.
• When removing intermediate shaft, never insert a tool, such as a screwdriver, into the yoke
groove to pull out the intermediate shaft. In case of the violation of the above, replace intermediate shaft with a new one.
• Spiral cable may be cut if steering wheel turns while separating intermediate shaft and steering
gear assembly. Be sure to secure steering wheel using string to avoid turning.
10. Remove stabilizer connecting rod. Refer to FSU-14, "Removal and Installation".
11. Set suitable jack under front suspension member.
CAUTION:
• At this step, the jack must be set only for supporting the removal procedure. For details on jacking up the vehicle, refer to GI-34, "Garage Jack and Safety Stand and 2-Pole Lift".
• Never damage the front suspension member with a jack.
• Check the stable condition when using a jack.
12. Remove engine mounting insulator (rear) mounting bolts. Refer to EM-56, "Removal and Installation".
13. Remove engine mounting insulator (RH). Refer to EM-56, "Removal and Installation".
14. Remove steering gear assembly mounting bolts, and nuts.
15. Remove suspension member stay, and remove suspension member mounting bolts, and nuts. Refer to
FSU-16, "Removal and Installation".
16. Lower the suitable jack for the front suspension member to the steering gear assembly can be removed.
CAUTION:
Operate while checking that jack supporting status is stable.
17. Remove steering gear assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Spiral cable may be cut if steering wheel turns while separating intermediate shaft and steering gear
assembly. Be sure to secure steering wheel using string to avoid turning.
• When installing return hoses (1), refer to the figure.
CAUTION:
• Never apply fluid to the hose and tube (2).
• Insert hose securely until it contacts spool (A) of tube.
• Leave clearance (L) when installing clamp (3).
L
: 3 – 8 mm (0.12 – 0.31 in)
• When installing intermediate shaft to steering gear assembly, follow the procedure listed below.
- Set rack of steering gear in the neutral position.
NOTE:
To get the neutral position of rack, turn gear-sub assembly and
measure the distance of inner socket, and then measure the intermediate position of the distance.
Revision: 2011 September
ST-22
JSGIA0118ZZ
2012 QUEST
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
- Align slit of intermediate shaft (1) with rear cover cap projection
(A), insert intermediate shaft end face (B) until contacts steering
gear assembly end face (C).
- When tightening the mounting bolt of the intermediate shaft (steering gear assembly side), manually tighten the bolt and check that
there is no hook and scratch. Check that the bolt is properly placed
in the groove of the steering gear assembly before tightening the
bolt to the specified torque.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to ST-29, "Inspection".
A
B
C
JPGIA0155ZZ
D
Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000007495874
DISASSEMBLY
E
CAUTION:
• Disassemble and assemble steering gear assembly by fixing the mounting area with a vise using
copper plates.
• Clean steering gear assembly with kerosene before disassembling. Be careful to avoid splashing or F
applying any kerosene over connector of discharge port or return port.
1. Remove low pressure piping.
ST
2. Remove cylinder tubes from gear housing assembly.
3. Remove rear cover cap from gear-sub assembly.
4. Remove rear cover from gear-sub assembly, using the rear
H
cover wrench (A) [SST: KV48105400 ( — )]
I
J
JSGIA0927ZZ
5.
K
Remove O-ring from rear cover.
L
M
N
SGIA0508E
6.
7.
8.
9.
Measure adjusting screw height “H”, and loosen adjusting
screw.
CAUTION:
• Never loosen adjusting screw 2 turns or more.
• Replace steering gear assembly if adjusting screw is
loosened 2 turns or more and it is removed.
Remove gear-sub assembly from gear housing assembly.
Loosen outer socket lock nut, and remove outer socket.
Remove boot clamps, and then remove boot from inner socket.
CAUTION:
O
P
SGIA0624E
Revision: 2011 September
ST-23
2012 QUEST
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Never damage inner socket and gear housing assembly when removing boot. Inner socket and
gear housing assembly must be replaced if inner socket and gear housing assembly are damaged
because it may cause foreign material interfusion.
10. Remove inner socket from rack assembly.
11. Remove spacer from rack assembly.
CAUTION:
Never damage rack assembly.
12. Drill out the clinching part of gear housing assembly (end cover
assembly side) outer rim with a 3 mm (0.12 in) drill bit. [Drill for
approximately 1.5 mm (0.059 in) depth.]
STC0013D
13. Remove end cover assembly with a 36 mm (1.42 in) open head
(commercial service tool).
CAUTION:
Never damage rack assembly surface when removing. Rack
assembly must be replaced if damaged because it may
cause fluid leakage.
14. Pull rack assembly together with rack spacer and rack oil seal
(outer side) from gear housing assembly.
CAUTION:
Never damage cylinder inner wall when remove rack
assembly. Gear housing assembly must be replaced if damSST081B
aged because it may cause fluid leakage.
15. Remove O-ring from rack assembly.
CAUTION:
Never damage rack assembly. Rack assembly must be replaced if damaged because it may cause
fluid leakage.
16. Push rack oil seal inside with a 29 mm (1.14 in) socket and an
extension bar to push out rack oil seal (inner side) from gear
housing assembly.
CAUTION:
Never damage gear housing assembly and cylinder inner
wall. Gear housing assembly must be replaced if damaged
because it may cause fluid leakage.
17. Perform inspection after disassembly. Refer to ST-29, "Inspection".
SGIA0179E
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
• Disassemble and assemble steering gear assembly by fixing the mounting area with a vise using
copper plates.
• Clean steering gear assembly with kerosene before disassembling. Be careful to avoid splashing or
applying any kerosene over connector of discharge port or return port.
1. Apply recommended fluid to O-ring, and then install O-ring to rack assembly.
CAUTION:
Never reuse O-ring.
Revision: 2011 September
ST-24
2012 QUEST
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Apply recommended grease to rack oil seal, and then install
rack oil seal in the following procedure. Then assemble rack
assembly to gear housing assembly.
CAUTION:
• Install rack oil seal in a direction so that the lip of inner oil
seal and the lip of outer oil seal face each other.
• Never damage retainer sliding surface by rack assembly.
Replace gear housing assembly if damaged.
• Never damage gear housing assembly inner wall by rack
assembly. Gear housing assembly must be replaced if
damaged because it may cause fluid leakage.
• Never reuse rack oil seal.
a.
A
B
C
SGIA0205E
D
Wrap an OHP sheet [approximately 70 mm (2.76 in) × 100 mm
(3.94 in)]. Around rack assembly teeth to avoid damaging rack
oil seal (inner). Install rack oil seal over sheet. Then, pull OHP
sheet along with rack oil seal until they pass rack assembly
teeth, and remove OHP sheet.
E
F
ST
SGIA0155E
b.
c.
H
Insert rack oil seal (inner) into rack assembly piston (rack Teflon
ring).
Push retainer to adjusting screw side by hand, and move the
rack assembly inside the gear housing assembly so that the
rack oil seal (inner) can be pressed against the gear housing
assembly.
I
J
K
PGIA0076E
d.
e.
f.
Wrap an OHP sheet [approximately 70 mm (2.76 in) × 100 mm
(3.94 in)]. Around the edge to avoid damaging rack oil seal
(outer). Install rack oil seal over sheet. Then, pull oil seal along
with OHP sheet until they pass rack edge, and remove OHP
sheet.
Apply recommended grease to rack spacer.
Install end cover assembly and rack spacer to rack edge, and
move rack oil seal (outer) until it contacts with gear housing
assembly.
L
M
N
SGIA0157E
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ST-25
2012 QUEST
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
3. Tighten end cover assembly to specified torque using a 36 mm
(1.42 in) open head (commercial service tool).
CAUTION:
Never damage rack assembly. Replace it if damaged
because it may cause fluid leakage.
SST081B
4.
Crimp gear housing assembly at one point using a punch as
shown in the figure so as to prevent end cover assembly from
getting loose after tightening end cover assembly.
A
5.
6.
7.
8.
a.
b.
c.
9.
: 2 – 3 mm (0.08 – 0.12 in)
Install gear-sub assembly to gear housing assembly.
CAUTION:
In order to protect oil seal from any damage, insert gearsub assembly straightly.
Apply recommended fluid to O-ring, and then install O-ring to
rear cover.
CAUTION:
Never reuse O-ring.
Install rear cover to gear-sub assembly, using the rear cover
wrench (A) [SST: KV48105400 ( — )]
CAUTION:
Never reuse rear cover.
Install inner socket to rack assembly with the following procedure.
Install spacer to rack assembly.
Apply thread sealant into the thread of inner socket.
Use Genuine High Strength Thread Locking Sealant or
equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and Sealants".
Screw inner socket into rack part and tighten at the specified torque.
Decide on the neutral position of the rack stroke (L).
Rack stroke neutral position (L)
JSGIA0928ZZ
JSGIA0927ZZ
: Refer to ST-35,
"Steering Gear and
Linkage".
10. Install rear cover cap to gear sub-assembly.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the projection of rear cover cap is aligned
with the marking position of gear housing assembly.
SGIA0877E
Revision: 2011 September
ST-26
2012 QUEST
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
11. Apply recommended thread sealant to the thread of adjusting
screw (2 turns thread), and then screw in the adjusting screw
until it reaches height “H” from gear housing assembly measured before disassembling.
Use Genuine High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to GI-22, "Recommended Chemical Products and
Sealants".
12. Move rack assembly 10 strokes throughout the full stroke so that
the parts can fit with each other.
A
B
C
SGIA0624E
D
13. Adjust pinion rotating torque with the following procedure.
a. Measure pinion rotating torque within ±180° of neutral position
of the rack assembly using Tools. Stop the gear at the point
where highest torque is read.
E
A: Preload gauge [SST: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)]
F
B: Preload adapter [SST: KV48103400 ( — )]
b.
Loosen adjusting screw and retighten to 5.4 N·m (0.55 kg-m, 48
in-lb), and then loosen by 20 to 40°.
ST
SGIA1383E
c.
Pinion rotating torque
d.
H
Measure pinion rotating torque using tools to make sure that the
measured value is within the standard. Readjust if the value is
outside the standard. Replace steering gear assembly, if the
value is outside the standard after readjusting, or adjusting
screw rotating torque is 5 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb) or less.
I
J
: Refer to ST-35, "Steering
Gear and Linkage".
Turn pinion fully to left.
K
JSGIA0937GB
e.
f.
Install dial indicator at 5 mm (0.20 in) (L) from the edge of gear
housing assembly (1), and tooth point.
Measure vertical movement of rack assembly when pinion is
turned clockwise with torque of 19.6 N·m (2.0 kg-m, 14 ft-lb).
L
M
Vertical movement
14.
15.
16.
17.
: Refer to ST-35, "Steering Gear
and Linkage".
• If reading is outside of the specification, readjust screw angle
with adjusting screw.
CAUTION:
JSGIA0104ZZ
• Replace steering gear assembly when adjusting screw
is removed or turned more than twice.
• Never turn adjusting screw more than twice.
• If reading is still outside of specification, or if the rotating torque of adjusting screw is less
than 5 N·m (0.51 kg-m, 44 in-lb), replace steering gear assembly.
Install large end of boot to gear housing assembly.
Install small end of boot to inner socket boot mounting groove.
Install boot clamp to boot small end.
Install boot clamp to the large side of boot with the following procedure.
CAUTION:
Never reuse boot clamp.
Revision: 2011 September
ST-27
2012 QUEST
N
O
P
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
a. Tighten large side of boot with boot clamp (stainless wire).
Wire length (L)
b.
: 390 mm (15.35 in)
Wrap clamp around boot groove for two turns. Insert a flatbladed screwdriver in loops on both ends of wire. Twist 4 to 4.5
turns while pulling them with force of approximately 98 N (10 kg,
22 lb).
SGIA0163E
c.
Twist boot clamp as shown. Pay attention to relationship
between winding and twisting directions.
SGIA0164E
d.
Twisted area (A) of clamp is in the adjusting screw side (1) as
shown in the figure (to prevent contact with other parts).
A
: 80°
JSGIA0926ZZ
e.
Bent cut end of the wire toward rack axial as shown in the figure
after twisting the wire 4 to 4.5 turns so that cut end does not contact with boot.
CAUTION:
Keep gap from cylinder tube 5 mm (0.20 in) or more.
A
: 30°
18. Install cylinder tubes to gear housing assembly.
19. Install low pressure piping.
JSGIA0042ZZ
20. Install outer socket with the following procedure.
• Adjust inner socket to standard length (L), and then tighten
lock nut (1) to the specified torque. Check length again after
tightening lock nut.
Inner socket length (L)
: Refer to ST-35, "Steering
Gear and Linkage".
JPGIA0187ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
ST-28
2012 QUEST
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CAUTION:
• When tightening the lock nut (1), be sure to fix outer
socket (2) with a wrench or an equivalent to prevent the
ball joint from getting contact with the knuckle.
• Adjust toe-in after this procedure. The length achieved
after toe-in adjustment is not necessary the above
value.
A
B
C
D
JSGIA0538ZZ
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495875
E
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Boot
Check boot for cracks, and replace it if a malfunction is detected.
F
Rack Assembly
Check rack for damage or wear, and replace it if a malfunction is detected.
ST
Gear-Sub Assembly
• Check gear-sub assembly for damage or wear, and replace it if a malfunction is detected.
• Rotate gear-sub assembly and check for torque variation or rattle, and replace it if a malfunction is detected.
H
Gear Housing Assembly
Check gear housing assembly for damage and scratches (inner wall). Replace if there are.
I
Outer Socket and Inner Socket
Check the following items and replace the component if it does not meet the standard.
BALL JOINT SWINGING FORCE
Hook a spring balance at the point and pull the spring balance. Make
sure that the spring balance reads the specified value when ball stud
and inner socket start to move. Replace outer socket and inner
socket if they are outside the standard.
Measuring point of outer socket (1)
: Ball stud upper side (A)
Measuring point of inner socket (2)
: Point (B) shown in the figure
Swinging force
(Spring balance
measurement)
J
K
L
: Refer to ST-35, "Steering Gear
and Linkage".
M
JPGIA0188ZZ
BALL JOINT ROTATING TORQUE
Make sure that the reading is within the following specified range
using preload gauge (A) [SST: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)]. Replace
outer socket if the reading is outside the specified value.
N
O
Rotating torque
: Refer to ST-35, "Steering Gear
and Linkage".
P
SGIA1382E
BALL JOINT AXIAL END PLAY
Revision: 2011 September
ST-29
2012 QUEST
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Apply an axial load of 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb) to ball stud. Using a dial
indicator, measure amount of stud movement, and then make sure
that the value is within the following specified range. Replace outer
socket (1) and inner socket (2) if the measured value is outside the
standard.
Axial end play
: Refer to ST-35, "Steering Gear and
Linkage".
JSGIA0109ZZ
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the end of the left and right.
• Check the steering wheel play, neutral position steering wheel, steering wheel turning torque, and front
wheel turning angle.
- Steering wheel play: Refer to ST-10, "Inspection".
- Neutral position steering wheel, steering wheel turning torque, and front wheel turning angle: Refer to ST-5,
"Inspection".
• Bleed the hydraulic system. Refer to ST-8, "Inspection".
• Check the fluid level and check for leakage. Refer to ST-8, "Inspection".
• Check wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection".
• Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to BRC-44, "Work Procedure".
Revision: 2011 September
ST-30
2012 QUEST
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495876
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY: IRON COVER TYPE
B
C
D
E
F
ST
H
I
JSGIA0923GB
1.
Reservoir cap
4.
Noise insulator
2.
Power steering oil pump assembly
3.
J
Bracket
K
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
L
: Always replace after every disassembly.
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY: RESIN COVER TYPE
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
ST-31
2012 QUEST
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
JSGIA0989GB
1.
Reservoir cap
2.
Power steering oil pump assembly
3.
Bracket
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007495877
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Disconnect the battery negative terminal before performing the work.
• Noise insulator is function part, never remove. (Iron cover type)
1. Remove reservoir tank of radiator. Refer to CO-13, "Exploded View".
2. Remove washer tank inlet. Refer to WW-51, "Exploded View".
3. Disconnect each connector and grand cable from power steering control module.
4. Remove high-pressure flexible hose. Refer to HA-34, "HIGH-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE : Removal
and Installation".
5. Remove return hose, and drain power steering fluid.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse drained power steering fluid.
• Always use the specified fluid. Refer to MA-10, "Fluids and Lubricants".
6. Remove high-pressure piping and O-ring. Refer to ST-34, "Exploded View".
7. Remove food side cover. Refer to DLK-397, "Exploded View".
8. Remove oil pump assembly mounting bolts and nuts, and then remove oil pump assembly.
9. Remove brackets.
10. Perform inspection after removal. Refer to ST-33, "Inspection".
INSTALLATION
Note the following, and install in the reverse order of removal.
• When installing high-pressure piping, securely install O-ring to high-pressure piping.
Revision: 2011 September
ST-32
2012 QUEST
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CAUTION:
Never reuse O-ring.
• When installing return hoses, refer to the figure.
CAUTION:
• Never apply fluid to the hose (1) and tube (2).
• Insert hose securely until it contacts spool (A) of tube.
• Leave clearance (L) when installing clamp (3).
L
A
B
C
: 3 – 8 mm (0.12 – 0.31 in)
• If noise insulator is removed, clean mounting surface, and install
new noise insulator. (Iron cover type)
CAUTION:
Never reuse noise insulator.
• Perform inspection after installation. Refer to ST-33, "Inspection".
Inspection
D
JSGIA0118ZZ
INFOID:0000000007495878
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
E
F
Check oil pump assembly for damage or other malfunctions. Replace if necessary.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
• Check oil pump assembly for damage or other malfunctions. Replace if necessary.
• Check the fluid level and check for leakage. Refer to ST-8, "Inspection".
• Bleed the hydraulic system. Refer to ST-8, "Inspection".
ST
RELIEF OIL PRESSURE
1.
2.
3.
Relief oil pressure
4.
5.
6.
7.
H
Connect the oil pressure gauge (A) [SST: KV48103500 (J26357)] and the adapter set (B) [SST: KV481059S0 ( — )]
between oil pump discharge port and high-pressure piping.
Bleed air from the hydraulic circuit while opening valve fully.
CAUTION:
Check that O-ring is installed on adapter (male side) [SST:
KV48105920 ( — )].
Start the engine and adjust the reservoir tank oil temperature to
room temperature [recommended oil temperature: approximately 20°C (68°F)].
CAUTION:
Leave the valve of the oil pressure gauge fully open while
starting and running engine. If engine is started with the
valve closed, the hydraulic pressure in oil pump goes up to
the relief pressure along with unusual increase of oil temperature.
Fully close the oil pressure gauge valve with engine at idle and
measure the relief oil pressure.
I
J
K
L
M
N
: Refer to ST-36, "Oil Pump".
CAUTION:
Never keep valve closed for 10 seconds or longer.
JSGIA0930GB
Open the valve slowly after measuring. Replace oil pump if the
relief oil pressure is outside the standard.
Disconnect the oil pressure gauge and adapters from hydraulic circuit.
Connect high-pressure piping with O-ring to oil pump assembly.
CAUTION:
Never reuse O-ring.
Check fluid level, fluid leakage and air bleeding hydraulic system after the installation. Refer to ST-8,
"Inspection".
Revision: 2011 September
ST-33
2012 QUEST
O
P
HYDRAULIC LINE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
HYDRAULIC LINE
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007495879
JSGIA0924GB
1.
Power steering oil pump assembly
4.
Collar
5.
Bushing
6.
Return tube
7.
Return hose
8.
Steering gear assembly
9.
High pressure piping
10. O-ring
A.
2.
Clamp
3.
Return hose assembly
11. Gear housing assembly
Location in steering gear assembly
: Vehicle front
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
Revision: 2011 September
ST-34
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications
INFOID:0000000007495880
Steering gear model
PR26AM
Fluid capacity (Approx.)
(US qt, lmp qt)
B
C
1.0 (1-1/8, 7/8)
Steering Wheel
INFOID:0000000007495881
D
Item
Standard
Steering wheel axial end play
E
0 mm (0 in)
Steering wheel play on the outer circumference
0 – 35 mm (0 – 1.38 in)
Steering wheel turning torque
7.45 N·m (0.76 kg-m, 66 in-lb)
Steering Angle
F
INFOID:0000000007495882
Unit: Degree minute (Decimal degree)
Item
Inner wheel
Outer wheel
ST
Standard
Minimum
39° 00′ (39.0°)
Nominal
42° 00′ (42.0°)
Maximum
43° 00′ (43.0°)
Nominal
36° 00′ (36.0°)
Steering Column
H
I
INFOID:0000000007495883
J
Item
Standard
Rotating torque
0.49 N·m (0.05 kg-m, 4 in-lb) or less
K
Steering column length*
416 – 420 mm (16.38 – 16.54 in)
Impact displacement absorption part dimension*
95.3 – 97.3 mm (3.752 – 3.831 in)
Tilt operating range*
46 mm (1.81 in)
Telescopic operating range*
40 mm (1.57 in)
L
*: For measuring position, refer to ST-13, "Inspection".
M
Intermediate Shaft
INFOID:0000000007495884
Item
N
Standard
Shaft length*
630.7 – 638.5 mm (24.83 – 25.14 in)
Shaft sliding range*
80 mm (3.15 in)
O
*: For measuring position, refer to ST-17, "Inspection".
Steering Gear and Linkage
INFOID:0000000007495885
P
Item
Pinion rotating torque*
Standard
Around neutral position (within ±100°)
Average
Maximum variation
0.98 N·m (0.10 kg-m, 9 in-lb)
Rack sliding force
Revision: 2011 September
1.59 – 2.0 N·m (0.17 – 0.20 kg-m, 14 – 17 in-lb)
226 – 285 N (23.1 – 29.0 kg-f, 50.1 – 64.0 lb-f)
ST-35
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Item
Rack vertical movement
Outer socket ball joint
Standard
Rack axial direction
Measuring position: At 5 mm (0.20 in) from the
edge of gear housing assembly
0.265 mm (0.0104 in) or less
Rack turning direction
Measuring position: At adjusting screw axial
direction
0.265 mm (0.0104 in) or less
Swing force* (Spring balance measurement)
4.41 – 42.7 N (0.45 – 4.35 kg-f, 1.0 – 9.59 lb-f)
Rotating torque
0.3 – 2.9 N·m (0.03 – 0.29 kg-m, 3 – 25 in-lb)
Axial end play
0.5 mm (0.020 in) or less
Swing force* (Spring balance measurement)
Inner socket ball joint
Axial end play
7.2 – 56.1 N (0.74 – 5.72 kg-f, 1.62 – 12.61 lb-f)
0.2 mm (0.008 in) or less
Inner socket length
120 mm (4.72 in) or less
Rack stroke neutral position
79.0 mm (3.110 in)
*: For measuring position, refer to ST-29, "Inspection".
Oil Pump
INFOID:0000000007495886
Unit: kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Item
Relief oil pressure
Standard
Oil pump assembly: Iron cover type
9,700 – 10,300 (99 – 105, 1,407 – 1,493)
Oil pump assembly: Resin cover type
9,900 – 10,400 (101 – 106, 1,436 – 1,508)
Revision: 2011 September
ST-36
2012 QUEST
STEERING
SECTION
STC
STEERING CONTROL SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
Service Notice and Precautions for Hydraulic
Pump Electric Power Steering System ..................... 3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 4
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 4
Component Parts Location ........................................ 4
Power Steering Oil Pump Assembly ......................... 5
SYSTEM .............................................................. 6
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM ............................................................... 6
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING SYSTEM : System Description .............. 6
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING SYSTEM : Fail-safe ............................... 8
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING SYSTEM : Protection Function .............. 9
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (POWER STEERING
CONTROL MODULE) ........................................10
CONSULT Function ................................................ 10
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING SYSTEM ......................................... 14
Wiring Diagram ........................................................14
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 15
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 15
Work Flow ................................................................15
Diagnostic Work Sheet ............................................16
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 18
DTC Logic ................................................................18
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................18
H
I
J
C1601 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY ................ 19
DTC Logic ................................................................19
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................19
K
C1606 EPS MOTOR .......................................... 22
DTC Logic ................................................................22
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................22
C1607, C1608 POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE ................................................ 23
DTC Logic ................................................................23
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................23
L
M
N
C160A HEAT PROTECTION ............................ 24
DTC Logic ................................................................24
POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE ........11
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT ........................... 25
Reference Value ..................................................... 11
Fail-safe .................................................................. 12
Protection Function ................................................. 12
DTC Inspection Priority Chart ................................. 13
DTC Index ............................................................... 13
Description ...............................................................25
DTC Logic ................................................................25
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................25
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING WARNING LAMP ........................... 26
Component Function Check ....................................26
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................26
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 27
Revision: 2011 September
STC
C1143 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR ............... 18
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 11
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 14
F
STC-1
2012 QUEST
O
P
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING WARNING LAMP DOES NOT
TURN ON ........................................................... 27
UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING
FORCE AND RETURN BETWEEN RIGHT
AND LEFT ......................................................... 31
Description .............................................................. 27
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 27
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 31
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING WARNING LAMP DOES NOT
TURN OFF ......................................................... 28
Description .............................................................. 28
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 28
STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE IS
HEAVY OR LIGHT ............................................. 29
UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING
FORCE (TORQUE VARIATION) ....................... 32
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 32
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 34
POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE ....... 34
Removal and Installation ......................................... 34
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 29
Revision: 2011 September
STC-2
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000007492022
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
D
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
E
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
F
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
STC
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Service Notice and Precautions for Hydraulic Pump Electric Power Steering System
I
J
K
INFOID:0000000007492023
• Check if air pressure and size of tires are proper, the specified part is used for the steering wheel is genuine
part.
• Check if the connection of steering column assembly and steering gear assembly is proper (there is not
looseness of mounting bolts, damage of rods, boots or sealants, and leakage of grease, etc.).
• Check if the wheel alignment is adjusted properly.
• Check if there is any damage or modification to suspension or body resulting in increased weight or altered
ground clearance.
• Check if installation conditions of each link and suspension are proper.
• Check if the battery voltage is proper.
• Check connection conditions of each connector are proper.
• Check that NISSAN genuine power steering fluid (E-PSF) is used. If power steering fluid other than genuine
fluid is used, steering may become extremely hard.
• You may hear a high pitch noise from the front of the vehicle when the steering wheel is operated, especially
at low speed such as a parking lot. However this is not a malfunction. Steer at low speed condition makes
higher load for steering rack, so pump works higher rotation to provide more hydraulic flow to create more
power assistance for lighter steering effort. This pump rotation is electrically controlled based on rotation
map in ECU.
• Before connecting or disconnecting the power steering control module harness connector, turn ignition
switch “OFF” and disconnect battery ground cable. Because battery voltage is applied to power steering
control module even if ignition switch is turned “OFF”.
Revision: 2011 September
STC-3
2012 QUEST
L
M
N
O
P
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007492024
JSGIA0913GB
A.
Engine room right side
No.
1.
2.
Component
Function
Transmits mainly the following signals to power steering control
module via CAN communication.
• Steering angle sensor signal
Steering angle sensor
Transmits mainly the following signals to power steering control
module via CAN communication.
• Vehicle speed signal
Refer to MWI-6, "METER SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Combination meter
The hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp
turns ON according to the signal received by CAN communication
from the power steering control module.
3.
4.
Hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning
lamp (In combination meter)
STC-6, "HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING
SYSTEM : System Description"
ECM
Transmits mainly the following signals to power steering control
module via CAN communication.
• Engine status signal
Refer to EC-15, "ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM : Component
Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
Revision: 2011 September
STC-4
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.
Component
5.
6.
7.
Function
A
Reservoir tank
Power steering oil pump
assembly
8.
Power steering oil pump
STC-5, "Power Steering Oil Pump Assembly"
Power steering motor
B
Power steering control module
Power Steering Oil Pump Assembly
INFOID:0000000007492025
The power steering oil pump assembly is primarily composed of the
reservoir tank (1), power steering oil pump (2), power steering motor
(3), and power steering control module (4).
C
D
E
F
JSGIA0914ZZ
RESERVOIR TANK
STC
Fluid is filled from the reservoir tank.
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
The power steering oil pump is driven by the power steering motor and generates hydraulic oil pressure in the
system.
H
POWER STEERING MOTOR
The power steering motor is controlled by the power steering control module and drives the power steering oil
pump.
POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE
By receiving steering angle sensor signal and vehicle speed signal, the power steering control module calculates hydraulic pressure of the hydraulic pump electric power steering system according to the driving conditions. The power steering control module controls the power steering motor.
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
STC-5
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007492026
• The system is composed primarily of the power steering oil pump assembly (power steering control module,
power steering motor, power steering oil pump, and reservoir tank), hydraulic pipes, and steering gear
assembly.
• The power steering control module controls the speed of the power steering motor according to the vehicle
speed and steering angle speed. By changing the power steering oil pump flow, the power steering control
module controls the steering assist force.
• According to the power steering motor control, the system hydraulic pressure is transmitted from the power
steering motor to power steering oil pump. The power steering oil pump is driven by the system hydraulic
pressure.
• After engine start, the hydraulic pump electric power steering system performs control.
• When a malfunction occurs in the system, the fail-safe function stops the hydraulic pump electric power
steering system (manual steering state) or restricts its operation (certain steering assist force). Refer to STC8, "HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM : Fail-safe".
• When the power steering function is used continuously in an extreme manner, the protective function
reduces the output to the power steering motor. Refer to STC-9, "HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING SYSTEM : Protection Function".
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSGIA0915GB
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL
Communicates the signal from each control unit via CAN communication.
Control unit
Signal status
ECM
Transmits mainly the following signals to power steering control module via CAN communication.
• Engine status signal
Steering angle sensor
Transmits mainly the following signals to power steering control module via CAN communication.
• Steering angle sensor signal
Combination meter
Transmits mainly the following signals to power steering control module via CAN communication.
• Vehicle speed signal
Receives mainly the following signals from power steering control module via CAN communication.
• Hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp signal
OPERATION CHARACTERISTICS
Revision: 2011 September
STC-6
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
When the steering angle speed is high or the vehicle speed is low,
force is generated by increasing discharge amount from the power
steering oil pump and by raising system hydraulic pressure.
A
B
C
JSGIA0916GB
D
OPERATION PRINCIPLE
When Steering Wheel is in the Neutral Position
E
F
STC
H
I
J
JSGIA0918GB
Because the hydraulic routes open at the power steering pump, gear housing right side, gear housing left side,
and reservoir tank, the hydraulic pressure applied to the right side and left side of the gear housing is equal
and no steering assist force is generated.
K
When Steering Wheel is Rotated to the Right
L
M
N
O
P
JSGIA0919GB
The hydraulic routes open from power steering pump to gear housing right side and from gear housing left
side to reservoir tank, providing left direction assist force to the rack.
Revision: 2011 September
STC-7
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
When Steering Wheel is Rotated to the Left
JSGIA0917GB
The hydraulic routes open from power steering pump to gear housing left side and from gear housing right
side to reservoir tank, providing right direction assist force to the rack.
CONDITIONS FOR HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP ON
• When the hydraulic pump electric power steering system is operating and steering assist force is being generated, the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp is OFF.
• When the hydraulic pump electric power steering system is stopped by the fail-safe or protective function
and steering assist force is not being generated, the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp
turns ON to inform the driver that the system is in the manual steering state.
NOTE:
When the hydraulic pump electric power steering system turns ON according to the protection system, the
cause is internal high temperature state of the hydraulic pump electric power steering system. By stopping
the engine, internal temperature of the system decreases. After starting the engine, the system returns to the
normal state and the hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp turns OFF. (The system is
not malfunctioning.) For information about the protective function, refer to STC-9, "HYDRAULIC PUMP
ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM : Protection Function".
• When the ignition switch is turned ON, this lamp turns ON for lamp check (system check). When the system
is operating normally, the lamp turns OFF after the engine starts.
Condition
Hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp
Ignition switch ON. (Lamp check)
ON
After engine start (steering assist force is generated)
OFF
When steering assist is stopped
ON
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM : Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007492027
When an error occurs in the hydraulic pump electric power steering system, fail-safe brings the system to a
halt (manual steering) or restricted (constant steering assist level) state. When the system is in a halt state,
fail-safe turns ON the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp to warn the driver that the hydraulic pump electric power steering system is in the manual steering state.
DTC
Fail-safe condition
C1143
Certain steering assist force
C1601
Manual steering state
C1606
Manual steering state
C1607
Certain steering assist force
Revision: 2011 September
STC-8
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DTC
Fail-safe condition
A
C1608
Manual steering state
U1000
Normal control
NOTE:
If the cause is in a different ECU, the state changes to fixed steering assist force.
B
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM : Protection Function
INFOID:0000000007492028
• When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or turned all the way for a long period during parking or low
speed driving, the function of the hydraulic pump electric power steering system becomes limited to prevent
the system from overheating. If the steering wheel is operated further more, the hydraulic pump electric
power steering system stops and the hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp may be
turned ON. In this case, the steering wheel operation temporarily becomes hard. This is not a malfunction.
When the engine is turned OFF (ignition switch OFF) and steering operation is stopped for a while, the temperature of the hydraulic pump electric power steering system decreases and the steering operation returns
to normal after restarting the engine.
• Then, the hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp turns OFF. If the system is OFF
under the protection state, the hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp turns ON to
warn that the system is in the manual steering state. (This is not a system malfunction.) In addition, the following DTC remains to distinguish from malfunction.
DTC
C160A
C
D
E
F
STC
vehicle condition
The system temporarily enters the manual steering state. (This is not a hydraulic pump electric
power steering system malfunction.)
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
STC-9
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE)
CONSULT Function
INFOID:0000000007492029
FUNCTION
CONSULT can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown as per the following.
Diagnostic test mode
Function
ECU identification
The part number stored in the control unit can be read.
Self Diagnostic Results
Self-diagnostic results and freeze frame data can be read and erased quickly*
Data monitor
Input/Output data in the power steering control module can be read.
*
: The following diagnosis information is erased by erasing.
ECU IDENTIFICATION
Displays the part number stored in the control unit.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS MODE
Refer to STC-13, "DTC Index".
When “CRNT” is displayed on self-diagnosis result.
• The system is presently malfunctioning.
When “PAST” is displayed on self-diagnosis result.
• System malfunction in the past is detected, but the system is presently normal.
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitor item (Unit)
Remarks
BATTERY VOLT (V)
Displays the power supply voltage for power steering control module.
STR ANG SPD (deg/s)
Displays the steering angle speed based on the steering angle signal transmitted by
CAN communications.
MOTOR CURRENT (A)
Displays the current value consumed by power steering control module.
MTR REV SPD COMM (rpm)
Displays the power steering motor speed command value.
MTR REV SPD (rpm)
Displays the power steering motor speed.
C/U TEMP (°C or °F)
Displays the temperature of the power steering control module.
C/U TEMP A (°C or °F)
Displays the temperature of the power steering control module.
MTR ASSIST (%)
Displays the current percentage of the allowable assist ratio power steering motor.
ESTM VHCL SPD (km/h or mph)
Displays the vehicle speed calculated by the power steering control module.
WARNING LAMP (On/Off)
Hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp control status is displayed.
ENGINE STATUS (STOP/RUN/CRANK)
Engine speed is displayed from engine condition signal with CAN communication
VHCL SPD JUDGE (OK/NG)
Displays the receiving status of the vehicle speed signal transmitted by CAN communications.
Revision: 2011 September
STC-10
2012 QUEST
POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
A
POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000007492030
B
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
C
Data monitor
Monitor item
BATTERY VOLT
STR ANG SPD
MOTOR CURRENT
MTR REV SPD COMM
Condition
D
Engine running
Battery voltage (V)
The steering wheel is not steered.
Approx. 0.0 deg/s
The steering wheel is steered.
Displays steering angle speed (deg/s)
Engine running
Engine running
Steering wheel: Not steering (There is
no steering force)
MAX approx. 10
Steering wheel: Right or left turn
Displays consumption current of power steering control module (A)
Steering wheel: Not steering (There is
no steering force)
Shows an almost constant value
(rpm)
Steering wheel: Right or left turn
The value changes as a steering
speed (rpm)
Steering wheel: Not steering (There is
no steering force)
MTR REV SPD
Display value
Engine running
Steering wheel: Right or left turn
Shows an almost constant value
(rpm)*2
speed (rpm)*2
C/U TEMP A
Engine running
Displays temperature of inside of
power steering control module (°C or
°F)
MTR ASSIST
Engine running
100%*3
Vehicle stopped
0.00 km/h or mph
WARNING LAMP
ENGINE STATUS
VHCL SPD JUDGE
Approximately equal to the indication
While driving
on speedometer*4
(inside of ±10%)
Hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp: ON
On
Hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp: OFF
Off
Engine not running
STOP
Engine running
RUN
Engine cranking
CRANK
Vehicle speed signal can be received via CAN communication
OK
Vehicle speed signal cannot be received via CAN communication
NG
STC-11
H
J
K
L
M
N
O
*1: The value changes according to load of power steering motor.
*2: This is in close agreement with a motor speed command value. Although a quick steering operation may
cause disagreement, this is not a malfunction.
*3: Usually, 100% is displayed. An excessive steering operation gradually lowers the percentage. When left
standing, the percentage returns to 100%.
*4: This may not agree with the speedometer indication immediately after the ignition switch is turned ON. This
is not a malfunction.
Revision: 2011 September
STC
I
Engine running
ESTM VHCL SPD
F
The value changes as a steering
Displays temperature of inside of
power steering control module (°C or
°F)
C/U TEMP
E
A*1
2012 QUEST
P
POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
TERMINAL LAYOUT
JSGIA0835ZZ
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
(Wire Color)
Description
Condition
Value
(Approx.)
+
−
Signal name
Input/Output
1
(R)
Ground
Battery power supply
Input
Always
8.5 – 18.5 V
2
(B)
Ground
Ground
—
Always
0V
5
(BR)
Ground
Ignition power supply
7
(P)
—
CAN-L
Input/Output
—
—
8
(L)
—
CAN-H
Input/Output
—
—
Input
Ignition switch: ON
8.5 – 18.5 V
Ignition switch: OFF
0V
Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007492031
When an error occurs in the hydraulic pump electric power steering system, fail-safe brings the system to a
halt (manual steering) or restricted (constant steering assist level) state. When the system is in a halt state,
fail-safe turns ON the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp to warn the driver that the hydraulic pump electric power steering system is in the manual steering state.
DTC
Fail-safe condition
C1143
Certain steering assist force
C1601
Manual steering state
C1606
Manual steering state
C1607
Certain steering assist force
C1608
Manual steering state
U1000
Normal control
NOTE:
If the cause is in a different ECU, the state changes to fixed steering assist force.
Protection Function
INFOID:0000000007492032
• When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or turned all the way for a long period during parking or low
speed driving, the function of the hydraulic pump electric power steering system becomes limited to prevent
the system from overheating. If the steering wheel is operated further more, the hydraulic pump electric
power steering system stops and the hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp may be
turned ON. In this case, the steering wheel operation temporarily becomes hard. This is not a malfunction.
When the engine is turned OFF (ignition switch OFF) and steering operation is stopped for a while, the temperature of the hydraulic pump electric power steering system decreases and the steering operation returns
to normal after restarting the engine.
• Then, the hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp turns OFF. If the system is OFF
under the protection state, the hydraulic pump electric power steering system warning lamp turns ON to
Revision: 2011 September
STC-12
2012 QUEST
POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
warn that the system is in the manual steering state. (This is not a system malfunction.) In addition, the following DTC remains to distinguish from malfunction.
DTC
A
vehicle condition
C160A
The system temporarily enters the manual steering state. (This is not a hydraulic pump electric
power steering system malfunction.)
DTC Inspection Priority Chart
INFOID:0000000007492033
B
C
When multiple DTCs are detected simultaneously, check one by one depending on the following priority list.
Priority
D
Priority order item (DTC)
1
• C1601 BATTERY VOLT
• C1606 EPS MOTOR
• C1608 CONTROL UNIT
2
• C1607 EEPROM
3
• C160A HEAT PROTECTION
4
• C1143 ST ANG SEN CIRCUIT
• U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
E
F
DTC Index
INFOID:0000000007492034
DTC
Items (CONSULT screen terms)
STC
Reference
C1143
ST ANG SEN CIRCUIT
STC-18, "DTC Logic"
C1601
BATTERY VOLT
STC-19, "DTC Logic"
C1606
EPS MOTOR
STC-22, "DTC Logic"
C1607
EEPROM
STC-23, "DTC Logic"
C1608
CONTROL UNIT
STC-23, "DTC Logic"
C160A
HEAT PROTECTION
STC-24, "DTC Logic"
U1000
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
STC-25, "DTC Logic"
NOTE:
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to STC-13, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart".
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
STC-13
2012 QUEST
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007492035
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
(option abbreviation; if not
JCGWA0343GB
Revision: 2011 September
STC-14
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000007492036
B
DETAILED FLOW
1.INTERVIEW FROM THE CUSTOMER
C
Clarify customer complaints before inspection. First of all, perform an interview utilizing reproduce symptoms
as well as fully understand it. Ask customer about his/her complaints carefully. Check symptoms by driving
vehicle with customer, if necessary.
CAUTION:
Customers are not professional. Never guess easily like “maybe the customer means that...,” or
“maybe the customer mentions this symptom”.
D
E
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SYMPTOM
F
Reproduce the symptom that is indicated by the customer, based on the information from the customer
obtained by interview. Also check that the symptom is not caused by protection function. Refer to STC-12,
STC
"Protection Function".
CAUTION:
When the symptom is caused by normal operation, fully inspect each portion and obtain the understanding of customer that the symptom is not caused by a malfunction.
H
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK VEHICLE CONDITION
1.
2.
I
With CONSULT
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check “C/U TEMP“ and “C/U TEMP A“ in “DATA MONITOR“ in “EPS“.
Monitor item
J
Values
C/U TEMP
90°C (194°F) or less
C/U TEMP A
90°C (194°F) or less
K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Wait with the ignition switch OFF until the data monitor indication becomes 90 °C (194 °F) or less.
Go to 4 after the temperature drops to 90 °C (194 °F) or less.
L
M
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Record or print DTC and freeze frame data (FFD). GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 7.
N
O
5.RECHECK SYMPTOM
With CONSULT
1. Erase self-diagnostic results for “EPS”.
2. Perform DTC confirmation procedures for the error detected system.
NOTE:
If some DTCs are detected at the same time, determine the order for performing the diagnosis based on STC13, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart".
Is any DTC detected?
Revision: 2011 September
STC-15
2012 QUEST
P
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Check harness and connectors based on the information obtained by interview.
6.REPAIR OR REPLACE ERROR-DETECTED PARTS
• Repair or replace error-detected parts.
• Reconnect part or connector after repairing or replacing.
• When DTC is detected, erase self-diagnostic results for “EPS”.
>> GO TO 8.
7.IDENTIFY ERROR-DETECTED SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Estimate error-detected system based on symptom diagnosis and perform inspection.
Can the error-detected system be identified?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Check harness and connectors based on the information obtained by interview.
8.FINAL CHECK
With CONSULT
1. Check the reference value for power steering control module.
2. Recheck the symptom and check that symptom is not reproduced on the same conditions.
Is the symptom reproduced?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnostic Work Sheet
INFOID:0000000007492037
Description
• In general, customers have their own criteria for a problem. Therefore, it is important to understand the
symptom and status well enough by asking the customer about his/her concerns carefully. To systemize all
the information for the diagnosis, prepare the interview sheet referring to the interview points.
• In some cases, multiple conditions that appear simultaneously may cause a DTC to be detected.
Interview sheet sample
Interview sheet
Customer
name
MR/MS
Storage date
Registration
number
Initial year
registration
Vehicle type
VIN
Engine
Mileage
km (Mile)
The steering wheel position (center) is in the wrong position.
Warning lamp turns on.
Symptom
Noise
Vibration
Others
(
)
First occurrence
Recently
Frequency of occurrence
Always
Others (
)
Under a certain conditions of
Sometimes (time(s)/day)
Irrelevant
Climate conditions
Weather
Fine
Temperature
Hot
Relative humidity
High
Road conditions
Revision: 2011 September
Cloud
Warm
Rain
Cool
Moderate
Snow
Cold
Others (
Temperature [Approx.
)
°C (°F)]
Low
Urban area
Suburb area
High way
Mounting road (uphill or down hill)
Rough road
STC-16
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Interview sheet
A
Registration
number
Initial year
registration
Vehicle type
VIN
Storage date
Engine
Mileage
Operation conditions, etc.
Irrelevant
When engine starts
During idling
During driving
During acceleration
At constant speed driving
During deceleration
During cornering (right curve or left curve)
During steering
Customer
name
MR/MS
km (Mile)
B
C
D
Other conditions
Memo
E
F
STC
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
STC-17
2012 QUEST
C1143 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
C1143 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492038
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
Display item
C1143
ST ANG SEN CIRCUIT
Malfunction detected condition
Possible cause
When a malfunction is detected in steering angle
sensor.
• Harness or connector
• Steering angle sensor
• Power steering control module
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “C1143” detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to STC-18, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492039
1.CHECK STEERING ANGLE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Check steering angle sensor circuit. Refer to BRC-77, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
2.CHECK TERMINALS AND HARNESS CONNECTORS
Check the power steering control module pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Power steering control module is malfunctioning. Replace power steering oil pump assembly.
Refer to ST-32, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
Revision: 2011 September
STC-18
2012 QUEST
C1601 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
C1601 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492040
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
B
Display item
C1601
BATTERY VOLT
Malfunction detected condition
Possible cause
When a power supply voltage to the power steering control module is maintained at 18.5 V or more
or at less than 8.5 V continuously for 0.5 seconds
or more.
• Harness or connector
• Power steering control module
• Fuse
• Battery power supply circuit
• Battery
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
C
D
E
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
F
STC
2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “C1601” detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to STC-19, "Diagnosis Procedure"
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
H
I
INFOID:0000000007492041
J
1.CHECK POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect power steering control module harness connector.
Check continuity between power steering control module harness connector terminal and ground.
Power steering control module
Connector
Terminal
E33
2
K
L
—
Continuity
Ground
Existed
M
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors, and repair or
replace error-detected parts.
N
2.CHECK POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (1)
1.
Check voltage between power steering control module harness connector terminals and ground.
Power steering control module
2.
3.
Connector
Terminal
E33
1
—
Voltage
(Approx.)
Ground
8.5 – 18.5 V
P
Turn ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
Check voltage between power steering control module harness connector terminals and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
STC-19
O
2012 QUEST
C1601 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Power steering control module
Connector
Terminal
E33
1
—
Voltage
(Approx.)
Ground
8.5 – 18.5 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (2)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check the 100A fusible link (#D).
Disconnect battery terminal with fusible link harness connector.
Check continuity and short between power steering control module harness connector terminal and battery terminal with fusible link harness connector terminal.
Power steering control module
5.
Battery terminal with fusible link
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
E33
1
E1
3
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between power steering control module harness connector terminal and ground.
Power steering control module
Connector
Terminal
E33
1
—
Continuity
Ground
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for battery power supply circuit. Refer to PG-11, "Wiring Diagram BATTERY POWER SUPPLY -".
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
4.CHECK POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (3)
1.
Check voltage between power steering control module harness connector terminals and ground.
Power steering control module
2.
3.
Connector
Terminal
E34
5
—
Voltage
(Approx.)
Ground
0V
Turn ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
Check voltage between power steering control module harness connector terminals and ground.
Power steering control module
Connector
Terminal
E34
5
—
Voltage
(Approx.)
Ground
8.5 – 18.5 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT (4)
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check the 10A fuse block (#3).
Check continuity and short between power steering control module harness connector terminal and fuse
block harness connector terminal.
Revision: 2011 September
STC-20
2012 QUEST
C1601 BATTERY POWER SUPPLY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Power steering control module
4.
Fuse block (J/B)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
E34
5
E103
4F
A
Continuity
Existed
B
Check continuity between power steering control module harness connector terminal and ground.
Power steering control module
Connector
Terminal
E34
5
—
Continuity
Ground
Not existed
C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for ignition power supply circuit. Refer to PG-29, "Wiring Diagram IGNITION POWER SUPPLY -".
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
D
E
6.CHECK TERMINALS AND HARNESS CONNECTORS
Check the power steering control module pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connec- F
tor.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Power steering control module is malfunctioning. Replace steering oil pump assembly. Refer to STC
ST-32, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
STC-21
2012 QUEST
C1606 EPS MOTOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
C1606 EPS MOTOR
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492042
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
Display item
C1606
EPS MOTOR
Malfunction detected condition
Possible cause
When the motor driver malfunction of power steering control module or power steering control module motor driver malfunction is detected.
• Harness or connector
• Power steering control motor
• Power steering control module
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “C1606” detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to STC-22, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492043
1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Erase self-diagnostic results for “EPS”.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for at least 10 seconds.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “EPS”.
Is DTC “C1606” detected?
YES >> Power steering motor is malfunctioning. Replace power steering oil pump assembly. Refer to ST32, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Check pin terminal and connection of each harness connector for malfunctioning conditions.
Revision: 2011 September
STC-22
2012 QUEST
C1607, C1608 POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
C1607, C1608 POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE
A
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492044
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
C1607
C1608
B
Display item
Malfunction detected condition
EEPROM
When the memory (EEPROM) system malfunction is
detected in power steering control module.
CONTROL UNIT
When the internal malfunction is detected in power
steering control module.
Possible cause
C
Power steering control module
D
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
E
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
F
>> GO TO 2.
2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE
STC
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “C1607” or “C1608” detected?
YES >> Proceed to diagnosis procedure. Refer to STC-23, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
H
I
INFOID:0000000007492045
1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
J
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Erase self-diagnostic results for “EPS”.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait for at least 10 seconds.
4. Perform self-diagnosis for “EPS”.
Is DTC “C1607” or “C1608” detected?
YES >> Power steering control module is malfunctioning. Replace power steering oil pump assembly.
Refer to ST-32, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Check pin terminal and connection of each harness connector for malfunctioning conditions.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
STC-23
2012 QUEST
C160A HEAT PROTECTION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
C160A HEAT PROTECTION
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492046
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
C160A
Display item
HEAT PROTECTION
Malfunction detected condition
Possible cause
When the steering wheel is operated excessively
and the interior temperature of the power steering
system reaches 118°C (244.4°F) or more. (Protection function)
NOTE:
Although the hydraulic pump electric power steering
system warning lamp turns ON, this is not a system
malfunction. The state returns to normal after stopping steering operation and waiting until the system
interior temperature drops to 90°C (194°F) or less.
The protection of the hydraulic
pump electric power steering system
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
>> GO TO 2.
2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “C160A” detected?
YES >> Go to STC-15, "Work Flow".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
STC-24
2012 QUEST
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
U1000 CAN COMM CIRCUIT
A
Description
INFOID:0000000007492047
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit shares information and links with other
control units during operation (not independent). In CAN communication, control units are connected with 2
communication lines (CAN-H line, CAN-L line) allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring.
Each control unit communicate data but selectively reads required data only.
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007492048
B
C
D
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
U1000
Display item
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
Malfunction detected condition
Power steering control module is not transmitting/receiving CAN communication signal for 2 seconds or
more.
Possible cause
CAN communication error
E
F
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PRECONDITIONING
STC
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and
wait at least 10 seconds before conducting the next test.
H
>> GO TO 2.
2.DTC REPRODUCTION PROCEDURE
I
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is DTC “U1000” detected?
YES >> Go to STC-25, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
J
K
INFOID:0000000007492049
L
Proceed to LAN-17, "Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart".
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
STC-25
2012 QUEST
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492050
1.CHECK THE ILLUMINATION OF THE HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING
LAMP
Check that the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp turns ON when ignition switch turns ON.
Then, hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp turns OFF after the engine is started.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis. Refer to STC-26, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492051
1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF to ON.
2. Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to STC-13, "DTC Index".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP SIGNAL
With CONSULT
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Select in “WARNING LAMP” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”.
Check that the item in “DATA MONITOR” is “On”.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
4. Start the engine.
CAUTION:
Never drive the vehicle.
5. Check that the item in “DATA MONITOR” is “Off”.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform the trouble diagnosis for combination meter power supply circuit. Refer to MWI-63,
"COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> GO TO 3.
1.
2.
3.
3.CHECK TERMINALS AND HARNESS CONNECTORS
Check the power steering control module pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Power steering control module is malfunctioning. Replace power steering oil pump assembly.
Refer to ST-32, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
Revision: 2011 September
STC-26
2012 QUEST
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP DOES
NOT TURN ON
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
A
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP
DOES NOT TURN ON
Description
B
INFOID:0000000007492052
The hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp does not illuminate when the ignition switch is
turned ON (lamp check).
Diagnosis Procedure
C
INFOID:0000000007492053
D
1.CHECK THE HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP
Perform trouble diagnosis for the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp system. Refer to STC26, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check that the pin terminals and the connection of each connector are normal.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
E
F
STC
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
STC-27
2012 QUEST
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP DOES
NOT TURN OFF
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP
DOES NOT TURN OFF
Description
INFOID:0000000007492054
Hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp does not turn OFF several seconds after engine started
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492055
1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to STC-13, "DTC Index".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING LAMP
Perform the trouble diagnosis of hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp. Refer to STC-26,
"Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
3.POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Perform the trouble diagnosis of power steering control module power supply and ground. Refer to STC-19,
"Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check that the pin terminals and the connection of each connector are normal.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
Revision: 2011 September
STC-28
2012 QUEST
STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE IS HEAVY OR LIGHT
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE IS HEAVY OR LIGHT
Diagnosis Procedure
A
INFOID:0000000007492056
1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
B
With CONSULT
Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is a malfunctioning system displayed?
YES >> Check malfunctioning system. Refer to STC-13, "DTC Index".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
C
2.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (1)
D
With CONSULT
Start the engine.
CAUTION:
Never drive the vehicle.
2. Turn the steering wheel until it stops.
3. Select “MTR ASSIST” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”.
Is the display value “100%”?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
1.
E
F
STC
3.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (2)
With CONSULT
1. Select “C/U TEMP” and “C/U TEMP A” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”.
2. Stop the system until the DATA MONITOR display value drops to “90°C (194°F)” or less.
3. Check whether symptom continues.
Did symptom continue?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> This occurs because the protection function lowers the assist force. It is not a system malfunction.
INSPECTION END
H
I
J
4.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (3)
With CONSULT
1. Turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. (There is no steering force)
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”.
Is the display value “10.5 V” or more?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Check the battery power system. Refer to STC-19, "Diagnosis Procedure".
K
5.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (4)
M
L
With CONSULT
Select “ESTM VHCL SPD” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”.
Monitor item
Test condition
When stopped
ESTM VHCL SPD
N
Display value
O
0.00 km/h or mph
Approximately equal to the in-
While driving
dication on speedometer*
(Inside of ±10%)
P
*: This may not agree with the speedometer indication immediately after the ignition switch is turned ON. This
is not a malfunction.
Is the check result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Check the combination meter, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to MWI-35,
"CONSULT Function" and BRC-29, "CONSULT Function".
Revision: 2011 September
STC-29
2012 QUEST
STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE IS HEAVY OR LIGHT
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
6.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (5)
With CONSULT
Select “STR ANG SPD” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”.
Monitor item
STR ANG SPD
Test condition
Display value
The steering wheel is not
steered.
Approx. 0.0 deg/s
The steering wheel is steered.
Displays steering angle speed
(deg/s)
Is the check result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Check the steering angle sensor. Refer to STC-18, "Diagnosis Procedure".
7.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (6)
With CONSULT
Select “ENGINE STATUS” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”.
Is the display value “RUN”?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Check the ECM. Refer to EC-66, "CONSULT Function".
8.CHECK THE STEERING FORCE
Check the steering force. Refer to ST-5, "Inspection".
Is the check result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> It is possible that there is a mechanical malfunction. Check the steering system. Refer to ST-29,
"Inspection".
Revision: 2011 September
STC-30
2012 QUEST
UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE AND RETURN BETWEEN
RIGHT AND LEFT
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE AND RETURN BETWEEN RIGHT AND LEFT
Diagnosis Procedure
A
INFOID:0000000007492057
B
1.CHECK THE ILLUMINATION OF THE HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER STEERING WARNING
LAMP
Check the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp while engine is running.
Does the hydraulic pump electric power steering warning lamp turn OFF?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to STC-28, "Diagnosis Procedure".
C
D
2.CHECK WHEEL ALIGNMENT
E
Check the wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Adjustment of wheel alignment. Refer to FSU-6, "Adjustment".
F
3.CHECK STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE
Check the steering wheel turning force. Refer to ST-5, "Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Check the steering wheel turning force for mechanical malfunction. Refer to ST-29, "Inspection".
STC
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
STC-31
2012 QUEST
UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE (TORQUE VARIATION)
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE (TORQUE VARIATION)
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492058
1.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
Perform “EPS” self-diagnosis.
Is a malfunctioning system displayed?
YES >> Check malfunctioning system. Refer to STC-13, "DTC Index".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (1)
With CONSULT
Start the engine.
CAUTION:
Never drive the vehicle.
2. Turn the steering wheel until it stops.
3. Select “MTR ASSIST” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”.
Is the display value “100%”?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
1.
3.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (2)
With CONSULT
1. Select “C/U TEMP” and “C/U TEMP A” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”.
2. Stop the system until the DATA MONITOR display value drops to “90°C (194°F)” or less.
3. Check whether symptom continues.
Did symptom continue?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> This occurs because the protection function lowers the assist force. It is not a system malfunction.
INSPECTION END
4.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (3)
With CONSULT
1. Turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. (There is no steering force)
2. Select “BATTERY VOLT” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”.
Is the display value “10.5 V” or more?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Check the battery power system. Refer to STC-19, "Diagnosis Procedure".
5.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (4)
With CONSULT
Select in “ESTM VHCL SPD” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”.
Monitor item
Test condition
When stopped
ESTM VHCL SPD
Display value
0.00 km/h or mph
Approximately equal to the in-
While driving
dication on speedometer*
(Inside of ±10%)
*: This may not agree with the speedometer indication immediately after the ignition switch is turned ON. This
is not a malfunction.
Is the check result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
Revision: 2011 September
STC-32
2012 QUEST
UNBALANCE STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE (TORQUE VARIATION)
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
NO
>> Check the combination meter, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). Refer to MWI-35,
"CONSULT Function" and BRC-29, "CONSULT Function".
A
6.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (5)
With CONSULT
Select “STR ANG SPD” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”.
Monitor item
STR ANG SPD
B
Test condition
Display value
The steering wheel is not
steered.
Approx. 0.0 deg/s
The steering wheel is steered.
Displays steering angle speed
(deg/s)
C
D
Is the check result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Check the steering angle sensor. Refer to STC-18, "Diagnosis Procedure".
E
7.CHECK THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE SIGNAL (6)
F
With CONSULT
Select “ENGINE STATUS” in “DATA MONITOR” in “EPS”.
Is the display value “RUN”?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Check the ECM. Refer to EC-66, "CONSULT Function".
STC
8.CHECK STEERING COLUMN AND STEERING GEAR
H
Check the steering column assembly and steering gear assembly.
• Steering column assembly. Refer to ST-12, "Exploded View".
• Steering gear assembly. Refer to ST-19, "Exploded View".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
I
J
9.CHECK STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE
Check the steering wheel turning force. Refer to ST-5, "Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Check the steering wheel turning force for mechanical malfunction. Refer to ST-29, "Inspection".
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
STC-33
2012 QUEST
POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492059
CAUTION:
Disconnect battery negative terminal before starting operations.
Never remove power steering control module from steering oil pump assembly. When replacing power steering control module, replace steering oil pump assembly. Refer to ST-12, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
STC-34
2012 QUEST
ENGINE
SECTION
STR
STARTING SYSTEM
A
STR
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 2
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 10
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 2
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT ..................................... 10
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 2
Description ...............................................................10
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................10
PREPARATION ............................................ 3
PREPARATION ................................................... 3
F
G
S TERMINAL CIRCUIT ..................................... 11
Description ...............................................................11
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................11
Special Service Tools ................................................ 3
Commercial Service Tools ........................................ 3
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS .............................. 12
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 4
Symptom Table .......................................................12
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 4
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 13
H
I
STARTING SYSTEM ......................................... 12
J
Component Parts Location ........................................ 4
SYSTEM .............................................................. 5
System Description ................................................... 5
WIRING DIAGRAM ....................................... 6
STARTING SYSTEM ........................................... 6
Wiring Diagram ......................................................... 6
STARTER MOTOR ........................................... 13
Exploded View .........................................................13
Removal and Installation .........................................14
Inspection ................................................................15
K
L
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ............................................................ 17
BASIC INSPECTION .................................... 7
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 17
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ......... 7
Starter Motor ............................................................17
Work Flow ................................................................. 7
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
STR-1
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
INFOID:0000000007494668
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Revision: 2011 September
STR-2
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007494669
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
STR
C
Description
—
(J-44373 Model MCR620)
Starting/Charging System Tester
D
E
SEL403X
Tests starting and charging systems.
For operating instructions, refer to Technical
Service Bulletin.
F
G
Commercial Service Tools
INFOID:0000000007494670
Tool name
H
Description
I
Power tool
Loosening bolts, nuts and screws
J
K
PIIB1407E
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
STR-3
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007494671
JMBIA3732ZZ
A.
Engine room LH
No.
Component part
Description
1.
BCM
BCM controls the starter relay.
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location".
2.
IPDM E/R
CPU inside IPDM E/R controls the starter control relay.
Refer to PCS-4, "IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location".
4.
Starter motor
The starter motor plunger closes and the motor is supplied with battery
power, which in turn cranks the engine, when the “S” terminal is supplied with electric power.
TCM
TCM supplies power to the starter relay and starter control relay inside
IPDM E/R when the selector lever is shifted to the P or N position.
Refer to TM-10, "CVT CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location".
3.
Revision: 2011 September
STR-4
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
A
System Description
INFOID:0000000007494672
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
STR
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
JMBIA3733GB
OUTLINE
J
• TCM transmits shift position signal to BCM and IPDM E/R, when selector lever is in the P or N position.
• IPDM E/R supplies power supply to starter relay and starter control relay, when shift position signal is
received.
• When starter operating condition is satisfied, IPDM E/R turns starter control relay ON by starter control relay
control signal.
• When engine cranking condition is satisfied, BCM turns starter relay ON by starter control relay control signal.
• Then battery power is supplied to starter motor (“S” terminal) through starter control relay and starter relay.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
STR-5
2012 QUEST
STARTING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
STARTING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007494673
JCBWA2061GB
Revision: 2011 September
STR-6
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000007494674
STR
OVERALL SEQUENCE
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
JSBIA0001GB
DETAILED FLOW
Revision: 2011 September
STR-7
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
NOTE:
To ensure a complete and thorough diagnosis, the battery, starter motor and alternator test segments must be
done as a set from start to finish.
1.DIAGNOSIS WITH STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEM TESTER
Perform the starting system test with Starting/Charging System Tester (SST: J-44373). For details and operating instructions, refer to Technical Service Bulletin.
Test result
CRANKING VOLTAGE NORMAL>>GO TO 2.
CRANKING VOLTAGE LOW>>GO TO 5.
CHARGE BATTERY>>Perform the slow battery charging procedure. (Initial rate of charge is 10A for 12
hours.) Perform battery test again. Refer to Technical Service Bulletin.
REPLACE BATTERY>>Before replacing battery, clean the battery cable clamps and battery posts. Perform
battery test again. Refer to Technical Service Bulletin. If second test result is “REPLACE BATTERY”, then do so. Perform battery test again to confirm repair.
2.CRANKING CHECK
Check that the starter motor operates correctly.
Does the engine crank normally?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
3.ENGINE START CHECK
Check that the engine starts.
Does the engine start?
YES >> Starter motor is OK. INSPECTION END
NO
>> Starter motor is OK. Perform further diagnosis of engine mechanical or engine control system.
Refer EM and EC sections. Once resolved, perform battery test again.
4.STARTER MOTOR ACTIVATION
Check that the starter motor operates.
Does the starter motor turn?
YES >> Check ring gear and starter motor drive pinion. Once resolved, perform battery test again.
NO
>> GO TO 7.
5.COMPARISON BETWEEN ENGINE COOLANT AND CRANKING VOLTAGE
Compare the engine coolant temperature and the cranking voltage with the specifications.
Minimum Specification of Cranking Voltage Referencing Coolant Temperature
Engine coolant temperature [°C (°F)]
Voltage [V]
−30 to −20 (−22 to −4)
8.6
−19 to −10 (−2 to 14)
9.1
−9 to 0 (16 to 32)
9.5
More than 1 (More than 34)
9.9
Is the voltage less than the specified value?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> GO TO 6.
6.STARTER OPERATION
Check the starter operation status.
Does the starter motor turn smoothly?
YES >> Starter motor is OK. INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 7.
7.“B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check “B” terminal circuit. Refer to STR-10, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is “B” terminal circuit normal?
Revision: 2011 September
STR-8
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Repair as needed.
A
8.“S” CONNECTOR CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Check “S” connector circuit. Refer to STR-11, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is “S” connector circuit normal?
YES >> GO TO 9.
NO
>> Repair as needed.
STR
C
9.ENGINE ROTATION STATUS
Check that the engine can be rotated by hand.
Does the engine turn freely by hand?
YES >> Replace starter motor.
NO
>> Perform further diagnosis of engine mechanical or powertrain mechanism. Refer to EM, TM or CL
sections. Once resolved, perform battery test again. Refer to Technical Service Bulletin.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
STR-9
2012 QUEST
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
B TERMINAL CIRCUIT
Description
INFOID:0000000007494675
The “B” terminal is constantly supplied with battery power.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007494676
CAUTION:
Perform diagnosis under the condition that engine cannot start by the following procedure.
1. Remove fuel pump fuse.
2. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released.
1.CHECK “B” TERMINAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Check that starter motor “B” terminal connection is clean and tight.
Check voltage between starter motor “B” terminal and ground.
Terminals
(+)
Starter motor “B” terminal
Terminal
F10
2
Voltage (Approx.)
(–)
Ground
Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Check harness between battery and starter motor for open circuit.
2.CHECK BATTERY CABLE CONNECTION STATUS (VOLTAGE DROP TEST)
1.
2.
Shift selector lever to “P” or “N” position.
Check voltage between battery positive terminal and starter motor “B” terminal.
Terminals
(–)
(+)
Starter motor
“B” terminal
Terminal
Battery positive terminal
F10
2
Condition
Voltage (Approx.)
When the ignition switch
is in START position
Less than
0.5 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check harness between the battery and the starter motor for poor continuity.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT STATUS (VOLTAGE DROP TEST)
1.
2.
Shift selector lever to “P” or “N” position.
Check voltage between starter motor case and battery negative terminal.
Terminals
(+)
(–)
Starter motor case
Battery negative terminal
Condition
Voltage (Approx.)
When the ignition switch is in
START position
Less than 0.2 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> “B” terminal circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to STR-7, "Work Flow".
NO
>> Check the starter motor case and ground for poor continuity.
Revision: 2011 September
STR-10
2012 QUEST
S TERMINAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
S TERMINAL CIRCUIT
A
Description
INFOID:0000000007494677
The starter motor magnetic switch is supplied with power when the ignition switch is turned to the START posi- STR
tion while the selector lever is in the P or N position.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007494678
C
CAUTION:
Perform diagnosis under the condition that engine cannot start by the following procedure.
1. Remove fuel pump fuse.
2. Crank or start the engine (where possible) until the fuel pressure is released.
D
1.CHECK “S” TERMINAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect starter motor connector.
Shift selector lever to “P” or “N” position.
Check voltage between starter motor harness connector and ground.
E
F
Terminals
(+)
Starter motor harness connector
Terminal
F47
1
Condition
Voltage (Approx.)
G
When the ignition switch is in
START position
Battery voltage
H
(–)
Ground
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> “S” terminal circuit is OK. Further inspection is necessary. Refer to STR-7, "Work Flow".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
I
2.CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
1.
2.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between starter motor harness connector and IPDM E/R harness connector.
Starter motor harness connector
IPDM E/R harness connector
Connector No.
Terminal No.
Connector No.
Terminal No.
F47
1
F12
80
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Further inspection is necessary. Refer to STR-7, "Work Flow".
NO
>> Repair the harness.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
STR-11
2012 QUEST
STARTING SYSTEM
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
STARTING SYSTEM
Symptom Table
INFOID:0000000007494679
Symptom
No normal cranking
Starter motor does not rotate
Revision: 2011 September
Reference
Refer to STR-7, "Work Flow".
STR-12
2012 QUEST
STARTER MOTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
STARTER MOTOR
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007494680
STR
REMOVAL
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
JMBIA3731GB
1.
Converter housing
2.
Starter motor mounting bolt
3.
“B” terminal harness
4.
“B” terminal harness nut
5.
“S” terminal harness connector
6.
Starter motor
K
: Vehicle front
L
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
M
DISASSEMBLY
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
STR-13
2012 QUEST
STARTER MOTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Type: M000TA0072
JPBIA1777GB
1.
Magnetic switch assembly
2.
Dust cover kit
3.
Gear case assembly
4.
Pinion assembly
5.
Stopper
6.
Ring
7.
Ring
8.
Stopper
9.
Yoke assembly
10. Armature assembly
11. Brush holder assembly
12. Metal
13. Rear cover
14. Gear assembly
15. Shift lever set
16. Clutch gear assembly
17. Center bracket
18. Packing
19. Gear shaft
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
NOTE:
Apply high-temperature grease to lubricate the bearing, gears and frictional surface when assembling the
starter.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007494681
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove battery. Refer to PG-126, "Removal and Installation".
Remove air duct (inlet) and air cleaner assembly. Refer to EM-26, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect TCM harness connector (1) and ECM harness connectors (2).
: Vehicle front
JMBIA3032ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
STR-14
2012 QUEST
STARTER MOTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Remove harness fixing clips (A) and harness mounting bolt (B).
A
: Vehicle front
STR
C
JMBIA3033ZZ
5.
D
Remove ECM bracket mounting bolts (A), and then remove
ECM bracket (1).
E
: Vehicle front
F
G
JMBIA3034ZZ
6.
Remove battery tray mounting bolts (A), and then remove battery tray (1).
H
: Vehicle front
I
J
JMBIA3035ZZ
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
K
Disconnect “S” terminal harness connector
Remove “B” terminal harness nut, and then diconnect “B” terminal harness.
Remove splash guard LH. Refer to EXT-22, "Removal and Installation".
Remove starter motor mounting bolts form the left side of the vehicle and the engine room.
Remove starter motor form the vehicle
L
M
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Be careful to tighten “B” terminal nut to the specified torque.
• To prevent damage to the parts, connect the battery cable to the positive terminal first.
• To prevent damage to the vehicle, after connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly
clamped to battery terminals for good contact.
• To prevent damage to the parts, check battery terminal for poor connection caused by corrosion.
NOTE:
Reset electronic systems as necessary. Refer to GI-53, "ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REMOVING BATTERY NEGATIVE TERMINAL : Required Procedure After Battery Disconnection".
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007494682
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Pinion/Clutch Check
1.
Inspect pinion teeth.
Revision: 2011 September
STR-15
2012 QUEST
N
O
P
STARTER MOTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Replace pinion if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also check condition of ring gear teeth.)
2. Inspect reduction gear teeth.
• Replace reduction gear if teeth are worn or damaged. (Also check condition of armature shaft gear
teeth.)
3. Check to see if pinion locks in one direction and rotates smoothly in the opposite direction.
• If it locks or rotates in both directions, or unusual resistance is evident, replace.
Revision: 2011 September
STR-16
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Starter Motor
INFOID:0000000007494683
M000TA0072
Type
STR
C
MITSUBISHI make
Reduction gear type
System voltage
No-load
[V]
12
Terminal voltage
[V]
11
Current
[A]
Less than 90
Revolution
[rpm]
[mm (in)]
28.0 (1.102)
Minimum length of brush
[mm (in)]
5.5 (0.217)
[N (kg, lb)]
E
More than 2,400
Minimum diameter of commutator
Brush spring tension
D
F
15.0 - 20.4 (1.53 - 2.08, 3.37 - 4.59)
Clearance between bearing metal and armature shaft
[mm (in)]
Less than 0.2 (0.008)
Clearance between pinion front edge and pinion stopper
[mm (in)]
0.5 - 2.0 (0.020 - 0.079)
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
STR-17
2012 QUEST
VENTILATION, HEATER & AIR CONDITIONER
SECTION
VTL
VENTILATION SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
PREPARATION ............................................ 4
PREPARATION ................................................... 4
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 5
VENTILATION SYSTEM ..................................... 5
VENTILATION SYSTEM (FRONT AIR CONDITIONING) ..................................................................... 5
VENTILATION SYSTEM (FRONT AIR CONDITIONING) : System Description ................................ 5
VENTILATION SYSTEM (REAR AIR CONDITIONING) .............................................................................. 6
VENTILATION SYSTEM (REAR AIR CONDITIONING) : System Description ................................ 6
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ................ 7
DUCT AND GRILLE ............................................ 7
Exploded View .......................................................... 7
CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE ................................ 8
CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and
Installation ................................................................. 8
SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE ....................................... 9
SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation .................................................................... 9
SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE ....................................... 9
SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE : Removal and Installation .................................................................... 9
Revision: 2011 September
CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT ................................... 9
CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installation ................................................................... 9
FRONT DEFROSTER NOZZLE .................................10
FRONT DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation ..................................................................10
F
G
H
SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE .....................................10
SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation ..................................................................10
VTL
FRONT FLOOR DUCT 1 ............................................11
FRONT FLOOR DUCT 1 : Removal and Installation ...........................................................................11
J
FRONT FLOOR DUCT 2 ............................................11
FRONT FLOOR DUCT 2 : Removal and Installation ...........................................................................11
K
FOOT DUCT ...............................................................11
FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation .................11
L
REAR VENTILATOR GRILLE ...................................12
REAR VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation ..................................................................12
M
REAR FOOT DUCT ...................................................12
REAR FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation ......12
REAR VENTILATOR DUCT ......................................13
REAR VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installation ........................................................................13
N
O
BLOWER UNIT ................................................. 15
Exploded View .........................................................15
Removal and Installation .........................................16
BLOWER MOTOR ............................................ 17
Exploded View .........................................................17
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR ........................................17
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR : Removal and Installation ........................................................................17
VTL-1
2012 QUEST
P
REAR BLOWER MOTOR ......................................... 17
REAR BLOWER MOTOR : Removal and Installation .......................................................................... 17
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) .......................................................... 19
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER .................................. 18
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 19
Exploded View ........................................................ 18
Removal and Installation ........................................ 18
Replacement .......................................................... 18
Revision: 2011 September
In-cabin microfilter ................................................... 19
VTL-2
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000007797663
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
C
D
E
F
G
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
VTL
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing J
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
VTL-3
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000007491429
Tool name
Description
Remover tool
Removes clips, pawls and metal clips
JMKIA3050ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
VTL-4
2012 QUEST
VENTILATION SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A
VENTILATION SYSTEM
VENTILATION SYSTEM (FRONT AIR CONDITIONING)
B
VENTILATION SYSTEM (FRONT AIR CONDITIONING) : System Description
INFOID:0000000007491430
C
OUTLINE
Ventilation system is controlled by A/C auto amp. (AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING) or A/C amp. (MANUAL
AIR CONDITIONING). For details of air conditioning system, refer to HAC-16, "FRONT AUTOMATIC AIR
CONDITIONING SYSTEM : System Description" (AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING) or HAC-153, "FRONT
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM : System Description" (MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING).
D
AIR FLOW
E
Front
F
G
H
VTL
J
JMIIA1796ZZ
K
Rear (Second seat underfoot portion)
L
M
N
JMIIA0959ZZ
×: Applicable
Air outret
MODE/DEF position
indication
Revision: 2011 September
Ventilator (1)
Foot
Front (2)
Rear (3)
Defroster (4)
Center
Side
×
×
×
×
×
×
—
—
×
×
×
×
—
×
×
×
×
—
×
—
—
VTL-5
O
P
—
×
2012 QUEST
VENTILATION SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
VENTILATION SYSTEM (REAR AIR CONDITIONING)
VENTILATION SYSTEM (REAR AIR CONDITIONING) : System Description
INFOID:0000000007491431
OUTLINE
Ventilation system is controlled by A/C auto amp. (AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING) or A/C amp. (MANUAL
AIR CONDITIONING). For details of air conditioning system, refer to HAC-26, "REAR AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM : System Description" (AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING) or HAC-158, "REAR MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM : System Description" (MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING).
AIR FLOW
Headlining
JMIIA0960ZZ
Rear (Third seat underfoot portion)
JMIIA1797ZZ
×: Applicable
Air outlet
Mode position
Revision: 2011 September
VTL-6
Ventilator (1)
Foot (2)
×
—
×
×
—
×
2012 QUEST
DUCT AND GRILLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
DUCT AND GRILLE
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007491432
B
FRONT
C
D
E
F
G
H
VTL
J
K
L
M
N
JMIIA1798ZZ
O
1.
Instrument upper garnish
2.
Sunload sensor
3.
Instrument panel center bracket
4.
Front defroster nozzle
5.
Instrument panel bracket LH
6.
Side defroster nozzle LH
7.
Center ventilator duct
8.
Ionizer
9.
Ionizer bracket
10. Front pillar lower garnish LH
11. Instrument panel
12. Side defroster grille LH
13. Side ventilator grille LH
14. Center ventilator grille LH
15. Cluster lid D
16. Center ventilator grille RH
17. Side ventilator grille RH
18. Front floor duct 2 LH
19. Front floor duct 2 RH
20. Front floor duct 1 RH
21. Foot duct RH
22. Blower unit assembly
23. Intake duct
24. Clip
25. Heater & cooling unit assembly
26. Front floor duct 1 LH
27. Foot duct LH
Revision: 2011 September
VTL-7
P
2012 QUEST
DUCT AND GRILLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
28. Side defroster grille RH
29. Front pillar lower garnish RH
30. Side defroster nozzle RH
31. Instrument panel bracket RH
: Pawl
: Metal clip
REAR
JMIIA1799ZZ
1.
Rear ventilator grille 1 LH
2.
Rear upper ventilator duct 1
3.
Rear ventilator grille 2 LH
4.
Rear foot duct 1
5.
Rear A/C unit assembly
6.
Rear ventilator pillar duct
7.
Rear upper ventilator duct 3
8.
Rear upper ventilator duct 2
9.
Rear ventilator grille 2 RH
10. Rear ventilator grille 1 RH
: Clip
CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE
CENTER VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491433
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove cluster lid D. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Disengage fixing pawls, and then remove center ventilator grille.
INSTALLATION
Revision: 2011 September
VTL-8
2012 QUEST
DUCT AND GRILLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Install in the reverse order of removal.
SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE
A
SIDE VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491434
B
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove fixing screw (passenger side only).
Disengage fixing pawls and metal clips, and then remove side ventilator grille.
C
INSTALLATION
D
Install in the reverse order of removal.
SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE
SIDE DEFROSTER GRILLE : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491435
E
REMOVAL
F
Disengage fixig pawl using a remover tool (A), and then remove side
defroster grille.
CAUTION:
Apply protective tape (B) on the part to protect it from damage.
G
: Pawl
H
JMIIA1155ZZ
VTL
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
J
CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT
CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491436
K
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove fixing screws, and then remove center ventilator duct.
L
M
N
O
P
JMIIA1800ZZ
: Screw
INSTALLATION
Revision: 2011 September
VTL-9
2012 QUEST
DUCT AND GRILLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Install in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT DEFROSTER NOZZLE
FRONT DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491437
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove center ventilator duct. Refer to VTL-9, "CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installation".
Remove side defroster nozzle LH and RH. Refer to VTL-10, "SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Removal and
Installation".
Remove fixing screw (A), and then remove instrument panel
center bracket (1).
Remove fixing screws (B), and then remove front defroster nozzle (2).
JMIIA1801ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE
SIDE DEFROSTER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491438
REMOVAL
Driver Side
1.
2.
3.
Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove fixing screws (A), and then remove instrument panel
bracket LH (1).
Remove fixing screw (B), and then remove side defroster nozzle
LH (2).
JMIIA1802ZZ
Passenger Side
1.
2.
3.
Remove instrument panel assembly. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove fixing screws (A), and then remove instrument panel
bracket RH (1).
Remove fixing screw (B), and then remove side defroster nozzle
RH (2).
JMIIA1803ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
VTL-10
2012 QUEST
DUCT AND GRILLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
A
FRONT FLOOR DUCT 1
FRONT FLOOR DUCT 1 : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491439
B
REMOVAL
C
Driver Side
1.
2.
Remove instrument lower cover LH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove front floor duct 1 LH.
D
Passenger Side
1.
2.
Remove instrument lower cover RH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Remove harness fixing clip (A), and then remove front floor duct
1 RH.
E
F
G
JMIIA1804ZZ
H
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
VTL
FRONT FLOOR DUCT 2
FRONT FLOOR DUCT 2 : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491440
J
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Pull up front of front floor carpet to secure work space. Refer to INT-29, "FRONT FLOOR CARPET :
Removal and Installation".
Remove front floor spacer. Refer to INT-29, "Exploded View".
Remove fixing screws (A) and harness clips (B), and then
remove front floor duct 2.
K
L
M
N
JMIIA1160ZZ
O
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
FOOT DUCT
P
FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491441
REMOVAL
Driver Side
1.
Remove instrument lower cover LH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
VTL-11
2012 QUEST
DUCT AND GRILLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Remove fixing screws (A), and then remove foot duct LH (1) and
aspirator (2) from heater & cooling unit assembly as a set.
JMIIA1805ZZ
Passenger Side
1.
2.
Remove heater & cooling unit assembly. Refer to HA-48, "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY :
Removal and Installation".
Remove fixing screws (A), and then remove foot duct RH from
heater & cooling unit assembly.
JMIIA1806ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
REAR VENTILATOR GRILLE
REAR VENTILATOR GRILLE : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491442
REMOVAL
Disengage fixing metal clips using a remover tool (A), and then
remove rear ventilator grille.
: Metal clip
JMIIA1185ZZ
INSTALLATION
Install in reverse order of removal.
REAR FOOT DUCT
REAR FOOT DUCT : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491443
REMOVAL
1.
Remove luggage side lower finisher RH. Refer to INT-42, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
VTL-12
2012 QUEST
DUCT AND GRILLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Remove fixing clips (A), and then remove rear foot duct 1.
A
B
C
JMIIA1861ZZ
D
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
REAR VENTILATOR DUCT
E
REAR VENTILATOR DUCT : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491444
F
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove back pillar garnish RH. Refer to INT-26, "BACK PILLAR GARNISH : Removal and Installation".
Remove mounting bolts (A), and then remove rear ventilator pillar duct.
G
H
VTL
JMIIA1807ZZ
3.
4.
5.
Remove headlining. Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation".
Remove mounting bolt (A).
Slide the right side of rear upper ventilator duct 2 as shown in the figure, disengage rear upper ventilator
duct 3, and then remove rear upper ventilator duct 2.
J
K
L
M
N
JMIIA1167ZZ
6.
7.
Remove rear sunroof stay (sunroof models only). Refer to RF-54, "REAR SUNROOF : Exploded View".
Remove cartain air bag mounting bolts. Refer to SR-20, "Exploded View".
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
VTL-13
2012 QUEST
DUCT AND GRILLE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
8. Remove mounting bolts (A), and then remove fixing clips.
: Clip
JMIIA1168ZZ
9.
Remove rear upper ventilator duct 3.
10. Remove mounting bolts (A), and then remove fixing clips.
: Clip
JMIIA1169ZZ
11. Remove rear upper ventilator duct 1.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
VTL-14
2012 QUEST
BLOWER UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
BLOWER UNIT
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007491445
REMOVAL
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
VTL
JMIIA1808GB
1.
Steering member
2.
Knee protector
3.
Instrument stay LH
4.
Instrument stay RH
5.
Drain hose
6.
Blower unit assembly
7.
Heater & cooling unit assembly
J
K
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
L
DISASSEMBLY
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
VTL-15
2012 QUEST
BLOWER UNIT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
JMIIA1809ZZ
1.
Intake duct case
2.
Intake shutter case
3.
Intake door
4.
Intake upper case
5.
Intake lower case
6.
Intake door motor
7.
Blower motor
8.
Outlet seal
9.
Intake seal
: Vehicle front
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491446
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove front A/C unit assembly. Refer to HA-48, "HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY : Removal
and Installation".
Remove fixing screw, and then separate blower unit assembly and heater & cooling unit assembly.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
VTL-16
2012 QUEST
BLOWER MOTOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
BLOWER MOTOR
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007491447
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
B
Refer to VTL-15, "Exploded View".
REAR BLOWER MOTOR
C
Refer to HA-55, "Exploded View".
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR
FRONT BLOWER MOTOR : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491448
D
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
E
Remove instrument lower panel RH. Refer to IP-13, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect harness connector (A).
Remove fixing screws (B), and then remove front blower motor.
F
: Vehicle front
G
H
JMIIA1810ZZ
INSTALLATION
VTL
Install in the reverse order of removal.
REAR BLOWER MOTOR
REAR BLOWER MOTOR : Removal and Installation
J
INFOID:0000000007491449
REMOVAL
1.
2.
K
Removal rear A/C unit assembly. Refer to HA-56, "REAR A/C UNIT ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
Remove fixing screws (A), and then disconnect harness connector (B).
L
M
N
JMIIA1164ZZ
3.
O
Remove rear blower motor.
P
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
VTL-17
2012 QUEST
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007491450
Refer to HA-46, "Exploded View".
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007491451
REMOVAL
1. Remove filter cover.
2. Compress in-cabin microfilter while sliding it towards vehicle right side.
3. Remove in-cabin microfilter from heater & cooling unit assembly.
CAUTION:
If the filter is deformed/damaged when removing, replace it with a new one. Deformed/damaged filter
may deteriorate the dust collecting performance.
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
When installing, handle the filter with extreme care to avoid deforming/damaging.
Replacement
INFOID:0000000007491452
Replace in-cabin microfilter.
Refer to VTL-19, "In-cabin microfilter".
Revision: 2011 September
VTL-18
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
In-cabin microfilter
INFOID:0000000007491453
Replacement interval
MA-6, "Schedule 1" and MA-8, "Schedule 2".
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
VTL
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
VTL-19
2012 QUEST
DRIVER INFORMATION & MULTIMEDIA
SECTION
WCS
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
COMMON ITEM .........................................................18
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) .....................................................18
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
BUZZER .....................................................................19
BUZZER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BUZZER)....20
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 4
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 21
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 4
COMBINATION METER ................................... 21
Component Parts Location ........................................ 4
Combination Meter .................................................... 4
SYSTEM .............................................................. 5
BCM ................................................................... 30
J
LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME ....................... 8
LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : System
Description ................................................................ 8
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 32
List of ECU Reference .............................................30
Wiring Diagram ........................................................31
Work Flow ................................................................32
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME ................................ 10
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME : System Description .......................................................................... 10
COMBINATION METER ............................................34
COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure ....34
Revision: 2011 September
L
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW ........ 32
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 34
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................18
K
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM ............................. 31
FRONT FOG LIGHT REMINDER WARNING
CHIME .......................................................................... 9
FRONT FOG LIGHT REMINDER WARNING
CHIME : System Description ..................................... 9
CONSULT Function ................................................ 14
H
I
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 31
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION
METER) ..............................................................14
G
Reference Value ......................................................21
Fail-Safe ..................................................................28
DTC Index ...............................................................29
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM ....................................... 5
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Description
...... 5
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram ......... 7
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : Fail-Safe ................... 7
PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CHIME .... 11
PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CHIME
: System Description ............................................... 11
F
M
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 34 WCS
O
METER BUZZER CIRCUIT ............................... 35
Component Function Check ....................................35
Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................35
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT .................................................................. 36
Component Function Check ..................................36
Diagnosis Procedure ..............................................36
Component Inspection .............................................37
WCS-1
2012 QUEST
P
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................................................................... 38
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 38
Component Inspection ............................................ 38
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 39
THE LIGHT REMINDER WARNING DOES
NOT SOUND ...................................................... 39
Description .............................................................. 39
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 39
Revision: 2011 September
THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING
CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR DOES NOT
SOUND .............................................................. 40
Description .............................................................. 40
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 40
THE SEAT BELT WARNING CONTINUES
SOUNDING, OR DOES NOT SOUND ............... 41
Description .............................................................. 41
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 41
WCS-2
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000007495725
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
C
D
E
F
G
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
I
J
K
L
M
WCS
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-3
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007495726
JSNIA4337ZZ
Component
Function
1.
ABS actuator and electric
unit (control unit)
Transmits the vehicle speed signal to the combination meter via CAN communication.
Refer to BRC-8, "Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
2.
Parking brake switch
Transmits the parking brake switch signal to the combination meter.
BCM
Based on the signals received from various units and switches, transmits the buzzer output signal
to the combination meter via CAN communication.
Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation
location.
4.
Combination meter
• Receives a buzzer output signal from the BCM with CAN communication line and sounds the
buzzer.
• Judges whether the parking brake is released from the vehicle speed signal received from the
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) with CAN communication line and the parking brake
switch signal from the parking brake switch, and sounds the buzzer if necessary.
5.
Seat belt buckle switch
(driver side)
Transmits the seat belt buckle switch signal (driver side) to the combination meter.
3.
Combination Meter
INFOID:0000000007495727
The buzzer (1) for the warning chime system is integrated in the
combination meter.
JSNIA3387ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-4
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
A
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007495728
B
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C
D
E
F
JSNIA3116GB
G
COMBINATION METER INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL (CAN COMMUNICATION SIGNAL)
H
Input signal
Signal name
Transmit unit
Vehicle speed signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Buzzer output signal
BCM
I
J
Output signal
Signal name
Vehicle speed signal
Reception unit
K
BCM
BCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL (CAN COMMUNICATION SIGNAL)
L
Input signal
Signal name
Vehicle speed signal
Transmit unit
M
Combination meter
Output signal
WCS
Signal name
Buzzer output signal
Reception unit
Combination meter
O
COMBINATION METER
The combination meter sounds the alarm buzzer installed in the combination meter when receiving the buzzer
output signal transmitted from each unit.
BCM
BCM receives signals from various units and transmits a buzzer output signal to the combination meter via
CAN communication if it judges that the warning buzzer should be activated.
WARNING CHIME FUNCTION LIST
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-5
2012 QUEST
P
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Warning functions
Out line
Light reminder warning chime
The warning chime sounds when the ignition
switch is in OFF or ACC position with the combination switch (lighting switch) in the 1st or
2nd position and the driver side door open.
Front fog light reminder warning chime
The warning chime sounds when the ignition
switch is turned to LOCK, OFF or ACC position from ON position, with combination switch
(lighting switch) is in AUTO position and the
front fog lamp switch in ON position.
Seat belt warning chime
Parking brake release warning chime
Revision: 2011 September
The warning chime sounds when the driver
seat belt is unfastened with the ignition switch
in ON position.
The warning chime sounds when the ignition
switch is in ON position with the parking brake
in operation and the vehicle speed 7 km/h (4.3
MPH) or more.
WCS-6
Warning judgment unit
Refer to
BCM
WCS-8,
"LIGHT REMINDER
WARNING
CHIME : System Description"
BCM
WCS-9,
"FRONT FOG
LIGHT REMINDER
WARNING
CHIME : System Description"
BCM
WCS-10,
"SEAT BELT
WARNING
CHIME : System Description"
Combination meter
WCS-11,
"PARKING
BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CHIME :
System Description"
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000007495729
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCS
O
JSNIA4223GB
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : Fail-Safe
INFOID:0000000007495730
The combination meter activates the fail-safe control if CAN communication with each unit is malfunctioning.
Function
Buzzer
Revision: 2011 September
Specifications
The buzzer turns OFF by suspending communication.
WCS-7
2012 QUEST
P
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME
LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : System Description
INFOID:0000000007495731
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSNIA2421GB
WARNING CHIME OPERATION CONDITIONS
If all of the following conditions are fulfilled.
Operation conditions
Ignition switch
OFF or ACC position
Combination switch (Lighting
switch)
1st or 2nd position
Driver side door
Open [front door switch (driver side) ON]
WARNING CHIME CANCEL CONDITIONS
Warning is canceled if any of the following conditions is fulfilled.
Operation conditions
Ignition switch
ON
Combination switch (Lighting
switch)
OFF or AUTO position
Driver side door
Close [front door switch (driver side) OFF]
SIGNAL PATH
1.
BCM requires warning chime output to combination meter when it judges light reminder warning chime is
necessary from signals below.
Signal name
Signal source
Ignition switch signal
—
Combination switch signal
Combination switch (Lighting switch)
Driver door switch signal
Front door switch (driver side)
2.
BCM
BCM
Combination meter sounds integrated buzzer, following the warning chime output requirement (below signal) from BCM.
Signal name
Buzzer output signal
Revision: 2011 September
Signal source
BCM
Combination meter
WCS-8
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
TIMING CHART
A
B
C
D
E
JSNIA2426GB
F
FRONT FOG LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME
FRONT FOG LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : System Description
INFOID:0000000007495732
G
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
H
I
J
JSNIA3117GB
K
WARNING CHIME OPERATION CONDITIONS
Warning chime sounds during 2 seconds when the ignition switch is in LOCK, OFF or ACC position, if all of
below operation conditions is met.
L
Operation conditions
Ignition switch
ON position
Combination switch (Lighting
switch)
AUTO position and front fog lamp switch ON
position
M
SIGNAL PATH
1.
WCS
BCM requires warning chime output to combination meter when it judges front fog light reminder warning
chime is necessary from signals below.
O
Signal name
Ignition switch signal
Combination switch signal
2.
Signal source
—
P
Combination switch (Lighting switch)
BCM
Combination meter sounds integrated buzzer, following the warning chime output requirement (below signal) from BCM.
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-9
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Signal name
Signal source
Buzzer output signal
BCM
Combination meter
TIMING CHART
JSNIA3110GB
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME : System Description
INFOID:0000000007495733
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSNIA3118GB
WARNING OPERATION CONDITIONS
If all of the following conditions are fulfilled.
Operation conditions
Ignition switch
ON
Driver seat belt
Unfastened [seat belt buckle switch (driver side) ON]
WARNING CANCEL CONDITIONS
Warning is canceled if any of the following conditions is fulfilled.
Operation conditions
Ignition switch
OFF
Seat belt (driver side)
Fastened (driver side seat belt buckle switch OFF)
6 seconds after the start of warning sound
SIGNAL PATH
1.
BCM requires warning chime output to combination meter when it judges seat belt warning chime is necessary from signals below.
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-10
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Signal name
Ignition switch signal
Seat belt buckle switch signal
(driver side)
A
Signal source
—
Seat belt buckle switch (driver side)
B
Combination meter
BCM
2.
Combination meter sounds integrated buzzer, following the warning chime output requirement (below signal) from BCM.
Signal name
Buzzer output signal
D
Signal source
BCM
C
Combination meter
E
TIMING CHART
F
G
H
I
JSNIA3123GB
J
SOUND SPECIFICATION
K
L
M
JSNIA3111GB
PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CHIME
PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CHIME : System Description
WCS
INFOID:0000000007495734
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
O
P
JSNIA2422GB
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-11
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
WARNING OPERATION CONDITIONS
If all of the following conditions are fulfilled.
Operation conditions
Ignition switch
ON
Parking brake
During the operation (parking brake switch ON)
Vehicle speed
Approximately 7 km/h (4.3 MPH) or more
WARNING CANCEL CONDITIONS
Warning is canceled if any of the following conditions are fulfilled.
Operation conditions
Ignition switch
OFF
Parking brake
Release condition (parking brake switch OFF)
Vehicle speed
Approximately 3 km/h (1.9 MPH) or less
SIGNAL PATH
Combination meter sounds integrated buzzer when it judges that parking brake release warning chime is necessary from signals below.
Signal name
Signal source
Ignition switch signal
—
Parking brake switch signal
Parking brake switch
Vehicle speed signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Combination meter
Combination meter
TIMING CHART
JSNIA2428GB
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-12
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SOUND SPECIFICATION
A
B
C
JSNIA3139GB
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCS
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-13
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
CONSULT Function
INFOID:0000000007616395
CONSULT APPLICATION ITEMS
CONSULT can perform the following diagnosis modes via CAN communication and the combination meter.
System
METER/M&A
Diagnosis mode
Description
Self Diagnostic Result
The combination meter checks the conditions and displays memorized errors.
Data Monitor
Displays the combination meter input/output data in real time.
W/L ON History
Lighting history of the warning lamp and indicator lamp can be checked.
SELF DIAG RESULT
Refer to MWI-48, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
Display Item List
X: Applicable
MAIN
SIGNALS
Description
SPEED METER
[km/h]
X
Value of vehicle speed signal received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit) via CAN communication.
NOTE:
655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received.
SPEED OUTPUT
[km/h]
X
Vehicle speed signal value transmitted to other units via CAN communication.
NOTE:
655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received.
Display item [Unit]
ODO OUTPUT
[km/h or mph]
Odometer signal value transmitted to other units via CAN communication.
TACHO METER
[rpm]
X
Value of the engine speed signal received from ECM via CAN communication.
NOTE:
8191.875 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received.
FUEL METER
[L]
X
Fuel level indicated on combination meter.
X
Value of engine coolant temperature signal is received from ECM via CAN communication.
NOTE:
215 is displayed when the malfunction signal is input.
W TEMP METER
[°C]
ABS W/L
[On/Off]
Status of ABS warning lamp detected from ABS warning lamp signal is received
from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
VDC/TCS IND
[On/Off]
Status of VDC OFF indicator lamp detected from VDC OFF indicator lamp signal
is received from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
SLIP IND
[On/Off]
Status of VDC warning lamp detected from VDC warning lamp signal received
from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
BRAKE W/L
[On/Off]
Status of brake warning lamp detected from brake warning lamp signal is received
from ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) via CAN communication.
NOTE:
Displays “Off” if the brake warning lamp is illuminated when the valve check starts,
the parking brake switch is turned ON or the brake fluid level switch is turned ON.
DOOR W/L
[On/Off]
Status of door open warning detected from door switch signal received from BCM
via CAN communication.
HI-BEAM IND
[On/Off]
Status of high beam indicator lamp detected from high beam request signal is received from BCM via CAN communication.
TURN IND
[On/Off]
Status of turn indicator lamp detected from turn indicator signal is received from
BCM via CAN communication.
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-14
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Display item [Unit]
MAIN
SIGNALS
Description
A
LIGHT IND
[On/Off]
• Status of light indicator lamp detected from dimmer signal is received from BCM
via CAN communication. (For U.S.A)
• Status of light indicator lamp detected from position light request signal is received from BCM via CAN communication. (For Canada)
OIL W/L
[On/Off]
Status of oil pressure warning lamp detected from oil pressure switch signal is received from BCM via CAN communication.
MIL
[On/Off]
Status of malfunction indicator lamp detected from malfunctioning indicator lamp
signal is received from ECM via CAN communication.
CRUISE IND
[On/Off]
Status of CRUISE indicator detected from ASCD status signal is received from
ECM via CAN communication.
SET IND
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
CRUISE W/L
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
BA W/L
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
O/D OFF IND
[On/Off]
Status of O/D OFF indicator detected from O/D OFF indicator signal is received
from CVT shift selector.
4WD W/L
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
4WD LOCK IND
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
FUEL W/L
[On/Off]
Low fuel warning status detected by the identified fuel level.
WASHER W/L
[On/Off]
Status of low washer fluid warning judged from washer level switch input to combination meter.
AIR PRES W/L
[On/Off]
Status of low tire pressure warning lamp judged from TPMS malfunction warning
lamp signal received from BCM with CAN communication line.
KEY G/Y W/L
[On/Off]
Status of Intelligent Key system malfunction detected from Intelligent Key warning
display signal is received from BCM via CAN communication.
EPS W/L
[On/Off]
Status of EPS warning lamp judged from EPS warning lamp signal received from
EPS control unit with CAN communication line.
AFS OFF IND
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
ECO MODE IND
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
LCD
[B&P N, B&P I, ID NG, ROTAT, SFT
P, INSRT, BATT, NO KY, OUTKY, LK
WN, KY>PSW, Off]
Displays status of Intelligent Key system warning judged from meter display signal
received from BCM with CAN communication line.
ACC TARGET
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
ACC DISTANCE
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
ACC OWN VHL
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
ACC SET SPEED
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
ACC UNIT
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
SHIFT IND
[P, R, N, D, L]
Status of shift position indicator judged from shift position signal received from
TCM with CAN communication line.
Revision: 2011 September
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCS
O
P
WCS-15
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Display item [Unit]
MAIN
SIGNALS
Description
BSW IND
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
BSW W/L
[On/Off]
Status of BSW warning lamp judged from BSW warning lamp signal received from
BSW control module with CAN communication line.
FUEL CAP W/L
[On/Off]
Status of fuel filler cap warning detected from fuel filler cap warning display signal
is received from ECM via CAN communication.
O/D OFF SW
[On/Off]
Status of overdrive control switch.
M RANGE SW
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
NM RANGE SW
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
AT SFT UP SW
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
AT SFT DWN SW
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
COMP F/B SIG
[On/Off]
A/C compressor activation condition that ECM judges according to the water temperature and the acceleration degree.
PKB SW
[On/Off]
Status of parking brake switch.
BUCKLE SW
[On/Off]
Status of seat belt buckle switch (driver side).
BRAKE OIL SW
[On/Off]
Status of brake fluid level switch.
A/C AMP CONN
[On/Off]
Status of A/C auto amp. connection recognition signal.
ENTER SW
[On/Off]
Status of
(ENTER) switch.
SELECT SW
[On/Off]
Status of
(SELECT) switch.
ECO MODE SW
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
DISTANCE
[km]
Value of distance to empty calculated by combination meter.
OUTSIDE TEMP
[°C or °F]
Ambient temperature value converted from ambient sensor signal received from
ambient sensor.
NOTE:
This may not match with the temperature value indicated on the information display. (Because the information display value is a corrected value from the ambient
sensor input value.)
FUEL LOW SIG
[On/Off]
Status of fuel level low warning signal to output to AV control unit via CAN communication.
BUZZER
[On/Off]
X
Buzzer status (in the combination meter) is detected from the buzzer output signal
received from each unit via CAN communication and the warning output condition
of the combination meter.
TPMS PRESS L
[On/Off]
Status of low tire pressure warning judged from low tire pressure warning lamp
signal received from BCM with CAN communication line.
4WD AUTO IND
[Off]
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
NOTE:
Some items are not available according to vehicle specification.
W/L ON HISTORY
• Stores histories when warning/indicator lamp is turned on.
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-16
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (COMBINATION METER)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• “W/L ON HISTORY” indicates the “TIME” when the warning/indicator lamp is turned on.
• The “TIME” above is:
- 0: The condition that the warning/indicator lamp has been turned on 1 or more times after starting the engine
and waiting for 30 seconds.
- 1 - 39: The number of times the engine was restarted after the 0 condition.
- NO W/L ON HISTORY: Stores NO (0) turning on history of warning/indicator lamp.
NOTE:
• W/L ON HISTORY is not stored for approximately 30 seconds after the engine starts.
• Brake warning lamp does not store any history when the parking brake is applied or the brake fluid level gets
low.
A
B
C
Display Item
D
Display item
Description
ABS W/L
Lighting history of ABS warning lamp.
VDC/TCS IND
Lighting history of VDC OFF indicator lamp.
SLIP IND
Lighting history of VDC warning lamp.
BRAKE W/L
Lighting history of brake warning lamp.
DOOR W/L
Lighting history of door open warning.
OIL W/L
Lighting history of oil pressure warning lamp.
C-ENG W/L
Lighting history of malfunction indicator lamp.
CRUISE IND
Lighting history of CRUISE indicator.
O/D OFF IND
Lighting history of O/D OFF indicator lamp.
FUEL W/L
Lighting history of low fuel level warning.
WASHER W/L
Lighting history of low washer fluid warning.
AIR PRES W/L
Lighting history of low tire pressure warning lamp.
KEY G/Y W/L
Lighting history of Intelligent Key system malfunction.
EPS W/L
Lighting history of EPS warning lamp.
BSW W/L
Lighting history of BSW warning lamp.
E
F
G
H
I
J
NOTE:
In items displayed on the CONSULT screen, only those listed in the above table are used.
K
L
M
WCS
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-17
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)
INFOID:0000000007687416
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
Diagnosis mode
Function Description
Work Support
Changes the setting for each system function.
Self Diagnostic Result
Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.
CAN Diag Support Monitor
Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
Data Monitor
The BCM input/output signals are displayed.
Active Test
The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Ecu Identification
The BCM part number is displayed.
Configuration
• Read and save the vehicle specification.
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.
SYSTEM APPLICATION
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item
System
Sub system selection item
Diagnosis mode
Work Support
Data Monitor
Active Test
×
Door lock
DOOR LOCK
×
×
Rear window defogger
REAR DEFOGGER
×
×
Warning chime
BUZZER
×
×
Interior room lamp control system
INT LAMP
×
×
×
Exterior lamp
HEAD LAMP
×
×
×
Wiper and washer
WIPER
×
×
×
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps
FLASHER
×
×
×
Air conditioning control system
AIR CONDITONER
×
×*
• Intelligent Key system
• Engine start system
INTELLIGENT KEY
×
×
Combination switch
COMB SW
Body control system
BCM
×
NVIS
IMMU
×
×
×
Interior room lamp battery saver
BATTERY SAVER
×
×
×
Back door open
TRUNK
Vehicle security system
THEFT ALM
RAP system
RETAINED PWR
×
Signal buffer system
SIGNAL BUFFER
×
×
TPMS
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
NOTE:
*: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used.
FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)
The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on
CONSULT.
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-18
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
CONSULT screen item
Indication/Unit
Description
Vehicle Speed
km/h
Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Odo/Trip Meter
km
Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Vehicle Condition
SLEEP>LOCK
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)]
SLEEP>OFF
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)]
LOCK>ACC
While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC
ACC>ON
While turning power supply position from ACC to ON
RUN>ACC
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except
emergency stop operation)
CRANK>RUN
While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN
RUN>URGENT
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation)
ACC>OFF
While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF)
OFF>LOCK
OFF>ACC
IGN Counter
A
Power position status of
the moment a particular
DTC is detected*
C
D
E
F
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF
(LOCK)
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC
ON>CRANK
While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK
OFF>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK
Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)
OFF
Power supply position is OFF (OFF)
ACC
Power supply position is ACC
ON
Power supply position is ON
ENGINE RUN
Power supply position is RUN
CRANKING
Power supply position is CRANK
0 - 39
B
G
H
I
J
K
The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected
• The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
• The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition
whenever ignition switch OFF → ON.
• The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
NOTE:
L
M
*: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position.
• OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF
• ACC: Ignition switch ACC
WCS
• IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped
• RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running
• CRANK: At engine cranking
Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P
position, and any of the following conditions are met.
O
• Closing door
P
• Opening door
• Door is locked using door request switch
• Door is locked using Intelligent Key
The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”.
BUZZER
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-19
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
BUZZER : CONSULT Function (BCM - BUZZER)
INFOID:0000000007495737
CONSULT APPLICATION ITEMS
Test item
BUZZER
Diagnosis mode
Description
Data Monitor
Displays BCM input data in real time.
Active Test
Operation of electrical loads can be checked by sending driving signal to them.
DATA MONITOR
Display item
[Unit]
Description
PUSH SW
[On/Off]
Status of push-button ignition switch judged by BCM.
UNLK SEN-DR
[On/Off]
Status of unlock sensor judged by BCM.
VEH SPEED 1
[km/h]
Value of vehicle speed signal received from combination meter with CAN communication line.
TAIL LAMP SW
[On/Off]
Status of lighting switch judged by BCM using the combination switch readout function.
FR FOG SW
[On/Off]
Status of front fog lamp switch judged by BCM using the combination switch readout function.
DOOR SW-DR
[On/Off]
Status of driver side door switch judged by BCM.
CDL LOCK SW
[On/Off]
Status of door lock unlock switch judged by BCM.
ACTIVE TEST
Display item
[Unit]
Description
SEAT BELT WARN TEST
The seat belt warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off).
ID REGIST WARNING
The ID regist warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off).
LIGHT WARN ALM
The light warning chime operation can be checked by operating the relevant function (On/Off).
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-20
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
A
COMBINATION METER
Reference Value
INFOID:0000000007616396
B
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
C
Monitor Item
SPEED METER
[km/h]
SPEED OUTPUT
[km/h]
ODO OUTPUT
[km/h or mph]
Condition
Ignition switch
ON
Ignition switch
ON
While driving
Input value of vehicle speed signal
(CAN communication signal)
NOTE:
655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received
While driving
Output value of vehicle speed signal
(CAN communication signal)
NOTE:
655.35 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received
Ignition switch
ON
TACHO METER
[rpm]
Ignition switch
ON
FUEL METER
[L]
Ignition switch
ON
Value/Status
—
G
H
Input value of fuel level sensor signal
—
Input value of engine coolant temperature signal (CAN communication signal)
NOTE:
215 is displayed when the malfunction
signal is input
J
K
I
Ignition switch
ON
ABS W/L
Ignition switch
ON
ABS warning lamp ON
On
ABS warning lamp OFF
Off
VDC/TCS IND
Ignition switch
ON
VDC OFF indicator lamp ON
On
VDC OFF indicator lamp OFF
Off
SLIP IND
Ignition switch
ON
VDC warning lamp ON
On
VDC warning lamp OFF
Off
BRAKE W/L
Ignition switch
ON
Brake warning lamp ON
On
Brake warning lamp OFF
Off
DOOR W/L
Ignition switch
ON
Door open warning ON
On
Door open warning OFF
Off
HI-BEAM IND
Ignition switch
ON
High-beam indicator lamp ON
On
High-beam indicator lamp OFF
Off
TURN IND
Ignition switch
ON
Turn signal indicator lamp ON
On
Turn signal indicator lamp OFF
Off
LIGHT IND
Ignition switch
ON
Light indicator lamp ON
On
Light indicator lamp OFF
Off
Ignition switch
ON
Oil pressure warning lamp ON
On
Oil pressure warning lamp OFF
Off
Revision: 2011 September
F
—
W TEMP METER
[°C]
OIL W/L
E
Output value of odometer signal (CAN
communication signal)
Input value of engine speed signal
(CAN communication signal)
NOTE:
8191.875 is displayed when the malfunction signal is received
Engine running
D
WCS-21
L
M
WCS
O
P
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
Condition
Value/Status
MIL
Ignition switch
ON
Malfunction indicator lamp ON
On
Malfunction indicator lamp OFF
Off
CRUISE IND
Ignition switch
ON
CRUISE indicator ON
On
CRUISE indicator OFF
Off
Off
SET IND
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
CRUISE W/L
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
BA W/L
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
O/D OFF IND
Ignition switch
ON
O/D OFF indicator lamp ON
On
O/D OFF indicator lamp OFF
Off
4WD W/L
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
4WD LOCK IND
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
FUEL W/L
Ignition switch
ON
During low fuel warning indication
On
Other than the above
Off
WASHER W/L
Ignition switch
ON
During low washer fluid warning indication
On
Other than the above
Off
AIR PRES W/L
Ignition switch
ON
Low tire pressure warning lamp ON
On
Low tire pressure warning lamp OFF
Off
KEY G/Y W/L
Ignition switch
ON
During Intelligent Key system malfunction
indication
On
Other than the above
Off
EPS warning lamp ON
On
EPS warning lamp OFF
Off
EPS W/L
Ignition switch
ON
AFS OFF IND
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
ECO MODE IND
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-22
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
Condition
Value/Status
A
Ignition switch
ON
During engine start information indication
B&P I
Ignition switch
ACC
During engine start information indication
B&P N
Ignition switch
LOCK
During key ID warning indication
ID NG
Ignition switch
LOCK
During steering lock information indication
ROTAT
Ignition switch
LOCK
During P position warning indication
SFT P
Ignition switch
LOCK
During Intelligent Key insert information indication
INSRT
Ignition switch
LOCK
During Intelligent Key low battery warning
indication
BATT
Ignition switch
ON
During take away warning indication
NO KY
Ignition switch
LOCK
During key warning indication
OUTKY
Ignition switch
ON
During ACC warning indication
LK WN
Ignition switch
LOCK
During Key ID verification information indication
Ignition switch
ON
Other than above
Off
ACC TARGET
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
ACC DISTANCE
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
ACC OWN VHL
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
K
ACC SET SPEED
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
L
ACC UNIT
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
M
During the indication of “P” by shift position
indicator
P
During the indication of “R” by shift position
indicator
R
During the indication of “N” by shift position
indicator
N
During the indication of “D” by shift position
indicator
D
During the indication of “L” by shift position
indicator
L
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
BSW warning lamp ON
On
BSW warning lamp OFF
Off
LCD
SHIFT IND
Ignition switch
ON
BSW IND
Ignition switch
ON
BSW W/L
Ignition switch
ON
Revision: 2011 September
B
C
WCS-23
D
E
F
G
KY>PSW
H
I
J
WCS
O
P
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
FUEL CAP W/L
Condition
Ignition switch
ON
Value/Status
During fuel filler cap warning display indication
On
Other than above
Off
Overdrive control switch ON
On
Overdrive control switch OFF
Off
O/D OFF SW
Ignition switch
ON
M RANGE SW
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
NM RANGE SW
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
AT SFT UP SW
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
AT SFT DWN SW
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
COMP F/B SIG
Ignition switch
ON
A/C compressor activation condition
On
A/C compressor deactivation condition
Off
PKB SW
Ignition switch
ON
Parking brake switch ON
On
Parking brake switch OFF
Off
BUCKLE SW
Ignition switch
ON
Driver seat belt not fastened
On
Driver seat belt fastened
Off
BRAKE OIL SW
Ignition switch
ON
Brake fluid level switch ON
On
Brake fluid level switch OFF
Off
A/C AMP CONN
Ignition switch
ON
Other than the following
On
Receives ambient sensor power signal
Off
Ignition switch
ON
When
On
ENTER SW
SELECT SW
Ignition switch
ON
switch (enter switch) is pressed
Other than above
When
Off
switch (select switch) is pressed
On
Other than above
Off
ECO MODE SW
Ignition switch
ON
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
DISTANCE
[km]
Ignition switch
ON
—
Distance to empty calculated by combination meter
—
Input value of ambient sensor signal
(CAN communication signal)
NOTE:
This may not match the indicated value
on the information display.
OUTSIDE TEMP
[°C or °F]
Ignition switch
ON
FUEL LOW SIG
Ignition switch
ON
During low fuel warning indication
On
Other than above
Off
BUZZER
Ignition switch
ON
Buzzer ON
On
Buzzer OFF
Off
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-24
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Monitor Item
Condition
TPMS PRESS L
Ignition switch
ON
4WD AUTO IND
Ignition switch
ON
Value/Status
During low tire pressure warning indication
On
Other than above
Off
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
Off
A
B
NOTE:
Some items are not available according to vehicle specification.
C
TERMINAL LAYOUT
D
E
F
JPNIA1324ZZ
G
PHYSICAL VALUES
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Description
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
Value
(Approx.)
+
–
1
(O)
Ground
Battery power supply
Input
Ignition
switch
OFF
—
Battery voltage
2
(Y)
Ground
Ignition signal
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
—
Battery voltage
3
(B)
Ground
Ground
—
Ignition
switch
ON
—
0V
4
(B)
Ground
Ground
—
Ignition
switch
ON
—
0V
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCS
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-25
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
–
Description
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
Value
(Approx.)
• Lighting switch 1ST position
• When meter illumination
is maximum
JPNIA1687GB
5
(B/P)
Ground
Illumination control signal
Output
Ignition
switch
ON
• Lighting switch 1ST position
• When meter illumination
is step 11
JPNIA1686GB
8
(SB)
10
(P)
10
(P)
Ground
11
(G)
10
(P)
12
(BR)
13
(Y)
14
(V)
15
(BR)
10
(P)
10
(P)
10
(P)
—
Trip reset switch signal
Meter control switch ground
Enter switch signal
Select switch signal
Illumination control switch
signal (+)
Illumination control switch
signal (−)
Air bag signal
Revision: 2011 September
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
• Lighting switch 1ST position
• When meter illumination
is minimum
12 V
When trip reset switch is
pressed
0V
Other than the above
5V
—
Ignition
switch
ON
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
When
switch (enter
switch) is pressed
0V
Other than the above
5V
Ignition
switch
ON
When
switch (select
switch) is pressed
0V
Other than the above
5V
When
switch [illumination control switch (+)] is
pressed
0V
Other than the above
5V
When
switch [illumination control switch (−)] is
pressed
0V
Other than the above
5V
Input
Input
Input
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
Ignition
switch
ON
—
—
WCS-26
—
0V
—
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
+
Description
–
Signal name
Condition
Input/
Output
A
Value
(Approx.)
B
At idle [after warming up,
approx. 20°C (68°F)]
16
(L)
Ground
Engine coolant temperature signal
Output
C
Ignition
switch
ON
JSNIA3528ZZ
D
E
At idle [after warming up,
approx. 80°C (176°F)]
F
JSNIA3530ZZ
G
18
(LG)
Ground
Ambient sensor signal
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
—
H
JSNIA0014GB
19
(R)
Ground
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
Ambient sensor ground
—
Ignition
switch
ON
—
0V
A/C auto amp. connection
recognition signal
—
5V
J
20
(Y)
Ground
21
(L)
—
CAN-H
—
—
—
—
22
(P)
—
CAN-L
—
—
—
—
—
Ignition
switch
ON
—
0V
—
Ignition
switch
ON
—
Charge warning lamp ON
12 V
Charge warning lamp OFF
0V
23
(B)
24
(B)
Ground
Ground
Ground
Fuel level sensor ground
K
L
M
0V
WCS
25
(BR)
Ground
Alternator signal
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
26
(BR)
0V
Parking brake switch signal
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
Parking brake applied.
Ground
Parking brake released.
12 V
27
(Y)
Brake fluid level switch signal
12 V
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
Brake fluid level is normal
Ground
Brake fluid level is less than
LOW level
0V
28
(V)
0V
Security signal
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
Security indicator lamp ON
Ground
Security indicator lamp
OFF
12 V
Revision: 2011 September
I
WCS-27
2012 QUEST
O
P
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Terminal No.
(Wire color)
Description
+
–
Signal name
Input/
Output
29
(G)
Ground
Washer level switch signal
Input
Value
(Approx.)
Condition
Ignition
switch
ON
Washer level switch ON
0V
Washer level switch OFF
5V
NOTE:
The maximum voltage varies depending on the specification
(destination unit).
31
(SB)
Ground
Vehicle speed signal
(8-pulse)
Output
Ignition
switch
ON
Speedometer operated
[When vehicle speed is
approx. 40 km/h (25 MPH)]
JSNIA0012GB
32
(P)
Ground
34
(O)
24
(B)
35
(P)
Ground
36
(BR)
—
Ignition
switch
ON
Overdrive control switch
signal
Input
Fuel level sensor signal
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
Seat belt buckle switch signal (driver side)
Input
Ignition
switch
ON
Passenger seat belt warning signal
Input
When overdrive control
switch is pressed
0V
Other than the above
5V
MWI-68, "Component Inspection"
—
When driver seat belt is fastened
5V
When driver seat belt is unfastened
0V
—
—
—
Fail-Safe
INFOID:0000000007616397
FAIL-SAFE
The combination meter activates the fail-safe control if CAN communication with each unit is malfunctioning.
Function
Specifications
Speedometer
Tachometer
Reset to zero by suspending communication.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Illumination control
Revision: 2011 September
When suspending communication, changes to nighttime
mode.
WCS-28
2012 QUEST
COMBINATION METER
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
Function
Specifications
Odo/trip meter
An indicated value is maintained at communications blackout.
Shift position indicator
The display turns OFF by suspending communication.
Door open warning
Interrupt indication
Fuel filler cap warning
B
The display turns OFF by suspending communication.
Low tire pressure warning
Information display
A
C
Current fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption
Trip computer
Distance to empty
Average vehicle speed
• When reception time of an abnormal signal is 2 seconds or
less, the last received datum is used for calculation to indicate the result.
• When reception time of an abnormal signal is more than two
seconds, the last calculation results are indicated.
D
E
Travel distance
Buzzer
The buzzer turns OFF by suspending communication.
F
ABS warning lamp
VDC warning lamp
Brake warning lamp
G
The lamp turns ON by suspending communication.
EPS warning lamp
Malfunction indicator lamp
Low tire pressure warning lamp
The lamp blinking caused by suspending communication.
H
High beam indicator lamp
Warning lamp/indicator lamp
Turn signal indicator lamp
I
VDC OFF indicator lamp
O/D OFF indicator lamp
Tail lamp indicator lamp
The lamp turns OFF by suspending communication.
J
CRUISE indicator lamp
Oil pressure warning lamp
K
Key warning lamp
BSW warning lamp
L
DTC Index
Display contents of CONSULT
INFOID:0000000007616398
Diagnostic item is detected when...
Refer to
CAN COMM CIRCUIT
[U1000]
When combination meter is not transmitting or receiving CAN communication signal
for 2 seconds or more.
MWI-58,
"Diagnosis
Procedure"
CONTROL UNIT (CAN)
[U1010]
When detecting error during the initial diagnosis of the CAN controller of combination meter.
MWI-59,
"Diagnosis
Procedure"
The abnormal vehicle speed signal is input from the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) for 2 seconds or more.
MWI-60,
"Diagnosis
Procedure"
ENGINE SPEED
[B2267]
If ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine speed signals for 2 seconds or
more.
MWI-61,
"Diagnosis
Procedure"
WATER TEMP
[B2268]
If ECM continuously transmits abnormal engine coolant temperature signals for 60
seconds or more.
MWI-62,
"Diagnosis
Procedure"
VEHICLE SPEED
[B2205]
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-29
2012 QUEST
M
WCS
O
P
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
BCM
List of ECU Reference
INFOID:0000000007495741
ECU
Reference
BCS-36, "Reference Value"
BCM
BCS-58, "Fail-safe"
BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
BCS-59, "DTC Index"
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-30
2012 QUEST
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
A
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007495742
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
scribed in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
B
(option abbreviation; if notdeC
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCS
O
P
JCNWA3917GB
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-31
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000007495743
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JSNIA4492GB
DETAILED FLOW
1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM
Interview the customer to obtain as much information as possible about the conditions and environment under
which the malfunction occurred.
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SYMPTOM
• Check the symptom based on the information obtained from the customer.
• Check if any other malfunctions are present.
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK CONSULT SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS
1. Connect CONSULT and perform self-diagnosis. Refer to MWI-48, "DTC Index".
2. When DTC is detected, follow the instructions below:
Record DTC and Freeze Frame Data.
Are self-diagnosis results normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 5.
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-32
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORKFLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
4.NARROW DOWN MALFUNCTIONING PARTS BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
A
Perform symptom diagnosis and narrow down the malfunctioning parts.
>> GO TO 5.
B
5.REPAIR OR REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
NOTE:
If DTC is displayed, erase DTC after repairing or replacing malfunctioning parts.
C
D
>> GO TO 6.
6.FINAL CHECK
E
Check that the warning buzzer in the combination meter operates normally.
Does it operate normally?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 1.
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCS
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-33
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
COMBINATION METER
COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007616401
1.CHECK FUSE
Check for blown fuses.
Power source
Fuse No.
Battery
11
Ignition switch ON or START
4
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
2.CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector and ground.
Terminals
(+)
(−)
Combination meter
Connector
Terminal
1
M34
Ground
2
Ignition switch position
OFF
ON
Voltage
(Approx.)
Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Check harness between combination meter and fuse.
3.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground.
Combination meter
Connector
Continuity
Terminal
3
M34
Ground
4
Existed
23
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-34
2012 QUEST
METER BUZZER CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
METER BUZZER CIRCUIT
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007495745
1.CHECK OPERATION OF METER BUZZER
B
1. Select “BUZZER” of “BCM” on CONSULT.
2. Perform “LIGHT WARN ALM” of “Active Test”.
Does meter buzzer beep?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.
C
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
D
Select the “Data Monitor” for the “METER/M&A” and check the “BUZZER” monitor value.
E
BUZZER
Under the condition of buzzer input
: On
Except above
: Off
F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
Diagnosis Procedure
G
INFOID:0000000007495746
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF COMBINATION METER
H
Check power supply of combination meter. Refer to MWI-63, "COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair power supply circuit of combination meter.
I
J
K
L
M
WCS
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-35
2012 QUEST
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007495747
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
Select the “Data Monitor” for the “METER/M&A” and check the “BUCKLE SW” monitor value.
BUCKLE SW
When seat belt is fastened
: Off
When seat belt is unfastened
: On
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495748
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between combination meter harness connector and ground.
Terminals
(+)
(-)
Connector
Terminal
M34
35
Voltage
(Approx.)
Condition
Combination meter
Ground
When driver seat belt is fastened
12 V
When driver seat belt is unfastened
0V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter connector and seat belt buckle switch (driver side) connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and seat belt buckle switch (driver side)
harness connector.
Combination meter
4.
Seat belt buckle switch (driver side)
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M34
35
B523
51
Continuity
Existed
Check harness continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground.
Combination meter
Connector
Terminal
M34
35
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check harness continuity between seat belt buckle switch (driver side) harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-36
2012 QUEST
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
A
Seat belt buckle switch (driver side)
Connector
Terminal
B523
50
Continuity
Ground
Existed
B
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
C
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495749
1.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE)
D
1.
2.
3.
E
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the seat belt buckle switch (driver side) connector.
Check continuity between terminals.
Terminal
51
Condition
50
When seat belt is fastened
Continuity
F
Not existed
When seat belt is unfastened
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace seat belt buckle (driver side). Refer to SB-8, "SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation".
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
WCS
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-37
2012 QUEST
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495750
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
1.
2.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the voltage between combination meter harness connector and ground.
(+)
(−)
Combination meter
Connector
Terminal
M34
26
Condition
Ground
Ignition
switch ON
Voltage
(Approx.)
When parking brake is applied
0V
When parking brake is released
12 V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination meter connector and parking brake switch connector.
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and parking brake switch harness connector.
Terminals
Combination meter
4.
Parking brake switch
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M34
26
E27
1
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between combination meter harness connector and ground.
Terminals
Combination meter
Connector
Terminal
M34
26
Continuity
Ground
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007495751
1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
Check parking brake switch. Refer to BRC-99, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END.
NO
>> Replace parking brake switch. Refer to PB-6, "Exploded View".
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-38
2012 QUEST
THE LIGHT REMINDER WARNING DOES NOT SOUND
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
A
THE LIGHT REMINDER WARNING DOES NOT SOUND
Description
INFOID:0000000007495752
B
INFOID:0000000007495753
C
Check that the headlamps operate normally by operating the combination switch (lighting switch).
Do they operate normally?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Refer to EXL-75, "WITHOUT DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table" [XENON
TYPE (without daytime running light system)], EXL-77, "WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table" [XENON TYPE (with daytime running light system)], EXL-173, "WITHOUT
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table" [HALOGEN TYPE (without daytime running light system)], or EXL-175, "WITH DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM : Symptom Table"
[HALOGEN TYPE (with daytime running light system)].
D
Light reminder warning chime does not sound even though headlamp is illuminated.
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH (LIGHTING SWITCH) OPERATION
2.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
E
F
G
Perform the check for the driver side door switch signal circuit. Refer to DLK-209, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH
H
I
Perform a unit check for the driver side door switch. Refer to DLK-210, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace driver side door switch. Refer to DLK-453, "Removal and Installation".
J
K
L
M
WCS
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-39
2012 QUEST
THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR
DOES NOT SOUND
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
THE PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR
DOES NOT SOUND
Description
INFOID:0000000007495754
• The parking brake warning buzzer sounds continuously during vehicle travel though the parking brake is
released.
• The parking brake warning buzzer does not sound at all even though driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495755
1.CHECK PARKING BRAKE WARNING LAMP
1.
2.
Start the engine.
Check the operation of the brake warning lamp by operating the parking brake.
When parking brake is applied
: ON
When parking brake is released
: OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation"
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Perform check for the parking brake switch signal circuit. Refer to BRC-99, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
Perform a unit check for the parking brake switch. Refer to BRC-99, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation"
NO
>> Replace parking brake switch. Refer to PB-6, "Exploded View".
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-40
2012 QUEST
THE SEAT BELT WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR DOES NOT SOUND
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
THE SEAT BELT WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR DOES NOT
SOUND
Description
A
INFOID:0000000007495756
B
• Seat belt warning chime does not sound.
• Seat belt warning chime sounds continuously.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007495757
1.CHECK SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP
1.
2.
D
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check the operation of the seat belt warning lamp in the combination meter.
Seat belt fastened
: OFF
Seat belt not fastened
: ON
C
E
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 4.
F
2.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
G
Check if the seat belt warning chime is activated by performing BCM active test. Refer to WCS-20, "BUZZER :
CONSULT Function (BCM - BUZZER)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 3.
H
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
I
Check if buzzer switches to proper condition (On/Off) on data monitor of combination meter. Refer to WCS-14,
"CONSULT Function".
Buzzer active condition
: On
Buzzer non-active condition
: Off
K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
L
4.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE) CIRCUIT
Perform the check for the seat belt buckle
"Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> Repair harness or connector.
J
switch (driver side) circuit. Refer to WCS-36,
M
WCS
5.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH (DRIVER SIDE)
Perform a unit check for the seat belt buckle switch (driver side). Refer to WCS-37, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace combination meter. Refer to MWI-84, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Replace seat belt buckle (driver side). Refer to SB-8, "SEAT BELT BUCKLE : Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
WCS-41
2012 QUEST
O
P
SUSPENSION
SECTION
WT
ROAD WHEELS & TIRES
A
B
C
D
WT
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 16
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM ...... 16
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
Service Notice and Precautions for TPMS ................ 3
Service Notice and Precautions for Road Wheel ...... 4
Wiring Diagram ........................................................16
PREPARATION ............................................ 5
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 17
Special Service Tool ................................................. 5
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 5
Description ...............................................................19
Work Procedure .......................................................19
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 6
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION .................................................................. 20
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 6
Description ...............................................................20
Work Procedure .......................................................20
System Description ................................................... 8
Circuit Diagram ......................................................... 9
Easy Fill Tire Alert Function ...................................... 9
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................11
COMMON ITEM ......................................................... 11
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) ..................................................... 11
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR ...................................... 12
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR : CONSULT Function
(BCM - AIR PRESSURE MONITOR) ...................... 12
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 15
BCM ....................................................................15
List of ECU Reference ............................................ 15
Revision: 2011 September
H
Work Flow ................................................................17
PREPARATION ................................................... 5
SYSTEM .............................................................. 8
G
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 17
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING
BCM ................................................................... 19
Component Parts Location ........................................ 6
BCM .......................................................................... 6
Tire Pressure Sensor ................................................ 7
Tire Pressure Receiver ............................................. 7
Information Display ................................................... 7
F
I
J
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 22
K
L
C1704, C1705, C1706, C1707 LOW TIRE
PRESSURE ....................................................... 22
DTC Logic ................................................................22
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................22
M
C1708, C1709, C1710, C1711 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ................................................. 24
N
DTC Logic ................................................................24
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................24
C1716, C1717, C1718, C1719 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ................................................. 26
DTC Logic ................................................................26
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................26
C1729 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL .................... 28
DTC Logic ................................................................28
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................28
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT .... 29
WT-1
2012 QUEST
O
P
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 29
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 30
TPMS ................................................................. 30
Symptom Table ...................................................... 30
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
DOES NOT TURN ON ....................................... 33
Description .............................................................. 33
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 33
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
DOES NOT TURN OFF ..................................... 34
Description .............................................................. 34
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 34
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS
(NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING ............................ 39
NVH Troubleshooting Chart .................................... 39
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................... 40
ROAD WHEEL ................................................... 40
Inspection ................................................................ 40
Wheel Balance Adjustment ..................................... 40
Tire Rotation ........................................................... 42
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 43
ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY .................... 43
Exploded View ........................................................ 43
Removal and Installation ......................................... 43
Inspection ................................................................ 43
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
BLINKS .............................................................. 35
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR .............................. 45
Description .............................................................. 35
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 35
Exploded View ........................................................ 45
Removal and Installation ......................................... 45
EASY FILL TIRE ALERT DOES NOT ACTIVATE .................................................................. 36
TIRE PRESSURE RECEIVER ........................... 47
Description .............................................................. 36
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 36
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION CANNOT BE COMPLETED ..................... 38
Description .............................................................. 38
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 38
Revision: 2011 September
Removal and Installation ......................................... 47
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) .......................................................... 48
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS
(SDS) ................................................................. 48
Road Wheel ............................................................ 48
Tire Air Pressure ..................................................... 48
WT-2
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000007492989
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
D
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
WT
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
F
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
G
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Service Notice and Precautions for TPMS
WT-3
J
K
INFOID:0000000007492990
• Low tire pressure warning lamp blinks for 1min, then turns ON when occurring any malfunction except low
tire pressure. Erase the self-diagnosis memories for Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), or register
the ID to turn low tire pressure warning lamp OFF. For ID registration, refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure".
• ID registration is required when replacing or rotating wheels, replacing tire pressure sensor or BCM. Refer to
WT-20, "Work Procedure".
• For easy fill tire alert function, refer to the following.
- When inflating the tires, park the vehicle in the safe area and ensure the safety of the working area.
- Read and understand the easy fill tire alert function prior to use.
- Inflate the tires one at a time.
- If there is no response for approximately 15 seconds or more after inflating the tires, cancel the use of the
easy fill tire alert function or move the vehicle approximately 1 m (3.2 ft) backward or forward to try again.
The air filler pressure may be weak or out of service area.
- Despite the high-precision TPMS pressure sensor, an indicated value may differ from that of the pressure
gauge.
- Air pressure is measured rather high due to the rise in tire air temperature after driving.
- If TPMS is malfunctioning, the easy fill tire alert is unusable.
• Replace grommet seal, valve core and valve cap of tire pressure sensor in TPMS, when replacing each tire
by reaching the wear limit. Refer to WT-45, "Exploded View".
• Because the tire pressure sensor conforms to North America radio law, the following items must be
observed.
- The sensor may be used only in North America.
- It may not be used in any method other than the specified method.
- It must not be disassembled or modified.
Revision: 2011 September
I
2012 QUEST
L
M
N
O
P
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
Service Notice and Precautions for Road Wheel
INFOID:0000000007492991
• Genuine NISSAN aluminum wheel is designed for each type of vehicle. Use it on the specified vehicle only.
• Use Genuine NISSAN parts for the road wheels, valve caps and wheel nuts.
• Always use them after adjusting the wheel balance. For the balance weights, use Genuine NISSAN aluminum wheel weights.
• Use caution when handling the aluminum wheels, because they can be easily scratched. When removing
dirt, do not use any abrasives, a wire brush, or other items that may scratch the coating. Use a neutral detergent if a detergent is needed.
• After driving on roads scattered with anti-icing salts, wash off the wheels completely.
• When installing road wheels onto the vehicle, always wipe off any dirt or foreign substances to prevent them
from being trapped between the contact surfaces of wheel.
• Never apply oil to nut and bolt threads.
• When tightening the valve cap there is a risk of damaging the valve cap if a tool is used. Tighten by hand.
Revision: 2011 September
WT-4
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
INFOID:0000000007492992
B
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.
Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.)
Tool name
C
Description
ID registration
—
(J-45295)
Tire pressure sensor activation tool
D
WT
SEIA0462E
F
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000007492993
Tool name
Description
Power tool
Loosening bolts and nuts
G
H
I
PBIC0190E
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WT-5
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007492994
JSEIA0404GB
A.
Behind of combination meter
No.
B.
Wheel
C.
Component parts
View with roof finisher removed
Function
1.
Low tire pressure warning lamp
(in combination meter)
WT-8, "System Description"
2.
Information display
(in combination meter)
WT-7, "Information Display"
3.
Combination meter
Mainly receives the following signals from BCM via CAN communication.
• Low tire pressure warning lamp signal
• TPMS malfunction warning lamp signal
4.
TCM
Mainly transmits the following signals to BCM via CAN communication.
• P range signal
5.
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Mainly transmits the following signals to BCM via CAN communication.
• Vehicle speed signal
6.
BCM
WT-6, "BCM"
7.
Tire pressure sensor
WT-7, "Tire Pressure Sensor"
8.
Remote keyless entry receiver
(tire pressure receiver)
WT-7, "Tire Pressure Receiver"
BCM
INFOID:0000000007492995
• The BCM reads the air pressure signal received by the tire pressure receiver, controls the low tire pressure
warning lamp, hazard warning lamp, and horn operation. It also has a judgment function to detect a system
malfunction.
• Controls easy fill tire alert function. Refer to WT-9, "Easy Fill Tire Alert Function".
Revision: 2011 September
WT-6
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Tire Pressure Sensor
INFOID:0000000007492996
A
The tire pressure sensor integrated with a valve is installed on a wheel, and transmits a detected air pressure
signal by radio wave.
Tire Pressure Receiver
INFOID:0000000007492997
• Tire pressure receiver is incorporated into remote keyless entry receiver.
• The tire pressure receiver receives the air pressure signal transmitted by the tire pressure sensor in each
wheel.
Information Display
B
C
INFOID:0000000007492998
D
The vehicle information display is shown when a low tire pressure warning lamp signal is transmitted from
BCM to combination meter. via CAN communication.
Condition
Vehicle information display
Ignition switch OFF
WT
Not indicated
Ignition switch ON
Low tire pressure warning lamp remains ON after blinking for one
minute. [Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) malfunction.]
Ignition switch ON
Low tire pressure warning lamp remains ON. (low tire pressure)
Not indicated
F
Indicated
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WT-7
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
System Description
INFOID:0000000007492999
• During driving, the TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) receives the signal transmitted from tire pressure sensor installed in each wheel. The BCM (Body Control Module) of this system has pressure judgment
and trouble diagnosis functions. When the tire pressure monitoring system detects low inflation pressure or
another unusual symptom, the low tire pressure warning lamps in the combination meter comes on.
• If the tire pressure is less than the specified value, the low tire pressure warning lamp illuminates that the tire
pressure is less than the specified value.
• Activates the TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) when the vehicle speed is 40 km/h (25 MPH) or
more.
• Added easy fill tire alert function to TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System). Refer to WT-9, "Easy Fill Tire
Alert Function".
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
JSEIA0407GB
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL
Major signal transmission between each unit via communication lines is shown in the following table.
Component parts
Signal item
Combination meter
Mainly receives the following signals from BCM via CAN communication.
• Low tire pressure warning lamp signal
• TPMS malfunction warning lamp signal
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
Mainly transmits the following signals to BCM via CAN communication.
• Vehicle speed signal
TCM
Mainly transmits the following signals to BCM via CAN communication.
• P range signal
IPDM E/R
Mainly receives the following signals from BCM via CAN communication.
• Horn remainder signal
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP INDICATION CONDITION
Uses CAN communication from the BCM to illuminate the low tire pressure warning lamp on the combination
meter.
Condition
Low tire pressure warning lamp
Ignition switch OFF
OFF
Ignition switch ON
(system normal)
Warning lamp turns on for 1second, then turns off.
Revision: 2011 September
WT-8
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Condition
Low tire pressure warning lamp
A
Low tire pressure
ON
Tire pressure sensor ID not registered in BCM
Tire pressure monitoring system malfunction
(Other diagnostic item)
B
Warning lamp blinks 1 min, then turns on.
HAZARD WARNING LAMP INDICATION CONDITION
The hazard warning lamp blinks under the following conditions.
• When ID registration is completed. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure".
• During the use of the easy fill tire alert function.
C
HORN CONTROL CONDITION
D
During the use of easy fill tire alert function.
Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000007493000
WT
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
JSEIA0405GB
N
Easy Fill Tire Alert Function
INFOID:0000000007493001
• This function operates only when the select lever position is in P-range with the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
NOTE:
The easy fill tire alert function is recommended to use with the ignition switch ON.
Revision: 2011 September
WT-9
2012 QUEST
O
P
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• This function informs the driver of the satisfaction of the recommended COLD tire pressure.
The hazard warning lamp blinks when reaching the recommended
COLD tire pressure during radio wave reception. After reaching the
recommended COLD tire pressure, the horn sounds once and the
hazard warning lamp stops blinking.
• When tire pressure becomes a value equal to or more than 30 kPa
(0.31 kg/cm2, 4 psi) more than the recommended COLD tire pressure, the hazard warning lamp and the horn operates three times.
After deflating the tire and reaching the recommended COLD tire
pressure, the horn sounds only once and the hazard warning lamp
JSEIA0214GB
stops blinking.
NOTE:
• After starting to inflate the tire, it takes a few seconds for the easy fill tire alert to function.
• If there is no response for approximately 15 seconds or more after inflating the tires, cancel the use of the
easy fill tire alert function or move the vehicle approximately 1 m (3.2 ft) backward or forward to try again.
The air filler pressure may be weak or out of service area.
Revision: 2011 September
WT-10
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
A
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)
INFOID:0000000007705897
B
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
C
Diagnosis mode
Function Description
Work Support
Changes the setting for each system function.
Self Diagnostic Result
Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.
D
CAN Diag Support Monitor
Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
Data Monitor
The BCM input/output signals are displayed.
Active Test
The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Ecu Identification
The BCM part number is displayed.
Configuration
• Read and save the vehicle specification.
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.
WT
F
SYSTEM APPLICATION
G
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item
System
Sub system selection item
Diagnosis mode
Work Support
Data Monitor
Active Test
×
×
×
Door lock
DOOR LOCK
Rear window defogger
REAR DEFOGGER
×
×
Warning chime
BUZZER
×
×
Interior room lamp control system
INT LAMP
×
×
×
Exterior lamp
HEAD LAMP
×
×
×
Wiper and washer
WIPER
×
×
×
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps
FLASHER
×
×
×
Air conditioning control system
AIR CONDITONER
×
×*
• Intelligent Key system
• Engine start system
INTELLIGENT KEY
×
×
Combination switch
COMB SW
Body control system
BCM
×
NVIS
IMMU
×
×
×
Interior room lamp battery saver
BATTERY SAVER
×
×
×
Back door open
TRUNK
Vehicle security system
THEFT ALM
RAP system
RETAINED PWR
×
Signal buffer system
SIGNAL BUFFER
×
×
TPMS
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR
×
×
×
×
I
J
K
L
M
N
×
×
×
×
×
NOTE:
*: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used.
FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)
The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on
CONSULT.
Revision: 2011 September
H
WT-11
2012 QUEST
O
P
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
CONSULT screen item
Indication/Unit
Description
Vehicle Speed
km/h
Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Odo/Trip Meter
km
Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Vehicle Condition
SLEEP>LOCK
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)]
SLEEP>OFF
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)]
LOCK>ACC
While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC
ACC>ON
While turning power supply position from ACC to ON
RUN>ACC
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except
emergency stop operation)
CRANK>RUN
While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN
RUN>URGENT
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation)
ACC>OFF
While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF)
OFF>LOCK
OFF>ACC
IGN Counter
Power position status of
the moment a particular
DTC is detected*
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF
(LOCK)
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC
ON>CRANK
While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK
OFF>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK
Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)
OFF
Power supply position is OFF (OFF)
ACC
Power supply position is ACC
ON
Power supply position is ON
ENGINE RUN
Power supply position is RUN
CRANKING
Power supply position is CRANK
0 - 39
The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected
• The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
• The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition
whenever ignition switch OFF → ON.
• The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
NOTE:
*: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position.
• OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF
• ACC: Ignition switch ACC
• IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped
• RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running
• CRANK: At engine cranking
Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P
position, and any of the following conditions are met.
• Closing door
• Opening door
• Door is locked using door request switch
• Door is locked using Intelligent Key
The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”.
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR : CONSULT Function (BCM - AIR PRESSURE MONIRevision: 2011 September
WT-12
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
TOR)
INFOID:0000000007493003
A
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
B
Diagnosis mode
Function Description
Self Diagnostic Result
Retrieve DTC from ECU and display diagnostic items.
Data Monitor
Monitor the input/output signal of the control unit in real time.
Active Test
Send the drive signal from CONSULT to the actuator. The operation check can be performed.
Work Support
This mode enables a technician to adjust some devices faster and more accurately.
C
D
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index".
WT
DATA MONITOR MODE
Monitor item (Unit)
Remarks
F
AIR PRESS FL
(kPa kg/cm2 or Psi)
AIR PRESS FR
(kPa, kg/cm2 or Psi)
AIR PRESS RR
(kPa, kg/cm2 or Psi)
G
Tire pressure
H
AIR PRESS RL
(kPa, kg/cm2 or Psi)
ID REGST FL1
(Yet, Done)
I
ID REGST FR1
(Yet, Done)
Registration ID
ID REGST RR1
(Yet, Done)
J
ID REGST RL1
(Yet, Done)
K
WARNING LAMP
(On/Off)
Low tire pressure warning lamp
BUZZER
(On/Off)
NOTE:
This item is displayed, but cannot be use this item.
L
ACTIVE TEST MODE
M
NOTE:
After completing the work below, perform an active test.
1. Check ID registration state and perform self-diagnosis.
2. Erase the self-diagnosis result history.
Item
N
Description
WARNING LAMP
Low tire pressure warning lamp can be turned ON arbitrarily.
ID REGIST WARNING
NOTE:
Displayed but not used in TPMS.
RUN FLAT TIRE W/L
NOTE:
Displayed but not used in TPMS.
RUN FLAT/T WARN BUZZER
NOTE:
Displayed but not used in TPMS.
FLASHER
Turn signal lamps can be turned ON arbitrarily.
HORN
This test is able to check to check that the horn sounds.
Revision: 2011 September
WT-13
O
P
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
WORK SUPPORT
Item
Description
ID READ
Registered tire pressure sensor ID can be displayed.
ID REGIST
Tire pressure sensor ID can be registered.
Revision: 2011 September
WT-14
2012 QUEST
BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
A
BCM
List of ECU Reference
INFOID:0000000007493004
ECU
Reference
C
BCS-36, "Reference Value"
BCM
B
BCS-58, "Fail-safe"
BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
D
BCS-59, "DTC Index"
WT
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WT-15
2012 QUEST
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007493005
For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
(option abbreviation; if not
JCEWA0241GB
Revision: 2011 September
WT-16
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
A
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000007493006
B
DETAILED FLOW
1.COLLECT THE INFORMATION FROM THE CUSTOMER
C
It is also important to clarify customer concerns before starting the inspection. Reproduce the symptom, and
understand it fully. Interview the customer about the concerns carefully. In some cases, it is necessary to
D
check the symptoms by driving the vehicle with the customer.
CAUTION:
Customers are not professionals. Never assume“maybe the customer means...” or “maybe the customer mentioned this symptom.
WT
>> GO TO 2.
2.BASIC INSPECTION
F
1.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
2. Check the tire pressure for all wheels and adjust to the specified value. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Inspect or repair the tires or wheels.
G
H
3.CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
I
Check low tire pressure warning lamp display.
Does not low tire pressure warning lamp turn OFF?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> GO TO 8.
J
4.PERFORM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
K
With CONSULT
Perform “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Record or print DTC and freeze frame data (FFD). GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 7.
L
M
5.RECHECK THE SYMPTOM
With CONSULT
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” with recorded DTC.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index" and determine trouble diagnosis order.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> GO TO 7.
N
O
6.REPAIR OR REPLACE ERROR-DETECTED PART
P
• Repair or replace error-detected parts.
• Reconnect part or connector after repairing or replacing.
• When DTC is detected, erase self-diagnostic result in “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”.
>> GO TO 9.
7.CRUISE FOR SYMPTOM CHECK
Revision: 2011 September
WT-17
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
1. Start the engine.
2. Drive for 10 minutes at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more, then stop the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Total time driving at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more must be 10 minutes.
>> GO TO 8.
8.IDENTIFY ERROR-DETECTED SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Estimate error-detected system based on symptom diagnosis.
>> GO TO 10.
9.FINAL CHECK (WHEN DTC WAS DETECTED)
With CONSULT
Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” with displayed DTC.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
10.FINAL CHECK (WHEN SYMPTOM OCCURRED)
Make sure that the symptom is not detected.
Does symptom remain?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Revision: 2011 September
WT-18
2012 QUEST
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING BCM
< BASIC INSPECTION >
ADDITIONAL SERVICE WHEN REPLACING BCM
Description
A
INFOID:0000000007493007
When replacing BCM, tire pressure sensor ID registration is required.
Work Procedure
B
INFOID:0000000007493008
1.PERFORM TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION
C
Perform tire pressure sensor ID registration.
D
>> Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure".
WT
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WT-19
2012 QUEST
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION
< BASIC INSPECTION >
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION
Description
INFOID:0000000007493009
This procedure must be done after replacing or rotating wheels, replacing tire pressure sensor or BCM.
Work Procedure
INFOID:0000000007493010
1.TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION:
To perform ID registration, observe the following points:
• Never register ID in a place where radio waves are interfered (e.g. radio tower).
• Never register ID in a place close to vehicles including TPMS.
With CONSULT
1. Display the “WORK SUPPORT” screen and select “ID REGIST”.
Is the tire pressure sensor activation tool (J-45295) used for the tire pressure sensor ID registration procedure?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
2.TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION PROCEDURE (WITH TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ACTIVATION TOOL)
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Select the start button on the “ID REGIST” screen.
3. Contact the tire pressure sensor activation tool (J-45295) (1) to
the side of the tire at the location to the tire pressure sensor.
4. Press and hold the tire pressure sensor activation tool button
while pushing the tool to the tire surface. (approximately for 5
seconds)
CAUTION:
Perform the ID registration procedure starting from the
vehicle front left wheel, then repeat the procedure in the
order of the front right wheel, rear right wheel, and rear left
wheel.
NNEIC0020ZZ
5.
When ID registration is completed, check the following pattern at each wheel.
Sequence
ID registration position
1
Front left wheel
2
Front right wheel
3
Rear right wheel
4
Rear left wheel
Turn signal lamp
CONSULT
2 blinks
“Red”
↓
“Green”
6.
After the ID registration procedure for all wheels is completed, press “END” to end ID registration, and
check that ID registration for all wheels is completed.
Is the check result normal?
YES >> ID registration END.
NO
>> Refer to WT-38, "Diagnosis Procedure".
3.TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION PROCEDURE (WITHOUT TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
ACTIVATION TOOL)
1. Adjust the tire pressure for all wheels to match the list below.
Revision: 2011 September
WT-20
2012 QUEST
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION
< BASIC INSPECTION >
2.
3.
Tire position
Tire pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
Front LH
240 (2.4, 35)
Front RH
220 (2.2, 31)
Rear RH
200 (2.0, 29)
Rear LH
180 (1.8, 26)
A
B
Drive the vehicle at a speed at more than 40 km/h (25 MPH) for 3 minutes or more, then perform the tire
pressure sensor ID registration procedure.
After ID registration for all wheels is completed, press “END” to end ID registration.
C
D
ID registration position
CONSULT
Front LH
WT
“Red”
↓
“Green”
Front RH
Rear RH
Rear LH
F
4. Adjust the tire pressures for all wheels to the specified value. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure".
Is ID registrations for all wheels completed?
YES >> ID registration END.
NO
>> Performs trouble-diagnosis of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WT-21
2012 QUEST
C1704, C1705, C1706, C1707 LOW TIRE PRESSURE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
C1704, C1705, C1706, C1707 LOW TIRE PRESSURE
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007493011
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
Display Item
Malfunction detected condition
Possible causes
2
C1704
LOW PRESSURE FL
Front LH tire pressure drops to * kPa (* kg/cm , * psi) or less.
C1705
LOW PRESSURE FR
Front RH tire pressure drops to * kPa (* kg/cm2, * psi) or less.
C1706
LOW PRESSURE RR
Rear RH tire pressure drops to * kPa (* kg/cm2, * psi) or less.
C1707
LOW PRESSURE RL
Rear LH tire pressure drops to * kPa (* kg/cm2, * psi) or less.
Low tire pressure
*:189.6 kPa (1.9 kg/cm2, 27 psi) [Standard air pressure is for 240 kPa (2.4 kg/cm2,35 psi) vehicles.]
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION
With CONSULT
Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
2. Check the tire pressure for all wheels and adjust to the specified value. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure".
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR”.
Is DTC “C1704”, “C1705”, “C1706”, or “C1707” detected?
YES >> Proceed to WT-22, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007493012
1.TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION
Perform tire pressure sensor ID registration. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure".
Is tire pressure sensor ID registration completed?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace applicable tire pressure sensor. Refer to WT-45, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
Check the air pressure of all wheels. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure".
CAUTION:
If the checked value is close to the standard, reduce the tire pressure, and then with the ignition
switch ON, adjust the tire pressure again so that it is within the standard.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” (self-diagnosis) again. Refer to BCS-59,
"DTC Index".
NO
>> After adjusting the air pressure, GO TO 3
3.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE SIGNAL
1.
2.
With CONSULT
Select “DATA MONITOR” in “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”.
Check that the tire pressures match the standard value.
Monitor item
Displayed value
AIR PRESS FL
Approximately equal to the indication on tire gauge value for front LH tire
AIR PRESS FR
Approximately equal to the indication on tire gauge value for front RH tire
Revision: 2011 September
WT-22
2012 QUEST
C1704, C1705, C1706, C1707 LOW TIRE PRESSURE
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Monitor item
Displayed value
AIR PRESS RR
Approximately equal to the indication on tire gauge value for rear RH tire
AIR PRESS RL
Approximately equal to the indication on tire gauge value for rear LH tire
A
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> After erasing DTC record, INSPECTION END.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
B
C
D
WT
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WT-23
2012 QUEST
C1708, C1709, C1710, C1711 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
C1708, C1709, C1710, C1711 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007493013
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
Display Item
Malfunction detected condition
Possible causes
• Harness or connector
(Tire pressure receiver, BCM)
• Tire pressure sensor ID registration incomplete
• Tire pressure sensor
• Tire pressure sensor battery
voltage
• Driving in area where radio
wave cannot be transmitted/received.
C1708
[NO DATA] FL
Tire pressure data signal from the front LH wheel
tire pressure sensor cannot be detected.
C1709
[NO DATA] FR
Tire pressure data signal from the front RH wheel
tire pressure sensor cannot be detected.
C1710
[NO DATA] RR
Tire pressure data signal from the rear RH wheel
tire pressure sensor cannot be detected.
C1711
[NO DATA] RL
Tire pressure data signal from the rear LH wheel
tire pressure sensor cannot be detected.
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION
Perform tire pressure sensor ID registration. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure".
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION
With CONSULT
Drive the vehicle at 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more for 10 minutes.
CAUTION:
Total time driving at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more must be 10 minutes.
NOTE:
Avoid driving in area where radio wave cannot be transmitted/received.
2. Stop the vehicle.
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”.
Is DTC “C1708”, “C1709”, “C1710” or “C1711” detected?
YES >> Proceed to WT-24, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007493014
1.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE SIGNAL
With CONSULT
Select “DATA MONITOR” in “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”.
Check the values that are displayed for “AIR PRESS FL”, “AIR PRESS FR”, “AIR PRESS RR”, and “AIR
PRESS RL”.
Are all tire pressures displayed 0 kPa (psi)?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace applicable tire pressure sensor. Refer to WT-45, "Removal and Installation".
1.
2.
2.CHECK RECEIVER CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove 10A fuse (#10).
Disconnect BCM harness connector and tire pressure receiver harness connector.
Check the continuity between BCM harness connector and tire pressure receiver harness connector.
Revision: 2011 September
WT-24
2012 QUEST
C1708, C1709, C1710, C1711 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
BCM
Connector
Tire pressure receiver
Terminal
R108
2
57
Existed
B
1
Check the continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
A
4
38
M123
Continuity
Terminal
18
M121
5.
Connector
C
—
Terminal
Continuity
D
18
M121
38
M123
Ground
Not existed
WT
57
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
F
3.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE RECEIVER IGNITION SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Connect tire pressure receiver harness connector.
Install 10A fuse (#10).
CAUTION:
Check that the fuse is not blown, that there are no other abnormalities, and that the fuse is of the
specified capacity.
Check the voltage between tire pressure receiver harness connector and the ground when the ignition
switch is turned ON and OFF.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
Tire pressure receiver
Connector
Terminal
R108
1
—
Voltage
Ground
9 – 16 V
G
H
I
J
K
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
L
4.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE SIGNAL
Check the function tire pressure receiver. Refer to DLK-233, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the BCM.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WT-25
2012 QUEST
C1716, C1717, C1718, C1719 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
C1716, C1717, C1718, C1719 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007493015
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
Display Item
Malfunction detected condition
C1716
[PRESSDATA ERR] FL
Malfunction in the tire pressure data from the
front LH wheel tire pressure sensor.
C1717
[PRESSDATA ERR] FR
Malfunction in the tire pressure data from the
front RH wheel tire pressure sensor.
C1718
[PRESSDATA ERR] RR
Malfunction in the tire pressure data from the
rear RH wheel tire pressure sensor.
C1719
[PRESSDATA ERR] RL
Malfunction in the tire pressure data from the
rear LH wheel tire pressure sensor.
Possible causes
• Excessive tire pressure
• Tire pressure sensor ID registration incomplete
• Tire pressure sensor
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION
With CONSULT
Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
2. Check the tire pressure for all wheels and adjust to the specified value. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure".
CAUTION:
If the tire pressure before adjustment is close to the standard, reduce the tire pressure, and then
with the ignition switch ON, adjust the tire pressure again so that it is within the standard.
3. Perform self-diagnosis in “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”.
Is DTC “C1716”, “C1717”, “C1718”, or “C1719” detected?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> INSPECTION END
1.
2.CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
Check that after the ignition switch is turned ON, the low tire pressure warning lamp illuminates for approximately 1 second and then turns OFF.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> After erase DTC, INSPECTION END.
NO
>> Leave the ignition switch ON and proceed to WT-26, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007493016
1.PERFORM TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION
Perform tire pressure sensor ID registration for all wheels. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure".
Is tire pressure sensor ID registration completed?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace tire pressure sensor. Refer to WT-45, "Removal and Installation".
2.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE SIGNAL
With CONSULT
Check the tire pressure for all wheels and adjust to the specified value. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure".
2. Stop the vehicle.
3. Select “DATA MONITOR” in “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”.
4. Within 15 minutes after vehicle stopped, read the values that are displayed for “AIR PRESS FL”, “AIR
PRESS FR”, “AIR PRESS RR”, and “AIR PRESS RL”.
1.
Which tire pressures is displayed as 438.60 kPa (4.47 kg/cm2, 63.60 psi)?
Revision: 2011 September
WT-26
2012 QUEST
C1716, C1717, C1718, C1719 TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> Replace tire pressure sensor the tire pressure as 438.60 kPa (4.47 kg/cm2, 63.60 psi) displayed.
Refer to WT-45, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Perform “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” (self-diagnosis) again. Refer to BCS-59,
"DTC Index".
A
B
C
D
WT
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WT-27
2012 QUEST
C1729 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
C1729 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
DTC Logic
INFOID:0000000007493017
DTC DETECTION LOGIC
DTC
C1729
Display Item
VHCL SPEED SIG ERR
Malfunction detected condition
Vehicle speed signal not detected.
Possible causes
With intelligent key
• CAN communication
• BCM
• ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
malfunction
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT
1. Drive the vehicle.
2. Stop the vehicle.
3. Perform self-diagnosis in “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”.
Is DTC “C1729” detected?
YES >> Proceed to WT-28, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO
>> INSPECTION END
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007493018
1.PERFORM ABS ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT) SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “ABS”.
Is any DTCs detected?
YES >> Check the DTCs.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BCM INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL
Check BCM input/output signal values. Refer to BCS-36, "Reference Value".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check pin terminal and connection of each harness connector for malfunctioning conditions.
NO
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
Revision: 2011 September
WT-28
2012 QUEST
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
A
INFOID:0000000007493019
1.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
B
Check BCM power supply and ground. Refer to BCS-75, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
C
D
WT
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WT-29
2012 QUEST
TPMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
TPMS
Symptom Table
INFOID:0000000007493020
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP SYMPTOM CHART
Revision: 2011 September
WT-30
2012 QUEST
TPMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Diagnosis
items
Symptom
(Ignition switch
ON)
A
Low tire pressure warning lamp
Cause
Action
B
The low tire pressure warning lamp
illuminates for 1
second, then turns
OFF.
Wake-up operation for
all tire pressure sensors
at wheels is completed.
No system malfunctions
SEIA0592E
The low tire pressure warning lamp
repeats blinking
ON for 2 seconds
and OFF for 0.2
seconds.
C
D
Wake-up operation for
all tire pressure sensors
at wheels is not completed.
Perform the ID registration
for all tire pressure sensors
at wheels. Refer to WT-20,
"Work Procedure".
WT
F
SEIA0593E
G
The front left tire pressure sensor is not activated.
The low tire pressure warning lamp
blinks once.
Perform the ID registration
for the tire pressure sensor
at front left wheel. Refer to
WT-20, "Work Procedure".
H
JPEIC0090GB
I
Low tire pressure warning
lamp
The low tire pressure warning lamp
repeats blinking
twice.
The front right tire pressure sensor is not activated.
Perform the ID registration
for the tire pressure sensor
at front right wheel. Refer
to WT-20, "Work Procedure".
K
SEIA0595E
The low tire pressure warning lamp
repeats blinking
for 3 times.
J
The rear right tire pressure sensor is not activated.
Perform the ID registration
for the tire pressure sensor
at rear right wheel. Refer to
WT-20, "Work Procedure".
L
M
SEIA0596E
N
The low tire pressure warning lamp
repeats blinking
for 4 times.
The rear left tire pressure sensor is not activated.
Perform the ID registration
for the tire pressure sensor
at rear left wheel. Refer to
WT-20, "Work Procedure".
SEIA0597E
The low tire pressure warning lamp
turns ON and
stays illuminated.
P
Low tire pressure
Check the tire pressure for
all wheels and adjust to the
specified value. Refer to
WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure".
SEIA0598E
Revision: 2011 September
WT-31
O
2012 QUEST
TPMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Diagnosis
items
Low tire pressure warning
lamp
Symptom
(Ignition switch
ON)
Low tire pressure warning lamp
The low tire pressure warning lamp
repeats blinking at
0.5-second intervals for 1 minute,
and then stays illuminated.
SEIA0788E
Cause
Action
The combination meter
fuse is open or removed
(or pulled out).
Check and install the combination meter fuse. If necessary, replace the fuse.
The BCM harness connector is removed.
Check the connection conditions of the BCM harness
connector, and repair if
necessary.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) malfunction.
• Perform CONSULT selfdiagnosis. Refer to WT12, "AIR PRESSURE
MONITOR : CONSULT
Function (BCM - AIR
PRESSURE MONITOR)".
• If necessary, perform tire
pressure sensor ID registration. Refer to WT-20,
"Work Procedure".
NOTE:
If tire pressure sensor wake-up operation is not completed for two or more tire pressure sensors, the applicable low tire pressure warning lamp blinking patterns are displayed continuously.
(Example: Blinks once/OFF/blinks 3 times = Wake-up operation is not completed at the front left wheel and
rear right wheel tire pressure sensors.)
Revision: 2011 September
WT-32
2012 QUEST
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN ON
Description
A
INFOID:0000000007493021
The low tire pressure warning lamp does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON.
NOTE:
The low tire pressure warning lamp illuminates for approximately 1 second and then turns OFF when the ignition switch is turned ON. This is to check that no abnormal condition is present in the tire pressure monitoring
system.
The lamp bulb may be burnt out or the tire pressure monitoring system may be malfunctioning if the low tire
pressure warning lamp does not illuminate when the ignition switch is turned ON.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007493022
1.CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP SIGNAL
B
C
D
WT
With CONSULT
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
2. Select “ACTIVE TEST” in “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”.
3. Touch “WARNING LAMP” to turn ON the low tire pressure warning lamp.
When “ACTIVE TEST” is performed, does the low tire pressure warning lamp in the combination meter turn
ON?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> GO TO 3.
F
G
H
2.CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP OPERATION
Check that the low tire pressure warning lamp is turned OFF after turns ON for approximately 1 second, when
the ignition switch is turned ON.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
NO
>> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
I
J
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Perform the trouble diagnosis for combination meter power supply circuit. Refer to WT-29, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES-1 >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WT-33
2012 QUEST
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP DOES NOT TURN OFF
Description
INFOID:0000000007493023
The low tire pressure warning lamp does not turn OFF after several seconds is passed after engine starts.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007493024
1.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
1.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
CAUTION:
Never start the engine.
2. Check the tire pressure for all wheels and adjust to the specified value. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Inspect or repair the tires or wheels.
2.CHECK LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP
Check low tire pressure warning lamp display.
Does not low tire pressure warning lamp turn OFF?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK BCM
With CONSULT
Perform “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” in “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR” of “BCM”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check the DTC. Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index".
NO
>> GO TO 4.
4.CHECK BCM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Perform the trouble diagnosis for power supply and ground circuit. Refer to WT-29, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace the BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
Revision: 2011 September
WT-34
2012 QUEST
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP BLINKS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING LAMP BLINKS
Description
A
INFOID:0000000007493025
The low tire pressure warning lamp blinks when the ignition switch is turned ON.
NOTE:
The position of an inactive tire pressure sensor can be identified by checking the blinking timing of the low tire
pressure warning lamp.
B
C
D
WT
F
G
JPEIC0089GB
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007493026
H
1.TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION
Perform tire pressure sensor ID registration. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure".
Is tire pressure sensor ID registration completed?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Perform the self-diagnosis for “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR”. Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index".
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WT-35
2012 QUEST
EASY FILL TIRE ALERT DOES NOT ACTIVATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
EASY FILL TIRE ALERT DOES NOT ACTIVATE
Description
INFOID:0000000007493027
The easy fill tire alert does not function while inflating a tire when the select lever position is in P-range with the
ignition switch ON.
NOTE:
• After starting to inflate the tire, it takes a few seconds for the easy fill tire alert to function.
• If there is no response for approximately 15 seconds or more after inflating the tires, cancel the use of the
easy fill tire alert function or move the vehicle approximately 1 m (3.2 ft) backward or forward to try again.
The air filler pressure may be weak or out of service area.
• For easy fill tire alert, Refer to WT-9, "Easy Fill Tire Alert Function".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007493028
1. LOCATION CHANGE
Move the vehicle to other area and repeat the procedure of the easy fill tire alert function. Refer to WT-9, "Easy
Fill Tire Alert Function".
Is the function normal?
YES >> Normal (the easy fill tire alert may not operate, depending on reception condition.)
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.PERFORM BCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Perform trouble diagnosis for detected DTC. Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index".
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP OPERATION
Check hazard warning lamp operation with hazard switch.
Does the hazard warning lamp blink?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Perform trouble diagnosis for the hazard warning lamp. Refer to EXL-73, "Diagnosis Procedure"
(XENON TYPE), EXL-171, "Diagnosis Procedure" (HALOGEN TYPE).
4.PERFORM TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
Perform self-diagnosis for “TRANSMISSION”.
Is any DTC detected?
YES >> Check malfunctioning circuit. Refer to TM-48, "DTC Index".
NO
>> GO TO 5.
5.CHECK HORN OPERATION
Check horn operation. Refer to SEC-109, "Component Function Check".
Is the operation normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO
>> Repair or replace error-detected parts.
6.PERFORM BCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS
With CONSULT
Drive for 10 minutes at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more.
CAUTION:
Total time driving at a speed of 40 km/h (25 MPH) or more must be 10 minutes.
2. Stop the vehicle.
3. Perform self-diagnosis for “AIR PRESSURE MONITOR”.
Is any DTC detected?
1.
Revision: 2011 September
WT-36
2012 QUEST
EASY FILL TIRE ALERT DOES NOT ACTIVATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
YES >> Check malfunctioning circuit. Refer to BCS-59, "DTC Index".
NO
>> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
A
B
C
D
WT
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WT-37
2012 QUEST
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION CANNOT BE COMPLETED
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION CANNOT BE COMPLETED
Description
INFOID:0000000007493029
The ID of the tire pressure sensor installed in each wheel cannot be registered in the tire pressure monitoring
system. Inspect the tire pressure sensor or the tire pressure monitoring system circuit.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007493030
1.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ACTIVATION TOOL
Check tire pressure sensor activation tool.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO
>> Replace the battery of tire pressure sensor activation tool or repair/replace the tire pressure sensor activation tool.
2.TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR ID REGISTRATION
Perform tire pressure sensor ID registration. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure".
CAUTION:
To perform ID registration, observe the following points:
• Never register ID in a place where radio waves are interfered (e.g. radio tower).
• Never register ID in a place close to vehicles including TPMS.
Is tire pressure sensor ID registration completed?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK TIRE PRESSURE SIGNAL
Change the work location and perform ID registration again.
NOTE:
Depending on the tire pressure sensor position*, a blind spot exists, and the tire pressure receiver gets a
poor reception. If an ID registration is performed under this condition, the registration may not be completed.
In such case, follow the instructions below to improve the radio wave receiving environment.
• Rotate tire by 90°, 180°, or 270°. (This Step is to change tire pressure sensor position.)
• Open the door close to the tire of which ID registration is ongoing.
*: Radio wave reception condition depends on vehicle architecture (e.g. body harness layout, tire wheel
design) or environment.
When ID registration is performed, which wheels do not react?
All wheels react and ID registration is possible.>>INSPECTION END
Only certain wheel(s) do not react.>>Replace applicable tire pressure sensor. Refer to WT-45, "Removal and
Installation".
All wheels do not react.>>Check
the
tire
pressure
receiver.
Refer
to
DLK-233,
"Component Function Check".
Revision: 2011 September
WT-38
2012 QUEST
TIRE
Symptom
ROAD
WHEEL
Revision: 2011 September
Unbalance
Incorrect tire pressure
Vibration
Uneven tire wear
Deformation or damage
WT-39
Non-uniformity
Noise
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shake
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Shimmy
×
×
×
×
×
×
Judder
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Poor quality ride or
handling
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Noise
×
×
×
×
×
Shake
×
×
×
×
×
Shimmy, Judder
×
×
×
Poor quality ride or
handling
×
×
×
×
FRONT AXLE AND FRONT SUSPENSION
REAR AXLE AND REAR SUSPENSION
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
STEERING
×
BRAKE
×
DRIVE SHAFT
×
NVH in ST section.
NVH in BR section.
NVH in FAX, RAX section.
Refer to ROAD WHEEL in this chart.
Refer to TIRE in this chart.
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
ROAD WHEELS
TIRE
NVH in FAX and FSU sections.
DIFFERENTIAL
×
NVH in RAX and RSU sections.
NVH in DLN section.
PROPELLER SHAFT
NVH in DLN section.
WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure"
—
—
WT-40, "Inspection"
WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure"
WT-40, "Wheel Balance Adjustment"
WT-43, "Inspection"
WT-43, "Exploded View"
Reference page
Incorrect tire size
Out-of-round
Possible cause and SUSPECTED PARTS
Improper installation, looseness
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
NOISE, VIBRATION AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
INFOID:0000000007493031
A
Use the chart below to find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace these parts.
B
C
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
2012 QUEST
D
WT
F
G
H
I
J
K
×
L
M
N
×: Applicable
O
P
ROAD WHEEL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
ROAD WHEEL
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007493032
APPEARANCE
Check the road wheel for bend, damage, crack or wear.
Wheel Balance Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007493033
PREPARATION BEFORE ADJUSTMENT
Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the road wheel.
CAUTION:
• Be careful not to scratch the road wheel during removal.
• After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from the road
wheel.
ADJUSTMENT (ALUMINUM WHEEL)
• The details of the adjustment procedure are different for each model of wheel balancer. Therefore, refer to
each instruction manual.
• If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting,
select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for aluminum wheels.
1. Set road wheel on tire balance machine using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine.
2. When inner and outer unbalance values are shown on the tire balance machine indicator, multiply outer
unbalance value by 5/3 to determine balance weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight
with a value closest to the calculated value above and install to the designated outer position of, or at the
designated angle in relation to the road wheel.
CAUTION:
• Never install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight.
• Before installing the balance weight, always clean the mating surface of the road wheel.
a. Indicated unbalance value × 5/3 = balance weight to be installed
Calculation example:
23 g (0.81 oz) × 5/3 = 38.33 g (1.35 oz) ⇒ 37.5 g (1.32 oz) balance weight (closer to calculated balance weight value)
NOTE:
Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated
balance weight value.
Example:
36.2 ⇒ 35 g (1.23 oz)
36.3 ⇒ 37.5 g (1.32 oz)
SMA054D
b.
Installed balance weight in the position.
Revision: 2011 September
WT-40
2012 QUEST
ROAD WHEEL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
• When installing balance weight (1) to road wheels, set it into
the grooved area (A) on the inner wall of the road wheel as
shown in the figure so that the balance weight center (B) is
aligned with the tire balance machine indication position
(angle) (C).
CAUTION:
• Always use genuine NISSAN balance weights.
• Balance weights are non-reusable; always replace with
new ones.
• Never install three or more sheets of balance weight.
A
B
C
D
WT
F
G
JPEIC0040ZZ
c.
If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 g (1.76 oz), install
two balance weight sheets in line with each other as shown in
the figure.
CAUTION:
Never install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
H
I
J
PEIA0033E
3.
4.
5.
Start the tire balance machine again.
Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the tire balance machine indication position
(angle).
CAUTION:
Never install three or more balance weight.
Start the tire balance machine. Check that the inner and outer residual unbalance value is within the
allowable unbalance value.
CAUTION:
If either residual unbalance value exceeds limit, repeat installation procedures.
Allowable unbalance value
Dynamic (At flange) : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel".
Static (At flange)
: Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel".
L
M
N
O
ADJUSTMENT (STEEL WHEEL)
P
Preparation Before Adjustment
Remove balance weight from the road wheel.
Wheel Balance Adjustment
• The details of the adjustment procedure are different for each model of wheel balancer. Therefore, refer to
each instruction manual.
• If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode setting,
select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for steel wheels.
Revision: 2011 September
K
WT-41
2012 QUEST
ROAD WHEEL
< PERIODIC MAINTENANCE >
1. Set road wheel to wheel balancer, and then start wheel balancer.
2. Install balance weight to road wheel according to the unbalance and position (angle) displayed on wheel
balancer.
CAUTION:
• Never install three or more balance weights on one side.
• Always use genuine NISSAN balance weights.
• Balance weights are non-reusable; always replace with new ones.
• Always use a plastic hammer when attaching the weight.
3. Start the tire balance machine. Check that the inner and outer residual unbalance value is within the
allowable unbalance value.
CAUTION:
If either residual unbalance value exceeds limit, repeat installation procedures.
Allowable unbalance value
Dynamic (At flange) : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel".
Static (At flange)
: Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel".
Tire Rotation
INFOID:0000000007493034
• Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals.
Refer to MA-4, "Explanation of General Maintenance".
• When installing the wheel, tighten wheel nuts to the specified
torque. Refer to WT-43, "Exploded View".
CAUTION:
• Never include the T-type spare tire when rotating the tires.
• When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing
the work two to three times in order to prevent the wheels
from developing any distortion.
• Be careful not to tighten wheel nut at torque exceeding the
criteria.
• Use NISSAN genuine wheel nut.
• Perform the ID registration, after tire rotation. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure".
Revision: 2011 September
WT-42
SMA829C
2012 QUEST
ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
A
ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007493035
B
C
D
WT
F
G
JSGIA0639GB
1.
Tire assembly
H
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007493036
I
REMOVAL
1.
2.
Remove wheel nuts.
Remove tire assembly.
J
INSTALLATION
K
Note the following, install in the reverse order of removal.
• When replacing or rotating wheels, perform the ID registration. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure".
Inspection
INFOID:0000000007493037
L
Check tires for wear and improper inflation.
Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel
runout.
Remove tire from aluminum wheel and mount on a tire balance machine.
Set dial indicator as shown in the figure.
Check runout, if the axial runout (A) or radial runout (B) exceeds
the limit, replace aluminum wheel.
M
ALUMINUM WHEEL
1.
2.
a.
b.
c.
Limit
Axial runout (A)
Radial runout (B)
STEEL WHEEL
Check tires for wear and improper inflation.
Revision: 2011 September
WT-43
O
P
: Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel".
: Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel".
SEIA0737E
1.
N
2012 QUEST
ROAD WHEEL TIRE ASSEMBLY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel
runout.
a. Remove tire from steel wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance machine.
b. Set two dial indicators as shown in the illustration.
c. Set each dial indicator to “0”.
d. Rotate wheel and check dial indicators at several points around
the circumference of the wheel.
e. Calculate runout at each point as shown below.
f.
Axial runout (A)
:(
+
)/2
Radial runout (B)
:(
+
)/2
Select maximum positive runout value and the maximum negative value. Add the two values to determine total runout.
CAUTION:
In case a positive or negative value is not available, use the
maximum value (negative or positive) for total runout.
Limit
A : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel".
B : Refer to WT-48, "Road Wheel".
g.
If the total runout value exceeds limit, replace steel wheel.
SEIA0738E
Revision: 2011 September
WT-44
2012 QUEST
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007493038
B
C
D
WT
F
JSEIA0324GB
1.
Tire pressure sensor
2.
Grommet seal
4.
Valve core
5.
Valve cap
3.
G
Valve nut
H
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: Always replace after every disassembly.
I
: Parts that are replaced as a set when the tire is replaced.
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007493039
J
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove tire assembly. Refer to WT-43, "Removal and Installation".
Remove valve cap, valve core and then deflate tire.
NOTE:
If the tire is reused, apply a matching mark to the position of the tire road wheel valve hole for the purpose
of wheel balance adjustment after installation.
Remove valve nut retaining tire pressure sensor and allow tire pressure sensor to fall into tire.
Use the tire changer and disengage the tire beads.
CAUTION:
• Verify that the tire pressure sensor (1) is at the bottom of
the tire while performing the above.
• Be sure not to damage the road wheel or tire pressure
sensor.
Apply bead cream or an equivalent to the tire beads.
Set tire onto the tire changer turntable so that the tire pressure
sensor inside the tire is located close to the road wheel valve
hole.
K
L
M
N
O
P
JPEIC0104ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
WT-45
2012 QUEST
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
7. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom and bounce so that tire
pressure sensor (1) is near valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto
turntable and position valve hole (and tire pressure sensor) 270
degree from mounting/dismounting head (2).
CAUTION:
Be sure not to damage the road wheel and tire pressure
sensor.
8. Remove tire pressure sensor from tire.
9. Remove the grommet seal.
JPEIC0014GB
INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
Apply bead cream or an equivalent to the tire beads.
Install the tire inside beads (1) onto the road wheel (2) in the
position shown in the figure.
Install grommet seal to the tire pressure sensor.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse grommet seal.
• Insert grommet seal all the way to the base.
JPEIC0105ZZ
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Hold tire pressure sensor as shown in the figure, and press the
sensor in the direction shown by arrow ( ) to bring it into absolute contact with valve hole. After this, tighten valve nut to the
specified torque.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse valve core and valve cap.
• Check that grommet seal is free of foreign matter.
• Check that grommet seal contacts horizontally with road
wheel.
• Manually tighten valve nut all the way to the wheel. (Never
use a power tool to avoid impact.)
JSEIA0466GB
Set the tire onto the turntable so that the tire changer arm (2) is
at a position approximately 270° from the tire pressure sensor
(1).
CAUTION:
Be sure that the arm does not contact the tire pressure sensor.
Install the tire outer side beads onto the road wheel.
CAUTION:
When installing, check that the tire does not turn together
with the road wheel.
JPEIC0014GB
Check the tire pressure for all wheels and adjust to the specified
value. Refer to WT-48, "Tire Air Pressure".
NOTE:
Before adding air, align the tire with the position of the matching mark applied at the time of removal.
Install tire to the vehicle. Refer to WT-43, "Removal and Installation".
Perform tire pressure sensor ID registration. Refer to WT-20, "Work Procedure".
Revision: 2011 September
WT-46
2012 QUEST
TIRE PRESSURE RECEIVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
TIRE PRESSURE RECEIVER
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007493040
REMOVAL
1.
B
Remove the remote keyless entry receiver. (The tire pressure receiver is incorporated into remote keyless
entry receiver.) Refer to DLK-459, "Removal and Installation".
C
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
D
WT
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WT-47
2012 QUEST
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
< SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Road Wheel
INFOID:0000000007493041
ALUMINUM WHEEL
Item
Limit
Axial runout
Runout
Less than 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
Radial runout
Dynamic (At flange)
Allowable unbalance
Less than 5 g (0.17 oz) (one side)
Static (At flange)
Less than 10 g (0.35 oz)
STEEL WHEEL
Item
Runout
Limit
Axial runout (Average)
Less than 0.8 mm (0.031 in)
Radial runout (Average)
Less than 0.5 mm (0.020 in)
Dynamic (At flange)
Allowable unbalance
Less than 5 g (0.17 oz) (one side)
Static (At flange)
Less than 10 g (0.35 oz)
STEEL WHEEL (EMERGENCY)
Item
Limit
Axial runout (Average)
Runout
Less than 1.5 mm (0.059 in)
Radial runout (Average)
Tire Air Pressure
INFOID:0000000007493042
Unit: kPa (kgf/cm2, psi)
Item
Standard
Front
Rear
P225/65R16 99T
240 (2.4, 35)
P235/55R18 99T
240 (2.4, 35)
T135/80D16 101M
420 (4.2, 60)
T135/90D16 102M
Revision: 2011 September
WT-48
2012 QUEST
DRIVER CONTROLS
SECTION
WW
WIPER & WASHER
A
B
C
D
E
CONTENTS
PRECAUTION ............................................... 3
WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM - WIPER) .......17
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 3
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R) ................... 18
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER" ................................................................... 3
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 3
Diagnosis Description ..............................................18
CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R) .............................20
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 23
PREPARATION ............................................ 4
BCM, IPDM E/R ................................................. 23
PREPARATION ................................................... 4
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 24
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................. 5
WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM ..................... 24
Wiring Diagram ........................................................24
Component Parts Location ........................................ 5
BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 26
SYSTEM .............................................................. 7
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ....... 26
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM ................... 7
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description ......................................................... 7
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Circuit
Diagram ................................................................... 10
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : FailSafe ......................................................................... 10
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM ................... 11
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System
Description .............................................................. 11
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Circuit
Diagram ................................................................... 13
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Failsafe ......................................................................... 13
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ............................15
COMMON ITEM ......................................................... 15
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM COMMON ITEM) ..................................................... 15
WIPER ....................................................................... 16
Revision: 2011 September
G
H
List of ECU Reference .............................................23
Commercial Service Tool .......................................... 4
COMPONENT PARTS ........................................ 5
F
I
J
K
Work Flow ................................................................26
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 29 WW
FRONT WIPER MOTOR LO CIRCUIT .............. 29
Component Function Check ....................................29
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................29
M
FRONT WIPER MOTOR HI CIRCUIT ............... 30
Component Function Check ....................................30
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................30
FRONT WIPER STOP POSITION SIGNAL
CIRCUIT ............................................................ 31
N
O
Component Function Check ....................................31
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................31
FRONT WIPER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT ... 32
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................32
WASHER SWITCH ............................................ 33
Component Inspection .............................................33
REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT ...................... 34
WW-1
2012 QUEST
P
Component Function Check ................................... 34
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 34
REAR WIPER .................................................... 47
REAR WIPER STOP POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT ................................................................... 36
WIPER ARM .............................................................. 47
WIPER ARM : Removal and Installation ................. 47
WIPER ARM : Adjustment ...................................... 48
Component Function Check ................................... 36
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 36
Exploded View ........................................................ 47
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................. 37
WIPER BLADE .......................................................... 48
WIPER BLADE : Removal and Installation ............. 49
WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
... 37
WIPER REFILL .......................................................... 49
WIPER REFILL : Removal and Installation ............. 49
Symptom Table ...................................................... 37
WIPER MOTOR ......................................................... 49
WIPER MOTOR : Removal and Installation ........... 49
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION ................ 39
Description .............................................................. 39
WASHER TANK ................................................ 51
FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE ............ 40
Exploded View ........................................................ 51
Removal and Installation ......................................... 51
Description .............................................................. 40
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 40
WASHER PUMP ................................................ 53
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............... 42
Exploded View ........................................................ 53
Removal and Installation ......................................... 53
FRONT WIPER .................................................. 42
WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE ............................. 55
Exploded View ........................................................ 42
WIPER ARM .............................................................. 43
WIPER ARM : Removal and Installation ................ 43
WIPER ARM : Adjustment ...................................... 44
WIPER BLADE .......................................................... 44
WIPER BLADE : Removal and Installation ............. 44
WIPER REFILL ......................................................... 45
WIPER REFILL : Removal and Installation ............ 45
WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY ...................................... 45
WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ....................................................................... 45
WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and
Assembly ................................................................ 46
Revision: 2011 September
Exploded View ........................................................ 55
Hydraulic Layout ..................................................... 57
WASHER NOZZLE .................................................... 57
WASHER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation ....... 57
WASHER NOZZLE : Inspection and Adjustment ... 58
WASHER TUBE ........................................................ 60
WASHER TUBE : Removal and Installation ........... 60
WASHER LEVEL SWITCH ............................... 63
Removal and Installation ......................................... 63
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH ...................... 64
Exploded View ........................................................ 64
WW-2
2012 QUEST
PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION >
PRECAUTION
A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
B
INFOID:0000000007492411
The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
C
D
E
F
G
H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover
I
J
K
INFOID:0000000007492412
When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.
WW
M
N
PIIB3706J
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WW-3
2012 QUEST
PREPARATION
< PREPARATION >
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool
INFOID:0000000007492413
Tool name
Description
Adjusting washer nozzle.
(Available in SEC. 289 of PARTS CATALOG: Part
No. 28949 1EA0A)
NOTE:
Washer nozzle adjuster is included with shipment
of nozzle.
Washer nozzle adjuster
JSLIA0149ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
WW-4
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location
INFOID:0000000007492414
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
WW
M
N
O
P
JMLIA2162ZZ
A.
Cowl top, left side of engine room
Revision: 2011 September
B.
Behind front bumper (RH)
WW-5
C.
Back door finisher inside
2012 QUEST
COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
No.
Part
Function
1.
Combination meter
Transmits the vehicle speed signal to BCM via CAN communication.
2.
Combination switch
(Wiper & washer switch)
Refer to BCS-8, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING SYSTEM : System Description" for detailed installation location.
3.
Front wiper motor
• IPDM E/R controls front wiper operation.
• Front wiper stop position signal is transmitted to IPDM E/R.
4.
IPDM E/R
• Controls the integrated relay according to the request (via CAN communication) from BCM.
• Performs the auto stop control of the front wiper.
• Refer to PCS-4, "IPDM E/R : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
5.
Washer level switch
• Combination meter indicates low washer fluid warning judged by the signal from the washer
level switch.
• Refer to MWI-17, "MASTER WARNING LAMP : System Description".
6.
Washer pump
• Washer fluid is sprayed according to washer switch states.
• Switching between front washer and rear washer is performed according to the voltage polarity change to washer pump.
7.
BCM
• Judges the each switch status by the combination switch reading function.
• Requests (via CAN communication) the front wiper relay and the front wiper high relay ON to
IPDM E/R.
• Supplies power to the rear wiper motor.
• Performs the auto stop control of the rear wiper.
• Refer to BCS-4, "BODY CONTROL SYSTEM : Component Parts Location" for detailed installation location.
8.
Rear wiper motor
• BCM controls rear wiper operation.
• Rear wiper stop position signal is transmitted to BCM.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-6
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
SYSTEM
A
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description
INFOID:0000000007492415
B
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
C
D
E
F
JMLIA2011GB
G
OUTLINE
The front wiper is controlled by each function of BCM and IPDM E/R.
H
Control by BCM
• Combination switch reading function
• Front wiper control function
I
Control by IPDM E/R
• Front wiper control function
• Relay control function
Combination meter indicates low washer fluid level warning judged by the signal from the washer level switch.
For detailes of low washer fluid level warning, refer to MWI-17, "MASTER WARNING LAMP : System Description".
J
K
FRONT WIPER BASIC OPERATION
• BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function.
• BCM transmits the front wiper request signal to IPDM E/R via CAN communication depending on each oper- WW
ating condition of the front wiper.
• IPDM E/R turns ON/OFF the integrated front wiper relay and the front wiper high relay according to the front
wiper request signal. IPDM E/R provides the power supply to operate the front wiper HI/LO operation.
M
FRONT WIPER LO OPERATION
• BCM transmits the front wiper request signal (LO) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication according to the
front wiper LO operating condition.
N
Front wiper LO operating condition
- Ignition switch ON
- Front wiper switch LO or front wiper switch MIST (while pressing)
• IPDM E/R turns ON the integrated front wiper relay according to the front wiper request signal (LO).
O
FRONT WIPER HI OPERATION
• BCM transmits the front wiper request signal (HI) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication according to the
front wiper HI operating condition.
Front wiper HI operating condition
- Ignition switch ON
- Front wiper switch HI
• IPDM E/R turns ON the integrated front wiper relay and the front wiper high relay according to the front wiper
request signal (HI).
Revision: 2011 September
WW-7
2012 QUEST
P
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
FRONT WIPER INT OPERATION
• BCM transmits the front wiper request signal (INT) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication depending on the
front wiper INT operating condition and intermittent operation delay interval according to the wiper intermittent dial position.
Front wiper INT operating condition
- Ignition switch ON
- Front wiper switch INT
• IPDM E/R turns ON the integrated front wiper relay so that the front wiper is operated only once according to
the front wiper request signal (INT).
• BCM detects stop position/except stop position of the front wiper motor according to the front wiper stop
position signal received from IPDM E/R via CAN communication.
• BCM transmits the front wiper request signal (INT) again after the intermittent operation delay interval.
JPLIA1256GB
NOTE:
Factory setting of the front wiper intermittent operation is operation linked without vehicle speed. Front wiper
intermittent operation can be set to operation linked or not linked with vehicle speed using CONSULT. Refer to
WW-17, "WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM - WIPER)".
Front wiper intermittent operation with vehicle speed
• BCM calculates the intermittent operation delay interval from the following
- Vehicle speed signal
- Wiper intermittent dial position
Unit: Second
Intermittent operation delay Interval
Wiper intermittent
dial position
Intermittent
operation
interval
Vehicle speed
0 – 5 km/h
(0 – 3.1 MPH)
5 – 65 km/h
(3.1 – 40.4 MPH)*
65 km/h (40.4 MPH) or more
1
0.4
0.24
2.5
1
0.6
3
5
2
1.2
4
7.5
3
1.8
5
12.5
5
3
25
10
6
40
16
9.6
1
2
6
7
Short
↑
↓
Long
*: When operation setting is not linked with vehicle speed.
FRONT WIPER AUTO STOP OPERATION
• BCM stops transmitting the front wiper request signal when the front wiper switch is turned OFF.
• IPDM E/R detects the front wiper stop position signal from the front wiper motor and detects the front wiper
motor position (stop position/except stop position).
Revision: 2011 September
WW-8
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• When the front wiper request signal is stopped, IPDM E/R turns ON the front wiper relay until the front wiper
motor returns to the stop position.
A
B
C
D
E
JPLIA0410GB
NOTE:
• BCM stops the transmitting of the front wiper request signal when the ignition switch is OFF.
• IPDM E/R turns the front wiper relay OFF when the ignition switch is OFF.
F
FRONT WIPER OPERATION LINKED WITH WASHER
• BCM transmits the front wiper request signal (LO) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication according to the
washer linked operating condition of the front wiper.
• BCM transmits the front wiper request signal (LO) so that the front wiper operates approximately 2 times
when the front washer switch OFF is detected.
G
H
Washer linked operating condition of front wiper
•
•
Ignition switch ON
Front washer switch ON (0.4 second or more)
IPDM E/R turns ON the integrated front wiper relay according to the front wiper request signal (LO).
The washer pump is grounded through the combination switch with the front washer switch ON.
I
J
WIPER LINKED AUTO LIGHTING FUNCTION
When light switch is in the AUTO position, front wiper operates, and then headlamp illuminates. Refer to EXL13, "AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM (EXCEPT FOR CANADA) : System Description".
K
WW
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WW-9
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000007492416
JMLIA2150GB
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Fail-Safe
INFOID:0000000007492417
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN
communication recovers normally, it also returns to normal control.
If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM
Revision: 2011 September
WW-10
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Control part
Fail-safe operation
A
• The status just before activation of fail-safe control is maintained until the ignition switch is
turned OFF while the front wiper is operating at LO or HI speed.
• The wiper is operated at LO speed until the ignition switch is turned OFF if the fail-safe control
is activated while the front wiper is set in the INT mode and the front wiper motor is operating.
• Returns automatically wiper to stop position when ignition switch is turned ON if fail-safe control
is activated while front wiper motor is operated and wiper stop in the other position than stop
position.
Front wiper motor
B
C
FRONT WIPER PROTECTION FUNCTION
IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper stop position signal.
When a front wiper stop position signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power supply to wiper
after repeating a front wiper 10 seconds activation and 20 seconds stop.
Ignition switch
E
Front wiper switch
Front wiper stop position signal
OFF
The front wiper stop position signal (stop position) cannot be input for 10 seconds.
ON
The front wiper stop position signal does not change for 10 seconds.
ON
NOTE:
This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R “Data Monitor” that displays “BLOCK” for the item
“WIP PROT” while the wiper is stopped.
F
G
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : System Description
D
INFOID:0000000007492418
H
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
I
J
K
WW
JPLIA1257GB
M
OUTLINE
The rear wiper is controlled by each function of BCM.
N
Control by BCM
• Combination switch reading function
• Rear wiper control function
O
REAR WIPER BASIC OPERATION
• BCM detects the combination switch condition by the combination switch reading function.
• BCM controls the rear wiper to start or stop.
P
REAR WIPER ON OPERATION
• BCM supplies power to the rear wiper motor according to the rear wiper ON operating condition.
Rear wiper ON operating condition
- Ignition switch ON
- Rear wiper switch ON
REAR WIPER INT OPERATION
Revision: 2011 September
WW-11
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
• BCM supplies power to the rear wiper motor according to the INT operating condition.
Rear wiper INT operating condition
•
•
•
Ignition switch ON
Rear wiper switch INT
BCM controls the rear wiper to operate once.
BCM detects the rear wiper motor stopping position.
BCM supplies power to the rear wiper motor after an intermittent from the stop of the rear wiper motor.
JPLIA1258GB
REAR WIPER AUTO STOP OPERATION
• BCM stops supplying power to the rear wiper motor when the rear wiper switch is turned OFF.
• BCM reads a rear wiper stop position signal from the rear wiper motor to detect a rear wiper motor position.
• When the rear wiper motor is at other than the stopping position, BCM continues to supply power to the rear
wiper motor until it returns to the stopping position.
JPLIA1259GB
NOTE:
BCM stops supplying power to the rear wiper motor when the ignition switch is turned OFF.
REAR WIPER OPERATION LINKED WITH WASHER
• BCM supplies power to the rear wiper motor according to the washer linked operating condition of rear
wiper. When the rear washer switch is turned OFF, BCM controls rear wiper to operate approximately 3
times.
Washer linked operating condition of rear wiper
- Ignition switch ON
- Rear washer switch ON (0.4 second or more)
• The washer pump is grounded through the combination switch with the rear washer switch ON.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-12
2012 QUEST
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Circuit Diagram
INFOID:0000000007492419
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
WW
M
N
O
JMLIA2150GB
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM : Fail-safe
INFOID:0000000007492420
REAR WIPER MOTOR PROTECTION
BCM detects the rear wiper stopping position according to the rear wiper stop position signal.
When the rear wiper stop position signal does not change for more than 5 seconds while driving the rear
wiper, BCM stops power supply to protect the rear wiper motor.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-13
2012 QUEST
P
SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Condition of cancellation
1.
2.
3.
More than 1 minute is passed after the rear wiper stop.
Turn rear wiper switch OFF.
Operate the rear wiper switch or rear washer switch.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-14
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
A
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM)
INFOID:0000000007848877
B
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
C
Diagnosis mode
Function Description
Work Support
Changes the setting for each system function.
Self Diagnostic Result
Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.
D
CAN Diag Support Monitor
Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
Data Monitor
The BCM input/output signals are displayed.
Active Test
The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Ecu Identification
The BCM part number is displayed.
Configuration
• Read and save the vehicle specification.
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.
E
F
SYSTEM APPLICATION
G
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item
System
Sub system selection item
Diagnosis mode
Work Support
Data Monitor
Active Test
×
×
×
Door lock
DOOR LOCK
Rear window defogger
REAR DEFOGGER
×
×
Warning chime
BUZZER
×
×
Interior room lamp control system
INT LAMP
×
×
×
Exterior lamp
HEAD LAMP
×
×
×
Wiper and washer
WIPER
×
×
×
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps
FLASHER
×
×
×
Air conditioning control system
AIR CONDITONER
×
×*
• Intelligent Key system
• Engine start system
INTELLIGENT KEY
×
×
Combination switch
COMB SW
Body control system
BCM
×
NVIS
IMMU
×
×
×
Interior room lamp battery saver
BATTERY SAVER
×
×
×
Back door open
TRUNK
Vehicle security system
THEFT ALM
RAP system
RETAINED PWR
×
Signal buffer system
SIGNAL BUFFER
×
×
TPMS
AIR PRESSURE MONITOR
×
×
×
×
I
J
K
WW
M
N
×
×
×
×
×
NOTE:
*: For models with automatic air conditioning control system, this diagnosis mode is not used.
FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)
The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on
CONSULT.
Revision: 2011 September
H
WW-15
2012 QUEST
O
P
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
CONSULT screen item
Indication/Unit
Description
Vehicle Speed
km/h
Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Odo/Trip Meter
km
Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Vehicle Condition
SLEEP>LOCK
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)]
SLEEP>OFF
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)]
LOCK>ACC
While turning power supply position from OFF (LOCK) to ACC
ACC>ON
While turning power supply position from ACC to ON
RUN>ACC
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Except
emergency stop operation)
CRANK>RUN
While turning power supply position from CRANK to RUN
RUN>URGENT
While turning power supply position from RUN to ACC (Emergency stop operation)
ACC>OFF
While turning power supply position from ACC to OFF (OFF)
OFF>LOCK
OFF>ACC
IGN Counter
Power position status of
the moment a particular
DTC is detected*
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to OFF
(LOCK)
While turning power supply position from OFF (OFF) to ACC
ON>CRANK
While turning power supply position from ON to CRANK
OFF>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (OFF)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK>SLEEP
While turning BCM status from normal mode [Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)] to low power consumption mode
LOCK
Power supply position is OFF (LOCK)
OFF
Power supply position is OFF (OFF)
ACC
Power supply position is ACC
ON
Power supply position is ON
ENGINE RUN
Power supply position is RUN
CRANKING
Power supply position is CRANK
0 - 39
The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected
• The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
• The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition
whenever ignition switch OFF → ON.
• The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
NOTE:
*: Refer to the following for details of the power supply position.
• OFF (OFF, LOCK): Ignition switch OFF
• ACC: Ignition switch ACC
• IGN: Ignition switch ON with engine stopped
• RUN: Ignition switch ON with engine running
• CRANK: At engine cranking
Power supply position shifts to “OFF (LOCK)” from “OFF (OFF)”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, shift position is in the P
position, and any of the following conditions are met.
• Closing door
• Opening door
• Door is locked using door request switch
• Door is locked using Intelligent Key
The power supply position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “OFF (LOCK)”.
WIPER
Revision: 2011 September
WW-16
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM - WIPER)
INFOID:0000000007492422
A
WORK SUPPORT
Service item
Setting item
With vehicle speed
(Front wiper intermittent time linked with the vehicle speed and wiper intermittent dial position)
On
WIPER SPEED
SETTING
Without vehicle speed
(Front wiper intermittent time linked with the wiper intermittent dial
position)
Off*
B
Description
The setting of front wiper INT operation can be
changed
C
D
*: Factory setting
DATA MONITOR
E
Monitor Item
[Unit]
Description
F
PUSH SW
[Off/On]
The switch status input from push-button ignition switch.
VEH SPEED 1
[km/h]
Displays the value of the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter via CAN communication.
G
FR WIPER HI
[Off/On]
H
FR WIPER LOW
[Off/On]
Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch reading function
FR WASHER SW
[Off/On]
I
FR WIPER INT
[Off/On]
FR WIPER STOP
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the front wiper stop position signal received from IPDM E/R via CAN
communication.
INT VOLUME
[1 − 7]
Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch reading function
J
K
RR WIPER ON
[Off/On]
RR WIPER INT
[Off/On]
Status of each switch judged by BCM using the combination switch reading function
RR WASHER SW
[Off/On]
M
RR WIPER STOP
[Off/On]
Rear wiper motor (stop position) status input from the rear wiper motor
N
ACTIVE TEST
Test item
FR WIPER
RR WIPER
Revision: 2011 September
WW
Operation
Description
Hi
Transmits the front wiper request signal (HI) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication to operate the front wiper HI operation.
Lo
Transmits the front wiper request signal (LO) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication to
operate the front wiper LO operation.
INT
Transmits the front wiper request signal (INT) to IPDM E/R via CAN communication to
operate the front wiper INT operation.
Off
Stops transmitting the front wiper request signal to stop the front wiper operation.
On
Output the voltage to operate the rear wiper motor.
Off
Stops the voltage to stop the rear wiper motor.
WW-17
2012 QUEST
O
P
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
Diagnosis Description
INFOID:0000000007848890
AUTO ACTIVE TEST
Description
In auto active test, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to check their operation.
• Oil pressure warning lamp
• Front wiper (LO, HI)
• Parking lamp
• License plate lamp
• Tail lamp
• Side marker lamp
• Front fog lamp
• Headlamp (LO, HI)
• A/C compressor (magnet clutch)
• Cooling fan
Operation Procedure
NOTE:
Never perform auto active test in the following condition.
• Passenger door is open.
• CONSULT is connected.
1. Close the hood and lift the wiper arms from the windshield. (Prevent windshield damage due to wiper
operation)
NOTE:
When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield beforehand.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON, and within 20 seconds, press the front door switch (driver side) 10 times.
Then turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test
starts.
NOTE:
Engine starts when ignition switch is turned ON while brake pedal is depressed.
5. The oil pressure warning lamp starts blinking when the auto active test starts.
6. After a series of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE:
• When auto active test has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn the ignition switch OFF.
• When auto active test is not activated, door switch may be the cause. Check door switch. Refer to DLK-209,
"Component Function Check".
Inspection in Auto Active Test
When auto active test is actuated, the following 6 steps are repeated 3 times.
Operation
sequence
Inspection location
Operation
1
Oil pressure warning lamp
Blinks continuously during operation of auto active test
2
Front wiper motor
LO for 5 seconds → HI for 5 seconds
3
•
•
•
•
•
10 seconds
4
Headlamp
5
A/C compressor (magnet clutch)
ON ⇔ OFF 5 times
6
Cooling fan
LO for 5 seconds →MID for 3 seconds → HI for 2 seconds
Parking lamp
License plate lamp
Tail lamp
Side marker lamp
Front fog lamp
Revision: 2011 September
• LO 10 seconds
• HI ON ⇔ OFF 5 times
WW-18
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Concept of auto active test
A
B
C
D
E
JMMIA0836GB
F
• IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN communication. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is considered normal if the auto
active test starts successfully.
• The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated.
G
Diagnosis chart in auto active test
H
Symptom
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Any of the following components do not
operate
Parking lamp
License plate lamp
Tail lamp
Side marker lamp
Front fog lamp
Headlamp (HI, LO)
Front wiper motor
A/C compressor does not operate
Oil pressure warning lamp does not operate
Revision: 2011 September
Inspection contents
Perform auto active test.
Does the applicable system operate?
Possible cause
I
YES
BCM signal input circuit
NO
• Lamp or motor
• Lamp or motor ground circuit
• Harness or connector between IPDM E/
R and applicable system
• IPDM E/R
J
K
YES
• Combination meter signal input circuit
• CAN communication signal between
Combination meter and ECM
• CAN communication signal between
ECM and IPDM E/R
NO
• Magnet clutch
• Harness or connector between IPDM E/
R and magnet clutch
• IPDM E/R
YES
• Harness or connector between IPDM E/
R and oil pressure switch
• Oil pressure switch
• IPDM E/R
NO
• CAN communication signal between
IPDM E/R and BCM
• CAN communication signal between
BCM and Combination meter
• Combination meter
Perform auto active test.
Does the magnet clutch operate?
Perform auto active test.
Does the oil pressure warning
lamp blink?
WW-19
2012 QUEST
WW
M
N
O
P
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Symptom
Inspection contents
Possible cause
YES
• ECM signal input circuit
• CAN communication signal between
ECM and IPDM E/R
NO
• Cooling fan
• Harness or connector between cooling
fan and cooling fan relay
• Harness or connector between IPDM E/
R and cooling fan relay
• Cooling fan relay
• IPDM E/R
Perform auto active test.
Does the cooling fan operate?
Cooling fan does not operate
CONSULT Function (IPDM E/R)
INFOID:0000000007848891
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with IPDM E/R.
Diagnosis mode
Description
Ecu Identification
Allows confirmation of IPDM E/R part number.
Self Diagnostic Result
Displays the diagnosis results judged by IPDM E/R.
Data Monitor
Displays the real-time input/output data from IPDM E/R input/output data.
Active Test
IPDM E/R can provide a drive signal to electronic components to check their operations.
CAN Diag Support Monitor
The results of transmit/receive diagnosis of CAN communication can be read.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC RESULT
Refer to PCS-24, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
Monitor item
Monitor Item
[Unit]
MAIN SIGNALS
Description
MOTOR FAN REQ
[1/2/3/4]
×
Displays the value of the cooling fan speed signal received from ECM via CAN communication.
AC COMP REQ
[Off/On]
×
Displays the status of the A/C compressor request signal received from ECM via
CAN communication.
TAIL&CLR REQ
[Off/On]
×
Displays the status of the position light request signal received from BCM via CAN
communication.
HL LO REQ
[Off/On]
×
Displays the status of the low beam request signal received from BCM via CAN communication.
HL HI REQ
[Off/On]
×
Displays the status of the high beam request signal received from BCM via CAN
communication.
FR FOG REQ
[Off/On]
×
Displays the status of the front fog light request signal received from BCM via CAN
communication.
FR WIP REQ
[Stop/1LOW/Low/Hi]
×
Displays the status of the front wiper request signal received from BCM via CAN
communication.
WIP AUTO STOP
[STOP P/ACT P]
×
Displays the status of the front wiper stop position signal judged by IPDM E/R.
WIP PROT
[Off/BLOCK]
×
Displays the status of the front wiper fail-safe operation judged by IPDM E/R.
IGN RLY1 -REQ
[Off/On]
IGN RLY
[Off/On]
PUSH SW
[Off/On]
Revision: 2011 September
Displays the status of the ignition switch ON signal received from BCM via CAN communication.
×
Displays the status of the ignition relay judged by IPDM E/R.
Displays the status of the push-button ignition switch judged by IPDM E/R.
WW-20
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Monitor Item
[Unit]
MAIN SIGNALS
Description
A
INTER/NP SW
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the shift position judged by IPDM E/R.
ST RLY CONT
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the starter relay status signal received from BCM via CAN
communication.
IHBT RLY -REQ
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the starter control relay signal received from BCM via CAN
communication.
ST/INHI RLY
[Off/ ST /INHI/UNKWN]
Displays the status of the starter relay and starter control relay judged by IPDM E/R.
DETENT SW
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the CVT shift selector (detention switch) judged by IPDM E/R.
S/L RLY -REQ
[Off/On]
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
S/L STATE
[LOCK/UNLK/UNKWN]
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
DTRL REQ
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the daytime running light request signal received from BCM via
CAN communication.
NOTE:
This item is monitored only on the vehicle with daytime running light system.
OIL P SW
[Open/Close]
Displays the status of the oil pressure switch judged by IPDM E/R.
HOOD SW
[Off/On]
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
HL WASHER REQ
[Off/On]
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
THFT HRN REQ
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the theft warning horn request signal received from BCM via
CAN communication.
HORN CHIRP
[Off/On]
Displays the status of the horn reminder signal received from BCM via CAN communication.
CRNRNG LMP REQ
[Off/On]
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but not monitored.
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
ACTIVE TEST
Test item
Test item
Operation
WW
Description
Off
CORNERING LAMP
LH
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but cannot be tested.
M
RH
HORN
FRONT WIPER
MOTOR FAN
HEAD LAMP WASHER
On
Operates horn relay for 20 ms.
Off
OFF
Lo
Operates the front wiper relay.
N
Hi
Operates the front wiper relay and front wiper high relay.
1
OFF
2
Operates the cooling fan relay-1.
3
Operates the cooling fan relay-2.
4
Operates the cooling fan relay-2 and cooling fan relay-3.
On
NOTE:
The item is indicated, but cannot be tested.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-21
O
P
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION >
Test item
EXTERNAL LAMPS
Operation
Description
Off
OFF
TAIL
Operates the tail lamp relay and the daytime running light relay.
Lo
Operates the headlamp low relay.
Hi
Operates the headlamp low relay and ON/OFF the headlamp high relay at 1 second intervals.
Fog
Operates the front fog lamp relay.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-22
2012 QUEST
BCM, IPDM E/R
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION >
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
A
BCM, IPDM E/R
List of ECU Reference
INFOID:0000000007492425
ECU
Reference
C
BCS-36, "Reference Value"
BCM
B
BCS-58, "Fail-safe"
BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
D
BCS-59, "DTC Index"
PCS-16, "Reference Value"
IPDM E/R
E
PCS-23, "Fail-safe"
PCS-24, "DTC Index"
F
G
H
I
J
K
WW
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WW-23
2012 QUEST
WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
WIRING DIAGRAM
WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
INFOID:0000000007492426
JCLWA5179GB
Revision: 2011 September
WW-24
2012 QUEST
WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM >
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
WW
M
N
O
JCLWA5180GB
P
Revision: 2011 September
WW-25
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
INFOID:0000000007848899
OVERALL SEQUENCE
JMKIA8652GB
DETAILED FLOW
Revision: 2011 September
WW-26
2012 QUEST
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM
1.
2.
A
Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurs).
Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning.
B
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC
C
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.)
Erase DTC.
Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information.
Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4.
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.
D
E
F
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
G
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
H
>> GO TO 5.
4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
I
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
J
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected K
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-58, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" (BCM) or PCS-24,
"DTC Index" (IPDM E/R), and determine trouble diagnosis order.
WW
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
M
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIRN
MATION PROCEDURE.
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
O
NO
>> Check according to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step
4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
Is the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO
>> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CONSULT.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
Revision: 2011 September
WW-27
2012 QUEST
P
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION >
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO
>> Check according to GI-42, "Intermittent Incident".
8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1.
2.
3.
Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replacement.
Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it.
>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the
malfunction is repaired securely.
When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the
symptom is not detected.
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 7.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4.
NO
>> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-28
2012 QUEST
FRONT WIPER MOTOR LO CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS
A
FRONT WIPER MOTOR LO CIRCUIT
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492428
B
1.CHECK FRONT WIPER LO OPERATION
C
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
1. Select “FRONT WIPER” of IPDM E/R active test item.
2. With operating the test item, check front wiper operation.
Lo
Off
D
: Front wiper (LO) operation
: Stop the front wiper.
E
Is front wiper (LO) operation normally?
YES >> Front wiper motor LO circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to WW-29, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492429
1.CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (LO) OUTPUT VOLTAGE
G
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front wiper motor connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Select “FRONT WIPER” of IPDM E/R active test item.
5. With operating the test item, check voltage between front wiper motor harness connector and ground.
H
I
(+)
Front wiper motor
(−)
Connector
Terminal
E12
5
Condition
Voltage (Approx.)
J
Ground
FRONT WIPER
Lo
9-16V
Off
0V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front wiper motor.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
K
WW
2.CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (LO) CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front wiper motor harness connector.
IPDM E/R
4.
M
N
Front wiper motor
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
E10
4
E12
5
Continuity
Existed
O
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
E10
4
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-29
2012 QUEST
P
FRONT WIPER MOTOR HI CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
FRONT WIPER MOTOR HI CIRCUIT
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492430
1.CHECK FRONT WIPER HI OPERATION
1.
2.
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Select “FRONT WIPER” of IPDM E/R active test item.
With operating the test item, check front wiper operation.
Hi
Off
: Front wiper (HI) operation
: Stop the front wiper.
Is front wiper (HI) operation normally?
YES >> Front wiper motor HI circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to WW-30, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492431
1.CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (HI) OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front wiper motor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “FRONT WIPER” of IPDM E/R active test item.
With operating the test item, check voltage between front wiper motor harness connector and ground.
(+)
Front wiper motor
(−)
Connector
Terminal
E12
3
Condition
Ground
FRONT WIPER
Voltage (Approx.)
Hi
9-16V
Off
0V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front wiper motor.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR (HI) CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front wiper motor harness connector.
IPDM E/R
4.
Front wiper motor
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
E10
5
E12
3
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
E10
5
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-30
2012 QUEST
FRONT WIPER STOP POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
FRONT WIPER STOP POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
A
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492432
1.CHECK FRONT WIPER STOP POSITION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
B
CONSULT DATA MONITOR
Select “WIP AUTO STOP” of IPDM E/R data monitor item.
Operate the front wiper.
With the front wiper operation, check the monitor status.
Monitor item
C
Condition
WIP AUTO STOP
Front wiper motor
Monitor status
Stop position
Except stop position
ACT P
E
Is the status of item normal?
YES >> Front wiper stop position signal circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to WW-31, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492433
1.CHECK IPDM E/R OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
D
STOP P
G
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front wiper motor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between front wiper motor harness connector and ground.
H
(+)
I
Front wiper motor
Connector
Terminal
E12
1
(−)
Voltage (Approx.)
Ground
9-16V
J
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front wiper motor.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
K
2.CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect IPDM E/R connector.
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and front wiper motor harness connector.
IPDM E/R
4.
WW
M
Front wiper motor
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
E10
16
E12
1
Continuity
Existed
N
Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connector and ground.
IPDM E/R
Connector
Terminal
E10
16
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: 2011 September
O
WW-31
2012 QUEST
FRONT WIPER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
FRONT WIPER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492434
1.CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front wiper motor connector.
Check continuity between front wiper motor harness connector and ground.
Front wiper motor
Connector
Terminal
E12
4
Ground
Continuity
Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-32
2012 QUEST
WASHER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
WASHER SWITCH
A
Component Inspection
INFOID:0000000007492435
1.CHECK WASHER SWITCH
B
1.
2.
3.
C
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect combination switch connector.
Check continuity between the combination switch terminals.
A
: Terminal 4
B
: Terminal 6
C
: Terminal 3
D
: Terminal 1
D
E
JPLIA0164GB
F
Combination switch
Condition
Terminal
Continuity
G
3
4
1
6
1
4
6
3
Front washer switch ON
Existed
H
Rear washer switch ON
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO
>> Replace combination switch (Wiper and washer switch).
I
J
K
WW
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WW-33
2012 QUEST
REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492436
1.CHECK REAR WIPER ON OPERATION
1.
2.
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Select “RR WIPER” of BCM active test item.
With operating the test item, check rear wiper operation.
On
Off
: Rear wiper ON operation
: Stop the rear wiper.
Is rear wiper operation normally?
YES >> Rear wiper motor circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to WW-34, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492437
1.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear wiper motor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “RR WIPER” of BCM active test item.
With operating the test item, check voltage between rear wiper motor harness connector and ground.
(+)
Rear wiper motor
(−)
Connector
Terminal
D193
1
Ground
Condition
REAR WIPER
Voltage (Approx.)
On
9-16V
Off
0V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear wiper motor harness connector.
BCM
4.
Rear wiper motor
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M122
54
D193
1
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M122
54
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR GROUND OPEN CIRCUIT
Check continuity between rear wiper motor harness connector and ground.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-34
2012 QUEST
REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
Rear wiper motor
Connector
Terminal
D193
3
Ground
Continuity
A
Existed
B
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear wiper motor.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
WW
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WW-35
2012 QUEST
REAR WIPER STOP POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS >
REAR WIPER STOP POSITION SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Component Function Check
INFOID:0000000007492438
1.CHECK REAR WIPER STOP POSITION SIGNAL
1.
2.
3.
CONSULT DATA MONITOR
Select “WIPER” of BCM data monitor item.
Operate the rear wiper.
Check that “RR WIPER STOP” changes to “On” and “Off” linked with the wiper operation.
Monitor item
Condition
RR WIPER STOP
Rear wiper motor
Monitor status
Stop position
On
Except stop position
Off
Is the status of item normal?
YES >> Rear wiper stop position signal circuit is normal.
NO
>> Refer to WW-36, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492439
1.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect rear wiper motor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Check voltage between rear wiper motor harness connector and ground.
(+)
Rear wiper motor
Connector
Terminal
D193
4
(−)
Voltage (Approx.)
Ground
12V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear wiper motor.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK REAR WIPER MOTOR CIRCUIT
1.
2.
3.
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect BCM connector.
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear wiper motor harness connector.
BCM
4.
Rear wiper motor
Connector
Terminal
Connector
Terminal
M122
44
D193
4
Continuity
Existed
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
BCM
Connector
Terminal
M122
44
Ground
Continuity
Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-36
2012 QUEST
WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
A
WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
Symptom Table
INFOID:0000000007492440
Symptom
HI only
Front wiper does not
operate
Lo and INT
INT only
HI, LO and INT
HI only
Probable malfunction location
Inspection item
• Combination switch
• Harness between combination switch and BCM
• BCM
Combination switch
Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom
Table"
• IPDM E/R
• Harness between IPDM E/R and front wiper
motor
• Front wiper motor
Front wiper motor (HI) circuit
Refer to WW-30, "Component Function Check".
Front wiper request signal
• BCM
• IPDM E/R
IPDM E/R DATA MONITOR
“FR WIP REQ”
• Combination switch
• Harness between combination switch and BCM
• BCM
Combination switch
Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom
Table"
• IPDM E/R
• Harness between IPDM E/R and front wiper
motor
• Front wiper motor
Front wiper motor (LO) circuit
Refer to WW-29, "Component Function Check"
Front wiper request signal
• BCM
• IPDM E/R
IPDM E/R DATA MONITOR
“FR WIP REQ”
• Combination switch
• Harness between combination switch and BCM
• BCM
Combination switch
Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom
Table"
Front wiper request signal
• BCM
• IPDM E/R
IPDM E/R DATA MONITOR
“FR WIP REQ”
LO only
Revision: 2011 September
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
• Combination switch
• BCM
Combination switch
Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom
Table"
WW
Front wiper request signal
• BCM
• IPDM E/R
IPDM E/R DATA MONITOR
“FR WIP REQ”
M
—
N
• Combination switch
• BCM
Combination switch
Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom
Table"
Front wiper request signal
• BCM
• IPDM E/R
IPDM E/R DATA MONITOR
“FR WIP REQ”
IPDM E/R
INT only
C
D
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
“FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE”
Refer to WW-40, "Diagnosis Procedure".
IPDM E/R
Front wiper does not
stop
B
O
P
—
• Combination switch
• BCM
Combination switch
Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom
Table"
Front wiper request signal
• BCM
• IPDM E/R
IPDM E/R DATA MONITOR
“FR WIP REQ”
WW-37
2012 QUEST
WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM SYMPTOMS
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
Symptom
Intermittent adjustment
cannot be performed.
Probable malfunction location
Inspection item
• Combination switch
• Harness between combination switch and BCM
• BCM
Combination switch
Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom
Table"
BCM
Intermittent control
linked with vehicle
speed cannot be performed
Front wiper does not
operate normally
Wiper is not linked to
the washer operation.
—
Check that the wiper setting is linked with vehicle speed
Refer to WW-17, "WIPER : CONSULT Function (BCM - WIPER)".
• Combination switch
• Harness between combination switch and BCM
• BCM
BCM
—
Does not return to stop
position. [Repeatedly
operates for 10 seconds and then stops
for 20 seconds. (Failsafe)]
• IPDM E/R
• Harness between IPDM E/R and front wiper
motor
• Front wiper motor
Front wiper stop position signal circuit
Refer to WW-31, "Component Function Check"
ON only
• Combination switch
• Harness between combination switch and BCM
• BCM
Combination switch
Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom
Table"
INT only
• Combination switch
• Harness between combination switch and BCM
• BCM
Combination switch
Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom
Table"
• Combination switch
• Harness between combination switch and BCM
• BCM
Combination switch
Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom
Table"
•
•
•
•
Rear wiper motor circuit
Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom
Table"
Rear wiper does not
operate
ON and INT
BCM
Harness between rear wiper motor and BCM
Harness between rear wiper motor and ground
Rear wiper motor
ON only
• Combination switch
• BCM
Combination switch
Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom
Table"
INT only
• Combination switch
• BCM
Combination switch
Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom
Table"
• Combination switch
• Harness between rear wiper motor and BCM
• BCM
Combination switch
Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom
Table"
Rear wiper does not
stop
Wiper is not linked to
the washer operation.
Rear wiper does not
operate normally
Combination switch
Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom
Table"
BCM
Rear wiper does not
return to the stop position. [Stops after a fivesecond operation.
(Fail-safe)]
Revision: 2011 September
—
• BCM
• Harness between rear wiper motor and BCM
• Rear wiper motor
WW-38
Rear wiper stop position signal circuit
Refer to WW-36, "Component Function Check"
2012 QUEST
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
NORMAL OPERATING CONDITION
Description
A
INFOID:0000000007492441
FRONT WIPER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION
B
• IPDM E/R may stop the front wiper to protect the front wiper motor if any obstruction (operation resistance)
such as a large amount of snow is detected during the front wiper operation.
• At that time turn OFF the front wiper and remove the foreign object. Then wait for approximately 20 seconds
or more and reactivate the front wiper. The wiper will operate normally.
C
REAR WIPER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION
• BCM may stop rear wiper to protect the rear wiper motor when the rear wiper is stopped for 5 seconds or
more due to a snowfall.
• Rear wiper operates normally one minute after the obstacles are removed with rear wiper OFF.
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
WW
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WW-39
2012 QUEST
FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE
Description
INFOID:0000000007492442
The front wiper does not operate under any operation conditions.
Diagnosis Procedure
INFOID:0000000007492443
1.CHECK WIPER RELAY OPERATION
1.
2.
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Select “FRONT WIPER” of IPDM E/R active test item.
With operating the test item, check front wiper operation.
Lo
Hi
Off
: Front wiper LO operation
: Front wiper HI operation
: Stop the front wiper.
Is front wiper operation normally?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO
>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK FUSES
Check that the following fuse is not fusing.
Unit
Front wiper motor
Location
No.
Capacity
IPDM E/R
60
30 A
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO
>> Replace the fuse with a new one after repairing the applicable circuit.
3.CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check front wiper motor ground circuit. Refer to WW-32, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO
>> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK FRONT WIPER MOTOR INPUT VOLTAGE
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CONSULT ACTIVE TEST
Turn ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect front wiper motor connector.
Turn ignition switch ON.
Select “FRONT WIPER” of IPDM E/R active test item.
With operating the test item, check voltage between front wiper motor harness connector and ground.
(+)
Front wiper motor
Connector
(−)
Condition
Voltage (Approx.)
Terminal
5
E12
Ground
FRONT WIPER
3
Lo
9-16V
Off
0V
Hi
9-16V
Off
0V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front wiper motor.
NO
>> Replace IPDM E/R.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-40
2012 QUEST
FRONT WIPER DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS >
5.CHECK FRONT WIPER REQUEST SIGNAL INPUT
A
CONSULT DATA MONITOR
1. Select “FR WIP REQ” of IPDM E/R data monitor item.
2. Switch the front wiper switch to HI and LO.
3. With operating the front wiper switch, check the status of “FR WIP REQ”.
Monitor item
Condition
Front wiper switch HI
FR WIP REQ
Front wiper switch LO
B
Monitor status
On
Hi
Off
Stop
On
Low
Off
Stop
C
D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace IPDM E/R.
NO
>> GO TO 6.
E
6.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH
F
Perform the inspection of the combination switch. Refer to BCS-80, "Symptom Table".
Is combination switch normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-82, "Removal and Installation".
NO
>> Repair or replace the applicable parts.
G
H
I
J
K
WW
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WW-41
2012 QUEST
FRONT WIPER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
FRONT WIPER
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007492444
REMOVAL VIEW
JMLIA2122GB
1.
Front wiper arm cap
2.
Front wiper arm LH
3.
Front wiper blade LH
6.
Front wiper blade RH
4.
Front wiper refill LH
5.
Front wiper arm RH
7.
Front wiper refill RH
8.
Front wiper drive assembly
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
DISASSEMBLY VIEW
Revision: 2011 September
WW-42
2012 QUEST
FRONT WIPER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
A
B
C
D
E
F
JMLIA2064ZZ
1.
4.
Wiper linkage 2
2.
Wiper linkage 1
3.
Shaft seal
Motor arm
5.
Front wiper motor assembly
6.
Front wiper frame
G
: Multi-purpose grease or an equivalent
WIPER ARM
H
WIPER ARM : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492445
I
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Operate front wiper to move it to the auto stop position.
Fully open hood assembly.
Pull front wiper arm caps in direction indicated by arrow as
shown in the figure. Remove front wiper arm caps.
J
K
: Pawl
WW
M
JMLIA2157ZZ
4.
5.
Remove front wiper arm mounting nuts.
Raise front wiper arm, and remove front wiper arm from the front wiper drive assembly.
N
INSTALLATION
1.
Clean front wiper arm mount as shown in the figure to prevent
nuts from being loosened.
O
P
ELH0717D
Revision: 2011 September
WW-43
2012 QUEST
FRONT WIPER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Operate front wiper motor to move the wiper to the auto stop position.
3. Install front wiper arm to front wiper drive assembly. Temporarily tighten mounting nut.
4. Adjust front wiper blade position. Refer to WW-44, "WIPER ARM : Adjustment".
5. Install front wiper arms by tightening the mounting nuts.
For the specified torque, refer to WW-42, "Exploded View".
6. Operation wiper to move it to the auto stop position.
CAUTION:
Before operating wiper, inject washer fluid so that windshield glass damage by wiper operation is
prevented.
7. Check that front wiper blades stop at the specified position.
8. Install front wiper arm caps.
WIPER ARM : Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007492446
WIPER BLADE POSITION ADJUSTMENT
Clearance between the end of cowl top cover/ front fender cover and the top of front wiper blade center.
JMLIA2124ZZ
1.
Windshield glass
2.
Front fender cover
4.
Cowl top cover
5.
Front wiper blade LH
3.
Front wiper blade RH
Standard clearance
D
P
: 35.0 ± 7.5 mm (1.378 ± 0.295 in)
: 37.2 ± 7.5 mm (0.295 ± 0.295 in)
WIPER BLADE
WIPER BLADE : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492447
REMOVAL
1.
Lift up front wiper arm, and set to the position where wiper arm can be locked back.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-44
2012 QUEST
FRONT WIPER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Remove lock lever (A) of front wiper blade (1). Pull front wiper blade in the direction indicated by the arrow
as shown in the figure to remove front wiper blade from front wiper arm (2).
A
B
C
JMLIA2123ZZ
CAUTION:
Wrap wiper arm using a shop cloth so that wiper blade does not damage windshield glass.
INSTALLATION
D
E
Install in the reverse order of removal.
WIPER REFILL
WIPER REFILL : Removal and Installation
F
INFOID:0000000007492448
REMOVAL
1.
2.
G
Remove front wiper blade from the front wiper arm. Refer to WW-44, "WIPER BLADE : Removal and
Installation".
From portion (A) of front wiper refill (1), disengage front wiper
blade portion (B) and remove front wiper refill in the direction
indicated by the arrow as shown in the figure.
H
I
J
JMLIA2224ZZ
K
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• For installation of vertebra (1), align cutout of vertebra to convex portion (A) of wiper refill (2) as shown in the figure.
WW
M
N
O
JMLIA1613ZZ
• For installation of wiper refill, check that wiper refill is not twisted while installing.
• Check that wiper refill is inserted normally from the correct direction.
P
WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY
WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492449
REMOVAL
Revision: 2011 September
WW-45
2012 QUEST
FRONT WIPER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
1. Remove front wiper arm (LH and RH). Refer to WW-43, "WIPER ARM : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect front wiper motor harness connector.
4. Remove mounting bolts from front wiper drive assembly.
5. Remove front wiper drive assembly from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY : Disassembly and Assembly
INFOID:0000000007492450
DISASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
Remove wiper linkage 1 and 2 from the front wiper frame.
CAUTION:
Never bend the linkage or damage the plastic part of the ball joint when removing the wiper linkage.
Remove wiper motor mounting nuts, and then remove the motor arm.
Remove wiper motor mounting bolts, and then remove the front wiper motor from the front wiper frame.
ASSEMBLY
1. Connect front wiper motor harness connector.
2. Operate front wiper to move it to the auto stop position.
3. Disconnect front wiper motor harness connector.
4. Install front wiper motor to front wiper frame.
5. Install front wiper motor to the motor arm.
6. Install wiper linkage 1 to the front wiper motor and the front wiper frame.
7. Install wiper linkage 2 to the front wiper frame.
CAUTION:
• Never drop wiper motor or cause it to come into contact with other parts.
• Be careful for the grease condition at the wiper motor and wiper linkage joint (retainer). Apply multipurpose grease or an equivalent if necessary.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-46
2012 QUEST
REAR WIPER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
REAR WIPER
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007492451
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
JMLIA2131GB
1.
Rear wiper refill
2.
Rear wiper blade
3.
Rear wiper arm
4.
Rear wiper arm cover
5.
Pivot seal
6.
Rear wiper motor
K
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
WW
WIPER ARM
WIPER ARM : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492452
M
REMOVAL
1.
2.
N
Operate rear wiper to move it to the auto stop position.
Pull rear wiper arm caps in direction indicated by arrow as
shown in the figure. Remove rear wiper arm caps.
O
: Pawl
P
JMLIA2132ZZ
3.
Remove rear wiper arm mounting nuts.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-47
2012 QUEST
REAR WIPER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Raise rear wiper arm, and remove rear wiper arm from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1.
Clean rear wiper arm mount as shown in the figure to prevent
nuts from being loosened.
SKIA0082J
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Operate rear wiper motor to move the wiper to the auto stop position.
Install rear wiper arm to wiper drive assembly. Temporarily tighten mounting nut.
Adjust rear wiper blade position. Refer to WW-48, "WIPER ARM : Adjustment".
Install rear wiper arms by tightening the mounting nuts.
For the specified torque, refer to WW-47, "Exploded View".
Operate rear wiper to move it to the auto stop position.
CAUTION:
Before operating rear wiper, inject washer fluid so that windshield glass damage by rear wiper
operation is prevented.
Check that rear wiper blades stop at the specified position.
Install rear wiper arm caps.
WIPER ARM : Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007492453
REAR WIPER BLADE POSITION ADJUSTMENT
Set the wiper blade top on the defrosting wire (A) (clearance between the end of back door glass and the top
of wiper blade center).
Standard clearance
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
L
Rear wiper blade
Back door window glass
Back door panel
Back door trim
: Rear defogger wire print
: 50.2 ± 7.5 mm (1.976 ± 0.295in)
JMLIA2158ZZ
WIPER BLADE
Revision: 2011 September
WW-48
2012 QUEST
REAR WIPER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
WIPER BLADE : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492454
A
REMOVAL
1.
Lift up and hold rear wiper arm. Remove rear wiper blade (1) from rear wiper arm (2) while rotating rear
wiper blade (1) in the direction indicated by the arrow as shown in the figure.
B
C
D
E
JMLIA1989ZZ
CAUTION:
Wrap wiper arm using a shop cloth so that wiper blade does not damage back door window glass.
F
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
WIPER REFILL
G
WIPER REFILL : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492455
REMOVAL
1.
2.
H
Remove rear wiper blade from the rear wiper arm. Refer to WW-49, "WIPER BLADE : Removal and
Installation".
Remove rear wiper refill (2) from the end portion of rear wiper
blade (1) in the direction indicated by the arrow as shown in the
figure. Remove rear wiper refill while sliding it sideward.
I
J
K
JMLIA2026ZZ
WW
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• For installation of wiper refill, check that wiper refill is not twisted while installing.
• Check that wiper refill is inserted normally from the correct direction.
M
WIPER MOTOR
N
WIPER MOTOR : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492456
O
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove rear wiper arm. Refer to WW-47, "WIPER ARM : Removal and Installation".
Remove back door lower finisher. Refer to INT-47, "BACK DOOR LOWER FINISHER : Removal and
Installation".
Disconnect rear wiper motor harness connector.
Remove rear wiper motor mounting nut.
Raise rear waiper motor, and remove rear wiper motor from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Never drop rear wiper motor or cause it to come into contact with other parts.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-49
2012 QUEST
P
REAR WIPER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
6. Remove pivot seal from the back door.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-50
2012 QUEST
WASHER TANK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
WASHER TANK
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007492457
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
WW
JMLIA2134GB
1.
Washer tank inlet
2.
Washer tank inlet cap
3.
Washer tank assembly
M
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)
: Vehicle front
N
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492458
O
REMOVAL
1.
Fully open hood assembly.
P
Revision: 2011 September
WW-51
2012 QUEST
WASHER TANK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
2. Remove washer tank inlet fixing clip (A).
3. Pull out washer tank inlet (1) from the washer tank.
: Vehicle front
JMLIA1535ZZ
4.
5.
6.
7.
Remove fender protector RH (front). Refer to EXT-22, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect washer pump connector (A) and washer level switch
connector (B).
Remove harness fixing clips (C) from the washer tank (1).
Disconnect front washer tube (3) and rear washer tube (4) from
the front & rear washer pump (2).
: Clip
: Vehicle front
JMLIA2152ZZ
8.
9.
Remove washer tank mounting bolts.
Remove washer tank from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• When installing tube to front & rear washer pump, be sure to install to front and rear correctly.
• Add water up to the top of the washer tank inlet after installing. Check that there is no leakage.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-52
2012 QUEST
WASHER PUMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
WASHER PUMP
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007492459
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
JMLIA2136ZZ
1.
Washer tank
2.
Packing
3.
Rear washer tube
4.
Front & rear washer pump
5.
Front washer tube
6.
Washer pump connector
J
: Vehicle front
K
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492460
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
WW
Remove fender protector RH (front). Refer to EXT-22, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect washer pump connector (A).
Disconnect front washer tube (3) and rear washer tube (4) from
the front & rear washer pump (2).
Remove washer pump from the washer tank (1).
M
N
: Vehicle front
O
JMLIA2153ZZ
P
5.
Remove packing from the washer tank.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• When installing tube to front & rear washer pump, be sure to install to front and rear correctly.
• Check that there is no leakage after installation or replace packing with new part if it has been damage.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-53
2012 QUEST
WASHER PUMP
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
• Never twist the packing when installing the washer pump.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-54
2012 QUEST
WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE
A
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007492461
FRONT WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
JMLIA2149ZZ
1.
Front washer nozzle LH
2.
Front washer nozzle RH
3.
Cowl top cover
4.
Front washer tube B
5.
Joint A
6.
Washer tank assembly
7.
Front washer tube A
8.
Check valve
9.
Front washer tube C
10. Front washer tube D
K
WW
11. Joint B
: Clip
M
REAR WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WW-55
2012 QUEST
WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
JMLIA2156ZZ
1.
Rear washer tube A
2.
Washer tank assembly
3.
4.
Joint A
5.
Rear washer tube B
6.
Grommet A
Rear washer tube C
7.
Rear washer nozzle
8.
Joint B
9.
Grommet B
10. Back door seal rubber
: Clip
Revision: 2011 September
WW-56
2012 QUEST
WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
Hydraulic Layout
INFOID:0000000007492462
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
JMLIA2135ZZ
1.
Grommet A
2.
Rear washer tube
3.
Washer tank assembly
6.
Rear washer nozzle
4.
Front washer tube
5.
Front washer nozzle
7.
Grommet B
8.
Back door seal rubber
J
K
: Clip
WASHER NOZZLE
WW
WASHER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492463
M
FRONT WASHER NOZZLE
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
N
Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect front washer tube (3) from the front washer nozzle
(1).
Press front washer nozzle fixing pawls toward the direction
shown by the arrows 2 and pull up remove from cowl top cover
(2).
O
P
JMLIA1537ZZ
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-57
2012 QUEST
WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
CAUTION:
• The spray positions differ, check that left and right nozzles are installed correctly.
• Adjust the washer nozzle spray position. Refer to WW-58, "WASHER NOZZLE : Inspection and
Adjustment".
REAR WASHER NOZZLE
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Remove rear spoiler. Refer to EXT-44, "Removal and Installation".
Remove high-mounted stop lamp.
• Xenon type: Refer to EXL-104, "Removal and Installation".
• Halogen type: Refer to EXL-201, "Removal and Installation".
Press rear washer nozzle fixing pawls (A) toward the direction
shown by the arrows and remove from rear spoiler (1).
JMLIA2161ZZ
4.
Disconnect front washer tube from the front washer nozzle.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Adjust the washer nozzle spray position. Refer to WW-58, "WASHER NOZZLE : Inspection and Adjustment".
WASHER NOZZLE : Inspection and Adjustment
INFOID:0000000007492464
INSPECTION
FRONT CHECK VALVE INSPECTION
Check that air can pass through the hose by blowing forward (toward
the nozzle), and check that air cannot pass through by sucking.
JMLIA1538ZZ
REAR CHECK VALVE INSPECTION
Check that air can pass through the hose by blowing forward (toward
the nozzle), and check that air cannot pass through by sucking.
JMLIA2159ZZ
Revision: 2011 September
WW-58
2012 QUEST
WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
ADJUSTMENT
A
FRONT WASHER NOZZLE SPRAY POSITION ADJUSTMENT
Adjust spray positions to match the positions shown in the figure.
B
C
D
E
F
G
JMLIA2065ZZ
: Spray area
1.
H
Black printed frame line
Unit: mm (in)
Driver side
Passenger side
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
X
578 (22.76)
381 (15.00)
181 (7.13)
129 (5.08)
88 (3.46)
169 (6.65)
366 (14.41)
484 (19.06)
Y
638 (14.49)
62 (2.44)
56 (2.20)
703 (27.68)
674 (26.54)
49 (1.93)
61 (2.40)
504 (19.84)
Check that washer fluid is splayed on 70% or more the splay area (
spray area deviates from the specification, adjust the washer nozzle.
CAUTION:
• Use washer nozzle adjuster (A) for nozzle (1) insert adjustment if the jet a is outside the angle.
• Never use needle or small pin.
I
J
) when spraying washer fluid. If the
K
WW
M
N
JMLIA1539ZZ
O
NOTE:
If wax or dust gets into the nozzle, remove wax or dust with a needle or small pin.
REAR WASHER NOZZLE SPRAY POSITION ADJUSTMENT
Adjust spray positions to match the positions shown in the figure.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-59
P
2012 QUEST
WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
JMLIA2155ZZ
1.
Rear washer nozzle
2.
Black print frame line
Unit: mm (in)
H : Height
L : Length
φ : Spray position area
3.0 (0.118)
115.0 (4.528)
30 (1.181)
Insert a needle or similar object (A) into the spray opening (1) and
move up/down and left/right to adjust the spray position.
JMLIA2160ZZ
NOTE:
If wax or dust gets into the nozzle, remove wax or dust with a needle or small pin.
WASHER TUBE
WASHER TUBE : Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492465
FRONT WASHER TUBE
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Fully open hood assembly.
Remove fender protector RH (front). Refer to EXT-22, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect front washer tub A from the front & rear washer pump.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-60
2012 QUEST
WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Disconnect front washer tube A (1) from joint A (2).
5. Remove front washer tube mounting clips (A) from the Vehicle.
6. Remove front washer tube mounting clips from front washer
tube A and B (3).
7. Remove front washer tube A from the vehicle.
A
B
: Vehicle front
C
D
E
F
G
JMLIA2165ZZ
Remove cowl top cover. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect front washer tube C and D from the front washer nozzle. Refer to WW-57, "WASHER NOZZLE : Removal and Installation".
10. Remove front washer tube B.
a. Disconnect front washer tube B from the cowl top cover.
b. Disconnect front washer tube B check valve.
11. Remove front washer tube C.
a. Disconnect front washer tube C from the cowl top cover.
b. Disconnect front washer tube C check valve.
12. Remove front washer tube D.
a. Disconnect front washer tube D from the cowl top cover.
b. Disconnect front washer tube D check valve.
8.
9.
H
I
J
K
WW
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• When installing front washer tube C to the check valve, install
to portion (B: RH side).
• When installing front washer tube D to the check valve, install
to portion (A: LH side).
M
N
O
JMLIA2154ZZ
REAR WASHER TUBE
REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
Fully open hood assembly.
Remove fender protector RH (front). Refer to EXT-22, "Removal and Installation".
Disconnect rear washer tube A from the front & rear washer pump.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-61
2012 QUEST
P
WASHER NOZZLE & TUBE
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
4. Remove front kicking plate and rear kicking plate. Refer to INT-21, "KICKING PLATE : Removal and
Installation".
5. Remove luggage side lower finisher and back pillar garnish. Refer to INT-26, "BACK PILLAR GARNISH :
Removal and Installation".
6. Remove third assist grip (LH and RH), and then remove headlining assembly rear clips.
Refer to INT-34, "Removal and Installation".
7. Slightly lower the headlining assembly (1) rear and secure work
space.
8. Disconnect rear washer tube B (3) from joint B (2).
JMLIA2166ZZ
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Remove back door upper finisher. Refer to INT-48, "BACK DOOR UPPER FINISHER : Removal and
Installation".
Disconnect rear washer tube C from the rear washer nozzle. Refer to WW-57, "WASHER NOZZLE :
Removal and Installation".
Remove rear washer tube mounting clips (A) from the Vehicle.
Remove rear washer tube mounting clips from the rear washer tube.
Remove rear washer tube from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Revision: 2011 September
WW-62
2012 QUEST
WASHER LEVEL SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
WASHER LEVEL SWITCH
A
Removal and Installation
INFOID:0000000007492466
The washer level switch must be replaced together with the washer tank as an assembly.
Refer to WW-51, "Removal and Installation".
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
WW
M
N
O
P
Revision: 2011 September
WW-63
2012 QUEST
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION >
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
Exploded View
INFOID:0000000007492467
Refer to BCS-83, "Exploded View".
Revision: 2011 September
WW-64
2012 QUEST